Financial Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting Simple Book Publishing Thu, 19 Sep 2024 14:56:26 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.4.3 Discussion: Financial Statement Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-financial-statement-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-financial-statement-analysis/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Financial Statement Analysis link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Coca Cola FSA https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-coca-cola-fsa/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-coca-cola-fsa/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Coca Cola FSA

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting it Together: Financial Statement Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-financial-statement-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-financial-statement-analysis/ Read more »]]> The following summarized financial statements for Ford Motor Company were downloaded from Morningstar into an Excel spreadsheet and then reformatted slightly and double checked against the audited financial statements:

Ford Motor Company 2017 2018 2019
in millions
Total Revenue $ 156,776 $ 160,338 $ 155,900
Cost of Goods and Services 131,322 136,269 134,693
Gross Profit Single line25,454 Single line24,069 Single line21,207
Subcategory, Operating Expenses Single line Single line Single line
      Selling, General and Administrative Expenses 11,527 11,403 11,161
      Other Income/Expense, Operating 9,114 9,463 9,472
Total Operating Expenses Single line20,641 Single line20,866 Single line20,633
Total Operating Profit/Loss Single line4,813 Single line3,203 Single line574
Subcategory, Non-Operating Income/Expenses, Total
      Interest Expense Net of Capitalized Interest (1,133) (1,228) (1,049)
      Interest Income 461 700 809
      Gain/Loss on Investments and Other Financial Instruments (22) 115 144
      Share of Profit and Interest from Associates 1,208 165 52
      Gain/Loss on Extinguishment of Debt 0 0 (55)
      Other Income/Expense, Non-Operating 2,821 1,390 (1,115)
Pretax Income Single line8,148 Single line4,345 Single line(640)
Provision for Income Tax (520) (650) 724
Net Income from Continuing Operations Single line7,628 Single line3,695 Single line84
Non-Controlling/Minority Interests (26) (18) (37)
Net Income after Non-Controlling/Minority Interests Single line$ 7,602Double line Single line$ 3,677Double line Single line$ 47Double line

You can see there is a lot of information here, but just looking at the bottom line without any statistical analysis, we can see that Net Income has been decreasing. In fact, using 2017 as a baseline, we can see that Net Income from Continuing Operations decreased by $3.933 billion from 2017 to 2018, a decrease of 51.56%, and then decreased again from $3.695 billion in 2018 to a measly $84 million in 2019. That’s a decrease of 97.73% from 2018 to 2019, and a decrease of 98.9% from 2017 to 2019.

A view of an office building at night. The view allows for a look inside of the offices through the windows.It’s fairly easy to see that Pretax Income dropped in half (a 50% reduction) from 2017 to 2018 and then by more than 100% from 2018 to 2019 (from $4.345 billion to a loss of $640 million).

Interestingly, if we go look at operating expenses, we see them fairly stable at just under $20 billion for each year. Revenue was declining, but not dramatically (well, I suppose a drop of a billion dollars from 2017 to 2019 could be dramatic if you just look at the nominal drop, but it’s only a drop of 0.56%, which is about half a percent).

We see the cost of goods sold going up slightly, and the combination of declining sales and the increasing cost of goods and services is driving the overall gross profit down, which is affecting operating income. The other significant item that changed between 2018 and 2019 was Other Income/Expense, Non-Operating, which went from an income item of $2.821 billion in 2018 to an expense of $1.115 billion in 2019. Some digging into the disclosure section of Ford’s annual report (specifically Note 5 on page FS-20), along with press releases and other public information, reveals that Ford recalculated it’s defined benefit pension plan costs and, under GAAP, recognized an additional expense of almost $2 billion in 2019 for that line item that was previously showing as an income source (likely due to higher-than-expected market returns).

The point is that a horizontal analysis like this can reveal trends and hot spots that need more research.

Let’s look at the exact same data in a common size format. This is essentially a combination of an intracompany vertical and a horizontal analysis:

Ford Motor Company 2017 2018 2019
Total Revenue 100.00% 100.00% 100.00%
Cost of Goods and Services 83.76% 84.99% 86.40%
Gross Profit Single line16.24% Single line15.01% Single line13.60%
Subcategory, Operating Expenses Single line Single line Single line
      Selling, General and Administrative Expenses 7.35% 7.11% 7.16%
      Other Income/Expense, Operating 5.77% 5.90% 6.08%
Total Operating Expenses Single line13.12% Single line13.01% Single line13.23%
Total Operating Profit/Loss Single line3.11% Single line2.00% Single line0.37%
Subcategory, Non-Operating Income/Expenses, Total
      Interest Expense Net of Capitalized Interest -0.76% -0.77% -0.67%
      Interest Income 0.29% 0.44% 0.52%
      Gain/Loss on Investments and Other Financial Instruments -0.01% 0.07% 0.09%
      Share of Profit and Interest from Associates 0.77% 0.10% 0.03%
      Gain/Loss on Extinguishment of Debt 0.00% 0.00% -0.04%
      Other Income/Expense, Non-Operating 1.80% 0.87% -0.72%
Pretax Income Single line5.20% Single line2.71% Single line-0.41%
Provision for Income Tax -0.26% -0.41% 0.46%
Net Income from Continuing Operations 4.95% 2.30% 0.05%
Non-Controlling/Minority Interests -0.02% -0.01% -0.02%
Net Income after Non-Controlling/Minority Interests Single line4.93%Double line Single line2.29%Double line Single line0.03%Double line

You can see the gross profit percentage declining, as cost of goods sold as a percentage of sales increases:

Ford Motor Company 2017 2018 2019
Total Revenue 100.00% 100.00% 100.00%
Cost of Goods and Services 83.76% 84.99% 86.40%
Gross Profit 16.24% 15.01% 13.60%

For every dollar in sales in 2017, the product cost was about 84 cents, and by 2019 the product cost for every dollar in sales had gone up to 86 cents, driving the margin down to about 14 cents per dollar.

Although operating expenses as a percentage of sales stayed fairly constant, the increased cost of goods sold drove the already thin operating margin down from 3 cents on the dollar to almost zero.

Ford Motor Company 2017 2018 2019
Subcategory, Operating Expenses
      Selling, General and Administrative Expenses 7.35% 7.11% 7.16%
      Other Income/Expense, Operating 5.77% 5.90% 6.08%
Total Operating Expenses 13.12% 13.01% 13.23%
Total Operating Profit/Loss 3.11% 2.00% 0.37%

Before we look at the balance sheet, note that Ford publishes some of its metrics on the company website:

See caption for link to long description.
See the Ford’s financial highlights long description here.

We could (and should) check these against the audited financials, but since they are easily verified, it’s likely the company is not inflating or deflating any of these measures.

We can see that revenue numbers agree with the income statement we downloaded, but we would have to do more research to find out how the company came up with “adjusted” free cash flow and “adjusted” EBIT (earnings before income tax). There is a footnote on that page that states, “Reconciliations of the non-GAAP financial measures designated as “adjusted” to the most comparable financial measures calculated in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) can be found on pages 62 and 63 of Ford’s 2019 printed annual report.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(in millions)
Description December 31, 2018 December 31, 2019
Subcategory, ASSETS
Cash and cash equivalents (Note 9) $     16,718 $     17,504
Marketable securities (Note 9) 17,233 17,147
Ford Credit finance receivables, net (Note 10) 54,353 53,651
Inventories (Note 12) 11,220 10,786
Assets held for sale (Note 10 and Note 24) 2,383
Other assets 3,930 3,339
      Total current assets Single line
114,649
Single line
114,047
Ford Credit finance receivables, net (Note 10) 55,544 53,703
Net investment in operating lease (Note 13) 29,119 29,230
Equity in net assets of affiliated companies (Note 15) 2,709 2,519
Deferred income taxes (Note 7) 10,412 11,863
Other assets 7,929 10,706
      Total assets Single line
$      256,540Double line
Single line
$      258,537Double line

 

Let’s take a look at assets from the annual report:

From this information, we could calculate inventory turnover for 2019:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{Cost of Goods Sold}}{\text{Average Inventory}}=\dfrac{134,693,000,000}{\frac{11,220,000,000 + 10,786,000,000}{2}}[/latex]

It’s easier to drop all of those zeros, so

[latex]\dfrac{134,693}{\frac{22,006}{2}}=\dfrac{134,693}{\frac{11,220+10,786}{2}}=\dfrac{134,693}{11,003}=12.24[/latex]

Inventory turns over 12.24 times per year, or about once a month [latex]\left(\dfrac{365}{12.24}=29.82\text{ days}\right)[/latex].

For comparison, let’s compute the same metric for General Motors (GM) for 2019.

GM’s Cost of Goods Sold = 110,651 million

Average inventory = [latex]\dfrac{10,398 + 9,816}{2}[/latex](in millions)

Therefore, inventory turnover =[latex]\dfrac{110,651}{10,107}= 10.95[/latex]

[latex]\dfrac{365}{10.95}=33.33\text{ days}[/latex]

Based on just this analysis, it would appear that Ford is more efficient at moving inventory than GM, but not by much. In essence, both companies only hold inventory (including work in process) for about a month.

Assuming that most of Ford’s sales are credit, accounts receivable turnover for Ford for 2019 = Net Credit Sales / Average Accounts Receivable = 155,900 / [(11,195 + 9,237)] = 15.26.

Accounts receivable turn over 15.26 times per year, which is once every 24 days (365/15.26).

The same metric for GM for 2019 = 18.39 times, or just about 20 days, so GM is a bit faster at collecting accounts than Ford.

If we add liabilities into the picture, we can calculate working capital and the associated current quick ratios:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(in millions)
Description December 31, 2018 December 31, 2019
Subcategory, LIABILITIES
Payables $     21,520 $     20,673
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 20,556 22,987
Automotive debt payable within one year (Note 20) 2,314 1,445
Other debt payable within one year (Note 20) 130
Liabilities held for sale (Note 24) 526
      Total current liabilities Single line
95,569
Single line
98,132
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 23,588 25,324
Automotive long-term debt (Note 20) 11,233 13,233
Other long-term debt (Note 20) 600 470
      Total liabilities Single line
220,474
Single line
225,307

 

Working capital at the end of 2019 = current assets – current liabilities:

$114,047 (million) – $98,132 (million) = $15,915 million in working capital, and the current ratio would be 114/98 = 1.16 which means the company had $1.16 in current assets for every dollar in current liabilities. Excluding inventory from the calculation gives us a quick ratio of (114,047 – 10,786) / 98,132 = 1.05, still more than a 1:1 ratio.

The debt to assets ratio would be 225,307/258,537, just slightly less than 1:1. Just looking at the numbers, we see that most of the assets are debt-financed. In fact, using the accounting equation, we would expect shareholders’ equity to be 258,537 (assets) – 225,307 (liabilities) = 33,230.

In fact:

FORD MOTOR COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(in millions)
Description December 31, 2018 December 31, 2019
Redeenmable noncontrolling interest (Note 23) 100
Subcategory, EQUITY
Common Stock, par value $.01 per share (4,011 million shares issued of 6 billion authorized) 40 40
Class B Stock, par value $.01 per share (71 million shares issued of 530 million authorized) 1 1
Capital in excess of par value of stock 22,006 22,165
Accumulated other comprehensive income.(loss) (Note 25) (7,366) (7,728)
Treasury stock (1,417) (1,613)
      Total equity attributable to Ford Motor Company Single line
35,932
Single line
33,185
Equity attributable to noncontrolling interests 34 45
      Total equity Single line
35,966
Single line
33,230
      Total liabilities and equity Single line
$      256,540Double line
Single line
$      258,537Double line

 

Owner’s equity, as predicted, is $33,230 million.

Although we can see there were 4.011 billion shares of stock issued as of December 31, 2019, we can’t calculate Earnings Per Share because we don’t know the shares outstanding. However, if we trust the auditors who have issued an opinion on these statements, we can find the EPS on the bottom of the income statement on the same page and the basis for the calculation in Note 8 on page FS-25 of the annual report, as well as an explanation of Class A and Class B stock.

EARNINGS PER SHARE ATTRIBUTABLE TO FORD MOTOR COMPANY COMMON AND CLASS B STOCK (note 8)
Basic income $     1.94 $     0.93 $     0.01
Diluted income $     1.93 $     0.92 $     0.01
Weighted-average sahres used in computation of earnings per share
Basic shares 3,975 3,974 3,972
Diluted shares 3,998 3,998 4,004

 

On your own, feel free to explore these financial statements and ratios in more detail. You can calculate and compare debt to equity, return on owners’ equity, return on assets, dividend payout ratio (from the statement of retained earnings on page FS-8), and a host of other ratios. You could also perform a horizontal analysis between Ford and GM, or even between diverse companies such as Ford and Home Depot.

Depending on how deep you want to dive, and how serious you are, there are services for which you pay, like Dun & Bradstreet and Reuters that provide current industry averages. Also, there is information widely available through a brokerage or even sites like finance.yahoo.com that can provide comparative information, such as this:[1]

Automobile Companies’ Stock Information
Symbol Name Price (Intraday) Change %Change Volume Avg Volume (3 months) Market Cap PE Ratio (TTM)
TSLA Tesla, Inc. 444.10 +10.10 +2.33% 24.053M 76.507M 413.574B 1,149.84
TM Toyota Motor Corporation 131.88 −0.20 −0.15% 83.504k 168,096 183.432B 8.06
GM General Motors Company 32.42 +0.26 +0.81% 3.932M 14.13M 46.468B 30.69
HMC Honda Motor C, Ltd. 24.12 −0.26 −1.07% 312.519k 661.832 41.617B 4.16
RACE Ferrari N.V. 184.73 +1.89 +1.03% 92.868k 190,260 45.665B 41.19
F Ford Motor Company 7.68 +0.43 +5.98% 71.759M 62.032M 0.603B N/A
NIO NIO Limited 21.67 +0.20 +0.93% 33.483M 108.573M 26.47B N/A
FCAU Fiat Chrysler Automobiles N.V. 12.55 +0.06 +0.44% 929.511k 2.422M 25.418B 5.42

Notice that Tesla stock was trading at almost 1150 times earnings, while Toyota and Honda were trading in the single digits. Ford’s P/E ratio is not being calculated because the earnings are too low, but we could take our most current EPS of $0.01 and divide the price of 7.68 by that amount to get a P/E of 768.

In the above analysis presented by Yahoo Finance, you’ll see the P/E ratio is being calculated in real time on a Trailing 12 months (TTM) basis. TTM uses the past 12 consecutive months of a company’s performance data to report financial figures. The 12 months studied do not necessarily coincide with a fiscal-year ending period.

Obviously, there is much more to financial analysis than can be covered in one module, but the information presented here will give you a good start and a basis for educating yourself about what is possible and will make you a better manager and investor.


]]>
Vertical Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/vertical-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:22 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/vertical-analysis/ Read more »]]>
  • Perform a vertical analysis of a company’s financial statements

 

A vertical analysis of financial statements often reports the percentage of each line item to a total amount. Vertical analysis can be used to compare and identify trends within a company from year to year (intracompany) or between different companies (intercompany).

Intracompany Analysis

On the comparative income statement, the amount of each line item is divided by the sales number, which is called the “base”.

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2019 (%) 2018 2018 (%)
Sales $994,000 100.00% $828,000 100.00%
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 41.6% 393,000 47.5%
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 58.4% Single Line$435,000 52.5%
Subcategory, Operating Expenses:
      Salaries expense $77,000 7.7% $64,000 7.7%
      Rent expense 63,000 6.3% 52,000 6.3%
      Insurance expense 56,000 5.6% 46,000 5.6%
      Supplies expense 49,000 4.9% 41,000 5.0%
      Advertising expense 42,000 4.2% 35,000 4.2%
      Depreciation expense 35,000 3.5% 29,000 3.5%
      Utilities expense 28,000 2.8% 23,000 2.8%
Total operating expense Single Line348,000 35.0% Single Line290,000 35.0%
Net income from operations $232,000 23.3% $145,000 17.5%
Subcategory, Other revenue and expenses
      Gain on sale of investments $137,000 13.8% $186,000 22.5%
      Interest expense (55,000) 5.5% (50,000) 6.0%
Income before income tax $314,000 31.6% $281,000 33.9%
Income tax expense 66,000 6.6% 50,000 6.0%
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line 24.9% Single Line$231,000 Double Line 27.9%

On the comparative balance sheet, the amount of each line item is divided by total assets.

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2019 (%) 2018 2018 (%)
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000 9.4% $331,000 9.2%
Marketable securities 248,000 6.3% 215,000 6.0%
Accounts receivable 108,000 2.7% 91,000 2.5%
Merchandise Inventory 55,000 1.4% 48,000 1.3%
Prepaid insurance 127,000 3.2% 115,000 3.2%
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000 23.1% Single Line$800,000 22.2%
Subcategory, Long-term investments:
Investment in equity securities $1,946,000 49.3% $1,822,000 50.5%
Subcategory, Property, plant and equipment:
Equipment (net of accumulated depreciation) $87,000 2.2% $42,000 1.2%
Building (net of accumulated depreciation) 645,000 16.3% 581,000 16.1%
Land 361,000 9.1% 361,000 10.0%
      Total property, plant and equipment $1,093,000 27.7% $984,000 27.3%
         Total assets Single Line$3,950,000Double Line 100.00% Single Line$3,606,000Double Line 100.00%
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000 3.0% $109,000 3.0%
Salaries payable 244,000 6.2% 222,000 6.2%
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000 9.2% Single Line$331,000 9.2%
Subcategory, Long-term liabilities
Mortgage note payable $83,000 2.1% $83,000 2.3%
Bonds payable 828,000 21.0% 745,000 20.7%
      Total long-term liabilities Single Line$911,000 23.1% Single Line$828,000 23.0%
         Total liabilities $1,275,000Double Line 32.3% $1,159,000Double Line 32.1%
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000 2.1% $166,000 2.3%
Common stock, $10 par 83,000 4.2% 83,000 4.6%
Retained earnings 2,426,000 61.4% 2,198,000 61.0%
      Total stockholders’ equity Single Line$2,675,000 67.7% Single Line$2,447,000 67.9%
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $3,950,000Double Line 100.00% $3,606,000Double Line 100.00%

On both financial statements, percentages are presented for two consecutive years in order for the percent changes over time to be evaluated.

Intercompany Analysis

The use of percentages converts a company’s dollar amounts on its financial statements into values that can be compared to other companies whose dollar amounts may be different.

Common-size statements include only the percentages that appear in either a horizontal or vertical analysis. They often are used to compare one company to another or to compare a company to other standards, such as industry averages.

The following compares the performance of two companies using a vertical analysis on their income statements for 2019.

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019
Description Jonick Schneider
Sales 100% 100%
Cost of merchandise sold 41.6% 47.5%
Gross Profit 58.4% 52.5%
Total operating expense 35.0% 35.0%
Net income from operations 23.3% 17.5%
Subcategory, Other revenue and expenses
      Gain on sale of investments 13.8% 22.5%
      Interest expense 5.5% 6.0%
Income before income tax 31.6% 33.9%
Income tax expense 6.6% 6.0%
Net income 24.9% 27.9%

The common-size income statements for Jonick Corporation and Schneider Corporation show that Schneider has lower gross profit and net income from operations percentages to sales. Yet Schneider has a higher overall net income due to much greater gains on the sale of investments.

From an investor’s standpoint, Jonick is better at making money from operations. Schneider may or may not be able to sustain profits from sales of investments. Normally, if you were comparing retail or manufacturing companies, you would be more interested in profits from operations, since that is the core business function. This analysis might lead you back to more a horizontal analysis of Schneider and Jonick in order to determine why so much income is being generated from the sale of investments.

Now, take what you’ve learned and practice your knowledge.

]]>
Practice: Financial Statement Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-financial-statement-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:22 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-financial-statement-analysis/ Let’s practice a bit more.

 

]]>
Horizontal Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/horizontal-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/horizontal-analysis/ Read more »]]>
  • Perform a horizontal analysis of a company’s financial statements

 

Important information can result from looking at changes in the same financial statement over time, both in terms of dollar amounts and percentage differences. Comparative financial statements place two years (or more) of the same statement side by side. A horizontal analysis involves noting the increases and decreases both in the amount and in the percentage of each line item. The earlier year is typically used as the base year for calculating increases or decreases in amounts.

Subcategory, Other revenue and expenses:

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018 Change in dollars: 2018 to 2019 Change in percent: 2018 to 2019
Sales $994,000 $828,000 166,00 20.0%
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 393,000 21,000 5.3%
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 Single Line$435,000 145,000 33.3%
Subcategory, Operating Expenses:
Salaries expense $77,000 $64,000 13,000 20.3%
Rent expense 63,000 52,000 11,000 21.2%
Insurance expense 56,000 46,000 10,000 21.7%
Supplies expense 49,000 41,000 8,000 19.5%
Advertising expense 42,000 35,000 7,000 20.0%
Depreciation expense 35,000 29,000 6,000 20.7%
Utilities expense 28,000 23,000 5,000 21.7%
Total operating expense Single Line348,000 Single Line290,000 58,000 20.0%
Net income from operations $232,000 $145,000 87,000 60.0%
Gain on sale of investments $137,000 $186,000 (49,000) -26.3%
Interest expense (55,000) (50,000) 5,000 10.0%
Income before income tax $314,000 $281,000 33,000 11.7%
Income tax expense 66,000 50,000 16,000 32.0%
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line Single Line$231,000 Double Line 17,000 7.4%

A horizontal analysis of Jonick’s 2018 and 2019 income statements appears above. The first two columns show income statement amounts for two consecutive years. The amount and percentage differences for each line are listed in the final two columns, respectively.

The presentation of the changes from year to year for each line item can be analyzed to see where positive progress is occurring over time, such as increases in revenue and profit and decreases in cost. Conversely, less favorable readings may be isolated using this approach and investigated further.

In this sample comparative income statement, sales increased 20.0% from one year to the next, yet gross profit and income from operations increased quite a bit more at 33.3% and 60.0%, respectively. However, the final net income amount increased by only 7.4%. Changes between the income from operations and net income lines can be reviewed to identify the reasons for the relatively lower increase in net income.

Likewise, the following is a horizontal analysis of a firm’s 2018 and 2019 balance sheets. Again, the amount and percentage differences for each line are listed in the final two columns and can be used to target areas of interest. For instance, the increase of $344,000 in total assets represents a 9.5% change in the positive direction. Total liabilities increased by 10.0%, or $116,000, from year to year. The change in total stockholders’ equity of $228,000 is a 9.3% increase. There seems to be a relatively consistent overall increase throughout the key totals on the balance sheet. Even though the percentage increase in the equipment account was 107%, indicating the amount doubled, the nominal (just the number) increase was just $43,000. This increase in relation to total assets of $3.95 million is only 1% and could easily be just one piece of equipment, or a vehicle.

All this is to say that as with all metrics and high-level analysis, a horizontal analysis like this is a way to identify areas of concern or even areas where things are going well, but further analysis is needed to determine what is really going on if anything.

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018 Amount Percentage
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000 $331,000 42,000 12.7%
Marketable securities 248,000 215,000 33,000 15.3%
Accounts receivable 108,000 91,000 17,000 18.7%
Merchandise Inventory 55,000 48,000 7,000 14.6%
Prepaid insurance 127,000 115,000 12,000 10.4%
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000 Single Line$800,000 111,000 13.9%
Subcategory, Long-term investments:
Investment in equity securities $1,946,000 $1,822,000 124,000 6.8%
Subcategory, Property, plant and equipment:
Equipment (net of accumulated depreciation) $87,000 $42,000 45,000 107.1%
Building (net of accumulated depreciation) 645,000 581,000 64,000 11.0%
Land 361,000 361,000
      Total property, plant and equipment $1,093,000 $984,000 109,000 11.1%
         Total assets Single Line$3,950,000Double Line Single Line$3,606,000Double Line 344,000 9.5%
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000 $109,000 11,000 10.1%
Salaries payable 244,000 222,000 22,000 9.9%
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000 Single Line$331,000 33,000 10.0%
Subcategory, Long-term liabilities
Mortgage note payable $83,000 $83,000
Bonds payable 828,000 745,000 83,000 11.1%
      Total long-term liabilities Single Line$911,000 Single Line$828,000 83,000 10.0%
         Total liabilities $1,275,000Double Line $1,159,000Double Line 116,000 10.0%
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000 $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000 2,198,000 228,000 10.4%
      Total stockholders’ equity Single Line$2,675,000 Single Line$2,447,000 228,000 9.3%
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $3,950,000Double Line $3,606,000Double Line 344,000 9.5%

]]>
Times Interest Earned https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/times-interest-earned/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/times-interest-earned/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the times interest earned ratio

 

The final “gearing” or “leverage” ratio is commonly called times interest earned.

[latex]\dfrac{\text{net income before tax}+\text{interest expense}}{\text{interest expense}}[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Subcategory, Other revenue and expenses
      Gain on sale of investments $137,000
      Interest expense (55,000)
Income before income tax $314,000
Income tax expense 66,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line

For Jonick, net income before tax (NIBT) + interest expense is $314,000 + $55,000 = $369,000. That represents the amount of accrual basis income available to pay interest and taxes and to provide a profit for the business (and by extension, the owners).

Since interest expense had been deducted in arriving at income before income tax on the income statement, it is added back in the calculation of the ratio.

Dividing that amount by the amount of interest expense gives a factor that indicates how much income is available to pay interest on borrowed funds. Let’s do the calculations:

[latex]\dfrac{\$314,000+\$55,000}{\$55,000}=\dfrac{369,000}{55,000}=6.7090909…\approx6.71[/latex]

In other words, Jonick, in 2019, earned, before taxes, 6.7 times the amount of interest incurred.

The number of times anything is earned is always more favorable when it is higher since it impacts the margin of safety and the ability to pay as earnings fluctuate, particularly if they decline.

As with all these metrics, as an investor or owner, or manager, you could devise variations. For instance, a similar ratio could be applied to preferred dividends by dividing net income by preferred dividends in order to monitor the company’s ability to pay those dividends.

[latex]\dfrac{\text{net income}}{\text{preferred dividends}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{248,000}{12,000}=20.7[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Income before income tax $314,000
Income tax expense 66,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Retained Earnings Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Retained earnings, beginning of year $2,198,000
Net income 248,000
Less: Preferred stock dividends 12,000
      Common stock dividends 8,000
Increase in retained earnings 20,000
Gross Profit Single Line$2,426,000Double Line
]]>
Introduction to Comparative Analysis of Financial Statements https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-comparative-analysis-of-financial-statements/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-comparative-analysis-of-financial-statements/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Compare financial statements: intercompany and intracompany

A cartoon depiction of a businessman examining a pie chart and bar graph.Intercompany means between companies, and may also include comparisons to industry averages.

Intracompany means within a single company, and can be either a horizontal analysis or vertical or often a combination of both.

  • Horizontal analysis involves laying out periods of information side by side in order to analyze trends.
  • Vertical analysis looks at line items in a single period as a percentage of some base amount and is sometimes referred to as common-size analysis.

You could take common-size financial statements and lay them out side by side in order to analyze the trends, such as changes in gross profit percentage.

]]>
Debt to Equity Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/debt-to-equity-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/debt-to-equity-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the debt to equity ratio

 

The debt-to-equity (D/E) ratio is calculated by dividing a company’s total liabilities by its shareholder equity:

[latex]\left(\dfrac{\text{company’s total liabilities}}{\text{shareholder equity}}\right)[/latex]

These numbers are available on the balance sheet of a company’s financial statements.

The ratio is used to evaluate a company’s financial leverage. The D/E ratio is an important metric used in corporate finance. It is a measure of the degree to which a company is financing its operations through debt versus wholly-owned funds. More specifically, it reflects the ability of shareholder equity to cover all outstanding debts in the event of a business downturn.

Assets are acquired either by investments from stockholders or through borrowing from other parties. Companies that are averse to debt would prefer a lower ratio. Companies that prefer to use “other people’s money” to finance assets would favor a higher ratio.

In the Jonick example, debt is 1.275 million and equity is 2.675 million.

[latex]\dfrac{1.275\text{ million}}{2.675\text{ million}}=.47663551\approx0.5[/latex]

This gives us a ratio of debt to equity of .47663551, or rounded to the nearest tenth, about 0.5, which could be stated as either 50% or ½.

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000
Salaries payable 244,000
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000
Subcategory, Long-term liabilities
Mortgage note payable $83,000
Bonds payable 828,000
      Total long-term liabilities Single Line$911,000
         Total liabilities Single Line$1,275,000Double Line
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000
      Total stockholders’ equity $2,675,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single Line$3,950,000Double Line

If a company prefers to use borrowed money (leverage) to finance its operations, it would not be alarmed at a 1:1 ratio, or maybe even 2:1 ($2 of borrowed funds for every $1 of owner contributed capital, including retained earnings). Jonick has a ratio of 0.5:1, which could also be stated more clearly as 1:2, which means the company has only $1 of debt for every $2 of owner investment. Looking at this from a total asset standpoint, it means that for every $3 in total assets, $1 is debt financed and $2 is owner financed.

If you think of this in terms of a home purchase of say $300,000, it would mean that you have invested $200,000 of your own money and borrowed $100,000 from the bank. A ratio of 5:1, on the other hand, would mean that the homeowner had borrowed $250,000 and put $50,000 of her own money into the purchase.

So, if as an investor or business owner, you prefer to leverage (use the bank’s money to fund) your business, you would be looking at higher debt to equity ratios. If you prefer not to borrow, like Jonick, you would be expecting lower D/E indicators.

Now let’s practice what you’ve learned.

]]>
Debt to Total Assets Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/debt-to-total-assets-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/debt-to-total-assets-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the debt to assets ratio

 

Variations on the debt to equity ratio include:

  • Debt to total assets [latex]\left(\dfrac{\text{company’s total debt}}{\text{company’s total assets}}\right)[/latex]
  • Equity to total assets [latex]\left(\dfrac{\text{company’s equity}}{\text{company’s total assets}}\right)[/latex]

(These two as percentages should add up to 100%. If they don’t, check your data and your calculations!)

For Jonick, total debt for 2019 was $1.275 million and assets were $3.95 million, for a ratio of .32278481:

[latex]\dfrac{1.275\text{ million}}{3.95\text{ million}}=.32278481[/latex]

That would be about .323 rounded to the nearest thousandths, and converted to a percentage would be 32.3%, meaning that portion of the assets are financed (which is reflected in the debt to equity ratio of 1:2).

We would then expect equity to total assets to be 67.7%. In fact, equity of $2.675 million divided by assets of $3.95 million is .67721519:

[latex]\dfrac{2.675\text{ million}}{3.95\text{ million}}=.67721519\approx 67.7\%[/latex].

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000 $331,000
Marketable securities 248,000 215,000
Accounts receivable 108,000 91,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000 48,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000 115,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000 Single Line$800,000
Subcategory, Long-term investments:
Investment in equity securities $1,946,000 $1,822,000
Subcategory, Property, plant and equipment:
Equipment (net of accumulated depreciation) $87,000 $42,000
Building (net of accumulated depreciation) 645,000 581,000
Land 361,000 361,000
      Total property, plant and equipment $1,093,000 $984,000
         Total assets Single Line$3,950,000Double Line Single Line$3,606,000Double Line
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000 $109,000
Salaries payable 244,000 222,000
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000 Single Line$331,000
Subcategory, Long-term liabilities
Mortgage note payable $83,000 $83,000
Bonds payable 828,000 745,000
      Total long-term liabilities Single Line$911,000 Single Line$828,000
         Total liabilities $1,275,000Double Line $1,159,000Double Line
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000 $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000 2,198,000
      Total stockholders’ equity Single Line$2,675,000 Single Line$2,447,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $3,950,000Double Line $3,606,000Double Line

In addition, investors may calculate specific other leverage ratios, such as debt to fixed assets, or the inverse, which would be fixed assets to debt, or another variation such as fixed assets to long-term debt.

a plus sized black woman sitting at a table in front of a laptop.For Jonick, fixed assets for 2019 were $1.093 million and long term debt was $911,000, giving an approximate ratio of 1.2:1. This is often stated simply as 1.2 or 1.2 times; fixed assets are 1.2 times the amount of long-term borrowings.

Again, the numbers by themselves are not necessarily indicative of the health of a business. They must be assessed in relation to other metrics, in relation to other periods, and in relation to other businesses, industry averages, and expectations.

Now, let’s practice what you have learned.

]]>
Introduction to Measures of Solvency https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-measures-of-solvency/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:18 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-measures-of-solvency/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do:  Calculate ratios that analyze a company’s long-term debt-paying ability

A man working on a tablet with the projection of digital line graphs in the background.

Solvency analysis evaluates a company’s future financial stability by looking at its ability to pay its long-term debts.

Both investors and creditors are interested in the solvency of a company. Investors want to make sure the company is in a strong financial position and can continue to grow, generate profits, distribute dividends, and provide a return on investment. Creditors are concerned with being repaid and look to see that a company can generate sufficient revenues to cover both short and long-term obligations.

In this section, we’ll look at three common indicators of solvency:

  • Debt to Equity
  • Debt to Assets (and Equity to Assets)
  • Times Interest Earned

These ratios that measure “leverage” are also called “gearing” ratios.

]]>
Dividend Payout Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/dividend-payout-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:17 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/dividend-payout-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the dividend payout ratio

 

The dividend payout ratio is the ratio of the total amount of dividends paid out to shareholders relative to the net income of the company[latex]\left(\dfrac{\text{common stock dividends}}{\text{net income}}\right)[/latex]. The amount that is not paid to shareholders is retained by the company to pay off debt or to reinvest in core operations.

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Income before income tax $314,000
Income tax expense 66,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Retained Earnings Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Retained earnings, beginning of year $2,198,000
Net income 248,000
Less: Preferred stock dividends 12,000
      Common stock dividends 8,000
Increase in retained earnings 20,000
Retained earnings, end of year Single Line$2,426,000Double Line

In this example, the dividend payout ratio would be [latex]\dfrac{\$8,000}{\$248,000} = 3.23\%[/latex].

For another useful analysis of dividends, we could calculate dividends per share on common stock:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{common stock dividends}}{\text{common stock shares outstanding}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{8,000}{\frac{83,000}{\$10}}=\$0.96[/latex]

Shares outstanding are usually disclosed on the face of the financial statements, but in the case of Jonick, we can figure out the number of shares outstanding even though it isn’t disclosed overtly, by dividing the common stock dollar amount by the par value per share given ($83,000 in common stock with a $10 par value would be 8,300 shares issued and outstanding).

Jonick Company
Comparative Retained Earnings Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Retained earnings, beginning of year $2,198,000
Net income 248,000
Less: Preferred stock dividends 12,000
      Common stock dividends 8,000
Increase in retained earnings 20,000
Retained earnings, end of year Single Line$2,426,000Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000
      Total stockholders’ equity $2,675,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single Line$3,950,000Double Line

Therefore, $8,000 in dividends equates to an annual dividend payout of $0.96 per share.

If this was a publicly traded company or if there was a readily available market value per share (e.g. an offer to buy the company on the table or a recent purchase), we could also calculate the dividend yield by dividing the dividend per share by the market price per share.

For this example, assume we have an established market price per share of $70.

With a dividend payout of $0.96 and a market price of $70, the dividend yield would be [latex]\dfrac{.96}{70} = 0.01371429…[/latex] or approximately 1.4%.

For an investor looking for income, rather than growth, this number would allow a comparison between different alternatives. For instance, if low-risk tax-exempt municipal bonds were paying 2%, an investor might opt for the bonds over an investment in the stock.

Now, let’s practice what you’ve learned.

]]>
Free Cash Flow https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/free-cash-flow/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:17 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/free-cash-flow/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate free cash flow

 

Free cash flow (FCF) represents the cash a company generates after accounting for cash outflows to support operations and maintain its capital assets.

The formula for free cash flow is:

[latex]\text{operating cash flow}-\text{capital expenditures}​[/latex]

Assume the following statement of cash flows for Jonick Company:

Jonick Company
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended December 31, 2019
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net income $ 248,000
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 35,000
Increase in current assets (36,000)
Increase in current liabilities 33,000
Gain on sale of investments (137,000)
Total adjustments (105,000)
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$ 143,000
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (144,000)
Net proceeds from sales and purchases of investments (20,000)
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(164,000)
Subcategory, Cash flows from financing activities
Long-term borrowing 83,000
Dividends paid (20,000)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
63,000
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 42,000
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 331,000
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$ 373,000
Double Line
Supplemental information:
Cash paid for interest $ 55,000
Cash paid for income taxes $ 66,000

Free cash flow would be negative $1,000 (143,000 operating cash − 144,000 capital expenditures).

Because FCF accounts for investments in property, plant, and equipment, it can be lumpy and uneven over time. Just looking at the balance sheet, we see that Buildings (net of accumulated depreciation) increased significantly from 2018 to 2019. Also, although the mortgage note payable did not increase, the company issued bonded indebtedness that increased cash and may have been used to purchase a new building.

As you can see, metrics like this don’t often give the whole picture. They are most useful to identify hot spots, trends, and opportunities.

For example, take a look at this information for Ford Motor Company:

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Net Income before Extraordinaries $ 7.38B $ 4.61B $ 7.76B $ 3.7B $ 84M

 

Notice net income (before any extraordinary items) has dropped from $7 billion to $84 million. However, after adjusting from accrual basis to cash, operating cash flows have stayed fairly constant.

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Net Operating Cash Flow $ 16.17B $ 19.79B $ 18.1B $ 15.02B $ 17.64B

 

In addition, the company invests in fixed assets at a fairly constant pace:

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Capital Expenditures $ (7.2B) $ (6.99B) $ (7.05B) $ (7.79B) $ (7.63B)

 

And so, Free Cash Flow is also fairly constant, ranging from $9 billion in 2015 to $10 billion in 2019.

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Free Cash Flow $ 8.97B $ 12.8B $ 11.05B $ 7.24B $ 10.01B

 

Free Cash Flow by itself, as with any metric, won’t tell you the whole story. In this case, we can see that Ford Motor Company has cash to use for dividends, debt payments, and other things in addition to reinvesting in capital assets, but we don’t know for sure if that is adequate. We’ll have to look at a much larger picture of the company to determine that.

Variations on Free Cash Flow

A variation of Free Cash Flow subtracts dividends from cash flows from operating income as well as capital expenditures. The resulting number would represent cash available for debt repayment and expansion. You probably wouldn’t want to compare one company’s Free Cash Flow computed after dividends with another company that computes a more traditional FCF, but for an intra-company analysis over time, you could use whichever measure makes the most sense, as long as you are consistent.

Investment bankers and analysts who need to evaluate a company’s expected performance with different capital structures will use variations of free cash flow like Levered Free Cash Flow which is adjusted for interest payments and borrowings, and Free Cash Flow per Share. Some investors calculate a quick estimate of Free Cash Flow by simply adding depreciation expense back to net income to get a rough estimate of cash from operations and from that, they subtract capital expenditures. Again, if all you are looking at is trend analysis, or if you are comparing companies using the same methodology for each, this quick method may be adequate. In any case, it is important to know exactly what you are comparing.

]]>
Earnings Per Share and Price-Earnings Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/earnings-per-share-and-price-earnings-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/earnings-per-share-and-price-earnings-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate earnings per share and the price-earnings ratio

 

Earnings per share (EPS) measures the dollar amount of net income associated with each share of common stock outstanding.

In its basic form, the calculation is net income − preferred stock dividends divided by number of shares of common stock outstanding.

Or the formula: [latex]\dfrac{\text{net income} -\text{preferred stock dividends}}{\text{common shares}}[/latex]

Preferred dividends are removed from the net income amount since they are distributed prior to common shareholders having any claim on company profits.

Shares outstanding are usually disclosed on the face of the financial statements. In the case of Jonick, we can figure out the number of shares outstanding even though it isn’t disclosed overtly, by dividing the common stock dollar amount by the par value per share given (83,000 in common stock with a $10 par value would be 8300 shares issued and outstanding).

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Income before income tax $314,000
Income tax expense 66,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Retained Earnings Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Retained earnings, beginning of year $2,198,000
Net income 248,000
Less: Preferred stock dividends 12,000
      Common stock dividends 8,000
Increase in retained earnings 20,000
Retained earnings, end of year Single Line$2,426,000Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000
      Total stockholders’ equity $2,675,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single Line$3,950,000Double Line

Therefore, for Jonick Company, EPS would be $248,000 in net income minus $12,000 in preferred stock dividends divided by $8,300 outstanding shares of stock = $28.43 of earnings for each share of stock.

Price Earnings Ratio

Earning per share can also be expressed as a price/earnings ratio by dividing the current price per share by EPS.

If this was a publicly traded company or if there was a readily available market value per share (e.g. an offer to buy the company on the table or a recent purchase), we could also calculate the dividend yield by dividing the dividend per share by the market price per share.

For this example, assume we have an established market price per share of $70.

The P/E ratio would be [latex]\dfrac{70}{28.43} = 2.46[/latex], which indicates that the stock is selling at about 2.5 times earnings. This kind of ratio is only good for comparing one stock to another or to compare a stock against an industry trend. For example, in August 2018, the average P/E ratio of the financial services industry was 14.26. You might consider buying a financial services stock with a market price of $50/share and with a P/E of 10 because that stock is trading at 10 times earnings (so earnings are presumably $5/share). All other things being equal, it should be trading closer to the industry average of 14.26, which would mean you might expect the price to come up to $71.30. In other words, a lower than expected P/E ratio might mean that a stock is under-priced.

Again, as with any metric, EPS and P/E need to be assessed in a broader context. Now let’s practice what you’ve learned.


]]>
Return on Equity https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/return-on-equity/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:15 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/return-on-equity/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the rate of return on shareholder’s equity

 

Return on equity (ROE) measures financial performance by dividing net income by shareholders’ equity. Because shareholders’ equity is equal to a company’s assets minus its debt, ROE is considered the return on net assets (as opposed to return on total assets).

The goal of investing in a corporation is for stockholders to accumulate wealth as a result of the company making a profit. The ratio looks at how well the investments of preferred and common stockholders are being used to reach that goal.

The following formula shows how to calculate ROE:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{net income}}{\text{average total stockholders' equity}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{248,000}{\frac{2,675,000+2,447,000}{2}}=9.7\%[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Income before income tax $314,000
Income tax expense 66,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000 $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000 2,198,000
      Total stockholders’ equity $2,675,000 $2,447,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single Line$3,950,000Double Line Single Line$3,606,000Double Line

In our example, Jonick Company shows a ROE of 9.7%, which means the owners, who together have invested about $2.5 million, are seeing the company achieve in 2019 a return on that invested capital of almost 10%.

ROE ratios vary significantly from one industry group or sector to another. For instance, utility companies overall may have a lower ROE but be more stable and less risky, whereas tech firms overall may have a higher expected ROE but the individual stocks may be riskier and more volatile.

Inconsistent profits (e.g. a net loss one year, high profits the next) can skew ROE on an annual basis. The extent of leverage (debt financing) can also affect ROE. As with any measure, this one has to be applied thoughtfully and in conjunction with other metrics.

Common variations of this metric include Return on Common Stockholders Equity (which would treat preferred stock more like debt) and Return on Invested Capital (ROIC). The formula for ROIC is (net income – dividends) / (debt + equity).

]]>
Gross and Net Profit https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/gross-and-net-profit/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:15 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/gross-and-net-profit/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate gross and net profit margins

 

Gross profit is the difference between sales and cost of goods sold.

The gross profit percentage is gross profit divided by sales and measures how effectively a company generates gross profit from sales or controls cost of merchandise sold.

The calculation for gross profit percentage is as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{gross profit}}{\text{sales}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{580,000}{994,000}=58.4\%[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Sales $994,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000
Net income Single Line$248,000Double Line

Similarly, you could calculate a net profit and net profit percentage:

The calculation for net profit is as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{net profit}}{\text{sales}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{248,000}{994,000}=24.9\%[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Sales $994,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000
Net income Single Line$248,000Double Line

The gross profit ratio looks at the main cost of a merchandising business—what it pays for the items it sells. The lower the cost of merchandise sold (or COGS), the higher the gross profit, which can then be used to pay operating expenses and to generate profit.

The net profit ratio shows what percentage of sales are left over after all expenses are paid by the business.

In addition, you could calculate ratios based on operating income, net income before tax, or any other subtotal or line item on the income statement.

Let’s try a few calculations to practice this ratio.

]]>
Introduction to Measures of Profitability https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-measures-of-profitability/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:14 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-measures-of-profitability/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Calculate ratios that analyze a company’s earnings performance

A view of people walking on a boardwalk with the skyline of the city in the background.

Profitability ratios are a class of financial metrics used to assess a business’s ability to generate earnings relative to its revenue, operating costs, balance sheet assets, or shareholders’ equity over time, using data from a specific point in time.

Profitability ratios are one of the most popular metrics used in financial analysis, and they generally fall into two categories—return ratios and margin ratios.

Return ratios offer several different ways to examine how well a company generates a return for its shareholders and include return on assets (ROA) and return on equity (ROE).

Margin ratios give insight, from several different angles, on a company’s ability to turn sales into a profit. For instance, gross margin measures how much a company makes after accounting for COGS. The net profit margin is a company’s ability to generate earnings after all expenses and taxes.

Other ratios that measure profitability (the ability to make a profit) that will be covered in this section include:

  • Earnings per share
  • Price-earnings ratio
  • Dividend payout ratio
  • Free cash flow

In addition, once you get the hang of margin ratios, you could calculate margins on operating income, pre-tax income, or any other point on the income statement relative to sales or some other base, depending on what you are trying to analyze.

For most profitability ratios, having a higher value relative to a competitor’s ratio or relative to the same ratio from a previous period indicates that the company is doing well. Profitability ratios are most useful when compared to similar companies, the company’s own history, or average ratios for the company’s industry.

]]>
Return on Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/return-on-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:14 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/return-on-assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the rate of return on total assets

 

Return on assets measures how effectively a company uses its assets to generate income. It is roughly equivalent to an investor’s overall portfolio rate of return.

To calculate return on assets, add interest expense back to net income, and divide by average total assets.

[latex]\dfrac{\text{interest expense} + \text{net income}}{\text{average total assets}}[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019
Subcategory, Other revenue and expenses
      Gain on sale of investments $137,000
      Interest expense (55,000)
Income before income tax $314,000
Income tax expense 66,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Assets
      Total current assets $911,000 $800,000
Subcategory, Long-term investments:
Investment in equity securities $1,946,000 $1,822,000
Subcategory, Property, plant and equipment:
      Total property, plant and equipment $1,093,000 $984,000
         Total assets Single Line$3,950,000Double Line Single Line$3,606,000Double Line

In our hypothetical example, net income is $248,000. Interest expense relates to financed assets, and it is added back to net income since how the assets are paid for should be irrelevant. This also makes the calculation more comparable between companies that use debt financing and companies that use equity financing.

Adding back $55,000 in interest expense gives us $303,000 in investment income, divided by $3,778,000—the average of beginning and ending total assets [latex]=\dfrac{\left(3,950,000+3,606,000\right)}{2}[/latex]—equals a rate of return on assets of .08020116 or roughly 8%. The higher the rate of return, the better, and this will vary from industry to industry and also according to current economic conditions. For instance, if the Federal Reserve is using monetary policy to depress overall interest rates, 8% might be a good rate of return. If however, the stock market is returning 10% or better, an 8% rate of return might not be appealing to an investor.

However, as with any high-level metric, this ratio has to be considered both in a larger context (e.g. over a long period of time) and as part of a larger analysis (e.g. other metrics, such as earnings per share or dividend payout may still make this an appealing investment.)

Now that you have learned about the rate of return on total assets, let’s practice your understanding.

]]>
Asset Turnover https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-turnover/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-turnover/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the Asset Turnover ratio

 

The asset turnover ratio can be used as an indicator of how effectively a company uses its assets to generate revenue.

Use the following to calculate the asset turnover ratio: [latex]\dfrac{\text{net sales or revenue}}{\text{average total assets}}[/latex]

Note: Long-term investments are not usually included in the calculation because they are not productivity assets used to generate sales to customers.

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018
Sales $994,000 $828,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 393,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 Single Line$435,000
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Assets
      Total current assets $911,000 $800,000
Subcategory, Long-term investments:
Investment in equity securities $1,946,000 $1,822,000
Subcategory, Property, plant and equipment:
      Total property, plant and equipment $1,093,000 $984,000
         Total assets Single Line$3,950,000Double Line Single Line$3,606,000Double Line

In this case, we’ll reduce total assets by long-term investments. The adjusted long-term assets will be $2,004,000 for 2019 ($3,950,000-$1,946,000) and $1,784,000 ($3,606,000 – $1,822,000) for 2018, and the average of those two amounts is $1,894,000 (($2,004,000+$1,784,000)/2).

Sales of $994,000 divided by average total assets of $1,894,000 comes to 52.5%.

This ratio looks at the value of most of a company’s assets and how well they are leveraged to produce sales. The goal of owning the assets is to generate revenue that ultimately results in cash flow and profit.

The higher the asset turnover ratio, the more efficient a company is at generating revenue from its assets. Conversely, if a company has a low asset turnover ratio, it indicates it is not efficiently using its assets to generate sales.

Sometimes, investors and analysts are more interested in measuring how quickly a company turns its fixed assets or current assets into sales. In these cases, the analyst can use specific ratios, such as the fixed-asset turnover ratio or the working capital ratio to calculate the efficiency of these asset classes.

An illustration of a businessman using his calculator.

While the asset turnover ratio considers average total assets in the denominator, the fixed asset turnover ratio looks at only fixed assets. The fixed asset turnover ratio (FAT) is, in general, used by analysts to measure operating performance. This efficiency ratio compares net sales (income statement) to fixed assets (balance sheet) and measures a company’s ability to generate net sales from property, plant, and equipment (PP&E). The fixed asset balance is used net of accumulated depreciation. A higher fixed asset turnover ratio indicates that a company has more effectively utilized its investment in fixed assets to generate revenue.

The asset turnover ratio should be used to compare stocks that are similar and should be used in trend analysis to determine whether asset usage is improving or deteriorating.

The asset turnover ratio may be artificially deflated when a company makes large asset purchases in anticipation of higher growth. Likewise, selling off assets to prepare for declining growth will artificially inflate the ratio. Many other factors (such as seasonality) can also affect a company’s asset turnover ratio during interim periods (such as comparing quarterly results of a retailer).

Now, check your understanding of how to calculate the Asset Turnover ratio.

 

]]>
Inventory Turnover https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/inventory-turnover/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:12 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/inventory-turnover/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate inventory turnover and number of days sales in inventory

 

Inventory turnover is a ratio showing how many times a company has sold and replaced inventory during a given period. A company can then divide the days in the period by the inventory turnover formula to calculate the days it takes to sell the inventory on hand. Calculating inventory turnover can help businesses make better decisions on pricing, manufacturing, marketing, and purchasing new inventory.

Inventory turnover is calculated as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{cost of merchandise sold}}{\text{average inventory}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{414,000}{\frac{\left(55,000+48,000\right)}{2}}=8.0[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018
Sales $994,000 $828,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 393,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 Single Line$435,000
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000 $331,000
Marketable securities 248,000 215,000
Accounts receivable 108,000 91,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000 48,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000 115,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000 Single Line$800,000

The more often inventory is sold, the more cash generated by the firm to pay bills and debts. Inventory turnover is also a measure of a firm’s operational performance. If the company’s line of business is to sell merchandise, the more often it does so, the more operationally successful it is.

Inventory turnover shows how quickly a company can sell its inventory, measuring that velocity by number of times per year the inventory theoretically rolls over completely. Obviously, individual items will differ. For instance, in a grocery store, milk will turn over relatively quickly (we hope) while Holiday cards may turn over much more slowly.

Meanwhile, days of inventory (DSI) looks at the average time a company can turn its inventory into sales. DSI is essentially the inverse of inventory turnover for a given period—calculated as (Average Inventory / COGS) x 365. Basically, DSI is the number of days it takes to turn inventory into sales, while inventory turnover determines how many times in a year inventory is sold or used.

It’s a relatively simple calculation. Just take the number of days in a year and divide that by the inventory turnover.

In our example, an inventory turnover of 8 times per year translates to 45.6 days (365/8).


]]>
Accounts Receivable Turnover https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts-receivable-turnover/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:12 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts-receivable-turnover/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate accounts receivable turnover and number of days sales in receivables

 

Accounts receivable turnover is the number of times per year a business collects its average accounts receivable. The ratio is used to evaluate the ability of a company to efficiently issue credit to its customers and collect funds from them in a timely manner.

To calculate receivables turnover, add together beginning and ending accounts receivable to arrive at the average accounts receivable for the measurement period, and divide into the net credit sales for the year. The formula is as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{Net Annual Credit Sales}}{\frac{\text{Beginning Accounts Receivable} + \text{Ending Accounts Receivable}}{2}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{994,000}{\frac{108,000 + 91,000}{2}}=10.0[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018
Sales $994,000 $828,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 393,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 Single Line$435,000
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000
Marketable securities 248,000
Accounts receivable 108,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000

The more often customers pay off their invoices, the more cash is available to the firm to pay bills and debts, and less possibility that customers will never pay at all.

A high turnover ratio could indicate a credit policy, an aggressive collections department, a number of high-quality customers, or a combination of those factors.

A low receivable turnover may be caused by a loose or nonexistent credit policy, an inadequate collections function, and/or a large proportion of customers having financial difficulties. A low turnover level could also indicate an excessive amount of bad debt and therefore an opportunity to collect excessively old accounts receivable that are unnecessarily tying up working capital. It may be useful to track accounts receivable turnover on a trend line in order to see if turnover is slowing down; if so, an increase in funding for the collections staff may be required, or at least a review of why turnover is worsening.

Average Collection Period

The days’ sales in accounts receivable ratio (also known as the average collection period) tells you the number of days it took on average to collect the company’s accounts receivable during the past year.

The days’ sales in accounts receivable is calculated as follows: the number of days in the year (use 360 or 365) divided by the accounts receivable turnover ratio during a past year.

A businessman sitting at his desk on a laptop.

In our example, this would be [latex]\dfrac{365}{10} = 36.5[/latex] days on average to collect cash from a sale on account.

This ratio, like any other, is a high-level indicator, designed to bring attention to problem areas.

It is possible that within the average accounts receivable balances some receivables are 60, 90, or even 120 days or more past due that are skewing the average. Therefore, it is best to review an aging of accounts receivable by customer to understand the detail behind the days’ sales in accounts receivable ratio.

Now, let’s check your understanding of this topic.

 


]]>
Cash Turnover Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-turnover-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-turnover-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the cash turnover ratio

 

A cartoon of cash bills and coins.The cash turnover ratio (CTR) is an efficiency ratio that shows the number of times cash is turned over in an accounting period. The cash turnover ratio works most effectively for companies that do not offer credit sales, however, for the sake of consistency, we’ll calculate the ratio for our prototypical Jonick company.

The formula for calculating the cash turnover ratio is as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{Revenue}}{\text{Average Cash and Cash Equivalents}}[/latex]

  • For Jonick, sales for 2019 were $994,000.
  • Cash at December 31, 2019 was: $373,000
  • Cash at December 31, 2018 was: $331,000
  • So the average cash was [latex]\dfrac{373,000+331,000}{2}=\$352,000[/latex]
  • That means the cash turnover ratio for 2019 was [latex]\dfrac{994,000}{352,000} = 2.82[/latex]

The cash turnover ratio indicates how many times a company went through its cash balance over an accounting period and the efficiency of a company’s cash in the generation of revenue. Additionally, the cash turnover ratio is often used by accountants for budgeting purposes.

In this case, over the course of one year (2019), the company generated in revenue almost three times the amount of cash. Another way to look at this is to divide the number of days in the year by the cash turnover ratio to get an estimate of the number of days that it takes for a company to replenish its cash balance. In this case, 365 days / 2.82 times per year = approximately 130 days.

A higher cash turnover ratio is desirable, as it indicates a greater frequency of cash replenishment through revenue. However, it is important to note there is no one ideal cash turnover ratio number. As with other ratios, it should be compared to competitors and industry benchmarks.

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018
Sales $994,000 $828,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 393,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 Single Line$435,000

 

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000 $331,000
Marketable securities 248,000 215,000
Accounts receivable 108,000 91,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000 48,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000 115,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000 Single Line$800,000

The key drawback of the cash turnover ratio is that it does not account for credit sales, which are sales made by customers in which the payment is delayed. The cash turnover ratio is most appropriate for companies that do not offer credit sales. Using the cash turnover ratio for companies that offer credit sales skews the CTR by making it larger than it really is.

Additionally, accumulating cash for future acquisitions skews the cash turnover ratio lower. The CTR is best used if the company’s cash balance year-over-year does not see significant changes.

We’ll cover additional ways to measure a company’s liquidity in the next reading but first, let’s test out your knowledge of CTR.

]]>
Introduction to Operating Efficiency Measures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-operating-efficiency-measures/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-operating-efficiency-measures/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Calculate ratios that indicate a company’s operating efficiency

An illustration of a collage including a piggy bank, a stack of coins, a bar graph, and a sheet with a pie chart on it.

By assessing a company’s use of credit, inventory, and assets, efficiency ratios can help small business owners and managers conduct business better. These ratios can show how quickly the company is collecting money for its credit sales or how many times inventory turns over in a given time period. This information can help management decide whether the company’s credit terms are appropriate and whether its purchasing efforts are handled in an efficient manner. Indicators of efficiency include:

  • Inventory turnover and number of days’ sales in inventory that gauge how effectively a company manages its inventory.
  • Accounts receivable turnover and number of days’ sales in receivables that look at the firm’s ability to collect its accounts receivable.
  • Asset turnover ratio that indicates how efficient a company is at generating revenue from its assets.

There are some other, lesser known and lesser used efficiency measures as well, such as Inventory/Total Assets that shows the portion of assets tied up in inventory (generally, a lower ratio is considered better) and accounts payable turnover, and industry specific metrics, such as a special efficiency ratio for banks that is simply expenses divided by revenue. So, if a bank spent $5 billion and had revenues of $10 billion, its efficiency ratio would be 50%. The lower the efficiency ratio, the more efficient the bank is.

]]>
Current Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/current-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:10 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/current-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the current ratio

 

The current ratio measures the ability of a firm to pay its current liabilities with its cash and/or other current assets that can be converted to cash within a relatively short period of time.

The calculation for the current ratio is as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{current assets}}{\text{current liabilities}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{911,000}{364,000}=2.5[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000
Marketable securities 248,000
Accounts receivable 108,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000
Salaries payable 244,000
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000

Interpretation: This company has 2.5 times more in current assets than it has in current liabilities. The premise is that current assets are liquid; that is, they can be converted to cash in a relatively short period of time to cover short-term debt.

A current ratio is judged as satisfactory on a relative basis. If the company prefers to have a lot of debt and not use its own money, it may consider 2.5 to be too high – too little debt for the amount of assets it has. If a company is conservative in terms of debt and wants to have as little as possible, 2.5 may be considered low – too little asset value for the amount of liabilities it has. For an average tolerance for debt, a current ratio of 2.5 may be considered satisfactory. The point is whether the current ratio is considered acceptable is subjective and will vary from company to company.

Also, the current ratio, like working capital, may include items like inventory and prepaid expenses that are not all that liquid, especially if the company has slow-moving items in inventory (like a yacht builder or home builder). In those cases, the quick ratio or acid test ratio may be better measures of short-term liquidity.

]]>
Quick Ratio/Acid-Test Ratio https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/quick-ratio-acid-test-ratio/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:10 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/quick-ratio-acid-test-ratio/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the common variations of the current ratio

 

The Quick Ratio, sometimes called the Acid Test Ratio, measures the firm’s ability to pay its current liabilities with its cash and other current assets that can be converted to cash within an extremely short period of time. Quick assets include cash, accounts receivable, and marketable securities but do not include inventory or prepaid items.

The calculation for the quick ratio is as follows:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{quick assets}}{\text{current liabilities}}[/latex]

For example: [latex]\dfrac{373,000+248,000+108,000}{364,000}=2.0[/latex]

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000
Marketable securities 248,000
Accounts receivable 108,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000
Salaries payable 244,000
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000

For Jonick, quick assets are cash, marketable securities, and accounts receivable, and so he calculation is:

[latex]\dfrac{(373,000 + 248,000 + 108,000)}{364,000}=\dfrac{729,000}{364,000}=2.00274725...[/latex]

After rounding, we can see that this company has 2.0 times more in its highly liquid current assets, which include cash, marketable securities, and accounts receivable than it has in current liabilities. The premise is these current assets are the most liquid and can be immediately converted to cash to cover short-term debt. Current assets such as inventory and prepaid items would take too long to sell to be considered quick assets.

A quick ratio is judged as satisfactory on a relative basis. If the company prefers to have a lot of debt and not use its own money, it may consider 2.0 to be too high—too little debt for the amount of assets it has. If a company is conservative in terms of debt and wants to have as little as possible, 2.0 may be considered low—too little asset value for the amount of liabilities it has. For an average tolerance for debt, a current ratio of 2.0 may be considered satisfactory. The point is that whether the quick ratio is considered acceptable is subjective and will vary from company to company.

Compare the quick ratio to the current ratio of 2.5. The quick ratio indicates that for every dollar of debt coming due within the next 12 months, there was $2 of highly liquid assets. The current ratio indicates that there was $2.50 of current assets, both highly liquid and slightly less liquid, to cover every $1 of current liabilities.

The quick ratio will always be more conservative than the current ratio.

Most industries should have acid test ratios that exceed 1:1 (indicating a dollar of quick assets for every dollar of current liabilities). However, very high ratios are not necessarily a positive thing. High acid test ratios could indicate that cash has accumulated rather than being reinvested, returned to owners/shareholders, or put to productive use.

]]>
Introduction to Liquidity Measures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-liquidity-measures/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-liquidity-measures/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Calculate ratios that indicate a company’s short-term debt-paying ability

Liquidity analysis looks at a company’s available cash and its ability to quickly convert other current assets into cash to meet short-term operating needs such as paying expenses and debts as they become due. Cash is the most liquid asset; other current assets such as accounts receivable and inventory may also generate cash in the near future.

Creditors and investors often use liquidity ratios to gauge how well a business is performing. Since creditors are primarily concerned with a company’s ability to repay its debts, they want to see if there is enough cash and equivalents available to meet the current portions of debt.

Two hand sticking out from two laptop screens facing each other. One hand is holding a dollar bill, the other is holding a shopping bag.

The most common measures of liquidity are:

  • Working Capital
  • Current Ratio
  • Quick Ratio and Acid-Test Ratio
  • Cash Turnover Ratio

Working capital and the current and quick ratios evaluate a company’s ability to pay its current liabilities.

The cash turnover ratio is an indicator of the number of times cash is turned over in an accounting period and is most relevant for companies that don’t extend credit.

]]>
Working Capital https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/working-capital/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/working-capital/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate working capital

 

Working capital is a measure of a company’s liquidity, operational efficiency, and its short-term financial health. If a company has substantial positive working capital, then it should have the potential to invest and grow. If a company’s current assets do not exceed its current liabilities, then it may have trouble growing or paying back creditors, or even go bankrupt.

Working capital is the difference between a company’s current assets, such as cash, accounts receivable (customers’ unpaid bills) and inventories of raw materials and finished goods, and its current liabilities, such as accounts payable. Working capital reflects the company’s liquidity and refers to the difference between operating current assets and operating current liabilities. In many cases, these calculations are the same and are derived from company cash plus accounts receivable plus inventories, less accounts payable, and less accrued expenses.

The calculation for working capital is as follows:

[latex]\text{current assets} - \text{current liabilities} = \text{working capital}[/latex]

For example, Jonick Company has $911,000 in current assets and $364,000 in current liabilities, so working capital is $547,000. In other words, on December 31, 2019, at the close of business, there was a healthy amount of working capital. In fact, just at a glance, there was enough cash in the bank on December 31, 2019, to pay all of the current liabilities.

It’s important to note that even with a large amount of working capital, some of that is not actually liquid; for instance, salaries and accounts payable may need to be paid off in less than a month, but inventory may take longer than that to liquidate, and prepaid insurance, although considered a current asset, is not actually available to pay current bills (as you may recall, it is an expense that has been paid in advance, which is theoretically the exact opposite of an account payable – an expense not yet paid.)

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000
Marketable securities 248,000
Accounts receivable 108,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000
Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000
Salaries payable 244,000
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000
]]>
Sources of Information https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/sources-of-information/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/sources-of-information/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify common sources of information for financial statement analysis

 

For publicly traded companies, your most reliable source of information for financial statement analysis will be the Form 10-K filed with the SEC that includes the annual report, and the easiest way to find the form is to go to the official company website.

A view from behind of a Ford truck.

For instance, if you are interested in analyzing Ford Motor Company, start by finding the official investor’s page:

From there, look for the Form 10-K or the annual report:

Additionally, there are some services, like Morningstar, that have computed some of the ratios and compiled additional information, and may even allow you to download financial information into Excel or some other format; however, your best source of information will always be the audited financial statements contained in the official annual report.

You’ll find the annual report has three basic sections from which you can glean information:

  • Management’s Discussion and Analysis.
  • The financial statements.
  • Notes to the financial statements.

 

Most of what we will focus on in this module will be the quantitative data that comes from the basic financial statements. We will be looking at the financials from a high-level, using ratios and percentages.

Ratios and percentages are related. In fact, they are simply fractions, stated in different ways.

For instance, say you have five pens sitting on your desk. Two of them are black and three are blue. The ratio of black pens to blue pens is 2:3. There are two black pens for every three blue pens. Another way to look at this is that ⅖ of the pens are black, and ⅗ pens are blue. The fraction ⅖, stated as two-fifths, is really just an expression of a division problem that is: 2 divided by 5. Running the problem in a calculator gives you 0.4.

Often in business, instead of stating a fraction as a decimal (e.g. ⅖ = 0.4), we multiply the decimal by 100 to come up with a “percentage”. The term per cent literally means “per 100” which means to divide by 100. So, 0.4 multiplied by 100 is 40. We state that as 40 percent, or 40%, which literally means 40 divided by 100, which is 0.4.

So, 2:3 and ⅖ and 0.4 and 40% are all different ways of saying the same thing.

  • Ratio: stated as a ratio: 2:3 which means 2 of one thing and 3 of another for a total of 5.
  • Fraction: ⅖ which means 2 of 5 things.
  • Percentage: 40% which means 0.4 which is 4/10 which, reduced to its lowest form is ⅖.

Sometimes a ratio might be stated with just a single number, like 3, which likely means 3:1. Say your soccer team scored 6 goals and the other team scored 2. The ratio is 3:1 (as with fractions, we reduce the ratio as far as we can, so 6:2 becomes 3:1), but you might just say you scored 3 times as many goals. In other words, a ratio expressed as “3 times” is simply 3:1.

What is 3:1 as a percentage?

3:1 = ¾ + ¼. Three divided by four = 0.75. 0.75 * 100 = 75, which is 75%.

In our pen example, ⅖ are black, and ⅗ are blue, which is 5/5, which is 100%. One hundred percent of the pens are either blue or black.

If you had dumped those pens out of a box of 100 mixed pens, you might extrapolate that the contents of the box, if counted carefully, would yield 40 black pens (40% of 100) and 60 blue pens (60% of 100). That may or may not be the truth. It could be that the pens are 50/50 in the box, and it was just some quirk of random selection that landed two black pens and three blue pens on your desk, as well as the fact that there was no way you were going to get two and a half blue and two and a half black. In fact, you could have gotten just one black and four blues, or vice versa, or less likely, five black or five blues. Also, our analysis can not reveal the presence of one or more red or green, or purple pens in the box.

In any case, using ratios, however, they may be expressed, is a useful way of making a high-level analysis of financial information.

]]>
Introduction to Objectives of Financial Statement Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-objectives-of-financial-statement-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-objectives-of-financial-statement-analysis/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Describe how financial statements are used to analyze a business

Businesses publish financial statements to communicate information about their operating performance and economic health. The income statement shows the profitability of a business by presenting its revenue and expenses for a period of time and summarizes its profitability in one final result: net income. The retained earnings statement reports all of the profit a business has accumulated since it began operations. The balance sheet is a comprehensive summary report that lists a business’s assets, liabilities, owner investments, and accumulated profit.

Once the financial statements are available, the next step is to analyze them to glean useful information about a corporation’s performance over time and its current financial health. These insights help business managers and investors make decisions about future courses of action. Areas of weakness may be identified and followed up with appropriate measures for improvement. Elements of strength should be reinforced and continued.

Much of this financial statement analysis is accomplished using ratios that reveal how one amount relates to another. One or more amounts are divided by other amount(s), yielding a decimal or percentage amount. However, no ratio is particularly meaningful by itself; it needs to be compared to something else, such as desired or expected results, previous results, other companies’ results, or industry standards. This comparison lets you know where you stand in terms of whether you are doing better, worse, or the same as what you have expected or hoped for.

For this module on financial statement analysis, we’ll be using the following statements from a hypothetical company:

Jonick Company
Comparative Income Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018
Sales $994,000 $828,000
Cost of merchandise sold 414,000 393,000
Gross Profit Single Line$580,000 Single Line$435,000
Subcategory, Operating Expenses:
      Salaries expense $77,000 $64,000
      Rent expense 63,000 52,000
      Insurance expense 56,000 46,000
      Supplies expense 49,000 41,000
      Advertising expense 42,000 35,000
      Depreciation expense 35,000 29,000
      Utilities expense 28,000 23,000
Total operating expense Single Line348,000 Single Line290,000
Net income from operations $232,000 $145,000
Subcategory, Other revenue and expenses
      Gain on sale of investments $137,000 $186,000
      Interest expense (55,000) (50,000)
Income before income tax $314,000 $281,000
Income tax expense 66,000 50,000
Net income Single Line$248,000 Double Line Single Line$231,000 Double Line

 

Jonick Company
Comparative Balance Sheet
December 31, 2019 and 2018
2019 2018
Assets
Subcategory, Current assets:
Cash $373,000 $331,000
Marketable securities 248,000 215,000
Accounts receivable 108,000 91,000
Merchandise Inventory 55,000 48,000
Prepaid insurance 127,000 115,000
      Total current assets Single Line$911,000 Single Line$800,000
Subcategory, Long-term investments:
Investment in equity securities $1,946,000 $1,822,000
Subcategory, Property, plant and equipment:
Equipment (net of accumulated depreciation) $87,000 $42,000
Building (net of accumulated depreciation) 645,000 581,000
Land 361,000 361,000
      Total property, plant and equipment $1,093,000 $984,000
         Total assets Single Line$3,950,000Double Line Single Line$3,606,000Double Line
Liabilities
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $120,000 $109,000
Salaries payable 244,000 222,000
      Total current liabilities Single Line$364,000 Single Line$331,000
Subcategory, Long-term liabilities
Mortgage note payable $83,000 $83,000
Bonds payable 828,000 745,000
      Total long-term liabilities Single Line$911,000 Single Line$828,000
         Total liabilities $1,275,000Double Line $1,159,000Double Line
Stockholders’ Equity
Preferred $1.50 stock, $20 par $166,000 $166,000
Common stock, $10 par 83,000 83,000
Retained earnings 2,426,000 2,198,000
      Total stockholders’ equity Single Line$2,675,000 Single Line$2,447,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $3,950,000Double Line $3,606,000Double Line

 

Jonick Company
Comparative Retained Earnings Statement
For the Years Ended December 31, 2019 and 2018
Description 2019 2018
Retained earnings, beginning of year $2,198,000 $1,987,000
Net income 248,000 231,000
Less: Preferred stock dividends 12,000 12,000
      Common stock dividends 8,000Double Line 8,000Double Line
Increase in retained earnings 20,000 20,000
Gross Profit Single Line$2,426,000Double Line Single Line$2,198,000Double Line
]]>
Financial Statement Analysis Defined https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-analysis-defined/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-analysis-defined/ Read more »]]>
  • Define financial statement analysis

 

We previously introduced the four financial statements. We discussed how these statements provide information about a company’s performance and financial position. Here, we extend this discussion by showing you specific tools you can use to analyze financial statements in order to make a more meaningful evaluation of a company.

Ratio Analysis

A cartoon man holding a clipboard with a red line pointing upwards with an arrow on the end.Ratio analysis expresses the relationship among selected items of financial statement data. A ratio expresses the mathematical relationship between one quantity and another. For analysis of the primary financial statements, we classify ratios as:

  • Liquidity ratios measure the short-term ability of the company to pay its maturing obligations and to meet unexpected cash needs.
  • Operating efficiency ratios measure how efficiently a firm is paying its bills, collecting cash from customers, and turning inventory into sales.
  • Profitability ratios measure the income or operating success of a company for a given period of time.
  • Solvency ratios measure the ability of the company to survive over a long period of time.

Comparative Analysis

A single ratio by itself is not very meaningful. Accordingly, we will use various comparisons to shed light on company performance:

  1. Intracompany comparisons covering two years for the same company.
  2. Industry-average comparisons based on average ratios for particular industries.
  3. Intercompany comparisons based on comparisons with a competitor in the same industry.

 

]]>
Why It Matters: Financial Statement Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-financial-statement-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:06 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-financial-statement-analysis/ Read more »]]> A group of coworkers sitting around a table.

Financial statement analysis is the process of analyzing a company’s financial statements for decision-making purposes. External stakeholders use it to understand the overall health of an organization and  to evaluate financial performance and business value. Internal constituents use it as a monitoring tool for managing the finances.

Several techniques are commonly used as part of financial statement analysis. Three of the most important techniques include horizontal analysis, vertical analysis, and ratio analysis. Horizontal analysis compares data horizontally, by analyzing values of line items across two or more years. Vertical analysis looks at the vertical effects line items have on other parts of the business and also the business’s proportions. Ratio analysis uses important ratio metrics to calculate statistical relationships.

What we will study in this module are indicators, similar to watching the dashboard on your car.  The speedometer gives you information, as does the temperature gauge and the gas gauge.  Even if the car seems to be running fine, a sudden spike in engine temperature could give you a heads up to coming trouble, and at the garage, a mechanic may run further diagnostics using more sophisticated tools.

What you’ll be learning to do in this Module is run diagnostics on companies using the financial statements.

]]>
Assignment: Kachina Sports Company Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-kachina-sports-company-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:05 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-kachina-sports-company-cash-flows/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Kachina Sports Company Cash Flows

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting It Together: Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]> Just for comparative purposes, let’s take one last look at Rumble Corp.’s statement of cash flows under both the direct and indirect methods.

First, the direct method:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers $ 45,800
Cash paid to suppliers (29,800)
Cash paid to employees (11,200)
Cash generated from operations Single Line
4,800
Interest paid (310)
Income taxes paid (1,700)
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(430)
Subcategory, Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
1,040
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 3,400
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,640
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$5,040
Double Line
Reconciliation of net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790

Next, the indirect method:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(430)
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
1,040
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 3,400
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,640
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$5,040
Double Line
Supplemental information:
Cash paid for interest $ 310
Cash paid for income taxes $ 1,700

The only real difference is that the direct method reports cash flows from operations as if we’d been recording sales, purchases, and other expenses using the cash basis of accounting, which is the advantage of the direct method over the indirect method: the direct method shows operating cash receipts and payments.

A business man sitting at his laptop.The Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 95 encourages use of the direct method but permits use of the indirect method. Whenever given a choice between the indirect and direct methods in similar situations, accountants choose the indirect method almost exclusively. The American Institute of Certified Public Accountants reports that approximately 98% of all companies choose the indirect method of cash flows.

The reason is that the information in it is difficult to assemble; companies simply do not collect and store information in the manner required for this format. Using the direct method may require the chart of accounts to be restructured in order to collect different types of information. The indirect method, as you will see, can be more easily derived from existing accounting reports.

 

See the FASB summary of the statement of cash flows for another summary of everything you have learned in this module.

]]>
Discussion: Facebook, Inc. https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-facebook-inc/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-facebook-inc/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Facebook, Inc. link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Non-Cash Activities and other Required Disclosures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/non-cash-activities-and-other-required-disclosures/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:03 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/non-cash-activities-and-other-required-disclosures/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain required disclosures, including non-cash activities

 

The side view of a white building with windows.

What happens if we purchase a building by signing a mortgage with no cash down payment? Or if we convert bonds payable to common stock, how would we account for these transactions? These transactions do not involve cash but they are significant enough for investors to need to know. We will report them in a separate section at the bottom of the statement of cash flows. For example, assume a company did purchase a $100,000 building by paying $20,000 down in cash and signed a note for the balance of $80,000. This would be reported as follows (note: the $20,000 down payment would be including in the investing section of the statement of cash flows):

Noncash investing and financing activities:
Purchased building for $100,000 by signing a note and a downpayment of $20,000 $80,000

In addition to disclosing transactions that do not otherwise appear on the statement of cash flows (non-cash transactions), companies using the direct approach must supplement the cash flow statement with a reconciliation of income to cash from operations. This reconciliation may be found in notes accompanying the financial statements. For our Rumble Corp. example it would look like this:

Reconciliation of net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash provided by operating activities $ 2,790

 

As you can see, it’s basically just the top portion of the statement prepared using the indirect method.

Companies using the indirect method have to disclose cash paid for interest and income taxes, since those numbers are not apparent on the face of the statement as they were under the direct method.

]]>
Using a Worksheet (Indirect Method) https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/using-a-worksheet-indirect-method/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:02 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/using-a-worksheet-indirect-method/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate the use of a worksheet to create the Statement of Cash Flows

 

In order to ensure accuracy and make the process as efficient as possible, accountants have developed a worksheet process to create the statement of cash flows. We’ll demonstrate that process here using the indirect method because that is its most common use and the indirect method is the most common presentation.

First, we look at the beginning and ending balance sheets:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 5,040
Accounts Receivable 1,750 1,735
Equipment 24,500 24,920
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) (1,565)
Total Assets 26,350 30,130
Accounts Payable (1,007) (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 (500)
Total Liabilities (1,104) (1,734)
Common Stock (12,500) (13,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (14,896)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) (30,130)
0 0

We’re showing credit balances on this spreadsheet as negative numbers (in parenthesis), but different accountants may do this differently. Also notice the December 31, 20X0 balance is presented as the January 1, 20X1 balance. Again, that is personal preference.

We’ll add a template to the bottom of this balance sheet spreadsheet that we will use to capture the changes in cash:

Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets
Decrease in accounts receivable
Gain on sale of equipment
Increase in Accounts Payable
Increase in Wages Payable
Increase in Income Taxes Payable
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities:
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets
Proceeds from sale of equipment
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities:
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash:
Total

And now we fill in the worksheet one line at a time, starting with accounts receivable.

Every debit will have to have a credit. Accounts receivable decreased by $15, so we credit that account on the spreadsheet and debit the corresponding line on the statement of cash flows.

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 24,500
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) (1,540)
Total Assets 26,350 0 15 26,335
Accounts Payable (1,007) (1,007)
Wages Payable (55) (55)
Income Taxes Payable (42) (42)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 0
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 0 (1,104)
Common Stock (12,500) (12,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 0 (26,350)
0 0 15 (15)
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment
Increase in Accounts Payable
Increase in Wages Payable
Increase in Income Taxes Payable
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets
Proceeds from sale of equipment
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 15 $ –

Next, we record the purchase of equipment for cash by debiting the balance sheet line and crediting the corresponding line on the statement of cash flows (cash used for investing):

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 25,080
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) (1,540)
Total Assets 26,350 580 15 26,915
Accounts Payable (1,007) (1,007)
Wages Payable (55) (55)
Income Taxes Payable (42) (42)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 0
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 0 (1,104)
Common Stock (12,500) (12,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 0 (26,350)
0 580 15 565
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment
Increase in Accounts Payable
Increase in Wages Payable
Increase in Income Taxes Payable
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 15 $ 580
Total debits/credits $ 595 $ 595

Next, we know that we sold equipment and recorded a gain on the sale:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 160 24,920
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 100 (1,440)
Total Assets 26,350 680 175 26,855
Accounts Payable (1,007) (1,007)
Wages Payable (55) (55)
Income Taxes Payable (42) (42)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 0
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 0 (1,104)
Common Stock (12,500) (12,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 0 (26,350)
0 680 175 505
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable
Increase in Wages Payable
Increase in Income Taxes Payable
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 165 $ 670
Total debits/credits $ 845 $ 845

Bit by bit, we are reconstructing the ending balance sheet by recording the changes to each account caused by cash transactions.

Accumulated depreciation is the next line on the balance sheet as we work our way from top to bottom. We record depreciation expense as a credit to accumulated depreciation (an increase) and a debit to depreciation expense on the statement of cash flows (which will be an add-back to net income).

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 580 200 26,730
Accounts Payable (1,007) (1,007)
Wages Payable (55) (55)
Income Taxes Payable (42) (42)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 0
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 0 (1,104)
Common Stock (12,500) (12,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 0 (26,350)
0 580 200 380
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable
Increase in Wages Payable
Increase in Income Taxes Payable
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 290 $ 670
Total debits/credits $ 870 $ 870

Then we adjust the current liability accounts:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 580 200 26,730
Accounts Payable (1,007) 32 (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) 80 (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) 18 (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 0
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 130 (1,234)
Common Stock (12,500) (12,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 130 (26,480)
0 580 330 250
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in Wages Payable 80
Increase in Income Taxes Payable 18
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 420 $ 670
Total debits/credits $ 1,000 $ 1,000

The long-term borrowing increased cash and was a financing activity:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 580 200 26,730
Accounts Payable (1,007) 32 (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) 80 (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) 18 (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 500 (500)
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 630 (1,734)
Common Stock (12,500) (12,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 630 (26,980)
0 580 830 (250)
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in Wages Payable 80
Increase in Income Taxes Payable 18
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 920 $ 670
Total debits/credits $ 1,500 $ 1,500

And issuing stock for cash also represents cash provided by a financing activity:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 580 200 26,730
Accounts Payable (1,007) 32 (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) 80 (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) 18 (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 500 (500)
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 630 (1,734)
Common Stock (12,500) 1,000 (13,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) (12,746)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 1,630 (27,980)
0 580 1,830 (1,250)
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in Wages Payable 80
Increase in Income Taxes Payable 18
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 1,920 $ 670
Total debits/credits $ 2,500 $ 2,500

We now post net income to retained earnings:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 580 200 26,730
Accounts Payable (1,007) 32 (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) 80 (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) 18 (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 500 (500)
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 630 (1,734)
Common Stock (12,500) 1,000 (13,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) 2,610 (15,356)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 0 4,240 (30,590)
0 580 4,440 (3,860)
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income 2,610
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in Wages Payable 80
Increase in Income Taxes Payable 18
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Cash Payment of Dividends
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 4,530 $ 670
Total debits/credits $ 5,110 $ 5,110

Dividends reduce retained earnings:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 580 200 26,730
Accounts Payable (1,007) 32 (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) 80 (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) 18 (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 500 (500)
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 630 (1,734)
Common Stock (12,500) 1,000 (13,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) 460 2,610 (14,896)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 460 4,240 (30,130)
0 1,040 4,440 (3,400)
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income 2,610
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in Wages Payable 80
Increase in Income Taxes Payable 18
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Cash Payment of Dividends 460
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash
Total $ 4,530 $ 1,130
Total debits/credits $ 5,570 $ 5,570

And the final step is to post the change in cash:

RUMBLE CORP
Spreadsheet for Statement of Cash Flows
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Panel A – Balance Sheet 1/1/X1 Transaction Analysis 12/31/X1
Debit Credit
Cash 1,640 3,400 5,040
Accounts Receivable 1,750 15 1,735
Equipment 24,500 580 60 25,020
Accumulated Depreciation (1,540) 125 (1,665)
Total Assets 26,350 3,980 200 30,130
Accounts Payable (1,007) 32 (1,039)
Wages Payable (55) 80 (135)
Income Taxes Payable (42) 18 (60)
Note Payable – Long Term 0 500 (500)
Total Liabilities (1,104) 0 630 (1,734)
Common Stock (12,500) 1,000 (13,500)
Retained Earnings (12,746) 460 2,610 (14,896)
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity (26,350) 460 4,240 (30,130)
0 4,440 4,440 0
Panel B – Statement of Cash Flows
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income 2,610
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment 90
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in Wages Payable 80
Increase in Income Taxes Payable 18
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
Cash Paid for Acquisition of Plant Assets 580
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net Cash Used for Investing Activities
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Cash Payment of Dividends 460
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash 3,400
Total $ 4,530 $ 4,530
Total debits/credits $ 8,970 $ 8,970

And now the numbers are all in place, everything is accounted for, and all we have to do is place the numbers into the proper format along with some supplemental information we’ll have to get from the general ledger:

Subcategory, Cash flows from financing activities

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(430)
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
1,040
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 3,400
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,640
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$5,040
Double Line
Supplemental information:
Cash paid for interest $ 310
Cash paid for income taxes $ 1,700

Congratulations! You’ve now worked all the way through the worksheet and created the Statement of Cash Flows.

]]>
Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:01 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare a Statement of Cash Flows in proper form (both direct and indirect)

 

In previous sections, we’ve compiled the individual sections of the statement of cash flows for Rumble Corp. so now let’s put them all together and add one final step – the reconciliation of beginning and ending cash and cash equivalents:

Subcategory, Cash flows from financing activities

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(430)
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
1,040
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 3,400
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,640
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$5,040
Double Line
Supplemental information:
Cash paid for interest $ 310
Cash paid for income taxes $ 1,700

Notice how the three pieces fit together and reconcile the change in beginning and ending cash from the balance sheet:

RUMBLE CORP
Balance Sheets
As of
Description Amount Total
In millions
Panel A – Balance Sheet 12/31/X1 12/31/X0
Cash $5,040 $1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,735 1,750
Equipment 24,920 24,500
Accumulated Depreciation (1,565) (1,540)
Total Assets Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line
Accounts Payable $1,039 $1,007
Wages Payable 135 55
Income Taxes Payable 60 42
Note Payable – Long Term 500 0
Total Liabilities Single line
1,734
Single line
1,104
Common Stock 13,500 12,500
Retained Earnings 14,896 12,746
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line

If all the steps were done correctly, the bottom line of the statement of cash flows will equal the current cash balance on the balance sheet.


]]>
Practice: Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:01 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/
  • Prepare a Statement of Cash Flows in Proper Form (both direct and indirect)

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Introduction to Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:49:00 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Prepare a Statement of Cash Flows

A person typing on a keyboard.

Accountants follow specific procedures when preparing a statement of cash flows. After determining the change in cash, the first step in preparing the statement of cash flows is to calculate the cash flows from operating activities, using either the direct or indirect method. The second step is to analyze all of the noncurrent accounts and additional data for changes resulting from investing and financing activities. The third step is to arrange the information gathered in steps 1 and 2 into the proper format for the statement of cash flows.

In this section, we’ll take the three parts of the Rumble Corp. statement of cash flows and put them together, and then we’ll review the systematic process that we accountants use to compile the statement.

]]>
Cash Flows from Investing https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-investing/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-investing/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate cash flows from investing activities

 

Investing activities would include any changes to long-term assets including fixed assets (also called property, plant, and equipment), long-term investments in notes receivable, or stocks or bonds of other companies, and intangible assets (patents, trademarks, etc.). Where would we find this information? We would look on the balance sheet. If there was a change in any long-term asset (increase or decrease during the year), we need to account for that item in the Investing section. For our purposes, we will use the balance sheet and any additional information provided to us.

Two business associates shaking hands with dollar bills falling in the background.

When analyzing the investing section, a negative cash flow is not necessarily a bad thing — you would need to look into the individual items of the investing section. We could have a negative cash flow if we purchased a new building for cash but this would be a good thing for our company and should not be determined to be bad since the cash flow from investing could be negative. Same if the reverse were true. What if we sold all of our long-term assets and did not purchase any new assets? Would this be a good thing for our company since we have a positive cash flow or a signal that something is going very wrong?

Here is the balance sheet for Rumble Corp.:

RUMBLE CORP
Balance Sheets
As of
Description Amount Total
In millions
Panel A – Balance Sheet 12/31/X1 12/31/X0
Cash $5,040 $1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,735 1,750
Equipment 24,920 24,500
Accumulated Depreciation (1,565) (1,540)
Total Assets Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line
Accounts Payable $1,039 $1,007
Wages Payable 135 55
Income Taxes Payable 60 42
Note Payable – Long Term 500 0
Total Liabilities Single line
1,734
Single line
1,104
Common Stock 13,500 12,500
Retained Earnings 14,896 12,746
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line

Purchases of equipment are investing activities. We would know from an analysis of the general ledger that there were both increases and decreases in the equipment account(s).

That account decreased by the cost basis of the assets we sold at a gain that had a cost basis of $160 and increased by new purchases of $580. Thus, the net increase of $420.

Let’s look at that calculation of the gain on sale of assets:

Cost basis $     160
Less accumulated depreciation 100
Book value 60
Proceeds from sale 150
Gain on sale of assets $   90

Proceeds from the sale of assets are cash flows FROM investing activities.

Therefore, the investing section of the statement of cash flows for Rumble Corp. would look like this:

Description Amount Total
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150Single Line Single Line
Net cash used in investing activities (430)

The net change in the fixed asset accounts was an increase of $430, but that corresponds to a decrease in cash. If we had financed these purchases, we would have to disclose the non-cash portion of the increase in the fixed asset accounts in a supplementary disclosure.

]]>
Cash Flows From Financing https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-financing/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-financing/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate cash flows from financing activities

 

Financing activities would include any changes to long-term liabilities (and short-term notes payable from the bank) and equity accounts (common stock, paid in capital accounts, treasury stock, etc.). We would get most of the information from the balance sheet, but it may be necessary to use the Statement of Retained Earnings as well for any information on dividends. As with investing, if there has been a change in a long-term liability or equity (increase or decrease during the year), we must account for the item in the Financing section of the statement of cash flows.

When analyzing the financing section, just like with investing, a negative cash flow is not necessarily a bad thing and a positive cash flow is not always a good thing. Once again, you need to look at the transactions themselves to help you decide how the positive or negative cash flow would affect the company.

To summarize our investing and financing sections, review this chart (remember, use the wording “provided” if positive cash flow and “used” if negative cash flow):

Cash flows from Investing activities:
+ cash received from sale of long-term assets
– cash paid for purchase of new long-term assets
Net cash provided (used) by Investing Activities
Cash flows from Financing activities:
+ cash received from long-term liabilities
– cash paid on  long-term liabilities
+ cash received from issuing stock
– cash paid for dividends
– cash paid to purchase treasury stock
Net cash provided (used) by Financing Activities

Here is the balance sheet for Rumble Corp.:

RUMBLE CORP
Balance Sheets
As of
Description Amount Total
In millions
Panel A – Balance Sheet 12/31/X1 12/31/X0
Cash $5,040 $1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,735 1,750
Equipment 24,920 24,500
Accumulated Depreciation (1,565) (1,540)
Total Assets Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line
Accounts Payable $1,039 $1,007
Wages Payable 135 55
Income Taxes Payable 60 42
Note Payable – Long Term 500 0
Total Liabilities Single line
1,734
Single line
1,104
Common Stock 13,500 12,500
Retained Earnings 14,896 12,746
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line

We’ve now accounted for the changes in all of the accounts except long (and short) term debt and changes in common stock. Those changes are considered financing activities. For Rumble Corp., we see an increase in long-term debt of $500 and an increase in common stock of $1,000. Once again, we need to dive into the accounting records to see what the changes are because the $500 increase in debt could have been due to $600 in borrowing and $100 in repayment, but let’s assume for purposes of this example that the company borrowed $500 on a long-term note and issued additional stock that brought in $1,000 in new capital.

In addition, the company paid out dividends in the amount of $460, which is also considered a financing activity.

The financing section of our statement of cash flows would look like this:

Description Amount Total
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)Single Line Single Line
Net cash used in investing activities 1,040
Here is a short video review:You can view the transcript for “Cash Flow Statement: Investing and Financing Activities (Financial Accounting Tutorial #70)” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Cash Flows from Operations (Indirect Method) https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-operations-indirect-method/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:58 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-operations-indirect-method/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify Cash Flows using the indirect method

 

The indirect method adjusts net income (rather than adjusting individual items in the income statement) for (1) changes in current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities, and (2) items that were included in net income but did not affect cash.

A pile of one dollar bills.

The most common example of an operating expense that does not affect cash is depreciation expense. The journal entry to record depreciation debits an expense account and credits an accumulated depreciation account. This transaction has no effect on cash and, therefore, should not be included when measuring cash from operations. Because accountants deduct depreciation in computing net income, net income understates cash from operations. Under the indirect method, since net income is a starting point in measuring cash flows from operating activities, depreciation expense must be added back to net income.

Consider the following example. Company A had net income for the year of $20,000 after deducting depreciation of $10,000, yielding $30,000 of positive cash flows. Thus, Company A had $30,000 of positive cash flows from operating activities. Company B had a net loss for the year of $4,000 but after deducting $10,000 of depreciation, it had $6,000 of positive cash flows from operating activities, as shown here:

Company A Company B
Net income (loss) $20,000 $(4,000)
Add depreciation expense (which did not require use of cash) 10,000 10,000
Positive cash flows from operating activities $30,000 $ 6,000

Companies may add other expenses and losses back to net income because they do not actually use company cash in addition to depreciation. The items added back include amounts of depletion that were expensed, amortization of intangible assets such as patents and goodwill, and losses from disposals of long term assets or retirement of debt.

To illustrate the add back of losses from disposals of noncurrent assets, assume that Rumble Corp. sold a piece of equipment for $150. The equipment had a cost basis of $160 and had accumulated depreciation of $100. The cash would be reported in the investing section as proceeds from the sale of a long term asset. The difference between the book value of $60 and the cash received $150 is the gain of $90 which was reported on the income statement but is not a cash item.

Therefore, Rumble subtracts the gain from net income in converting net income to cash flows from operating activities.

The same process would apply to losses on sales of long term assets or retirement of debt. Since the cash will be accounted for in later cash flow sections we want to remove the effect from net income so any accrual-basis losses will be added back to net income.

As a general rule, an increase in a current asset (other than cash) decreases cash inflow or increases cash outflow. Thus, when accounts receivable increases, sales revenue on a cash basis decreases (some customers who bought merchandise have not yet paid for it). When inventory increases, cost of goods sold on a cash basis increases (increasing cash outflow). When a prepaid expense increases, the related operating expense on a cash basis increases. (For example, a company not only paid for insurance expense but also paid cash to increase prepaid insurance.) The effect on cash flows is just the opposite for decreases in these other current assets.

A warehouse aisle.

An increase in a current liability increases cash inflow or decreases cash outflow. Thus, when accounts payable increases, cost of goods sold on a cash basis decreases (instead of paying cash, the purchase was made on credit). When an accrued liability (such as salaries payable) increases, the related operating expense (salaries expense) on a cash basis decreases. (For example, the company incurred more salaries than it paid.) Decreases in current liabilities have just the opposite effect on cash flows. A short term notes payable from a bank would be treated as a financing activity and not an operating activity.

 

Watch the following video example:You can view the transcript for “Statement of Cash Flows: Operating Activities Example – Financial Accounting video” here (opens in new window).

 

To summarize, the indirect method for calculating the operating activities of a statement of cash flows includes:

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:
Net Income
+ Depreciation Expense (from income statement)
+ Losses (from income statement)
– Gains (from income statement)
+ Amortization, depletion (from income statement)
+ DECREASE in Current Assets (other than cash)
– INCREASE in Current Assets (other than cash)
+ Increase in Current Liabilities
– Decrease in Current Liabilities
Net cash provided by Operating Activities

Here is the income statement for Rumble Corp.:

RUMBLE CORP
Income Statement
Year Ended December 31, 20X1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Service Revenue $45,785
Subcategory, Expenses
Wages 11,280
Depreciation expense 125
Other expenses 29,832
Total Expenses Single Line 41,237
Operating income Single Line4,548
Subcategory, Other income and expenses
Gain on sale of assets 90
Interest expense (310)
Net income before income tax Single Line4,328
Provision for income taxes 1,718
Net Income Single Line $2,610 Double line

And the comparative balance sheets:

RUMBLE CORP
Balance Sheets
As of
Description Amount Total
In millions
Panel A – Balance Sheet 12/31/X1 12/31/X0
Cash $5,040 $1,640
Accounts Receivable 1,735 1,750
Equipment 24,920 24,500
Accumulated Depreciation (1,565) (1,540)
Total Assets Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line
Accounts Payable $1,039 $1,007
Wages Payable 135 55
Income Taxes Payable 60 42
Note Payable – Long Term 500 0
Total Liabilities Single line
1,734
Single line
1,104
Common Stock 13,500 12,500
Retained Earnings 14,896 12,746
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$30,130
Double line
Single line
$26,350
Double line

And here is the information we need to complete the cash flows from operations section of the statement of cash flows (all numbers represent millions of dollars):

  1. Depreciation expense was $125 (add back to net income because it was a non-cash expense used to compute accrual basis net income).
  2. Accounts receivable decreased by $15 (add back).
  3. Gain on the sale of equipment $90 (subtract from accrual basis net income because it was a non-cash revenue and the actual proceeds will be reported in the investing section).
  4. Accounts payable increased by $32 (add back).
  5. Wages payable increase by $80 (add back).
  6. Income taxes payable increased by $18 (add back).

We can then create the operating section of the statement of cash flows:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790

Now let’s compare it again to the direct method:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers $ 45,800
Cash paid to suppliers (29,800)
Cash paid to employees (11,200)
Cash generated from operations Single Line
4,800
Interest paid (310)
Income taxes paid (1,700)
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790

Notice that the bottom line is the same, it’s just the method of getting there that is different.

]]>
Cash Flows from Operations (Direct Method) https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-operations-direct-method/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:57 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-flows-from-operations-direct-method/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate cash flows from operating activities by the direct method

 

The direct method of presenting the statement of cash flows presents the specific cash flows associated with items that affect cash flow. Items that typically do so include:

  • Cash collected from customers
  • Interest and dividends received
  • Cash paid to employees
  • Cash paid to suppliers
  • Interest paid
  • Income taxes paid

Looking at only the operating section of our Rumble Corp. statement of cash flows:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers $ 45,800
Cash paid to suppliers (29,800)
Cash paid to employees (11,200)
Cash generated from operations Single Line
4,800
Interest paid (310)
Income taxes paid (1,700)
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790

Unlike the income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet, these numbers are not readily available from the trial balance. However, most reputable accounting information systems do a credible job of tracking these transactions in order to automatically produce the statement of cash flows along with the other required financial statements. If your company’s computerized system does not have that capability, you’ll have to dig into the accounting records to find these numbers, or resort to the indirect method that we’ll study next.

Here is a summary of how the statement of cash flows would be prepared using the direct method:

You can view the transcript for “Intro to Cash Flow Statements | Direct Method” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Introduction to Indirect Method of Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-indirect-method-of-preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:57 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-indirect-method-of-preparing-a-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Understand how a statement of cash flows is prepared using the indirect method

A woman sitting at a desk examining papers.

Cash flows from operating activities show the net amount of cash received or disbursed during a given period for items that normally appear on the income statement. You can calculate these cash flows using either the direct or indirect method. The direct method deducts from cash sales only those operating expenses that consumed cash. This method converts each item on the income statement directly to a cash basis. Alternatively, the indirect method starts with accrual basis net income and indirectly adjusts net income for items that affected reported net income but did not involve cash.

Cash flows from investing and financing are prepared the same way under the direct and indirect methods for the statement of cash flows.

Here is our statement of cash flows for Rumble Corp. prepared using the indirect method:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net income $ 2,610
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
Depreciation and amortization 125
Decrease in Accounts Receivable 15
Gain on sale of equipment (90)
Increase in Accounts Payable 32
Increase in income taxes payable 80
Increase in other liabilities 18
Total adjustments 180
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(430)
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
1,040
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 3,400
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,640
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$5,040
Double Line
Supplemental information:
Cash paid for interest $ 310
Cash paid for income taxes $ 1,700

 
Only the top section entitled “Cash flows from operating activities” is different.

Let’s get started.

]]>
Practice: Elements of the Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-elements-of-the-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-elements-of-the-statement-of-cash-flows/
  • List and describe the elements of the Statement of Cash Flows

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

]]>
Direct and Indirect Methods Compared https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/direct-and-indirect-methods-compared/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/direct-and-indirect-methods-compared/ Read more »]]>
  • Distinguish between the direct and indirect methods of preparing a statement of cash flows

 

Cash flows from operating activities show the net amount of cash received or disbursed during a given period for items that normally appear on the income statement. You can calculate these cash flows using either the direct or indirect method. The direct method deducts from cash sales only those operating expenses that consumed cash. This method converts each item on the income statement directly to a cash basis. Alternatively, the indirect method starts with accrual basis net income and indirectly adjusts net income for items that affected reported net income but did not involve cash.

The direct method converts each item on the income statement to a cash basis. For instance, assume sales are stated at $45,785 on an accrual basis. If accounts receivable decreased by $15, from $1,750 to $1,735, cash collections from customers would have been $45,800, which you could calculate in a T account or in a table as follows:

Beginning balance $     1,750
Accrual basis sales 45,785
Balance before payments 47,535
Less: Ending balance 1,735
Cash payments from customers $   45,800

Here is a hypothetical example of a statement of cash flows prepared using the direct method:

Rumble Corp.
Statement of Cash Flows
for the year ended 12/31/x1
Description Amount Total
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers $ 45,800
Cash paid to suppliers (29,800)
Cash paid to employees (11,200)
Cash generated from operations Single Line
4,800
Interest paid (310)
Income taxes paid (1,700)
Net cash from operating activities Single Line Single Line
$2,790
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant, and equipment (580)
Proceeds from sale of equipment 150
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line Single Line
(430)
Subcategory, Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issuance of common stock 1,000
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 500
Dividends paid (460)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line Single Line
1,040
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 3,400
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,640
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$5,040
Double Line

The indirect method adjusts net income (rather than adjusting individual items in the income statement) for (1) changes in current assets (other than cash) and current liabilities, and (2) items that were included in net income but did not affect cash. We’ll explore this in more detail in a later section.

]]>
Elements of the Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/elements-of-the-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:55 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/elements-of-the-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]>
  • List and describe the elements of the Statement of Cash Flow

 

The statement of cash flows classifies cash receipts and disbursements as operating, investing, and financing cash flows. Both inflows and outflows are included within each category.

1. Operating Cash Flows

Operating activities generally include the cash effects (inflows and outflows) of transactions and other events that enter into the determination of net income. Cash inflows from operating activities affect items that appear on the income statement and include: (1) cash receipts from sales of goods or services; (2) interest received from making loans; (3) dividends received from investments in equity securities; (4) cash received from the sale of trading securities; and (5) other cash receipts that do not arise from transactions defined as investing or financing activities, such as amounts received to settle lawsuits, proceeds of certain insurance settlements, and cash refunds from suppliers.

Cash outflows for operating activities affect items that appear on the income statement and include payments: (1) to acquire inventory; (2) to other suppliers and employees for other goods or services; (3) to lenders and other creditors for interest; (4) for purchases of trading securities; and (5) all other cash payments that do not arise from transactions defined as investing or financing activities, such as taxes and payments to settle lawsuits, cash contributions to charities, and cash refunds to customers.

A cartoon of a customer and a cashier at a store register.

2. Investing Cash Flows

Investing activities generally include transactions involving the acquisition or disposal of noncurrent assets. Thus, cash inflows from investing activities include cash received from: (1) the sale of property, plant, and equipment; (2) the sale of available-for-sale and held-to-maturity securities; and (3) the collection of long-term loans made to others. Cash outflows for investing activities include cash paid: (1) to purchase property, plant, and equipment; (2) to purchase available-for-sale and held-to-maturity securities; and (3) to make long-term loans to others.

3. Financing Cash Flows

Financing activities generally include the cash effects (inflows and outflows) of transactions and other events involving creditors and owners. Cash inflows from financing activities include cash received from issuing capital stock and bonds, mortgages, and notes, and from other short- or long-term borrowing. Cash outflows for financing activities include payments of cash dividends or other distributions to owners (including cash paid to purchase treasury stock) and repayments of amounts borrowed. Payment of interest is not included because interest expense appears on the income statement and is, therefore, included in operating activities. Cash payments to settle accounts payable, wages payable, and income taxes payable are not financing activities. These payments are included in the operating activities section.

Information about all material investing and financing activities of an enterprise that do not result in cash receipts or disbursements during the period appear in a separate schedule.

]]>
Introduction to Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Define cash flows and the purpose of the Statement of Cash Flows

A dollar sign with arrows pointing around it in a circular motion.

Prior to the adoption of FASB statement 95 in 1988, a full set of financial statements included a statement of changes in financial position. Now, instead of the statement of changes in financial position, GAAP requires a statement of cash flows.

A statement of cash flows classify cash receipts and payments according to whether they stem from operating, investing, or financing activities and provides definitions of each category.

The FASB statement encourages enterprises to report cash flows from operating activities directly by showing major classes of operating cash receipts and payments (the direct method).

Enterprises that choose not to show operating cash receipts and payments are required to report the same amount of net cash flow from operating activities indirectly by adjusting net income to reconcile it to net cash flow from operating activities (the indirect or reconciliation method) by removing the effects of (a) all deferrals of past operating cash receipts and payments and all accruals of expected future operating cash receipts and payments and (b) all items included in net income that do not affect operating cash receipts and payments. If the direct method is used, a reconciliation of net income and net cash flow from operating activities is required to be provided in a separate schedule, as well as information about investing and financing activities not resulting in cash receipts or payments, such as buying a vehicle using a loan.

]]>
Purpose of the Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/purpose-of-the-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/purpose-of-the-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the purpose of the Statement of Cash Flow

 

The statement of cash flows provides cash receipt and cash payment information and reconciles the change in cash for a period of time. Cash receipts and cash payments are summarized and categorized as operating, investing, or financing activities. Simply put, the statement of cash flows indicates where cash came from and where cash went for a period of time.

A skyscraper building.

Since cash flows are vital to a company’s financial health, the statement of cash flows provides useful information to management, investors, creditors, and other interested parties. It provides information about the effects on cash of the operating, investing, and financing activities of a company during an accounting period; it reports on past management decisions on such matters as issuance of capital stock or the sale of long-term bonds. This information is available only in bits and pieces from the other financial statements. The statement of cash flows presents the effects on cash of all significant operating, investing, and financing activities.

The statement may show a flow of cash from operating activities large enough to finance all projected capital needs internally rather than having to incur long-term debt or issue additional stock. Alternatively, if the company has been experiencing cash shortages, management can use the statement to determine why such shortages are occurring. Using the statement of cash flows, management may also recommend to the board of directors a reduction in dividends to conserve cash.

]]>
Why it Matters: Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]> Why learn how to prepare a Statement of Cash Flows?

A magnifying glass being held up to a piece of paper.

The main purpose of the Statement of Cash Flows is to report on the cash receipts and cash disbursements of an entity during an accounting period. Broadly defined, cash includes both cash and cash equivalents, such as short-term investments in Treasury bills, commercial paper, and money market funds. Another purpose of this statement is to report on the entity’s investing and financing activities for the period.

Here is a summarized version of theStatement of Cash Flows from page 74 of the annual report of Facebook, Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2012—the year the company went public:[1]

FACEBOOK, INC.
Statement of Cash Flows (summarized)
Year Ended December 31, 2012
Description Amount
In millions
Subcategory, Cash flows from operating activities
Net Income $53
Adjustments to Reconcile Net Income to Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Depreciation Expense – Plant Assets 649
Share-based compensation 1,572
Other adjustments to reconcile accrual basis to cash basis (662)
Net cash from operating activities Single Line
$1,612
Subcategory, Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property and equipment (1,235)
Purchases and sales of securities and other investments (5,789)
Net cash used in investing activities Single Line
(7,024)
Subcategory, Cash flows from financing activities
Cash Receipt from Issuance of Common Stock 6,760
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt 1,496
Other financing (mainly tax effects on share-based activities) (1,972)
Net cash used in financing activities Single Line
6,284
Net Increase (Decrease) in Cash and cash equivalents: 872
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period 1,512
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period Single Line
$ 2,384
Double Line

As shown in the statement of cash flows, this statement reports the effects on cash during a period of a company’s operating, investing, and financing activities. Firms show the effects of significant investing and financing activities that do not affect cash in a schedule separate from the statement of cash flows.

Notice that the statement also reconciles beginning cash of $1.512 billion at January 1, 2012 to ending cash of 2.384 billion on December 31, 2012.

You might note that although net income using the accrual basis of accounting was only $53 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, if the company had been reporting on a cash basis, it would not have been able to deduct depreciation expense or giving shares of the company as compensation, along with other accrual items.  After adjusting for these non-cash expenses and other accrual items, the actual cash generated by operations was $1.612 billion.

Also, from the financing section, of the $6.284 billion generated by selling stock to the general public, it looks like most of that was invested in marketable securities (the long-term borrowing and the purchases of fixed assets more or less balanced each other out.)

So, the statement of cash flows can tell you a lot about a company that the accrual basis income statement may not reveal.

In this module, you’ll learn how to construct and interpret this seemingly complex financial statement, and if you are doing the financial reporting for a publicly traded company, you’ll now have this impressive list of the five common financials:

  • Income statement, sometimes called the P&L or statement of earning
  • Statement of stockholders’ equity, that includes the statement of retained earnings
  • Statement of other comprehensive income
  • Balance sheet, sometimes called the statement of financial position
  • Statement of cash flows
Here is a short video introduction to this topic:

You can view the transcript for “Cash Flow Introduction” here (opens in new window).

 


  1. Facebook, Inc. “Facebook Annual Report 2012.”
]]>
Discussion: Home Depot https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-home-depot/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-home-depot/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Home Depot link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Collins Mfg Stockholders’ Equity https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-collins-mfg-stockholders-equity/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-collins-mfg-stockholders-equity/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Collins Mfg Stockholders’ Equity

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting It Together: Accounting for Corporations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-accounting-for-corporations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:51 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-accounting-for-corporations/ Read more »]]> When they launched the company in 1978, Home Depot’s founders followed a strategy popular among mass merchandisers today and offered a wide assortment of goods, low prices, and good customer service. Its first stores in the Atlanta area were significantly bigger than those of its competitors, which helped drive the company’s initial momentum and positioned its brand as a one-stop-shop for home improvement.

Just a few years later, on September 22, 1981, the company listed 600,000 shares of common stock on the Nasdaq Stock Market at that time under the ticker symbol HOMD and raised $7.2 million. It used that money to build its first megastores, which then gave it the leverage to build more and more.

Over the next 18 years, the company split its stock 13 times. The chart below shows each split, along with how it drove increases in shareholder value.

Split Record Date Payable Date Price Shares you would own if you
bought 83 shares at the IPO
(approx. $1,000)*
3 for 2 01/05/1982 01/19/1982 $21 124.5
5 for 4 04/12/1982 04/30/1982 $17 1/4 156
2 for 1 11/29/1982 12/07/1982 $49 1/2 312
2 for 1 06/01/1983 06/08/1983 $54 624
3 for 2 09/08/1987 09/22/1987 $35 7/8 936
3 for 2 06/14/1989 06/30/1989 $39 1,404
3 for 2 06/14/1990 07/06/1990 $57 7/8 2,106
3 for 2 06/05/1991 06/26/1991 $65 3/4 3,159
3 for 2 06/11/1992 07/01/1992 $68 3/4 4,738.5
4 for 3 03/24/1993 04/14/1993 $59 1/2 6,302
3 for 2 06/12/1997 07/03/1997 $69 1/8 9,453
2 for 1 06/11/1998 07/02/1998 $85 7/8 18,906
3 for 2 12/02/1999 12/30/1999 $102 28,360

In the chart reproduced below, the black boxes labeled S indicate a stock split. The D indicates a dividend. The opening price of the stock adjusted for splits comes out to $0.03 (one share purchased in 1981 is now 342 shares, so the actual opening price was around $10.26.)  In other words, if you had purchased one share in 1981 for $10.26, you would now have 342 shares, and so the cost basis of each share is $0.03.

See caption for link to long description.
See the note long description here. Click here for a larger version of this image.

Home Depot began paying quarterly dividends in 1987. The board of directors has raised the dividend annually since 1987 with the exceptions of 2007, 2008 and 2009, when it took a pause during the housing bust.

So if you had invested $1,000 in Home Depot’s IPO, purchasing 83 shares at $12, by 1999 you would have been holding 28,360 shares because of the stock splits. When the stock hit $275 per share in 2020, you would have been holding $7.8 million worth of stock. Just for the sake of comparison, if you’d put $1,000 into an investment that just kept up with inflation, by 2020 you would have had $2,863.37. If you’d invested that $1,000 in a mutual fund that tracked the Dow Jones Industrial average, it would have been worth about $30,000 by the end of 2020.

This is the power of a corporation, not just as a business model, but as an opportunity for a smart investor to make money. However, for every Home Depot, there are tens if not hundreds of investments that either go nowhere or go bankrupt. The failures are too numerous to mention and fade into obscurity, but even stock in big companies like Ford Motor Company can drop in value. Ford hit a high near $35 in early 1999, and ten years later, after the economic crash in 2008, it was trading at less than $2 a share.

]]>
Balance Sheet Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/balance-sheet-presentation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:50 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/balance-sheet-presentation/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate the balance sheet presentation of stockholder’s equity

 

Let’s take another look at the most current regulatory reports for The Home Depot, Inc. On page 33 of the 2019 annual report, the company reported the following components of stockholders’ equity:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Common stock, par value $0.05; authorized 10,000 shares; issued: 1,786 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,782 shares at February 3, 2019; Outstanding: 1,077 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,105 shares at February 3, 2019 89 89
Paid-in capital 11,001 10,578
Retained earnings 51,729 46,423
Accumulated other comprehensive loss (739) (772)
Treasury stock, at cost, 709 shares at February 2, 2020 and 677 shares at February 3,2019 (65,196) (58,196)
          Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity Single line
(3,116)
Single line
(1,878)
          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Note See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

Let’s take a look at a side-by-side comparison of a sole proprietorship’s owner’s equity and that of a corporation:

Sole Proprietorship Corporation
Capital contributions Common stock, at par
Paid-in capital
Net income less owner withdrawals Retained earnings
Accumulated other comprehensive gain/loss
Treasury stock

It’s unlikely a sole proprietorship will be following all aspects of GAAP. It would be unlikely to include Other Comprehensive Gains and Losses unless a bank or other influential stakeholder[1] required full GAAP compliance. Other comprehensive gains and losses usually arise from changes in market value of short-term investments and adjustments that arise in translating information from subsidiaries that do business in other nations and therefore use other currencies (foreign currency translation).

In short, other than some differences in terminology and technical differences, the basic expanded version of the accounting equation still holds true:

A = L + E, where E = capital contributions − withdrawals + revenue − expenses.

For a corporation, it could be listed as:

Equity = paid-in capital from the sale of stock (par and in excess of par) − dividends and treasury stock + revenues and other comprehensive income − expenses and other comprehensive losses.

One final note: The balance in retained earnings is generally available for dividend declarations. Some companies state this fact. In some circumstances, however, there may be retained earnings restrictions. These make a portion of the balance currently unavailable for dividends. Restrictions result from one or more of these causes: legal, contractual, or voluntary. For instance, a contractual restriction may be the result of loan covenants. A voluntary restriction may be because of a board resolution. A legal restriction may be imposed as part of a lawsuit settlement. Companies generally disclose retained earnings restrictions in the notes to the financial statements.

In the next section, we’ll study the Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity, but first, check your understanding of the balance sheet presentation.


  1. A stakeholder is different from a shareholder or stockholder. Employees, creditors, customers, government agencies, and a wide variety of other interested parties can be stakeholders. This means they have some kind of stake in the company and what it does (for instance, a not-for-profit concerned with the environment could be a stakeholder in a manufacturing firm). A shareholder/stockholder is an owner because they hold shares of stock.
]]>
Statement of Stockholders’ Equity https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/statement-of-stockholders-equity/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:50 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/statement-of-stockholders-equity/ Read more »]]>
  • Recognize the components of stockholder’s equity

 

Any change in the Common Stock, Retained Earnings, or Dividends accounts affects total stockholders’ equity, and those changes are shown on the statement of stockholder’s equity.

Stockholders’ Equity can increase in two ways:

  1. Stock is issued and Common Stock increases, and/or
  2. Business makes a profit and Retained Earnings increases.

Stockholders’ Equity can decrease in two ways:

  1. Dividends are distributed and Retained Earnings decreases, and/or
  2. Business takes a loss and Retained Earnings decreases.

Of course, in the business world, things can be a bit more complicated than that. Take a look at the most current regulatory reports for The Home Depot, Inc. On page 36 of the 2019 annual report, the company reports the following changes to stockholders’ equity:

Single lineSingle lineSingle line

The Home Depot, Inc.
Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity
in millions Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2017
Subcategory, Common Stock:
Balances at the beginning of year $      89 $      89 $      89
Shares issued under employee stock plans 1
      Balance at the end of the year Single line89 Single line89 Single line89
Subcategory, Paid in Capital:
Balances at the beginning of year 10,578 10,192 9,787
Shares issued under employee stock plans 172 104 132
Stock-based compensation expenses 251 282 273
      Balance at the end of the year Single line11,001 Single line10,578 Single line10,192
Subcategory, Retained Earnings:
Balance at the beginning of the year 46,423 39,935 35,519
Cumulative effect of accounting changes 26 75
Net earnings 11,242 11,121 8,630
Cash dividends (5,958) (4,704) (4,212)
Other (4) (4) (2)
      Balance at the end of the year Single line51,729 Single line46,423 Single line39,935
Subcategory, Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss):
Balance at the beginning of the year (772) (566) (867)
Cumulative effect of accounting changes (31)
Foreign currency translation adjustments 53 (267) 311
Cash flow hedges, net of tax 8 53 (1)
Other 3 8 (9)
      Balance at the end of the year Single line(739) Single line(772) Single line(566)
Subcategory, Treasury Stock
Balance at the beginning of the year (58,196) (48,196) (40,194)
Repurchases of common stock (7,000) (10,000) (8,002)
      Balance at the end of the year Single line(65,196) Single line(58,196) Single line(48,196)
            Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity Single line$      (3,116)Double line Single line$      (1,878)Double line Single line$      1,454Double line

——
Fiscal 2019 and fiscal 2017 include 52 weeks. Fiscal 2018 includes 53 weeks
See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

This might seem intimidating, but you now have the tools to figure this out.

Common Stock

First, the changes to common stock are reported as zero, in millions, which means there could have been $499,999.99 of stock issued left off this report because it is immaterial. From the balance sheet, we learn the stock is $0.05 par value. The $89 million (rounded to the nearest million) in stock would equate to 1.78 billion shares (actually reported on the balance sheet at 1.782 billion).

In other words, in fiscal year 2019, there were no significant issues of new common stock. The increase in that account on the statement is $0.

Paid-in Capital

Except, we see paid-in capital in excess of par actually increased a bit in 2019 as a result of issuance of new shares. In Note 6 to the financial statements on page 56, we see there were in fact four million shares (rounded) issued to employees as part of their non-cash compensation. A $0.05 par value would be $200,000, well below the rounding limit on these financials. In any case, the increase to owners’ equity as a result of additional paid-in capital during 2019 was $11.001 million.

These two accounts—common stock and paid-in capital—are the equivalent of the Capital Contribution account we used for a sole proprietorship.

Retained Earnings

Two business associates shaking hands.

As you might expect, the big changes to retained earnings were net income and dividends. Just as with sole proprietorships and the statement of changes to owner’s equity, the big changes were net income and owner withdrawals. As you may realize by now, a sole proprietor decides when to take money out and how much earnings to withdraw, while a stockholder of a corporation has to wait for the board of directors to declare a dividend (withdrawal of earnings).

In short, retained earnings is a company’s accumulated profit since it began operations minus any dividends distributed over that time—just like it sounds: earnings that are retained in the company.

For The Home Depot, retained earnings has been retroactively adjusted for a change in accounting principles. Further information on those adjustments can be found on page 43 of the annual report but were mostly due to adopting ASU No. 2016-02 that recognizes a “right-of-use” asset for certain leases, and ASU 2018-02 that moved $31 billion of certain tax effects from Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income to Retained Earnings (see the next section).

Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income (Loss)

Other comprehensive income includes certain gains and losses excluded from net earnings under GAAP, which consists primarily of foreign currency translation adjustments.

Treasury Stock

In the ten years between 2010 and 2020, Home Depot reduced its outstanding shares from 1.7 billion to 1.1 billion and continues to regularly buy back shares on the open market, reducing overall stockholders’ equity by $65 billion.

As illustrated by this Home Depot statement, stockholders’ equity equals total paid-in capital plus retained earnings minus treasury stock.

Now, let’s check your understanding of this topic.

]]>
Introduction to Financial Statement Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-statement-presentation-3/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:49 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-statement-presentation-3/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: illustrate financial statement presentation of stockholder’s equity

The stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet reports the worth of the stockholders. It has two subsections:

A line graph with an arrow pointing up.

  • Paid-in capital (from stockholder investments)
  • Retained earnings (profits generated by the corporation)

Total paid-in capital is the sum of:

  • Preferred Stock plus Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par – Preferred plus
  • Common Stock plus Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par – Common plus
  • Paid-in Capital from Sale of Treasury Stock.

Since treasury stock is not currently owned by stockholders, it should not be included as part of their worth. Therefore, the value of treasury stock shares is subtracted out to arrive at total stockholders’ equity.

In summary, total stockholders’ equity equals total paid-in capital plus retained earnings minus treasury stock.

]]>
Stock Splits https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/stock-splits/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/stock-splits/ Read more »]]>
  • Recognize the effects of a stock split on the financial statements

 

A stock split is when a corporation reduces the par value of each share of stock outstanding and issues a proportionate number of additional shares. It also may affect the par value and market price per share, reducing them proportionately. However, the total dollar value of the shares outstanding does not change. No journal entry is required for a stock split.

A company has 10,000 shares outstanding. The par value is $16 per share. The fair market value per share is $20. The total capitalization (value of the shares outstanding) is $200,000 (10,000 x $20).The company declares a 4-for-1 stock split. Multiply the number of shares by 4: 40,000 shares are outstanding after the split. Divide the par value by 4: each share has a par value of $4 after the split. Also divide the market value per share by four, resulting in $5 per share. The total capitalization (value of the shares outstanding) is still $200,000 (40,000 x $5).As an investor, if you held 100 shares before the split, you would now hold 400 shares.

Often, if a company thinks the stock price is too high, it will split the stock to lower the per share price.

Between 1981 and 1999, Home Depot split its stock 13 times by various factors, and so each original share ended up being roughly 342 shares, but before we look at that in more detail, let’s check your understanding of stock splits in general.

]]>
Dividends https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/dividends/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/dividends/ Read more »]]>
  • Define dividends and how they are declared and distributed
  • Account for the declaration and payment of dividends

 

Cash dividends are corporate earnings paid out to stockholders. They are payouts of retained earnings, which is accumulated profit. Therefore, cash dividends reduce both the Retained Earnings and Cash account balances.

There are three prerequisites to paying a cash dividend: a decision by the board of directors, sufficient cash, and sufficient retained earnings.

Four dates are associated with a cash dividend.

A calendar with a date circled in red.

  • The declaration date is also referred to as the announcement date since a company notifies shareholders and the rest of the market. The declaration date is the date on which a company officially commits to the payment of a dividend. On that date, a liability is incurred and the Cash Dividends Payable is used to record the amount owed to the stockholders until the cash is actually paid.
  • The ex-dividend date, or ex-date, is the date on which a stock begins trading without the dividend. To receive the declared dividend, shareholders must own the stock prior to the ex-dividend date.
  • The record date usually occurs three business days after the ex-dividend date and is the date on which a company officially determines the shareholders of record, those who owned the stock prior to the ex-dividend date and who are eligible to receive the dividend payment. There is no journal entry on the date of record.
  • The payment date for a stock’s dividend is the day on which the actual checks go out—or electronic payments are made—to eligible shareholders. Shareholders owning the stock on the record date will receive the dividend on the payment date.

Cash dividends are only paid on shares outstanding. No dividends are paid on treasury stock, or the corporation would essentially be paying itself.

An aerial view of the downtown district of a city.

A company may issue a dividend payment to shareholders made in shares rather than as cash. The stock dividend has the advantage of rewarding shareholders without reducing the company’s cash balance.

These stock distributions are generally made as fractions paid per existing share. For example, a company might issue a 10% stock dividend, which would require it to issue 1 share for every 100 shares outstanding.

 

 

Entries for Cash Dividends

When a dividend is declared by the board of directors, the company will credit dividends payable and debit an owner’s equity account called Dividends or perhaps Cash Dividends.

Cash Dividends is a contra stockholders’ equity account that temporarily substitutes for a debit to the Retained Earnings account. Just like owner withdrawals are closed to owner’s equity in a sole proprietorship at the end of the accounting period, Cash Dividends is closed to Retained Earnings.

For example, assume the Board of Directors of Tanya Corp. met on December 10, 20X1 and declared a cash dividend of $.50 per share on 24,000 shares of common stock outstanding (total $12,000) to owners on the date of record of December 31, 20X1, payable on January 20, 20X2.

Note

The business days prior to the date of record (December 31, in this case) the stock will be trading “ex-dividend” which means the actual date that owners will be eligible for the dividend is 3 business days prior to the date of record.

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
Dec 10 Cash Dividends 12,000.000
Dec 10       Cash Dividends Payable 12,000.00
Dec 10 To record declaration of cash dividend of $0.50 on common stock

In January, when the payment is made, the journal entry would be:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X2
Jan 20 Cash Dividends Payable 12,000.00
Jan 20       Checking 12,000.00
Jan 20 To record payment of December 10, 20X1 dividend declared

When cash dividends are declared, if there is any preferred stock outstanding, the dividends have to be applied to the preferred stock first. We’ll tackle that in the next section after you check your understanding of accounting for cash dividends in general.

]]>
Stock Dividends https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/preferred-stock-dividends/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/preferred-stock-dividends/ Read more »]]>
  • Account for cumulative preferred dividends
  • Account for the declaration and distribution of stock dividends

 

If a company’s board of directors wants to pay common stockholders a dividend, they must pay the preferred stockholders first.

Preferred Stock Dividends

Coworkers sitting around a table discussing documents.

Preferred stockholders are paid a designated dollar amount per share before common stockholders receive any cash dividends. However, it is possible that the dividend declared is not enough to pay the entire amount per preferred share that is guaranteed—before common stockholders receive dividends. In that case, the amount declared is divided by the number of preferred shares. Common stockholders would then receive no dividend payment.

Preferred stock may be cumulative or non-cumulative. This determines whether preferred shares will receive dividends in arrears, which is payment for dividends missed in the past due to an inadequate amount of dividends declared in prior periods. If preferred stock is non-cumulative, preferred shares never receive payments for past dividends that were missed. If preferred stock is cumulative, any past dividends that were missed are paid before any payments are applied to the current period.

NON-cumulative preferred stock

25,000 shares of $3 non-cumulative preferred stock and 100,000 shares of common stock. Preferred shares would receive $75,000 in dividends (25,000 × $3) before common shares would receive anything.

Preferred Stockholders Common Stockholders Owed to
Year Total Dividend Total Per Share Total Per Share Preferred
1 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0
2 $20,000 $20,000 $0.80 $0 $0 $0
3 $60,000 $60,000 $2.40 $0 $0 $0
4 $175,000 $75,000 $3.00 $100,000 $1.00 $0
5 $200,000 $75,000 $3.00 $125,000 $1.25 $0
6 $375,000 $75,000 $3.00 $300,000 $3.00 $0

In this example, no dividends were declared on either class of stock in year one.

In year two, preferred stockholders must receive $75,000 before common shareholders receive anything. Since only $20,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive it all.

In year three, preferred stockholders must receive $75,000 before common shareholders receive anything. Since only $60,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive it all.

In year four, preferred stockholders must receive $75,000 before common shareholders receive anything. Of the $175,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive their $75,000 and the common stockholders get the remaining $100,000.

In year five, preferred stockholders must receive $75,000 before common shareholders receive anything. Since $200,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive $75,000 of it and common shareholders receive the remaining $125,000.

In year six, preferred stockholders receive $75,000 and common shareholders receive the remaining $300,000.

CUMULATIVE preferred stock

25,000 shares of $3 cumulative preferred stock and 100,000 shares of common stock. Preferred shares would receive $75,000 in dividends (25,000 × $3) before common shares would receive anything.

Preferred Stockholders Common Stockholders Owed to
Year Total Dividend Total Per Share Total Per Share Preferred
1 $0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $75,000
2 $20,000 $20,000 $0.80 $0 $0 $130,000
3 $60,000 $60,000 $2.40 $0 $0 $145,000
4 $175,000 $175,000 $7.00 $0 $0 $45,000
5 $200,000 $120,000 $4.80 $80,000 $0.80 $0
6 $375,000 $75,000 $3.00 $300,000 $3.00 $0

In this example, no dividends were declared on either class of stock in year one. The preferred stockholders are owed $75,000.

In year two, preferred stockholders must receive $150,000 ($75,000 for year one and $75,000 for year two) before common shareholders receive anything. Since only $20,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive it all and are still “owed” $130,000 at the end of year two.

In year three, preferred stockholders must receive $205,000 ($130,000 in arrears and $75,000 for year three) before common shareholders receive anything. Since only $60,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive it all and are still “owed” $145,000 at the end of year three.

In year four, preferred stockholders must receive $220,000 ($145,000 in arrears and $75,000 for year four) before common shareholders receive anything. Since only $175,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive it all and are still “owed” $45,000 at the end of year four.

In year five, preferred stockholders must receive $120,000 ($45,000 in arrears and $75,000 for year five) before common shareholders receive anything. Since $200,000 is declared, preferred stockholders receive $120,000 of it and common shareholders receive the remaining $80,000.

In year six, preferred stockholders are not owed any dividends in arrears. Of the $375,000 that is declared, they receive the $75,000 due to them in year six. Common shareholders receive the remaining $300,000.

Dividends in arrears are cumulative unpaid dividends, including the dividends not declared for the current year. Dividends in arrears never appear as a liability of the corporation because they are not a legal liability until declared by the board of directors. However, since the amount of dividends in arrears may influence the decisions of users of a corporation’s financial statements, firms disclose such dividends in a footnote. An appropriate footnote might read: “Dividends in the amount of $20,000, representing two years’ dividends on the company’s 10%, cumulative preferred stock, were in arrears as of December 31.″

In addition to cash dividends, which are the most common way corporations distribute wealth to the owners, it is possible for a company to issue more stock in lieu of cash. But before we discuss stock dividends, let’s review the basics of cash dividends.

You can view the transcript for “Compute preferred dividend on cumulative preferred stock with dividends in arrears” here (opens in new window).

Stock Dividends

Stock dividends are corporate earnings distributed to stockholders. They are distributions of retained earnings, which is accumulated profit. With a stock dividend, stockholders receive additional shares of stock instead of cash. Stock dividends transfer value from Retained Earnings to the Common Stock and Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock accounts, which increases total paid-in capital.

Stock Dividends is a contra stockholders’ equity account that temporarily substitutes for a debit to the Retained Earnings account. At the end of the accounting period, the Stock Dividends account is closed to Retained Earnings.

Stock dividends are only declared on shares outstanding, not on treasury stock shares.

Two coworkers participating in a video conference.

Three dates are associated with a stock dividend. The date of declaration is the date the corporation commits to distributing additional shares to stockholders. On that date, the stockholders’ equity account Stock Dividends Distributable is used to record the value of the shares due to the stockholders until the shares are distributed. The date of record is the date on which ownership is determined. Since shares of stock may be traded, the corporation names a specific date, and whoever owns the shares on that date will receive the dividend. There is no journal entry on the date of record. Finally, the date of distribution is the date the shares are actually distributed to stockholders.

When a stock dividend is issued, the total value of equity remains the same from both the investor’s perspective and the company’s perspective. However, all stock dividends require a journal entry for the company issuing the dividend. This entry transfers the value of the issued stock from the retained earnings account to the paid-in capital account.

The amount transferred between the two accounts depends on whether the dividend is a small stock dividend or a large stock dividend.

  • A stock dividend is considered small if the shares issued are less than 25% of the total value of shares outstanding before the dividend. A journal entry for a small stock dividend transfers the market value of the issued shares from retained earnings to paid-in capital.
  • Large stock dividends are those in which the new shares issued are more than 25% of the value of the total shares outstanding prior to the dividend. In this case, the journal entry transfers the par value of the issued shares from retained earnings to paid-in capital.

For example, assume the Board of Directors of Tanya Corp. met on December 10, 20X1, and declared a 2% stock dividend on 21,000 shares of $10 par common stock outstanding. The fair market value is $15 per share.

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
Dec 10 Stock Dividends 6,300.000
Dec 10       Stock Dividends Distributable 4,200.00
Dec 10        Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock 2,100.00
Dec 10 To record declaration of stock dividend of 2% (21,000 shares outstanding X $15 X 0.02)

Stock Dividends is calculated by multiplying the number of additional shares to be distributed by the fair market value of each share.

Stock Dividends Distributable is a stockholders’ equity account that substitutes for Common Stock until the stock can be issued. Stock Dividends Distributable can only be in multiples of par, just like Common Stock: the number of shares in the stock dividend times the par value per share.

Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par − Common Stock is used for any amount above par.

On the distribution date, the company will eliminate the liability with this entry:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X2
Jan 20 Stock Dividends Distributable 4,200.00
Jan 20       Common Stock 4,200.00
Jan 20       To record distribution of 2% stock dividend declared in Dec 20X1

When a dividend is paid as cash, then the company will have less cash, reducing its value, and therefore, its value per share (theoretically). If the dividend is paid as stock, then there are more shares outstanding, but the value of the company has not increased; therefore, the company’s value per share is reduced.

For example, if a company pays a 10% stock dividend, then it will distribute one share of stock for every 10 shares owned by holders of record, and the total number of outstanding shares will also increase by 10%. A company with a market value of $10,000,000 and 100,000 shares outstanding (trading at $100 each) would still be worth $10,000,000 with 110,000 shares outstanding, and theoretically, the market price per share would be $90.91. If the company had paid that same dividend in cash, it would now have $1,000,000 less in cash and be worth $9,000,000 with 100,000 shares outstanding, so the price should (again, theoretically) go down to $90 per share. The market doesn’t work with that kind of mathematical precision because there are hundreds of other variables, and it operates as an auction.

However, the main advantage of a stock dividend for the company is that the retained earnings can all be reinvested for greater growth. The main advantage of a stock dividend for the stockholder is that no taxes have to be paid on the stock dividend until the shares are sold.

In addition, because stock dividends don’t come out of earnings, they don’t trigger the preferred stock dividend liability.

In the next section, we’ll learn about another more common way for shareholders to acquire additional shares of stock, but first let’s review stock dividends.

]]>
Introduction to Distribution of Earnings https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-distribution-of-earnings/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:46 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-distribution-of-earnings/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: account for distributions to shareholders

A dividend is the distribution of some of a company’s earnings to a class of its shareholders as determined by the company’s board of directors. Common shareholders of dividend-paying companies are typically eligible as long as they own the stock before the ex-dividend date. Dividends may be paid out as cash or in the form of additional stock.

An office workspace.

While the major portion of the profits is kept within the company as retained earnings in order to be used for the company’s ongoing and future business activities, some profits can be allocated to the shareholders as a dividend. At times, companies may still make dividend payments even when they don’t make suitable profits in order to maintain their established track record of making regular dividend payments.

Unlike a sole proprietor, who can take money out whenever he or she wants to, a stockholder in a corporation has to wait for the board of directors to declare and pay a dividend. In a closely held corporation, where the owner may be the chair of the board and have all decision-making ability, declaring a dividend in order to take profits out of the company can be a simple process (remembering that the corporation paid income tax on the net earnings, and the shareholder will pay income tax on the dividend). However, in a publicly-traded company, or even a non-publicly traded company with many shareholders, declaring a dividend may be much more difficult, as it takes an action of the board of directors.

]]>
Common and Preferred Stock https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/common-and-preferred-stock/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:45 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/common-and-preferred-stock/ Read more »]]>
  • Distinguish between characteristics of common and preferred stock

 

There are three main differences between common stock and preferred stock.

  1. Preferred shareholders have priority over a company’s income, meaning they are paid dividends before common shareholders.
  2. In the event a company dissolves, preferred shareholders are paid after creditors but before common stockholders.
  3. Preferred stock functions similarly to bonds since with preferred shares, investors are promised a fixed return on investment.

Dividends

Cash dividends are payouts of profits from retained earnings to stockholders. When a company declares a dividend, it must pay the preferred stock dividends first. There are two types of preferred stock with regard to dividends: cumulative and non-cumulative.

A pile of dollar bills.

  • Cumulative preferred stock means that all of the dividends promised but not paid in the current and past years have to be made up before common stockholders can be paid.
  • Non-cumulative preferred stock means only the current preferred stock dividends have to be paid before common stockholders can be paid.

Liquidation

The preferred claim over a company’s income and earnings is most important during times of insolvency. Common stockholders are last in line for the company’s assets. This means when the company goes out of business, it sells off all of its assets and then first pays off all creditors and bondholders, then the preferred stockholders receive a payment up to the par value of the preferred stock, and then common stockholders get whatever is left, which is often nothing.

Return on Investment

Because preferred stocks’ par values are fixed and do not change, preferred stock dividend yields are more static and less variable than common stock dividend yields. You calculate a preferred stock’s dividend yield by dividing the annual dividend payment by the par value.

If a share of preferred stock has a par value of $100 and pays annual dividends of $5 per share, the dividend yield would be 5%.

Because par values are not the same as trading values, you have to pay attention to the trading price of preferred shares as well. If the preferred stock from the example above is trading at $110, its effective dividend yield would decrease to 4.5%. Like bonds, preferred shares also have a par value which is affected by interest rates. When interest rates rise, the value of the preferred stock declines, and vice versa.

Convertibility

Preferred stock may also have a convertibility feature which gives the holder the right to convert the preferred shares to common shares. Venture capitalists often invest in startups using non-publicly traded preferred stock instead of loaning money, and then, when the company goes public, the venture capitalist converts the preferred stock to common.

A street sign that says "Wall St.".

For example, if the preferred stock has a conversion ratio of 5:1, every share of preferred stock could be swapped for 5 shares of common stock.

Assume an investor bought 1,000 preferred shares for $75 with a conversion ratio of 5:1 and the company went public with the common stock trading at $38 per share. By converting the preferred shares to common, the investor turns a $75,000 investment into $190,000 and now has voting rights as well.

In summary, preferred stock is considered a hybrid between debt and equity. It has a fixed rate of return and priority in liquidation, but the company doesn’t have to pay back the principal, as it would with debt.

 

 

 

Here is a quick review of the differences between preferred and common stock.You can view the transcript for “Types of Stocks” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Treasury Stock https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/treasury-stock/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:45 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/treasury-stock/ Read more »]]>
  • Account for buying and selling shares of treasury stock

 

When a business buys back its own shares, these shares become treasury stock and are decommissioned. In and of itself, treasury stock doesn’t have much value. These stocks do not have voting rights and do not pay any distributions. However, in certain situations, the organization may benefit from limiting outside ownership. Reacquiring stock also helps raise the share price, providing investors with an immediate reward.

Treasury stock is stock that is repurchased by the same corporation that issued it. The corporation is buying back its own stock from the stockholders. Since treasury stock shares are no longer owned by stockholders but by the corporation itself, total stockholders’ equity decreases.

As we noted before, shares outstanding equals the number of shares issued (sold for the first time) minus the number of shares of treasury stock a corporation has reacquired. When treasury stock is purchased, the number of shares issued remains unchanged, but the number of shares outstanding decreases.

When treasury stock is purchased, the Treasury Stock account is debited for the number of shares purchased times the purchase price per share. Treasury Stock is a contra stockholders’ equity account and increases by debiting. It is not an asset account.

Treasury stock may be resold to stockholders at the same, a higher, or a lower price than it was purchased for. When sold, the Treasury Stock account can only be credited in multiples of its original purchase price per share. Use the Paid-in Capital from Sale of Treasury Stock account for differences between purchase and selling prices. Paid-in Capital from Sale of Treasury Stock is credited for any amount above the original purchase price (similar to a gain) and is debited for any amount below the original purchase price (similar to a loss).

The sale of treasury stock increases the number of shares outstanding and increases total stockholders’ equity.

The par value of the stock is not a factor in the purchase or sale of treasury stock.

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Treasury Stock 45,000.00
Oct. 1       Checking 45,000.00
Oct. 1 To record repurchase of 1,000 shares of stock at $45 per share.

A company can decide to hold onto treasury stocks indefinitely, reissue them to the public, or even cancel them.

If the company cancels the stock, then stock issued is reduced.

Reselling treasury stock (reissuing) is not very common, but if treasury stock is resold to stockholders for more than its purchase price per share, the entry would be:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 1       Paid-in Capital – Treasury Stock 3,000.00
Oct. 1       Treasury stock 9,000.00
Oct. 1 To record reissuance of 200 shares of stock at $60 per share (cost of $45).

If treasury stock is resold to stockholders for less than its purchase price per share, the entry would be:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 8,000.00
Oct. 1 Retained Earnings 1,000.00
Oct. 1       Treasury Stock 9,000.00
Oct. 1 To record reissuance of 200 shares of stock at $40 per share (cost of $45).
]]>
Introduction to Capital Stock Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-capital-stock-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-capital-stock-transactions/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: account for issuance of stock

Common stock is a representation of partial ownership in a company and is the type of stock in which most people invest. Common stock comes with voting rights, as well as the possibility of dividends and capital appreciation. In accounting, you can find information about a company’s common stock in its balance sheet.

A tablet with the Google search engine website open.

In general, common stock comes with the right to vote for corporate directors as well as to vote on policy changes and stock splits. There are a few exceptions to this rule, however, such as companies that have two classes of common stock—one voting and one non-voting. Alphabet (Google) is one example. With that stock, class A shares (ticker symbol GOOGL) have voting rights, while class C shares (GOOG) do not.

Some companies choose to distribute some of their profits (retained earnings) to common stockholders in the form of dividends, and each common stockholder is entitled to a proportional share. For example, if a company declares a dividend of $10 million and there are 20 million shareholders, investors will receive $0.50 for each common share they own.

The other main type of stock is called preferred stock and works a bit differently. The main difference is that preferred stock has a fixed, guaranteed dividend, while common stock dividends can change over time or even be discontinued. For this reason, share prices of preferred stocks generally don’t fluctuate as much as those of common stock.

Common shareholders have the most potential for profit, but they are also last in line when things go bad. In the event of bankruptcy, holders of common stock have the lowest-priority claim on a company’s assets and are behind secured creditors such as banks, unsecured creditors such as bondholders, and preferred stockholders.

For this reason, when companies liquidate or go through a bankruptcy restructuring, common stockholders generally receive nothing, and their shares become worthless.

On a company’s balance sheet, common stock is recorded in the “stockholders’ equity” section. This is where investors can determine the book value, or net worth, of their shares, which is equal to the company’s assets minus its liabilities.

Many states require that stock have a designated par value (or in some cases stated value). Thus, par value is said to represent the “legal capital” of the firm. In theory, original purchasers of stock are contingently liable to the company for the difference between the issue price and par value if the stock is issued at less than par. However, as a practical matter, par values on common stock are set well below the issue price, negating any practical effect of this obsolete legal requirement.

Some companies still offer common stock with a preemptive right, which is an option to buy a proportional part of any additional shares that may be issued by the company. This preemptive right is intended to allow a shareholder to avoid ownership dilution by being assured an opportunity to acquire a fair part of any corporate stock expansion.

Take a look at Alphabet Investor Relations, and find the Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2019, for Alphabet, Inc., a Delaware corporation. On page 50 of the 2019 annual report, the company reported the following components of stockholders’ equity:

Alphabet Inc.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In millions, except share amounts which are reflected in thousands, and par value per share amounts)
Description As of December 31, 2018 As of December 31, 2019
Subcategory, Stockholders’ equity:
     Convertible preferred stock, $0.001 par value per share, 100,000 shares authorized; no shares issued and outstanding 0 0
     Class A and Class B common stock, and Class C capital stock and additional paid in capital, $0.001 par value per share: 15,000,000 shares authorized (Class A 9,000,000, Class B 3,000,000, Class C 3,000,000); 695,556 (Class A 299,242, Class B 46,636, Class C 349,678) and 688,335 (Class A 299,828, Class B 46,441, Class C 342,066) shares issued and outstanding (Class A and Class B common stock is indented) – As of December 31, 2018 45,049; As of December 31, 2019 50,552
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
45,049 50,552
     Accumuluated other comprehensive loss (2,306) (1,232)
Single line
177,628
Single line
201,442
            Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single line
$      232,792Double line
Single line
$      275,909Double line
See accompanying notes
50

 

This is not the most simple example, but it has a lot of interesting nuances.

GOOG and GOOGL are stock ticker symbols for Alphabet (the company formerly known as Google). The main difference between the GOOG and GOOGL stock ticker symbols is that GOOG shares have no voting rights while GOOGL shares do. The company has three kinds of common stock:

The class-A shares have the typical one-share-one-vote structure. As of December 31, 2019, almost 300 million shares were being traded on the NASDAQ open market exchange under the ticker symbol GOOGL.

The class-C shares have no voting rights and are traded on the NASDAQ as GOOG.

A stock graph shown on a smartphone screen.

When companies go public, founders often lose control of their company when too many shares are issued, so the founders of Google, Larry Page, and Sergey Brin created a third type of share, class-B, which are held by founders and insiders that grant 10 votes per share and are not publicly traded. At the end of 2019, there were almost 350 million class C shares, but with 10 votes per share, the founders and insiders have a controlling interest in the company.

Notice that the par value is 1/10th of one cent, which for all practical purposes is zero since the company is rounding the amount on the financial statements to the nearest million.

You can also see that Alphabet, Inc. had 100,000 shares of preferred stock authorized but not issued.

In this section, we’ll be looking at all of these items and terms in more detail.

]]>
Issuing Stock https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/issuing-stock/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/issuing-stock/ Read more »]]>
  • Account for the issuance of stock

 

A conference room table.

Shares authorized is the number of shares a corporation is allowed to issue (sell). For a large corporation, this is based on a decision by its Board of Directors, a group elected to represent and serve the interest of the stockholders. Authorization is just permission to sell shares of stock; no action has actually taken place yet. Therefore, there is no journal entry for a stock authorization.

Shares issued is the number of shares a corporation has sold to stockholders for the first time. The number of shares issued cannot exceed the number of shares authorized.

Occasionally, a corporation will buy back its own shares on the open market. We call those retired shares treasury stock. The number of issued shares that are still circulating in the open market are referred to as outstanding.

Look at the most current regulatory reports for The Home Depot, Inc. On page 33 of the 2019 annual report, the company reports the following components of stockholders’ equity:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Common stock, par value $0.05; authorized 10,000 shares; issued: 1,786 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,782 shares at February 3, 2019; Outstanding: 1,077 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,105 shares at February 3, 2019 89 89
Paid-in capital 11,001 10,578
Retained earnings 51,729 46,423
Accumulated other comprehensive loss (739) (772)
Treasury stock, at cost, 709 shares at February 2, 2020 and 677 shares at February 3,2019 (65,196) (58,196)
          Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity Single line
(3,116)
Single line
(1,878)
          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Note See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

 

Note this information as of the fiscal year that ended February 2, 2020:

  • The par value of the common stock is $0.05 per share.
  • The number of shares authorized is listed as 10,000, but all numbers except per-share data are listed in millions, so that is actually 10 billion shares authorized.
  • There were 1.786 billion shares issued by the end of the 2019 fiscal year (February 2, 2020).
  • The company had 709 million shares of treasury stock at the end of the year (for which they paid $65,196 million dollars, which is an average cost of almost $92 per share).
  • If we subtract the number of shares in treasury stock from the number of shares issued (1,786 – 709 = 1,077) we should get the number of shares outstanding, and we do.

The terms above may be better understood with an analogy to a credit card. If you are approved for a credit card, the terms will include a credit limit, such as $5,000, which is the maximum you are allowed to charge on the card. This is similar to “shares authorized,” the maximum number of shares a company is allowed to issue. The credit limit on a card does not mean you have to charge $5,000 on your first purchase but instead that you may continue to charge purchases up until you have reached a $5,000 maximum. The same holds true for shares issued. Smaller numbers of shares may be sold over time up to the maximum of the number of shares authorized.

If you wish to charge more than your credit limit on a credit card, you may contact the company that issued the card and request an increase in your credit limit. They may or may not grant this request. The same is true for a corporation. If it wishes to issue more shares than the number authorized, it may approach the Board of Directors with this request.

From an accounting standpoint, issuing stock is similar to recording any other contribution of capital, except instead of crediting capital contributions, we credit the Common Stock account:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 150,000.00
Oct. 1       Common Stock 150,000.00
Oct. 1 To record issuance of 15,000 shares of $10 par stock at $10 per share

If the stock is sold on the open market for an amount greater than the par value, which is most often the case, the entry looks like this:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 450,000.00
Oct. 1       Common Stock 150,000.00
Oct. 1       Paid in Capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock 300,000.00
Oct. 1 To record issuance of 15,000 shares of $10 par stock at $30 per share

The journal entry for issuing preferred stock is very similar to the one for common stock. This time Preferred Stock and Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par – Preferred Stock are credited instead of the accounts for common stock.

Stock may be issued for assets other than cash, such as services rendered, land, equipment, vehicles, accounts receivable, and inventory. This is more common in small corporations than in larger ones. The journal entries are similar to those for issuing stock for cash. In this case, the value of either the stock or the asset must be known. The assumption is that both the asset and the stock have the same value. In other words, if land is known to be worth $450,000 and is transferred to the corporation in exchange for 15,000 shares of common stock, the journal entry would be:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Land 450,0000
Oct. 1       Common Stock 150,000.00
Oct. 1       Paid in Capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock 300,000.00
Oct. 1 To record issuance of 15,000 shares of $10 par stock in exchange for land.

On the other hand, if the fair market value of the land is unknown but the stock is trading for $20 per share, the journal entry would be:

JournalPage XX
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Land 300,0000
Oct. 1       Common Stock 150,000.00
Oct. 1       Paid in Capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock 150,000.00
Oct. 1 To record issuance of 15,000 shares of $10 par stock at $20 per share in exchange for land.
You can review this material by watching the following video:You can view the transcript for “Issuing Stock Transactions and Calculating Paid-in Capital – Financial Accounting video” here (opens in new window).

 

 

]]>
Corporate Benefits and Limitations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/corporate-benefits-and-limitations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:43 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/corporate-benefits-and-limitations/ Read more »]]>
  • Recognize the benefits and drawback of the corporate form of doing business

 

Here is a quick review of some of the common ways to organize a business:You can view the transcript for “Finding the Right Business Structure | John Deere Financial” here (opens in new window).

 

Form of business Advantages Disadvantages
Sole Proprietorship Easy and inexpensive to create Unlimited liability, meaning business debts are personal debts
Flexibility and control to your liking Limited internal expertise
Few Government regulations Limited access to financial capital
Tax advantages if struggling Not separate from owners lifespan
Profits taxed once
Partnerships (General/Limited Partnerships) Easy to organize Possible conflict development between partners
Access to combined knowledge, skills and resources Profits must be split between partners
Few Government regulations
Profits taxed once at the partner level
Unlimited liability for general partners
Corporation Limited liability Double taxation
Virtually unlimited access to equity and debt financing = ability to generate vast profits Subject to extensive government regulations, especially publicly traded corps
Easy to transfer ownership (publicly traded) Complex to organize and maintain
Legal entity separate from owners with continuous life
Limited Liability Company Simple to organize and operate Possible conflict development between members
Flexible in nature Profits must be split between members
Can elect to be taxed as a partnership (or sole proprietor if single-member LLC)
Legal entity separate from owners with continuous life
S Corporation Limited liability for owners Restrictions on number and type of shareholders
Greater credibility for financing
Taxed like a partnership
Not as regulated as publicly traded corporation
Legal entity separate from owners with continuous life

There are some other ways of doing business, such as franchising and co-ops.

Franchising

Franchising allows a franchisee to borrow the franchisor’s business model and brand for a specified period. It comes with a list of advantages including training on how to operate your franchise; systems and technologies for day-to-day operations; guidance on marketing, advertising and other business needs; and a network of franchise owners with whom you can share experiences.

The main disadvantages to this ownership structure are franchising fees, royalties on sales or profits, and tight restrictions to maintain ownership. Franchise owners also have limited control over their suppliers they can purchase from, are forced to contribute to a marketing fund they have little control over. If a franchisee wants to sell their business, the franchisor must approve the new buyer. Despite these disadvantages, franchises are great for owners who are looking for an ‘out of the box’ pathway to owning their own business.

In any case, the franchisee will have to select a form of doing business, such as sole-proprietor, partnership, LLC, or corporation.

Cooperative

Cooperatives, known as co-ops for short, are organizations owned and controlled by an association of members.

This form of ownership allows for a more democratic approach to control. In the co-op model, each share is worth the same number of votes, similar to the situation in a corporation with common stock. It also offers limited liability to its owners and equal profit distribution based on ownership percentage. Disappointingly, the democratic approach to decision making results in a longer decision making process as participation from all association members is required. Conflicts between members can also arise that have a big impact on the efficiency of the business. Co-operatives are often used when individuals or businesses decide to pool resources to achieve a common goal or satisfy a common need, such as employment needs or a delivery service.

In addition to all of these and numerous variations, such as PTPs (publicly traded partnerships), certain charitable organizations can be incorporated as public entities, not to be confused with publicly-traded corporations. A corporation that is organized to benefit society, with no shareholders, and no profit-motive, can elect to be exempt from taxation under IRC Section 501(c), but the regulations and oversight for these entities is strict. In addition, there is a whole other set of GAAP that applies to governmental and not-for-profit entities that is beyond the scope of this course.

In summary, what is important to note about a corporation is that the owners hold shares of stock that document their ownership rights and percentages. The most common form of ownership is called common stock, so these owners are called stockholders or shareholders (the terms are interchangeable).

]]>
Characteristics of Corporations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/characteristics-of-corporations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/characteristics-of-corporations/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify the defining characteristics of a corporation

 

Corporations have a number of distinguishing characteristics. The most significant of these are:

  • Separate Legal Existence
  • Continuous Life
  • Ability to Acquire Capital
  • Transferability
  • Limited Liability
  • Government Regulations
  • Taxation
  • Governance and Management

Let’s look at each of these in turn.

Separate Legal Existence

A bookshelf full of law books.

In 1819, Chief Justice John Marshall defined a corporation as “an artificial being, invisible, intangible, and existing only in contemplation of law.” This definition is the foundation for the prevailing legal interpretation that a corporation is an entity separate and distinct from the people who own it.

Continuous Life

The life of a corporation is stated in the charter granted by the state, and most modern corporations elect a perpetual life. Since a corporation is a separate legal entity, its continuance as a going concern is not affected by the withdrawal, death, or incapacity of a stockholder, employee, or officer.

Ability to Acquire Capital

It is relatively easy for a corporation to obtain capital through the issuance of stock. Buying stock in a corporation is often attractive to an investor because a stockholder has limited liability and shares of stock are readily transferable. Also, numerous individuals can become stockholders by investing relatively small amounts of money.

Transferability

Shares of capital stock give ownership in a corporation. These shares are transferable units. Stockholders may dispose of part or all of their interest in a corporation simply by selling their stock. In a partnership, the transfer of an ownership interest requires the consent of each owner. In contrast, the transfer of stock is entirely at the discretion of the stockholder. It does not require the approval of either the corporation or other stockholders.

The transfer of ownership rights among stockholders normally has no effect on the daily operating activities of the corporation, nor does it affect the corporation’s assets, liabilities, and total ownership equity. The transfer of these ownership rights is a transaction between individual owners. The company does not participate in the transfer of these ownership rights after the original sale of the capital stock.

Limited Liability

Since a corporation is a separate legal entity, creditors have recourse only to corporate assets to satisfy their claims. In most circumstances, creditors have no legal claim on the personal assets of the owners. Even in the event of bankruptcy, stockholders’ losses are generally limited to their capital investment in the corporation. In other words, if you buy stock and the price of the stock drops to zero, that’s the extent of your loss.

Government Regulations

A corporation is subject to numerous state and federal regulations. For example, state laws usually prescribe the requirements for issuing stock, the distributions of earnings permitted to stockholders, and the acceptable methods for buying back and retiring stock. Federal securities laws govern the sale of capital stock to the general public. Also, most publicly held corporations are required to make extensive disclosure of their financial affairs to the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) through quarterly and annual reports (Forms 10Q and 10K). In addition, when a corporation lists its stock on organized securities exchanges, it must comply with the reporting requirements of these exchanges.

Taxation

Tax books and a calculator.

As a legal person, corporations pay federal and state income taxes on earnings. In addition, stockholders must pay taxes on cash dividends (pro rata distributions of net income). In contrast, sole proprietors, partners, and members of an LLC that has elected to be taxed as a partnership report their share of earnings on their personal income tax returns.

Corporate income is taxed at the corporate level, and then the remaining earnings after tax that are distributed to owners are taxed again as dividends; therefore, corporate earnings are said to be subject to “double taxation.”

Governance and Management

Stockholders do not have the right to participate actively in the management of the business unless they serve as directors and/or officers. However, stockholders do have certain basic rights, including the right to (1) dispose of their shares, (2) buy additional newly issued shares in a proportion equal to the percentage of shares they already own (called the preemptive right), (3) share in dividends when declared, (4) share in assets in case of liquidation, and (5) participate in management indirectly by voting at the stockholders’ meeting. Stockholders get one vote for every share of stock.

Management of the corporation is through the delegation of authority from the stockholders to the directors to the officers. The stockholders elect the board of directors. The board of directors formulates the broad policies of the company and selects the principal officers who execute the policies.

A group of coworkers meeting together.

The board’s more specific duties include: (1) authorizing contracts, (2) declaring dividends, (3) establishing executive salaries, and (4) granting authorization to borrow money. The decisions of the board are recorded in the minutes of its meetings. The minutes are an important source of information to an independent auditor, since they may serve as notice to record transactions (such as a dividend declaration) or to identify certain future transactions (such as a large loan).

Normally, companies hold stockholders’ meetings annually. At the annual stockholders’ meeting, stockholders vote on such issues as changing the charter, increasing the number of authorized shares of stock to be issued, approving pension plans, selecting the independent auditor, and other related matters. Stockholders who do not personally attend the stockholders’ meeting may vote by proxy. A proxy is a legal document, signed by a stockholder, that gives a designated person the authority to vote the stockholder’s shares at a stockholders’ meeting.

A corporation’s bylaws usually specify the titles and duties of the officers of a corporation. The number of officers and their exact titles vary from corporation to corporation, but most have a president (who may also be the chief executive officer or CEO), several vice presidents, a secretary, a treasurer, and a controller. Beyond that, a typical corporation will have multiple vice presidents, such as the vice president of marketing, the vice president of finance or chief financial officer (CFO), the vice president of operations, and the vice president of human resources. The treasurer and controller usually report to the vice president of finance or chief financial officer, and department heads report to their respective vice presidents, and so on, down to the line workers (like the people you see on the floor of Home Depot helping customers and stocking shelves.)

The president/chief executive officer (CEO) of the corporation is empowered by the bylaws to hire all necessary employees except those appointed by the board of directors.

The corporate secretary maintains the official records of the company and records the proceedings of meetings of stockholders and directors. The treasurer is accountable for corporate funds and may supervise the accounting function within the company. A controller carries out the accounting function. The controller usually reports to the treasurer of the corporation.

The organizational structure of a corporation enables a company to hire professional managers to run the business. On the other hand, the separation of ownership and management often reduces an owner’s ability to actively manage the company. In addition, as became evident in the Enron scandal, managers are often compensated based on the performance of the firm and may own stock as well. They thus may be tempted to exaggerate firm performance by inflating income figures.

As a result of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, the board is now required to monitor management’s actions more closely. Many feel the failures of Enron, WorldCom, and more recently MF Global could have been avoided by more diligent boards.

Summary

As you have learned, a corporation is a legal entity separate and distinct from its owners, so the corporation acts under its own name rather than in the name of its stockholders. Home Depot, Inc. may buy, own, and sell property. It may borrow money, and it may enter into legally binding contracts in its own name. It may also sue or be sued, and it pays its own taxes, just like a real person.

In a partnership, the acts of the owners (partners) bind the partnership. In contrast, the acts of its owners (stockholders) do not bind the corporation unless such owners are agents of the corporation. For example, if you owned shares of Home Depot, you would not have the right to purchase inventory for the company unless you were designated as an agent of the corporation.

]]>
Categories of Corporations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/categories-of-corporations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/categories-of-corporations/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify different types of corporations

 

A corporation is created by state law, and its continued existence depends upon the statutes of the state in which it is incorporated. As a legal entity, a corporation has most of the rights and privileges of a person. The major exceptions relate to privileges only a living person can exercise, such as the right to vote or to hold public office. A corporation is subject to the same duties and responsibilities as a person. For example, it must abide by the laws, and it must pay taxes.

The corporation can own property, enter into contracts, borrow money, conduct business, earn profit, pay taxes, and make investments similar to the way individuals can.

A corporation may be owned by one stockholder or by millions. These are people who have invested cash or contributed other assets to the business. In return, they receive shares of stock, which are transferable units of ownership in a corporation. Stock can also be thought of as a receipt to acknowledge ownership in the company. The value of the stock that a stockholder receives equals the value of the asset(s) that were contributed.

For Profit v. Not-For-Profit

A McDonald's logo.

A corporation may be organized for the purpose of making a profit, or it may be not-for-profit. For-profit corporations include such well-known companies as McDonald’s, Nike, PepsiCo, and Facebook.

Not-for-profit corporations are organized for charitable, medical, or educational purposes. Examples are the Salvation Army and the American Cancer Society. These corporations are sometimes called public corporations, not to be confused with publicly-held/traded corporations. Often these public corporations are exempt from income tax under IRC Sec. 501. The most common exemption is for public charities under Sec. 501(c)(3) so you may hear a non-profit designated as a 501(c)(3) organization.

Publicly-held v. Privately-held

Classification by ownership differentiates publicly held and privately held corporations. A publicly held corporation, such as IBM, Caterpillar, and Apple, may have thousands of stockholders. When the stock is first issued, the corporation receives the proceeds, but subsequent trading is between individuals and institutions on a national securities exchange such as the New York Stock Exchange or NASDAQ. For example, if you purchased 100 shares of Facebook (NASDAQ: FB) stock at $38 when it first went public in 2012, the company would have received your $3,800 and you would have 100 voting shares of stock out of the 421,233,615 shares that were put on the market (so, a tiny, tiny percentage of ownership). If you had sold those shares of stock on September 2, 2020 for $302.50 per share which was the trading price that day, the buyer would have paid you $302,500 and the company is not involved in the transaction in any way.

In contrast, a privately held corporation usually has only a few stockholders, and does not offer its stock for sale to the general public. Privately held companies are generally much smaller than publicly held companies, although some notable exceptions exist. For instance, Gibson Guitar company is privately held. Ford Motor Company was owned by Henry Ford and a group of investors in the early years, but in the 1930s Henry Ford bought all the stock in order to have complete control over the company. In 1956, his son, Henry Ford II, took the company public. Harley Davidson went public in 1965 and then all the stock was bought by AMF in 1969, making it privately held. In a coup, a group of managers bought all the stock back and took the company public again a few years later. Facebook started out as an informal partnership, which was then turned into an LLC (formed in Florida), and then into a corporation (chartered by the state of Delaware), so the company could go public.

Sole Proprietorship vs. Corporation

Let’s say you start a lawn care business and invest $500 of your own cash and spend $1,500 for lawnmowers for a total investment of $2,000. If you do not incorporate, your business is a sole proprietorship. If you do incorporate, your business is a corporation. To form a corporation, a business needs to file paperwork called articles of incorporation (and pay a fee) with the state in which it will be operating. The state grants the business its corporate status.

If you damage the property of one of your customers and he submits a claim against you for $10,000, the most you can be liable for as a corporation is the amount you have invested and earned in the business. As a sole proprietorship, however, it is possible the customer can be awarded more than the value of your ownership in the business. You would then have to pay out the difference using your personal money. If you don’t have enough, you could even be forced to sell some of the things you own or make payments from your future wages to pay the claim off. If you are not organized as a corporation, your risk is not limited to the amount you invested and earned in the business.

]]>
Forming a Corporation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/forming-a-corporation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:41 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/forming-a-corporation/ Read more »]]>
  • Understand the basic steps in forming a corporation

 

Corporations are chartered by the state. Each state has a corporation act that permits the formation of corporations by qualified persons. Incorporators are persons seeking to bring a corporation into existence. Most state corporation laws require a minimum of three incorporators, each of whom must be of legal age, and a majority of whom must be citizens of the United States.

The laws of each state view a corporation organized in that state as a domestic corporation and a corporation organized in any other state as a foreign corporation. If a corporation intends to conduct business solely within one state, it normally seeks incorporation in that state because most state laws are not as severe for domestic corporations as for foreign corporations. Corporations conducting interstate business usually incorporate in the state that has laws most advantageous to the corporation being formed. Important considerations in choosing a state are the powers granted to the corporation, the taxes levied, the defenses permitted against hostile takeover attempts by others, and the reports required by the state.

Once incorporators agree on the state in which to incorporate, they apply for a corporate charter. A corporate charter is a contract between the state and the incorporators, and their successors, granting the corporation its legal existence. The application for the corporation’s charter is called the articles of incorporation.

After supplying the information requested in the incorporation application form, incorporators file the articles with the proper office in the state of incorporation. Each state requires different information in the articles of incorporation, but most states ask for the following:

Two leather bound books and a gavel.

  • Name of corporation.
  • Location of principal offices.
  • Purposes of business.
  • Number of shares of stock authorized, class or classes of shares, and voting and dividend rights of each class of shares.
  • Value of assets paid in by the incorporators (the stockholders who organize the corporation).
  • Limitations on authority of the management and owners of the corporation.
  • On approving the articles, the state office (frequently the secretary of state’s office) grants the charter and creates the corporation.

As soon as the corporation obtains the charter, it is authorized to operate its business. The incorporators call the first meeting of the stockholders. Two of the purposes of this meeting are to elect a board of directors and to adopt the bylaws of the corporation.

The bylaws are a set of rules or regulations adopted by the board of directors of a corporation to govern the conduct of corporate affairs. The bylaws must be in agreement with the laws of the state and the policies and purposes in the corporate charter. The bylaws contain, along with other information, provisions for (1) the place, date, and manner of calling the annual stockholders’ meeting, (2) the number of directors and the method for electing them, (3) the duties and powers of the directors, and (4) the method for selecting officers of the corporation.

Here is a short video on the role of corporations in our economy and the basics of a corporate structure:You can view the transcript for “Corp 101: The Basics of Corporate Structure” here (opens in new window).

 

]]>
Why It Matters: Accounting for Corporations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-accounting-for-corporations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:40 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-accounting-for-corporations/ Read more »]]> Why learn about accounting and reporting concepts unique to corporations?

In 2015, based on data compiled by the IRS, 72% of the 35 million businesses in the US were organized as sole proprietorships, and only five percent were corporations. However, of the $37 trillion in business receipts reported that year, 63% came from corporations, and only a scant four percent of total gross revenues came from sole proprietorships.

Why the huge discrepancy?

In short, sole proprietorships are easy to form and easy to manage and are therefore the favorite way to organize a very small business. However, a corporation has the ability to generate vast sums of capital from the contributions of multiple owners, and because of that, they are also able to borrow large sums of money, often in the billions of dollars.

Two pie charts: one showing business receipts in 2015 and one showing tax returns filed in 2015.   There was $37 Trillion in Gross Business Receipts in 2015. 63 percent from C-Corporations, 20% from S-Corporations, 1% from General Partnerships, 3% from Limited Partnerships, 9% from LLCs, and 4% from Sole Proprietorships.   There were 35 Million Tax returns filed in 2015. 72% from Sole Proprietorships, 7% from LLCs, 1% from Limited Partnerships, 2% from General Partnerships, 13% S-Corporations, and 5% from C-Corporations.

In previous modules, we’ve focused on accounting for small businesses and assuming the sole proprietor form of doing business, but now you are ready to tackle some of the complexities of the corporate form. Although statistically you are more likely to be doing accounting for small businesses and small, closely-held (e.g. privately held) corporations, S-Corps, and LLCs, your knowledge of the broader concepts that apply to the most highly complex, highly scrutinized, publicly-traded C-Corps will serve you well.

]]>
Introduction to Corporations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-corporations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:40 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-corporations/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: describe the corporate form of doing business

Let’s look at this chart again.

Two pie charts: one showing business receipts in 2015 and one showing tax returns filed in 2015. There was $37 Trillion in Gross Business Receipts in 2015. 63 percent from C-Corporations, 20% from S-Corporations, 1% from General Partnerships, 3% from Limited Partnerships, 9% from LLCs, and 4% from Sole Proprietorships. There were 35 Million Tax returns filed in 2015. 72% from Sole Proprietorships, 7% from LLCs, 1% from Limited Partnerships, 2% from General Partnerships, 13% S-Corporations, and 5% from C-Corporations.

To put the corporate form of ownership into perspective, let’s look at some of the other options, moving from simplest (sole proprietorship) to complex (corporations and LLCs).

Sole Proprietorship

A sole proprietorship is the most basic form of business ownership, where there is one owner who is responsible for the business. It is not a legal entity that separates the owner from the business, meaning that the owner is responsible for all of the debts and obligations of the business on a personal level. In exchange for that liability, the owner keeps all the profits gained from the business. Profits are taxed on the owner’s Form 1040 with other sources of individual income.

Because this form of business ownership is easy and inexpensive to create, has few government regulations, and leaves complete control over all the business decisions to the owner, small start-ups often choose a sole proprietorship during the early stages of a business. However, sole proprietorships are limited to the resources the owner can bring to the business (e.g. putting in money from savings or personal borrowing).

Partnership

Partnerships are a form of business ownership where two or more people act as co-owners. There are two basic forms of partnerships: General and Limited.

Two people shaking hands.

In a general partnership, all owners of the business have an unlimited liability in the business (the same as a sole proprietorship). For a limited partnership, at least one of the partners has a limited liability, meaning they are not personally responsible for the debts of the business.

Regardless of the type of partnership, partnerships are relatively easy and cheap to create and have few government regulations. Profits are split according to the partnership agreement and then taxed like a sole proprietorship. The added benefit of a partnership is the combination of knowledge and resources brought to the table thanks to the additional owners.

Profits do have to be shared between owners, and there is always the potential for conflicts to arise between partners over business decisions. This type of ownership is often useful in the early stages of the business where multiple people are involved.

Corporation

Unlike the previous two examples, corporations are a form of ownership that is a legal entity separate from its owners. This creates a limited liability for all owners (usually called stockholders or shareholders) but results in a double taxation on profits (first as a corporate income tax then as a personal income tax when the owners take their profits in the form of dividends). Corporations tend to have an easier time raising capital than sole proprietors or partners in large part because of the greater sources of funding made available to them, such as selling stock to the general public. However, this does result in greater government regulation for corporations, such as requirements for more extensive record keeping, audited financial statements, and SEC regulation. In addition, setting up a corporation is much more difficult, requiring more resources and capital to cover expenses and create legal documentation. This ownership form is best suited for fast growing or mature organizations that are looking to raise vast sums of money and to shield owners from liability for debts and lawsuits.

The C-Corp designation comes from the general corporate tax status governed by Subchapter C of the Internal Revenue Code.

 

Here’s a short review of the definition of a corporation:

You can view the transcript for “What is a Corporation?” here (opens in new window).

 

Limited Liability Company (LLC)

A limited liability company (LLC) is a hybrid of the corporate form of business and the partnership. An LLC can elect to be taxed as either one, and as the name implies, the members enjoy the benefits of limited liability like corporate stockholders.

S Corporation

A lesser known ownership style, an S corporation is a type of business ownership that allows its owners to avoid double taxation because the organization is not required to pay corporate taxes. Instead, all profits or losses are passed on to owners of the organization to report on their personal income tax. This form of ownership does allow for limited liability, similar to a corporation, but without the double taxation. The disadvantage of this organization’s special nature is the increased level of government regulation and the restrictions on the number and type of shareholders it may have. This type of ownership is used in the mature stage of a business’s life cycle and often by private organizations because of the restrictions on ownership. S corps are so named because their tax status is governed by Subchapter S of the Internal Revenue Code.

In this module, we’ll be focusing on the publicly traded C corporation because that type is most likely to be required to use GAAP. The reason for this is that the SEC requires audited financial statements to be submitted annually and made available to the investing public. In order to facilitate a clean audit opinion, financial statements have to be prepared according to GAAP.

]]>
Assignment: Non-Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-non-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:39 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-non-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Non-Current Liabilities

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Discussion: Off-Balance Sheet Financing https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-off-balance-sheet-financing/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:38 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-off-balance-sheet-financing/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Off-Balance Sheet Financing link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Disclosures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures-3/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:37 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures-3/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify common disclosures related to noncurrent liabilities

 

One last look at Ford’s balance sheet, just the liabilities section:

Ford Credit debt payable within one year (Note 20)51,17952,371Ford Credit long-term debt (Note 20)88,88787,658Deferred income taxes (Note 7)597490

FORD MOTOR COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(in millions)
Description December 31, 2018 December 31, 2019
Subcategory, LIABILITIES
Payables $     21,520 $     20,673
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 20,556 22,987
Automotive debt payable within one year (Note 20) 2,314 1,445
Other debt payable within one year (Note 20) 130
Liabilities held for sale (Note 24) 526
      Total current liabilities Single line
95,569
Single line
98,132
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 23,588 25,324
Automotive long-term debt (Note 20) 11,233 13,233
Other long-term debt (Note 20) 600 470
      Total liabilities Single line
220,474
Single line
225,307

 

From the AICPA Financial Reporting Framework for Small- and Medium-Sized Entities Presentation and Disclosure Checklist:

Long-Term Debt [chapter 6]

Disclosure

  1. For bonds, debentures, and similar securities, mortgages, and other long-term debt, has the entity disclosed
  2. the title or description of the liability?
  3. the interest rate?
  4. the maturity date?
  5. significant terms (for example, covenant details)?
  6. the amount outstanding, separated between principal and accrued interest?
  7. the currency in which the debt is payable if it is not repayable in the currency in which the entity measures items in its financial statements?
  8. the repayment terms, including the existence of sinking fund, redemption, and conversion provisions? [6.15]
  9. Has the entity disclosed the carrying amount of any financial liabilities that are secured? [6.16]
  10. Has the entity disclosed
  11. the carrying amount of assets it has pledged as collateral for liabilities?
  12. the terms and conditions relating to its pledge? [6.16]
  13. Has the entity disclosed the aggregate amount of payments estimated to be required in each of the next five years to meet repayment, sinking fund, or retirement provisions of financial liabilities? [6.17]
  14. For financial liabilities recognized at the statement of financial position date, has the entity disclosed
  15. whether any financial liabilities were in default or in breach of any term or covenant during the period that would permit a lender to demand accelerated repayment?
  16. whether the default was remedied, or the terms of the liability were renegotiated, before the financial statements were available to be issued? [6.18]
  17. [sic] The maximum potential amount of future payments (undiscounted) the guarantor could be required to make under the guarantee before any amounts that may possibly be recovered under recourse or collateralization provisions in the guarantee (see items d–e that follow)? (When the terms of the guarantee provide for no limitation to the maximum potential future payments under the guarantee, that fact should be disclosed. When the guarantor is unable to develop an estimate of the maximum potential amount of future payments under its guarantee, the guarantor should disclose that it cannot make such an estimate.)
  18. The current carrying amount of the liability, if any, for the guarantor’s obligations under the guarantee, regardless of whether the guarantee is freestanding or embedded in another contract?
  19. The nature of any recourse provisions that enable the guarantor to recover from third parties any of the amounts paid under the guarantee?
  20. The nature of any assets held as collateral or by third parties that, upon the occurrence of any triggering event or condition under the guarantee, the guarantor can obtain and liquidate to recover all, or a portion of, the amounts paid under the guarantee? [17.39]
  21. Has the entity disclosed the following items:
  22. Interest capitalized?
  23. Unused letters of credit?
  24. Long-term debt agreements subject to subjective acceleration clauses, unless the likelihood of the acceleration of the due date is remote? [6.19]
  25. For an entity that issues any of the following financial liabilities or equity instruments, has the entity disclosed information to enable users of the financial statements to understand the effects of features of the instrument, as follows:
  26. For a financial liability that contains both a liability and an equity element, the

following information about the equity element including, when relevant:

  1. The exercise date or dates of the conversion option?
  2. The maturity or expiry date of the option?

iii. The conversion ratio or the strike price?

  1. Conditions precedent to exercising the option?
  2. Any other terms that could affect the exercise of the option, such as the existence of covenants that, if contravened, would alter the timing or price of the option?
  3. For an instrument that is indexed to the entity’s equity or an identified factor, information that enables users of the financial statements to understand the nature, terms, and effects of the indexing feature, the conditions under which a payment will be made, and the expected timing of any payment? [6.20]

Two people sitting at a desk.As you can see, debt and other liabilities continue to be an area of concern for financial analysts and therefore for the FASB and the accounting profession. Much of the fraud that went on with WorldCom and Enron centered around off-balance sheet financing and other undisclosed liabilities and falsified sources of cash and other funding.

What this means is that disclosures around debt that accompany the financial statements are complicated and detailed. Rather than try to duplicate all of those disclosures here, go to Ford’s online Annual Report and explore them carefully. See how much of the information you now recognize, and also notice what questions you may still have about those numbers and that qualitative information.

]]>
Putting it Together: Non-Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-non-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:37 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-non-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> A man holding a Business newspaper.

You’ve seen that in accounting, long-term debt generally refers to a company’s loans and other liabilities that will not become due within one year of the balance sheet date. Often on the balance sheet, those noncurrent liabilities aren’t subtotaled like current liabilities. You saw that on the Ford balance sheet (just the liabilities section is shown here):

Noncurrent liabilities are everything that isn’t current and include things like vehicle loans, bonds payable, capital lease obligations, pension, and other post-retirement benefit obligations, and deferred income taxes.

You’ve also seen how the amount of any long-term obligation that will be due within one year is reported on the balance sheet as a current liability. In essence, it’s that simple. But you’ve also seen how complicated it can be to determine when a liability exists, as was in the case of some of the historically off-balance-sheet financing, like leases. In fact, the lease industry became popular many years ago because companies needed assets but didn’t want to show large amounts of debt on the balance sheet, so they “rented” equipment and even buildings under long-term leases and recorded the expense as a monthly rent expense with no asset and no liability. As far back as 1949, the CAP (predecessor of the APB) recognized that companies were treating long-term leases as operating leases. It wasn’t until 1964 that the APB (predecessor of the FASB) issued guidance requiring some leases to be classified as a purchase with debt. It wasn’t until 1976 that the FASB issued FAS 13, Accounting for Leases. In 1996, as part of the convergence initiative, the FASB once again started to address leases, and after the Enron disaster, the initiative to recognize leases in a more thoughtful manner picked up steam.

The take-away from all of this is that even something as seemingly straight-forward as debt can be complicated and is always evolving, requiring us accountants to stay informed and up-to-date, and to be alert to the issues.

]]>
Financial Statement Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-presentation-3/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:36 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-presentation-3/ Read more »]]>
  • Report non-current liabilities on the balance sheet

 

Ford Credit debt payable within one year (Note 20)51,17952,371Ford Credit long-term debt (Note 20)88,88787,658Deferred income taxes (Note 7)597490

FORD MOTOR COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(in millions)
Description December 31, 2018 December 31, 2019
Subcategory, LIABILITIES
Payables $     21,520 $     20,673
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 20,556 22,987
Automotive debt payable within one year (Note 20) 2,314 1,445
Other debt payable within one year (Note 20) 130
Liabilities held for sale (Note 24) 526
      Total current liabilities Single line
95,569
Single line
98,132
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 23,588 25,324
Automotive long-term debt (Note 20) 11,233 13,233
Other long-term debt (Note 20) 600 470
      Total liabilities Single line
220,474
Single line
225,307

 

You can probably see some of the inter-relationships between current and non-current liabilities. The most notable is that long-term debt includes a current portion that has to be split out on the face of the financial statements. It is usually entitled “current portion of long-term debt”, but on the Ford Motor Company balance sheet, it is conveniently called “debt payable within one year” and is detailed in Note 20.

In addition, note the amount of $25.324 billion reported as “Other liabilities and deferred revenue: is detailed in Note 17 (along with details of the current other liabilities of $22.987 billion):

Accrued interest9881,128OPEB5,2205,740

NOTE 17. OTHER LIABILITIES AND DEFERRED REVENUE
     Other liabilities and deferred revenue at December 31 were as follows (in millions):
Description 2018 2019
Subcategory, Current
Dealer and dealers’ customer allowances and claims $     11,369 $     13,113
Deferred revenue 2,095 2,091
Employee benefit plans 1,755 1,857
OPEB 339 332
Pension 204 184
Operating lease liabilities 367
Other 3,806 3,914
      Total current other liabilities and deferred revenue Single line
$     20,556Double line
Single line
$     22,987Double line
Subcategory, Non-current
Pension $     9,423 $     9,878
Dealer and dealers’ customer allowances and claims 2,497 1,921
Deferred revenue 3,985 4,191
Operating lease liabilities 1,047
Employee benefit plans 1,080 1,104
Other 1,383 1,443
      Total non-current other liabilities and deferred revenue Single line
$     23,588Double line
Single line
$     25,324Double line

 

The Pension and OPEB (other post-employment benefits, such as health insurance) are long-term liabilities because they represent the present value of the future payments to employees who have or will retire and qualify for company benefits.

On the income statement, for finance leases, interest on the finance right-of-use liability and amortization (depreciation) on the finance right-of-use asset are presented in the same manner as the entity presents all other interest and depreciation expenses on similar assets. For operating leases, lease expense is included in the operating expenses.

]]>
Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:35 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journal-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Record entries associated with leases

 

Finance Lease

For a finance lease, the lessee debits the fixed asset account by the present value of the minimum lease payments. The credit to lease liability account is the difference between the value of the equipment and cash paid at the beginning of the year. The lessee records depreciation expense on the asset just like any other purchased asset, and the lease liability account is treated just like a note payable with a declining balance.

Operating Lease with Right-of-Use Asset

A person signing a lease.

The calculations may seem complicated at first, but in essence, it is a simple two-step process:

  1. Determine the present value of the lease payments
  2. Determine the direct payments that are part of the right-to-use asset

Here is an example of the entries you would make for an operating lease that creates a right-of-use asset:

  • Assume a six-year auto lease with no renewal options that calls for a $4,000 lease payment, paid at the end of each year.
  • The company’s normal borrowing rate is 9%.
  • There is an initial direct cost of $1,000.

The lease liability will be recorded as the present value of the six payments, discounted at 9%.

  • Therefore, the lease liability would equal $17,943.60
  • (Present value of an ordinary annuity of $4,000 at 9% for six years factor = 4.4859)

The right-of-use asset will be recorded as the lease liability plus initial direct costs plus prepayments less any lease incentives

Therefore, the right-of-use asset would be calculated as $17,943.60 (lease liability) + $1,000.00 (direct costs) = $18,943.60

The journal entry would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Right-of-use asset $18,943.60
      Lease liability $17,943.60
      Checking account $1,000.00

Two coworkers looking at a computer screen.As the lease is paid down, the present value is recalculated and the right-of-use assets are depreciated. The change in the lease is a combination of interest, principal, and amortization.

The exception for leases with a term of 12 months or less permits the lessee to make an accounting policy election not to recognize leased assets and lease liabilities, and instead recognize lease expenses on a straight line basis over the lease term, consistent with the accounting for operating leases under SFAS 13. Basically, this means the lessee debits lease expense for the lease payments when it credits the checking account for the disbursement, and doesn’t have to recognize an asset.

 

]]>
Introduction to Reporting Long-Term Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-long-term-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:35 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-long-term-liabilities/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Illustrate proper reporting of long-term liabilities

You may have noticed that, much like with assets, certain categories can include both non-current and current liabilities. In the assets section of the balance sheet, we saw that some investments could be current and some non-current. In the liabilities section, we see that long-term debt includes a current portion, and you can see that below on the liabilities section of the balance sheet for Ford Motor Company for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2019.

Notice, too, Ford presents their comparative report with the current year in the rightmost column, unlike many of the other companies we’ve observed so far, that show the most current year in the leftmost column. GAAP doesn’t go into that much detail in prescribing the presentation, but most companies show newest to oldest from left to right.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(in millions)
Description December 31, 2018 December 31, 2019
Subcategory, LIABILITIES
Payables $     21,520 $     20,673
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 20,556 22,987
Automotive debt payable within one year (Note 20) 2,314 1,445
Other debt payable within one year (Note 20) 130
Liabilities held for sale (Note 24) 526
      Total current liabilities Single line
95,569
Single line
98,132
Other liabilities and deferred revenue (Note 17) 23,588 25,324
Automotive long-term debt (Note 20) 11,233 13,233
Other long-term debt (Note 20) 600 470
      Total liabilities Single line
220,474
Single line
225,307

 
Also, notice that Ford makes reference to the footnotes for each line item of both current and non-current liabilities, and in this section, you’ll be studying both the presentation of long-term debt and other liabilities and the disclosures that go with them.

]]>
Finance and Operating Leases https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/finance-and-operating-leases/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:34 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/finance-and-operating-leases/ Read more »]]>
  • Distinguish between a finance lease and an operating lease

 

ASU 2016-02, which was effective for publicly traded companies after Dec. 15, 2018, states that all leases, whether classified as operating or capital leases (called “finance leases” under the new standard), create a right-of-use asset and a liability that should appear on the lessee’s balance sheet.

In general terms:

  • A capital lease or finance lease is one where the lessee records the leased asset as if he or she purchased the leased asset using funding provided by the lessor.
  • An operating lease functions much like a traditional lease, where the lessee pays to use an asset but doesn’t enjoy any of the ownership economic benefits nor incur any of the risks that come with ownership.

Under an operating lease, a single lease cost, generally allocated on a straight line basis over the lease term, is presented in the income statement. Under a finance lease, we recognize interest on the lease liability and the lease expense is typically higher in the earlier years of the lease term.

Note: The FASB made these recent changes to more closely align with IFRS, which does not distinguish lease classifications for a lessee. All leases are accounted for similar to the way GAAP accounts for finance leases.

Lessor accounting is also slightly different between the two bases of accounting. A lessor (the company leasing the asset to some other company) has three categories to determine classification under US GAAP: an operating, a direct financing, or a sales-type lease. If a lessor has a direct financing lease, the selling profit is deferred at the commencement date and included in the measurement of the net investment on the lease. A lessor only has two categories to classify a lease under IFRS: an operating or a finance lease. Selling profit may be recognized at the lease commencement for all finance leases.

In this section though, we will be focusing on the liability created by the lessee (the company leasing the asset from some other company).

For the lessee, there are five criteria for determining if a lease is a finance lease:

  • The lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset to the lessee by the end of the lease term.
  • The lease grants the lessee an option to purchase the underlying asset that the lessee is reasonably certain to exercise.
  • The lease term is for the major part of the remaining economic life of the underlying asset unless the commencement date of the lease falls at or near the end of the economic life of the underlying asset.
  • The present value of the sum of lease payments and any residual value guaranteed by the lessee not already reflected in lease payments equals or exceeds substantially all of the fair value of the underlying asset.
  • The underlying asset is of such a specialized nature that it is expected to have no alternative use to the lessor at the end of the lease term.

 

Under the old standard, a capital lease (now called finance lease) created a debt and an asset, and an operating lease did not. Now, the only difference between the two is that a finance lease creates an asset and a corresponding debt, just like a purchase with a note payable, while an operating lease creates a liability with an offsetting asset called a “right-of-use” asset.

In short, most leases are recorded as a liability that is reported like debt with a corresponding asset:

Lease Type Balance Sheet Income Statement Profile of total lease cost
Finance Lease ROU Asset and Lease liability Operating expense: amortization of ROU Asset
Interest expense: interest expense on lease liability
Front loaded
Operating Lease ROU Asset and Lease liability Operating expense: lease expense Typically straight-line
To illustrate the complexity of this issue, see Roadmap Series — Leases (December 2022)—a 958 page “summary” of the rules around recognizing and presenting lease transactions.
]]>
Effective Interest Rate https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/effective-interest-rate/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:33 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/effective-interest-rate/ Read more »]]>
  • Discuss the effective interest rate method of amortizing bond premium and discount

 

Rather than using the straight line method of amortizing discounts or premiums, the preferable approach to recording amortization is the effective-interest method that uses a constant percentage of the carrying value, rather than an equal dollar amount each year, similar to the double-declining balance method of depreciation or fixed assets.

The amount of amortization is the difference between the cash paid for interest and the calculated amount of bond interest expense, and at the end of the bond carrying period, the unamortized discount or premium would be zero.

Let’s take a look at the concept of effective interest rate from the bond investor’s point of view.

A black Tesla car hooked up to a Tesla charging station.

For instance, on March 5, 2014, Tesla Inc. (TSLA) issued $1.2 billion in fixed-rate bonds ($1,000 face value each, so 1.2 million bonds) with a maturity date of March 01, 2021, and a fixed coupon rate of 1.25%, payable semi-annually. The debt received an S&P rating of B- when it was issued. So each bond of $1,000 pays $12.50 per year, but the average investor may be looking for something like 7%, or 10%, depending on what else is available in the market, so let’s say the investor paid $625 for one of the $1000 bonds. The $12.50 per year in interest on a $625 investment is still only a 2% return, but when (if) the bond matures 7 years later, the investor also gains an additional $375 over what was paid for the bond. In this case, the effective rate would be a 7% ROI on the difference between the investment and the maturity value, plus the 2% coupon rate, for a combined yield of 9%.

To find the ROI on the investment, divide the maturity value by the purchase price (1000/625 = 1.6). Find a future value table of $1. On that table, find the row for n=7 (7 years). Look for a factor close to 1.6 (you should find it in the column for 7% annual return.)  You could check this mathematically by taking 625 * 1.077 which would give you the future value of 625 invested for 7 years at 7% compounded annually (it comes to $1,003.61 which is close enough for this purpose).

Assume that Premium Corp. issues 100, five-year, semi-annual, $1,000 bonds with an 8% coupon. Premium Corp. receives $108,530 because the market rate is 6% (the bonds sold at a premium because the coupon rate was higher than the market rate).

Instead of just dividing the premium by five to get the annual amortization (or by 10 to get the semi-annual adjustment), Premium Corp. uses the effective interest method to amortize the premium. For the first payment, we multiply the carrying amount of $108,530 by 6% and then divide that by two (or multiply by half) = $3,255.90.

The coupon payment is $4,000 (cash disbursement) but the interest expense is only $3,255.90. Therefore the premium amortization is $744.10 ($4,000 – $3,255.90). The premium amortization reduces the net book value of the debt to $107,785.90 ($108,530 – $744.10). This new balance would then be used to calculate the effective interest for the next period. This process would be repeated each period, as shown in the following table:

Period ending Book Value Interest expense at 6%, semi-annual Coupon Payment Premium Amortization Book Value, end of period
6/30/X1 108,530.00 3,255.90 4,000.00 (744.10) 107,785.90
12/31/X1 107,785.90 3,233.58 4,000.00 (766.42) 107,019.48
6/30/X2 107,019.48 3,210.58 4,000.00 (789.42) 106,230.06
12/31/X2 106,230.06 3,186.90 4,000.00 (813.10) 105,416.96
6/30/X3 105,416.96 3,162.51 4,000.00 (837.49) 104,579.47
12/31/X3 104,579.47 3,137.38 4,000.00 (862.62) 103,716.86
6/30/X4 103,716.86 3,111.51 4,000.00 (888.49) 102,828.36
12/31/X4 102,828.36 3,084.85 4,000.00 (915.15) 101,913.21
6/30/X5 101,913.21 3,057.40 4,000.00 (942.60) 100,970.61
12/31/X5 100,970.61 3,029.12 4,000.00 (970.61) 100,000.00

Note that the last amortization amount was adjusted slightly to fully amortize the premium.

Period ending Premium Premium Amortization Unamortized Premium
6/30/X1 8,530.00 (744.10) 7,785.90
>12/31/X1 7,785.90 (766.42) 7,019.48
6/30/X2 7,019.48 (789.42) 6,230.06
12/31/X2 6,230.06 (813.10) 5,416.96
6/30/X3 5,416.96 (837.49) 4,579.47
12/31/X3 4,579.47 (862.62) 3,716.86
6/30/X4 3,716.86 (888.49) 2,828.36
12/31/X4 2,828.36 (915.15) 1,913.21
6/30/X5 1,913.21 (942.60) 970.61
12/31/X5 970.61 (970.61) (0.00)

The initial journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds and the final journal entry to record repayment at maturity would be identical to those demonstrated for the straight line method. However, each journal entry to record the periodic interest expense recognition would vary and can be determined by reference to the preceding amortization table.

For instance, the following entry would record interest on June 30, 20X3:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X3
June 30 Interest expense 3,162.51
June 30 Premium on bonds payable 837.49
June 30       Checking Account 4,000.00
June 30 To record coupon payment on bonds

Assume that Discount Corp. issues 100, five-year, semi-annual, $1,000 bonds with an 8% coupon during a period of time when the market rate is 10% and so receives $92,278 because the coupon rate is lower than the market rate.

Period ending Book Value Interest expense at 10%, semi-annual Coupon Payment Discount Amortization Book Value, end of period
6/30/X1 92,278.00 4,613.90 4,000.00 613.90 92,891.90
12/31/X1 92,891.90 4,644.60 4,000.00 644.60 93,536.50
6/30/X2 93,536.50 4,676.82 4,000.00 676.82 94,213.32
12/31/X2 94,213.32 4,710.67 4,000.00 710.67 94,923.99
6/30/X3 94,923.99 4,746.20 4,000.00 746.20 95,670.19
12/31/X3 95,670.19 4,783.51 4,000.00 783.51 96,453.69
6/30/X4 96,453.69 4,822.68 4,000.00 822.68 97,276.38
12/31/X4 97,276.38 4,863.82 4,000.00 863.82 98,140.20
6/30/X5 98,140.20 4,907.01 4,000.00 907.01 99,047.21
12/31/X5 99,047.21 4,952.36 4,000.00 952.79 100,000.00
Period ending Discount Discount Amortization Unamortized Discount
6/30/X1 7,722.00 613.90 7,108.10
12/31/X1 7,108.10 644.60 6,463.51
6/30/X2 6,463.51 676.82 5,786.68
12/31/X2 5,786.68 710.67 5,076.01
6/30/X3 5,076.01 746.20 4,329.81
12/31/X3 4,329.81 783.51 3,546.31
6/30/X4 3,546.31 822.68 2,723.62
12/31/X4 2,723.62 863.82 1,859.80
6/30/X5 1,859.80 907.01 952.79
12/31/X5 952.79 952.79 0.00

Each journal entry to record the periodic interest expense recognition would vary, and can be determined by reference to the preceding amortization table. For instance, the following entry would record interest on June 30, 20X3:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X3
June 30 Interest expense 4,746.20
June 30       Discount on bonds payable 746.20
June 30       Checking Account 4,000.00
June 30 To record coupon payment on bonds

Now that you understand the effective interest rate method of amortizing bond premiums and discounts we’ll move on to other long-term liabilities.


]]>
Introduction to Leases https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-leases/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:33 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-leases/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Understand accounting for leases

One of the newest areas of concern for the FASB has been “off balance sheet” financing, such as leases. Up until 2020, GAAP classified leases, which are essentially long-term rental agreements, as either a capital lease or an operating lease. The basic difference between the two was one of ownership. For instance, if you leased a vehicle for five years and then took ownership at the end of the five years, that would be a capital lease. If at the end of the five years there was some huge residual payment that you would have to pay to take ownership, it was an operating lease.

Under the old rules, the lessee (the organization that is renting or leasing the asset), treated a capital lease as debt with a resulting asset and liability, just as if the company had purchased the asset using a note payable. Rental payments on an operating lease were treated as monthly expenses with no asset.

In 2016, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Accounting Standards Update (ASU) No. 2016-02, Leases. It took effect for publicly traded companies in 2018 and 2019 and for non-public companies in 2020.

The new standard provides for a dual approach for lessee accounting, with leases that transfer substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership as finance leases, with remaining leases accounted for as operating leases.

Accounting for a finance lease is similar to the old capital lease rules. The asset and related lease liability are recognized at the present value of the future lease payments and the debt (the lease) is a long-term liability with a short-term component.

Under the new rules, an operating lease also results in the recognition of a right-to-use asset (which we saw in the module on non-current assets) and a lease obligation.

The change may seem slight and technical, but it is significant. If we look back at The Home Depot’s list of assets, we see that in 2020, when the new rule took effect, the company added almost $6 billion ($5,595 million) in operating lease right-of-use assets, and we see an addition $828 million in current operating lease liabilities (the rest of the lease liability is in non-current liabilities not shown here). Although the additional debt is offset by additional assets, you can see that prior to the new rule, The Home Depot had $6 billion in assets that were financed by debt in the form of lease agreements that were not being shown. It wasn’t fraud, it was just that GAAP didn’t require or even allow companies to recognize those assets.

That’s why GAAP is constantly changing and adapting and also why, as accountants, we have to stay current on what is going on in the industry.

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
       Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
          Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Category, Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Single line Single line

 

In addition, we see that long-term operating lease liabilities increased by $5.066 billion, and the total of the additional assets ($5.595 billion) is very close to the additional new debt recognized ($0.828 billion in current liabilities and $5.066 billion in long-term liabilities). The difference is most likely attributable to amortization of the lease liability and depreciation on the right-to-use assets. In any case, the liability existed before the accounting pronouncement–it is now being recognized and shown on the balance sheet and for The Home Depot, it is not an insignificant amount.

       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Long-term debt, excluding current installments Single line28,670 Single line26,807
Long-term operating lease liabilities 5,066
Deferred income taxes 706 491
Other long-term liabilities 1,535 1,867
          Total liabilities Single line
54,352
Single line
45,881
Single line Single line

 

]]>
Amortizing Premiums and Discounts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/amortizing-premiums-and-discounts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:32 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/amortizing-premiums-and-discounts/ Read more »]]>
  • Record the entries for a bond issue sold at a discount and sold at a premium, using the straight-line amortization method

 

Bonds Issued at a Discount

When we issue a bond at a discount, remember we are selling the bond for less than it is worth or less than we are required to pay back. We always record Bond Payable at the amount we have to pay back which is the face value or principal amount of the bond. The difference between the price we sell it and the amount we have to pay back is recorded in a contra-liability account called Discount on Bonds Payable. This discount will be removed over the life of the bond by amortizing (which simply means dividing) it over the life of the bond. The discount will increase bond interest expense when we record the semiannual interest payment.

Here is a video example and then we will do our own example:You can view the transcript for “Issuing Bonds at a Discount” here (opens in new window).

 

Bonds Issued at a Discount: Carr

Assume Jan 1 Carr issues $100,000, 12% 3-year bonds for a price of 95 1/2 or 95.50% with interest to be paid semi-annually on June 30 and December 30 for cash. We know this is a discount because the price is less than 100%. The entry to record the issue of the bond on January 1 would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jan 1 Checking Account 95,500 ($100,000 × 95.5%)
Jan 1 Discount on Bonds Payable 4,500 ($100,000 bond – $95,500 cash)
Jan 1       Bonds Payable 100,000
Jan 1 To record issue of bond at a discount.

When a company issues bonds at a premium or discount, the amount of bond interest expense recorded each period differs from bond interest payments. The bond pays interest every 6 months on June 30 and December 31. We will amortize the discount using the straight-line method meaning we will take the total amount of the discount and divide by the total number of interest payments. In this example, the discount amortization will be $4,500 discount amount / 6 interest payment (3 years × 2 interest payments each year). The entry to record the semi-annual interest payment and discount amortization would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Bond Interest Expense 6,750
      Discount on Bonds Payable 750 ($4,500 / 6 interest payments)
      Checking Account 6,000 ($100,000 × 12% x 6 months / 12 months)
To record periodic interest payment and discount amortization.

At maturity, we would have completely amortized or removed the discount so the balance in the discount account would be zero. Our entry at maturity would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jan 1 (maturity) Bonds Payable 100,000
Jan 1 (maturity) Checking Account 100,000
Jan 1 (maturity)       Bonds Payable 100,000
Jan 1 (maturity) To record payment of bond at maturity.

 

Bonds Issued at a Premium

When we issue a bond at a premium, we are selling the bond for more than it is worth. We always record Bond Payable at the amount we have to pay back which is the face value or principal amount of the bond. The difference between the price we sell it and the amount we have to pay back is recorded in a liability account called Premium on Bonds Payable. Just like with a discount, the premium amount will be removed over the life of the bond by amortizing (which simply means dividing) it over the life of the bond. The premium will decrease bond interest expense when we record the semiannual interest payment.

Here is a video example and then we will do our own example:You can view the transcript for “Issuing Bonds at a Premium” here (opens in new window).

Bonds Issued at a Premium: Carr

Assume Jan 1 Carr issues $100,000, 12% 3-year bonds for a price of 105 1/4 or 105.25% with interest to be paid semi-annually on June 30 and December 31 for cash. We know this is a discount because the price is less than 100%. The entry to record the issue of the bond on January 1 would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jan 1 Checking Account 105,250 ($100,000 × 105.25%)
Jan 1 Premium on Bonds Payable 5,250 ($105,250 cash – $100,000 bond)
Jan 1       Bonds Payable 100,000
Jan 1 To record issue of bond at a premium.

Remember, when a company issues bonds at a premium or discount, the amount of bond interest expense recorded each period differs from bond interest payments. A premium decreases the amount of interest expense we record semi-annually. In our example, the bond pays interest every 6 months on June 30 and December 31. We will amortize the premium using the straight line method meaning we will take the total amount of the premium and divide by the total number of interest payments. In this example, the premium amortization will be $5,250 discount amount / 6 interest payment (3 years × 2 interest payments each year). The entry to record the semi-annual interest payment and discount amortization would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jun 30 Bond Interest Expense 5,125 ($6,000 cash interest – 875 premium amortization)
Jun 30 Premium on Bonds Payable 875 ($5,250 premium / 6 interest payments)
Jun 30       Checking account 6,000 ($100,000 x 12% × 6 months / 12 months)
Jun 30 To record period interest payment and premium amortization.

Just like with a discount, we would have completely amortized or removed the premium so the balance in the premium account would be zero. Our entry at maturity would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jan 1 (maturity) Bonds Payable 100,000
Jan 1 (maturity)       Checking Account 100,000
Jan 1 (maturity) To record payment of bond at maturity.

 

Bonds Issued at Face Value between Interest Dates

Companies do not always issue bonds on the date they start to bear interest. Regardless of when the bonds are physically issued, interest starts to accrue from the most recent interest date. Firms report bonds to be selling at a stated price “plus accrued interest.” The issuer must pay holders of the bonds a full six months’ interest at each interest date. Thus, investors purchasing bonds after the bonds begin to accrue interest must pay the seller for the unearned interest accrued since the preceding interest date. The bondholders are reimbursed for this accrued interest when they receive their first six months’ interest check.

Using facts for Valley bonds dated 2010 December 31, suppose Valley issued its bonds on May 31, instead of on December 31. The entry required is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
May 31 Checking Account 105,000
May 31       Bonds payable 100,000
May 31       Bond interest payable 5,000
May 31 To record bonds issued at face value plus accrued interest.

This entry records $5,000 received for the accrued interest as a debit to Cash and a credit to Bond Interest Payable.

The entry required on June 30, when the full six months’ interest is paid, is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
June 30 Bond Interest Expense 1,000
June 30 Bond interest payable 5,000
June 30       Checking Account 6,000
June 30 To record bond interest payment.

This entry records $1,000 interest expense on the $100,000 of bonds that were outstanding for one month. Valley collected $5,000 from the bondholders on May 31 as accrued interest and is now returning it to them.


]]>
Issue Bonds https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/issue-bonds/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:31 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/issue-bonds/ Read more »]]>
  • Record the entries associated with a bond issue sold at face value

Usually, companies sell their bond issues through an investment company or a banker called an underwriter. The underwriter performs many tasks for the bond issuer, such as advertising, selling, and delivering the bonds to the purchasers. Often the underwriter guarantees the issuer a fixed price for the bonds, expecting to earn a profit by selling the bonds for more than the fixed price.

When a company sells bonds to the public, many purchasers buy the bonds. Rather than deal with each purchaser individually, the issuing company appoints a trustee to represent the bondholders. The trustee usually is a bank or trust company. The main duty of the trustee is to see that the borrower fulfills the provisions of the bond indenture. A bond indenture is the contract or loan agreement under which the bonds are issued. The indenture deals with matters such as the interest rate, maturity date and maturity amount, possible restrictions on dividends, repayment plans, and other provisions relating to the debt. An issuing company that does not adhere to the bond indenture provisions is in default. If that happens the trustee takes action to force the issuer to comply with the indenture.

When a company issues bonds, it incurs a long-term liability on which periodic interest payments must be made, usually twice a year. If interest dates fall on other than balance sheet dates, the company must accrue interest in the proper periods. The following examples illustrate the accounting for bonds issued at face value on an interest date and issued at face value between interest dates.

Bonds issued at face value on an interest date

Valley Company’s accounting year ends on December 31. On 2010 December 31, Valley issued 10-year, 12 percent bonds with a $100,000 face value, for $100,000. The bonds are dated December 31, call for semiannual interest payments on June 30 and December 31, and mature in 10 years on December 31. Valley made the required interest and principal payments when due. The entries for the 10 years are as follows:

On December 31, the date of issuance, the entry is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Dec 31 Cash 100,000
Dec 31       Bonds Payable 100,000
Dec 31 To record bonds issued at face value.

On each June 30 and December 31 for 10 years, beginning 2010 June 30 (ending 2020 June 30), the entry would be (remember, calculate interest as Principal x Interest x Frequency of the Year):

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jun 30 Bond Interest Expense ($100,000 x 12% x 6 months / 12 months) 6,000
Jun 30       Cash 6,000
Jun 30 To record semiannual interest payment.

On December 31 (10 years later), the maturity date, the entry would include the last interest payment and the amount of the bond:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Dec 31 Bond Interest Expense ($100,000 x 12% x 6 months / 12 months) 6,000
Dec 31 Bonds Payable 100,000
Dec 31       Cash 106,000
Dec 31 To record final semiannual interest and bond repayment.

Note that Valley does not need any interest adjusting entries because the interest payment date falls on the last day of the accounting period. The income statement for each of the 10 years would show Bond Interest Expense of $12,000 ($ 6,000 x 2 payments per year); the balance sheet at the end of each of the years 1 to 8 would report bonds payable of $100,000 in long-term liabilities. At the end of the ninth year, Valley would reclassify the bonds as a current liability because they will be paid within the next year.

The real world is more complicated. For example, assume the Valley bonds were dated October 31, issued on that same date, and pay interest each April 30 and October 31. Valley must make an adjusting entry on December 31 to accrue interest earned for November and December but not paid until April 30 of the next year. That entry would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Dec 31 Bond Interest Expense ($100,000 x 12% x 2 months / 12 months) 2,000
Dec 31       Interest Payable (or Bond Interest Payable) 2,000
Dec 31 To record accrued interest for November and December payable in April.

The April 30 entry in the next year would include the accrued amount from December of last year and interest expense for Jan to April of this year. We will credit cash since we are paying cash to the bondholders.

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Dec 31 Bond Interest Expense ($100,000 x 12% x 4 months / 12 months) 4,000
Dec 31       Interest Payable (or Bond Interest Payable) 2,000
Dec 31       Cash   ($100,000 x 12% x 6 months / 12 months) 6,000
Dec 31 To record payment of 6 months bond interest.

Since the 6-month period ending October 31 occurs within the same fiscal year, the bond interest entry would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Oct 15 Bond Interest Expense ($100,000 x 12% x 6 months / 12 months) 6,000
Oct 31       Cash 6,000
Oct 31 To record semiannual interest payment.

Each year Valley would make similar entries for the semiannual payments and the year-end accrued interest. The firm would report the $2,000 Bond Interest Payable as a current liability on the December 31 balance sheet for each year.

Bonds issued at face value between interest dates

Companies do not always issue bonds on the date they start to bear interest. Regardless of when the bonds are physically issued, interest starts to accrue from the most recent interest date. Firms report bonds to be selling at a stated price “plus accrued interest.” The issuer must pay holders of the bonds a full six months’ interest at each interest date. Thus, investors purchasing bonds after the bonds begin to accrue interest must pay the seller for the unearned interest accrued since the preceding interest date. The bondholders are reimbursed for this accrued interest when they receive their first six months’ interest check.

Using the facts for the Valley bonds dated 2010 December 31, suppose Valley issued its bonds on May 31, instead of on December 31. The entry required is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
May 31 Cash 105,000
May 31       Bonds payable 100,000
May 31       Bond interest payable ($100,000 x 12% x (5/12)) 5,000
May 31 To record bonds issued at face value plus accrued interest.

This entry records the $5,000 received for the accrued interest as a debit to Cash and a credit to Bond Interest Payable.

The entry required on June 30, when the full six months’ interest is paid, is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
June 30 Bond Interest Expense ($100,000 x 0.12 x (1/12)) 1,000
June 30 Bond interest payable 5,000
June 30       Cash 6,000
June 30 To record bond interest payment.

This entry records $1,000 interest expense on the $100,000 of bonds that were outstanding for one month. Valley collected $5,000 from the bondholders on May 31 as accrued interest and is now returning it to them.


]]>
Bond Valuation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/bond-valuation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:31 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/bond-valuation/ Read more »]]>
  • Determine the items that impact the selling price of a bond

It would be nice if bonds were always issued at the par or face value of the bonds. But, certain circumstances prevent the bond from being issued at the face amount. We may be forced to issue the bond at a discount or premium.

 

This video will explain the basic concepts and then we will review examples:You can view the transcript for “Bond Interest Rates” here (opens in new window).

 

Bond prices and interest rates

The price of a bond issue often differs from its face value. The amount a bond sells for above face value is a premium. The amount a bond sells for below face value is a discount. A difference between face value and issue price exists whenever the market rate of interest for similar bonds differs from the contract rate of interest on the bonds. The effective interest rate (also called the yield) is the minimum rate of interest that investors accept on bonds of a particular risk category. The higher the risk category, the higher the minimum rate of interest that investors accept. The contract rate of interest is also called the stated, coupon, or nominal rate is the rate used to pay interest. Firms state this rate in the bond indenture, print it on the face of each bond, and use it to determine the amount of cash paid each interest period. The market rate fluctuates from day to day, responding to factors such as the interest rate the Federal Reserve Board charges banks to borrow from it; government actions to finance the national debt; and the supply of, and demand for, money.

Market and contract rates of interest are likely to differ. Issuers must set the contract rate before the bonds are actually sold to allow time for such activities as printing the bonds. Assume, for instance, the contract rate for a bond issue is set at 12%. If the market rate is equal to the contract rate, the bonds will sell at their face value. However, by the time the bonds are sold, the market rate could be higher or lower than the contract rate.

Market Rate = Contract Rate Bond sells at par (or face or 100%)
Market Rate < Contract Rate Bonds sells at premium (price greater than 100%)
Market Rate > Contract Rate Bond sells at discount (price less than 100%)

As shown above, if the market rate is lower than the contract rate, the bonds will sell for more than their face value. Thus, if the market rate is 10% and the contract rate is 12%, the bonds will sell at a premium as the result of investors bidding up their price. However, if the market rate is higher than the contract rate, the bonds will sell for less than their face value. Thus, if the market rate is 14% and the contract rate is 12%, the bonds will sell at a discount. Investors are not interested in bonds bearing a contract rate less than the market rate unless the price is reduced. Selling bonds at a premium or a discount allows the purchasers of the bonds to earn the market rate of interest on their investment.

Computing long-term bond prices involves finding present values using compound interest. Buyers and sellers negotiate a price that yields the going rate of interest for bonds of a particular risk class. The price investors pay for a given bond issue is equal to the present value of the bonds.

Issuers usually quote bond prices as percentages of face value—100 means 100% of face value, 97 means a discounted price of  97% of face value, and 103 means a premium price of 103% of face value. For example, one hundred $1,000 face value bonds issued at 103 have a price of $103,000 (100 bonds x $1,000 each x 103%). Regardless of the issue price, at maturity, the issuer of the bonds must pay the investor(s) the face value (or principal amount) of the bonds.

You can view the transcript for “Discounts, Premiums and Bonds at Par (Intermediate Financial Accounting Tutorial #12)” here (opens in new window).


]]>
Introduction to Bonds Payable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-bonds-payable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:30 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-bonds-payable/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: demonstrate an understanding of bonds payable

A corporate bond is issued by a corporation seeking to raise money in order to expand the business. The term corporate bond is usually applied to longer-term debt instruments with a maturity date falling at least a year after the issue date. (The term commercial paper is sometimes used for instruments with a shorter maturity period. ) Sometimes, corporate bond is used in reference to all bonds with the exception of those issued by governments in their own currencies. Strictly speaking, however, the term only applies to bonds issued by corporations.

Corporate Bond: A corporate bond is issued by a corporation seeking to raise money in order to expand its business.

Corporate bonds are often listed on major exchanges (and known as listed bonds) and ECNs, and the coupon (i.e., the interest payment) is usually taxable. Sometimes, the coupon can be zero with a high redemption value. However, though many are listed on exchanges, the vast majority of corporate bonds in developed markets are traded in decentralized, dealer-based, over-the-counter markets.

In contrast to long-term notes, which usually mature in 10 years or less, bond maturities often run for 20 years or more.

Generally, a bond issue consists of a large number of $1,000 bonds rather than one large bond. For example, a company seeking to borrow $100,000 would issue one hundred $1,000 bonds rather than one $100,000 bond. This practice enables investors with less cash to invest to purchase some of the bonds.

Bonds derive their value primarily from two promises made by the borrower to the lender or bondholder. The borrower promises to pay (1) the face value or principal amount of the bond on a specific maturity date in the future and (2) periodic interest at a specified rate on face value at stated dates, usually semiannually, until the maturity date.

Large companies often have numerous long-term notes and bond issues outstanding at any one time. The various issues generally have different stated interest rates and mature at different points in the future. Companies present this information in the footnotes to their financial statements. Promissory notes, debenture bonds, and foreign bonds are shown with their amounts, maturity dates, and interest rates.

From a company’s point of view, the bond or debenture falls under the liabilities section of the balance sheet under the heading of Debt. A bond is similar to the loan in many aspects however it differs mainly with respect to its tradability. A bond is usually tradable and can change many hands before it matures; while a loan usually is not traded or transferred freely.

]]>
Types of Bonds https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/types-of-bonds/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:30 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/types-of-bonds/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe various types of bonds

 

Debt financing has a language of its own, so before we delve into the types of bonds, let’s review some financial terms related to bonds.

Issuer: The entities that borrow money by issuing bonds which include the government, government agencies, municipal bodies, and corporations.

Face Value: The principal amount that is returned on maturity. As you will see, this is not always the amount of the proceeds that the issuer receives.

The words "coupon code" on the screen of a smartphone.Coupon: The rate of interest paid on the bond. Bonds used to be printed on paper and the holder would redeem a coupon in order to get paid.

Rating: Every bond is usually rated by credit rating agencies. A higher credit rating usually results in a lower coupon rate.

Coupon payment frequency: The coupon (interest) payments on the bond usually have a payment frequency. The coupons are usually paid annually or semi-annually; however, they may be paid quarterly or monthly as well.

Yield: The effective return the investor makes on the bond is called the yield. If you buy a bond for $1000 with a 10% coupon that pays semi-annually, you get $50 every six months in interest and the yield is 10%. However, if market rates are different than the coupon rate, you may pay more or less than the face value of $1000 for the bond in order to get a yield that is the equivalent to the market rate. We’ll cover this later.

A collection of stock and bond bank notes.Different types of bonds: The simplest bond has a fixed interest rate and a defined maturity and is usually issued and redeemed at the face value. It is also known as a straight bond or a bullet bond or even a plain vanilla bond.

Zero coupon bonds: A zero coupon bond is a type of bond where there are no coupon payments made. It is not that there is no yield; the zero coupon bonds are issued at a price lower than the face value (say $950) and then pay the face value on maturity ($1000). The difference will be the yield for the investor.

Convertible bonds: Convertible bonds are a special variety of bonds that can be converted to equity shares at a specified time at a pre-set conversion price. These kinds of bonds are often used in start-up financing by investors who want the initial security of debt but who might later want to buy into the company as shareholders.

Callable bonds: Bonds that are issued with a specific feature where the issuer has the right to buy back the bonds at a pre-agreed price and a pre-fixed date are callable bonds. Since these bonds allow a benefit to the issuer to repay off the liability before maturity, these bonds usually offer a coupon rate higher than a normal straight coupon-bearing bond.

Puttable bonds: Bonds are issued with a specific feature where the bondholder has the right to sell back the bonds at a pre-fixed date before maturity are puttable bonds. Since these bonds allow a benefit to the bondholders to ask for the principal repayment before maturity, these bonds usually offer a coupon rate lower than a normal straight coupon-bearing bond.

Serial bonds: A serial bond is a bond issue structured so that a portion of the outstanding bonds mature at regular intervals until all of the bonds have matured. Because the bonds mature gradually over a period of years, these bonds are used to finance projects that provide a consistent income stream for bond repayment.

In addition, bonds, like notes payable, could be secured or unsecured, and there is a specific class of high-risk, high-yield bonds called junk bonds that are usually unsecured and likely to not be repaid, hence the high yield.

]]>
Time Value of Money https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/time-value-of-money/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:29 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/time-value-of-money/ Read more »]]>
  • Understand the implication of the time value of money

 

The time value of money draws from the idea that rational investors prefer to receive money today rather than the same amount of money in the future because of money’s potential to grow in value over a given period of time.

A balance scale with a clock on one side and a stack of coins on the other side.

Assume you have the option to choose between receiving $10,000 now versus $10,000 in two years. It’s reasonable to assume most people would choose the first option. Receiving $10,000 today has more value and utility than receiving it in the future due to the opportunity costs associated with the wait. In addition to the fact that if you had the $10,000 right now you could invest it in something that would grow to twice or three times that, there is an additional cost to waiting–inflation. In 1970, the average price of a dozen eggs was $0.62. In 2010 it was $1.47. In 2015 it was $2.09. (U.S. Bureau of the Census, Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1970, Bicentennial Edition, Part 2., Bureau of Labor Statistics, 2011; 2015)

Here is another way to look at it. If you invested $10,000 on June 26, 1992, in the newly publicly traded Starbucks, Inc., you would have 29,411.77 shares of stock in 2020 (due to stock splits and stock dividends). If you had sold those shares on January 17, 2020, when each one was worth $93.62, you would have $2.754 million.

If you’d taken the same $10,000 and invested it in a savings bond that returned 7% per year, you would have approximately $67,000.

If a dozen eggs in 1992 cost $0.86, you could have bought almost 12,000 cartons of eggs with your $10,000. If you stuck the $10,000 in a coffee can and hit it under the sink for 23 years, by 2015 that same $10,000 would only buy about 4,800 cartons. That’s the effect of inflation. If you’d invested that $10,000 in Starbucks, by 2015 you could have sold your Starbucks stock at about $60 per share and then have bought over 860,000 cartons of eggs.

The point here is that investors are looking for growth. A savings bond is fairly low-risk, but the trade-off is a low rate of return. Investing in Starbucks is very risky, so the potential for gain is much greater, as is the potential for loss. That is the nature of the marketplace.

There are two basic ways to assess the time value of money: present value and future value.

The present value of our $10,000 investment in a 7% savings bond for 28 years is $10,000. The future value is $67,000 (actually $66,488.38).

Time Value of Money Formula

Depending on the exact situation in question, the time value of money formula may change slightly. For example, in the case of annuity payments, the generalized formula has additional or less factors. But in general, the most fundamental TVM formula takes into account the following variables:

  • FV = Future value of money
  • PV = Present value of money
  • i = interest rate
  • n = number of compounding periods per year
  • t = number of years

Based on these variables, the formula for TVM is:

FV = PV × [ 1 + (i / n) ] (n × t)

Time Value of Money Examples

Assume a sum of $10,000 is invested for one year at 10% interest. The future value of that money is:

FV = $10,000 × (1 + (10% / 1) ^ (1 × 1) = $11,000

The formula can also be rearranged to find the value of the future sum in present day dollars.

For example, the value of $5,000 one year from today, compounded at 7% interest, is:

PV = $5,000 / (1 + (7% / 1) ^ (1 × 1) = $4,673

Effect of Compounding Periods on Future Value

The number of compounding periods can have a drastic effect on the TVM calculations. Taking the $10,000 example above, if the number of compounding periods is increased to quarterly, monthly, or daily, the ending future value calculations are:

  • Quarterly Compounding: FV = $10,000 x (1 + (10% / 4) ^ (4 × 1) = $11,038
  • Monthly Compounding: FV = $10,000 x (1 + (10% / 12) ^ (12 × 1) = $11,047
  • Daily Compounding: FV = $10,000 x (1 + (10% / 365) ^ (365 × 1) = $11,052

This shows TVM depends not only on interest rate and time horizon but also on how many times the compounding calculations are computed each year.

A person typing on a large calculator.

In addition to calculating the present and future value of a lump sum, there are ways to calculate the present and future values of a stream of cash flows (annuity), and there are tables and online calculators as well as spreadsheet functions to help determine rates of return (yield), present values, and future values of all kinds of scenarios.

This relates to long-term debt and financing because often, as in bonds and leases, the carrying value of the liability is based on the present value of the total future obligations, rather than say the total of the payments.

 

]]>
Long-Term Financing Options https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/long-term-financing-options/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:28 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/long-term-financing-options/ Read more »]]>
  • Evaluate the alternatives for financing on a long-term basis

 

A company uses various kinds of debt to finance its operations. Two major classifications of long-term debt are:

  • Secured: A debt obligation is considered secured if creditors have recourse to the assets of the company on a proprietary basis or otherwise ahead of general claims against the company. You may be most familiar with this debt in terms of either a mortgage on a house or an auto loan. Big companies can secure debt with a variety of assets, from accounts receivable to inventory to fixed assets.
  • Unsecured: Unsecured debt comprises financial obligations, where creditors do not have recourse to the assets of the borrower to satisfy their claims. The general public has access to this kind of debt in the form of credit cards and personal loans. As you may be aware, the risk is substantially higher, and therefore the interest rate is higher.

The stock exchange.In addition to being either secured or unsecured, debt could be classified as:

  • Private: Private debt is usually held by a bank or other commercial lender.
  • Public: Public debt is a general definition covering all financial instruments freely tradeable on a public exchange or over the counter, with few if any restrictions, and include bonds and commercial paper.

A basic loan or “term loan” is the simplest form of debt. It consists of an agreement to lend a fixed amount of money, called the principal sum, for a fixed period of time, with the amount to be repaid by a certain date (balloon) or in installments (amortized), plus interest.

 

YourCo needs $100,000 for long-term expansion plans that include some remodeling, the purchase of a competitor, and other capital and infrastructure improvements. YourCo has an extremely good credit rating and credit history with the bank.

Alternative 1

YourCo borrows $100,000 from the bank on December 1 of 20X1 at 12% interest with interest-only payments monthly for 8 years, the last interest payment and principal balance due on December 1 of 20X9.

Monthly interest payments will be $1,000, and the ending principal balance will be $100,000.

Alternative 2

A woman on a laptop sitting next to a bar graph. There is an arrow above the bars pointing in an upward direction.

YourCo borrows $100,000 from the bank on December 1 of 20X1 at 12% interest (compounded monthly) with principal and interest due on December 1 of 20X9.

Monthly payments will be $0, and the ending principal and interest balance will be $259,927.29. You could find this amount on a future value table, using 96 periods (8 years, interest is compounded monthly) and a rate of 1% (12% annually divided by 12 months), or you could use a formula: principle × (1+i)^n.

That would be $100,000 × 1.0196 = 100000 × 2.599272925559384…

Which is a total of $259,927.29.

Or, you could create a running calculation on a spreadsheet like this:

Month Beg. Bal. Interest Ending Bal.
1 1-Dec-X1   100,000.00 1,000.00   101,000.00
2 1-Jan-X2   101,000.00 1,010.00   102,010.00
3 1-Feb-X2   102,010.00 1,020.10   103,030.10
4 1-Mar-X2   103,030.10 1,030.30   104,060.40
5 1-Apr-X2   104,060.40 1,040.60   105,101.01
6 1-May-X2   105,101.01 1,051.01   106,152.02
94 1-Sep-X9   252,282.87 2,522.83   254,805.70
95 1-Oct-X9   254,805.70 2,548.06   257,353.76
96 1-Nov-X9   257,353.76 2,573.54   259,927.29
Balloon pmt 1-Dec-X9   259,927.29

From this example, you can see the compounding effect of the interest rate as the unpaid interest increases the balance upon which future interest is calculated.

Alternative 3

YourCo borrows $100,000 from the bank on December 1 of 20X1 at 12% interest (compounded monthly) with principal and interest due monthly so that the loan is completely amortized by  December 1 of 20X9.

Monthly payments will be $1,625.28, and the ending principal and interest balance will be $0.

You could calculate this amount using an online amortization program or by using a spreadsheet (Excel function looks like this: =PMT(0.01,96,100000,0,0) where 0.01 is the rate, 96 is the number of periods, 100000 is the present value, 0 is the future value, and the final value of 0 represent payments at the end of each period, as opposed to a 1 that would indicate a payment at the beginning of each period.

Here is a partial amortization schedule. Notice the total payments, principal plus interest, come to $156,026.88 which is significantly less than the balloon payment option (alternative 2).

payment Beg. Bal. Payment New balance Interest Ending Bal.
1-Dec-X1   100,000.00   100,000.00 1,000.00   101,000.00
1 1-Jan-X2   101,000.00 ($1,625.28) 99,374.72     993.75   100,368.46
2 1-Feb-X2   100,368.46 ($1,625.28) 98,743.18     987.43 99,730.61
3 1-Mar-X2 99,730.61 ($1,625.28) 98,105.33     981.05 99,086.38
4 1-Apr-X2 99,086.38 ($1,625.28) 97,461.10     974.61 98,435.71
5 1-May-X2 98,435.71 ($1,625.28) 96,810.42     968.10 97,778.53
93 1-Sep-X9   6,405.22 ($1,625.28)   4,779.94       47.80   4,827.74
94 1-Oct-X9   4,827.74 ($1,625.28)   3,202.45       32.02   3,234.48
95 1-Nov-X9   3,234.48 ($1,625.28)   1,609.19       16.09   1,625.28
96 1-Dec-X9   1,625.28 ($1,625.28)       (0.00)

Also note two things about Alternative 3 in particular:

  1.  On December 31, 20X1, the company incurred $1,000 in interest expense on the loan but did not pay that until the Jan 1 payment, so that $1,000 in interest will have to be accrued (debit interest expense, credit interest payable).
  2. In reporting the debt on the balance sheet at December 31, 20X1, the balance of $100,000 would be split between long-term debt reported as a noncurrent liability, and current portion of long-term debt reported as a current liability like this:
    1. Current portion (due within the next 12 months) = $7,009.47
    2. Noncurrent portion = $92,990.53
    3. These numbers come from the amortization schedule.

In addition to the current portion of long-term debt, the company must also disclose pertinent information for the amounts owed on the notes. This will include the interest rates, maturity dates, collateral pledged, limitations imposed by the creditor, etc.

These concepts will apply to all kinds of long-term debt, including leases and bonds, but on the next page, we will focus on the journal entries needed for a simple note payable.

]]>
Entries Related to Notes Payable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/entries-related-to-notes-payable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:28 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/entries-related-to-notes-payable/ Read more »]]>
  • Record journal entries related to notes payable

 

Let’s follow this example: YourCo borrows $100,000 from the bank on December 1 of 20X1 at 12% interest (compounded monthly) with principal and interest due monthly so that the loan is completely amortized by December 1 of 20X9. Monthly payments will be $1,625.28

Notes Payable is a general ledger liability account in which a company records the face amounts of the promissory notes that it has issued. The balance in Notes Payable represents the amounts that remain to be paid. The journal entry to record the receipt of the proceeds of the note is fairly straight-forward–increase the checking account to reflect the deposit, and increase a long-term liability account called Notes Payable:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
Dec 1 Checking Account 100,000
Dec 1       Notes Payable 100,000
Dec 1 To record proceeds from bank loan

Since a note payable will require the issuer/borrower to pay interest, the issuing company will have interest expense. Under the accrual method of accounting, the company will also have another liability account entitled Interest Payable. In this account, the company records the interest it has incurred but has not paid as of the end of the accounting period.

JournalPage 115
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
Dec 31 Interest expense 1,000.00
Dec 31       Interest payable 1,000.00
Dec 31 To record interest on bank loan

Interest incurred in December on the $100,000 principle for one month at 12% annual interest was $1,000, so that amount is recorded both as an expense and a payable (current liability).

In January, when the payment is made, the entry looks like this:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X2
January 1 Interest payable 1,000.00
January 1 Notes Payable 625.28
January 1       Checking Account 1,625.28
January 1 To record monthly payment on bank loan

Here are T account representations of the liability accounts (the checking account with the credit of $1,685.28 is not shown):

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an interest payable chart. On the credit side, there is a beginning balance of 1,000 dollars. On January 1st, there is a debit entry of 1,000 dollars. There is a credit total of 0 dollars. On the right side is a notes payable chart. On the credit side, there is a beginning balance of 100,000 dollars. On January 1st, there is a debit entry of 625.28 dollars. There is a debit total of 99,374.72 dollars.

The general ledger account for Notes Payable has been reduced by the amount of the principal portion of the payment, and should agree with the amortization schedule.

payment Beg. Bal. Payment New balance Interest Ending Bal.
1-Dec-X1   100,000.00   100,000.00 1,000.00   101,000.00
1 1-Jan-X2   101,000.00 ($1,625.28) 99,374.72     993.75   100,368.46
2 1-Feb-X2   100,368.46 ($1,625.28) 98,743.18     987.43 99,730.61
3 1-Mar-X2 99,730.61 ($1,625.28) 98,105.33     981.05 99,086.38
4 1-Apr-X2 99,086.38 ($1,625.28) 97,461.10     974.61 98,435.71
5 1-May-X2 98,435.71 ($1,625.28) 96,810.42     968.10 97,778.53

Notice when you are studying financial statements that interest expense can be

  1. capitalized as part of inventory (for instance, auto dealers often finance the inventory) or part of the cost of an asset, such as a building where construction is being financed, or
  2. shown on the income statement AFTER income from operations.

The reason for showing interest expense after income from operations is so if an investor is comparing two companies that are very similar, except one borrowed very little from third parties, instead relying on equity financing, and the other is heavily debt financed, the interest expense does not affect income from operations, so the two companies are easier to compare.

Also, there normally isn’t an account for the current portion of long-term debt. It is simply a reclassification that happens as the financial statements are being prepared (often on the worksheet).

 


]]>
Why It Matters: Non-Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-non-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:27 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-non-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]>  

When situations arise that require cash in excess of what is available in the bank and investments, companies raise funds from one of two sources:

  1. equity financing
  2. long-term borrowing

Equity financing means gathering additional capital from the existing owners or taking on new owners and will be covered in a later chapter.

A piggy bank behind three stacks of coins.

Debt financing may either be through borrowing from a bank (e.g. a mortgage on a building or a note payable) or the corporation could issue commercial paper or bonds. This kind of financing is often long-term (due in more than a year) and is therefore reported and accounted for slightly differently than current liabilities and short term borrowing.

In this section, we will cover types of bonds, commercial paper, and capital leases, that are treated like debt financing. In addition, this section will include a review of the time value of money since that affects how we account for long-term debt.

]]>
Introduction to Long-term Financing https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-long-term-financing/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:27 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-long-term-financing/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: recognize long-term debt financing options

There are two basic ways companies raise money for long-term capital projects:

  • Debt financing
  • Equity financing

People in a cafe.Equity financing means bringing in new owners and is addressed in another module. In a prior module, you were exposed to short-term financing options, such as notes payable, revolving lines of credits, and accounts payable. Short-term financing is usually used to fund current operations, and that’s why it is classified as a current liability. In this module, we’ll be studying using long-term debt to finance expansion and other capital projects.

This section will cover the basics of recording borrowing from a bank, including the ramifications of paying interest on money, which is basically like rent. In subsequent sections, we’ll cover more sophisticated forms of long-term borrowing, including leases and bonds, as well as some of the other noncurrent liabilities that companies incur in order to do business.

]]>
Assignment: Calculating Payroll at Kipley Co https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-calculating-payroll-at-kipley-co/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:26 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-calculating-payroll-at-kipley-co/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Calculating Payroll at Kipley Co

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Discussion: Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:25 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Current Liabilities link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Disclosures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures-2/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures-2/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify common disclosures related to current liabilities

 

Let’s refer back to The Home Depot annual report for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020 one last time.

Disclosures for current liabilities are relatively straightforward for the most part. They include the standard statement on using estimates (page 38):

Use of Estimates

We have made a number of estimates and assumptions relating to the reporting of assets and liabilities, the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities, and reported amounts of revenues and expenses in preparing these financial statements in conformity with GAAP. Actual results could differ from these estimates.

And leases (p 38–39) that include both the policy for recording the asset granted under the lease and the liability:

Leases

We categorize leases at their inception as either operating or finance leases. Lease agreements cover certain retail locations, office space, warehouse and distribution space, equipment, and vehicles. Operating leases are included in operating lease right-of-use assets, current operating lease liabilities, and long-term operating lease liabilities in our consolidated balance sheets. Finance leases are included in net property and equipment, current installments of long-term debt, and long-term debt, excluding current installments in our consolidated balance sheets.

Later, on pages 46–49, the company discloses more details about leases and related assets as well as future minimum lease payments.

In addition to these standard disclosures required by GAAP, The Home Depot includes a statement on its insurance liability (p 41) because (a) it is a significant amount, and (b) the company is largely self-insured, which is also significant and requires disclosure:

Insurance

We are self-insured for certain losses related to general liability (including product liability), workers’ compensation, employee group medical, and automobile claims. We recognize the expected ultimate cost for claims incurred (undiscounted) at the balance sheet date as a liability. The expected ultimate cost for claims incurred is estimated based upon analysis of historical data and actuarial estimates.

Our self-insurance liabilities, which are included in accrued salaries and related expenses, other accrued expenses and other long-term liabilities in the consolidated balance sheets, were $1.3 billion at February 2, 2020 and February 3, 2019.

We also maintain network security and privacy liability insurance coverage to limit our exposure to losses such as those that may be caused by a significant compromise or breach of our data security. Insurance-related expenses are included in SG&A.

Short term debt is described in note 4:

4. DEBT AND DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS.
We have commercial paper programs with an aggregate borrowing capacity of $3.0 billion. All of our short-term borrowings in fiscal 2019 and fiscal 2018 were under these commercial paper programs. In connection with these programs, we have back-up credit facilities with a consortium of banks for borrowings up to $3.0 billion, which consist of a 364-day $1.0 billion credit facility and a five-year $2.0 billion credit facility, which expires in December 2022. In December 2019, we completed the renewal of our 364-day $1.0 billion credit facility, extending the maturity from December 2019 to December 2020.

There are also extensive required disclosures for income taxes and finally, an unusually short disclosure for contingent liabilities on page 60:

11. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
At February 2, 2020, we had outstanding letters of credit totaling $384 million, primarily related to certain business transactions, including insurance programs, trade contracts, and construction contracts.

We are involved in litigation arising in the normal course of business. In management’s opinion, any such litigation is not expected to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition, results of operations, or cash flows.

And although not an actual liability, but rather a significant event that happened after the financial statement audit but before publication, the company has disclosed the potential adverse effects of the 2020 pandemic:

13. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
The recent outbreak of the novel coronavirus COVID-19, which was declared a pandemic by the World Health Organization on March 11, 2020, has led to adverse impacts on the U.S. and global economies and created uncertainty regarding potential impacts to our supply chain, operations, and customer demand. The pandemic has impacted and could further impact our operations and the operations of our suppliers and vendors as a result of quarantines, facility closures, and travel and logistics restrictions. As a result of COVID-19, we have reduced store operating hours, expanded our paid time off policy for associates, and shifted certain store support operations to remote or virtual. We are also taking steps in our stores to manage foot traffic to better protect our customers and associates. In addition, in certain jurisdictions, we have had to cease sales of or delay commencement of work on certain services deemed “non-life-sustaining.” While the disruption caused by the pandemic is currently expected to be temporary, there is uncertainty regarding its duration. Therefore, while we expect the pandemic to impact our results of operations, financial position, and liquidity, we cannot reasonably estimate the impact at this time.

As a result, the Company is taking action to enhance its financial flexibility. In March 2020, we expanded our commercial paper programs from $3.0 billion to $6.0 billion and suspended our share repurchases. We also entered into an additional 364-day $3.5 billion credit facility in March 2020, which together with our existing credit facilities backs up our expanded commercial paper programs.

You can refer to the AICPA November 2017 Financial Reporting Framework for Small- and Medium-Sized Entities Presentation and Disclosure Checklist for more details on presentation and disclosure of current liabilities and subsequent events.

And for a bit more involved and descriptive disclosure on warranties, commitments, and contingencies, see Ford’s 2019 Annual Report, Note 27, pages 63–64.

]]>
Putting it Together: Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> Coworkers engaged in a team meeting.

As you have seen, the current liabilities section of the balance sheet shows the debts a company owes that must be paid within one year. These debts indirectly offset current assets, which are theoretically the source of the short-term debt payments.

Current liabilities include things such as accounts payable balances, accrued payroll, and short-term and current long-term debt.​

Accounts payable is the opposite of accounts receivable, which is the money owed to a company. The accounts payable line item arises when a company receives a product or service before it pays for it. The accounts payable for your company is an accounts receivable for the vendor.

Accounts payable, or AP for short, is often one of the largest current liabilities companies face because they are constantly ordering new products or paying wholesale vendors and suppliers for services or merchandise.

Accrued payroll represents money owed to employees that the company has not yet paid and in addition to salaries, wages, bonuses, and other forms of compensation, it usually includes the liabilities associated with payroll taxes and withholdings.

Two coworkers discussing data on a computer.

Short-Term debt and the current portion of Long-Term debt represent the payments on a company’s loans or other borrowings that are due in the next 12 months.

Short-term debt is normal in business. For example, many businesses buy inventory and raw materials on short-term credit (accounts payable) and/or take out short-term loans to take advantage of the same-as-cash discounts (e.g. 2/10 net 30). Also, since we record expenses as incurred, such as payroll, we often have a liability on the books for an expense that hasn’t been paid yet, but that matches revenue. Remember that accrual basis accounting is an economic measure of a company’s results of operations and financial position, rather than just cash. If a company was reporting on a cash basis, the only current asset, in fact, the only asset, would be cash, and there would be no liabilities such as estimated warranties, contingent liabilities, deferred revenue (because under the cash basis it would just be called revenue when received, rather than when earned) or even accounts payable.

All of these accrued expenses and deferred revenues arise because we are recognizing revenue as earned and expenses as incurred.

]]>
Introduction to Reporting Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Illustrate proper reporting of current liabilities

As we discussed earlier, the reason current assets are reported on a classified balance sheet separately from noncurrent assets is so that analysts and investors can easily compare current assets to current liabilities.

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
       Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
          Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Category, Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Single line Single line

 

The next section of the balance sheet would be noncurrent liabilities:

       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Long-term debt, excluding current installments Single line28,670 Single line26,807
Long-term operating lease liabilities 5,066
Deferred income taxes 706 491
Other long-term liabilities 1,535 1,867
          Total liabilities Single line
54,352
Single line
45,881
Single line Single line

 

As you may have guessed, comparing total assets to total liabilities, owners’ equity for The Home Depot is actually a deficit. You’ll study the individual aspects of corporate equity in a later module, but for now, just notice that:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Common stock, par value $0.05; authorized 10,000 shares; issued: 1,786 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,782 shares at February 3, 2019; Outstanding: 1,077 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,105 shares at February 3, 2019 89 89
Paid-in capital 11,001 10,578
Retained earnings 51,729 46,423
Accumulated other comprehensive loss (739) (772)
Treasury stock, at cost, 709 shares at February 2, 2020 and 677 shares at February 3,2019 (65,196) (58,196)
          Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity Single line
(3,116)
Single line
(1,878)
          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Note See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

 

Notice that total liabilities (current and noncurrent) and owners’ equity (called stockholders’ equity for a corporation) of $51.236 billion is equal to total assets of $51.236 billion.

]]>
Financial Statement Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-presentation-2/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-presentation-2/ Read more »]]>
  • Reporting current liabilities on the financial statements

 

As you can see from The Home Depot, Inc. partial balance sheet, current liabilities are presented in some detail. Income taxes payable are presented as a separate line item even though the amount is much smaller than the others, rather than being included in “Other accrued expenses” because it is of interest to investors.

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
     Sales taxes payable 605 656
     Deferred revenue 2,116 1,782
     Income taxes payable 55 11
     Current installments of long-term debt 1,839 1,056
     Current operating lease liabilities 828
     Other accrued expenses 2,677 2,611
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Single line Single line

 

On this balance sheet, short term debt is listed before accounts payable which indicates it may be rolled over even more rapidly than the regular trade payables, which are probably 30-day due dates. More information on that line item is available in Note 4 of the financials, along with information on the current portion of long-term debt and leases.

Look up any publicly traded company’s financial statements, and you’ll see on the balance sheet, current liabilities are reported separately from long-term liabilities. We will be covering long-term liabilities in detail in another module.

]]>
Practice: Contingent Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-contingent-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:22 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-contingent-liabilities/
  • Apply rules for contingent liabilities

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Practice: Accounting for Current Liabilities/Product Warranties https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-accounting-for-current-liabilities-product-warranties/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-accounting-for-current-liabilities-product-warranties/
  • Account for deferred and accrued current liabilities
  • Record transactions related to product warranties

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Contingent Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/contingent-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/contingent-liabilities/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply rules for contingent liabilities

 

A job interview.Contingent liabilities. The existence of the liability is uncertain and usually, the amount is uncertain because contingent liabilities depend (or are contingent) on some future event occurring or not occurring. Examples include liabilities arising from lawsuits, discounted notes receivable, income tax disputes, penalties that may be assessed because of some past action, and failure of another party to pay a debt that a company has guaranteed. When liabilities are contingent, the company usually is not sure that the liability exists and is uncertain about the amount.

FASB Statement No. 5 defines a contingency as “an existing condition, situation, or set of circumstances involving uncertainty as to possible gain or loss to an enterprise that will ultimately be resolved when one or more future events occur or fail to occur.”

There are three GAAP-specified categories of contingent liabilities: probable, possible, and remote.

  • Probable contingencies are likely to occur and can be reasonably estimated.
  • Possible contingencies do not have a more-likely-than-not chance of being realized but are not necessarily considered unlikely either.
  • Remote contingencies aren’t likely to occur and aren’t reasonably possible.

A river with garbage in it and a factory in the background.Any probable contingency needs to be reflected in the financial statements—no exceptions.

  • if the liability is probable and the amount can be reasonably estimated, companies should record contingent liabilities in the accounts.
  • If the liability is probable or possible but the amount can’t be determined or estimated, it has to be disclosed in the footnotes to the financial statements.
  • If the liability is remote, it should not be disclosed.

The following two examples from annual reports are typical of the disclosures made in notes to the financial statements. Be aware that just because a suit is brought, the company being sued is not necessarily guilty. One company included the following note in its annual report to describe its contingent liability regarding various lawsuits against the company:

Contingent Liabilities

Various lawsuits and claims, including those involving ordinary routine litigation incidental to its business, to which the Company is a party, are pending, or have been asserted, against the Company. In addition, the Company was advised…that the United States Environmental Protection Agency had determined the existence of PCBs in a river and harbor near Sheboygan, Wisconsin, USA, and that the Company, as well as others, allegedly contributed to that contamination. It is not presently possible to determine with certainty what corrective action, if any, will be required, what portion of any costs thereof will be attributable to the Company, or whether all or any portion of such costs will be covered by insurance or will be recoverable from others. Although the outcome of these matters cannot be predicted with certainty, and some of them may be disposed of unfavorably to the Company, management has no reason to believe that their disposition will have a materially adverse effect on the consolidated financial position of the Company.

Another company dismissed an employee and included the following note to disclose the contingent liability resulting from the ensuing litigation:

Contingencies

…A jury awarded $5.2 million to a former employee of the Company for an alleged breach of contract and wrongful termination of employment. The Company has appealed the judgment on the basis of errors in the judge’s instructions to the jury and insufficiency of evidence to support the amount of the jury’s award. The Company is vigorously pursuing the appeal.

The Company and its subsidiaries are also involved in various other litigation arising in the ordinary course of business.

Since it presently is not possible to determine the outcome of these matters, no provision has been made in the financial statements for their ultimate resolution. The resolution of the appeal of the jury award could have a significant effect on the Company’s earnings in the year that a determination is made; however, in management’s opinion, the final resolution of all legal matters will not have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial position.

Contingent liabilities may also arise from discounted notes receivable, income tax disputes, penalties that may be assessed because of some past action, and failure of another party to pay a debt that a company has guaranteed.

 

You can view the transcript for “Accounting Tutorial Contingent Liabilities Training Lesson 4.7” here (opens in new window).


]]>
Introduction to Other Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-other-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-other-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Identify other current liabilities

So far in this module, we’ve covered trade accounts payable and payroll, as well as a few smaller items such as income taxes and sales taxes payable. Although there are many potential categories of current liabilities, most of them follow the same rules and concepts as the ones you’ve seen so far and fall into one of the two major categories:

  • Accrued expenses
  • Deferred revenues

In this section, we’ll focus on a few more kinds of current liabilities that involve estimation and some extra judgment.

Let’s take a look at the consolidated balance sheet for Macy’s, Inc. as of February 1, 2020:

MACY’S INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(millions)
Description February 1, 2020 February 1, 2019
Subcategory, ASSETS
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     685 $     1,162
     Receivables 409 400
     Merchandise inventories 5,188 5,263
     Prepaid expenses and other current assets 528 620
          Total Current Assets Single line6,810 Single line7,445
Property and Equipment – net 6,633 6,637
Right of Use Assets 2,668
Goodwill 3,908 3,908
Other Assets 714 726
          Total Assets Single line21,172Double line Single line19,194Double line
Subcategory, LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Subcategory, Current Liabilities:
     Short-term debt $     539 $     43
     Mechandise accounts payable 1,682 1,655
     Accounts payable and accrued liabilities 3,448 3,366
          Total Current Liabilities Single line5,750 Single line5,232
Long-Term Debt 3,621 4,708
Long-Term Lease Liabilities 2,918
Deferred Income Taxes 1,169 1,238
Subcategory, Shareholders’ Equity
          Total Macy’s Inc. Shareholders’ Equity 6,377 6,436
          Total Shareholders’ Equity Single line
6,377
Single line
6,436
          Total Liabilities and Sharesholders’ Equity Single line
$     21,172
Double line
Single line
$     19,194
Double line
The accompanying notes are an intergral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
F-8

 

Current assets were $6.810 billion and current liabilities were $5.750 billion. Of the current liabilities, short-term debt and trade (merchandise) accounts payable are predictably at the top of the list. For a breakdown of the other accounts payable and accrued liabilities in the amount of 3.448 billion, we would explore the notes, and find this:

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS — (Continued)
7. Accounts Payable and Accrued Liabilities
Description February 1, 2020 February 1, 2019
Description (millions)
Accounts Payable $     977 $     983
Gift cards and customer rewards 839 856
Lease related liabilities(a) 399 180
Allowance for future sales returns 213 269
Accrued wages and vacation 194 268
Current portion of post employment and postretirement benefits 180 194
Taxes other than income taxes 145 134
Restructuring accruals, including severance 113 67
Accrued interest 41 51
Deferred real estate gains 23
Other 242 229
Total Single line
$     3,448
Double line
Single line
$     3,366
Double line
(a) As of February 1, 2020, the balance includes the current portion of operatin leases and finance leases accounted for under ASU 2016-02. As of February 1, 2019, lease related liabilities were accounted for under ASC Subtopic 840, Leases. See Note 4 for information on leases.

 

We see some accounts payable that are separate from the merchandise accounts payable, probably utilities, rent, and other non-inventory payables. We also see a deferred/unearned revenue account for gift card balances outstanding. Next is a line item for short-term and current lease obligations, followed by an allowance for future sales returns.

In an earlier section, you studied briefly, accrued wages. Notice that the company has also accrued vacation pay that has been earned by the employee and therefore incurred by the company, but that will be paid out in the future, as well as an accrual for retirees’ health and pension payments that are currently due.

Recall that FASB’s Concept Statement No. 6 defines liabilities as “probable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations of a particular entity to transfer assets or provide services to other entities in the future as a result of past transactions or events.”

Also recall that current liabilities are obligations that (1) are payable within one year or one operating cycle, whichever is longer, or (2) will be paid out of current assets or create other current liabilities.

Therefore, when preparing financial statements or auditing a company’s books, accountants must actively seek out any financial obligations that the company has committed to. You’ve seen this in action with things like gift cards and salaries and wages earned, as well as income tax due and of course trade accounts payable.

Other current liabilities include the income taxes due, interest due on loans, and some other liabilities that are less common, such as current obligations that arose from some restructuring and some gains on the sale of real estate in the prior year that were not recognized until the current year.

Some other common current liabilities include product warranties and contingent liabilities, such as pending lawsuits. These both require some estimating and judgment, as you’ll see on the following pages.

]]>
Product Warranties https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/product-warranties/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/product-warranties/ Read more »]]>
  • Record transactions related to product warranties

 

Estimated product warranty payable When companies sell products such as computers, often they must guarantee against defects by placing a warranty on their products. When defects occur, the company is obligated to reimburse the customer or repair the product. For many products, companies can predict the number of defects based on experience. To provide for a proper matching of revenues and expenses, the accountant estimates the warranty expense resulting from an accounting period’s sales which will be used as a reserve to pull actual warranty expenses from at a later date. The debit is to  Warranty Expense and the credit to Estimated Warranty Payable (or Liability).

To illustrate, assume that a company sells personal computers and warrants all parts for one year. The average price per computer is  $1,500, and the company sells 1,000 computers this year. The company expects 10% of the computers to develop defective parts within one year. By the end of the year, customers have returned 40 computers sold that year for repairs, and the repairs on those 40 computers have been recorded. The estimated average cost of warranty repairs per defective computer is  $150. To arrive at a reasonable estimate of product warranty expense, the accountant makes the following calculation:

Number of computers sold 1,000
Percent estimated to develop defects x 10%
Total estimated defective computers 100
Deduct computers returned as defective to date – 40
Estimated additional number to become

defective during warranty period

60
Estimated average warranty repair cost per computer: x $ 150
Estimated warranty payable $9,000

The entry made at the end of the accounting period is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Product Warranty Expense 9,000
Estimated Warranty Payable 9,000
To record estimated product warranty expense.

When a customer returns one of the computers purchased  for repair work during the warranty period, the company debits the cost of the repairs to Estimated Product Warranty Payable. For instance, assume that Evan Holman returns his computer for repairs within the warranty period. The repair cost includes parts $40, and labor $160. The company makes the following entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Estimated Warranty Payable 200
Repair Parts Inventory 40
Wages Payable 160
To record replacement of parts under warranty.
]]>
Practice: Payroll Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-payroll-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-payroll-journal-entries/
  • Prepare entries to accrue payroll and payroll-related taxes

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Payroll Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/payroll-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:18 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/payroll-transactions/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Account for common payroll transactions

We’ll be using the terms “gross” and “net” again.

  • Gross Pay: This is the amount of money employees are promised either hourly, weekly, or annually.
  • Net Pay: This is the amount an employee receives after all taxes and voluntary deductions have been taken out. It is also called “take-home pay”.

Deductions from gross pay to arrive at net pay include:

A collection of tax papers.

  • Federal Income Tax Withheld (also referred to as FIT): Employees fill out a document called a W-4 when hired. This document is used to calculate the amount of federal tax withheld.
  • State Income Tax Withheld (also referred to as SIT): A different form than the W-4 but the same concept, except it applies to the state. Not all states have a state income tax.
  • FICA Social Security Tax (also referred to as OASDI): This tax helps fund social security and is calculated as gross pay x 6.2% unless employees make OVER $118,500 in 2015 then employees are only responsible to pay 6.2% of $118,500 and nothing more.
  • FICA Medicare Tax (also referred to as HI): This tax helps fund medicare and is calculated as gross pay x 1.45%. Everyone must pay 1.45% of gross pay without limit.
  • Voluntary Deductions and Garnishments: Any deductions employees authorize will also reduce gross pay. This includes things like medical premiums, 401K and savings accounts, charity donations, etc.

The employer withholds money out of each employee’s paycheck for the items listed above and records those amounts as liabilities. There often is a separate checking or savings account for these amounts, just a liability recorded on the books that indicates a debt to each entity, such as the Federal government (FIT and FICA), state government (SIT) and whatever companies manage the retirement plan, the health insurance plan, etc…

In addition to amounts set aside out of the employee’s earnings, the company has to pay things like:

  • FICA Social Security Tax: This tax helps fund social security and is calculated as gross pay x 6.2% unless an employee makes OVER $118,500 in 2015 then employees are only responsible to pay 6.2% of $118,500 and nothing more for that employee.
  • FICA Medicare Tax: This tax helps fund medicare and is calculated as gross pay x 1.45%. Everyone must pay 1.45% of gross pay without limit.
  • Federal Unemployment Tax (FUTA): This tax is for unemployment claims and is typically calculated as 0.8% of the first $7,000 of an employee’s earnings. Once the employee has earned more than $7,000 in gross pay for the year, the company no longer has to pay FUTA tax.
  • State Unemployment Tax (SUTA): This tax is for state unemployment and does not have a consistent rate. The rate is provided by the state annually and can change each year by business.
  • Voluntary Deductions Matching: Any matching funds the company provides for insurance or retirement plans.

In the next section, we will look at the entries required for payroll with both the employee and employer side of the transactions.

]]>
Payroll Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/payroll-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:18 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/payroll-journal-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare entries to accrue payroll and payroll-related taxes

 

Assume a company had a payroll of $35,000 for the month of April. The company withheld the following amounts from the employees’ pay: federal income taxes $4,100; state income taxes $360; FICA taxes $2,678; and medical insurance premiums $940. This entry records the payroll:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
April Salaries Expense 35,000.00
April       Federal Income Tax Withheld Payable (given) 4,100.00
April       State Income Tax Withheld Payable (given) 360.00
April       FICA Social Security Taxes Payable ($35,000 x 6.2%) 2,170.00
April       FICA Medicare Tax Payable ($35,000 x 1.45%) 507.50
April       Employee Medical Insurance Payable (given) 940.00
April       Salaries Payable (35,000 – 4100 – 360 – 2170 – 507.50 – 940) 26,922.50
April To record the payroll for the month ended April 30.

All accounts credited in the entry are current liabilities and will be reported on the balance sheet if not paid prior to the preparation of financial statements. When these liabilities are paid, the employer debits each one and credits Cash.

Employers normally record payroll taxes at the same time as the payroll to which they relate. Assume the payroll taxes an employer pays for April are FICA taxes, state unemployment taxes (SUTA) $1,890; and federal unemployment taxes (FUTA). No employee has earned more than $7,000 in this calendar year. The entry to record these payroll taxes would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
April Payroll Tax Expense 4,848
April FICA Social Security Taxes Payable ($35,000 x 6.2%) 2,170
April FICA Medicare Tax Payable ($35,000 x 1.45%) 507.5
April FUTA Taxes Payable ($35,000 x 0.8%) 280
April SUTA Taxes Payable 1890
April To record employer’s payroll taxes.

These amounts are in addition to the amounts withheld from employees’ paychecks. The credit to FICA Taxes Payable is equal to the amount withheld from the employees’ paychecks. The company can credit both its own and the employees’ FICA taxes to the same liability account since both are payable at the same time to the same agency. When these liabilities are paid, the employer debits each of the liability accounts and credits Cash.

Watch this video to review how to record payroll and taxes.

You can view the transcript for “FA 8 5 Payroll and Payday” here (opens in new window).

 


]]>
Introduction to Payroll https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-payroll/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:17 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-payroll/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Describe payroll accounting

Two people sitting on opposite sides of a table.

For many companies, payroll can be one of the most significant expenses. In addition, there are other payroll related costs that add up quickly.

For example, your company hires a mid-level manager at $60,000 per year. That’s $5,000 per month. In addition to those gross wages, your company must pay into social security and medicare (Federal post-retirement savings and medical benefits) as well as Federal and state unemployment and state workers’ compensation. In addition, your company may offer subsidized health benefits and a retirement plan, as well as other perks such as education expenses, parking, life insurance, and a host of other benefits and extras that can easily cost another $2,000 to $3,000 a month.

On top of accounting for all of those items, payroll accounting involves withholding amounts from the employee’s paycheck to cover Federal income tax, the employee’s portion of social security and medicare, contributions to the company-sponsored retirement plan, health benefits, and things like child support and other garnishments, union dues, and other miscellaneous deductions. That’s why there are entire courses covering payroll accounting and entire departments to do that work in a large company.

]]>
Accounts Payable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts-payable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts-payable/ Read more »]]>
  • Define accounts payable and differentiate from other payables

 

A bill or invoice from a supplier of goods or services on credit is often referred to as a vendor invoice. The vendor invoices are entered as credits in the Accounts Payable account, thereby increasing the credit balance in Accounts Payable. When a company pays a vendor, it will reduce Accounts Payable with a debit amount. As a result, the normal credit balance in Accounts Payable is the amount of vendor invoices that have been recorded but have not yet been paid. The unpaid invoices are sometimes referred to as open invoices.

See the caption for the long description.
See the invoice long description here.

We covered trade accounts payable in some depth in the module on inventory purchases using this invoice:And we created this journal entry to record the receipt of inventory and the invoice under a perpetual inventory system using the gross method:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Inventory 20,7000
Dec 19       Accounts Payable 20,700.00
Dec 19 To record purchase of XPS-101 from Bryan Whls 200 count

We could also record this invoice using the net method. Notice when we are speaking about invoice terms, the “net 30” actually means you end up paying the full amount of $20,700, but when we are talking about recording an invoice, the net method refers to the amount of the invoice net of (minus) the discount. That’s because in the legal world of trade credit, “net” means the invoice amount after returns and allowances, whereas in the accounting department, “net” in this case means net of the discount. The word means the same thing in both lexicons, but are being applied differently. In any case, recording the invoice net of the discount looks like this under a perpetual system:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Purchases 20,300.00
Dec 19       Accounts Payable 20,300.00
Dec 19 To record purchase of XPS-101 from Bryan Whls 200 count less $400 discount

Notice we compute the discount on the invoiced amount of product, not including freight. The items were shipped FOB shipping point, which means the buyer (Geyer Company) is responsible for shipping costs since legal title transferred when the product left the seller’s shipping dock (the transporter is our agent). That means the discount is $400. The total discounted invoice amount for the purchase is then $19,600 plus freight of $700 = $20,300.

In summary:

  • On the invoice, “net 30” means pay the total amount due, net of any returns or allowances, in 30 days.
  • In recording, the “net method” means to record the invoice net of the discount.

Under the gross method of recording an invoice, if the discount is not taken, there is no entry other than a credit to the checking account for $20,700 and a debit to accounts payable that wipes out the amount due to Bryan on both the general ledger and the subsidiary ledger.

Under the net method, if the discount is not taken, the company would make an entry like this:

The entry is as you might expect it to be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
January 20 Accounts Payable 20,300.00
January 20 Discounts Lost 700.00
January 20       Checking Account 20,700.00
January 20 To record payment of Bryan invoice #1258 after the discount date

 

In this case, we recorded the payable net of the discount, but we had to pay the gross amount (which is called “net” on the invoice, but remember it means net of returns and allowances). So, we credit the checking account for the payment, debit accounts payable for the net amount of the invoice, and the difference becomes an expense that is roughly equivalent to interest expense because we did not pay the invoice promptly–we financed the purchase for a very short period of time (20 days or so). If you annualize that interest rate, it comes out to approximately 36.5%. This is why companies set up short-term notes payable (such as a revolving line of credit with the bank). Paying a small bit of interest on a bank note is far cheaper than racking up lost discounts. This is the advantage of recording invoiced net of the discount–your company can track the cost of missing the prompt payment window.

Under the gross method, if your company pays within the discount period (10 days in this case), the entry is as you might expect it to be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 29 Accounts payable 20,700.00
Dec 29       Inventory 400.00
Dec 29       Checking account 20,300.00
Dec 29 To record payment on invoice #1258 from Bryan Whls

Under the perpetual system, the cost of the inventory items would be reduced to reflect the discount taken. The checking account is reduced by the amount of the check written that includes the $19,600 discounted purchase price and $700 in freight. Accounts payable was recorded at the amount shown on the invoice (“gross” to accountants, “net” to purchasing folk) and was reduced to reflect the account paid in full.

Under the periodic system, instead of posting the $400 credit to inventory, it would be posted to an account called purchase discounts.

Other kinds of payables include wages payable, dividends payable, short-term notes, and any other liability that arises during the normal course of business but is not classified as an official “accounts payable”, and that classification is largely up to the accountants, although, in general, purchases of inventory and normal bills like rent, electricity, phone, supplies, and even insurance could be included in accounts payable.

You may now be wondering how the subsidiary ledger for Accounts Payable and the General Ledger are recorded? We’ll cover that next.

]]>
Subsidiary Ledgers and Controls https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/subsidiary-ledgers-and-controls/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/subsidiary-ledgers-and-controls/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the subsidiary ledger for Accounts Payable and its relationship to the General Ledger

 

In addition to the general ledger control account, the term accounts payable can also refer to the person or staff that processes vendor invoices and pays the company’s bills. That’s why a supplier who hasn’t received payment from a customer will phone and ask to speak with “accounts payable.” The accounts payable clerk would then look to the accounts payable subsidiary ledger which is a list of all outstanding bills listed by vendor (supplier, seller, service provider).

Accounting software allows companies to sort accounts payable according to the dates when payments will be due. The resulting report is known as an aging analysis, and is similar to the aging of accounts receivable, except in this case it is a list of bills due and management can use it to budget cash flow and auditors can use it to analyze the general ledger control account, looking for mistakes and even fraud.

Accounts Payable Process

A stack of papers.

The accounts payable process or function is immensely important since it involves nearly all of a company’s payments outside of payroll. The accounts payable process might be carried out by an accounts payable department in a large corporation, by a small staff in a medium-sized company, or by a bookkeeper or perhaps the owner in a small business.

Regardless of the company’s size, the mission of accounts payable is to pay only the company’s bills and invoices that are legitimate and accurate. This means that before a vendor’s invoice is entered into the accounting records and scheduled for payment, the invoice must reflect:

  • what the company had ordered
  • what the company has received
  • the proper unit costs, calculations, totals, terms, etc.

To safeguard a company’s cash and other assets, the accounts payable process should have internal controls. A few reasons for internal controls are to:

  • prevent paying a fraudulent invoice
  • prevent paying an inaccurate invoice
  • prevent paying a vendor invoice twice
  • be certain that all vendor invoices are accounted for

The accounts payable process involves reviewing an enormous amount of detail to ensure only legitimate and accurate amounts are entered in the accounting system. A well-designed system would include the following documents and procedures:

  • purchase orders issued by the company
  • receiving reports issued by the company
  • invoices from the company’s vendors
  • contracts and other agreements

Purchase order

A purchase order or PO is prepared by a company to communicate and document precisely what the company is ordering from a vendor. The people or departments receiving a copy of the PO include:

  • the person requesting that a PO be issued for the goods or services
  • the accounts payable department
  • the receiving department
  • the vendor
  • the person preparing the purchase order

The purchase order will indicate a PO number, date prepared, company name, vendor name, name and phone number of a contact person, a description of the items being purchased, the quantity, unit prices, shipping method, date needed, other pertinent information, and should be either prepared or approved by someone with authority to make purchases.

When the vendor receives a purchase order, it creates a sales order that goes to the shipping/fulfillment department. The vendor ships the items along with a packing list and sends an invoice such as the one we saw from Bryan Wholesale to Geyer.

Receiving Report

A forklift in a warehouse.

When the goods arrive, someone down on the shipping/receiving dock counts the items and prepares a receipt that then goes to the accounting department. There should be a system in place to be able to match that receiving report with the original purchase order. Items ordered but not yet received are on “back order”. So far, there hasn’t been a journal entry. The purchase order (and on the vendor side, the sales order) are memos only. The accounting system holds them, but there is no entry in the GL. If the terms are FOB shipping point, which is the most common, the vendor records a sale when the item is shipped and the invoice is prepared. Theoretically, the buyer would record the purchase at that point, but in practice, the purchase is usually recorded when the invoice arrives and is matched with the receiving report and the purchase order.

After determining that the information reconciles, the accounts payable clerk enters the vendor invoice into Accounts Payable. The information entered into the accounting software will include invoice reference information (vendor name or code, invoice number and date, etc.), the amount to be credited to Accounts Payable, the amount(s) and account(s) to be debited and the date that the payment is to be made. The payment date is based on the terms shown on the invoice and the company’s policy for making payments. Accounting software will automatically update both the subsidiary ledger and the general ledger.

Not all vendor invoices will have purchase orders or receiving reports. For example, a company does not issue a purchase order to its electric utility for a pre-established amount of electricity for the following month. The same is true for the telephone, natural gas, sewer and water, freight-in, and so on.

There are also payments required every month in order to fulfill lease agreements or other contracts. Examples include the monthly rent for a storage facility, office rent, automobile payments, equipment leases, maintenance agreements, etc. Even though these obligations will not have purchase orders, the process is essentially the same: enter them into the GL and the subsidiary ledger so that both are complete.

The accuracy and completeness of a company’s financial statements are dependent on the accounts payable process. A well-run accounts payable process will include:

  • the timely processing of accurate and legitimate vendor invoices,
  • accurate recording in the appropriate general ledger accounts,
  • the accrual of obligations and expenses that have not yet been completely processed,
  • segregation of duties, and
  • periodic review by either internal or external auditors.

End of the Period Cut-Off

A busy cafe counter.

At the end of every accounting period (year, quarter, month, 5-week period, etc.), it is important the accounts payable processing be up-to-date. If it is not up-to-date, the income statement for the accounting period will likely be omitting some expenses and the balance sheet at the end of the accounting period will be omitting some liabilities.

During the first few days after an accounting period ends, it is important for the accounts payable staff to closely examine the incoming vendor invoices. In the introduction, TheirCorp provided cleaning services for YourCo on December 15 and sent an invoice on January 15 dated January 10 for $600 with terms 2/10, net 30. Assume YourCo has a December 31 year-end and that $600 is considered a material amount. As the accounts payable clerk for YourCo, you know you must record an expense in December in the amount of $600, increasing accounts payable by the same amount. You may have to accrue that amount as a separate entry with a January 1 reversing entry, or you may have a system in place to back-date the invoice to December 15, but that may also affect the discount date which may adversely affect the payment. Mostly this is an issue that is only relevant at year-end. For instance, you may get an electricity bill on the 20th of the month that is for the 11th of the prior month through the 10th of the current month. Rather than prorating the amount and accruing it each month, it may be easier to simply enter it when received. This decision is based on a cost-benefit analysis that includes a materiality component: in other words, is the extra accuracy of the information worth the extra cost of making that calculation and entry every month. The answer may in fact be yes if, for instance, your company is a bauxite refinery using huge amounts of electricity each month that is directly related to production. It may be no if your company is an accounting firm or even a restaurant.

]]>
Accounting for Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounting-for-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:15 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounting-for-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]>
  • Account for deferred and accrued current liabilities

 

You’ve seen, in the section on inventory, how to record accounts payable. What follows are a few examples of how we would account for other current liabilities, both deferred and accrued.

Accrue sales tax

Assume a company sells merchandise in a state with a 6% sales tax. If it sells goods with a sales price of $1,000 on credit, the company makes this entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Accounts Receivable  (1,000 + 60) 1,060
      Sales 1,000
      Sales Tax Payable (1,000 x 6%) 60
To record sales and sales tax payable.

Now assume there are no other sales for the entire period. The following entry shows the payment to the state:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Sales Tax Payable 60
      Checking Account 60

Record deferred revenues

Let’s say we work for a hardware store that sells 67 gift cards to our customers in a big promotion on March 1. Each gift card has a face value of $100 and we are in a state with no sales tax. The journal entry would look like this:

JournalPage 86
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
March 1 Checking account 6,700.00
March 1         Deferred revenue 6,700.00
March 1 To record sale of gift cards

 

We increased the checking account by the amount of cash received and we increased a liability that represents the amount of revenue collected that hasn’t actually been earned because we haven’t sold any stock in trade.

Posting this to the general ledger results in the following:

Checking
Debit Credit
6,700.00
Double line Double line 6,700.00
Deferred Revenue
Debit Credit
6,700.00
Double line 6,700.00 Double line
Sales Revenue
Debit Credit
Double line 0.00 Double line

A customer comes in on March 15th and buys a $55 saw using a gift card. The entry would be:

JournalPage 86
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
March 15 Deferred revenue 55.00
March 15     Sales revenue 55.00
March 15 To record sale using gift card
Checking
Debit Credit
6,700.00
Double line Double line
Deferred Revenue
Debit Credit
6,700.00
55.0
Double line Double line 6,645.00
Sales Revenue
Debit Credit
55.0
Double line Double line

The unearned (deferred) revenue has been earned and that economic event is now recorded in our books.

Accrue income tax expense

According to The Home Depot footnote disclosures (page 53), income tax expense on $15 billion of earnings for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020, was $3.282 billion. The balance sheet shows income taxes payable at $55 million. We could conclude therefore that during the year, the company made estimated tax payments (much like the withholding deducted from your paycheck) to the IRS of $3.227 billion.

Here is the rationale, working backward from what we see on the balance sheet and in the notes:

Assume the company was making quarterly estimated tax payments to the IRS that totaled $3.227 billion and posted those payments to a current asset account called prepaid taxes.

in millions
Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a checking account. There is a credit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 1'. There is a credit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 2'. There is a credit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 3'. There is a credit entry of 827 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 4'. On the right is a prepaid taxes chart. There is a debit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 1'. There is a debit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 2'. There is a debit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 3'. There is a debit entry of 827 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 4'. There is a debit total of 3,227 dollars.

After the year end accounting, at the very end of the cycle, the tax accountants determine the exact amount of tax that is due based on the financial accounting records adjusted to comport to the Internal Revenue Code. This is usually the very last adjusting journal entry.

The current taxes come out to be $3.282 billion, and the company has paid in $3.227 billion according to the general ledger. This would be verified against information provided by the IRS. Therefore, the company owes another $55 million to balance out last year’s taxes, meaning this expense has been incurred but not yet recorded. Therefore, the additional expense will be accrued (added to) the books for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020, and reported as part of the overall expenses for that year.

The final adjusting journal entry then looks like this, except it would have the exact numbers with six more digits:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
2020
Feb 2 Provision for income taxes 3,282
Feb 2       Prepaid income tax 3,227
Feb 2       Income taxes payable 55
Feb 2 To accrue income tax liability.

And it would then result in this after posting to the general ledger:

in millions
Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a checking account. There is a credit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 1'. There is a credit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 2'. There is a credit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 3'. There is a credit entry of 827 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 4'. On the right is a prepaid taxes chart. There is a debit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 1'. There is a debit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 2'. There is a debit entry of 800 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 3'. There is a debit entry of 827 dollars labeled as 'est pmt 4'. There is a debit total of 3,227 dollars. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 3,227 dollars. This is highlighted in green. There is a new debit total of 0 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an income taxes payable chart. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 55 dollars. This value is highlighted in green. There is a credit total of 55 dollars. On the right is a provision for income taxes chart. On the debit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 3,282 dollars. This value is highlighted in green. There is a debit total of 3,282 dollars.

Actual expense on the face of the income statement for The Home Depot is 3.473 billion, due to the other entries to a noncurrent liability account called deferred income taxes that reconciles taxes based on book income to the actual tax liability. Deferred income taxes will be covered in the section on noncurrent liabilities, but as you can see, much of the calculations involved in these numbers are best addressed in more advanced courses. A company like The Home Depot has an entire department of tax accountants that do nothing but manage the complexities of tax planning and reporting.

 


]]>
Introduction to Accounts Payable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounts-payable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:15 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounts-payable/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: demonstrate accounting for trade accounts payable

Image of a storefront.

When a company orders and receives goods (or services) in advance of paying for them, we say that the company is purchasing the goods on account or on credit. The supplier (or vendor) of the goods on credit is also referred to as a creditor. If the company receiving the goods does not sign a promissory note, the vendor’s bill or invoice will be recorded by the company in its liability account Accounts Payable (or Trade Payables).

As is expected for a liability account, Accounts Payable will normally have a credit balance. Hence, when a vendor invoice is recorded, Accounts Payable will be credited and another account must be debited (as required by double-entry accounting). When an account payable is paid, Accounts Payable will be debited and Cash will be credited. Therefore, the credit balance in Accounts Payable should be equal to the amount of vendor invoices that have been recorded but have not yet been paid.

Under the accrual method of accounting, the company receiving goods or services on credit must report the liability no later than the date they were received. The same date is used to record the debit entry to an expense or asset account as appropriate. Hence, accountants say that under the accrual method of accounting expenses are reported when they are incurred (not when they are paid).

It may be helpful to note that an account payable at one company is an account receivable for the vendor that issued the sales invoice. To illustrate this, let’s assume that TheirCorp provides cleaning services for YourCo on December 15 and sends an invoice on January 15 dated January 10 for $600 with terms 2/10, net 30. YourCo records an expense in the amount of $600 and increases accounts payable by the same amount. TheirCorp records revenue of $600 and adds $600 to accounts receivable.

You should see a couple of issues here though. When does YourCo recognize the expense—in January or December?  When does the clock start ticking on the discount period—on January 15 or January 10?

You should already know the technically correct answer to the first question: the cost of cleaning is a period expense in December and should be recognized in December, meaning that it has to be accrued when the bill is received unless (a) it is immaterial and (b) the bill comes after the books are closed.

The answer to the second question is more complex. Technically, the clock starts ticking on the invoice date, which is the 10th of January, meaning the discount period ends on the 20th and the bill is due on the 9th of February. However, some companies take the discount based on the receipt of the invoice or the postmark date. This can cause some controversy, but if an invoice arrives via mail or email after the expiration of the discount period, it may be worth it to dispute the actual date on the invoice. This is part of the function of the accounts payable clerk or department and falls under the responsibility of the accountants.

]]>
Examples of Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/examples-of-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:14 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/examples-of-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify common types and categories of current liabilities

 

Once again, the annual report from The Home Depot, Inc. provides us with a fairly comprehensive list of typical current liabilities:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
     Sales taxes payable 605 656
     Deferred revenue 2,116 1,782
     Income taxes payable 55 11
     Current installments of long-term debt 1,839 1,056
     Current operating lease liabilities 828
     Other accrued expenses 2,677 2,611
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Single line Single line

 

Short-Term Debt

Short-term debt usually represents lines of credit with a bank that are used to ensure that (a) funds are available when needed (e.g. to make payroll and to take advantage of purchase discounts), and (b) there is not too much cash sitting idle in a non-interestbearing checking account. Similarly, a checking account that would normally be classified as a current asset except that is showing a credit balance (overdrawn) would be shown as a short-term debt to the bank.

Here is a quick video on recording short-term debt:You can view the transcript for “FA 8 2 Notes Payable” here (opens in new window).

 

Accounts Payable

Accounts payable is the mirror image of accounts receivable and is often referred to as trade accounts or trade accounts payable and represents debt that arises during the normal course of business. We saw this as we studied inventory, which is often bought “on account” with no paperwork other than a purchase order. Terms are usually 30 days with no interest. For Home Depot, a typical transaction might be to order 30 circular saws from Black and Decker. When the saws are delivered, Home Depot records an increase (credit) in accounts payable, and an increase (debit) in inventory. Notice that for The Home Depot, accounts payable is the most significant current liability on the balance sheet.

Accrued salaries and related expenses is often an individually significant item and represents the salaries and wages earned by workers but not yet paid. Since The Home Depot uses a fiscal year that ends “on the Sunday nearest to January 31st.”[1] the most current audited results of operations and statement of financial position (balance sheet) are for the year ended February 2, 2020. On that date, according to the balance sheet, the Accrued salaries and related expenses are approximately $1.5 billion in wages and payroll taxes outstanding. That may seem like a lot, but for a company with almost 400,000 employees, it averages only $375 per person, and probably represents wages earned during that last week of January that will be paid in early February.

Sales Tax Payable

A collection of tax sheets.

Many states have a state sales tax on items purchased by consumers. The company selling the product is responsible for collecting the sales tax from customers. When the company collects the taxes, the debit is to Cash and the credit is to Sales Tax Payable. Periodically, the company pays the sales taxes collected to the state. At that time, the debit is to Sales Tax Payable and the credit is to Cash.

Deferred Revenue

Deferred Revenue is also called unearned revenue. This is cash received in advance of the sale of a product or of providing a service. Remember the foundation of accrual basis accounting is to recognize revenue as it is earned. In a normal sales transaction, you would debit the checking account to recognize the increase in funds from the customer, and you would credit Sales Revenue (earned income). Also, you would of course debit cost of goods sold and credit inventory. However, if you receive the funds in advance, you would debit the checking account and credit a liability–unearned revenue or in the case of Home Depot, deferred revenue (to defer literally means, “to postpone”). For The Home Depot, the most likely source of the liability called deferred revenue is the sale of gift cards (see page 42 of the 2019 annual report).

Income Taxes Payable

As a corporation, The Home Depot incurs income tax on earnings and therefore incurs a liability (debt to the IRS) for the unpaid portion at the end of the year (or if the company expects a refund from overpayment, a current asset.)

Current Portions of Long-Term Debt

Accountants move any portion of long-term debt that becomes due within the next year to the current liability section of the balance sheet. For instance, assume a company signed a series of 10 individual notes payable for $10,000 each; beginning in the 6th year, one comes due each year through the 15th year. Beginning in the 5th year, an accountant would move a $10,000 note from the long-term liability category to the current liability category on the balance sheet. The current portion would then be paid within one year.

Leases

There are two kinds of leases: operating, and financing. Leases that are basically financing the acquisition of an asset are usually classified as long-term debt. Operating leases, as we saw in the section on noncurrent assets, can create both an asset (right-of-use) and a liability (debt to the leasing company).

Other Accrued Expenses

To accrue something means to add it, so other accrued expenses could be things like interest expense on debt that hasn’t yet been paid, product warranties, and even probable settlements of lawsuits. They would be anything else that fit the FASB’s definition of a liability:

probable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations of a particular entity to transfer assets or provide services to other entities in the future as a result of past transactions or events.

Anything not clearly a current liability is a noncurrent liability and will be covered in the next section, but in general that category includes: long-term notes payable, minus the current portion; long-term lease obligations; bonds payable; and deferred taxes.

A deferred tax liability arises when the current taxes calculated on net income are different than the actual tax being paid to the IRS because of timing differences. The most common timing difference arises when a company uses straight-line depreciation for financial accounting purposes but accelerated cost recovery (a form of double-declining-balance) for taxes, since the Internal Revenue Code requires companies to use ACRS (Accelerated Cost Recovery System).

Also, if the company had an obligation to pay employees a pension or other post-retirement benefits such as health care, those items would be mostly long-term liabilities.

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Long-term debt, excluding current installments Single line28,670 Single line26,807
Long-term operating lease liabilities 5,066
Deferred income taxes 706 491
Other long-term liabilities 1,535 1,867
          Total liabilities Single line
54,352
Single line
45,881
Single line Single line

 

Here is a quick review of current liabilities:

 


]]>
Why It Matters: Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> One of the key metrics that analysts, investors, and management watch is working capital, which is the difference between current assets and current liabilities.

For example, if you look at the annual report for The Home Depot, Inc. on page 33, you’ll find the balance sheet that shows $19.810 billion in current assets and $18.375 in current liabilities on February 2, 2020 (the end of the fiscal year). Therefore, working capital was $1.435 billion. That’s the difference between the most liquid assets and the bills that have to be paid soon, and it may seem like a lot of money, but from the statement of earnings on the next page, we see that operating expenses for the year were almost $2 billion per month.

You’ve already taken a good look at current assets, from cash and cash equivalents, inventory, accounts receivable, marketable securities, and other assets such as prepaid expenses. In this module, we’ll take a closer look at the common categories of current liabilities and you’ll explore how to recognize a current liability and how to record them.

Here is the current liability section from The Home Depot annual report:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716

 

The categories we’ll be examining in the following sections include accounts payable, sales tax payable, income taxes payable, deferred revenue and accrued expenses, and short-term debt, including the current portion of long-term debt.

]]>
Introduction to Current Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-current-liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-current-liabilities/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Define current liabilities

Liabilities are obligations to pay cash, provide services, or deliver goods at some future time.

FASB’s Concept Statement No. 6, in place for more than 20 years, defines liabilities as “probable future sacrifices of economic benefits arising from present obligations of a particular entity to transfer assets or provide services to other entities in the future as a result of past transactions or events.”

Most balance sheets divide liabilities into current liabilities and long-term liabilities.

Let’s zoom in on The Home Depot balance sheet for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Long-term debt, excluding current installments Single line28,670 Single line26,807
Long-term operating lease liabilities 5,066
Deferred income taxes 706 491
Other long-term liabilities 1,535 1,867
          Total liabilities Single line
54,352
Single line
45,881
Single line Single line

 

Current liabilities are obligations that (1) are payable within one year or one operating cycle, whichever is longer, or (2) will be paid out of current assets or create other current liabilities.

Long-term liabilities are obligations that do not qualify as current liabilities.

]]>
Assignment: Other Current and Noncurrent Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-other-current-and-noncurrent-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:12 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-other-current-and-noncurrent-assets/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Other Current and Noncurrent Assets

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting it Together: Other Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-other-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-other-assets/ Read more »]]> Remember that creating financial statements is like the scorecards of businesses, and we accountants are responsible for following the rules (GAAP) and creating an accurate picture of how the game is going. In addition, you are learning to read these complicated scorecards.

For instance, here is the income statement for ExxonMobil for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2019:

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF INCOME (in millions of dollars)
Note Reference Number 2019 2018 2017
Subcategory, Revenues and other income
      Sales and other operating revenue 255,583 279,332 237,162
      Income from equity affiliates 7 5,441 7,355 5,380
      Other income 3,914 3,525 1,821
            Total revenues and other income Single Line264,938Single Line Single Line290,212Single Line Single Line244,363Single Line
Subcategory, Costs and other deductions
      Crude oil and product purchases 143,801 156,172 128,217
      Production and manufacturing expenses 36,826 36,682 32,690
      Selling, general, and administrative expenses 11,398 11,480 10,649
      Depreciation and depletion 9 18,998 18,745 19,893
      Exploration expenses, including dry holes 1,269 1,466 1,790
      Non-service pension ad postretirement benefit expense 17 1,235 1,285 1,745
      Interest expense 830 766 601
      Other taxes and duties 19 30,525 32,663 30,104
            Total costs and other deductions Single Line244,882Single Line Single Line259,259Single Line Single Line225,689Single Line
Subcategory, Income before income taxes 20,056 30,953 18,674
      Income taxes 19 5,282 9,532 (1,174)
Subcategory, Net income including noncontrolling interests Single Line14,774 Single Line21,421 Single Line19,848
      Net income attributable to noncontrolling interests 434 581 138
Net income attributable to ExxonMobil Single Line14,340Double Line Single Line20,840Double Line Single Line19,710Double Line

Already, you can see this is a consolidated statement, which means ExxonMobil over the years has purchased controlling interests in other companies and is rolling those financial results into one all-inclusive statement.

At the bottom of the income statement, you’ll see the company has subtracted a portion of income from the consolidated subsidiaries that is attributable to other owners—the noncontrolling interests. You can also see a line for depreciation and depletion—two concepts that might not have meant anything to you until recently.

On the balance sheet, you can see a line for investments placed between current assets and PP&E, indicating those are available-for-sale investments being held long-term, along with long-term notes receivable, and you can see PP&E is being reported “net” of accumulated depreciation and depletion.

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET (in millions of dollars)
Note Reference Number Dec. 31 2019 Dec. 31 2018
Subcategory, Assets
      Subcategory, Current assets
            Cash and cash equivalents 3,089 3,042
            Notes and accounts receivable, less estimated doubtful amounts 6 26,966 24,701
            Subcategory, Inventories
                  Crude oil, products and merchandise 3 14,010 14,803
                  Materials and supplies 4,518 4,155
            Other current assets 1,469 1,272
                  Total current assets Single Line50,52 Single Line47,973
      Investments, advances, and long-term receivables 8 43,164 40,790
      Property, plant and equipment, at cost, less accumulated depreciation and depletion 9 253,018 247,101
      Other assets, including intangibles, net 16,363 10,332
            Total assets Single Line362,597Double Line Single Line346,196Double Line

You would now know to scroll down to the footnotes to find out more information about accounting policies such as the methods used for depreciation and depletion, and details such as R&D expenditures and this breakdown of Investments:

Long-term receivables and miscellaneous, net of reserves of $5,643 million and $5,471 million5,1415,590

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
8. Investments, Advances, and Long-Term Receivables
Description Dec. 31, 2019 Dec. 31, 2018
(millions of dollars)
Subcategory, Equity method company investments and advances
     Investments 29,291 26,382
     Advances 8,542 8,608
            Total equity method company investments and advances Single line
37,833
Single line
34,990
Equity securities carried at fair value and other investments at adjusted cost basis 190 210
            Total Single line
43,164Double line
Single line
40,790Double line

 

You can now recognize the term “equity method” and you may also make the connection that the “reserves” mentioned in connection with long-term receivables is an allowance for uncollectible accounts, and “net” means that allowance has been subtracted from the “gross” amount which would be the maturity value of all the notes.

In other words, as you continue to explore these accounting concepts, more and more layers of the financial statement onion are being peeled back, and you are gaining more and more context with which to understand the layers to come.

]]>
Discussion: Other Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Other Assets link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Reporting Other Current and Noncurrent Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reporting-other-current-and-noncurrent-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:10 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reporting-other-current-and-noncurrent-assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate proper financial statement presentation and disclosures related to other current and noncurrent assets

 

By now you are familiar with the presentation of assets on the balance sheet, and you’ve seen several examples. Let’s end our exploration of the asset section by revisiting Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries.

Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In Thousands)
Description December 31, 2019 December 31, 2018
Subcategory, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     613,110 $     555,320
     Total accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful amounts (2019–$3,1711; 2018–$4,460) 612,651 605,712
     Other accounts receivable 67,551 52,059
     Inventories 768,984 700,540
     Other current assets 162,813 84,790
          Total current assets Single line2,225,109 Single line1,998,421
Property, plant and equipment, at cost Single line6,817,843 Single line4,799,063
     Less accumulated depreciation and amortization 1,908,370 1,777,979
          Net property, plant and equipment Single line4,909,473 Single line3,021,084
Investments Single line579,813 Single line528,722
Other assets 213,061 80,135
Goodwill 1,578,785 1,567,169
Other intangibles, net of amortization 354,622 386,143
Total Assets Single line
$     9,860,863
Double line
Single line
$     7,581,674
Double line

 

Note that this is a consolidated balance sheet, meaning that Albemarle has purchased controlling interests in companies in the past, and as we saw earlier in this module, the company recently added a 60% interest in the Wodgine project, and as you read through these disclosures from the 2019 annual report, you should recognize most of the terms and concepts.

From the AICPA November 2017 Financial Reporting Framework for Small- and Medium-Sized Entities Presentation and Disclosure Checklist:

Equity, Debt, and Other Investments [chapter 11] Presentation

  1. Has the entity presented the following separately on the statement of financial position or in the notes to the financial statements:
    a. Investments in companies subject to significant influence accounted for using the equity method?
    b. Other investments accounted for at cost?
    c. Equity and debt investments held-for-sale? [11.20]
  2. Has the entity presented separately in the statement of operations or in the notes to the financial statements:
    a. Income from investments in companies subject to significant influence accounted for using the equity method?
    b. Income from other investments accounted for at cost?
    c. Equity and debt investments held-for-sale? [11.21]
  3. Has the entity grouped investments reported on the statement of financial position and investment income reported in the statement of operations in the same way? [11.22]
  4. The FRF for SMEs accounting framework requires that equity method investees normally should follow the same basis of accounting (FRF for SMEs accounting framework) as the investor. Accordingly, have the financial statements of equity- method investees been adjusted, if necessary, to conform with standards in the framework, unless it is impracticable to do so? [11.05]
  5. Has the entity’s proportionate share of any discontinued operations, changes in ac- counting policy, corrections of errors relating to prior period financial statements, or capital transactions of an equity-method investee presented and disclosed separately, according to its nature, in the entity’s financial statements? [11.13]

Disclosure

  1. Has the entity disclosed the basis used to account for investments? [11.23]
  2. When the fiscal periods of an investor and an investee are not the same and the equi- ty method is used to account for the investee, has the entity disclosed events relating to, or transactions of, the investee that have occurred during the intervening period and significantly affect the financial position or results of operations of the investor? (This disclosure is not necessary if these events or transactions are recorded in the financial statements.) [11.24]
  3. Other than for investments held for sale, has the entity disclosed the name and description of each significant investment, including the carrying amounts, and propor- tion of ownership interests held in each investment? [11.25]

In the following footnote excerpts from Albemarle Corporation’s 2019 annual report, see if you can find the required disclosures with regard to other current assets, particularly investments.

Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries
NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

NOTE 1—Summary of Significant Accounting Policies:

Basis of Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements include the accounts and operations of Albemarle Corporation and our wholly owned, majority owned and controlled subsidiaries. Unless the context otherwise indicates, the terms “Albemarle,” “we,” “us,” “our” or “the Company” mean Albemarle Corporation and its consolidated subsidiaries. For entities that we control and are the primary beneficiary, but own less than 100%, we record the minority ownership as noncontrolling interest, except as noted below. We apply the equity method of accounting for investments in which we have an ownership interest from 20% to 50% or where we exercise significant influence over the related investee’s operations. All significant intercompany accounts and transactions are eliminated in consolidation.

As described further in Note 2, “Acquisitions,” we completed the acquisition of a 60% ownership interest in Mineral Resources Limited’s (“MRL”) Wodgina hard rock lithium mine project (“Wodgina Project”) on October 31, 2019 creating a joint venture named MARBL Lithium Joint Venture (“MARBL”). The consolidated financial statements contained herein include our proportionate share of the results of operations of the Wodgina Project, commencing on November 1, 2019. We are entitled to a pro rata portion of 60% of all minerals (other than iron ore and tantalum) recovered from the tenements and produced by the joint venture. The joint venture is unincorporated with each investor holding an undivided interest in each asset and proportionately liable for each liability; therefore our proportionate share of assets, liabilities, revenue and expenses are included in the appropriate classifications in the consolidated financial statements.

In addition, you’ll find, in reading the financials, a disclosures with regard to the new lease reporting rules:

Leases

Effective January 1, 2019, we adopted Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2016-02, “Leases” and all related amendments using the modified retrospective method. Adoption of the new standard resulted in the recording of additional net lease assets and lease liabilities of $139.1 million as of January 1, 2019. Comparative periods have not been restated and are reported in accordance with our historical accounting. The standard did not have an impact on our consolidated Net income or cash flows. In addition, as a result of the adoption of this new standard, we have implemented internal controls and system changes to prepare the financial information.

We determine if an arrangement is a lease at inception. Right-of-use (“ROU”) assets represent our right to use an underlying asset for the lease term. We amortize the operating lease ROU assets on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease and the finance lease ROU assets on a straight-line basis over the shorter of their estimated useful lives or the lease terms. Leases with an initial term of 12 months or less are not recorded on the balance sheet, and we recognize lease expense for these leases on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

On page 63, the company describes how it accounts for various investments:

Investments

Investments are accounted for using the equity method of accounting if the investment gives us the ability to exercise significant influence, but not control, over the investee. Significant influence is generally deemed to exist if we have an ownership interest in the voting stock of the investee between 20% and 50%, although other factors, such as representation on the investee’s board of directors and the impact of commercial arrangements, are considered in determining whether the equity method of accounting is appropriate. Under the equity method of accounting, we record our investments in equity-method investees in the consolidated balance sheets as Investments and our share of investees’ earnings or losses together with other-than-temporary impairments in value as Equity in net income of unconsolidated investments in the consolidated statements of income. We evaluate our equity method investments for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amounts of such investments may be impaired. If a decline in the value of an equity method investment is determined to be other than temporary, a loss is recorded in earnings in the current period.

Certain mutual fund investments are accounted for as trading equities and are marked-to-market on a periodic basis through the consolidated statements of income. Investments in joint ventures and nonmarketable securities of immaterial entities are estimated based upon the overall performance of the entity where financial results are not available on a timely basis.

Let’s now review next how these are all put together.

]]>
Reporting Natural Resources https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reporting-natural-resources/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reporting-natural-resources/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate proper financial statement presentation and disclosures related to natural resources

 

Some companies may list investments in natural resources as a separate line item on the balance sheet itself. One thing we noticed with Albemarle Corporation is that mineral rights and reserves were listed with property, plant, and equipment.

NOTE 9 – Property, Plant and Equipment:
     Property, plant and equipment, at cost, consist of the following at December 31, 2019 and 2018 (in thousands):
Useful Lives (Years) December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Land $     116,728 $     123,518
Land imporvements 10-30 83,256 63,349
Building and improvements 10-50 337,728 251,980
Machinery and equipment(a) 2-45 3,355,518 2,780,478
Mineral rights and reserves 7-60 1,764,067 696,033
Construction in progress 1,160,545 883,705
Total Single line
$     6,817,843
Double line
Single line
$     4,799,063
Double line
(a) Consists primarily of (1) short-lived production equipment components, office and building equipment and other equipment with estimated lives ranging 2-7 years, (2) production process equipment (intermediate components) with estimated lives ranging 8-19 years, (3) production process equipment (major unit components) with estimated lives ranging from 20-29 years, and (4) production process equipment (infrastructure and other) with estimated lives ranging 30-45 years.
The cost of property, plant and equipment is depreciated generally by the straight-line method. Depletion of mineral rights is based on the units-of-production method. Depreciation expense, including depletion, amounted to $183.3 million, $170.0 million and $169.5 million during the years ended December 39, 2019, 2018 and 2017, respectively. Interest capitalized on significant capital projects in 2019. 2018, and 2017 was $30.2 million, $19.3 million and $7.4 million, respectively.

 

2019 Annual Report

In addition to the amount reported on the balance sheet as part of PP&E, itemized in Note 9, Albemarle included a note describing the accounting policy for significant resource development expenses:

Resource Development Expenses

We incur costs in resource exploration, evaluation and development during the different phases of our resource development projects. Exploration costs incurred before obtaining legal rights to explore an area are generally expensed as incurred. After obtaining legal rights, exploration costs are expensed in areas where we have uncertainty about obtaining proven resources. In areas where we have substantial knowledge about the area and consider it probable to obtain commercially viable proven resources, exploration and evaluation costs are capitalized.

If technical feasibility studies have been obtained, resource evaluation expenses are capitalized when the study demonstrates proven or probable resources for which future economic returns are expected, while costs for projects that are not considered viable are expensed. Development costs that are necessary to bring the property to commercial production or increase the capacity or useful life are capitalized. Costs to maintain the production capacity in a property under production are expensed as incurred.

Capitalized resource costs are depleted using the units-of-production method. Our resource development assets are evaluated for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable.

By now, you probably recognize most of these terms and concepts.

]]>
Reporting Intangible Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reporting-intangible-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reporting-intangible-assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate proper financial statement presentation and disclosures related to intangible assets

 

Here is the relevant checklist from the AICPA November 2017 Financial Reporting Framework for Small- and Medium-Sized Entities Presentation and Disclosure Checklist:

A businessman holding a tablet.

F. Intangible Assets [chapter 13] Presentation

  1. Has the entity presented the aggregate amount of goodwill as a separate line item in the entity’s statement of financial position? [13.62]
  2. Has the entity aggregated and presented intangible assets as a separate line item in the entity’s statement of financial position? [13.63]

Disclosure

  1. Has the entity disclosed the following information:
    • The carrying amount in total and by major intangible asset class?
    • The aggregate amortization expense for the period?
    • The amortization method used, including the amortization period or rate, by major intangible asset class?
    • The accounting policy for internally generated intangible assets, including the treatment of development costs, whether expensed or capitalized? [13.64]
  2. If the entity has incurred expenditure on start-up costs, has the entity disclosed the policy for accounting for those costs? [13.66]

As you review some of the disclosures from Albemarle’s 2019 financial statements, see if you can find the checklist items and also see how many of the terms and concepts you can identify and understand now that you have studied the materials.

Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries: NOTES TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

Associates comparing graphs and charts.

We account for goodwill and other intangibles acquired in a business combination in conformity with current accounting guidance that requires that goodwill and indefinite-lived intangible assets not be amortized.

We test goodwill for impairment by comparing the estimated fair value of our reporting units to the related carrying value.

We assess our indefinite-lived intangible assets, which include trade names and trademarks, for impairment annually and between annual tests if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it is more likely than not that the asset is impaired. If we determine based on the qualitative assessment that it is more likely than not that the asset is impaired, an impairment test is performed by comparing the fair value of the indefinite-lived intangible asset to its carrying amount.

Definite-lived intangible assets, such as purchased technology, patents and customer lists, are amortized over their estimated useful lives generally for periods ranging from five to twenty-five years. Except for customer lists and relationships associated with the majority of our Lithium business, which are amortized using the pattern of economic benefit method, definite-lived intangible assets are amortized using the straight-line method. If the carrying amount of the asset group is not recoverable, the fair value of the asset group is measured and if the carrying amount exceeds the fair value, an impairment loss is recognized.

Research and Development Expenses

Our research and development expenses related to present and future products are expensed as incurred. These expenses consist primarily of personnel-related costs and other overheads, as well as outside service and consulting costs incurred for specific programs.

Now, let’s look at how to report other current and noncurrent assets next.

]]>
Other Current and Noncurrent Assets, Including Notes Receivable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/other-current-and-noncurrent-assets-including-notes-receivable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/other-current-and-noncurrent-assets-including-notes-receivable/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify other common non-current assets

 

Rights Under Lease

A lease is a contract to rent property. The property owner is the grantor of the lease and is the lessor. The person or company obtaining rights to possess and use the property is the lessee. The rights granted under the lease are a leasehold. The accounting for a lease depends on whether it is a capital lease or an operating lease. Each of these lease types will be defined below.

The FASB has wrestled with issues around leases for a long time, beginning with a time when some companies were leasing assets and recording them as purchased and other companies were recording the lease payments as expenses without recognizing the asset.

The initial solution was to categorize some leases as capital leases, which are essentially purchases of the asset. More recently, the FASB issued accounting guidance that requires assets and liabilities arising from almost all leases to be recorded on the balance sheet, along with additional required disclosures regarding the amount, timing, and uncertainty of cash flows from leases.

If you look at Facebook:

FACEBOOK INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
(in millions, except for number of shares and par value)
Description December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     19,079 $     10,019
     Marketable securities 35,776 31,095
     Accounts receivable, net of allowances of $206 and $229 as of December 31, 2019 and December 31, 2018, respectively 9,518 7,587
          Total current assets Single line
66,225
Single line
50,480
Property and equipment, net 35,323 24,683
Operating lease right-of-use assets, net 9,460
Intangible assets, net 894 1,294
Goodwill 18,715 18,301
Other Assets 2,759 2,576
Total assets Single line
$     133,376
Double line
Single line
$     97,334
Double line

 

And The Home Depot:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
          Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line

 

You can see the effect of this new GAAP. There is a line called “operating lease right-of-use-assets” that did not exist in prior years. This reflects the value of being able to use assets, like buildings, automobiles, and equipment, that are not included in property, plant, and equipment because the leases are not classified as capital leases.

The process of developing this new accounting pronouncement and the logic behind it are outlined in the Update 2016-02—Leases (TOPIC 842) SECTION C—Background Information and Basis for Conclusions.

The final major asset category we will examine in detail is notes receivable, which, like investments, can either be a short-term or long-term asset, depending on the maturity date.

Notes Receivable

As discussed earlier, a note (also called a promissory note) is an unconditional written promise by a borrower to pay a definite sum of money to the lender (payee) on demand or on a specific date. On the balance sheet of the lender (payee), a note is a receivable. A customer may give a note to a business for an amount due on an account receivable, or for the sale of a large item such as a refrigerator. Also, a business may give a note to a supplier in exchange for merchandise to sell or to a bank or an individual for a loan. Thus, a company may have notes receivable or notes payable arising from transactions with customers, suppliers, banks, or individuals.

Most promissory notes have an explicit interest charge. Interest is the fee charged for use of money over a period. To the maker of the note, or borrower, interest is an expense; to the payee of the note, or lender, interest is a revenue. A borrower incurs interest expense; a lender earns interest revenue. For convenience, bankers sometimes calculate interest on a 360-day year; we calculate it on that basis in this text. (Some companies use a 365-day year.)

The basic formula for computing interest is:

[latex]\text{principal}\times\text{interest rate}\times\text{frequency of a year}[/latex]

Remember that principal is the face value of the note, and interest on the note is always stated at an annual rate (even if the term of the note is for a period of less than a year). Frequency of a year is the amount of time for the note and can be either days or months. We need the frequency of a year because the interest rate is an annual rate and we may not want interest for an entire year but just for the time period of the note.

To show how to calculate interest, assume a company borrowed $20,000 from a bank. The note has a principal (face value) of $20,000, an annual interest rate of 10%, and a life of 90 days. The interest calculation is:

[latex]\$20,000\text{ principal}\times10\%\text{ interest rate}\times\left(\dfrac{90\text{ days}}{360\text{ days}}\right)=\$500[/latex]

Note that in this calculation we expressed the time period as a fraction of a 360-day year because the interest rate is an annual rate and the note life was days. If the note life was months, we would divide by 12 months for a year.

The maturity date is the date on which a note becomes due and must be paid. Sometimes notes require monthly installments (or payments) but usually all of the principal and interest must be paid at the same time. The wording in the note expresses the maturity date and determines when the note is to be paid. A note falling due on a Sunday or a holiday is due on the next business day. Several examples of typical maturity date wording are presented in the section on Accrued Interest Revenue.

Sometimes a company receives a note when it sells high-priced merchandise; more often, a note results from the conversion of an overdue account receivable. When a customer does not pay an account receivable that is due, the company may insist that the customer give a note in place of the account receivable. This action allows the customer more time to pay the balance due, and the company earns interest on the balance until paid. Also, the company may be able to sell the note to a bank or other financial institution.

To illustrate the conversion of an account receivable to a note, assume that Price Company had purchased $18,000 of merchandise on August 1 from Cooper Company on account. The normal credit period has elapsed, and Price cannot pay the invoice. Cooper agrees to accept Price’s $18,000, 15%, 90-day note dated September 1 to settle Price’s open account. Assuming Price paid the note at maturity and both Cooper and Price have a December 31 year-end, the entries on the books of Cooper are:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Aug 1 Accounts Receivable—Price Company 18,000
Aug 1 Sales 18,000
Aug 1 To record sale of merchandise on account.
Sept 1 Notes Receivable 18,000
Sept 1 Accounts Receivable 18,000
Sept 1 To record exchange of a note from Price Company for open account.
Nov. 30 Cash 18,675
Nov. 30 Notes Receivable 18,000
Nov. 30 Interest Revenue [18,000 x 15% x (90/360)] 675
Nov. 30 To record receipt of Price Company note principal and interest.

Note: Maturity date calculated as November 30 since it was a 90 day note − 29 days left in September (30 days in Sept − note day Sept 1) − 31 days in October leaves 30 days remaining in November.

The $18,675 paid by Price to Cooper is called the maturity value of the note. Maturity value is the amount that the company (maker) must pay on a note on its maturity date; typically, it includes principal and accrued interest, if any.

Sometimes the maker of a note does not pay the note when it becomes due. The next section describes how to record a note not paid at maturity.

A dishonored note is a note that the maker failed to pay at maturity. Since the note has matured, the holder or payee removes the note from Notes Receivable and records the amount due in Accounts Receivable.

At the maturity date of a note, the maker is responsible for the principal plus interest. The payee should record the interest earned and remove the note from its Notes Receivable account. Thus, the payee of the note should debit Accounts Receivable for the maturity value of the note and credit Notes Receivable for the note’s face value and Interest Revenue for the interest.

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Nov. 30 Accounts Receivable—Price Company 18,675
Nov. 30 Notes Receivable 18,000
Nov. 30 Interest Revenue 675
Nov. 30 To record dishonor of Price Company note.
You can view the transcript for “Interest Bearing Notes Receivable Entries (Intermediate Financial Accounting I #10)” here (opens in new window).
]]>
Introduction to Reporting Other Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-other-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-other-assets/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Present financial information for other assets

A workplace team having a meeting.

As you have seen in this and prior sections, each category of assets on the balance sheet is presented in a predictable sequence. In addition to the balances in each account of the general ledger that are the results of journal entries recording each transaction, accountants must collect and report on qualitative information. This means that accountants have to be adept at communicating both with numbers and with words.

You should be starting to understand some of these disclosures and how they relate to the numbers on the four (or five) financial statements, and by now you should automatically be looking to verify that the numbers in the sub-schedules tie to or otherwise explain the numbers on the face of the financials.

Also, you should be starting to realize that GAAP is more than just bookkeeping, as accountants look for guidance on things such as how to apply principles like matching, materiality, and usefulness of information, to the day-to-day operations of a business.

For instance, how useful would it be to compare financial statements of two similar companies if one company decided to report R&D as an expense, and another decided to capitalize R&D as an intangible asset?

]]>
Long-Term Investments https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/long-term-investments/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/long-term-investments/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate an understanding of accounting for long-term investments

 

When a company owns less than 50% of the outstanding stock of another company as a long-term investment, the percentage of ownership determines whether to use the cost or equity method.

  • A purchasing company owning less than 20% of the outstanding stock of the investee company, and does not exercise significant influence over it, uses the cost method.
  • A purchasing company owning from 20% to 50% of the outstanding stock of the investee company or owns less than 20%, but still exercises significant influence over it, uses the equity method.

Thus, firms use the cost method for all short-term stock investments and almost all long-term stock investments of less than 20%. For investments of more than 50%, they use either the cost or equity method.

Available-for-sale securities

Assume the finance manager at YourCompany invested excess cash in 1,000 shares of stock in Ronco, Inc. for $32,000 three years ago. On December 31, the fair market value was $31,000.

The treatment of the loss depends on whether it results from a temporary decline in market value of the stock or a permanent decline in the value.

If the loss is related to a “temporary” decline in the market value of the stock, the unrealized loss on the available-for-sale securities would appear in the balance sheet as a separate negative component of stockholders’ equity rather than in the income statement (as it does for trading securities). An unrealized gain would be shown as a separate positive component of stockholders’ equity. An unrealized loss or gain on available-for-sale securities is not included in the determination of net income because it is not expected to be realized in the near future since these securities will probably not be sold soon.

The journal entry for a $1,000 temporary decline in market value would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Dec 31 Unrealized loss on available for sale securities 1,000.00
Dec 31       Available for sale securities 1,000.00

Most publicly traded companies now have a fifth statement in addition to the balance sheet, income statement, statement of cash flows, and statement of owners’ equity.  This additional statement is called the statement of comprehensive income.  The bottom line, called “comprehensive income”, includes net income from the traditional income statement as well as some balance sheet adjustments, like foreign currency translations and unrealized gains and losses.  Comprehensive income then flows through to the statement of owners’ equity, either increasing or decreasing retained earnings.

FACEBOOK INC.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
(in millions)
Description Year Ended December 31,
2019 2018 2017
Net income $     18,485 $     22,112 $     15,934
Subcategory, Other comprehensive income(loss):
     Change in foreign currency translation adjustment, net of tax (151) (450) 566
     Change in unrealized gain/loss on available-for-sale investments and other, net of tax 422 (52) (90)
Comprehensive income Single line
$     18,756
Double line
Single line
$     21,610
Double line
Single line
$     16,410
Double line
See Accoompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

The sale of an available-for-sale security results in a realized gain or loss and is reported on the income statement for the period. Any unrealized gain or loss on the balance sheet must be recognized at that time. Assume the stock discussed above is sold on January 1 of the next year for $31,000 (assuming no change in market value from the previous day). The entries to record this sale are:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jan 1 Realized loss on available-for-sale securities 1,000
Jan 1       Unrealized loss on available-for-sale securities 1,000
Jan 1 Checking Account 31,000
Jan 1       Available-for-sale securities 31,000

The account debited in the first entry shows the unrealized loss has been realized with the sale of the security; the amount is reported in the income statement. The second entry writes off the security and records the cash received and is similar to the entry for the sale of trading securities.

A loss on an individual available-for-sale security that is considered to be “permanent” is recorded as a realized loss and deducted in determining net income. The entry to record a permanent loss of  $1,400 reads:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Realized loss on available-for-sale securities 1,400
      Available-for-sale securities 1,400
To record loss in value of available-for-sale securities.

No part of the $1,400 loss is subject to reversal if the market price of the stock recovers. The stock’s reduced value is now its “cost.” When this stock is later sold, the sale will be treated in the same manner as trading securities. The loss or gain has already been recognized on the income statement. Therefore, the entry would simply record the cash received and write off the security sold for its fair market value. If the market value of the security has fluctuated since the last time the account had been adjusted (end of the year), then an additional gain or loss may have to be recorded to account for this fluctuation.

The equity method for long-term investments of between 20 percent and 50 percent

When a company (the investor) purchases between 20% and 50% of the outstanding stock of another company (the investee) as a long-term investment, the purchasing company is said to have significant influence over the investee company. In certain cases, a company may have significant influence even when its investment is less than 20%. In either situation, the investor must account for the investment under the equity method.

When using the equity method in accounting for stock investments, the investor company must recognize its share of the investee company’s income, regardless of whether or not it receives dividends. The logic behind this treatment is that the investor company may exercise influence over the declaration of dividends and thereby manipulate its own income by influencing the investee’s decision to declare (or not declare) dividends.

Thus, when the investee reports income or losses, the investor company must recognize its share of the investee’s income or losses. For example, assume that Tone Company (the investor) owns 30% of Dutch Company (the investee) and Dutch reports $50,000 net income in the current year. Under the equity method, Tone makes the following entry as of the end of year:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Investment in Dutch Company 15,000
      Income from Dutch Company ($50,000 x 0.30) 15,000
To record 30% of Dutch Company’s Net Income.

The $15,000 income from Dutch would be reported on Tone’s income statement. The investment account is also increased by $15,000.

If the investee incurs a loss, the investor company debits a loss account and credits the investment account for the investor’s share of the loss. For example, assume Dutch incurs a loss of  $10,000 during the year. Since it still owns 30% of Dutch, Tone records its share of the loss as follows:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Loss from Dutch Company ($10,000 x 0.30) 3,000
      Investment in Dutch Company 3,000
To recognize 30% of Dutch Company’s loss.

Tone would report the $3,000 loss on its income statement. The $3,000 credit reduces Tone’s equity in the investee. Furthermore, because dividends are a distribution of income to the owners of the corporation, if Dutch declares and pays $20,000 in dividends, this entry would also be required for Tone:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Cash 6,000
      Investment in Dutch Company ($20,000 x 0.30) 6,000
To record receipt of 30% of dividends paid by Dutch Company.

Under the equity method just illustrated, the investment in the Dutch Company account always reflects Tone’s 30% interest in the net assets of Dutch.

Here is a brief video explaining the equity method in a bit more detail:https://youtu.be/EIoeMEVkoUI

You can view the transcript for “9 – The Equity Method of Accounting” here (opens in new window).

 

Consolidation

If an investor has more than 50% holding in a company, it is said to have control over the investee. The investor is called the parent and the investee is called the subsidiary and the investment is accounted for by combining all the accounts of the parent and the subsidiary, eliminating any intercompany transactions.

These “consolidated” financial statements combine the revenues and expenses of all the companies, and a portion of the net income attributable to the other investors, called the minority interest, is separately reported. Similarly, the consolidated balance sheet combines assets and liabilities of the parent and the subsidiary and separately mentions the equity attributable to minority interest.

The following table compares the different methods of accounting for equity investments:

Holding ≤ 20% 20–50% ≥ 50%
Accounting method Fair value method Equity method Consolidation
Changes in fair value Recognized in income statement Ignored Ignored
Net income of the investee Ignored Proportionately recognized in income statement; increases carrying value of investment Not applicable
Dividends Recognized income statement Proportionately recognized to reduce the carrying value Not applicable
Revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities Not applicable Not applicable Revenues, expenses, assets, and liabilities are combined; minority interest is recognized when holding is less than 100%.

]]>
Introduction to Other Current and Noncurrent Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-other-current-and-noncurrent-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:06 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-other-current-and-noncurrent-assets/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Account for other current and noncurrent assets

Let’s do a quick review. Current assets we’ve covered so far include:

  • Cash and cash equivalents
  • Accounts Receivable
  • Inventories

Three jars full of coins.Noncurrent assets we’ve covered so far include:

  • Property, plant and equipment
  • Natural Resources
  • Intangibles such as goodwill and patents

The remaining list of other common current and noncurrent assets will obviously be different from company to company. However, there are some common items, such as:

  • Long-term investments in other companies (and related short-term investments)
  • Notes receivable
  • Operating lease right-of-use assets

In your career as an accountant, as you run into specific items such as other receivables, deferred taxes, and various prepaid expenses, you’ll find the theories you have learned as you have studied these other major categories of assets will help you understand the FASB pronouncements that you find in your research.

]]>
Short-Term Investments https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/short-term-investments/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:06 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/short-term-investments/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate an understanding of accounting for short-term investments

 

When a corporation purchases the stock of another corporation, the method of accounting for the stock investment depends on the corporation’s motivation for making the investment and the relative size of the investment. A corporation’s motivation for purchasing the stock of another company may be: (1) as a short or long-term investment of excess cash; (2) as a long-term investment in a substantial percentage of another company’s stock to ensure a supply of a required raw material (for example, Albemarle’s investment in the Wodgina project); or (3) as a long-term investment for expansion (when a company purchases another profitable company rather than starting a new business operation, as Facebook did when it purchased WhatsApp).

A smiling man with an arrow behind him pointing up.

Reporting these investments on the balance sheet depends on management’s intent. If the investment is intended to be temporary, it is categorized as a current asset. If it intended to be long-term, it is a noncurrent asset.

Trading securities include both debt securities (bonds) and equity securities (stocks) an entity intends to sell in the short term for a profit that it expects to generate from increases in the price of the securities, so they are always considered current assets.Trading is usually done through an organized stock exchange, which acts as the intermediary between a buyer and seller, though it is also possible to directly engage in purchase and sale transactions with counterparties.

Trading securities are recorded in the balance sheet of the investor at their fair value as of the balance sheet date. If there is a change in the fair value of such an asset from period to period, this change is recognized in the income statement as a gain or loss.

Other investments in marketable securities are classified as either available-for-sale or held-to-maturity.

  • Held-to-maturity investments are usually bonds (loans to other companies) held until they come due, which may be years in the future.
  • Available-for-sale securities don’t fit in the other two categories, and so may be classified as current or noncurrent, depending on the facts and circumstances.

In this section, we’ll focus on trading securities. Think of trading securities as your on-line brokerage account where you put a few extra dollars trying to earn a quick profit instead of letting that money sit in a savings account that pays very little. Available-for-sale securities and held-to-maturity securities are more like your 401(k) retirement plan, where you set it aside and leave it.

The Facebook logo.

For example, Facebook, Inc. had almost $20 billion in cash and cash equivalents at the end of 2019 (see below) which may seem like a lot of cash sitting idle and not earning much return on investment (because cash and cash equivalents are invested in short-term, low-risk and therefore low-return but highly liquid securities). However, with annual operating expenses of almost $50 billion in 2019, plus cash needed for capital investments, $20 billion in the bank is not unreasonable. Imagine if your annual household expenses were $50,000 and you had $20,000 in the bank—that wouldn’t be unreasonable.

However, there is another $36 billion in marketable securities on the balance sheet (trading securities and short-term available-for-sale securities). Equate that to you personally having another $36,000 invested in the stock market. One question you might have is: where is all that cash coming from? In a later module, you’ll study the statement of cash flows, which may answer that question, but for now, we are just analyzing the balance sheet. It is clear though that Facebook has a lot of cash and liquid assets.

See caption for link to long description.
See the balance sheet long description here.
https://youtu.be/rLXgpX4e6a4

You can view the transcript for “9 – Intent-Based Accounting” here (opens in new window).

 

Investors in common stock can use two methods to account for their investments. The purchaser’s level of ownership determines whether the investment is accounted for by (a) the cost method or (b) the equity method.

Under both methods, the purchaser initially records the investment at cost (price paid at acquisition). Under the cost method, the investor company does not adjust the investment account balance subsequently for its share of the investee’s reported income, losses, and dividends. If the investor company receives dividends, it debits whatever money market or savings or checking account the dividend was deposited to and credits an income statement account called Dividend Revenue or something similar. That account is usually reported “below the line” (after operating income but before taxable income).

For example, YourCompany buys, via an EFT from the general checking account to a broker, 100 shares of Public, Inc. at $55 per share, and intends to sell it within six months, or as soon as it hits $60, whichever is sooner. The intent is to hold it short-term, and it is unlikely that YourCompany owns any significant portion of ownership. This is called a trading security and will be categorized as short-term, and we will use the cost method to account for such investments.

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Marketable Securities $5,500
      Checking Account $5,500
To record the purchase of 100 shares of Public, Inc.

When a dividend is deposited into our brokerage money market account, we record it as follows:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Money Market Account $5
      Dividend Revenue $5
To record receipt of Public, Inc. dividend.

At year-end, companies adjust the book value of trading securities (and available-for-sale securities, covered in the next section) to fair market value. Fair market value is considered to be the market price of the securities or what a buyer or seller would pay to exchange the securities. An unrealized holding gain or loss will usually result in each portfolio.

To illustrate the application of the fair market value to trading securities, assume YourCompany only has that 100 shares of Public, Inc. stock in the trading securities portfolio. At year-end, based on the closing value from the stock market listing, the trading price is now $50. The journal entry required at the end of the year is:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Dec 31 Unrealized loss on trading securities 500
Dec 31       Trading securities 500
Dec 31 To record unrealized loss from market decline of trading securities.

Note that the debit is to the Unrealized Loss on Trading Securities account. This loss is unrealized because the securities have not been sold. However, the loss is reported in the income statement as a deduction in arriving at net income. The credit in the preceding entry is to the Trading Securities account so as to adjust its balance to its fair market value. An unrealized holding gain would be an addition to net income. In addition, some companies may post the unrealized gains and losses to a contra or companion account. That is a bookkeeping decision.

If YourCompany sold the 100 shares of Public, Inc. in January of the next year at $60 per share, the company would receive $6,000. The gain on sale entry would be:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Jan 1 Checking Account 6,000
Jan 1       Trading securities 5,000
Jan 1       Gain on sale of trading securities 1,000
Jan 1 To record the sale of YourCompany stock.

No adjustment needs to be made to the unrealized loss account previously debited because the unrealized loss recorded last year has flowed through the income statement and been closed to retained earnings through the closing process.

Obviously, there would be a subsidiary ledger tracking the individual stocks, which could be as simple as the brokerage statement, as long as the amounts tie to the general ledger control account (trading securities).

]]>
Practice: Intangible Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-intangible-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:05 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-intangible-assets/
  • Compute amortization expense on amortizable assets
  • Record amortization of intangible assets

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Amortization https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/amortization/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/amortization/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute amortization expense on amortizable assets

 

Amortization is the systematic write-off of the cost of an intangible asset to expense. A portion of an intangible asset’s cost is allocated to each accounting period in the economic (useful) life of the asset. All intangible assets are not subject to amortization. Only recognized intangible assets with finite useful lives are amortized. The finite useful life of such an asset is considered to be the length of time it is expected to contribute to the cash flows of the reporting entity. Pertinent factors that should be considered in estimating useful life include legal, regulatory, or contractual provisions that may limit the useful life. The method of amortization should be based upon the pattern in which the economic benefits are used up or consumed. If no pattern is apparent, the straight-line method of amortization should be used by the reporting entity.

An online line graph.

Recognized intangible assets deemed to have indefinite useful lives are not to be amortized. Amortization will, however, begin when it is determined that the useful life is no longer indefinite. The method of amortization would follow the same rules as intangible assets with finite useful lives.

Straight-line amortization is calculated the same was as straight-line depreciation for plant assets. Generally, we record amortization by debiting Amortization Expense and crediting the intangible asset account. An accumulated amortization account could be used to record amortization. However, the information gained from such accounting might not be significant because normally intangibles do not account for as many total asset dollars as do plant assets.

Straight-line amortization is not the only option. ASC 350-30-35-6 states that, “[the] method of amortization shall reflect the pattern in which the economic benefits of the intangible asset are consumed or otherwise used up. If that pattern cannot be reliably determined, a straight-line amortization method shall be used.” When an income approach method is used to value an intangible asset, it is appropriate to amortize that asset in a manner that reflects the cash flows utilized in the valuation (often called the “pattern of benefits” method). That being said, many companies still use a straight-line approach.

Watch this video to see a demonstration of basic amortization using the straight-line method:You can view the transcript for “How to account for intangible assets, including amortization (3 of 5)” here (opens in new window).

 

Next, we’ll learn how to record amortization of intangible assets.

]]>
Journalizing Entries for Amortization https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-entries-for-amortization/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-entries-for-amortization/ Read more »]]>
  • Record amortization of intangible assets

 

By now, you should be able to predict what the journal entry for amortization will look like.

Let’s look at an example. A patent is a right granted by the federal government. This exclusive right enables the owner to manufacture, sell, lease, or otherwise benefit from an invention for a limited period. The value of a patent lies in its ability to produce revenue. Patents have a legal life of 14–20 years.

When purchasing a patent, a company records it in the Patents account at cost. The firm also debits the Patents account for the cost of the first successful defense of the patent in lawsuits (assuming an outside law firm was hired rather than using internal legal staff). Such a lawsuit establishes the validity of the patent and thereby increases its service potential. In addition, the firm debits the cost of any competing patents purchased to ensure the revenue-generating capability of its own patent to the Patents account.

The firm would amortize the cost of a purchased patent over its finite life which reasonably would not exceed its legal life. If a patent cost $40,000 and has a useful life of 10 years, the journal entries to record the patent and periodic amortization (assuming a full year) are:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Mar. 1 Patent $40,000.00
Mar. 1       Checking accounting $40,000.00
Mar. 1 To record purchases of patent.

 

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
May 15 Amortization expense $4,000.00
May 15       Patents $4,000.00
May 15 To record annual patent amortization.

Notice that we don’t always use a contra account to record amortization of intangibles; however, if we look at the second half of Albemarle’s Note 12 on goodwill and intangibles, we see the company does keep track of amortization separately. Because they are reporting it in the annual report, we can assume they are using separate GL accounts for the accumulated amortization.

Other intangibles consist of the following at December 31, 2019 and 2018 (in thousands)
Customer Lists and Relationships Trade Names and Trademarks [a] Patents and Technology Other Total
Subcategory, Gross Asset Value
Balance at December 31, 2017 $ 439,312 $18,981 $61,618 $37,256 $557,167
      Foreign currency translation adjustments and other (10,940) (528) (5,817) 6,452 (9,483)
Balance at December 31, 2018 Single Line428,372 Single Line18,453 Single Line55,801 Single Line43,708 Single Line546,334
      Foreign currency translation adjustments and other (5,910) (366) (781) (2,426) (9,483)
Balance at December 31, 2019 Single Line$422,462Double Line Single Line$18,087Double Line Single Line$55,020Double Line Single Line$41,282Double Line Single Line$536,851Double Line
Subcategory, Accumulated Amortization
Balance at December 31, 2017 $(74,704) $(8,295) $(35,203) $(17,462) $(135,664)
      Amortization (23,402) (1,450) (3,127) (27,979)
      Foreign currency translation adjustments and other 2,309 119 1,405 (381) 3,452
Balance at December 31, 2018 Single Line(95,797) Single Line(8,176) Single Line(35,248) Single Line(20,970) Single Line(160,191)
      Amortization (23,020) (1,388) (2,714) (27,122)
      Foreign currency translation adjustments and other 2,068 238 439 2,339 5,084
Balance at December 31, 2019 Single Line$(116,749)Double Line Single Line$(7,938)Double Line Single Line$(36,197)Double Line Single Line$(21,345)Double Line Single Line$(182,229)Double Line
Net Book Value at December 31, 2018 Double Line$332,575 Double Line$10,277 Double Line$20,553 Double Line$22,738 Double Line$386,143
Net Book Value at December 31, 2019 Double Line$305,713 Double Line$10,149 Double Line$18,823 Double Line$19,937 Double Line$354,622
[a] Net Book Value includes only indefinite-lived intangible assets
Useful lives range from 13–25 years for customer lists and relationships; 8–20 years for patents and technology; and primarily 5–25 years for other
Amortization of other intangibles aounted to $27.1 million, $280 million, and $25.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2019, 2018, and 2017 respectively. Included in amortization for the years ended December 31, 2019, 2018, and 2017 is $19.5 million, $19.7 million, and $17.7 million, respectively, of amortization using the pattern of economic benefit method.

Also, notice they do not amortize trade names and trademarks (nor do they amortize goodwill) because there is no determinable useful life. Note that the company uses the “pattern of benefits” method of calculating amortization (matching the expense to future cash flows/revenues).

The total net book value of other intangibles (historical cost minus accumulated amortization) of $354.622 million at December 31, 2019  is equal to the number on the balance sheet. As accountants, it’s imperative that our sub schedules and subsidiary ledger always tie to control accounts.

Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In Thousands)
Description December 31, 2019 December 31, 2018
Subcategory, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     613,110 $     555,320
     Total accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful amounts (2019–$3,1711; 2018–$4,460) 612,651 605,712
     Other accounts receivable 67,551 52,059
     Inventories 768,984 700,540
     Other current assets 162,813 84,790
          Total current assets Single line2,225,109 Single line1,998,421
Property, plant and equipment, at cost Single line6,817,843 Single line4,799,063
     Less accumulated depreciation and amortization 1,908,370 1,777,979
          Net property, plant and equipment Single line4,909,473 Single line3,021,084
Investments Single line579,813 Single line528,722
Other assets 213,061 80,135
Goodwill 1,578,785 1,567,169
Other intangibles, net of amortization 354,622 386,143
Total Assets Single line
$     9,860,863
Double line
Single line
$     7,581,674
Double line

 

]]>
Introduction to Intangible Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-intangible-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:03 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-intangible-assets/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Account for intangibles

Let’s take another quick look at Albemarle’s assets from the annual report (SEC Form 10-K):

After investments and other assets (covered in the next section), the company lists goodwill and then other intangibles, net of amortization.

A copyright symbol.In addition to goodwill, which is often a large number, intangible assets include:

  • Patents
  • Copyright
  • Franchise agreements
  • Trademarks

Intangible assets have either an identifiable or indefinite useful life. For instance, a patent will have a limited and somewhat predictable useful life, because the rights granted by a patent may only protect the holder of the patent for 14-20 years, and the actual usefulness of the patent may even be shorter than that as new products replace old ones. However, something like goodwill that is purchased when a company buys another company has an undefined useful life.

Intangible assets are typically expensed according to their respective life expectancy. This is similar to fixed assets, except the allocation of the cost is called amortization instead of depreciation, and it is usually calculated using the straight-line method. Those with identifiable useful lives are amortized on a straight-line basis over their economic or legal life, whichever one is shorter.

Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives, like trademarks and goodwill, can’t be amortized, but they are reassessed each year for impairment (loss of value). If an impairment has occurred, then a loss must be recognized. An impairment loss is determined by subtracting the asset’s fair value from the asset’s book or carrying value.

]]>
Goodwill, Patents, and Other Intangible Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/goodwill-patents-and-other-intangible-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:03 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/goodwill-patents-and-other-intangible-assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Define intangible assets

 

Intangible assets are defined as identifiable non-monetary assets that cannot be seen, touched, or physically measured. Intangible assets are created through time and effort and are identifiable as a separate asset.

Although they have no physical characteristics, intangible assets have value because of the advantages or exclusive privileges and rights they provide to a business. Intangible assets generally arise from two sources: (1) exclusive privileges granted by governmental authority or by legal contract, such as patents, copyrights, franchises, trademarks and trade names, and leases; and (2) superior entrepreneurial capacity or management know-how and customer loyalty, which is called goodwill.

All intangible assets are nonphysical, but not all nonphysical assets are intangibles. For example, accounts receivable and prepaid expenses are nonphysical, yet classified as current assets rather than intangible assets. Intangible assets are generally both nonphysical and noncurrent; they appear in a separate long-term section of the balance sheet entitled “Intangible assets.”

Initially, firms record intangible assets at cost like most other assets. However, computing an intangible asset’s acquisition cost differs from computing a plant asset’s acquisition cost. Firms may include only outright purchase costs in the acquisition cost of an intangible asset; the acquisition cost does not include the cost of internal development or self-creation of the asset. If an intangible asset is internally generated in its entirety, none of its costs are capitalized. Therefore, some companies have extremely valuable assets that may not even be recorded in their asset accounts.

Goodwill

A compass on top of a money ledger.In accounting, goodwill is an intangible value attached to a company resulting mainly from the company’s management skill or know-how and a favorable reputation with customers. A company’s value may be greater than the total of the fair market value of its tangible and identifiable intangible assets. This greater value means that the company generates an above-average income on each dollar invested in the business. Thus, proof of a company’s goodwill is its ability to generate superior earnings or income.

A goodwill account appears in the accounting records only if goodwill has been purchased. A company cannot purchase goodwill by itself; it must buy an entire business or a part of a business to obtain the accompanying intangible asset, goodwill. Specific reasons for a company’s goodwill include a good reputation, customer loyalty, superior product design, unrecorded intangible assets (because they were developed internally), and superior human resources. Since these positive factors are not individually quantifiable, when grouped together they constitute goodwill. The intangible asset goodwill is not amortized. Goodwill is to be tested periodically for impairment. The amount of any goodwill impairment loss is to be recognized in the income statement as a separate line before the subtotal income from continuing operations (or similar caption). The goodwill account would be reduced by the same amount.

Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In Thousands)
Description December 31, 2019 December 31, 2018
Subcategory, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     613,110 $     555,320
     Total accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful amounts (2019–$3,1711; 2018–$4,460) 612,651 605,712
     Other accounts receivable 67,551 52,059
     Inventories 768,984 700,540
     Other current assets 162,813 84,790
          Total current assets Single line2,225,109 Single line1,998,421
Property, plant and equipment, at cost Single line6,817,843 Single line4,799,063
     Less accumulated depreciation and amortization 1,908,370 1,777,979
          Net property, plant and equipment Single line4,909,473 Single line3,021,084
Investments Single line579,813 Single line528,722
Other assets 213,061 80,135
Goodwill 1,578,785 1,567,169
Other intangibles, net of amortization 354,622 386,143
Total Assets Single line
$     9,860,863
Double line
Single line
$     7,581,674
Double line

 

In Note 2, the company identifies the acquisition of a 60% interest in the Wodgina hard rock lithium mine project from Mineral Resources Limited, creating a joint venture, for 1.324 billion dollars. Albemarle recorded the assets at their fair market value totaling $1.292 billion, with the difference of $32 million recorded as additional goodwill, offset by a $20 million decrease mostly attributed to translating from Australian currency (AUD) to U.S. Dollars (see Note 12).

As you will see in the section on investments, Albemarle will recognize 60% of the income or loss from the joint venture on the income statement.

Footnote 2 ends with this statement that summarized goodwill succinctly:

Goodwill arising from the acquisition consists largely of anticipated synergies and economies of scale from the combined companies and overall strategic importance of the acquired businesses to Albemarle. The goodwill attributable to the acquisition will not be amortizable or deductible for tax purposes.

In other words, goodwill is the amount the company paid for another company’s assets in excess of what they would be worth individually. In this case, the whole package of assets was worth just under $1.292 billion individually, but packaged together as a business, Albemarle paid $1.324 billion; the difference we called goodwill, which has an indefinite and indeterminable useful life.

For a more extreme example, take a look at Facebook, Inc.’s 2014 purchase of WhatsApp for $21.8 billion, with $18.1 billion of that being a premium paid (recorded on Facebook’s financials as goodwill) in order to acquire the relatively small company’s user base.

Patents

A patent is considered an intangible asset. This is because a patent does not have physical substance and provides long-term value to the owning entity. As such, the accounting for a patent is the same as for any other intangible fixed asset, which is:

  • Record the cost to acquire or create the patent as the initial asset cost.
    • If a company files for a patent application, this cost of the asset will include the registration, documentation, and other legal fees associated with the application; however,
    • Research and development (R&D) costs required to develop the idea being patented cannot be included in the capitalized cost of a patent. These R&D costs are instead charged to expense as incurred; the basis for this treatment is that R&D is inherently risky, without assurance of future benefits, so it should not be considered an asset.
    • If the costs of obtaining a patent are so small that they do not meet or exceed the company’s capitalization limit, those costs should be recorded as an expense.

A street drain that says "Lowe's patent".

  • Amortize the cost of the patent over the useful life of the patent.
    • A patent asset should not be amortized for longer than the lifespan of the protection afforded by the patent. If the expected useful life of the patent is even shorter, use the useful life for amortization purposes. Thus, whichever is  shorter—a patent’s useful life or its legal life—should be used for the amortization period.
  • If a patent has lost significant value, recognize an impairment to reduce the carrying amount of the asset.
  • Once the company is no longer making use of the patented idea, the asset can be written off by crediting the balance in the patent asset account and debiting the balance in the accumulated amortization account. If the asset has not been fully amortized at the time of derecognition, then any remaining unamortized balance must be recorded as a loss.

Copyrights

A copyright is an exclusive right granted by the federal government giving protection against the illegal reproduction by others of the creator’s written works, designs, and literary productions. The finite useful life for a copyright extends to the life of the creator plus 50 years. Most publications have a limited (finite) life; a creator may amortize the cost of the copyright to expense on a straight line basis or based upon the pattern in which the economic benefits are used up or consumed.

Franchise Agreements

A franchise is a contract between two parties granting the franchisee (the purchaser of the franchise) certain rights and privileges ranging from name identification to complete monopoly of service. In many instances, both parties are private businesses. For example, an individual who wishes to open a hamburger restaurant may purchase a McDonald’s franchise; the two parties involved are the individual business owner and McDonald’s Corporation. This franchise would allow the business owner to use the McDonald’s name and golden arches and would provide the owner with advertising and many other benefits. The legal life of a franchise may be limited by contract.

The parties involved in a franchise arrangement are not always private businesses. A government agency may grant a franchise to a private company. A city may give a franchise to a utility company, giving the utility company the exclusive right to provide service to a particular area.

In addition to providing benefits, a franchise usually places certain restrictions on the franchisee. These restrictions generally are related to rates or prices charged; also they may be in regard to product quality or to the particular supplier from whom supplies and inventory items must be purchased.

If periodic payments to the grantor of the franchise are required, the franchisee debits them to a Franchise Expense account. If a lump-sum payment is made to obtain the franchise, the franchisee records the cost in an asset account entitled Franchise and amortizes it over the finite useful life of the asset. The legal life (if limited by contract) and the economic life of the franchise may limit the finite useful life

Trademarks

A trademark is a symbol, design, or logo used in conjunction with a particular product or company. A trade name is a brand name under which a product is sold or a company does business. Often trademarks and trade names are extremely valuable to a company, but if they have been internally developed, they have no recorded asset cost. However, when a business purchases such items from an external source, it records them at cost and amortizes them over their finite useful life.

Research and Development costs

A woman working at her laptop.

Research and Development (R&D) costs can be significant for some companies (such as pharmaceuticals), and although they may result in a patent or other intangible asset, they are not normally capitalized. Instead, they are expensed as incurred.

Research is original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining new scientific or technical knowledge and understanding.

Development is the application of research findings to a plan or design for the production of new or substantially improved materials, devices, products, processes, systems, or services before the start of commercial production or use.

R&D activities do not include routine or periodic alternatives to existing products, production lines, manufacturing processes, and other ongoing operations even though these alterations may represent improvements. For example, routine ongoing efforts to refine, enrich, or improve the qualities of an existing product are not considered R&D activities.

In addition, start-up and organizational costs are expensed as incurred, rather than capitalized.

]]>
Practice: Natural Resources https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-natural-resources/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:02 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-natural-resources/
  • Compute depletion for a given cost, residual value, and estimated output
  • Journalize adjusting entries for the recording of depletion

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Journalizing Adjusting Entries for Depletion https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-adjusting-entries-for-depletion/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:01 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-adjusting-entries-for-depletion/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize adjusting entries for the recording of depletion

 

By crediting the Accumulated Depletion account instead of the asset account (E.g. Coal Mine Assets), we continue to report the original cost of the entire natural resource on the financial statements. Thus, statement users can see the percentage of the resource that has been removed. To determine the total cost of the resource available, we combine this depletion cost with other extraction, mining, or removal costs. We can assign this total cost to either the cost of natural resources sold or the inventory of the natural resource still on hand. Thus, we could expense all, some, or none of the depletion and removal costs recognized in an accounting period, depending on the portion sold. If all of the resource is sold, we expense all of the depletion and removal costs. The cost of any portion not yet sold is part of the cost of inventory.

AA mining excavation site. mining company purchased a coal mine on Jan 1 20X5 for $2,800,000. The estimated capacity of the mine is 1,750,000 tons of coal, and the estimated salvage value is zero. The company incurred additional $50,000 on development of the mine for extraction purposes. They extracted 210,000 tons of coal from the mine up to Jan 31, 20X5, and sold all but 14,000 tons of the coal extracted from the mine, within Jan 20X5. Calculate the depletion expense on the mine for the month ending Jan 31, 20X5.

Solution

Cost per Ton =  2,800,000 + 50,000 − 0

1,750,000

Cost per Ton = $1.62857

Total Depletion of Mine

= $1.62857 × 210,000

= $342,000

The mine will be stated at $2,508,000 (= 2,800,000 + 50,000 − 342,000) in the balance sheet on Jan 31, 20X5, but not all of the amount $342,000 will be recorded as depletion expense because the company had 14,000 tons of coal unsold at the end of the month. Here, the depletion expense will be calculated using the following formula:

Depletion Expense = Total Depletion of Mine − Depletion Related to Unsold Extract

Depletion Expense = $342,000 − $1.62857 × 14,000

Depletion Expense = $342,000 − $22,800

Depletion Expense = $319,200

The following list records the depletion expense and inventory on Jan 31, 20X5:

Coal Inventory 22,800

Depletion Expense 319,200

Coal Mine Assets 342,000

]]>
Compute Depletion https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/compute-depletion/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:48:00 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/compute-depletion/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute depletion for a given cost, residual value, and estimated output

 

The calculation of depletion involves these steps:

A crane digging out dirt.

  • Compute a depletion base.
  • Compute a unit depletion rate.
  • Charge depletion based on units of usage.

The resulting net carrying amount of natural resources still on the books of a business does not necessarily reflect the market value of the underlying natural resources. Rather, the amount simply reflects an ongoing reduction in the amount of the original recorded cost of the natural resources.

The depletion base is the asset that is to be depleted. It is comprised of the following four types of costs:

  • Acquisition costs. The cost to either buy or lease property.
  • Exploration costs. The cost to locate assets that may then be depleted. In most cases, these costs are charged to expense as incurred.
  • Development costs. The cost to prepare the property for asset extraction, which includes the cost of such items as tunnels and wells.
  • Restoration costs. The cost to restore property to its original condition after depletion activities have been concluded.

To compute a unit depletion rate, subtract the salvage value of the asset from the depletion base and divide it by the total number of measurement units that you expect to recover. The formula for the unit depletion rate is:

[latex]\dfrac{\text{depletion base}-\text{salvage value}}{\text{total units to be recovered}}[/latex]

The depletion charge is then created based on actual units of usage. Thus, if you extract 500 barrels of oil and the unit depletion rate is $5.00 per barrel, then you charge $2,500 to depletion expense.

The estimated amount of a natural resource that can be recovered will change constantly as assets are gradually extracted from a property. As you revise your estimates of the remaining amount of extractable natural resource, incorporate these estimates into the unit depletion rate for the remaining amount to be extracted.

Depletion Method

Pensive Corporation’s subsidiary, Pensive Oil, drills a well with the intention of extracting oil from a known reservoir. It incurs the following costs related to the acquisition of property and development of the site:

  • Land purchase $280,000
  • Road construction 23,000
  • Drill pad construction 48,000
  • Drilling fees 192,000
  • Total $543,000

A ship transporting oil.

In addition, Pensive Oil estimates it will incur a site restoration cost of $57,000 once extraction is complete, making the total depletion base of the property $600,000.

Pensive’s geologists estimate the proven oil reserves accessed by the well are 400,000 barrels, so the unit depletion charge will be $1.50 per barrel of oil extracted ($600,000 depletion base / 400,000 barrels).

In the first year, Pensive Oil extracts 100,000 barrels of oil from the well, which results in a depletion charge of $150,000 (100,000 barrels x $1.50 unit depletion charge).

At the beginning of the second year of operations, Pensive’s geologists issue a revised estimate of the remaining amount of proven reserves, with the new estimate of 280,000 barrels being 20,000 barrels lower than the original estimate (less extractions already completed). This means the unit depletion charge will increase to $1.61 ($450,000 remaining depletion base / 280,000 barrels).

During the second year, Pensive Oil extracts 80,000 barrels of oil from the well, which results in a depletion charge of $128,800 (80,000 barrels x $1.61 unit depletion charge). At the end of the second year, there is still a depletion base of $321,200 that must be charged to expense in proportion to the amount of any remaining extractions.

You have learned about calculating depletion for a natural resource, but how do you journalize it? That will be the subject in the next section.

]]>
Introduction to Natural Resources https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-natural-resources/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-natural-resources/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Account for natural resources

Resources supplied by nature, such as ore deposits, mineral deposits, oil reserves, gas deposits, and timber stands, are natural resources or wasting assets. Natural resources represent inventories of raw materials that can be consumed (exhausted) through extraction or removal from their natural setting (e.g. removing oil from the ground).

Take a look at Note 9 of the Albemarle Corporation (ALB:NYSE) financials for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2019, from page 72 of the SEC form 10-K:

NOTE 9 – Property, Plant and Equipment:
     Property, plant and equipment, at cost, consist of the following at December 31, 2019 and 2018 (in thousands):
Useful Lives (Years) December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Land $     116,728 $     123,518
Land imporvements 10-30 83,256 63,349
Building and improvements 10-50 337,728 251,980
Machinery and equipment(a) 2-45 3,355,518 2,780,478
Mineral rights and reserves 7-60 1,764,067 696,033
Construction in progress 1,160,545 883,705
Total Single line
$     6,817,843
Double line
Single line
$     4,799,063
Double line
(a) Consists primarily of (1) short-lived production equipment components, office and building equipment and other equipment with estimated lives ranging 2-7 years, (2) production process equipment (intermediate components) with estimated lives ranging 8-19 years, (3) production process equipment (major unit components) with estimated lives ranging from 20-29 years, and (4) production process equipment (infrastructure and other) with estimated lives ranging 30-45 years.
The cost of property, plant and equipment is depreciated generally by the straight-line method. Depletion of mineral rights is based on the units-of-production method. Depreciation expense, including depletion, amounted to $183.3 million, $170.0 million and $169.5 million during the years ended December 39, 2019, 2018 and 2017, respectively. Interest capitalized on significant capital projects in 2019. 2018, and 2017 was $30.2 million, $19.3 million and $7.4 million, respectively.

 

Notice a couple of things:

  1. You are already familiar with land, land improvements, buildings, equipment, and construction in progress.
  2. There is a new item: mineral rights and reserves (depletable assets).
  3. In the text of the note, the company mentions straight-line depreciation, with which you are familiar.
  4. Also in the text of the note, the company mentions depletion using the units-of-production method.

Albemarle Corporation develops, manufactures, and markets a wide variety of chemicals and reports operations based on three segments: Lithium, Bromine Specialties, and Catalysts. The company is based in North Carolina but operates research and development facilities around the world. The mineral rights they refer to include things like lithium brine ponds in places like Salar de Atacama, Chile, and Silver Peak, Nevada, USA, and bromine brine in Arkansas and the Dead Sea.

]]>
Natural Resources and Depletion https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/natural-resources-and-depletion/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/natural-resources-and-depletion/ Read more »]]>
  • Understand the nature of depletable assets

 

When property is purchased, a journal entry assigns the purchase price to the two assets purchased—the natural resource and the land. If we purchased an ore mine for $650,000 cash and we determined the land value was $50,000 and the Ore Deposit value was $600,000, the entry would be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Apr 15 Land 50,000
Apr 15 Ore Deposits 600,000
Apr 15 Checking Account 650,000

After the purchase, we incurred $300,000 in additional costs to explore and develop the site. This entry would be recorded into the natural resources account, Ore Deposits.

JournalPage 102
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Apr 15 Ore Deposits 300,000
Apr 15 Checking Account 300,000
To record costs of exploration and development.

A windmill.On the balance sheet, we classify natural resources as a separate group among noncurrent assets under headings such as “Timber Stands” and “Oil Reserves”. Typically, we record natural resources in the general ledger at their cost of acquisition plus exploration and development costs and then we record an amount called “depletion” that is much like depreciation expense.  Accordingly, on the balance sheet, we report natural resources at total cost less accumulated depletion. (Accumulated depletion is similar to the accumulated depreciation used for plant assets.) When analyzing the financial condition of companies owning natural resources, exercise caution because the historical costs reported for the natural resources may be only a small fraction of their current value.

Depletion is the exhaustion that results from the physical removal of a part of a natural resource. For example; removing copper through mining or cutting timber for a paper company. In each accounting period, the depletion recognized is an estimate of the cost of the natural resource that was removed from its natural setting during the period. To record depletion, debit a Depletion account and credit an Accumulated Depletion account, which is a contra account to the natural resource asset account.

]]>
Why It Matters: Other Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-other-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:58 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-other-assets/ Read more »]]> Current assets we’ve covered so far include:

  • Cash and cash equivalents
  • Accounts Receivable
  • Inventories

Noncurrent assets we’ve covered so far include:

  • Property, plant and equipment

And we now need to cover some other common current and noncurrent assets, such as:

  • Natural Resources
  • Intangibles such as goodwill and patents
  • Long-term investments in other companies (and related short-term investments)
  • Notes receivable
  • Operating lease right-of-use assets

Let’s take a look at the asset section of the balance sheet for Albemarle Corporation (ALB:NYSE) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2019 from page 57 of the SEC form 10-K:

Albemarle Corporation and Subsidiaries
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In Thousands)
Description December 31, 2019 December 31, 2018
Subcategory, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     613,110 $     555,320
     Total accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful amounts (2019–$3,1711; 2018–$4,460) 612,651 605,712
     Other accounts receivable 67,551 52,059
     Inventories 768,984 700,540
     Other current assets 162,813 84,790
          Total current assets Single line2,225,109 Single line1,998,421
Property, plant and equipment, at cost Single line6,817,843 Single line4,799,063
     Less accumulated depreciation and amortization 1,908,370 1,777,979
          Net property, plant and equipment Single line4,909,473 Single line3,021,084
Investments Single line579,813 Single line528,722
Other assets 213,061 80,135
Goodwill 1,578,785 1,567,169
Other intangibles, net of amortization 354,622 386,143
Total Assets Single line
$     9,860,863
Double line
Single line
$     7,581,674
Double line

 

Individual items that are too small to report separately are often lumped together in one line on the balance sheet, as you see with both other current assets and other noncurrent assets.

However, Ablemarle discloses the composition of other current assets in a footnote on page 71 of the Form 10-K:

NOTE 8 – Other Current Assets:
     Other current assets consist of the following at December 31, 2019 and 2018 (in thousands):
December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Income tax recievables $     72,246 $     40,116
Prepaid expenses 83,637 43,172
Other 6,930 1,502
Total Single line
$     162,813
Double line
Single line
$     84,790
Double line

 

Income tax receivables are refunds from overpaying estimated taxes or from net operating losses carried back to offset prior years’ income, and prepaid expenses we’ve seen before; they include prepaid rent, insurance, and other expenses that we have accrued. The other category probably includes supplies and other sundry items too small to report separately.

The company also itemizes other assets listed in the noncurrent section of the balance sheet on page 74:

NOTE 11 – Other Assets:
     Other assets consist of the following at December 31, 2019 and 2018 (in thousands):
December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Deferred income taxes(a) $     15,275 $     17,029
Assets related to unrecognized tax benefits(a) 26,127 12,984
Operating leases(b) 133,864
Other(c) 37,795 50,122
Total Single line
$     213,061
Double line
Single line
$     80,135
Double line

 

The letter references give more details for each item:

  1. See Note 1, “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” and Note 21, “Income Taxes.”
  2. See Note 18, “Leases.”
  3. As of December 31, 2019 and 2018, a $28.7 million reserve was recorded against a note receivable on one of our European entities no longer deemed probable of collection.

In short, letter (a) refers to deferred income taxes that arise when the tax computed on book income is different from the actual tax expense. If the tax expense based on book income is less than the actual taxes due, the difference creates a deferred tax asset. As you saw in the module on property, plant, and equipment, one of the major items that creates book/tax difference is depreciation.

Letter (b) refers to the benefit of being able to use leased assets. For instance, if a company leases a vehicle for three years, it has both a liability (the obligation to pay the lessor) and an asset (the right to use the car).

Letter (c) likely refers to an underlying note receivable included in the $38 million line item. Notice that in the bigger picture of almost $10 billion in assets, even $50 million dollars is only ½ of a percent. In a household budget of a family with a $350,000 home and $150,000 in retirement savings, that would be the equivalent of a $2,500 asset, which might be roughly equal to the living room furniture–in other words, probably not worth reporting on a loan application.

Also, note that many companies don’t give this much detail about those lines identified as “other” because the amounts are usually not material.

The company also includes a note on goodwill (reported by business segment) and a note on other intangibles on page 75 that lists the following intangible assets:

  • Customer lists and relationships
  • Trade Names and Trademarks
  • Patents and Technology
  • Other
  • And a statement on how these intangible assets are amortized.

In this module you’ll learn how companies account for natural resources, such as mineral deposits, timber, and other depletable assets, as well as intangible assets such as goodwill and patents, and finally any other common assets, such as rights under leases, notes receivable, and investments.

]]>
Assignment: Property, Plant, and Equipment https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-property-plant-and-equipment/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:57 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-property-plant-and-equipment/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Property, Plant, and Equipment

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting It Together: Property, Plant, and Equipment https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-property-plant-and-equipment/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-property-plant-and-equipment/ Read more »]]> Let’s take a final look at the assets section of the balance sheet for Facebook, Inc., focusing on PP&E. Notice the title of that line specifically states, “Property and equipment, net,” which means that the $35.323 billion dollars in PP&E is stated net of accumulated depreciation, meaning it is the book value of those assets.

FACEBOOK INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
(in millions, except for number of shares and par value)
Description December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     19,079 $     10,019
     Marketable securities 35,776 31,095
     Accounts receivable, net of allowances of $206 and $229 as of December 31, 2019 and December 31, 2018, respectively 9,518 7,587
          Total current assets Single line
66,225
Single line
50,480
Property and equipment, net 35,323 24,683
Operating lease right-of-use assets, net 9,460
Intangible assets, net 894 1,294
Goodwill 18,715 18,301
Other Assets 2,759 2,576
Total assets Single line
$     133,376
Double line
Single line
$     97,334
Double line

 

Let’s also look at Note 6 again. In 2019, accumulated depreciation is almost $11 billion, up from $7 billion in 2018.

Note 6.       Property and Equipment
      Property and equipment, net consists of the following (in millions):
Description Column added for spacing Column added for spacing December 31,
Description Column added for spacing Column added for spacing 2019 2018
Land $     1,097 $     899
Buildings 11,226 7,401
Leasehold improvements 3,112 1,841
Network equipment 17,004 13,017
Computer software, office equipment and other 1,813 1,187
Finance lease right-of-use assets 1,635
Construction in progress 10,099 7,228
      Total Single line
45,986
Single line
31,573
Less: Accumulated depreciation (10,663) (6,890)
Property and equipment, net Single line
$     35,323
Double line
Single line
$     24,683
Double line

 

The rest of the text of Note 6 states:

Depreciation expense on property and equipment were $5.18 billion, $3.68 billion, and $2.33 billion for the years ended December 31 of 2019, 2018, and 2017, respectively. The majority of the PP&E depreciation expense was from network equipment depreciation of $3.83 billion, $2.94 billion, and $1.84 billion for the years ended December 31 of 2019, 2018, and 2017, respectively. Construction in progress includes costs mostly related to construction of data centers, network equipment infrastructure (to support our data centers around the world), and office buildings. No interest was capitalized for any period presented.

In addition, on pages 82–83 in Note 1, entitled Summary of Significant Accounting Policies, that starts on page 79, the company discloses its general policies around reporting fixed assets and calculating depreciation. Most of these general policies you should recognize by now:

PP&E, which includes amounts recorded under finance leases, are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets or the remaining lease term, whichever is shorter.

The estimated useful lives of property and equipment are described below:

Property and Equipment Useful Life
Network equipment 3– 20 years
Buildings 3–30 years
Computer software, office equipment and other 2–5 years
Finance lease right-of-use assets 3–20 years
Leasehold improvements Lesser of estimated useful life or remaining lease term

The useful lives of our property and equipment are determined by management when those assets are initially recognized and are routinely reviewed for the remaining estimated useful lives. Our current estimate of useful lives represents the best estimate of the useful lives based on current facts and circumstances but may differ from the actual useful lives due to changes in future circumstances, such as changes to our business operations, changes in the planned use of assets, and technological advancements. When we change the estimated useful life assumption for any asset, the remaining carrying amount of the asset is accounted for prospectively and depreciated or amortized over the revised estimated useful life. Historically, changes in useful lives have not resulted in material changes to our depreciation and amortization expense.

Land and assets held within construction in progress are not depreciated. Construction in progress is related to the construction or development of PP&E that have not yet been placed in service for their intended use.

The cost of maintenance and repairs is expensed as incurred. When assets are retired or otherwise disposed of, the cost and related accumulated depreciation are removed from their respective accounts, and any gain or loss on such sale or disposal is reflected in income from operations.

You may be surprised now by how much of these financial statement disclosures you understand. You know property and equipment net means book value. You recognize the different subcategories of PP&E listed in Note 6, and you know accumulated depreciation is all the prior depreciation expense taken minus any accumulated depreciation that was attached to assets sold. You know how straight-line depreciation expense is calculated (Facebook, Inc. likely uses accelerated depreciation for tax purposes, which is allowed under both tax law and GAAP). You understand the concept of useful life and of capitalization.

You may have caught the line where the company says, “Construction in progress includes costs mostly related to construction of data centers, network equipment infrastructure to support our data centers around the world, and office buildings. No interest was capitalized for any period presented.” That statement probably means the company did not borrow any money for the construction in progress. If it had, it would be capitalizing interest as part of construction. In the second to the last paragraph of the accounting policies statement, you may have noticed the company addressing both concepts of estimates and materiality, and in the last paragraph you saw the company address both repairs and maintenance (expensed as period expenses) and  gains and losses on retirement of assets.

Now, with your new knowledge about the ways PP&E is addressed and assessed, you will be able to read a company’s financial statements with a greater depth of understanding.

]]>
Discussion: Cooking the Books https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-cooking-the-books/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-cooking-the-books/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Cooking the Books link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Classified Balance Sheet https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/classified-balance-sheet/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:55 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/classified-balance-sheet/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify proper financial statement presentation of plant assets

 

The balance sheet we learned at the beginning of the course in both the report form (assets are first and liabilities and equity are below) and the account form (side-by-side) was fairly simple and straightforward. Balance sheets produced by publicly traded companies contain a lot of information and are almost always in the report form. Like the multi-step income statement, they follow a certain format that includes subtotals. The classified balance sheet groupings and subtotals make the balance sheet easier for investors to read and analyze. The classified balance sheet still proves the accounting equation but it separates assets and liabilities into the following subgroups:

A calculator and a balance sheet.

  • Current Assets: Can be converted to cash within a year or within the operating cycle, whichever is longer. Current assets include cash, accounts receivable, interest receivable, supplies, inventory, and other prepaid expenses.
  • Long-Term Investments: Investments that are not due for more than a year are reported in this section. Long-term investments would include notes receivable or investments in bonds or stocks.
  • Plant Assets: Plant assets (also called PP&E or fixed assets) refer to property that is tangible (can be seen and touched) and is used in the business to generate revenue. Plant assets include depreciable assets and land used in the business. The plant asset is recorded with its accumulated depreciation (if any) subtracted below it to get the asset’s book value.
  • Intangible Assets: Intangible assets are items that have a financial value but do not have a physical form. These would be things like trademarks, patents, and copyrights.
  • Current Liabilities: Like current assets, these are liabilities whose payment are due within a year or within the operating cycle, whichever is longer. Current liabilities include accounts payable, salaries payable, taxes payable, unearned revenue, etc.
  • Long-Term Liabilities: Liabilities due more than a year from now would be reported here, including notes payable, mortgage payable, bonds payable, etc.

As an example, here is the classified balance sheet for Home Depot, Inc. Look through it and identify the various subgroups we just discussed for the assets and liabilities on a classified balance sheet.

Other current assets1,040890     Sales taxes payable605656     Deferred revenue2,1161,782     Income taxes payable5511     Current installments of long-term debt1,8391,056     Current operating lease liabilities828—     Other accrued expenses2,6772,611

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
       Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
          Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Category, Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Subcategory, Current liabilities:
     Short term debt $     974 $     1,339
     Accounts payable 7,787 7,755
     Accured salaries and related expenses 1,494 1,506
       Total current liabilities Single line
18,375
Single line
16,716
Long-term debt, excluding current installments Single line28,670 Single line26,807
Long-term operating lease liabilities 5,066
Deferred income taxes 706 491
Other long-term liabilities 1,535 1,867
          Total liabilities Single line
54,352
Single line
45,881
Single line Single line
Common stock, par value $0.05; authorized 10,000 shares; issued: 1,786 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,782 shares at February 3, 2019; Outstanding: 1,077 shares at February 2, 2020 and 1,105 shares at February 3, 2019 89 89
Paid-in capital 11,001 10,578
Retained earnings 51,729 46,423
Accumulated other comprehensive loss (739) (772)
Treasury stock, at cost, 709 shares at February 2, 2020 and 677 shares at February 3,2019 (65,196) (58,196)
          Total stockholders’ (deficit) equity Single line
(3,116)
Single line
(1,878)
          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line
Note See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements

Now, try out what you learned:

]]>
Disclosures Related to Plant Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures-related-to-plant-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:55 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures-related-to-plant-assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Recognize disclosures related to plant assets

Here is the disclosure checklist for PP&E from the 2017 AICPA publication “Financial Reporting Framework for Small- and Medium-Sized Entities Presentation and Disclosure Checklist.

Paragraph numbers included at the end of each disclosure requirement refer to paragraphs within the “Financial Reporting Framework for Small- and Medium-Sized Entities.” Similarly, chapter numbers refer to chapters within the framework.

E. PP&E [chapter 14]

Disclosure

  1. For each major category of PP&E, has the entity disclosed:
    1. cost?
    2. the depreciation method used, including the depreciation period or rate? [14.21]
  2. Has the entity disclosed the carrying amount of an item of PP&E not being depreciated because it is under construction or development or has been removed from service for an extended period of time? [14.22]
  3. Has the entity disclosed the amount of depreciation of PP&E charged to income for the period? [14.23]
  4. Has the entity disclosed the total accumulated depreciation? [14.23]
  5. Has the entity disclosed the following information in the period in which the carrying value of a long-lived asset is reduced (other than for depreciation) due to the cessation of the asset’s use or written down in the carrying value of the asset:
    1. A description of the long-lived asset?
    2. A description of the facts and circumstances leading to the reduction in carrying value?
    3. If not separately presented on the face of the statement of operations, the amount of the reduction in carrying value, and the caption in the statement of operations that includes that amount? [14.25]
  6. When the entity’s accounting policy is to capitalize interest costs, has disclosure been made of interest costs capitalized? [14.26]

Let’s take a quick look at Home Depot, Inc.’s balance sheet presentation (just the asset section is presented below) and footnotes for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
     Other current assets 1,040 890
          Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line

 

Property and Equipment

Buildings, furniture, fixtures, and equipment are recorded at cost and depreciated using the straight-line method over their estimated useful lives. Leasehold improvements are amortized using the straight-line method over the original term of the lease or the useful life of the improvement, whichever is shorter.

Furniture.The estimated useful lives of our property and equipment follow:

  • Buildings: 5–45 years
  • Furniture, fixtures, and equipment: 2–20 years
  • Leasehold improvements: 5–45 years

We capitalize certain costs, including interest, related to construction in progress and the acquisition and development of software. Costs associated with the acquisition and development of software are amortized using the straight-line method over the estimated useful life of the software, which is three to six years. Certain development costs not meeting the criteria for capitalization are expensed as incurred.

We evaluate our long-lived assets each quarter for indicators of potential impairment. Indicators of impairment include current period losses combined with a history of losses, our decision to relocate or close a store or other location before the end of its previously estimated useful life, or when changes in other circumstances indicate the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. The evaluation for long-lived assets is performed at the lowest level of identifiable cash flows, which is generally the individual store level. The assets of a store with indicators of impairment are evaluated for recoverability by comparing its undiscounted future cash flows with its carrying value. If the carrying value is greater than the undiscounted future cash flows, we then measure the asset’s fair value to determine whether an impairment loss should be recognized. If the resulting fair value is less than the carrying value, an impairment loss is recognized for the difference between the carrying value and the estimated fair value. Impairment losses on property and equipment are recorded as a component of selling, general, and administrative expenses (SG&A). When a leased location closes, we also recognize, in selling, general, and administrative expenses (SG&A), the net present value of future lease obligations less estimated sublease income. Impairments and lease obligation costs on closings and relocations were not material to our consolidated financial statements in fiscal 2019, fiscal 2018, or fiscal 2017.

3. PROPERTY AND LEASES
Net Property and Equipment
The components of net property and equipment follow:
in millions February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Land $     8,390 $     8,363
Buildings 18,432 18,199
Furniture, fixtures and equipment 13,666 12,460
Leasehold improvements 1,789 1,705
Construction in progress 1,005 820
Finance leases 1,578 1,392
      Property and equipment, at cost Single line
44,860
Single line
42,939
Less accumulated depreciation and finace lease amortization 22,090 20,564
          Net property and equipment Single line
$     22,770
Double line
Single line
$     22,375
Double line

 

If you look through these footnotes and disclosures and compare them to the checklist, can you find everything? If not, what is missing? Also, there are probably still some components of these disclosures that sound strange, such as the whole section on impairments, which is related to the disclosure checklist item #5 (note that the checklist presented is for small and medium-size companies—The Home Depot checklist is much more detailed).

You can see that in addition to simply recording the numbers in the GL, accountants have to analyze, document, and communicate qualitative information and underlying assumptions.

]]>
Introduction to Reporting PP&E https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-property-plant-and-equipment/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-property-plant-and-equipment/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Demonstrate Proper Financial Presentation of PP&E

People with notebooks and computers sitting at a table.

Companies record depreciation on all plant assets except land. Since the amount of depreciation may be relatively large, depreciation expense is often a significant factor in determining net income. For this reason, most financial statement users are interested in the amount of, and the methods used to compute, a company’s depreciation expense.

In this section, we’ll cover the most common disclosures related to PP&E, including the balance sheet presentation known as a classified balance sheet, common footnotes, and other supporting information required by GAAP.

]]>
Practice: Asset Sale https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-asset-sale/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-asset-sale/
  • Journalize entries for sale of assets

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

]]>
Asset Exchange https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-exchange/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-exchange/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize entries for exchanging plant assets

 

When a company exchanges a fixed asset with another and the transaction has “commercial substance,” the company records the asset acquired at its fair value (or, if that is not readily available, the fair value of assets given up).

In most cases, fixed assets are acquired through exchange of monetary assets, such as cash. However, there are instances where two companies engage in barter transactions of fixed assets. To account for such exchanges of nonmonetary assets, we need to find out if the transaction has commercial substance. In plain English, we need to find out whether the exchange would change the cash flows of the business to a significant extent. If the cash flow pattern changes, the transaction is said to have commercial substance; if it doesn’t change, it has no commercial substance.

An exchange has commercial substance if, as a result of the exchange, future cash flows are expected to change significantly. For instance, if a company exchanges a building for land (a dissimilar exchange), the timing and the future cash flows are likely to be different than if the exchange had not occurred. Most property exchanges qualify as having commercial substance. However, if the exchange is not expected to create a significant change in future cash flows, the exchange does not result in commercial substance. For example, if a company exchanges one truck for another truck (a similar exchange) that will perform the same function as the old truck and for the same time period so that the future cash flows are not significantly different, then the exchange does not result in commercial substance. However, if the future cash flows are likely to be significantly different, then the exchange of similar assets has commercial substance.

For example, Log, Inc. exchanges two dump trucks that it had owned for two years for a concrete mixer. The total fair value of the dump trucks is $200,000, and the fair value of the concrete mixer is $220,000. The fair value of dump trucks is reliable because there is an active market for them. The dump trucks are recorded on Log, Inc.’s books at $300,000. Assume the useful life trucks and mixers is 10 years.A red dumptruck.

Because the fair value of dump trucks is the most reliable, Log, Inc. would record the transaction by (a) debiting equipment account by $200,000 to add the mixer to the books using the FMV of the assets given up; (b) debiting the accumulated depreciation by the amount of depreciation already charged on dump trucks, i.e., $60,000 ($300,000 divided by 10 multiplied by 2); (c) crediting the equipment account by $300,000 to remove the cost of the dump trucks; and (d) recording the difference as gain or loss.

 

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 1 Equipment (Concrete Mixer) 200,000
Accumulated Depreciation (Dump Trucks) 60,000
Loss on exchange of machinery 40,000
      Equipment (Dump Trucks) 300,000
To record exchange of of Dump Trucks for Concrete Mixer

 

It looks complicated, but the idea is simple. Remove the assets that are gone (the dump trucks in this case) along with the accumulated depreciation that goes with them, and then record the new asset on the books at fair market value.

If there is some cash involved in the transaction as well, include the cash in the journal entry. For instance, if Log, Inc. had to include a check for $10,000 along with the dump trucks, the entry would look like this:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 1 Equipment (Concrete Mixer) 200,000
Accumulated Depreciation (Dump Trucks) 60,000
Loss on exchange of machinery 50,000
      Equipment (Dump Trucks) 300,000
      Checking Account 10,000
To record exchange of of Dump Trucks for Concrete Mixer

 

Most exchanges have commercial substance. However, if a transaction lacks commercial substance, things get even a little more complicated. The accounting treatment will depend on the circumstances. The simplest circumstance is when two assets are traded with no cash payment from either side. In this case, the new asset is recorded at the carrying amount of the old asset (original cost minus accumulated depreciation). Take a look at the following conditions:

  • If cash is given along with the old asset, the new asset is similarly recorded at the carrying amount of the old asset plus the amount of money paid.
  • If cash is received and the cash is less than 25% of the total consideration received, some or all the realized gain is recognized. For example, assume a machine with a fair value of $20,000 and accumulated depreciation of $5,000 is exchanged for a similar machine and $3,000 in cash. When you record the new machine at $20,000, you would also realize a $5,000 gain. However, since the cash is 15% ($3,000 / $20,000) of the fair value of the old asset, only 15% ($750 = $5,000 x 15%) of the realized gain will actually be recognized.
    • If cash is more than 25% of the total assets received, the exchange is treated as a cash sale and the entire difference between the fair value and carrying amount of the old asset is booked as a gain.
  • If the carrying amount of the old asset is greater than the fair value of the assets received, the entire loss is booked and the new asset is recorded at the lower fair value.

Someone entering credit card information into a computer.

This accounting treatment may seem complicated, and it is; however, this treatment was a Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) update to GAAP in 2004. Before the FASB issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 153, “Exchanges of Nonoperating Assets: an amendment of APB Opinion No. 29,″ the rules according to Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 29 for recording exchanges of nonmonetary assets depended on whether they were exchanges of dissimilar assets, such as a truck for a machine, or were similar assets, such as a truck for a truck. If the exchange was classified as an exchange of dissimilar assets, the acquired asset would be recorded at its fair value and any gain or loss would be recognized. The new standard was issued to bring about greater agreement between GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) (part of the convergence project) and was effective for exchanges occurring during fiscal periods beginning after June 15, 2005.

There are three takeaways: (1) as accountants, we always have to be learning and staying up to date on the changing standards; (2) often things get more complicated, not simpler, as they develop and change according to circumstances; and (3) GAAP is still very much rule based, as you can see from this section on how to deal with exchanges.

Watch this video explaining the concepts:

You can view the transcript for “Property Plant And Equipment Nonmonetary Exchange (Gain On Trade In Of Equipment)” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Asset Retirement https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-retirement/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-retirement/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize entries for discarding of plant assets

 

When retiring a plant asset from service, a company removes the asset’s cost and accumulated depreciation from its plant asset accounts. For example, Hassan Company would make the following journal entry when it disposed of a fully depreciated machine that cost $15,000 and had no salvage value:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Accumulated Depreciation—Machinery 15,000.00
      Machinery 15,000.00
To record the retirement of a fully depreciated machine.

The asset would also be removed from the fixed asset list (subsidiary ledger) since it no longer physically exists (except maybe as a rusting piece of junk in the junkyard).

Occasionally, a company continues to use a plant asset after it has been fully depreciated. In such a case, the firm should not remove the asset’s cost and accumulated depreciation from the accounts until the asset is sold, traded, or retired from service. Of course, the company cannot record more depreciation on a fully depreciated asset because total depreciation expense taken on an asset may not exceed its depreciable cost (historical cost − salvage value).

Sometimes a business retires or discards a plant asset before fully depreciating it. When selling the asset as scrap (even if not immediately), the firm removes its cost and accumulated depreciation from the asset and accumulated depreciation accounts. In addition, the accountant records its estimated salvage value in a Salvaged Materials account and recognizes a gain or loss on disposal. To illustrate, assume that a firm retires a machine with a $10,000 original cost and $7,500 of accumulated depreciation. If the machine’s estimated salvage value is $500, the following entry is required:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Salvaged materials 500.00
Accumulated Depreciation—Machinery 7,500.00
Loss from Disposal of Plant Assets 2,000.00
      Machinery 10,000.00
To record the retirement of machinery, which will be sold for scrap at a later time.

Sometimes accidents, fires, floods, and storms wreck or destroy plant assets, causing companies to incur losses. For example, assume that fire completely destroyed an uninsured building costing $40,000 with up-to-date accumulated depreciation of $12,000. The journal entry is:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Loss from Fire 28,000.00
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings 12,000.00
      Buildings 40,000.00
To record fire loss.

If the building was insured, the company would debit only the amount of the fire loss exceeding the amount to be recovered from the insurance company to the Fire Loss account. To illustrate, assume the company partially insured the building and received $22,000 from the insurance company. The journal entry is:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Cash 22,000.00
Loss from Fire 6,000.00
Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings 12,000.00
      Buildings 40,000.00
To record fire loss and amount recoverable from insurance company.
Here is an overview of the process:You can view the transcript for “Disposing of Depreciated Assets (part 1 of 2)” here (opens in new window).

 

We’ll next learn how to journalize entries for sale of assets.


]]>
Asset Sale https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-sale/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/asset-sale/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize entries for sale of assets

 

Companies frequently dispose of plant assets by selling them. By comparing an asset’s book value (cost less accumulated depreciation) with its selling price (or net amount realized if there are selling expenses), the company may show either a gain or loss. If the sales price is greater than the asset’s book value, the company shows a gain. If the sales price is less than the asset’s book value, the company shows a loss. Of course, when the sales price equals the asset’s book value, no gain or loss occurs.

To illustrate accounting for the sale of a plant asset, assume that a company sells equipment costing $45,000 with accumulated depreciation of $ 14,000 for $28,000 cash. The company would realize a loss of $3,000 ($45,000 cost − $14,000 accumulated depreciation = $31,000 book value — $28,000 sales price). The journal entry to record the sale is:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Cash 28,000.00
Accumulated Depreciation—Machinery 14,000.00
Loss from Disposal of Plant Asset 3,000.00
      Equipment 45,000.00
To record the sale of equipment at a price less than book value.

Accounting for depreciation to date of disposal

When selling or otherwise disposing of a plant asset, a firm must record the depreciation up to the date of sale or disposal. For example, if the firm sold an asset on April 1 and last recorded depreciation on December 31, the company should record depreciation for three months (January 1–April 1). When depreciation is not recorded for the three months, operating expenses for that period are understated, and the gain on the sale of the asset is understated or the loss overstated.

To illustrate, assume that on August 1, 2016, Okoro Company sold a machine for $1,500. When purchased on January 2, 2008, the machine cost $12,000; the machine was depreciating at the straight-line rate of 10% per year. As of December 31, 2015, after closing entries were made, the machine’s accumulated depreciation account had a balance of $9,600. Before determining a gain or loss and before making an entry to record the sale, the firm must make the following entry to record depreciation for the seven months ending July 31, 2016:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
July 31 Depreciation Expense—Machinery 700.00
July 31       Accumulated Depreciation—Machinery 700.00
July 31 To record depreciation for seven months
July 31 [$12,000 X 0.10 X (7/12)]

But what if a company exchanges an asset instead of selling it? We’ll cover that next.

???25190
]]>
Introduction to Journalizing Asset Disposal https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-journalizing-asset-disposal/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:51 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-journalizing-asset-disposal/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Journalize entries for disposal of assets

All plant assets, except land, eventually wear out or become inadequate or obsolete and must be sold, retired, or traded for new assets. When disposing of a plant asset, a company must remove both the asset’s cost and accumulated depreciation from the accounts. Overall, all plant asset disposals have the following steps in common:

  • Bring the asset’s depreciation up to date.
  • Record the disposal by:
    • Writing off the asset’s cost.
    • Writing off the accumulated depreciation.
  • Recording any consideration (usually cash) received or paid or to be received or paid.
  • Recording the gain or loss, if any.

Gain on the sale of a plant asset results from selling it for more than the book value. Loss on the sale of a plant asset results from selling it for less than the book value.

A baseball field.

To get a better idea of the concept of gains and losses, assume you bought a 1909 American Caramel “Shoeless” Joe Jackson baseball card ten years ago for $500,000 and sold it this year for $667,149. You realized a gain on your investment of $167,149 (which is then taxable income to you). If you swap cards with another collector (which may not be a taxable event), giving her your Joe Jackson card in exchange for a 1968 Topps Nolan Ryan/Jerry Koosman combo card, you may not be able to accurately assess whether you came out better off than you were before (gain) or worse off (loss) until you sell the combo card. Therefore, if you sold the combo card for, say, $700,000, your basis (for tax purposes) would be the $500,000 you paid for the Joe Jackson, and your reported gain would be $200,000.

In business, we record (recognize) gains and losses similarly, except instead of using the historical cost as the basis for calculating gains and losses, we use the book value of the asset (the undepreciated amount). In essence, the amount of depreciation expense you recognized to the date of sale increases the amount of gain you will record.

In this section, we discuss accounting for the following:

  1. retirement of plant assets without sale (writing it off)
  2. sale of plant assets to a third party
  3. trading/exchanging old plant assets for new ones
]]>
Book Value https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/book-value/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:50 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/book-value/ Read more »]]>
  • Understand the relationship between accumulated depreciation and depreciation expense

 

Accumulated depreciation tracks depreciation (cost allocated to the income statement) to date. In the second year, assuming Spivey made no additional PP&E purchases, the depreciation schedule would be as follows:

Fixed Assets
As of 12/31/20X2
Spivey Company
Asset Description Date Purchased Cost Depreciation PY Acc. Dep. CY Acc. Dep.
1 Land 2/1/20X1 262,800
4 Land 10/1/20X1 120,000
Total Land 382,800
2 Building 7/1/20X1 490,000 11,025 5,513 16,538
5 Building 10/1/20X1 600,000 13,500 4,000 17,500
Total Buildings 1,090,000 24,525 9,513 34,038
3 Machine 7/1/20X1 162,000 35,438 20,250 55,688
6 Delivery Van 10/1/20X1 45,000 16,200 4,500 20,700
7 Machine 10/1/20X1 99,500 23,320 6,219 29,539
8 Office Furniture 10/1/20X1 70,000 13,300 3,500 16,800
9 Computer 10/1/20X1 5,500 1,980 550 2,530
Total Machinery and Equipment 382,000 90,238 35,019 125,257
Total PP&E 1,854,800 114,763 44,532 159,295

The current year depreciation is added to the prior year’s accumulated depreciation to give us the current amount of accumulated depreciation.

After the year-end adjusting journal entry is posted:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X2
Dec 31 Depreciation Expense – Buildings 24,525.00
Dec 31 Depreciation Expense – Machinery 90,238.00
Dec 31       Accumulated Depreciation – Buildings 24,525.00
Dec 31       Accumulated Depreciation – Machinery 90,238.00
Dec 31 To record depreciation expense for 20X2

The ledger accounts would look like this:

Three T accounts side by side. On the left is a machinery chart. On the debit side, there is a beginning balance of 382,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,800 dollars. In the middle is a building chart. On the debit side, there is a beginning balance of 1,090,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,090,000 dollars. On the right is a land chart. On the debit side, there is a beginning balance of 382,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,000 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an Acc. Dep-Machinery chart. On the credit side, there's a beginning balance of 35,019 dollars. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry, on December 31st, of 90,238 dollars. There is an ending balance of 125,257 dollars on the credit side. On the right side is an Acc. Dep-Building chart. On the credit side, there's a beginning balance of 9,513 dollars. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry, on December 31st, of 24,525 dollars. There is an ending balance of 34,035 dollars on the credit side.

Obviously, new purchases would have to be taken into account, as would sales and other dispositions, which will be addressed in the next section.

The book value of machinery and equipment at the end of 20XX would be $256,743, which is the historical cost less accumulated depreciation, and the book value of buildings at the end of 20XX would be $1,055,962.

Notice once again that the GL control accounts give us totals, but not detail. We rely on our subschedules (subsidiary ledgers) to do that. Notice that the subsidiary ledger is tied to (equals) the GL control accounts.

]]>
Practice: Depreciation Expense https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-depreciation-expense/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:50 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-depreciation-expense/
  • Compute depreciation using straight-line method
  • Compute depreciation under accelerated methods
  • Compute depreciation using units-of-production method
  • Journalize adjusting entries for the recording of depreciation

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

]]>
Units-of-Production Method https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/units-of-production-method/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:49 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/units-of-production-method/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute depreciation using units-of-production method

Units-of-production (output) method

The units-of-production depreciation method assigns an equal amount of depreciation to each unit of product manufactured or service rendered by an asset. Since this method of depreciation is based on physical output, firms apply it in situations where usage rather than obsolescence leads to the demise of the asset. Under this method, you would compute the depreciation charge per unit of output. Then, multiply this figure by the number of units of goods or services produced during the accounting period to find the period’s depreciation expense.

The units of production method requires a two-step process:

  • Step 1: Calculate Depreciation per Unit:
    • [latex]\text{Depreciation per unit}=\dfrac{\left(\text{Cost}-\text{Salvage}\right)}{\text{expected number of units over lifetime}}[/latex]
  • Step 2: Calculate Depreciation Expense:
    • [latex]\text{Depreciation Expense}=\text{Number of units produced this period}\times\text{Depreciation per unit}[/latex]

 

Here is a video example:You can view the transcript for “Units of Production Depreciation” here (opens in new window).

 

Next, we’ll learn how to journalize adjusting entries to record depreciation.

]]>
Journalize Depreciation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalize-depreciation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:49 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalize-depreciation/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize adjusting entries for the recording of depreciation

 

The journal entry to record depreciation is fairly standard. Using our depreciation schedule for Spivey Company, assuming straight-line depreciation for buildings and DDB for machinery and equipment, we would develop the following depreciation schedule:

Fixed Assets
As of 12/31/20X1
Spivey Company
Asset Description Date Purchased Cost Useful Life Salvage Value Depreciation Acc. Dep
1 Land 2/1/20X1 262,800
4 Land 10/1/20X1 120,000
Total Land 382,800
2 Building 7/1/20X1 490,000 40 49,000 5,513 5,513
5 Building 10/1/20X1 600,000 40 60,000 4,000 4,000
Total Buildings 1,090,000 9,513 9,513
3 Machine 7/1/20X1 162,000 8 12,000 20,250 20,250
6 Delivery Van 10/1/20X1 45,000 5 5,000 4,500 4,500
7 Machine 10/1/20X1 99,500 8 9,500 6,219 6,219
8 Office Furniture 10/1/20X1 70,000 10 10,000 3,500 3,500
9 Computer 10/1/20X1 5,500 5 500 550 550
Total Machinery and Equipment 382,000 35,019 35,019
Total PP&E 1,854,800 44,531 44,531

Assuming no depreciation expense was entered during the year, the year-end adjusting journal entry would be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
Dec 31 Depreciation Expense – Buildings 9,513.00
Dec 31 Depreciation Expense – Machinery 35,019.00
Dec 31       Accumulated Depreciation – Buildings 9,513.00
Dec 31       Accumulated Depreciation – Machinery 35,019.00
Dec 31 To record depreciation expense for 20X1

After posting the entry, we would see the following balances in the asset accounts:

There are five T accounts show. Three in a top row and two in a bottom row. In the top row, on the left is a machinery chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on July 1st of 162,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 220,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,000 dollars. In the top row, in the middle is a building chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on July 1st of 490,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 600,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,090,000 dollars. In the top row, on the right is a land chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on February 1st of 262,800 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 120,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,800 dollars. On the second row, on the left is an Acc. Dep-Machinery chart. On the credit side, there's a dash representing the beginning balance. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry, on December 31st, of 35,019 dollars. There is an ending balance of 35,019 dollars on the credit side. In the top row, on the right side is an Acc. Dep-Building chart. On the credit side, there's a dash representing the beginning balance. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry, on December 31st, of 9,513 dollars. There is an ending balance of 9,513 dollars on the credit side.

Depreciation expense is, as the name implies, an income statement account (those entries are not shown above).

The accumulated depreciation accounts are contra-asset accounts. We could just post the credit side of the depreciation expense entry straight to the machinery and building asset accounts, but then we would have to parse those entries back out in order to create the required financial statement disclosures. So instead, we keep the credit entries in separate accounts. Even though the accumulated depreciation accounts are separate, they are permanently attached to the asset accounts they are associated with.

As you have seen, when assets are acquired during an accounting period, the first recording of depreciation is for a partial year.

Full-month convention

Some firms calculate the depreciation for the partial year to the nearest full month the asset was in service. For example, they treat an asset purchased on or before the 15th day of the month as if it were purchased on the 1st day of the month. And they treat an asset purchased after the 15th of the month as if it were acquired on the 1st day of the following month.

In the Spivey example, we assumed that the assets were purchased on the 1st day of the month, but of course, that is not usually the case.

A calendar.

Mid-month convention

Some firms calculate depreciation from the middle of the month of purchase. For example, they treat an asset purchased on any day of the month as if it were purchased on the 15th day of the month. An asset purchase on September 1 would result in 3½ months of depreciation for that first year of service.

Other conventions

Some firms opt to use the actual number of days. For example, an asset purchased on the 10th of June would result in two-thirds of a month’s depreciation for June. Most computer programs support all these conventions and more, such as the half-year convention required for tax purposes in certain circumstances.

Now that you understand the journalizing of depreciation, we’ll next turn to look at the relationship between accumulated depreciation and depreciation expense.


]]>
Straight-Line Method https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/straight-line-method/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/straight-line-method/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute depreciation using the straight-line method

To apply the straight-line method, a firm spreads the cost of the asset out across the asset’s useful life at a steady rate. The formula for calculating depreciation under the straight-line method is:

Depreciation Expense =  ( Cost − Salvage ) / Useful Life

Let’s say Spivey Company uses the straight-line method for buildings, using a useful life of 40 years. Now you, as the accountant, have determined that even at the end of 40 years, the buildings will have a salvage (also known as scrap or residual) value equal to 10% of the original cost in addition to whatever value the underlying land might have.

Here is the list of fixed assets we created:

Fixed Assets
As of 12/31/20X1
Spivey Company
Asset Description Date Purchased Cost
1 Land 2/1/20X1 262,800
4 Land 10/1/20X1 120,000
Total Land 382,800
2 Building 7/1/20X1 490,000
5 Building 10/1/20X1 600,000
Total Buildings 1,090,000
3 Machine 7/1/20X1 162,000
6 Delivery Van 10/1/20X1 45,000
7 Machine 10/1/20X1 99,500
8 Office Furniture 10/1/20X1 70,000
9 Computer 10/1/20X1 5,500
Total Machinery and Equipment 382,000
Total PP&E $ 1,854,800

We have two buildings to depreciate:

The first building was purchased on July 1, 20X1 for $490,000 and has a salvage value of $49,000, and a useful life of 40 years.

Depreciation Expense =  ( Cost − Salvage ) / Useful Life

($490,000 − $49,000) / 40 = $11,025 cost allocated per year to the income statement, or $918.75 per month.

The rate is 1/40, or 2.5% per year.

The building was only in service for half of the year, so booking the depreciation monthly would result in $918.75 X 6 months = $5,512.50. If the depreciation was only booked at the end of the year, you would take the full year depreciation and prorate it by multiplying it by ½, and you would get $5,512.50. Most companies book depreciation monthly using an automatic, recurring journal entry that is updated each time an asset is bought or sold.

The second building was purchased on October 1:

(600,000 − 60,000) / 40 = $16,000 per year, or $1,333.33 per month.

The first year’s depreciation expense would be $4,000 ($1,333.33 × 3 months) and then $16,000 every year thereafter for 39 years. In year 41, assuming the building is still in use, the last journal entries would be January through September and would total $12,000. Total depreciation would look like this:

Years Amount Total
1 (3 months) 4,000 4,000
2-40 16,000 624,000
41 (9 months) 12,000 12,000Single line
640,000Double line

We call the running total of depreciation expense “accumulated depreciation” and it will be equal to the historical cost less the estimated salvage value.


]]>
Accelerated Methods https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accelerated-methods/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accelerated-methods/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute depreciation under accelerated methods

 

One of the most common accelerated methods of calculating depreciation is the double-declining-balance method (DDB). As the name implies, depreciation is calculated by doubling the straight-line rate and then applying that rate to the declining “value” of the asset.

For instance, in our last example, the straight-line rate for a 40-year asset would be 1/40 or 0.025, which is 2.5%. The double-declining-balance (DDB) rate would be 5%, but buildings are not often depreciated using accelerated methods, so let’s use a simple example: a small business owner comes to you and asks you to compare depreciating a $12,000 vehicle bought on Jan 1 with an estimated salvage value of $2,000 and a useful life of five years.

The straight-line computation would be $12,000 − $2,000 = depreciable value of $10,000. The depreciable value of $10,000 divided by 5 = $2,000 per year. The rate is ⅕, which is 0.20 or 20%. Since the asset was purchased at the beginning of January, there is no proration necessary. Depreciation under the straight-line method would look like this:

20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5
$2,000 $2,000 $2,000 $2,000 $2,000

Under double-declining-balance (DDB), to compute periodic depreciation charges you begin by doubling the straight-line rate. In this case, the DDB rate would be 40% instead of 20%. Next, apply the DDB rate to the book value of the asset.

Book value is the original, historical cost minus accumulated depreciation (the depreciation taken so far). At the point where book value is equal to the salvage value, no more depreciation is taken.

For our client’s $12,000 vehicle, our calculation would look like this:

Less column Cost 12,000 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 4,800 40% (YR 1)
Less column Book Value Single line7,200 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 2,880 40% (YR 2)
Less column Book Value Single line4,320 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 1,728 40% (YR 3)
Less column Book Value Single line2,592 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 592 40% (YR 4)
Less column Book Value Single line2,000Double line Percent and year

 

Notice that we ignore the salvage value until the very end. Our year 4 (YR 4) depreciation expense would have been 40% of $2,592, except that would be $1036.80 which would have taken the ending book value down below $2,000. The ending book value, however, should always be equal to the salvage value (what we expect the asset to be worth when it is fully depreciated). So, in year 4, we only took $592 in depreciation, and then we are done.

In sum, we double the rate, and then apply that doubled rate to the DDB (book value).

Here are the two methods compared:

20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5
SL $2,000 $2,000 $2,000 $2,000 $2,000
DDB $4,800 $2,880 $1,728 $592 $-

And graphically:

A graph of the data in the previous table. The SL is a flat line while the DDB is a somewhat steady decreasing line.

Straight-line depreciation, graphically, is a straight-line. Accelerated depreciation records a larger amount of depreciation in the early years, thus accelerating the allocation of cost to the periods. This method may make more sense if you look at it theoretically graphed against the repair and maintenance costs of the vehicle, which would be very small in the first years and larger in later years:

A graph of the the DDB, which is a somewhat steady decreasing line, and the R&M, which is a somewhat steady increasing line that starts at 1,000 and ends at 3,000.

In addition, notice that graphing the declining balance (book value) leads both methods to the same ending book value:

A graph of the the DDB, which is a somewhat steady decreasing line, and the SL, which is a steady decreasing line that starts at 10,000 and ends at 2,000.

The DDB book value drops faster because of the accelerated cost being recognized on the income statement (depreciation expense).

Let’s run this calculation now for the delivery vehicle on our fixed asset list:

Fixed Assets
As of 12/31/20X1
Spivey Company
Asset Description Date Purchased Cost
1 Land 2/1/20X1 262,800
4 Land 10/1/20X1 120,000
Total Land 382,800
2 Building 7/1/20X1 490,000
5 Building 10/1/20X1 600,000
Total Buildings 1,090,000
3 Machine 7/1/20X1 162,000
6 Delivery Van 10/1/20X1 45,000
7 Machine 10/1/20X1 99,500
8 Office Furniture 10/1/20X1 70,000
9 Computer 10/1/20X1 5,500
Total Machinery and Equipment 382,000
Total PP&E $ 1,854,800

This is going to be more complicated because we bought the rig on October 1st, so we will have to prorate the first year’s depreciation:

Less column Cost 45,000 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 4,500 40% (YR 1 = 3/12)
Less column Book Value Single line40,500 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 16,200 40% (YR 2)
Less column Book Value Single line24,300 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 9,720 40% (YR 3)
Less column Book Value Single line14,580 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 5,832 40% (YR 4)
Less column Book Value Single line8,748 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 3,499 40% (YR 5)
Less column Book Value Single line5,249 Percent and year
Less: Depreciation 249 40% (YR 6)
Less column Book Value Single line5,000Double line Percent and year

 

There are six years because year one is a partial year, as is year six, which is simply the undepreciated amount left before the book value drops to salvage value.

]]>
Define Depreciation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/define-depreciation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/define-depreciation/ Read more »]]>
  • Define accounting depreciation and differentiate from economic definition

 

In economics, the term depreciation represents a loss in value, usually due to either wear and tear or obsolescence (in contrast, the term appreciation refers to an increase in value). Usually, this decrease (or increase) is measured by fair market value, which is the price that a willing buyer would pay to a willing seller if both parties are aware of all the relevant facts and circumstances and neither party is under any undue influence.

For example, you buy a brand new car for $50,000 and drive it off the lot. According to bankrate.com, a new car will lose 15–20% of its value in that single moment. So, your car just went down in value by about $10,000. Presumably, because it is now a used car rather than a new car, if you went to trade it in the next day, or you tried to sell it to another individual, you’d only be able to get $40,000 for it. This is a classic example of economic depreciation, and a good way to contrast economic depreciation from accounting depreciation.

A BMW car.

Accounting depreciation is a systematic and rational method of allocating the cost of an asset to the revenues it indirectly generates. In other words, accounting depreciation is based on the matching principle and is not directly related to a loss in value. For instance, Baker, Co. buys a new delivery truck for $100,000 cash on July 1, and expects it to be of service for five years delivering baked goods to customers around the city, and therefore contributing to revenue indirectly. The cost of the truck ($100,000) is not a period cost for July, nor is it a product cost; so we accountants, in order to match the cost with the revenue (recognizing the expense as incurred), borrow the idea of economic depreciation, but we modify it slightly.

First, we capitalize the cost of the truck as an asset. Then, instead of recognizing a $100,000 expense in July for the loss of value (economic depreciation), we recognize the amount of the total cost that is used up in the delivery process. We can only estimate the total cost, but we can make a reasonable estimate. For instance, if we expect the truck to last five years, which is 60 months, we could allocate the cost of $100,000 over 60 months, which would be $1,666.67 per month in depreciation, or $20,000 per year for five years. The first year we only owned the truck for half a year, so we would only record depreciation expense for half the year.

Year 20X1 20X2 20X3 20X4 20X5 20X6 Total
Cost 100,000 100,000
Depreciation 10,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 20,000 10,000 100,000

This is depreciation in its simplest form, but as you may have realized by now, there are usually factors that complicate things. Even so, if you go back to the matching principle, upon which depreciation is based, you will find that all the variations you are about to learn make sense. In this section, you’ll be learning three different methods of systematically and rationally allocating the cost of an asset over its useful life, as well as how to journalize and track depreciation over time.

]]>
Journalize Purchases of Plant Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalize-purchases-of-plant-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:46 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalize-purchases-of-plant-assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize purchase of plant assets

 

In the prior section, we determined the total historical cost of the February 1 purchased land by Spivey Company was $262,800. Assume Spivey is paying 20% down and financing the rest. We would record this purchase as follows:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Feb 1 Land 262,800.00
Feb 1       Checking Account 52,560.00
Feb 1       Notes Payable 210,240.00
Feb 1 To record purchase of land for factory

We also determined the total historical cost of the building completed on June 30 was $490,000. Assume the contractor Spivey hired took out a construction loan to finance the construction as it progressed, and now the entire amount is due and Spivey is paying with a check. We would record this purchase as follows:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
July 1 Building 490,000.00
July 1       Checking Account 490,000.00
July 1 To record purchase of building

Similarly, Spivey determined the total cost of machinery was $162,000. Assume a $50,000 down payment and a note for the balance. The entry would be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
July 1 Machinery 162,000.00
July 1       Checking Account 50,000.00
July 1       Notes Payable 112,000.00
July 1 To record purchase of new equipment

Lump Sum Purchases

Sometimes a company buys land and other assets for a lump sum. When land and buildings purchased together are to be used, the firm divides the total cost and establishes separate ledger accounts for land and for buildings. This division of cost establishes the proper balances in the appropriate accounts. This division is especially important later because the depreciation recorded on the buildings affects reported income, while no depreciation is taken on the land.

Let’s look at an example: Assume in addition to the above transactions, on October 1 Spivey added additional production capacity by purchasing a faltering competitor’s land, machinery, and building for $400,000. After the purchase, in order to allocate the cost, Spivey hired an appraiser who determined the land had a market value of $135,000, machinery of $67,500, and the building of $247,500 for a total value of $450,000. We cannot report the assets at the appraiser’s estimate of market value since Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) requires us to use historical cost. Instead, we use a two-step process to get the cost of each asset.

  1. Calculate each asset’s percent of market value.  (Asset market value / total market value of all assets.)
Asset Appraisal (or Market) Value % of MV
Land         135,000 /450,000 = 30%
Machinery           67,500 /450,000 = 15%
Building         247,500Single line /450,000 = 55%
Total 450,000
  1. Calculate the cost of each asset (total price paid for all assets x % of market value).
Asset % of MV Purchase Price Allocated cost of each asset
Land 30% 400,000 $    120,000
Machinery 15% 400,000 $        60,000
Building 55% 400,000 $    220,000 Single line
Total $    400,000

The journal entry to record this purchase for cash of $100,000 and a note for $300,000 would be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Land 120,000.00
Oct 1 Building 60,000.00
Oct 1 Machinery 220,000.00
Oct 1       Checking Account 100,000.00
Oct 1       Notes Payable 300,000.00
Oct 1 To record purchase of new equipment

 

In reality, the cost of the machinery would be allocated in detail, because we want to be able to track computers; each piece of equipment; desks; vehicles; and each distinct asset, including different buildings if we have more than one in the lump sum purchase. In short, each item should have an allocated cost.

After posting the journal entries for Spivey, we would see the following balances in the general ledger (GL) control accounts:

Three T accounts side by side. On the left is a land chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on February 1st of 262,800 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 120,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,800 dollars. In the middle is a machinery chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on July 1st of 162,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 220,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,000 dollars. On the right is a building chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on July 1st of 490,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 600,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,090,000 dollars.

In addition to the GL, we would have subsidiary ledgers or lists for each control account that would match the total but would give details of each asset. These lists would include but not be limited to location; purchase date; purchase price; description; and, as we’ll see in the next section, the useful life, method of depreciation, accumulated depreciation, and a host of other information (e.g., serial number, internal tracking number, department, etc.).


]]>
Introduction to Depreciation Expense https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-depreciation-expense/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:46 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-depreciation-expense/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Compute depreciation expense on plant assets

In the prior section, we recorded the large-scale purchases by Spivey Company into the GL control accounts:

Three T accounts side by side. On the left is a land chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on February 1st of 262,800 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 120,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,800 dollars. In the middle is a machinery chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on July 1st of 162,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 220,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 382,000 dollars. On the right is a building chart. There is a dash representing the beginning balance on the debit side. There is a debit entry on July 1st of 490,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on October 1st of 600,000 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,090,000 dollars.

In addition, we would have recorded those same transactions into a subsidiary ledger or a fixed assets detail list. For convenience, let’s assume the July 1 purchase of machinery was one large machine, and that the lump sum purchase on October 1 was further allocated to the individual assets. Since we don’t have the time or room to account for all the items, we’ll call the individual assets (1) delivery van, (2) machine, (3) office furniture, and (4) computer. In reality, you would break this list down into the smallest detail that made sense for your business; usually each individual asset would get its own line. Here is an example of a fixed asset item list:

Fixed Assets
As of 12/31/20X1
Spivey Company
Asset Description Date Purchased Cost
1 Land 2/1/20X1 262,800
2 Building 7/1/20X1 490,000
3 Machine 7/1/20X1 162,000
4 Land 10/1/20X1 120,000
5 Building 10/1/20X1 600,000
6 Delivery Van 10/1/20X1 45,000
7 Machine 10/1/20X1 99,500
8 Office Furniture 10/1/20X1 70,000
9 Computer 10/1/20X1 5,500
Total PP&E $ 1,854,800

The total of the three GL accounts above equal the total of the fixed asset item list, but we accountants would probably sort the list to better match the GL:

Fixed Assets
As of 12/31/20X1
Spivey Company
Asset Description Date Purchased Cost
1 Land 2/1/20X1 262,800
4 Land 10/1/20X1 120,000
Total Land 382,800
2 Building 7/1/20X1 490,000
5 Building 10/1/20X1 600,000
Total Buildings 1,090,000
3 Machine 7/1/20X1 162,000
6 Delivery Van 10/1/20X1 45,000
7 Machine 10/1/20X1 99,500
8 Office Furniture 10/1/20X1 70,000
9 Computer 10/1/20X1 5,500
Total Machinery and Equipment 382,000
Total PP&E $ 1,854,800

Some companies will have more categories or different ones, for instance, breaking out vehicles, office equipment, or even computers into separate GL control accounts.

All this information is gathered and tracked and used to compute depreciation, accumulated depreciation, and eventually gain or loss on the sale of an asset. So, for step one we need to decide on a method of depreciation and apply it.

To compute the amount of depreciation expense, accountants consider four major factors:

  1. Cost of the asset (covered in the prior section).
  2. Proposed method of depreciation.
  3. Estimated useful life of the asset.
  4. Estimated salvage value of the asset. Salvage value (or scrap value or residual value) is the amount of money the company expects to recover, minus disposal costs, on the date a plant asset is scrapped, sold, or traded in.

Land won’t be depreciated because in theory it has an unlimited useful life, but all the other fixed assets will depreciate.

]]>
Determining Total Cost https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/determining-total-cost/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:45 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/determining-total-cost/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply cost principles to different categories of plant assets

 

Initial recording of plant assets

When a company acquires a plant asset, accountants record the asset at the cost of acquisition (historical cost). When a plant asset is purchased for cash, its acquisition cost is simply the agreed on cash price. This cost is objective, verifiable, and the best measure of an asset’s fair market value at the time of purchase. Fair market value is the price received for an item sold in the normal course of business (not at a forced liquidation sale). Even if the market value of the asset changes over time, accountants continue to report the acquisition cost in the asset account for subsequent periods.

The acquisition cost of a plant asset is the amount of cost incurred to acquire and place the asset in operating condition at its proper location. Cost includes all normal, reasonable, and necessary expenditures to obtain the asset and get it ready for use. Acquisition cost also includes the repair and reconditioning costs for used or damaged assets as long as the item was not damaged after purchase. Unnecessary costs (such as traffic tickets, fines, or repairs that occurred after purchase) that must be paid as a result of hauling machinery to a new plant are not part of the acquisition cost of the asset.

Determining the Cost of Land

The cost of land includes its purchase price and other many other costs, including:

  • real estate commissions
  • title search and title transfer fees
  • title insurance premiums
  • existing mortgage note or unpaid taxes (back taxes) assumed by the purchaser
  • costs of surveying, clearing, and grading
  • local assessments for sidewalks, streets, sewers, and water mains
  • sometimes land purchased as a building site contains an unusable building that must be removed

The accountant debits the entire costs to the Land account, including the cost of removing the building less any cash received from the sale of salvaged items while the land is being readied for use. Land is considered to have an unlimited life and is therefore not depreciable. However, land improvements, including driveways, temporary landscaping, parking lots, fences, lighting systems, and sprinkler systems, are attachments to the land. They have limited lives and therefore are depreciable. Owners record depreciable land improvements in a separate account called Land Improvements. They record the cost of permanent landscaping, including leveling and grading, in the Land account.

To illustrate, assume that on February 1, Spivey Company closed a deal on an old farm on the outskirts of San Diego as a factory site. The contract price for the property was $225,000. In addition, the company agreed to pay unpaid property taxes from previous periods (called back taxes) of $12,000. Attorneys’ fees and other legal costs relating to the purchase of the farm totaled $1,800. Spivey demolished (razed) the farm buildings at a cost of $18,000. The company salvaged some of the structural pieces of the building and sold them for $3,000. Because the firm was constructing a new building at the site, the city assessed Spivey Company $9,000 for water mains, sewers, and street paving. Spivey computed the capitalized cost of the land as follows:

Cost of factory site $225,000
Back taxes 12,000
Attorneys’ fees and other legal costs 1,800
Demolition 18,000
Sale of salvaged parts (3,000)
City assessment 9,000 Single line
Total Land Cost $262,800

Determining the Cost of a Building

Similarly, when a business buys a building, its cost includes:

  • the purchase price
  • repair and remodeling costs
  • unpaid taxes assumed by the purchaser
  • legal costs
  • real estate commissions paid

A receipt and a calculator.

Determining the cost of constructing a new building is often more difficult. Usually, this cost includes architect’s fees, building permits, payments to contractors, and the cost of digging the foundation. Also included are labor and materials to build the building, salaries of officers supervising the construction, insurance, taxes, and interest during the construction period. Any miscellaneous amounts earned from the building during construction reduce the cost of the building. For example, an owner who could rent out a small, completed portion during construction of the remainder of the building would credit the rental proceeds to the Buildings account rather than to a revenue account.

Assume Spivey incurred the following costs between February 1 and June 30 in constructing the new factory:

Architect’s fee for the design of the building 25,000
Materials used to construct the building 300,000
Labor to construct the building 150,000
Interest cost on a construction loan for the building 15,000

The total capitalizable cost of the building would be $490,000.

Cost of Equipment or Machinery

Often companies purchase machinery or other equipment, such as delivery or office equipment. Its cost includes:

  • the seller’s net invoice price (whether the discount is taken or not)
  • transportation charges incurred
  • insurance in transit
  • cost of installation
  • costs of accessories
  • testing costs
  • any other costs needed to put the machine or equipment in operating condition in its intended location

The cost of machinery does not include removing and disposing of a replaced, old machine that has been used in operations. Such costs are part of the gain or loss on disposal of the old machine.

To illustrate, assume that on July 1, when Spivey Company moved into its new factory, rather than bring the old manufacturing equipment from the old location, it purchased new equipment with a down payment of $50,000. The base price for the new equipment was $150,000, but Spivey also paid brokerage fees of $5,000, legal fees of $2,000, and freight and insurance in transit of $3,000. In addition, the company paid $2,000 to a third party to install the new equipment. Spivey computed the cost of new equipment as follows:

Net purchase price $150,000
Brokerage fees 5,000
Legal fees 2,000
Freight and insurance in transit 3,000
Installation costs 2,000Single line
Total Equipment cost $162,000

Next, let’s look at how to journalize each of these transactions.


]]>
Introduction to Plant Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-plant-assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-plant-assets/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Identify PP&E

Let’s take another look at The Home Depot, Inc. balance sheet as of February 2, 2020.

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
          Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line

The Home Depot, Inc. is using a semi-classified balance sheet. On a more traditional classified balance sheet, the asset section contains three sub-categories: (1) current assets; (2) PP&E; and (3) other categories such as intangible assets and long-term investments.

You’ve already studied three of the major classifications of current assets: (1) cash and cash equivalents, (2) accounts receivable, and (3) inventory. Other current assets include things like prepaid insurance, prepaid rent, employee receivables, and short-term notes receivable. All those current assets, as you have learned, will be converted into cash within a year (or at least within one operating cycle, which may be longer than a year in some cases).

As we continue to walk our way down the balance sheet, we come to noncurrent assets, the first and most significant of which is PP&E. At almost $23 billion, PP&E composes almost half of the total assets of $51 billion.

If you picture a business as a process that creates wealth for the owners, PP&E are the physical machine. Left by themselves, PP&E just sit there, but put into action by people with energy and purpose, they become a money-making machine. The most efficient use of these resources maximize profit.

To be classified as a plant asset, an asset must: (1) be tangible, that is, capable of being seen and touched; (2) have a useful service life of more than one year; and (3) be used in business operations rather than held for resale. Common plant assets are buildings, machines, tools, and office equipment.

A calculator and a receipt.

What these assets all have in common, that also differentiates them from current assets, is that they are not going to turn into cash any time soon and their connection to revenue is indirect. With inventory, we saw a direct match between the cost of the product and the sales revenue. We recorded the purchase of inventory as an asset. When that asset sold and generated revenue, we moved the cost of the asset to cost of goods sold (COGS) and recorded the cost against the revenue in one of the most perfect examples of matching we’ve seen so far. We call that a product cost, as opposed to a period cost. Rent, insurance, and wages are examples of period costs that we match to revenues by posting them to the income statement accounts in the same period as the revenue, using time as our method of matching.

But what about a piece of equipment that generates a product that we sell? How do we match the expense of buying, running, and maintaining a large physical asset against the revenue that it indirectly generates?

We’ll tackle that question in the next section on depreciation, but first, let’s explore the idea of PP&E in a little more depth to determine what costs to include as part of the asset and what costs are simply period costs that we can expense as we go.

]]>
Capitalization versus Expensing https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/capitalization-vs-expensing/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/capitalization-vs-expensing/ Read more »]]>
  • Define capital expenditures and differentiate from revenue expenditures

 

When we write a check for a non-inventory item in our business, in the back of our minds we should be asking, should I expense this item or capitalize it?

To capitalize something means to record it as a fixed asset.

Capital expenditures are for fixed assets, which are expected to be productive assets for a long period of time. Revenue expenditures are for costs that are related to specific revenue transactions (product costs) such as COGS, or operating periods (period costs) such as rent, insurance, and even repairs and maintenance on machines and buildings.

Capital expenditures differ from revenue expenditures in the following ways:

  • Timing. Capital expenditures are charged to expense gradually via depreciation and over a long period of time. Revenue expenditures are charged to expense in the current period or shortly thereafter.
  • Consumption. A capital expenditure is assumed to be consumed over the useful life of the related fixed asset. A revenue expenditure is assumed to be consumed within a very short period of time.
  • Size. A more questionable difference is that capital expenditures tend to involve larger monetary amounts than revenue expenditures because an expenditure is only classified as a capital expenditure if it exceeds a certain threshold value; if not, it is automatically designated as a revenue expenditure. However, certain quite large expenditures can still be classified as revenue expenditures, as long they are directly associated with revenue transactions or are period costs.

Consider the following three scenarios:

  1. Your company buys a dozen tablet-sized inventory scanners for the purchasing department for $400 each, allowing the employees to better track inventory.
  2. Your company executes a long-term lease for a $50,000 truck for the sales manager to use for business purposes.
  3. Your company executes a sales agreement for a piece of land and hires a contractor to build a new retail sales distribution center for $1,000,000.

A calculator and a money ledger.

For each of these, the accountant asks, “Do I capitalize this purchase or expense it?”

An experienced accountant wouldn’t have trouble with scenario three: a piece of land with a $1,000,000 building clearly fits the definition of an asset, as we’ll see below.

Scenario two might be a bit trickier, and we might need more information, but if the lease looks more like a financing arrangement than a month-to-month rental, we would capitalize the car.

Scenario one might cause even an experienced accountant to pause for a moment. Are these fixed assets or a period expense? The answer, of course, is “it depends.” Most likely, your company has a policy stating that items looking like fixed assets are expensed if they are too immaterial to bother with, say, under $500. Even so, if you buy a batch of them, is the $500 for each one, or for the lot? Also, does the company want to track certain items that fall below the materiality threshold anyway, such as tablet computers (such as iPads) that might be easily “misappropriated”? Specific-use items like networked inventory tracking tablets are probably not going to be subject to employee theft, so the purchasing department tablet computers, though technically fixed assets, will probably be expenses as a period cost.

With capitalized assets, like a $500,000 piece of machinery that churns out product day after day after day for 10 years, we run into a slight accounting problem. How do we match the expense of the machine to the revenue?

If we capitalize the $500,000 investment and never record an expense, it sits on the balance sheet until it is completely used up (remember the definition of the word expense?), and then what? If we expense it when we buy it, we have a physical asset sitting in the factory that doesn’t show up on the balance sheet, but that shows up on the income statement as a huge period expense. Neither of those options reflect the actual operations of the business.

So, we allocate the cost of the asset over its useful life. In the above case, we could recognize $100,000 of expense every year for five years, instead of $0 expense or $500,000 in year one. We call that allocation depreciation.

Before we discuss depreciation though, we need to identify exactly what expenditures are capitalized (recorded as assets) as opposed to those recorded as period or product expenses.

A flow chart indicating how to categorize expenditures and costs. An expenditure pays off a liability. If it purchases a long-lived asset, it's a capital expenditure. If it doesn't purchase a long-lived asset, it is a revenue expenditure. Revenue expenditures can be divided into two categories: Period costs, which do not match direct to revenue, and Product cost, which do match directly to revenue.

]]>
Why It Matters: Property, Plant, and Equipment https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-property-plant-and-equipment/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:43 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-property-plant-and-equipment/ Read more »]]> Why learn how to account for property, plant, and equipment?

Most companies present their balance sheet according to three generally recognized classifications:

  1. current assets,
  2. property and equipment
  3. other noncurrent assets

Property and equipment are often called property, plant, and equipment (PP&E) because in the broadest sense, property and equipment would include the physical plant, which would be the manufacturing buildings and equipment.

Noncurrent assets consist of tangible assets and intangible assets, which have distinguishing characteristics as follows:

  • Tangible assets have physical characteristics we can see and touch. In addition to plant assets such as buildings and furniture, they include natural resources such as gas, oil, and investments.
  • Intangible assets have no physical characteristics we can see and touch, but represent exclusive privileges and rights to their owners. Common intangible assets include patents and goodwill.

Notice that Facebook, Inc. doesn’t subtotal property and equipment separately from the other noncurrent assets, but Facebook’s balance sheet is in that order, which mirrors the theoretical order of liquidity.

FACEBOOK INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
(in millions, except for number of shares and par value)
Description December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     19,079 $     10,019
     Marketable securities 35,776 31,095
     Accounts receivable, net of allowances of $206 and $229 as of December 31, 2019 and December 31, 2018, respectively 9,518 7,587
          Total current assets Single line
66,225
Single line
50,480
Property and equipment, net 35,323 24,683
Operating lease right-of-use assets, net 9,460
Intangible assets, net 894 1,294
Goodwill 18,715 18,301
Other Assets 2,759 2,576
Total assets Single line
$     133,376
Double line
Single line
$     97,334
Double line

In addition, even though Facebook isn’t thought of as a “bricks and mortar” kind of establishment, like The Home Depot, which is largely reliant on physical stores, Facebook still has a significant investment in property and equipment ($35 billion).

Property, plant, and equipment (PP&E) are long-lived (noncurrent) assets because they are expected to contribute to revenue for more than one year. To be classified as a plant asset, an asset must:

  1. be tangible, that is, capable of being seen and touched
  2. have a useful service life of more than one year
  3. be used in business operations rather than held for resale.

Common plant assets are buildings, machines, tools, and office equipment. Here is more detail on the $35 billion in property and equipment that Facebook reported on its 2019 financial statements.

Note 6.       Property and Equipment
      Property and equipment, net consists of the following (in millions):
Description Column added for spacing Column added for spacing December 31,
Description Column added for spacing Column added for spacing 2019 2018
Land $     1,097 $     899
Buildings 11,226 7,401
Leasehold improvements 3,112 1,841
Network equipment 17,004 13,017
Computer software, office equipment and other 1,813 1,187
Finance lease right-of-use assets 1,635
Construction in progress 10,099 7,228
      Total Single line
45,986
Single line
31,573
Less: Accumulated depreciation (10,663) (6,890)
Property and equipment, net Single line
$     35,323
Double line
Single line
$     24,683
Double line

In this section, we will look at the accounting treatment for plant assets. Natural resources, intangible assets, and investments will be covered in the next modules.

By the end of this section, you will be able to: (a) differentiate between current expenses and capital expenditures; (b) describe and compute depreciation expense and know how it relates to accumulated depreciation; (c) record purchases and sales of fixed assets; and (d) understand the disclosures in the financial statements related to property, plant, and equipment (PP&E).

]]>
Discussion: LIFO, FIFO, Specific Identification, and Weighted Average https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-lifo-fifo-spid-wave/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-lifo-fifo-spid-wave/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: LIFO, FIFO, Specific Identification, and Weighted Average link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Inventory Valuation Methods https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-inventory-valuation-methods/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-inventory-valuation-methods/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Inventory Valuation Methods

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Accounting Principles and Disclosures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounting-principles-and-disclosures/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:41 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounting-principles-and-disclosures/ Read more »]]>
  • Discuss common financial statement disclosures with regard to inventory

 

Let’s revisit actual financial statements from The Home Depot, Inc. annual report. Here is a partial balance sheet for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF EARNINGS
in millions, except per share data Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2017
Net sales $     110,225 $     108,203 $     100,904
Cost of sales 72,653 71,043 66,548
          Gross Profit Single line37,572 Single line37,160 Single line34,356
Subcategory, Operating expenses: Single line Single line Single line
     Selling, general and administrative 19,740 19,513 17,864
     Depreciation and amortization 1,989 1,870 1,811
     Impairment loss 247
          Total operating expenses Single line21,729 Single line21,630 Single line19,675
Operating income Single line15,843 Single line15,530 Single line14,681
Subcategory, Interest and other (income) expenses: Single line Single line Single line
     Interest and investment income (73) (93) (74)
     Interest expense 1,201 1,051 1,057
     Other 16
          Interest and other, net Single line1,128 Single line974 Single line983
Earnings before provision for income taxes Single line1,128 Single line974 Single line983
Provision for income taxes 3,473 3,435 5,068
Net earnings Single line$     11,242Double line Single line$     11,121Double line Single line$     8,630Double line

Inventory makes up a substantial portion of total assets, second only to property, plant, and equipment. But the number on the face of the financials is only part of the story. GAAP requires additional disclosures with regard to inventory that cover the following financial accounting principles and policies:

  • Conservatism (using LCM or LCNRV)
  • Estimates
  • Internal controls
  • Materiality

Below is the complete disclosure regarding inventory from The Home Depot, Inc. Annual Report for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020, found on page 38.

Note the following:

ASU 2015-11 requires that the term market should no longer be used in accounting policy or other disclosures in reference to inventories, except in transition or when inventory is priced on a LIFO or a retail method basis. Instead, the term should be replaced with NRV. Because of the complexity of The Home Depot’s operations, they actually use both systems.

Merchandise Inventories

The substantial majority of our merchandise inventories are stated at the lower of cost (first-in, first-out) or market, as determined by the retail inventory method, which is based on a number of factors such as markups, markdowns, and inventory losses (or shrink). As the inventory retail value is adjusted regularly to reflect market conditions, inventory valued using the retail method approximates the lower of cost or market. Certain subsidiaries, including retail operations in Canada and Mexico, and distribution centers, record merchandise inventories at the lower of cost or net realizable value, as determined by a cost method. These merchandise inventories represent approximately 29% of the total merchandise inventories balance. We evaluate the inventory valued using a cost method at the end of each quarter to ensure that it is carried at the lower of cost or net realizable value. The valuation allowance for merchandise inventories valued under a cost method was not material to our consolidated financial statements at the end of fiscal 2019 or fiscal 2018.

Independent physical inventory counts or cycle counts are taken on a regular basis in each store and distribution center to ensure that amounts reflected in merchandise inventories are properly stated. Shrink (or in the case of excess inventory, swell) is the difference between the recorded amount of inventory and the physical inventory. We calculate shrink based on actual inventory losses occurring as a result of physical inventory counts during each fiscal period and estimated inventory losses occurring between physical inventory counts. The estimate for shrink occurring in the interim period between physical inventory counts is calculated on a store-specific basis based on recent shrink results and current trends in the business.

Home Depot includes a standard disclaimer about the use of estimates, and this too is required by GAAP with regard to inventory (also on page 38):

Use of Estimates

We have made a number of estimates and assumptions relating to the reporting of assets and liabilities, the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities, and reported amounts of revenues and expenses in preparing these financial statements in conformity with GAAP. Actual results could differ from these estimates.

Now that you are more familiar with the types of accounting used for inventory, and have become more familiar with publicly traded corporations, you’ll be able to search out your favorite corporation’s financial statements and discover what they disclose in regard to their inventory.

]]>
Putting It Together: Inventory Valuation Methods https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-inventory-valuation-methods/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:41 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-inventory-valuation-methods/ Read more »]]> In this module, you experienced a wide variety of issues related to “costing” inventory, and how the combinations of different methods can lead to significantly different results. If you were a mathematician, you’d want different experimenters to be able to replicate your scientific explorations with similar if not exact outcomes, but in accounting, because we can make choices, three different accountants could come up with three different versions of financial results for the same company.

That’s why we disclose, in notes to the financial statements, our significant accounting policies (except for the use of perpetual or periodic systems of accounting for COGS).

A man on a computer.

For instance, Boeing Company showed almost $77 billion in inventory on its 2019 balance sheet, which ranged from parts to work-in-process to used aircraft purchased for resale. The footnote describing how inventory was accounted for and valued was several pages long, going into detail about the use of estimates and how costs were assigned to various product lines (Boeing Annual Report, accessed July 9, 2020). Since no specific cost flow assumption was identified, we can probably assume that the company is using specific identification for those large items.

See if you recognize the concepts in the excerpt from that long Boeing footnote (page 66):

Used aircraft acquired by the Commercial Airplanes segment are included in Inventories at the lower of cost or net realizable value as it is our intent to sell these assets.

In contrast, Caterpillar, Inc., reporting $11 billion in machinery in inventory, had a much simpler footnote that we can easily reproduce right here (Caterpillar Annual Report, accessed July 9, 2020):

C. Inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or net realizable value. Cost is principally determined using the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method. The value of inventories on the LIFO basis represented about 60 percent and 65 percent of total inventories at December 31, 2019 and 2018, respectively.

If the FIFO (first-in, first-out) method had been in use, inventories would have been $2,086 million and $2,009 million higher than reported at December 31, 2019 and 2018, respectively.

Even though the company uses LIFO, and could have used LCM, it chose to use LCNRV. Also, you might think that, like Boeing, the company would use a specific identification method of assigning costs, but it is using LIFO. That means that costs assigned to inventory items are old, old costs, which reduces inventory on the balance sheet, which then increases COGS, which in turn decreases gross profit and the bottom line.

During inflationary times, companies can reduce their taxable income by using the LIFO cost flow assumption for inventories. However, the tax savings from using LIFO come at a cost. Under the LIFO conformity rule in IRC Sec. 472(c), if a taxpayer opts to use LIFO for tax purposes, it must also use it for general financial reporting. This choice can be a problem for companies that are moving toward more global operations because although GAAP allows LIFO, IFRS does not.

One final note: Similar to GAAP, IFRS also require inventory to be reported at the LCM, and under IFRS, the market value of inventory is defined as the NRV. If the historical cost is higher than the sales price, then inventory must be written down. This is really the same as the GAAP LCNRV rule.

As you can see, inventory accounting can be complicated, and many big businesses have entire departments dedicated to accounting for inventory. Because of this complexity, some accountants have built an entire career around purchasing, inventory, and related issues.

]]>
Effects of Common Errors https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/effects-of-common-errors/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:40 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/effects-of-common-errors/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify the effects of common inventory errors on the financial statements

 

A merchandising company can prepare accurate income statements, statements of retained earnings, and balance sheets only if its inventory is correctly valued. On the income statement, the cost of inventory sold is recorded as COGS. Since the COGS figure affects the company’s net income, it also affects the balance of retained earnings on the statement of retained earnings. On the balance sheet, incorrect inventory amounts affect both the reported ending inventory and retained earnings. Inventories appear on the balance sheet under the heading “Current Assets,” which reports current assets in a descending order of liquidity. Because inventories are consumed or converted into cash within a year or one operating cycle, whichever is longer, inventories usually follow cash and receivables on the balance sheet.

A stack of paperwork.Recall that in each accounting period, the appropriate expenses must be matched with the revenues of that period to determine the net income. Applied to inventory, matching involves determining (1) how much of the cost of goods available for sale during the period should be deducted from current revenues and (2) how much should be allocated to goods on hand and thus carried forward as an asset (merchandise inventory) in the balance sheet to be matched against future revenues. Net income for an accounting period depends directly on the valuation of ending inventory. This relationship involves three items:

  • First, a merchandising company must be sure that it has properly valued its ending inventory. If the ending inventory is overstated, COGS is understated, resulting in an overstatement of gross margin and net income. Also, the overstatement of ending inventory causes current assets, total assets, and retained earnings to be overstated. Thus, any change in the calculation of ending inventory is reflected (ignoring any income tax effects) dollar for dollar in net income, current assets, total assets, and retained earnings.
  • Second, when a company misstates its ending inventory in the current year, the company carries forward that misstatement into the next year. This misstatement occurs because the ending inventory amount of the current year is the beginning inventory amount for the next year.
  • Third, an error in one period’s ending inventory automatically causes an error in net income in the opposite direction in the next period. After two years, however, the error washes out, and assets and retained earnings are properly stated.

Thus, in contrast to an overstated ending inventory, resulting in an overstatement of net income, an overstated beginning inventory results in an understatement of net income. If the beginning inventory is overstated, then cost of goods available for sale and COGS also are overstated. Consequently, gross margin and net income are understated. Note, however, that when net income in the second year is closed to retained earnings, the retained earnings account is stated at its proper amount. The overstatement of net income in the first year is offset by the understatement of net income in the second year. For the two years combined, the net income is correct. At the end of the second year, the balance sheet contains the correct amounts for both inventory and retained earnings. Table 1 summarizes the effects of errors of inventory valuation:

Table 1: Inventory errors
Account Ending Inventory Beginning Inventory
Overstated Understated Overstated Understated
COGS Understated Overstated Overstated Understated
Net Income Overstated Understated Understated Overstated
]]>
Multi-Step Income Statement https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/multi-step-income-statement-2/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:39 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/multi-step-income-statement-2/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare a multi-step income statement

 

A merchandising company uses the same four financial statements we learned before:

  1. income statement
  2. statement of retained earnings
  3. balance sheet
  4. statement of cash flows

A handwritten money ledger.

The income statement for a merchandiser is expanded to include groupings and subheadings necessary to make it easier for investors to read and understand. We will look at the income statement only as the other statements have been discussed previously.

In preceding chapters, we illustrated the income statement with only two categories—revenues and expenses. In contrast, a multi-step income statement divides both revenues and expenses into operating and nonoperating (other) items. The statement also separates operating expenses into selling and administrative expenses. A multi-step income statement is also called a classified income statement.

 

Watch this video about preparing a multi-step income statement. Come back as many times as you need to practice creating a multi-step income statement:You can view the transcript for “Prepare a Multiple Step Income Statement (Financial Accounting Tutorial #32)” here (opens in new window).

 

The multi-step income statement shows important relationships that help in analyzing how well the company is performing. For example, by deducting COGS from operating revenues, you can determine by what amount sales revenues exceed the COGS. If this margin, called gross margin, is lower than desired, a company may need to increase its selling prices and/or decrease its COGS. The classified income statement subdivides operating expenses into selling and administrative expenses. Thus, statement users can see how much expense is incurred in selling the product and how much in administering the business. Statement users can also make comparisons with other years’ data for the same business and with other businesses. Nonoperating revenues and expenses appear at the bottom of the income statement because they are less significant in assessing the profitability of the business.

Management chooses which income statement to present a company’s financial data. This choice may be based either on how their competitors present their data or on the costs associated with assembling the data.

The major headings of the classified multi-step income statement are explained below:

  • Net Sales are the revenues generated by the major activities of the business—usually the sale of products or services or both less any sales discounts and sales returns and allowances.
  • COGS is the major expense in merchandising companies and represents what the seller paid for the inventory it has sold.
  • Gross margin or gross profit is the net sales COGS and represents the amount we charge customers above what we paid for the items. This is also referred to as a company’s markup.
  • Operating expenses for a merchandising company are those expenses, other than COGS, incurred in the normal business functions of a company. Usually, operating expenses are either selling expenses or administrative expenses. Selling expenses are expenses a company incurs in selling and marketing efforts. Examples include salaries and commissions of salespersons, expenses for salespersons’ travel, delivery, advertising, rent (or depreciation, if owned) and utilities on a sales building, sales supplies used, and depreciation on delivery trucks used in sales. Administrative expenses are expenses a company incurs in the overall management of a business. Examples include administrative salaries, rent (or depreciation, if owned) and utilities on an administrative building, insurance expense, administrative supplies used, and depreciation on office equipment.
  • Income from Operations is Gross profit (or margin) operating expenses and represents the amount of income directly earned by business operations.
  • Other revenues and expenses are revenues and expenses not related to the sale of products or services regularly offered for sale by a business. This typically includes interest earned (interest revenue) and interest owed (interest expense).
  • Net Income is the income earned after other revenues are added and other expenses are subtracted.

For example, here are income statements from The Home Depot, Inc. annual report for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2020:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF EARNINGS
in millions, except per share data Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2017
Net sales $     110,225 $     108,203 $     100,904
Cost of sales 72,653 71,043 66,548
          Gross Profit Single line37,572 Single line37,160 Single line34,356
Subcategory, Operating expenses: Single line Single line Single line
     Selling, general and administrative 19,740 19,513 17,864
     Depreciation and amortization 1,989 1,870 1,811
     Impairment loss 247
          Total operating expenses Single line21,729 Single line21,630 Single line19,675
Operating income Single line15,843 Single line15,530 Single line14,681
Subcategory, Interest and other (income) expenses: Single line Single line Single line
     Interest and investment income (73) (93) (74)
     Interest expense 1,201 1,051 1,057
     Other 16
          Interest and other, net Single line1,128 Single line974 Single line983
Earnings before provision for income taxes Single line1,128 Single line974 Single line983
Provision for income taxes 3,473 3,435 5,068
Net earnings Single line$     11,242Double line Single line$     11,121Double line Single line$     8,630Double line

One of the important features of the multiple-step income statement is the sub-total for operating income. Notice that net income is the bottom line but it includes a provision for income taxes and also interest expense. If you were comparing two different companies, one that was capitalized by owner equity, and the other that relied heavily on borrowed money (that incurs interest expense), the subtotal for operating income would give you a figure to compare between the two that is strictly the results of business operations.

Important relationships in the income statement of a merchandising firm

In equation form:

  • Net sales = Sales revenue − Sales discounts − Sales returns and allowances.
  • Gross profit = Net sales − Cost of goods sold.
  • Operating expenses = Selling expenses + Administrative expenses.
  • Operating income = Gross margin − Operating (selling and administrative) expenses.
  • Other income/revenues and expenses = Other Revenues − Other Expenses
  • Net income/Net earnings = Income from operations + Other revenues − Other expenses.

Each of these relationships is important because of the way it relates to an overall measure of business profitability. For example, a company may produce a high gross margin on sales. However, because of large sales commissions and delivery expenses, the owner(s) may realize only a very small amount of the gross margin as profit.

 

]]>
Adjusting Journal Entries for Net Realizable Value https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-journal-entries-for-net-realizable-value/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:38 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-journal-entries-for-net-realizable-value/ Read more »]]>
  • Create journal entries to adjust inventory to NRV

 

Let’s recap the effect of the different methods of applying COGS, gross profit, and ultimately, net income, assuming that total selling, general, and administrative expenses of Geyer Co. are $735,000.

Geyer, Co.
Income statements
For the year ended December 31, 20XX
Description by total by individual item by class
Beginning Inventory $              0 $             0 $              0
Net purchases and freight in 1,522,453 1,522,453 1,522,453
Ending Inventory, LCNRV (238,687) (186,872) (227,952)
Cost of good sold Single Line$1,741,663Double Line Single Line$1,793,478Double Line Single Line$1,752,398Double Line
Net sales $2,548,959 $2,548,959 $2,548,959
Cost of goods sold 1,741,663 1,793,478 1,752,398
Gross Profit Single Line807,296 Single Line755,481 Single Line796,561
Operating Expenses 735,000 735,000 735,000
Net income Single Line$72,296Double Line Single Line$20,481Double Line Single Line$61,561Double Line

 

Applying LCNRV to total inventory gave us a NRV of $274,610 (see Inventory List in prior reading) which was higher than total cost, so there would be no adjustment necessary. We just left each inventory item listed at cost, even though some of the items had an NRV less than cost (first column).

However, when we applied the LCNRV rule to each individual item, we found that we had to adjust some inventory downward, such as the Rel 5 HQ Speakers that are listed at FIFO at $110 each, but only have an NRV of $50 each. Overall, we calculated that the NRV of inventory assessing each item individually was only $186,872. Recognizing that loss in the year incurred (rather than waiting for them to sell, if ever) brought gross profit down from $807,296 to $755,481, and of course that reduced net income by the same amount (second column).

Assessing LCNRV by class also reduced ending inventory, which reduced gross profit and net income (third column).

If the amount of a write-down caused by the LCNRV analysis is minor, we could charge the expense to the COGS. If the loss is material, then we might want to track it in a separate account (especially if such losses are recurring), such as “Loss on LCNRV adjustment.”

In addition, instead of adjusting the merchandise inventory account, which would involve adjusting the cost of each individual item in the subsidiary ledger, you may want to post the adjustment to a contra-asset account called something like “Allowance to Reduce Inventory to NRV.”

So, we end up with four possible combinations (using the “by item” analysis):

  1. Post the adjustment to inventory and COGS.
  2. Post the adjustment to inventory and a loss account.
  3. Post the adjustment to a contra-asset account and COGS.
  4. Post the adjustment to a contra-asset account and a loss account.

Option 1

Post the adjustment to inventory and COGS.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 COGS 51,815.00
Dec 31       Merchandise Inventory 51,815.00
Dec 31 To adjust year end inventory to net realizable value

Which results in the following:

Selected accounts related to COGS

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an intentory chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 238,687 dollars. There is a credit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a debit total of 186,862 dollars. On the right side is an allowance chart. This T account does not have any entries.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a cost of goods sold chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 1,741,663 dollars. There is a debit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,793,478 dollars. On the right side is a loss of NRV chart. This T account does not have any entries.

 

Option 2

Post the adjustment to inventory and a loss account.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Loss on LCNRV Adjustment 51,815.00
Dec 31       Merchandise Inventory 51,815.00
Dec 31 To adjust year end inventory to NRV
Selected accounts related to cost of goods sold

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an intentory chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 238,687 dollars. There is a credit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a debit total of 186,862 dollars. On the right side is an allowance chart. This T account does not have any entries.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a cost of goods sold chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 1,741,663 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,741,663 dollars. On the right side is a loss of NRV chart. There is a debit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a debit total of 51,815 dollars.

 

Option 3

Post the adjustment to a contra-asset account and COGS.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 COGS 51,815.00
Dec 31       Allowance to Reduce Inventory to NRV 51,815.00
Dec 31 To adjust year end inventory to NRV
Selected accounts related to COGS

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an intentory chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 238,687 dollars.There is a debit total of 238,687 dollars. On the right side is an allowance chart. There is a credit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a credit total of 51,815 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a cost of goods sold chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 1,741,663 dollars. There is a debit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,793,478 dollars. On the right side is a loss of NRV chart. This T account does not have any entries.

 

Option 4

Post the adjustment to a contra-asset account and a loss account.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Loss on LCNRV Adjustment 51,815.00
Dec 31       Allowance to Reduce Inventory to NRV 51,815.00
Dec 31 To adjust year end inventory to NRV
Selected accounts related to COGS

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an intentory chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 238,687 dollars.There is a debit total of 238,687 dollars. On the right side is an allowance chart. There is a credit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a credit total of 51,815 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a cost of goods sold chart. On the debit side, there is an unadjusted balance (FIFO) entry of 1,741,663 dollars. There is a debit total of 1,741,663 dollars. On the right side is a loss of NRV chart. There is a debit entry of 51,815 dollars. There is a debit total of 51,815 dollars.

 

Each of these methods of recording the adjustment is acceptable. It just depends on how you want to capture the data for your own internal and external reporting purposes.

For instance, Dynatronics Corporation shows on the balance sheet a line item called, “Inventories, net” and provides details in a footnote:

Note 3. Inventories

Inventories consist of the following as of June 30:

Inventories, net
2019 2018
Raw materials $5,830,140 $6,216,150
Work in process 706,128 625,830
Finished goods 5,129,806 4,604,264
Inventory Reserve (138,553) (458,389)
Single Line$11,527,521Double Line Single Line$10,987,855Double Line

Included in cost of goods sold for the years ended June 30, 2019, and 2018, are inventory write-offs of $0 and $692,000, respectively. The write-offs reflect inventories related to discontinued product lines, excess repair parts, product rejected for quality standards, and other non-performing inventories.

The company reports COGS (cost of sales) as a single line item, but may be posting inventory write-downs to a separate expense line item in order to capture the data for the note, and also includes this statement in its Summary of Significant Accounting Principles:

Inventories

Finished goods inventories are stated at the lower of standard cost, which approximates actual cost using the first-in, first-out method, or net realizable value. Raw materials are stated at the lower of cost (first-in, first-out method) or net realizable value. The Company periodically reviews the value of items in inventory and records write-downs or write-offs based on its assessment of slow moving or obsolete inventory. The Company maintains a reserve for obsolete inventory and generally makes inventory value adjustments against the reserve.

Next, we’ll look at how inventory is presented on the financial statements, along with disclosures and an analysis of what happens when inventory is under or overstated.

]]>
Introduction to Financial Statement Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-statement-presentation-2/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:38 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-statement-presentation-2/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Demonstrate proper financial statement presentation of inventory and cost of goods sold

An employee at a cash register.

So far, you’ve discovered that the single seemingly simple item called Inventory on the balance sheet can be quite complicated. In this section, you’ll learn how to present COGS on a multi-step income statement that shows the sub-total of gross profit (also called gross margin) and operating income, and how inventory errors can affect the bottom line, as well as the required disclosures related to inventory.

]]>
Lower of Cost versus Net Realizable Value https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/lower-of-cost-or-net-realizable-value-applied/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:37 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/lower-of-cost-or-net-realizable-value-applied/ Read more »]]>
  • Compare methods of computing lower of cost or net realizable value

 

Net realizable value (NRV) sounds complicated, and a lot of accountants may still use the old term: Lower of Cost or Market (LCM).

However, in July 2015, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) adopted ASU 2015-11, FASB’s Accounting Standards Codification (ASC) Topic 330, Inventory, that replaced LCM with LCNRV.

Lower of cost or market (old rule)

Man holding an ipad.

The old rule (that still applies to entities that use LIFO or a retail method of inventory measurement) required entities to measure inventory at the LCM. The term market referred to either replacement cost, net realizable value (commonly called “the ceiling”), or net realizable value (NRV) less an approximately normal profit margin (commonly called “the floor”).

In other words, market was the price at which you could currently buy it from your suppliers. Except, when you were doing the LCM calculation, if that market price was higher than net realizable value (NRV), you had to use NRV. If the market price was lower than NRV minus a normal profit margin, you had to use NRV minus a normal profit margin.

Lower of cost or NRV (new rule)

The new rule, LCNRV, was designed to simplify this calculation. NRV is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, minus costs of completion, disposal, and transportation.

Say Geyer Co. bought 200 Rel 5 HQ Speakers five years ago for $110 each and sold 90 right off the bat, but has only sold 10 more in the past two years for $70. There are still a hundred on hand, costs using FIFO, but the speakers are obsolete and management feels they can sell them with some slight modifications to each one that cost $20 each.

So, the NRV is:

Sales price $70
Costs to complete 20
NRV Double line $50 Double line
Let’s say the Geyer Co. looked at the HQ Speakers product # Rel 5 and determined that the current wholesale price was $60. There are a bunch on the shelf at the end of the year, 100 in fact, that using FIFO, are assigned a cost of $110.00. These speakers are antiquated and just aren’t selling, so even though they are on the books at FIFO (which means the cost is based on the most recent purchases, regardless of how old the actual speakers are), they are a couple of years old and could be purchased today for a lot less, if Geyer even wanted them.

  • Cost: $110.00
  • Replacement Cost: $60
  • NRV: $50

So under the old rule of LCM, replacement cost (what our wholesale distributor sells to them to us for) would be the ceiling. Let’s also say we would normally mark them up and expect to make about $20 on the sale, so the floor, the lowest we could adjust them to, would be $30. If we lowered the cost to $30 on our books and sold them for $70 minus the $20 it takes to make them saleable, we’d make a normal profit.

cost Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00
NRV Rel 5 HQ Speakers 50.00
replacement cost Rel 5 HQ Speakers 60.00
NRV—normal profit margin Rel 5 HQ Speakers 30.00

Under the old rule that still applies to LIFO and retail inventory methods, the item could be written down to market because it is lower than the historical cost of $110. Market is somewhere between the ceiling and the floor: between $50 and $30. Since the replacement cost is over the ceiling, we’d use the $50 NRV for market.

If the replacement cost had been $20, the most we could write the inventory down to would be the floor of $30.

If the replacement cost had been $45, we would write the inventory down to $45.

Under the new rule, which Geyer would be using because it is using FIFO cost flow assumption, the calculation is actually simpler: NRV. So, $50.

As a result of our analysis, we would write down the cost of Rel 5 HQ Speakers, highlighted below in yellow, by $6,000 so the new cost on our books is $50 each.

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Cost (FIFO) NRV LCNRV Total at LCM
A101 Wiring harness 99.000 30 2,970.00 102.00 99.00 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.000 500 29,000.00 50.00 50.00 25,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.000 15 1,485.00 50.00 50.00 750.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.500 64 80,352.00 2,625.00 1,255.50 80,352.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.000 100 11,000.00 50.00 50.00 5,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.000 150 97,500.00 400.00 400.00 60,000.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00 80.00 80.00 12,800.00
Total Inventory FIFO $ 238,687.00 $ 186,872.00

In the next section, we’ll look at how to adjust total inventory, but first to review:

From ASU 2015-11:

Inventory Measured Using Any Method Other Than LIFO or the Retail Inventory Method

330-10-35-1B Inventory measured using any method other than LIFO or the retail inventory method (for example, inventory measured using first-in, first-out (FIFO) or average cost) shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realizable value. When evidence exists that the net realizable value of inventory is lower than its cost, the difference shall be recognized as a loss in earnings in the period in which it occurs. That loss may be required, for example, due to damage, physical deterioration, obsolescence, changes in price levels, or other causes.

By adjusting the inventory down, the balance sheet value of the asset, Merchandise Inventory, is restated at a more conservative number. Notice that we never adjust inventory up to fair market value, only downward.

One final note: ASU 2015-11, FASB’s Accounting Standards Codification (ASC) Topic 330 carved out an exception to the new rule for LIFO and retail inventory methods. One of the simplest versions of the retail inventory method calculates ending inventory by totaling the value of goods that are available for sale, which includes beginning inventory and any new purchases of inventory. Total sales are multiplied by the cost-to-retail ratio (or the percentage by which goods are marked up from their wholesale purchase price to their retail sales price) in order to get an estimate of COGS.

Using the formula:

[latex]\text{Beginning inventory}+\text{purchases}-\text{ending inventory}=\text{COGS}[/latex]

Modified slightly:

[latex]\text{Beginning inventory}+\text{purchases}-\text{COGS}=\text{ending inventory}[/latex]

A large company like Home Depot that has a consistent mark-up can reasonably estimate ending inventory. Home Depot undoubtedly uses a more sophisticated version of this calculation, but the basic idea would be the same.

Because the estimated cost of ending inventory is based on current prices, this method approximates FIFO at LCM.

Let’s see how companies apply this conservative rule to inventories.

]]>
Lower of Cost or Net Realizable Value Applied https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/lower-of-cost-or-net-realizable-value-applied-2/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:37 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/lower-of-cost-or-net-realizable-value-applied-2/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply the LCNRV rule to merchandise inventory

 

The LCNRV rule can be applied to each inventory item, each inventory class, or total inventory, and each may have different results.

Let’s refer back to Geyer, Co. which holds auto sound systems, speakers, and wiring in inventory. Let’s also assume Geyer uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. The purchasing department has given you the market value for each item according to the rule you provided to them.

Product ID Description NRV
A101 Wiring harness 102.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 50.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 50.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 2,625.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 50.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 400.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 80.00

Apply LCM to each individual item:

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Cost (FIFO) NRV LCNRV Total at LCNRV
A101 Wiring harness 99.000 30 2,970.00 102.00 99.00 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.000 500 29,000.00 50.00 50.00 25,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.000 15 1,485.00 50.00 50.00 750.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.500 64 80,352.00 2,625.00 1,255.50 80,352.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.000 100 11,000.00 50.00 50.00 5,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.000 150 97,500.00 400.00 400.00 60,000.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00 80.00 80.00 12,800.00
Total Inventory FIFO $ 238,687.00 $ 186,872.00

We see that market is lower than cost, so the amount we would report on the balance sheet would be $186,872.

Apply LCNRV to the entire inventory:

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Cost (FIFO) NRV Total at NRV
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.500 64 80,352.00 2,625.00 168,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.000 150 97,500.00 400.00 60,000.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00 80.00 12,800.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.000 500 29,000.00 50.00 25,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.000 15 1,485.00 50.00 750.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.000 100 11,000.00 50.00 5,000.00
A101 Wiring harness 99.000 30 2,970.00 102.00 3,060.00
Total Inventory FIFO $ 238,687.00 $ 274,610.00

We see that, overall, the market value is higher than cost if we just aggregate everything before we compare cost and market.

Finally, let’s look at the same data using three classes of inventory:

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Cost (FIFO) NRV Total at NRV
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.500 64 80,352.00 2,625.00 168,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.000 150 97,500.00 400.00 60,000.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00 80.00 12,800.00
LCM Sound 194,232.00 240,800.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.000 500 29,000.00 50.00 25,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.000 15 1,485.00 50.00 750.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.000 100 11,000.00 50.00 5,000.00
LCM Speakers 41,485.00 30,750.00
A101 Wiring harness 99.000 30 2,970.00 102.00 3,060.00
Total Inventory FIFO $ 238,687.00 $ 274,610.00
LCM by class
Sound 194,232.00
Speakers 30,750.00
Wiring 2,970.00
227,952.00

The LCNRV for sound systems was cost. The LCNRV for speakers was market, and the LCNRV for wiring was cost. In total, using the class system, we would adjust inventory down to $227,952.

In the next section, we’ll look at four different ways to make an LCNRV adjustment to inventory.

]]>
Effects of Inventory Cost Methods https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/effects-of-inventory-cost-methods/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:36 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/effects-of-inventory-cost-methods/ Read more »]]>
  • Compare and contrast the effect of different cost flow assumptions on gross profit and net income

 

Here is the recap of the four cost assumptions using the periodic method of accounting for ending inventory and COGS using the numbers from the introduction to this section:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation –
periodic method
SpecID WAVE FIFO LIFO
Gross sales $ 620.00 $ 620.00 $ 620.00 $ 620.00
Cost of Goods Sold 368.00 374.88 352.00 396.00
Gross profit Single Line$252.00Double Line Single Line$245.12Double Line Single Line$268.00Double Line Single Line$224.00Double Line
Gross profit % 40.65% 39.54% 43.23% 36.13%

And here is that same data presented using the perpetual method:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation –
perpetual method
SpecID WAVE FIFO LIFO
Gross sales $ 620.00 $ 620.00 $ 620.00 $ 620.00
Cost of Goods Sold 368.00 369.15 352.00 384.00
Gross profit Single Line$252.00Double Line Single Line$250.85Double Line Single Line$268.00Double Line Single Line$236.00Double Line
Gross profit % 40.65% 40.46% 43.23% 38.06%

Notice that specific identification is the same under both the periodic and perpetual method since we were using the actual cost of the item matched against the revenue it produced. Also, FIFO is the same under both systems since the oldest layers of inventory are cleared out first, leaving current costs in ending inventory. LIFO and moving weighted average are different, though, because of the constant updating of the accounting records.

In addition, what differences do you see between the assumptions?

LIFO gives the lowest gross profit, but only because the prices of our inventory purchases were rising. If our costs were falling, LIFO would give the highest gross profit. FIFO then, in periods of rising prices, will give us a higher gross profit than LIFO because we would be using the oldest (lower) costs for COGS.

Weighted average (or moving weighted average if you are using a perpetual inventory accounting system) will always fall between FIFO and LIFO. Specific identification will usually be somewhere between the two, but depending on the actual physical flow of goods, it could also be very close to one or the other.

In summary, here are your choices:

You can use FIFO, LIFO, weighted average, or specific identification cost flow assumptions, and either a perpetual accounting or periodic accounting to move those costs from inventory to COGS.

]]>
Introduction to Conservatism in Reporting Inventory https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-conservatism-in-reporting-inventory/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:36 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-conservatism-in-reporting-inventory/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Apply the conservatism principle to inventory costing

Generally, companies should use historical cost to value inventories and COGS. However, some circumstances justify departures from historical cost. One of these circumstances is when the utility or value of inventory items is less than their cost. In other words, if you have items in inventory that are worth less than you paid for them, you either need to write them off or at least write them down.

Therefore, in addition to periodic and perpetual methods of record-keeping, and in addition to the specific identification, FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory costing methods, accountants have to deal with a permanent decline in the value of inventory using either the lower of cost or net realizable value (LCNRV) rule or the similar lower of cost or market (LCM) rule. We’ll cover the lower of cost or net realizable value (LCNRV) here because lower of cost or market (LCM) is similar.

Paperwork.Lower of cost or net realizable value (LCNRV) is an application of the conservatism principle. Recall that the conservatism principle requires us to recognize and record expenses and liabilities-certain or uncertain, as soon they are measurable, but to recognize revenues and assets only when they are earned and likely to be realized.

Applying that concept to inventory, we find that GAAP requires that merchandise inventory be reported in the financial statements at whichever is lower of the following:

  • The historical cost of the inventory determined by FIFO, LIFO, weighted average, or specific identification
  • The net realizable value of the inventory, which is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business minus costs of completion, disposal, and transportation.
]]>
Practice: LIFO https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-lifo/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:35 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-lifo/
  • Illustrate the use of LIFO cost flow assumption

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

]]>
Practice: FIFO https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-fifo/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:34 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-fifo/
  • Illustrate the use of FIFO cost flow assumption

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
LIFO https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/lifo/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:34 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/lifo/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate the use of LIFO cost flow assumption

 

LIFO stands for Last-in, First-out cost flow assumption. This means the newest purchase prices are the ones we assign to COGS. In other words, the current inventory is assigned the oldest costs. A physical cost flow example of this assumption could be gravel at the landscaping yard. A truck comes in and dumps a load of gravel in an enclosure. Later, another truck comes and dumps more gravel on top of the first load.

A dump truck filled with a load of dirt.

A customer backs in and takes a quarter ton, but hardly scrapes the surface of the newest dumped rock. Another supply truck adds to the pile, and the next customer takes gravel from the front of the pile. The oldest gravel may sit there for years and years unless the company liquidates all the LIFO layers, clear back to the first one.

Again, the cost flow assumption doesn’t have to match the physical flow of goods. A grocery store could use LIFO to account for milk inventories, even though it would never sell the newest milk first, leaving the old stuff to sit and sour in the back. LIFO is just another method of assigning costs to items that we don’t track via specific identification.

Same data as before—the list of sales, by date:

All Revenue
29-Oct 6 $120
20-Nov 6 $120
24-Dec 19 $380
Total 31Double line $620Double line

And the purchases:

Purchases
NewCo Sporting Goods
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Purchases
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00
Total Purchases $ 520.00

We’ll use the same worksheet format as before and do our calculations step by step, tracking purchases, COGS, and inventory on hand for each date something happens. This time we’ll use the LIFO method of assigning costs to inventory.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300

Again, light green represents 10 units of inventory we purchased in mid-October. In late October, we sold six of those units, so we had four left. In mid-November, we bought 25 more baseball bats at a higher price. At that point, we had two LIFO layers: four old October bats at $10 each and 25 new November bats at $12 each. Here’s where LIFO starts to look different from FIFO and the other assumptions.

On Nov 20, NewCo sold six more bats. Under LIFO, we’ll pull the newest costs first: all six bats we sold come from the November 15 purchase.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 0 $10 $0 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 6 $12 $72 19 $12 $228

That leaves us with those four old bats and 19 of the 25 we just bought—on paper only. Remember this is just a theoretical cost flow assumption, not a reflection of the physical flow.

We add another LIFO layer on December 15 when we buy another eight bats at $15 each. Under LIFO, these will be the first costs out the door when the holiday rush hits.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 0 $10 $0 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 6 $12 $72 19 $12 $228
Dec 15 4 $10 $40
Dec 15 19 $12 $228
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120

On the 24th, we sell 19 bats:

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 0 $10 $0 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 6 $12 $72 19 $12 $228
Dec 15 4 $10 $40
Dec 15 19 $12 $228
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 24 4 $10 $40
Dec 24 11 $12 $132 8 $12 $96
Dec 24 8 $15 $120 0 $15 $0

The assumption is that the most recent purchases are the first to go out, like the gravel pit, regardless of which bats actually sold. We don’t bother color coding them because we don’t get significantly better information using that system.

For the 19 bats we sold, we assume they were the eight we just bought plus 11 out of the ones we bought right before that. At the end of the day, we still have those first four left in inventory and eight of the second batch of bats. A hundred years from now, if NewCo is still in business and because of inflation bats now cost us $130 each, we may have four bats in inventory that have a cost assigned to them of $10. That’s a strange thing about LIFO, and one of the reasons International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) doesn’t allow it, even though Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) does.

Here’s the completed worksheet for LIFO (which could be called “first-in, still-here, or FISH, but it isn’t).

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 0 $10 $0 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 6 $12 $72 19 $12 $228
Dec 15 4 $10 $40
Dec 15 19 $12 $228
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 24 4 $10 $40
Dec 24 11 $12 $132 8 $12 $96
Dec 24 8 $15 $120 0 $15 $0
Totals 43 $520 31 $384
Ending Inventory 4 $10 $40
8 $12 $96
0 $15 $0
12 $136

And the gross profit calculation:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
LIFO – perpetual
Description Amount
Gross sales $ 620.00
Costs of goods sold $384.00
Gross profit Single Line$236.00Double Line
Gross profit % 38.06%

Next, we’ll compare all these different methods to see what kind of impact each one has on the business bottom line.


]]>
Practice: Weighted Average https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-weighted-average/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:33 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-weighted-average/
  • Illustrate the use of weighted average cost flow assumption

 

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

]]>
FIFO https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/fifo/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:33 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/fifo/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate the use of FIFO cost flow assumption

 

FIFO stands for First-in, First-out cost flow assumption, which means the first (oldest) purchase prices are the ones we assign to COGS. In other words, the current inventory is assigned the most recent costs. A familiar physical cost flow example of this assumption would be milk. The stock clerk loads milk from inside the refrigeration unit, putting the newest milk in behind the older cartons or jugs. When you pull the frosty door open and grab the first jug off the shelf, you are buying the oldest milk. The newer stuff is in the back (that’s why parents often reach up behind the containers in front to get the fresher milk in the back).

However, the cost flow assumption doesn’t have to match the physical flow of goods. It’s just a method of assigning costs to items that we don’t track via specific identification.

Same data as before—the list of sales, by date:

All Revenue
29-Oct 6 $120
20-Nov 6 $120
24-Dec 19 $380
Total 31Double line $620Double line

And the purchases:

Purchases
NewCo Sporting Goods
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Purchases
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00
Total Purchases $ 520.00

We’ll use the same worksheet format as before and do our calculations step by step, tracking purchases, COGS, and inventory on hand for each date that something happens, this time using the FIFO method of assigning costs to inventory.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300

This time we’ll use the color coding a bit differently. Light green represents 10 units of inventory we purchased in mid-October. In late October, we sold six of those units, so we had four left. In mid-November, we bought 25 more baseball bats at a higher price. At that point, we had four old bats at $10 each and 25 new, fresh bats at $12 each. Here’s where FIFO starts to look different from specific identification and weighted average.

On November 20, NewCo sold six more bats. Under FIFO, we’ll pull the oldest costs first, until that pool is depleted, and then we’ll go to the next oldest, and so on.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 4 $10 $40 0 $10 $0
Nov 20 2 $12 $24 23 $12 $276

At the start of business on the 20th, NewCo had 29 bats in stock. Four of them were old, and 25 were newer. During the day, the company sold six bats. We don’t care which batch or pot or box they come from because we are using a cost flow assumption here that allows us to use the oldest costs first, regardless of when the bats were purchased or how much those particular bats actually cost.

We take the cost of four bats from the oldest batch, and that amount is depleted. Then, we assign the other two bats we sold on that day a cost basis from the next oldest batch, the November 15 purchase at $12 each.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 4 $10 $40 0 $10 $0
Nov 20 2 $12 $24 23 $12 $276
Dec 15 0 $10 $0
Dec 15 23 $12 $276
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120

On December 15, NewCo bought eight more bats at $15 each. The October 15 pool is gone. There are 23 bats left in the November 15 pool, and now eight in the newest pool. Again, these are all accounting pools, not physical bats. If you compare this list to the specific ID, where we actually tracked the cost of each bat, you’ll find them different.

On the 24th of December, then, the 19 bats all came out of the oldest pool of 23 bats from November 15 at $12, leaving four theoretical bats in that pool, and all eight theoretical bats in the newest (December 15) pool. The first bats we bought were the first ones we considered to be sold: FIFO or “last-in, still-here” (no accountant uses the acronym LISH though).

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 4 $10 $40 0 $10 $0
Nov 20 2 $12 $24 23 $12 $276
Dec 15 0 $10 $0
Dec 15 23 $12 $276
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 24 19 $12 $228 4 $12 $48
Dec 24 8 $15 $120

Here is the entire table, completed:

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Dates Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 20 4 $10 $40 0 $10 $0
Nov 20 2 $12 $24 23 $12 $276
Dec 15 0 $10 $0
Dec 15 23 $12 $276
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 24 0 $10 $0
Dec 24 19 $12 $228 4 $12 $48
Dec 24 8 $15 $120
Totals 43 $520 31 $352
Ending Inventory 0 $10 $0
4 $12 $48
8 $15 $120
12 $168

Here is the gross profit calculation for FIFO using a perpetual inventory system:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
FIFO – perpetual
Description Amount
Gross sales $ 620.00
Costs of goods sold $352.00
Gross profit Single Line$268.00Double Line
Gross profit % 43.23%

Now that you have learned about FIFO, we’ll move on to cover LIFO next.

]]>
Weighted Average https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/weighted-average/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:32 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/weighted-average/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate the use of weighted average cost flow assumption

 

Let’s apply the weighted-average cost flow assumption to our baseball bat example, using a periodic inventory system.

To calculate the weighted average cost of bats, we are going to toss them all together like a baseball bat salad, so we don’t need any color coding. Other than that, this is the same data we used for our analysis of specific identification.

Again, here is the list of sales, by date:

All Revenue
29-Oct 6 $120
20-Nov 6 $120
24-Dec 19 $380
Total 31Double line $620Double line

And here are the purchases:

Purchases
NewCo Sporting Goods
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Purchases
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00
Total Purchases $ 520.00

We’ll use the same worksheet format as before and do our calculations step by step, tracking purchases, COGS, and inventory on hand for each date that something happens, this time using a weighted average method of assigning costs to inventory.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100

Right now, the average cost of inventory is $10 because we have $100 in total cost divided by 10 units. When we sell six units, we assign $60 in costs and move that much from inventory to COGS. So far, this method is the same as specific identification because we only have one batch of bats to draw from.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40

We had ten, sold six, and now there are four left, and the average cost is still $10 each.

On November 15, we bought 25 more bats for $300. We now have 29 bats at a total cost of $340 (the four bats at $10 each and the 25 bats at $12 each). The average of the two prices is $11 (10 + 12 divided by 2) but the weighted moving average is $340 divided by 29 (total cost of inventory on hand divided by units) which is, in this case, $11.72. The average is much closer to $12 than to $10 because there are so many more of the $12 units.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0.00 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10.00 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10.00 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 29 $11.72 $340

When we next sell bats on November 20th, we use the new cost for COGS:

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0.00 $0.00
Oct 15 10 $10.00 $100.00 10 $10.00 $100.00
Oct 29 6 $10.00 $60.00 4 $10.00 $40.00
Nov 15 25 $12.00 $300.00 29 $11.72 $340.00
Nov 20 6 $11.72 $70.32 23 $11.73 $269.68

We had 29, sold six, and now we have 23 left (the cost changed slightly due to rounding). Total cost was $340.00, but we removed six bats at $70.32 total, so we have $269.68 total cost to spread evenly over 23 units. (269.68 / 23 = 11.725…)

On the 15th of December, NewCo bought eight more bats for $120 total ($15 each) and then had 31 bats on hand for a total cost of $389.68 (that’s 269.68 + 120). The weighted (moving) average is now $12.57.

Do you see the pattern?

Hint: Every time we purchase inventory, we recalculate the average cost by taking total cost of inventory on hand and dividing it by total units on hand.

That’s the formula to memorize: total cost / total units = weighted average cost.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0.00 $0.00
Oct 15 10 $10.00 $100.00 10 $10.00 $100.00
Oct 29 6 $10.00 $60.00 4 $10.00 $40.00
Nov 15 25 $12.00 $300.00 29 $11.72 $340.00
Nov 20 6 $11.72 $70.32 23 $11.73 $269.68
Dec 15 8 $15.00 $120.00 31 $12.57 $389.68
Dec 24 19 $12.57 $238.83 12 $12.57 $150.85
Totals 43 $520 31 $369.15

It’s called a moving average because we are always recalculating it. In the periodic system, we took total cost for the year and divided it by total units (for each individual item). Here, in the perpetual system, we have to recalculate the weighted average every time we purchase more of the product.

At the end of December, we have 12 bats on hand at an average cost of $12.57. Notice that because beginning inventory of this item was zero, total costs of items sold ($369.15) plus cost of ending inventory ($150.85) is equal to purchases. If we had a beginning inventory, the calculation is still the same, and ending inventory plus COGS would equal purchases plus beginning inventory.

Here are the results after all our journal entries are posted, the trial balance is run, adjusting journal entries made and posted, the adjusted trial balance checked over one last time, and financial statements produced:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
Weighted Average (perpetual)
Description Amount Total
Gross sales $ 620.00
Beginning inventory $-
Purchases $520.00
Less ending inventory $150.85
      Costs of goods sold $396.15
Gross profit Single Line$250.85Double Line
Gross profit % 40.46%

This method may look easier than the other methods, but it is not ideal for large ticket items like cars, boats, yachts, or even appliances and anything one of a kind or unique in some way. If you had a boutique store that sold fancy olive oil from 5-gallon jugs with spigots, this method could be ideal since the oils get mixed together in the jug. It would be really hard to use specific identification with oils and other fungible items. However, there is no rule that says you have to use a cost flow assumption that matches the physical flow of goods.


]]>
Inventory Cost Methods https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/inventory-cost-methods/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:31 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/inventory-cost-methods/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate the use of specific identification cost flow assumption
  • Illustrate the use of weighted average cost flow assumption
  • Illustrate the use of First-in, First-out (FIFO) cost flow assumption
  • Illustrate the use of Last-in, First-out (LIFO) cost flow assumption

Here is an overview of the cost flow assumptions:

You can view the transcript for “Inventory Cost Flow Assumptions” here (opens in new window).

 

In order to put this principle in context, let’s take a simple example and apply each of the four examples in turn. We’ll assume that NewCo Sporting Goods has decided to start selling baseball bats in October, starting with a model called the Slugger, and that the company made three purchases, listed in the table below. Notice that the cost of each bat is different for each purchase.

Purchases
NewCo Sporting Goods
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Purchases
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00
Total Inventory Value $ 520.00

Say at the end of the year you have 12 bats left in stock, according to your physical count, and that for simplicity’s sake, you have decided to use the periodic method of accounting for inventory, where you wait until the end of the year to compute COGS. You have the following information:

  • Beginning inventory was zero because this is your first year in business.
  • You purchased three different “lots” of baseball bats, 43 in total, with a total cost of $520.
  • There are 12 bats in ending inventory.

What cost do you assign to those 12 bats? The answer is, it depends on the cost flow assumption used.

Let’s take a quick look at each cost flow assumption using the periodic method, and then we’ll apply what we have learned to the perpetual method.

1. Specific Identification

Technically, the specific identification method of assigning costs to items in inventory isn’t an assumption because it is a direct assignment of the cost of the item purchased to the item. Assume that when each bat came in, we put a sticker on it. Green for the $10 bats, red for the $12 bats, and blue for the $15 bats. We look at the 12 bats in ending inventory and specifically identify which ones are left. We find two green bats, six red bats, and four blue bats.

Inventory List
NewCo Sporting Goods
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Total Purchases Ending Inventory
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00 2 20.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00 6 72.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00 4 60.00
Total Inventory Value $ 520.00 $ 152.00

Because we identified the exact cost of each bat, we can calculate the cost of ending inventory precisely. Two green bats at $10 each, plus six red bats at $12 each, and four blue bats at $15 each makes the total cost of ending inventory equal $152 using the historical cost principle and the specific identification cost-flow method.

Assume each bat sold for $20. We had 43 bats. There are 12 left, so we sold 31 bats at $20 each for total sales of $620. We’ll assume no discounts, no returns or allowances, and no freight in. Here is our calculation of gross profit on bats:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
Specific Identification method
Description Amount Total
Gross sales $ 620.00
Beginning inventory $-
Purchases $520.00
Less ending inventory 152.00
      Costs of goods sold $368.00
Gross profit Single Line$252.00Double Line
Gross profit % 40.64%

 

Another way to look at this is we sold 8 of the $10 bats, 19 of the $12 bats, and 4 of the $15 bats. What is the total cost of bats sold? $80 + $228 + $60 = $368.

Inventory List
NewCo Sporting Goods
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Total Purchases Cost of Goods Sold
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00 8 80.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00 19 228.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00 4 60.00
Total Inventory Value $ 520.00 $ 368.00

2. Weighted Average

A “straight” or unweighted average would be ($10 + $12 + $15) / 3 = $12.33, which actually gives each price equal weight. However, we bought a lot more bats at $12 than at the other price points, so we should give those bats more weight. We do that by multiplying the price (our cost) by the units, which we have already done in the table above to get Total Purchases. Divide that number by total units, and we get the weighted average cost:

$520.00 / 43 units = $12.09.

Not a radical difference in this case, but for a bigger business, the effect of using the wrong calculation would be magnified.

There are 12 units in ending inventory at an average cost of $12.09 for a total ending inventory cost of $145.12.

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
Weighted Average Method
Description Amount Total
Gross sales $ 620.00
Beginning inventory $-
Purchases $520.00
Less ending inventory $145.12
      Costs of goods sold $374.88
Gross profit Single Line$245.12Double Line
Gross profit % 39.54%

3. First-in, First-out (FIFO)

First-in, First-out (FIFO) could also be called “last in still here.” The first purchases we made are assumed to be the first items sold, so the most recent purchases are the ones left in ending inventory. In this case, we would assume that the 12 bats left in our store at the end of the year were the eight we bought on the 15th of December and four of the bats we bought on the 15th of November.

Inventory List
NewCo Sporting Goods
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Purchases Ending Inventory
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00 4 48.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00 8 120.00
Total Inventory Value $ 520.00 $ 168.00

 

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
FIFO
Description Amount Total
Gross sales $ 620.00
Beginning inventory $-
Purchases $520.00
Less ending inventory $168.00
      Costs of goods sold $352.00
Gross profit Single Line$268.00Double Line
Gross profit % 43.23%

4. Last-in, First-out (LIFO)

Last-in, First-out (LIFO) is the exact opposite of FIFO. We assume that the first items we sell come from the most recent purchases. Another way to think of this, in terms of the costs assigned to ending inventory, is “first in still here” This system creates an interesting and sometimes perplexing problem called “LIFO layers” that we will discuss later. For now, here is the same information we’ve been examining, this time using the LIFO cost flow assumption:

Inventory List
NewCo Sporting Goods
12/31/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity Purchases Ending Inventory
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00 2 24.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00
Total Inventory Value $ 520.00 $ 124.00

 

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
LIFO
Description Amount Total
Gross sales $ 620.00
Beginning inventory $-
Purchases $520.00
Less ending inventory $124.00
      Costs of goods sold $396.00
Gross profit Single Line$224.00Double Line
Gross profit % 36.13%
Let’s look at all four methods, side by side:

NewCo Sporting Goods
Gross Profit Calculation
SpecID WAVE FIFO LIFO
Gross sales $ 620.00 $ 620.00 $ 620.00 $ 620.00
Cost of Goods Sold 368.00 374.88 352.00 396.00
Gross profit Single Line$252.00Double Line Single Line$245.12Double Line Single Line$268.00Double Line Single Line$224.00Double Line
Gross profit % 40.65% 39.54% 43.23% 36.13%

Which method would make investors and lenders happiest? Which method would result in the lowest taxes? Which method makes the most sense for this business, and why?

How would you apply any of these methods to a perpetual inventory system?

Let’s find out.

 

]]>
Specific Identification https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/specific-identification/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:31 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/specific-identification/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate the use of specific identification cost flow assumption

 

Let’s apply what we have learned about accounting so far to the following situation:

The owner of NewCo Sporting Goods wants you to analyze which cost flow assumption would be best for her store: specific identification, weighted average, FIFO, or LIFO. She wants to implement a perpetual inventory system and wants to be able to log on remotely and see exactly what the inventory levels are for any item at any moment in time, as well as to be able to assess whether any of the inventory is “walking away,” so to speak.

Let’s start our analysis by taking just one item, baseball bats, and applying the different methods one at a time.

As baseball bats are purchased, they are identified by a sticker: green for the $10 bats, red for the $12 bats, and blue for the $15 bats.

Here is the list of sales, by date and by sticker color:

Sticker color Green Red Blue All Revenue
29-Oct 6 6 $120
20-Nov 1 5 6 $120
24-Dec 1 14 4 19 $380
Total 8 Double line 19Double line 4Double line 31Double line $620Double line

And here are the purchases, by date and by sticker color:

Product ID Description Cost Quantity Total
Purchases
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 10 100.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 25 300.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 8 120.00
Total Inventory Value $ 520.00

Let’s start a worksheet and do our calculations step by step, tracking purchases, COGS, and inventory on hand for each date that something happens.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100

On the 1st of October, there was nothing in inventory. On the 15th, NewCo bought 10 bats at $10 each and put a green sticker on them to specifically identify the cost of the bat without revealing it to the customers. In reality, it’s unlikely that NewCo would account for baseball bats using the specific indentification method. It might track carbon fiber mountain bikes that way, when there are only a few in stock and most of them are different and high-priced items. Also, NewCo would be using bar codes (SKU codes) and not stickers. However, we’re going to stay low-tech here and color code our purchases.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Oct 15 Purchases 100.00
Oct 15 Freight in 0.00
Oct 15       Accounts Payable 100.00
Oct 15 To record purchase of 10 bats, free shipping

Assume the supplier offers “free shipping” which actually means the shipping costs are built into the price the vendor is charging NewCo.

A purchase updates both the general ledger (GL) and the subsidiary ledger.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40

On the 29th of October, NewCo sold six bats from the ones purchased on the 15th, and so assigned those bats a $10 cost each.

This is what we need to know to create our journal entry and to update our subsidiary ledger:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 19 Checking Account 129.60
Dec 19       Sales Taxes Payable 9.60
Dec 19       Sales Revenue 120.00
Dec 19 COGS 60.00
Dec 19       Merchandise Inventory 60.00
Dec 19 To record sale of 6 bats

 

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 15 4 $10 $40

On the 15th of November, NewCo bought 25 more bats at a cost of $12 each and put a red sticker on them to identify the batch. Now there are 29 bats in stock: four of the original purchase with green stickers, and now 25 more with red stickers.

You’ve seen the journal entry, so we don’t need to keep repeating that.

On the 20th of November, NewCo sold six more bats: one with a green sticker and five with a red sticker. The journal entry, as usual, records both the sale and the reduction of inventory, based on our cost records, which we will now update:

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 5 $12 $60 20 $12 $240
Nov 20 1 $10 $10 3 $10 $30

Just look at the last two rows now. We have 20 of the red (Nov. 15) batch left, and three of the green (Oct. 15) batch left. A test count of our stock in hand should match these numbers. So far we’ve purchased 35 bats and we’ve sold 12, so there should be 23 bats on hand in the store. Let’s assume we’ve not lost any to “shrinkage” (breakage, customer theft, or employee theft) and that our perpetual records match our physical count.

On the 15th of December, preparing for the holiday rush, we bought eight more bats, but the cost has gone up (probably due to higher demand) to $15 each. As usual, we prepare the journal entry and post it to both the GL and the subsidiary ledger.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 5 $12 $60 20 $12 $240
Nov 20 1 $10 $10 3 $10 $30
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 15/span> 20 $12 $240
Dec 15 3 $10 $30

Now we have three batches of bats. We color coded this latest batch with blue stickers. We have 31 bats on hand in mid-December and we sell 19 of them on Christmas Eve, leaving 12 bats on hand as we close the doors for a couple of days off.

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 5 $12 $60 20 $12 $240
Nov 20 1 $10 $10 3 $10 $30
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 15 20 $12 $240
Dec 15 3 $10 $30
Dec 24 4 $15 $60 4 $15 $60
Dec 24 14 $12 $168 6 $12 $72
Dec 24 1 $10 $10 2 $10 $20

Let’s prepare the journal entry for the sale on December 24:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 24 Checking Account 410.40
Dec 24       Sales Taxes Payable 30.40
Dec 24       Sales Revenue 380.00
Dec 24 Cost of Goods Sold 238.00
Dec 24       Merchandise Inventory 238.00
Dec 24 To record sale of 19 bats

After a short break, we reopen the store for a few days and take a final inventory count on the 31st of December just after we lock the doors. Dasan, the stocking clerk, turns that count into the accounting office so they can compare the physical count to the perpetual inventory records.

Here is the final tally:

Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand
Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost
Oct 1 0 $0 $0
Oct 15 10 $10 $100 10 $10 $100
Oct 29 6 $10 $60 4 $10 $40
Nov 15 25 $12 $300 25 $12 $300
Nov 15 4 $10 $40
Nov 20 5 $12 $60 20 $12 $240
Nov 20 1 $10 $10 3 $10 $30
Dec 15 8 $15 $120 8 $15 $120
Dec 15 20 $12 $240
Dec 15 3 $10 $30
Dec 24 4 $15 $60 4 $15 $60
Dec 24 14 $12 $168 6 $12 $72
Dec 24 1 $10 $10 2 $10 $20
Totals 43 $520 31 $368
Ending Inventory 4 $15 $60
6 $12 $72
2 $10 $20
12 $152

A quick note: this is not what their subsidiary ledger looks like. This is a learning tool only. All of these entries are being done in some kind of relational database. (QuickBooks accounting software is actually a relational database specifically designed for accounting applications, but as of 2020 it still only computes inventory using the weighted average method.)

The report the database generates would look something like this, except it would have every item in the store listed, and the total of the Inventory List (subsidiary ledger) would equal the GL control account. Remember, they HAVE to be EQUAL to each other.

Inventory List, as of Dec 31, 20XX
NewCo Sporting Goods
Product ID Description Cost Ending Inventory
Slugger purchased 10/15/20XX 10.00 2 $   20.00
Slugger purchased 11/15/20XX 12.00 6 72.00
Slugger purchased 12/15/20XX 15.00 4 60.00
Total Inventory Value $ 152.00

Notice this system is exactly the same as if the company was using the periodic system because, under specific identification, we are assigning costs to individual units as they are sold.

Normally, this system of specific identification would be used for unique items, like luxury yachts, construction jobs, custom motorcycles, even autos and smaller boats, but not normally for baseball bats, although with the increased sophistication of our computer programs, it’s not impossible to use specific identification for a wide variety of items.


]]>
Introduction to Inventory Cost Flow Assumptions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-inventory-cost-flow-assumptions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:30 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-inventory-cost-flow-assumptions/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Establish the cost of items in inventory

A woman holding shopping bags.

The term cost flow assumptions refers to the manner in which costs are removed from a company’s inventory and are reported as the COGS. In the U.S., the common cost flow assumptions are First-in, First-out (FIFO), Last-in, First-out (LIFO), and average. Additionally, there are ways to estimate ending inventory, such as the retail inventory method, and it is possible to assign costs to inventory using the actual cost of each item (specific identification method).

]]>
Why It Matters: Inventory Valuation Methods https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-inventory-valuation-methods/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:29 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-inventory-valuation-methods/ Read more »]]> Why learn about accounting and reporting of inventory?

A grocery store aisle.

For a merchandising company, inventory can be one of the largest assets on the books, and one of the most complicated to account for. Unlike fixed assets, like buildings and equipment, that are bought and held for a long time, inventory for most companies is being bought and sold constantly.

You may not always see this continuing turnover, but if you think about a grocery store, you know that the merchandise is in a constant state of flux. Even a department store, like Walmart, is always buying and selling inventory. That is their primary business function. In fact, on January 31, 2020, Walmart reported over $44 billion dollars in merchandise inventory, and for that fiscal year, the company reported almost $400 billion in cost of goods sold (COGS). That means that statistically, the inventory was turning over about nine times per year. In other words, the average item at Walmart sold within 40 days. Of course, lettuce in the grocery department sells within a few days of being purchased (hopefully), and lawnmowers may take a month or two.

For many businesses then, “valuing” inventory is a significant accounting issue. These are the basic accounting principles:

  • Historical cost: using objective evidence to establish the “book value,” rather than subjective measures such as fair market value. So, in essence, we are not establishing the value of inventory, but rather its cost.
  • Matching: recognizing the COGS against the revenue generated.
  • Conservatism: recognizing a loss in the value of the inventory when it happens, but not increases in value (we recognize the fair market value of the inventory when we sell it, and the difference between the sales price and the cost is our gross profit).
  • Materiality: how do we best account for the costs of inventory without getting lost in the details?
  • Disclosure: in addition to the number on the balance sheet, what do the users of the financial information need to know to make an informed investment or lending decision?

We’ll study each of these principles in this module, and although they are all interconnected, we’ll try to tackle each one independently.

]]>
Discussion: Inventory Controls https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-inventory-controls/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:28 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-inventory-controls/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Inventory Controls link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Merchandising Operations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-merchandising-operations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:28 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-merchandising-operations/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Merchandising Operations

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Internal Controls over Inventory https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/internal-controls-over-inventory/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:27 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/internal-controls-over-inventory/ Read more »]]>
  • Illustrate how inventory counts are used as an internal control under a perpetual system

 

In the prior section, we discussed internal controls on periodic inventory:

  • authorized purchase orders and a tracking system for those POs
  • verifying receipt of inventory
  • a process to approve the payment to the vendor
  • inventory management such as:
    • reorder points
    • quality control
    • shipping and billing procedures

A worker holding a clipboard in a factory.

In addition to these controls, one of the main internal controls over inventory when using the perpetual system is the physical count. Unlike periodic inventory, where we count at the very end of the accounting period in order to calculate COGS, under perpetual inventory we constantly take test counts. We don’t count everything all at once though. In January, we count one class of items or category, and then another in February, and so on, or at random times, unannounced.

Ideally, the physical count and the accounting records will be the same, but sometimes they are not, in which case we make an adjusting journal entry AND we assess our other internal controls to see if we are lax in some area. Maybe something got broken, missed in the count, or stolen. In our sound system warehouse example, we might consider installing webcams to watch over our employees, reducing the opportunity for theft.

Here is our official inventory list from our accounting records (this is the subsidiary ledger):

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/19/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Inventory Value
A101 Wiring harness 99.00 30 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.00 500 29,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.00 15 1,485.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.50 64 80,352.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00 100 11,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.00 150 97,500.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00
Total Inventory Value $ 238,687.00

Under the perpetual inventory system, when the actual physical counts don’t agree with the accounting records, we have to make an adjustment to the accounting records. It’s usually not “swelling,” which means there is more inventory on hand than in the records. It’s usually “shrinkage.” Let’s say the actual physical count revealed there were only 63 MMM 333 in stock. We would probably post the shrinkage to COGS:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Cost of goods sold 1,255.50
Dec 19       Inventory 1,255.50
Dec 19 To adjust inventory subsidiary ledger to physical count

If shrinkage was significant, we should do two things:

  1. Find out why by more closely monitoring the at-risk items.
  2. Record shrinkage in a separate GL account in order to more closely monitor the materiality of the loss.

Sometimes things just break or are damaged and it’s just a cost of doing business, but sometimes we can and should mitigate that loss—that’s what internal controls are all about.


]]>
Putting It Together: Merchandising Operations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-merchandising-operations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:27 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-merchandising-operations/ Read more »]]> A group of 3 people meeting together.

It’s worth looking one last time at how a merchandising company prepares the first part of an income statement. When we were looking at a service business, we had one line called Service Revenue. Now, with merchandising companies, we have the following basic calculation:

Net revenue − COGS = Gross Profit

For a company using a periodic inventory system, the calculation is expanded like this:

Geyer Co.
Income Statement (partial)
For the year ended December 31, 20XX
Sales Revenue, net $2,548,959
Subcategory, Cost of goods sold
  Merchandise inventory, January 1, 20XX $457,897
  Purchases, net 1,456,222
  Freight in 66,231
  Goods available for sale Single Line $1,980,350
  Less merchandise inventory, December 31, 20XX 238,687
        Cost of goods sold Single Line 1,741,663
Gross profit Single Line$807,296Double Line

Where net sales is equal to Gross Sales (the invoiced amount) minus Sales Returns and Allowances and minus Sales Discounts.

Compare the above calculation to one from the same company if it used the perpetual system where all inventory transactions run through only two accounts—Merchandise Inventory and COGS—and inventory is being updated constantly for both purchases and sales:

Geyer Co.
Income Statement (partial)
For the year ended December 31, 20XX
Sales Revenue, net $2,548,959
Costs of goods sold 1,741,663
Gross profit Single Line$807,296Double Line

The results are the same, as long as all other assumptions are the same, but the method is completely different.

In the next module, we’ll study how to come up with the item cost per unit when costs are changing all the time.

]]>
Sales under a Perpetual System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/sales-under-a-perpetual-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:26 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/sales-under-a-perpetual-system/ Read more »]]>
  • Record sales using a perpetual system

 

Approaching the end of the year, here is the state of affairs as we have described them so far. We have ignored sales and other purchases in order to keep things simple, but now let’s record a sale of inventory from our stock in hand.

Inventory
Debit Credit
223,562.50
20,700.00
4,000.00
320.00
Double line 239,942.50 Double line
Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/19/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Inventory Value
A101 Wiring harness 99.00 30 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.00 500 29,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.00 15 1,485.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.50 65 81,607.50
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00 100 11,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.00 150 97,500.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00
Total Inventory Value $ 239,942.50

We’ll sell one MMM-333 sound system and nothing else, again, for illustrative purposes and to keep things simpler than they are in real life. We’ll use the gross method: we’ll sell to retail customers who use a debit or credit card, and we’ll collect 8% state and local combined sales tax.

Here is the journal entry:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Checking Account 2,159.99
Dec 31       Sales Taxes Payable 160.00
Dec 31       Sales Revenue 1,999.99
Dec 31 Cost of Goods Sold 1,255.50
Dec 31       Merchandise Inventory 1,255.50
Dec 31 To record sale of MMM-333 to Paul Smith

A lot is going on here, and this entry could be two journal entries, but often it’s not. Here we’ve violated the rule of debits first and then credits, simply in order to help clarify the entry.

  1. The deposit to the checking account includes both the sales price of $1,999.99 and the sales tax collected on behalf of the taxing authority (the state, in this case). The seller is required to collect that money from the buyer and then send it to the state on the buyer’s behalf because the state doesn’t trust the buyer to fill out the forms and remit the sales and use tax. That $160 is a payable because it is not our money. We owe it to the state and the state tax enforcement agents will come after us if we don’t send it in on time.
  2. Every time we make a sale under the perpetual system of accounting, we move the cost of the item sold from the asset account Merchandise Inventory to COGS, mirroring the actual movement of the product from the shelf into the hands (and the car) of the buyer. We recognize revenue as earned (when title passes as we hand over the goods) and the expense as it matches the revenue.

Posting the journal entry updates our ledgers by removing the cost of one sound system:

Inventory
Debit Credit
223,562.50
20,700.00
4,000.00
320.00
1,255.50
Double line 238,687.00 Double line
Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/19/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Inventory Value
A101 Wiring harness 99.00 30 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.00 500 29,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.00 15 1,485.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.50 64 80,352.00
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00 100 11,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.00 150 97,500.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00
Total Inventory Value $ 238,687.00

Although we don’t use Purchases and the related contra accounts under the perpetual method, the revenue accounts are the same.

Gross Method
Periodic Method Perpetual Method
Sales Revenue—gross sales are posted here as a credit Sales Revenue—gross sales are posted here as a credit
Sales Discounts (Contra Account)—sales discounts are posted here as a debit Sales Discounts (Contra Account)—sales discounts are posted here as a debit
Sales Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—sales returns and allowances are posted here as a debit Sales Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—sales returns and allowances are posted here as a debit
Net Method
Periodic Method Perpetual Method
Sales Revenue—net sales are posted here as a credit Sales Revenue—net sales are posted here as a credit
Sales Discounts Forfeited—sales discounts not claimed by the customer are posted here as a credit Sales Discounts Forfeited—sales discounts not claimed by the customer are posted here as a credit
Sales Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—sales returns and allowances are posted here as a debit Sales Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—sales returns and allowances are posted here as a debit

Next, we’ll see how the perpetual method can be used for inventory control.

]]>
Practice: Purchases and Sales under a Perpetual System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-purchases-and-sales-under-a-perpetual-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:26 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-purchases-and-sales-under-a-perpetual-system/
  • Record Purchases under a perpetual system
  • Record sales of inventory under a perpetual system

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Purchases under a Perpetual System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/purchases-under-a-perpetual-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:25 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/purchases-under-a-perpetual-system/ Read more »]]>
  • Record Purchases under a perpetual system

 

In previous sections, we’ve been using the periodic system to record Bryan Wholesale Co. and Geyer, Co. transactions. Let’s continue to use the same companies and record this invoice using a perpetual system for Geyer, Co.:

See the caption for the long description.
See the invoice long description here.
JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Merchandise Inventory 20,700.00
Dec 19       Accounts Payable 20,700.00
Dec 19 To record purchase of XPS-101 from Bryan Whls 200 count

This invoice looks logical and simple, and it is, except we also have to keep a subsidiary ledger listing all the items in stock and the assigned cost. The subsidiary ledger might look something like this:

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/19/20XX
Product ID Description Unit Cost Quantity in Stock Total Inventory Value
A101 Wiring harness 99.00 30 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.00 500 29,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.00 15 1,485.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.50 65 81,607.50
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00 100 11,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.00 150 97,500.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 103.50 200 20,700.00
Total Inventory Value $ 244,262.50

The subsidiary ledger should (MUST) match the GL control account as we make the entry to both ledgers.

 

T account for inventory. On the debit side, there is an entry of 223,562.50 dollars. On the debit side, there is an entry of 20,700 dollars. On the credit side, there is a note stating 'The credit side of this entry went to accounts payable'. There is a debit total of 244,262.50 dollars.

 

The GL account doesn’t give us the details we need. We rely on the subsidiary ledger for that.

Next, we return 40 units and post the journal entry to both ledgers:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 26 Accounts Payable 4,000.00
Dec 26       Merchandise Inventory 4,000.00
Dec 26 To record return on 40 XPS-101 to Bryant C.M 12-3–G

Our inventory list (subsidiary ledger) looks like this:

Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/19/20XX
Product ID Description Unit Cost Quantity in Stock Total Inventory Value
A101 Wiring harness 99.00 30 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.00 500 29,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.00 15 1,485.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.50 65 81,607.50
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00 100 11,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.00 150 97,500.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 104.375 160 16,700.00
Total Inventory Value $ 240,262.50

And matches the GL control account:

T account for inventory. On the debit side, there is an entry of 223,562.50 dollars. On the debit side, there is an entry of 20,700 dollars. On the credit side, there is an entry of 4,000 dollars with a note stating 'the debit went to the accounts payable account'. There is a debit total of 240,262.50 dollars.

You can see how the GL control account would only give you a running total, while the subsidiary ledger gives you the detail by part number, just as the Accounts Receivable subsidiary ledger gives you receivables by customer and the Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger will give you payables (bills) by vendor.

In the Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger, we see that we owe Bryan $16,700 on invoice 1258.

Now let’s see what happens when we pay and take the discount:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 29 Accounts Payable 16,700.00
Dec 29       Merchandise Inventory 320.00
Dec 29       Checking Account 16,380.00
Dec 29 To record payment on Bryan inv. 1258

We (our computer, actually) posts the entry to the ledgers:

Inventory
Debit Credit
223,562.50
20,700.00
4,000.00
320.00
Double line 239,942.50 Double line
Inventory List
Geyer, Co.
12/19/20XX
Product ID Description Cost Quantity in Stock Total Inventory Value
A101 Wiring harness 99.00 30 2,970.00
CAB 500 HQ Speakers 58.00 500 29,000.00
CAB 600 HQ Speakers 99.00 15 1,485.00
MMM 333 GPS enabled sound system 1,255.50 65 81,607.50
Rel 5 HQ Speakers 110.00 100 11,000.00
RFS-212 GPS enabled sound system 650.00 150 97,500.00
XPS-101 GPS enabled sound system 102.375 160 16,380.00
Total Inventory Value $ 239,942.50

Using the net method would be similar; it would just post the net at first, and adjust the cost of merchandise inventory upward if the accounting staff missed the deadline.


Here is a video review of accounting for purchases under a perpetual inventory system:You can view the transcript for “Perpetual Inventory System and How to Journalize Purchase Entries (FA Tutorial #30)” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Cost of Goods Sold: Periodic System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cost-of-goods-sold-periodic-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cost-of-goods-sold-periodic-system/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute the cost of goods sold under a periodic system and create journal entries

 

What we have now learned is that using the periodic inventory system the cost of goods sold (COGS) is computed as follows:

Beginning inventory + (Purchases, net of returns and allowances, and purchase discounts) + freight in − Ending inventory = Cost of goods sold

Which looks like this on an income statement:

Geyer Co.
Income Statement (partial)
For the year ended December 31, 20XX
Sales Revenue, net $2,548,959
Subcategory, Cost of goods sold
  Merchandise inventory, January 1, 20XX $457,897
  Purchases 1,532,444
  Less purchase discounts 20,222
  Less returns and allowances 56,000
  Purchases, net Single Line 1,456,222
Plus Freight in 66,231
  Goods available for sale Single Line$1,980,350
  Less merchandise inventory, December 31, 20XX 238,687
        Cost of goods sold Single Line 1,741,663
Gross profit Single Line$807,296Double Line
Gross profit % 31.67%

After the financial statements have been prepared at the end of the accounting period, as part of the closing process, we zero out the purchase accounts and post the difference to Inventory. If we did our work correctly, it would look like this (all other accounts are omitted for clarity):

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is an inventory chart. There is an ending balance carried over on the debit side of 457,897 dollars. There is a credit entry of 220,009 dollars. There is a debit total of 237,888 dollars. On the right is an income summary. There is a debit entry of 1,745,462 dollars. On the credit side there is a note stating 'Will be closed to capital'. The debit total is represented as a dash.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a purchases chart. There is an ending balance carried over on the debit side of 1,532,444 dollars. There is a credit entry of 1,532,444 dollars. On the right is a purchase returns and allowances chart. There is an ending balance carried over on the credit side of 56,000 dollars. There is a debit entry of 56,000 dollars. The credit total is represented as a dash.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a freight in chart. There is an ending balance carried over on the debit side of 66,231 dollars. There is a credit entry of 66,231 dollars. The debit total is represented as a dash. On the right is a purchase discounts chart. There is an ending balance carried over on the credit side of 20,222 dollars. There is a debit entry of 20,222 dollars. The credit total is represented as a dash.

Notice the final journal entry, and in fact, the only journal entry to Merchandise Inventory is an adjustment to bring beginning inventory to the right ending balance.

In the next module, we’ll delve into the process of determining the dollar value of ending inventory. First, let’s see how the periodic system evolved into the more commonly used perpetual system, and how that system is both similar to and different than the periodic system.


]]>
Introduction to Perpetual Inventory System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-perpetual-inventory-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-perpetual-inventory-system/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Accounting for inventory under the perpetual method

In the past, because of the amount of paperwork involved, only companies that sold merchandise with a high individual unit value, like cars, furniture, and appliances, used perpetual inventory procedure. Today, computerized cash registers, scanners, and accounting software programs automatically keep track of inflows and outflows of each inventory item. Computerization makes it economical for retail stores to use perpetual inventory procedure even for goods of low unit value, like groceries.

Under perpetual inventory procedure, the Merchandise Inventory account provides close control by showing the cost of the goods that are supposed to be on hand at any particular time. Companies debit the Merchandise Inventory account for each purchase and credit it for each sale so the current balance is shown in the account at all times. Firms also maintain detailed unit records showing the quantities of each good type that should be on hand. Company personnel also take an occasional physical inventory by actually counting the units of inventory on hand. Then they compare this physical count with the records showing the units that should be on hand.

Before you dive into the nuances of the perpetual system, here’s a quick summary of the differences between the two methods of tracking inventory and computing COGS:

You can view the transcript for “Perpetual vs Periodic Inventory System (Financial Accounting Tutorial #29)” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Sales under a Periodic System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/sales-under-a-periodic-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/sales-under-a-periodic-system/ Read more »]]>
  • Record sales of inventory under a periodic system

 

See caption for link to long description.
See the invoice long description here.

Recording sales under the periodic system of inventory accounting is significantly easier than recording purchases and tracking goods on hand. To illustrate, let’s go to work for Bryan Wholesale Co. for a few minutes, and recall that when Geyer records an accounts payable, the seller will record a mirror image of that transaction (more or less):

Gross Method of Recording Sales

First of all, this sale is business-to-business, so in most jurisdictions in the U.S., there won’t be a sales or value-added tax (VAT), but you have to know the law for your particular situation. For instance, sales taxes may be based on the shipping destination, and internet sales may have some different rules depending on your physical location.

Also, companies have various ways of recording shipping charges from customers. Some may post the charge as an offset to the expense, as an offset to a payable, or as an income item. Some companies may charge a flat-rate or predetermined amount for “Shipping and Handling” and may be tracking that amount against the actual expenses incurred in order to determine if they are recovering those costs or even making a profit on that activity.

Let’s assume here that Bryan posts shipping charged to customers to a revenue (income) account called Shipping billed to customers. Thus at the end of each month, the cost accountants can compare billings to customers against shipping paid. Shipping paid or freight out is NOT part of cost of goods sold, but rather is considered a selling expense.

The journal entry to record the sale looks like this (remember, we are looking at the seller’s books now):

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 19 Accounts Receivable 20,700.00
Dec 19       Shipping Billed to Customers 700.00
Dec 19       Sales Revenue 20,000.00
Dec 19 To record sale of XPX-101 to Geyer inv. 1258

Geyer returns 40 units on Dec. 26, so Bryan’s accounting staff issue a credit memo and make the following entry:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 26 Sales Returns and Allowances 4,000.00
Dec 26       Accounts Receivable 4,000.00
Dec 26 To record CM –1258 to Geyer

In both cases, the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger is updated, but not inventory, because we don’t do that under the periodic method. The Bryan accounts receivable subsidiary ledger now shows that Geyer owes $16,700, and a call or letter to Geyer would verify that their accounts payable matches if they are using the gross method.

If Geyer pays after the 29th with a check for $16,700, Bryan’s accounts receivable clerk deposits the check, debits Checking Account for $16,700, and credits both the accounts receivable control account and the subsidiary ledger for the same amount showing the invoice has been paid in full.

If Geyer pays during the discount period, the journal entry looks like this:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 29 Checking Account 16,380.00
Dec 29 Sales Discounts 320.00
Dec 29       Accounts Receivable 16,700.00
Dec 29 Geyer payment on inv. 1258 less 2% disc.

Net Method of Recording Sales

Under the net method, sales would be recorded net of the discount and if a customer pays after the discount period expires, the extra revenue is posted to an account called “Sales Discounts Forfeited” or something similar.

Here is a comparative chart of accounts for Sales Revenue (gross method) for the two methods:

Periodic Method Perpetual Method
Sales Revenue—gross sales are posted here as a credit Sales Revenue—gross sales are posted here as a credit
Sales Discounts (Contra Account)—sales discounts are posted here as a debit Sales Discounts (Contra Account)—sales discounts are posted here as a debit
Sales Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—sales returns and allowances are posted here as a debit Sales Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—sales returns and allowances are posted here as a debit

Note that they are the same.

As you’ll see in the following sections, there is only one difference between the two periodic and perpetual systems when it comes to recording sales: under the periodic system, we record the sale only and under the perpetual system, we record both the sale and the cost of goods sold so two entries are made instead of one.


]]>
Practice: Periodic Inventory System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-periodic-inventory-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-periodic-inventory-system/
  • Record purchases under a periodic system
  • Record purchase returns and allowances and purchase discounts under a periodic system
  • Record sales of inventory under a periodic system

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Purchases under a Periodic System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/purchases-under-a-periodic-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:22 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/purchases-under-a-periodic-system/ Read more »]]>
  • Record purchases under a periodic system
  • Record purchase returns and allowances and purchase discounts under a periodic system

 

Companies using periodic inventory don’t update the Merchandise Inventory account when purchases or sales are made. Instead, the company posts purchases of inventory to an expense account called Purchases. The Purchases account is usually grouped with the income statement expense accounts in the chart of accounts.

See caption for link to long description.
See the invoice long description here.

Let’s record this invoice using a periodic system:

Before we record the invoice though, let’s take a closer look at this formula:

[latex]\text{Beginning inventory}+\text{Purchases}-\text{Ending inventory}=\text{Cost of goods sold}[/latex]

We can expand it to look like this:

[latex]\text{Beginning inventory}+\text{Purchases}+\text{freight in}-\text{Ending inventory}=\text{Cost of goods sold}[/latex]

Shipping on Inventory Purchases (Freight In)

We learned that shipping terms tell you who is responsible for paying for shipping. Free on board (FOB) destination means the seller is responsible for paying shipping and the buyer would not need to pay or record anything for shipping. Free on board (FOB) shipping point means the buyer is responsible for shipping and must pay and record for shipping.

Buyers must record shipping charges as transportation in (or freight in) when the goods were shipped FOB shipping point and they have received title to the merchandise.

The general rule is that all the costs we incur to get the product on the shelf and ready to sell are product costs. The freight we pay to get the sound systems into our shop is part of the cost of the inventory. In other words, instead of the unit cost being $100, it is actually $103.50 (total cost, including freight, of $20,700 divided by 200 units).

The entry is as you might expect it to be:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Purchases 20,000.00
Dec 19 Freight in 700.00
Dec 19       Accounts Payable 20,700.00
Dec 19 To record purchase of XPS-101 from Bryan Whls 200 count

Notice that we did not post the purchases to the inventory account, which is a major difference between this periodic system and the perpetual system. The perpetual system is what we will be doing in the next unit as we study the perpetual system.

Also, we are going to make some adjustments in the next section for returns, allowances, and discounts; but first, let’s check in on recording purchases.


Purchase Adjustments under a Periodic System

Let’s make one more adjustment to our formula to account for three common events:

  1. Inventory we return in exchange for a credit to our account with the vendor (or a refund).
  2. Inventory that is damaged or otherwise unusable and not worth returning for which we get an allowance (reduction in the amount we owe).
  3. Discounts we take for prompt payment (e.g., 2% if we pay within 10 days).

Beginning inventory + (Purchases, net of returns and allowances, and purchase discounts) + freight in − Ending inventory = Cost of goods sold

The account called Purchases is only used with the periodic inventory system. It is a temporary account used in the periodic inventory system to record the purchases of merchandise for resale. This account reports the gross amount of purchases of merchandise.

Net purchases are the amount of gross purchases minus purchase returns, purchase allowances, and purchase discounts. While the Purchases Accounts are normally classified as temporary expense accounts, they are actually hybrid accounts. The purchase accounts are used along with freight in, and the beginning and ending inventory to determine the cost of goods sold (COGS).

Before we dive into the COGS details for the periodic system, begin to familiarize yourself with this chart. This is a quick way to compare the differences between how the two methods record the details involved with inventory.

Comparative chart of accounts for Cost of Goods Sold (also called Cost of Sales)
Periodic Method Perpetual Method
Merchandise Inventory—only one entry made at the end of the period Merchandise Inventory—purchases, purchase discounts, returns and allowances, and freight in are all posted here, and every time a sale is made, this account is updated.
Cost of Goods Sold—all the other accounts listed below are closed to this one at the end of the period including the adjustment to Merchandise inventory COGS—every time a sale is made, this account is updated (with a debit entry)
Purchases—purchases of inventory are posted here as a debit Purchases—not used
Purchase Discounts (Contra Account)—purchase discounts are posted here as a credit Purchase Discounts (Contra Account)—not used
Purchase Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—purchase returns and allowances are posted here as a credit Purchase Returns and Allowances (Contra Account)—not used
Freight in—shipping on inventory purchases are posted here as a debit Freight in—not used

Now, let’s go back to our invoice:

See the invoice long description here.

In the accounting department, you have matched up the receiving documents sent with this invoice and it is now ready to be paid.

Gross Method of Recording Accounts Payable

For review, here is the journal entry the accounts payable department made based on the invoice and the shipping documents:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Purchases 20,000.00
Dec 19 Freight in 700.00
Dec 19       Accounts Payable 20,700.00
Dec 19 To record purchase of XPS-101 from Bryan Whls 200 count

First, let’s assume one whole case was returned for some reason on December 26. So 40 units went back to Bryan and the accounting department received a credit memo for $4,000. They also paid shipping of some amount that will be posted to a shipping expense account that is not part of COGS.

Bryan issues us a “Credit Memo” because they debited accounts receivable when they shipped the product to us, so when they get it back, they reduce their receivable by crediting our account. We are going to debit accounts payable and reduce inventory:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 26 Accounts Payable 4,000.00
Dec 26       Inventory 4,000.00
Dec 26 To record return on 40 XPS-101 to Bryan C.M 12-3–G

We are also going to update two subsidiary ledgers: the Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger that showed we owed Bryan $20,700 will now show we owe $16,700 and the inventory subsidiary ledger that lists all our items and the corresponding costs will now show 160 units of XPS-101 at $104.375 each ($16,700 divided by 160).

An allowance would be the same entry. The basic difference between a return and an allowance is that we usually don’t return the goods if they are damaged or unsatisfactory in some way. The vendor issues a Credit Memo anyway and we remove the items from inventory and dispose of them.

Let’s assume then that you, in the accounting department, pay the invoice on January 10:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Jan 10 Accounts Payable 16,700.00
Jan 10       Checking Account 16,700.00
Jan 10 Payment on Bryan account inv. 1258

Because the terms were 2/10, n 30, and the invoice was dated December 19, the discount for prompt payment (a.k.a. cash discount) expired at the close of business on the 29th. How much was the discount not taken?

[latex]\$16,000 \times 0.02 = \$320.00[/latex]

Remember, the discount does not apply to shipping costs that are passed through to the buyer.

If total purchases for the year were $1,532,444 and the company missed the discount window every time, what would be the effect on the bottom line of the company (how much would the company end up paying out in missed discounts)?

[latex]\$1,532,444 \times 0.02 = \$30,648.88[/latex]

Let’s back up for a minute then and assume you paid the invoice on the 29th. What would the journal entry look like?

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 29 Accounts Payable 16,700.00
Dec 29 Purchase Discounts 320.00
Dec 29       Checking Account 16,380.00
Dec 29 Payment on Bryan account inv. 1258

The entry extinguishes the account payable for that invoice and the check includes $700 for shipping plus the invoice minus the credit memo minus the 2% discount on the adjusted balance of $16,000. Check the calculations above and make sure the journal entry is correct.

This is called the gross method of recording accounts payable.

There is another way to do it: the net method.

Net Method of Recording Accounts Payable

Under the net method, the payable net of the discount ($20,000 − $320 = $19,600) would have been recorded like this:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20XX
Dec 19 Purchases 19,600.00
Dec 19 Freight in 700.00
Dec 19       Accounts Payable 20,300.00
Dec 19 To record purchase of XPS-101 from Bryan Whls 200 count, net of 2% discount

The unit cost would then be net of the discount but would include freight, so $101.50 [latex]\left(\dfrac{\$20,300}{200\text{ units}}=\$101.50\right)[/latex].

The return of 40 units on Dec. 30th would be recorded like this, even though the credit memo was for $4,000 [latex]\left(\$4,000 \times 0.02\text{ discount}= \$80.00 : \$4,000 - \$80 = \$3,920\right)[/latex]:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 30 Accounts Payable 3,920.00
Dec 30       Inventory 3,920.00
Dec 30 To record return on 40 XPS-101 to Bryan C.M 12-3–G, net of 2% discount allowed

And the prompt payment on Dec. 29th would look like this [latex]\left(\$19,600 - \$3,920 + \$700 = \$16,380\right)[/latex]:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 29 Accounts Payable 16,380.00
Dec 29       Checking Account 16,380.00
Dec 29 Payment on Bryan account inv. 1258

Because we recorded the original invoice net of the discount under the assumption that we always take the discount, we don’t need the Purchase Discount account. Here is what the subsidiary ledger (and the GL) would show us under this net method:

Invoice dated 12/19 20,000.00
Less discount (400.00)Single line
Invoice net of discount 19,600.00
Credit memo dated 12/26 (4,000.00)
Adjusted for discount 80.00Single line
Balance due after adjustments 15,680.00
Plus freight due on original order 700.00Single line
Total due 16,380.00Double line

This example may look unreasonably complicated, but there is a hidden benefit. Let’s follow this through with one more scenario though—paying after the cash discount has expired:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Jan 10 Accounts Payable 16,700.00
Jan 10 Discounts Lost 320.00
Jan 10       Checking Account 16,380.00
Jan 10 Payment on Bryan account inv. 1258, after disc expired

The net method allows you to track discounts lost, which then gives you a direct read on how much profit you are losing to what is essentially a finance charge.

Next, let’s tackle something a bit easier—recording sales.


]]>
Introduction to Periodic Inventory System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-periodic-inventory-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-periodic-inventory-system/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Account for inventory using the periodic method

An employee scanning an inventory label.

The term “inventory” can refer to the physical goods on hand in the store or it can refer to the Merchandise Inventory account, which is the financial representation of the physical goods on hand. Ideally, these two things should be the same. The accounting records should, at any point in time, accurately reflect the cost of the physical goods on hand.

In order for that to happen, we have to be constantly adjusting inventory. Before the widespread use of computers, updating inventory for every item sold wasn’t feasible for a lot of businesses. Every time an item is sold, they would have to reduce inventory in their accounting records by the cost of that item. Imagine the raft of accountants at Home Depot trying to make two journal entries every time a sale was made: one to record the sale (debit checking account, credit sales revenue) and the other to record the cost of goods sold (debit cost of goods sold, credit merchandise inventory). Every time someone bought an electrical box, a couple of bolts, a saw, or a stick of lumber, an accountant would have to make those two entries.

That system of updating merchandise inventory for every transaction, in and out, is called the perpetual system. Inventory is perpetually updated. Many, if not most, companies use this system now. When you go to the grocery store and scan a box of cereal or a pound of coffee, the computer does in fact record both the sale of the item and the movement of inventory to cost of goods sold. Presumably (if the system is functioning properly and no one is stealing inventory) the accounting records at any moment in time will accurately reflect the stock in hand. Assume at the beginning of the day, there were 10 bags of Starbucks Kona coffee on the shelf and none in the stock room and the store bought those bags for $9 each. Customers buy eight bags. At the end of the day, if you check the accounting records, the inventory subsidiary ledger will show two bags at $9 each (cost) for a total of $18. A quick check of the shelf also would reveal two bags of coffee (but not the cost—that’s just in the accounting records). Computers are now doing all those calculations we couldn’t possibly do before, and they are doing them quickly and accurately.

The alternative way of updating inventory, and therefore cost of goods sold, is called the periodic method. You’ve used this method before, with the supplies account, so let’s review.

Let’s say you start the month with $250 in the supplies account, based on last month’s ending balance, which was based on a count of the supplies on hand and some assignment of cost to those supplies. Let’s say it was a toner cartridge that cost $200, and five reams of paper that cost $10 each. During the month, the company bought two more toner cartridges at $200 each, and a case of paper (10 reams) for $110.

Toner cartridges Reams of paper Total cost
Beginning supplies 1 @ $200 ea = $200 5 @ $10 ea = $50 $250
Purchased 2 @ $200 ea = $400 10 @ $11 ea = $110 $510
Total supplies available for use during the month 3 cartridges that cost $600 total 15 reams of paper that cost $160 total $760

Our ledger accounts would look like this:

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a supplies chart. On the debit side, there's a balance carried forward of 250 dollars. There is a debit entry of 510 dollars. There is no ending balance. On the right side is a Accounts Payable chart. There's a credit entry of 510 dollars.

During the month, people used up (expended) supplies but we didn’t bother accounting for each piece of paper, or even each toner cartridge. In a big business, this account would have so many supplies it would be like accounting for each sip of water an employee took from the fountain. Too much cost for not much benefit.

Instead, we periodically count the ending supplies “inventory,” and then we back into the cost of supplies used. What we started with (beginning inventory) plus purchases gives us what we would have on hand if we didn’t use any. Subtract what’s left at the end of the period, and we know what was used up (some of it may have been stolen or otherwise used for personal, non-business purposes, but without some other form of internal control, we have no way of knowing that).

So, back to our supplies example. Assume at the end of the month, there is one toner cartridge left and three reams of paper. Let’s also assume we figure those three reams were the $11 ones, not the $10 ones (assuming we use the oldest reams of paper first, which may or may not be the case):

Toner cartridges Reams of paper Total cost
(a) Beginning supplies 1 @ $200 ea = $200 5 @ $10 ea = $50 $250
(b) Purchased 2 @ $200 ea = $400 10 @ $11 ea = $110 $510
(a + b) Total supplies available for use during the month 3 cartridges that cost $600 total 15 reams of paper that cost $160 total $760
(c) Supplies at the end of the month 1 @ $200 ea = $200 3 @ $11 ea = $33 $233
(a + b – c) Supplies used up 2 @ $200 ea = $400 5 @ $10 ea = $50
7 @ $11 ea = $77
$527

Our ledger accounts would look like this:

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a supplies chart. On the debit side, there's a balance carried forward of 250 dollars. There is a debit entry of 510 dollars. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 527 dollars. This value is highlighted in yellow. There is an ending balance of 233 dollars on the debit side. This value is highlighted in green. On the right side is a Accounts Payable chart. There's a credit entry of 510 dollars.

A T account for supplies expense. On the debit side, there's a balance carried forward of 0 dollars. On the debit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 527 dollars. This value is highlighted in yellow. There is no ending balance.

This example is the periodic method of accounting. We adjust the asset account to match reality, and the difference is what we used up (or sold, in the case of merchandise inventory). Here, we used it for supplies, but for years and years, most companies used this same method to calculate cost of goods sold.

Still, merchandising companies selling low unit value merchandise (such as nuts and bolts, nails, Christmas cards, or pencils) that have not computerized their inventory systems often find the extra costs of record-keeping under perpetual inventory procedure more than outweighs the benefits. These merchandising companies often use the periodic inventory procedure. We’re going to study the periodic inventory procedure first because it’s simpler to understand. Once you get the hang of the periodic system, you just need to make some mental adjustments and think more like a computer in order to grasp the perpetual system.

]]>
Periodic Inventory System Compared to Perpetual https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/periodic-inventory-system-compared-to-perpetual/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/periodic-inventory-system-compared-to-perpetual/ Read more »]]>
  • Compare and contrast periodic and perpetual inventory systems

One of the challenges of the periodic inventory method is making appropriate updates to the general ledger (GL). With a computerized perpetual inventory system, the GL is updated automatically, but the periodic system doesn’t allow that.

Rather than debiting Inventory, a company using periodic inventory debits a temporary account called Purchases. Any adjustments related to these purchases of goods will later be credited to a GL contra account such as Purchases Discounts or Purchases Returns and Allowances. When the balances of these three purchases accounts (Purchases, Purchase Discounts, and Purchase Returns and Allowances) are combined, the resulting amount is known as net purchases.

When goods are sold under the periodic inventory system, there is no entry to credit the Inventory account or to debit the account Cost of Goods Sold. Hence, the Inventory account contains only the ending balance from the previous year. As a result, the company must compute an inventory amount at the end of each accounting period in order to report the amount of its ending inventory for its balance sheet and the cost of goods sold for its income statement.

Periodic Inventory System

Shipping boxes at a harbor.In a periodic system, the Inventory account:

  • Has only the ending balance from the previous accounting year.
  • Excludes the cost of purchases, purchases returns and allowances, etc. since these are recorded in accounts such as Purchases, Purchases Returns and Allowances, Purchases Discounts, etc.
  • Must be adjusted at the end of the accounting year in order to report the costs actually in inventory.
  • Requires a physical inventory at least once per year and estimates within the year.
  • The periodic inventory system requires a calculation to determine the cost of goods sold.

Perpetual Inventory System

In a perpetual system, the Inventory account:

  • Is debited whenever there is a purchase of goods (there is no Purchases account).
  • Is credited for the cost of the items sold (and the account Cost of Goods Sold is debited).
  • Has a continuously or perpetually changing balance because of the above entries.
  • Requires a physical inventory to correct any errors in the Inventory account.
  • The cost of goods sold is readily available in the account Cost of Goods Sold.

Computing the Inventory under the Periodic Inventory Method

At the end of an accounting year, the company’s ending inventory is normally computed based on a physical count of its inventory items. Inventory amounts for the monthly and quarterly financial statements are usually estimates.

Under the periodic inventory system, the cost of goods sold is computed as demonstrated with this example of the Geyer Co.:

Geyer Co.
Income Statement (partial)
For the year ended December 31, 20XX
Sales Revenue, net $2,548,959
Subcategory, Cost of goods sold
  Merchandise inventory, January 1, 20XX $457,897
  Purchases, net 1,456,222
  Freight in 66,231Single Line
  Goods available for sale $1,980,350
  Less merchandise inventory, December 31, 20XX 238,687Single Line
  Cost of goods sold 1,741,663Single Line
Gross profit $807,296Double Line
Gross profit % 31.67%

The following formula is worth committing to memory:

[latex]\text{Beginning inventory}+\text{Purchases}-\text{Ending inventory}=\text{Cost of goods sold}[/latex]

Compare the above calculation to one from the same company if it used the perpetual system where all transactions run through only two accounts: Merchandise Inventory and Cost of Goods Sold:

Geyer Co.
Income Statement (partial)
For the year ended December 31, 20XX
Sales Revenue, net $2,548,959
Costs of goods sold 1,741,663
Gross profit Single Line$807,296Double Line
Gross profit % 31.67%

Companies using the periodic inventory system in their GL accounts often have sophisticated inventory systems outside of the GL for tracking the items they purchase, produce, sell, and have on hand.

Periodic and Perpetual Inventory Systems

  • The periodic inventory system uses an occasional physical count to measure the level of inventory and the cost of goods sold (COGS).
  • The perpetual system keeps track of inventory balances continuously, with updates made automatically whenever a product is received or sold.

]]>
Gross Profit https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/gross-profit/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/gross-profit/ Read more »]]>
  • Define gross profit and gross profit percentage

 

Gross profit is also called gross margin and sometimes profit margin. Just for the sake of consistency, we’ll call it gross profit. It’s not an account; it’s a calculation that appears on the income statement:

[latex]\text{Sales Revenue}-\text{Cost of Goods Sold}=\text{Gross Profit}[/latex]

We’ll talk about the rest of the multiple-step income statement at the end of Module 8. For now, we can use our earlier example of baseball bats to illustrate this simple calculation.

Sales Revenue $ 15
Cost of Goods Sold $ 10
Gross Profit $  5

And the gross profit percent is simple [latex]\dfrac{\text{Gross Profit}}{\text{Sales Revenue}}[/latex].

In this case, [latex]\dfrac{5}{15}[/latex], which is [latex]\dfrac{1}{3}[/latex], or .3333, or 33.33%.

Here are just the top three lines from Home Depot, Inc.’s annual report for 2019:

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF EARNINGS
in millions, except per share data Fiscal 2019 Fiscal 2018 Fiscal 2017
Net sales $     110,225 $     108,203 $     100,904
Cost of sales 72,653 71,043 66,548
          Gross Profit Single line
37,572
Double line
Single line
37,160
Double line
Single line
34,356
Double line

Note that the gross profit percent for each year is as follows:

Home Depot Gross Profit %
2019 2018 2017
34.09% 34.34% 34.05%

It’s pretty consistent and tells you that for every dollar in sales the company makes, on average, it clears about $0.34 (34 cents) that then goes to pay all the other costs, like overhead on the building, and taxes, and employee wages.

Note that for the 2019 fiscal year (that actually ended on February 2, 2020—but we’ll discuss that in a later module) the revenues were over $110 billion. ($110,225,000,000 which has been rounded to the nearest million).

Next, we’ll look more closely at the differences and similarities between the periodic system of recording cost of goods sold and the perpetual method.


]]>
Merchandisers versus Service Enterprises https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/merchandisers-versus-service-enterprises/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/merchandisers-versus-service-enterprises/ Read more »]]>
  • Compare and contrast merchandising enterprises and service providers

If you are an accountant working with two companies—one a pure service business, like a consulting firm, and the other a pure merchandising business, like a department store—you’ll notice one glaring difference right away on the balance sheet: inventory. Inventory is goods held for sale during the ordinary course of business. Merchandising businesses work with inventory whereas service companies have no inventory.

Home Depot

Look at this partial (assets only) balance sheet from Home Depot. Merchandise inventories are listed as a current asset because they will turn into cash within a short period of time, and they also represent one of the largest categories of assets ($14.531 billion), second only to the investment in buildings, equipment, and land ($22.77 billion).

Other current assets1,040890

THE HOME DEPOT INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
in millions, except per share data February 2, 2020 February 3, 2019
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     2,133 $     1,778
     Receivables, net 2,106 1,936
     Merchandise inventories 14,531 13,925
          Total current assets Single line
19,810Double line
Single line
18,529Double line
Net property and equipment 22,770 22,375
Operating lease right-of-use assets 5,595
Goodwill 2,254 2,252
Other Assets 807 847
Total assets Single line
$     51,236
Double line
Single line
$     44,003
Double line

Home Depot is a good example of a retail merchandising business. It’s also a corporation and publicly traded, which means we can easily obtain the financial statements. These statements are prepared according to GAAP and audited (by KPMG, LLP). You can look at the full annual report and SEC Form 10-K.

Manufacturing companies have inventory as well; in fact, they have three major categories of inventory: raw materials, work-in-process, and finished goods. Finished goods are sold to distributors (wholesale) and end up on the shelf of your local merchandising company or in the shopping cart of your favorite online retailer. Accounting for manufacturing inventories, because they are moving and changing as they go through the process, is much more complicated than accounting for merchandising inventory, so we’ll stick with the basics for now: buying and selling inventory that is ready for the end user.

The following video provides an overview of the difference between merchandising and service companies and their respective accounting needs.You can view the transcript for “Introduction to Merchandise Inventory (Financial Accounting Tutorial #28)” here (opens in new window).

A pile of folded up blue jean pants.Next, let’s take a bit of a closer look at how we account for merchandise inventory.

Inventory

On a used car lot, cars are the inventory. Clothing is the inventory in a clothing store. For a real estate developer, inventory is homes waiting to be sold.

At the clothing store, the building would not be considered inventory, even if the owner of the store decided to sell it for some reason (say the owner is selling the entire business or moving to a new location). In addition, any uniform clothing that staff are required to wear would be an asset, not inventory. Only items held for sale during the ordinary course of business are considered inventory.

Let’s take a moment to talk about how inventory is purchased.

Geyer

Let’s say you work as an accountant for a company called Geyer that installs upgraded, vocal interface GPS/Sirius/Mobile–enabled sound systems in just about any vehicle. Shanice, the boss, is running a web promotion for the new Digital XPS-101 and expects to sell about 200 of them. She asks the company’s purchasing agent, Malik, to email Bryan Wholesale, Co., her normal supplier, and order 200 to have on hand. Geyer has a long-standing account with Bryan, so all Malik needs to do is to give the salesperson at Bryan a P.O. (purchase order) number and they will process the order, ship it, and send an invoice. This is what happens:

  • You, working in the accounting department, prepare the P.O. and send it to Malik, who in turn emails the sales department at Bryan.
  • Malik receives an acknowledgment email and forwards it to you in the accounting department, and a few days later the UPS truck delivers five boxes from Bryan.
  • The boxes are opened and there is a packing slip in each one indicating there are 40 boxed sound systems in each larger box.
  • Each box is counted and verification made on each packing slip with Malik’s signature (or your company may have a separate receiving dock receipt).
  • Malik sends the packing slip to you in accounting so you know the company received everything on the invoice that Bryan Wholesale sent to them.
  • Malik stacks the 200 smaller boxes on shelves in the back room so they are ready for the installers and then he steps back and admires his work. What is stacked on the shelves is considered unsold inventory. The shelves are full of assets that will soon turn into cash that will pay the bills and, hopefully, make the company a profit.

The invoice your company received from Bryan contains details of a sale, noting things like the number of units sold, unit price, total price billed, terms of sale, and manner of shipment. As the purchasing agent, Malik may not actually see the invoice, but if he did, it would look something like this:

See caption for link to long description.
See the invoice long description here.

For you, the accountant, the invoice has a lot of important data:

  • The vendor (a vendor sells things to your company and is associated then with accounts payable, whereas a customer buys things from your company).
  • The invoice number (which is an internal number for the vendor) and the date (which is when the payment clock starts ticking, officially).
  • Your company (and the shipping address, which might be different if Geyer has several locations but one central billing office).
  • Terms of the sale, including:
    • Payment Terms: tells you when the invoice is due and if a discount is offered for early payment
    • Shipping Terms: tells you when the title of the goods passes to the buyer.

Payment Terms

In some industries, credit terms include a cash discount to encourage early payment of an amount due. A cash discount is a deduction from the invoice price that can be taken only if the invoice is paid within a specified time. Sellers call a cash discount a sales discount and buyers call it a purchase discount.

In the case above, the terms 2/10, net 30 means a buyer who pays within 10 days following the invoice date may deduct a discount of 2% of the invoice price. The term 2/10 looks like a fraction, but it’s not. It’s just shorthand. If payment is not made within the discount period, the entire invoice price is due 30 days from the invoice date (net 30 or n 30).

The invoice was dated December 19, so the clock started ticking on the 20th and the 2% discount window closed at the end of business on the 29th (10 days). You could just subtract 19 from 31 to get that date. If the invoice had been dated December 27, the 10-day window would have closed on January 6. (See if you can duplicate that math.)

Companies base discounts on the invoice price of goods. If merchandise is later returned, the returned amount must be deducted from the invoice price before calculating discounts. For example, if the invoice price of goods purchased was $20,000 and the company returned $2,000 of the goods, then the seller calculates the 2% discount on $18,000 ($20,000 original − $2,000 return).

Notice the discount does not apply to shipping charges. To understand why, we need to understand how shipping charges are assessed, so we look at the shipping terms.

Shipping Terms

Shipping terms are used to show who is responsible for paying for shipping and when the title of the goods passes from seller to buyer.

FOB shipping point means “free on board at shipping point.” This is an old-fashioned term that means the seller is free of ownership once the shipping agent takes possession of the goods on behalf of the buyer. In the example above, UPS is an agent of Geyer. When the crew at Bryan Wholesale, Co. put the merchandise into big boxes, it still belonged to Bryan. But, when the UPS driver put the boxes into the truck and shut the door, the XPS-101s became the property of the buyer, Geyer. At that point, Bryan recognized a sale, and, theoretically, Geyer recognized a purchase; however, you, in the accounting department at Geyer, won’t actually record the purchase until the invoice arrives and the goods are accounted for. Usually, since the buyer takes legal title at the shipping point, the buyer incurs all transportation costs after the merchandise has been loaded on a railroad car or truck at the point of shipment. Thus, the buyer is responsible for ultimately paying the freight charges.

An outside view of the US Post Office.

UPS and other shippers, however, are usually reluctant to ship items across the country without being paid upfront, so the seller pays the shipper in advance, fronting the money from the buyer. That’s why shipping gets added to the invoice. It’s not part of the sale price—it’s reimbursement to the seller for shipping costs paid on behalf of the buyer. UPS would rather have the seller on the hook to collect the shipping than to get goods to the buyer and have the buyer refuse to pay.

FOB destination means “free on board at destination.” That means the seller holds legal title to the goods until they reach their destination. This isn’t as common as FOB shipping point. Usually, under this scenario, the seller is ultimately responsible for paying the freight charges because the seller still owns the goods all the way to the receiving dock.

All of these concepts are important to know as we calculate the costs of inventory, which we will do in the next section. But first, check your understanding of the definition of inventory.

]]>
Cost of Goods Sold https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cost-of-goods-sold/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cost-of-goods-sold/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe cost of goods sold in relation to the matching principle

Remember, under accrual basis accounting, we recognize revenue as it is earned and expenses as they are incurred in order to match those expenses with the revenue.

It means when we buy inventory, and it is sitting on the lot, lying on the shelf, or hanging on a rack, it is not an expense.

Again, inventory is not recorded as an expense when we buy it from the wholesaler or distributor. It is an asset: something we own that will produce future revenue.

Let’s say Chan Ming owns a sporting goods store. He buys 10 baseball bats from his supplier, AshBats, Inc. at $10 per bat. He just spent $100 on inventory (probably on account, so he now owes AshBats $100). He places three bats on display right inside the front door in a nice rack with some other wooden and aluminum bats, and he puts the other seven in the back storage area.

We won’t write the journal entry for this transaction. Instead, as the sporting good store’s accountants, we’ll just use T accounts to describe the entry:

Inventory
Debit Credit
100
Accounts Payable
Debit Credit
100

Next, let’s record the sale of a bat to a customer for $15 using a debit card, described below with T accounts in order to save space. The only balance included is inventory because we don’t have room or time to put all the other data into those accounts.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a checking account. There is a debit entry of 15 dollars labeled (a). On the right is an inventory chart. On the debit side, there's a balance carried forward of 100 dollars. There is a credit entry labeled (b) of 10 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 10 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a sales revenue chart. There is a credit entry of 15 dollars, labeled (a). On the right is a cost of goods sold chart. There is a debit entry of 10 dollars, labeled (b).

The sale increased the businesses checking account by $15, so we debited checking and credited Sales Revenue (a).

In addition, one $10 bat left the store in the hands of a happy customer, so inventory decreased by $10 and we recorded a corresponding expense that offsets the $15 revenue (b).

Under the matching principle, we record the expense when we recognize the revenue from the bats. This is one of the most direct examples of the matching principles you will ever use.

If we look at the physical inventory right after that sale, there are 9 bats left that cost $10 each, so the $90 in the accounting records for Inventory is spot on. In addition, we recorded an expense called Cost of Goods Sold that represents the one bat sold, and offsets the $15 in revenue, showing us we made a profit of $5 on that one bat. Of course, that’s not really our profit because we still have to pay rent on the store, insurance, our employees’ wages, and other expenses. But, for this one transaction, before any other deductions, we have a perfectly matched revenue and expense picture.

Total Opening inventory is divided in to Sold Inventory and Unsold Inventory. Sold inventory = cost minus income statement. Unsold inventory equals cost minus balance sheet.

How would this account have looked if we recorded the $100 purchase of bats as an expense? Fifteen dollars in revenue against $100 expense? That entry wouldn’t have the most useful information because we will have 9 bats to sell. Thus, accrual basis accounting includes inventory and cost of goods sold. That is the major difference between accounting for merchandising (and manufacturing) and service businesses.

Next, we’ll take a closer look at the difference between the sales price and the cost of goods sold., But first, check your understanding of the concept of cost of goods sold.

]]>
Introduction to Merchandising Business https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-merchandising-business/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:18 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-merchandising-business/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Identify issues unique to merchandising companies

Business can be broken down into three major categories: merchandising, service, and manufacturing. So far, we’ve focused on service businesses because they are, in most cases, the easiest to understand. A person or group performs a service, such as accounting, and gets paid. Manufacturing, on the other hand, can be a lot more complex. A manufacturing company buys raw materials and converts them into something else.

For instance, a company that buys blanks of ash, maple, and hickory from a lumberyard and turns the blanks, called “billets,” on a lathe to create a baseball bat is a manufacturing business. The lumberyard is also a manufacturing operation. It buys logs, strips them of the bark, and saws them into usable dimensions. Even with advances in direct marketing in the past 20 years, it’s still not likely that a manufacturer will also sell the item to the “end user.” Most likely, the manufacturer will brand the item by burning “Louisville Slugger” into the wood, for example, and load a massive amount of the product onto a rail car to deliver to a wholesale operation. That wholesaler will then deliver the bats in smaller batches to retailers like Walmart, Big5, and Amazon. These distributors act as intermediate merchandising operations because the wholesale business sells to a retail merchandiser, which then sells to the general public.

A flow chart from supplier to manufacturer, to distributor, to retailer, to customer.

There often isn’t a clear line between the three categories. For instance, is McDonald’s a manufacturer of burgers, or is it a merchandising company, or does it provide a service? You could argue for all three.

In this section, we’ll focus on what is probably most familiar to you—retail merchandising operations—and we’ll cover the three accounting issues that differentiate merchandising from service providers: inventory, cost of goods sold, and gross profit.

]]>
Why It Matters: Merchandising Operations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-merchandising-operations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:17 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-merchandising-operations/ Read more »]]> Why learn about purchases and sales of merchandise?

A supermarket shelf.

Imagine you decide to follow your passion and open a store that sells (and installs) modern voice-recognition sound systems and navigational hardware and software in cars for people who want an upgrade or maybe have an older car with outdated (or no) such software and hardware.

If all you were doing was the installation, you would just be providing a service, but since you are also recommending and providing the actual hardware, you’ll need to have some stock on hand (people don’t like to wait for you to order the parts you need).

What are the issues you will have to deal with? How much inventory should you order? How do you pay for them? How do you establish the price of the item? Will you charge separately for the service component of the sale? Where will you store your inventory and how many will you keep on hand? And what are the accounting issues you will have to understand? What accounts do you debit and credit? How do you account for discounts? How do you account for items that get returned to you? How will you account for items you return to your supplier?

We’ve been analyzing a service business up until this point to be able to tackle these issues and more with regard to inventory once we have the basics down. Now, you are ready.

In this module, you’ll learn how to match the cost of items companies buy for resale to the revenues they generate. You’ll learn exactly what inventory is, and isn’t, and you’ll learn how accountants translate the purchase of products held as stock in trade from an asset to an expense.

]]>
Discussion: Maximizing Revenue https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-maximizing-revenue/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-maximizing-revenue/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Maximizing Revenue link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Manilow Aging Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-manilow-aging-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-manilow-aging-analysis/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Manilow Aging Analysis

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting It Together: Receivables and Revenue https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-receivables-and-revenue/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:15 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-receivables-and-revenue/ Read more »]]> Revenues are one of the most important drivers of any business—maybe the most important. A company could have the greatest product in the world, but if the sales force isn’t selling that product, the company can’t produce it. Without revenues, a company won’t be able to attract investors, pay suppliers or employees, build factories, or even market the product.

A businesswoman on her ipad.In addition, especially for business-to-business companies that take a product from idea to production to distribution to the consumer, being able to transact business without waiting for cash to change hands is extremely important in today’s fast-paced world.

We have revenue recognition rules in accounting that give us guidance on how to apply our accrual concepts to actual transactions, and we have rules and guidelines for recognizing accounts receivable that include how to account for uncollectible accounts.

But, as accountants, our responsibilities go far beyond just recording and reporting. We help manage cash flow by tracking and identifying delinquent accounts, helping to factor receivables, and facilitating transactions through notes and other financing arrangements (such as leases).

Finally, in addition to just tracking the numbers in and out of the journals and ledgers, we are the repository of all the detailed information that goes into the notes that accompany the financial statements. Our responsibility is large, and that is why accountants can be such a valuable member of any business team.

]]>
Financial Statement Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-presentation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:14 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statement-presentation/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate receivables as current and noncurrent assets

 

You should classify a note receivable in the balance sheet as a current asset if it is due within 12 months or as non-current (i.e., long-term) if it is due in more than 12 months.

Here is an excerpt from the balance sheet (here called the statement of Financial Position) of Caterpillar, Inc. (Annual Report for 2019 Download PDF page 54):

Statement 3 – Caterpillar, Inc.
Consolidated Financial Position at December 31,
(dollars in millions)
Description 2019 2018
Subcategory, Assets
Current Assets
Cash and Short Term Investments $8,284 $7,857
Receivables – Trade and other 8,568 8,802
Receivables – Finance 9,336 8,650
Prepaid expenses and other current assets 1,739 1,765
Inventories 11,266 11,529
Total Current Assets Single Line39,193 Single Line38,603
Property, Plant and Equipment, net 12,904 13,574
Long-term receivables – trade and other 1,193 1,161
Long-term receivables – finance 12,651 13,286
Noncurrent deferred and refundable income taxes 1,411 1,439
Intangible assets 1,565 1,897
Goodwill 6,196 6,217
Other assets 3,340 2,332
Single Line$78,453Double Line Single Line$78,509Double Line

 

Caterpillar separates receivables into both current and long-term, depending on when they are going to be collected, and also into trade receivables and finance receivables, since the company offers dealers financing.

The term trade receivables refers to any receivable generated by selling a product or providing a service to a customer. For Caterpillar, Inc., according to the notes, trade receivables refers to “any receivable generated by selling a product or providing a service to a customer.”

A non-trade receivable would arise when someone owes the company money not related to providing a service or selling a product. For example, the company loans an employee money for a travel advance or a company borrows money from another company.

As you will see in the next section, the notes that accompany the financial statements include details in addition to the numbers on the balance sheet and income statement.

]]>
Disclosures https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:14 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/disclosures/ Read more »]]>
  • Recognize financial statement disclosures related to receivables

 

In addition to the numbers on the income statement and the balance sheet, companies are required to disclose details in the notes that follow the financial statements, including things like:

  • Contracts with customers
  • Revenue recognized from contracts with customers
  • Disaggregated revenue into categories that depict how the nature, amount, timing, and uncertainty of revenue and cash flows are affected by economic factors
  • Contract balances for opening and closing balances of receivables, contract assets, and contract liabilities
  • Method(s) used to recognize revenue for performance obligations satisfied over time
  • Significant judgments, and changes in judgments, in applying the guidance
  • The timing of satisfying performance obligations
  • Determining the transaction price and allocating amounts to performance obligations
  • Any assets recognized from the costs to obtain or fulfill a contract with a customer

Below is a portion of footnote 2 from the Caterpillar annual report for 2019. See if you can identify the components of revenue recognition from Accounting Standards Update No. 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers (Topic 606).

2. Sales and revenue recognition

A. Sales of Machinery, Energy & Transportation

A Caterpillar machine.

Sales of ME&T are recognized when all the following criteria are satisfied: (i) a contract with an independently owned and operated dealer or an end user exists which has commercial substance; (ii) it is probable we will collect the amount charged to the dealer or end user; and (iii) we have completed our performance obligation whereby the dealer or end user has obtained control of the product. A contract with commercial substance exists once we receive and accept a purchase order under a dealer sales agreement, or once we enter into a contract with an end user. If collectibility is not probable, the sale is deferred and not recognized until collection is probable or payment is received. Control of our products typically transfers when title and risk of ownership of the product has transferred to the dealer or end user. Typically, where product is produced and sold in the same country, title and risk of ownership transfer when the product is shipped. Products that are exported from a country for sale typically transfer title and risk of ownership at the border of the destination country.

The footnote goes on for another page describing the nuances of recognizing revenue for remanufacturing operations, warranties, and financing. (Caterpillar, Inc. Annual Report for 2019 Download PDF pp. 60–61).

In the Notes to Financial Statement for Harley-Davidson, Inc. for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2019, on page 52, the company states:

The Harley-Davidson logo.

Accounts Receivable, net – The Company’s motorcycles and related products are sold to independent dealers outside the U.S. and Canada generally on open account and the resulting receivables are included in Accounts receivable, net on the Consolidated balance sheets. The allowance for doubtful accounts deducted from total accounts receivable was $4.9 million and $4.0 million as of December 31, 2019 and 2018, respectively. Accounts receivable are written down once management determines that the specific customer does not have the ability to repay the balance in full.

Trade receivables on the balance sheet (page 48) were $259.3 million for 2019 and $306.5 million for 2018. Revenues were $5.4 billion and $5.7 billion, respectively. Total bad debt expense was not disclosed, although Note 6 includes an extensive analysis of the financing receivables.

With regard to calculating the allowance for doubtful accounts and other estimated expenses, in the Summary of Significant Accounting Policies, Harley-Davidson, Inc. includes the following disclaimer:

Use of Estimates – The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (U.S. GAAP) requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements and the accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

These are just examples of disclosures related to accounts receivable and revenue. You should be able to look up the financial statements of any public company and locate the notes and disclosures related to these two topics. When you do, you’ll see that any one of these topics can be much more complex and detailed than just this basic overview has given. Accountants are always learning and studying to stay current with new pronouncements and to become better at communicating, not just with numbers, but with detailed explanations as well.

]]>
Practice: Notes Receivable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-notes-receivable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-notes-receivable/

Learning Outcomes

  • Calculate and record accrued interest
  • Journalize collections on notes receivable

 

 

]]>
Introduction to Reporting Receivables on the Financial Statements https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-receivables-on-the-financial-statements/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-reporting-receivables-on-the-financial-statements/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Identify the proper financial statement presentation of receivables

A calculator and a pen

On a company’s balance sheet, receivables can be classified as accounts receivables or trade debtors, bills receivable, and other receivables (loans, settlement amounts due for non-current asset sales, rent receivables, term deposits). Accounts receivable is the money owed to that company by entities outside of the company. Trade receivables are the receivables owed by the company’s customers. Also, receivables are divided according to whether they are expected to be received within the current accounting period or 12 months (current receivables), or received greater than 12 months (non-current receivables).

In addition to classifying receivables correctly on the balance sheet, GAAP requires disclosures related to receivables, such as the amount of the allowance for doubtful accounts, any factoring arrangements, and a host of other details that would not be obvious from just looking at the numbers.

]]>
Collecting Payments on Notes Receivable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/collecting-payments-on-notes-receivable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:12 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/collecting-payments-on-notes-receivable/ Read more »]]>
  • Journalize collections on notes receivable

 

At the maturity date of a note, the maker is responsible for the principal plus interest. The payee should record the interest earned and remove the note from its Notes Receivable account.

Start this analysis by scratching out some T accounts:

Checking Account
Debit Credit
Notes Receivable
Debit Credit
200,000
Interest Receivable
Debit Credit
4,056
Interest Revenue
Debit Credit

Note receivable in January has a debit balance of $200,000 that represents the original amount of the note. At the end of the year, we posted $4,055.56 to interest receivable when we recognized the amount of revenue earned for October through December.

When HWC pays the note plus interest on January 17th, the due date of the note, we would analyze it like this:

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a Checking Account, with a debit entry of 205,000 dollars marked with an (a). On the right is a Notes Receivable account. it has a debit entry of 200,000 dollars and a credit entry marked with an (a) of 200,000 dollars.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is Interest Receivable. It has a debit entry of 4,056 dollars. There is also a credit entry of 4,056 dollars marked with an (a). On the right is Interest Revenue. It has a credit entry of 944 dollars that is labeled with an (a).

We need to post an entry to show the debt has been satisfied (CR Notes Receivable $200,000) and we received $205,000 in principal plus interest. We also need to record payment of the interest recognized last year ($4,055.56 = 73 days) and the interest earned and paid in January $944.44 = 17 days).

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Jan 17 Checking Account 205,000.00
Jan 17       Note Receivable 200,000.00
Jan 17       Interest Receivable 4,055.56
Jan 17       Interest Revenue 944.44
Jan 17 To record interest earned on note to HWC

If we did our analysis correctly, the balance in the note receivable account after posting this entry will be zero (because we only had one note outstanding—if there were more notes, those balances would still be reflected in that account) as will the balance in the accrued interest account (interest receivable, again, because we only had one note). Checking increased by the amount of the principal plus interest that agrees with the wire transfer in or the deposit of the check, and the $944.44 interest revenue recognized in January that balances the entry should be $200,000 X .10 X 17/360 = 944.44.

This is a good example of how accounting is elegant in both its complexity and its symmetry.

A woman sitting at a computer.

Now let’s look at the opposite scenario. Sometimes the maker of a note does not pay the note when it becomes due. A dishonored note is a note the maker failed to pay at maturity. Since the note has matured, the holder or payee removes the note from Notes Receivable and records the amount due in Accounts Receivable.

Thus, the payee of the note should debit Accounts Receivable for the maturity value of the note and credit Notes Receivable for the note’s face value and Interest Revenue for the interest.

In addition, properly executed notes can be sold to a bank or other financial institution, much like an account receivable can be factored. The bank will pay less than the face value in order to offset the risk it assumes, but the company that held the note now has cash and doesn’t have to worry about collecting on the note (assume the note was sold without recourse).

Also, if a note has a duration of longer than one year, and the maker does not pay interest on the note during the first year, it is customary to add the unpaid interest to the beginning principal balance in the second year, and use that amount as the basis upon which to calculate interest in the second year (compounding interest). If the interest is being treated as simple interest, with no compounding, the unpaid interest is just carried forward in the Interest Receivable account.


]]>
Recognizing Notes Receivable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/recognizing-notes-receivable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/recognizing-notes-receivable/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the defining characteristics of a note receivable

 

A note receivable is evidenced by an actual written agreement, usually called a promissory note (promise to pay).

The promissory note will include the parties to the transaction, the dollar amount borrowed, the interest rate, and the due date. Figure 1 shows a very simple example of a promissory note.

The image shows an example of a Promissory Note. It states the following: I, (borrower) (insert name) agree and promise to pay the amount of (insert $ amount) to (lender) (insert name) for a value received at an annual interest rate of (insert percentage). First payment due date (30 days after date of this promissory note) (insert date). Final payment due date (120 days after date of this promissory note) (insert date). Witnessed by (insert name) Notary public: (insert seal). City (insert name of city) State (insert name of state) Date (insert date).
Figure 1. Promissory Note.

Most promissory notes have an explicit interest charge. Interest is the fee charged for use of money over a period of time. To the maker of the note, or borrower, interest is an expense; to the payee of the note, or lender, interest is a revenue. A borrower incurs interest expense; a lender earns interest revenue. The basic formula for computing interest is:

  Principal x Interest Rate x Frequency of a year

Principal is the face value of the note. The interest rate is the annual stated interest rate on the note. Frequency of a year is the amount of time for the note and can be either days or months. We need the frequency of a year because the interest rate is an annual rate and we may not want interest for an entire year but just for the time period of the note.

There are many circumstances in which a note receivable might arise. Here are three common ones:

  1. A company is in danger of defaulting on an account receivable and the two companies negotiate a settlement giving the debtor more time to pay.
  2. A company sells another company a large piece of equipment for a cash down payment and takes back a note for the balance. Willamette Industries has an old dump truck worth $10,000, so they sell it to Frank’s Disposal in Albany, Oregon, on October 1 for $2,000 down and a note for $8,000 with interest at 10% with the entire balance due on December 30 of that same year (a 90-day note).
  3. A company accepts a note receivable in exchange for loaning another company cash. For instance, a critical supplier might be in trouble financially, so the company that relies on the supplier for parts might loan that company money. Assume Cobalt Co. makes frozen food processing machines that sell worldwide and has a backlog of orders. The computer hardware that controls the machines is made by one company in Ohio, and that company, HWC, Inc.  has run out of working capital (cash) and so the entire production of Cobalt Co. is in jeopardy. The bank won’t loan HWC any more money, and Cobalt doesn’t have time to take the production of the computer hardware in-house just yet, so Cobalt loans the supplier $200,000 via wire transfer on October 1 due in 90 days, evidenced by a promissory note with interest at 10%. Here’s what the journal entry for that transaction would look like:

 

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Notes Receivable 200,000.00
Oct 1       Checking Account 200,000.00
Oct 1 To record emergency loan to HWC, Inc.

Companies usually do not establish a subsidiary ledger for notes. Instead, they maintain a file of the actual notes receivable and copies of notes payable.

]]>
Accrued Interest Revenue https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accrued-interest-revenue/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accrued-interest-revenue/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate and record accrued interest

 

Interest is the fee charged for use of money over a specific time period. To the maker of the note, or borrower, interest is an expense; to the payee of the note, or lender, interest is a revenue. A borrower incurs interest expense; a lender earns interest revenue. The basic formula for computing interest is:

[latex]\text{Principal}\times\text{Interest Rate}\times\text{Frequency of a year}[/latex]

Principal is the face value of the note. The interest rate is the annual stated interest rate on the note. Frequency of a year is the amount of time for the note and can be either days or months. We need the frequency of a year because the interest rate is an annual rate and we may not want interest for an entire year but just for the time period of the note.

Most promissory notes have an explicit interest charge, and although some notes are labeled as “zero interest,” there is often a fee built into the note. For instance, a no-interest note might have a face value of $10,000, but the actual proceeds to the borrower are “discounted” to $9,000, meaning that although there is no stated interest, there is $1,000 of interest built-in to the transaction.

To show how to calculate interest, assume HWC borrowed $200,000 from Cobalt, Co. on Oct 1, evidenced by a promissory note. The note has a principal (face value) of $200,000, an annual interest rate of 10%, and a life of 90 days. The interest calculation is:

[latex]\$200,000\text{ principal}\times10\text{% interest rate}\times\left(\dfrac{90\text{ days}}{360\text{ days}}\right)=\$5,000[/latex]

Note that in this calculation we expressed the time period as a fraction of a 360-day year because the interest rate is an annual rate and the note life was days. If the note life was months, we would divide by 12 months for a year. Sometimes a lender or textbook uses this “bank method”—so called because some banks would use 360 days instead of 365 since that actually results in a higher effective interest rate.

The maturity date is the date on which a note becomes due and must be paid. Sometimes notes require monthly installments (or payments) but usually, all the principal and interest must be paid at the same time. The wording in the note expresses the maturity date and determines when the note is to be paid. A note falling due on a Sunday or a holiday is due on the next business day.

Examples of the maturity date wording are:

  • On demand. “On demand, I promise to pay . . . .” When the maturity date is on demand, it is at the option of the holder and cannot be computed. The holder is the payee, or another person who legally acquired the note from the payee.
  • On a stated date. “On July 18, 2021, I promise to pay . . . .” When the maturity date is designated, computing the maturity date is not necessary.
  • At the end of a stated period.
    1. “One year after date, I promise to pay . . . .” When the maturity is expressed in years, the note matures on the same day of the same month as the date of the note in the year of maturity.
    2. “Four months after date, I promise to pay . . . .” When the maturity is expressed in months, the note matures on the same date in the month of maturity. For example, one month from July 18 is August 18, and two months from July 18 is  September 18. If a note is issued on the last day of a month and the month of maturity has fewer days than the month of issuance, the note matures on the last day of the month of maturity. A one-month note dated  January 31 matures on February 28.
    3. “Ninety days after date, I promise to pay . . . . ” When the maturity is expressed in days, the exact number of days must be counted. The first day (date of origin) is omitted, and the last day (maturity date) is included in the count. For example, a 90-day note dated October 19 matures on January 17 of the next year, as shown here:
Days Held
October (31 days total – 19 days gone = days left) 12
November 30
December 31
January 17
Total days 90Double line

This example brings up an interesting revenue recognition issue. Assume the 10% note from HWC to Cobalt in the amount of $200,000 is compounded annually, rather than daily or monthly, just to simplify this next calculation. Let’s also assume Cobalt follows GAAP, which means accrual-based accounting, and the company’s year-end for accounting purposes is December 31. Under the concept of recognizing revenue as earned, and in relation to the economic concept that interest is essentially rent on money, then interest is earned as time passes and should be recognized on the books of Cobalt as revenue even before HWC actually pays the interest in January of next year.

We calculated the total interest that will be due on January 17th, along with the $200,000 principal, as follows:

[latex]\$200,000\text{ principal}\times10\text{% interest rate}\times\left(\dfrac{90\text{ days}}{360\text{ days}}\right)=\$5,000[/latex]

However, as we are adjusting the books for December 31 to bring the accounts in line with accrual-basis accounting, we would accrue interest income earned to date: 73 days worth:

Days Held
October (31 days total – 19 days gone = days left) 12
November 30
December 31
January
Total days 73Double line

[latex]\$200,000\text{ principal}\times10\text{% interest rate}\times\left(\dfrac{73\text{ days}}{360\text{ days}}\right)=\$4,055.56[/latex]

That amount would be the interest earned through December 31, and so we would create an adjusting journal entry to record it:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Interest Receivable 4,055.56
Dec 31       Interest Revenue 4,055.56
Dec 31 To record interest earned on note to HWC

That revenue represents interest earned in October, November, and December. The remainder will be recognized in January when the entire amount is paid.

First, a couple of notes. The 360-day-year convention is not used very often anymore since computers have made it easier for banks and companies to calculate interest using actual days (365 or 366, depending on the year). Also, in calculating the due date of a note, start on the day after the date on the note (don’t include that day, but do include the last day). For instance, a 75-day note executed on January 15th would be due on the 31st of March, unless it was a leap year, in which case it would be due on the 30th of March.

days
January 16 16
February 28 29
March 31 30
75Double line 75Double line

In January, the clock starts ticking on the 16th, which means there is no interest accruing during the first 15 days, just the last 16. Interest accrues all through February, and the note is then due on the 75th day.

Verify this calculation on your own and then try your hand at this one: What is the due date of a 90-day note executed on September 1?

The answer is November 30.


]]>
Introduction to Notes Receivable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-notes-receivable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:10 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-notes-receivable/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Account for notes receivable

A pile of lumber.

A note receivable is different from an account receivable in several ways. First of all, accounts receivable arise from normal business transactions. Willamette Industries sells lumber to Home Depot. Willamette records the revenue when the lumber is shipped and a corresponding accounts receivable. On the opposite side of the transaction, Home Depot records a purchase of inventory and an account payable. These transactions are governed by the Uniform Commercial Code and often there is no other documentation or agreement other than a purchase order from Home Depot and an invoice from Willamette asking for payment.

A note receivable, on the other hand, is a written promise by a borrower to pay a definite sum of money to the lender on a specific date. A company may have notes receivable from transactions with customers, suppliers, banks, individuals, or other companies for an amount past due on an account receivable or for the sale of a large item such as a piece of equipment.

Notes receivable transactions involve issuing the note, accruing interest earned, and receiving payment of the note including interest.

]]>
Practice: Accounts Receivable Aging Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-accounts-receivable-aging-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-accounts-receivable-aging-analysis/
  • Prepare an accounts receivable aging analysis

 

 

]]>
Factoring Accounts Receivable https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/factoring-accounts-receivable/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/factoring-accounts-receivable/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the process of factoring accounts receivable

 

Accounts receivable factoring, also known as factoring, is a financial transaction in which a company sells its accounts receivable to a financing company that specializes in buying receivables at a discount. Accounts receivable factoring is also known as invoice factoring or accounts receivable financing.

cash flows from the factor into the company, and accounts receivable flow from the company to the factor.The buyer (called the “factor”) collects payment on the receivables from the company’s customers.

Companies choose factoring if they want to receive cash quickly rather than waiting for the duration of the credit terms. Factoring allows companies to immediately build up their cash flow and pay any outstanding obligations. Therefore, factoring helps companies free up capital that is tied up in accounts receivable and may also transfer the default risk associated with the receivables to the factor.

Factoring companies charge what is known as a “factoring fee.” The factoring fee is a percentage of the amount of receivables being factored. The rate charged by factoring companies depends on things like:

  • The industry the company is in.
  • The volume of receivables to be factored.
  • The quality and creditworthiness of the company’s customers.
  • Days outstanding in receivables (average days outstanding).

Additionally, the rate depends on whether it is recourse factoring or non-recourse factoring.

Here is a comparison between the two:

  • In transfer with recourse, the factor can demand money back from the company that transferred receivables if it cannot collect from customers.
  • In transfer without recourse, the factor takes on all the risk of uncollectible receivables. The company that transferred receivables has no liability for uncollectible receivables.

Factoring companies usually charge a lower rate for recourse factoring than it does for non-recourse factoring. When the factor is bearing all the risk of bad debts (in the case of non-recourse factoring), a higher rate is charged to compensate for the risk. With recourse factoring, the company selling its receivables still has some liability to the factoring company if some of the receivables prove uncollectible.

Just as in most business and investment transactions, the higher the risk, the higher the interest rate.

For example, take the following situation: On October 1, Larkin Co. transfers $250 thousand of receivables, without recourse, and pays an 8% fee. In addition, the factor keeps an allowance of $15,000 to cover bad accounts. The journal entry would be as follows:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X1
Oct. 1 Checking 205,000.00
Oct. 1 Interest Expense 20,000.00
Oct. 1 Due from Factor 15,000.00
Oct. 1       Accounts Receivable 250,000.00
Oct. 1 Receivables sold to factor at a discount

Note: $20,000 factor fee is considered interest expense because the company obtained cash flow earlier than it would have if it waited for the receivables to be collected.

There will be some kind of deadline on the agreement. Let’s say it ends on Sept 30 of the next year, and actual bad debts came to $16,000. Without recourse means that the $15,000 the company gave to the factor is the limit of the bad debt liability. The final entry would look like this:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X2
Sept 30 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 15,000.00
Sept 30       Due from Factor 15,000.00
Sept 30 To record settlement of factoring agreement.

If this had been with recourse, and since the actual bad debts exceed the amount initially retained by the factor, Larkin, Co. would have to pay the factor an additional $1,000 and the journal entry would look like this:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20X2
Sept 30 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 16,000.00
Sept 30 Checking 1,000.00
Sept 30       Due from Factor 15,000.00
Sept 30 To record settlement of factoring agreement.

It is important to note that the type of factoring influences the amount of fee charged and the amount of security held by the factor. The scenario in this example is only for the purpose of comparing the two types. The amount of security retained may be zero under factoring with recourse because the agreement guarantees the factor that any debts that may turn out to be irrecoverable will be reimbursed. As with any business contract, the parties negotiate the terms, and there are as many variations as there are transactions.

]]>
Practice: Estimating Bad Debt Expense and Uncollectible Accounts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-estimating-bad-debt-expense-and-uncollectible-accounts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-estimating-bad-debt-expense-and-uncollectible-accounts/
  • Compute and journalize bad debt expense under the allowance method (percentage of sales)
  • Compute and journalize bad debt expense as a percentage of receivables (balance sheet method)

 

 

]]>
Accounts Receivable Aging Analysis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts-receivable-aging-analysis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts-receivable-aging-analysis/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare an accounts receivable aging analysis

 

Let’s go back to Larkin, Co.’s subsidiary ledger for last year, but let’s add some details:

Customer Amount Owed Age of Invoice, in days
0-30 31-60 61-90 90+
A 57,500 40,000 17,500 0
B 22,000 22,000 0
C 74,500 14,500 50,000 10,000 0
D 8,000 8,000
E 12,500 12,500 0
F 25,000 25,000 0
G 50,500 1,500 30,000 17,000 2,000
Single Line250,000Double Line Single Line103,000 Single Line97,500 Single Line39,500 Single Line10,000

Let’s also assume that Larkin Co. extends normal credit terms of net 30, meaning the invoice is due within 30 days. Each customer may have several outstanding invoices. Let’s say this schedule was prepared on 12/31 and Customer A had two outstanding invoices: a bill for $40,000 dated December 15, making it not overdue, and a bill for $17,500 dated November 30, making it just slightly (one day) overdue.

Sometimes this schedule is prepared using “days past due.” Different companies do it according to their own internal needs. In any case, this is an accounts receivable aging schedule. It’s that simple and is a canned report in most, if not all, accounting packages. We can use this report to more precisely calculate the allowance for doubtful accounts and therefore the net realizable value of accounts receivable.

First, based on a historical analysis of collectibility, we assign a probability of collection to each category. Obviously, the older an account is, the less likely we will be able to collect it.

Let’s say over time we have learned this:

# of days old Probability of collecting
0-30 99%
31-60 95%
61-90 85%
90+ 5%

In other words, our experience is that we collect 99% of the current billings, but that likelihood drops to 95% if they go past the due date, and drops again to only 85% if they haven’t paid by day 61 (more than 30 days past due). After 90 days, we don’t have much hope, only a 5% probability of getting our money, which means that a few people who don’t pay on time still eventually pay, but not many.

We’re accountants, but we also have to be statisticians. We apply the probability of collecting the accounts to the aging analysis like this:

Customer Amount Owed Age of Invoice, in days
0-30 31-60 61-90 90+
A 57,500 40,000 17,500 0
B 22,000 22,000 0
C 74,500 14,500 50,000 10,000 0
D 8,000 8,000
E 12,500 12,500 0
F 25,000 25,000 0
G 50,500 1,500 30,000 17,000 2,000
Single Line250,000Double Line Single Line103,000 Single Line97,500 Single Line39,500 Single Line10,000
99.0% 95.0% 85.0% 5.0%
NRV Single Line228,670Double Line Single Line101,970Double Line Single Line92,625Double Line Single Line33,575Double Line Single Line500Double Line

According to this calculation, the net realizable value, which is the cash value, or the amount we expect to ultimately collect, is $228,670 against gross receivables of $250,000, which means the balance of the contra-asset account we set up called Allowance for Doubtful Accounts should be $21,330.

You can then prepare the adjusting journal entry.

Say the balance in the allowance account is currently a credit of $10,000, which would be the combination of all the prior entries to that account, commonly prior period-end adjustments and write-offs. You would calculate the adjusting journal entry like this:

A T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. There is a credit balance at the top of 10,000 dollars, as well as an adjusting journal entry on the credit side of 11,330 dollars. The total credit balance is 21,330 dollars.

A T account for Bad Debt Expense. On the debit side is an adjusting journal entry for 11,330 dollars.

Let’s say the balance before your adjustment was a debit of $2,000 because you had written off more accounts during the year than you had allowance for. You would calculate the adjustment like this:

A T account for allowance for doubtful accounts. At the top is a debit balance of 2,000 dollars. There is also a credit adjusting journal entry of 23,330 dollars. The total credit balance is 21,330 dollars.

A T account for Bad Debt Expense. There is a adjusting journal entry on the debit side for 23,330 dollars.

Just to review: There is no entry to Accounts Receivable because it matches the subsidiary ledger that includes all the accounts, and we are making an allowance for future accounts that will go bad, but we don’t yet know which. When we actually write off an account some time in the future, we will reduce Accounts Receivable (with a credit entry) and the AR subsidiary ledger, and we will also reduce the Allowance account (with a debit).

Some companies prepare the aging analysis like this:

Customer Amount Owed Age of Invoice, in days
0-30 31-60 61-90 90+
A 57,500 40,000 17,500 0
B 22,000 22,000 0
C 74,500 14,500 50,000 10,000 0
D 8,000 8,000
E 12,500 12,500 0
F 25,000 25,000 0
G 50,500 1,500 30,000 17,000 2,000
Single Line250,000Double Line Single Line103,000 Single Line97,500 Single Line39,500 Single Line10,000
1.0% 5.0% 15.0% 95.0%
Uncollectible Single Line21,330Double Line Single Line1,030Double Line Single Line4,875Double Line Single Line5,925Double Line Single Line9,500Double Line

The answer is still the same, just arrived at in a different manner by using the amount of the account that is UNcollectible rather than the amount that is collectible.

Another variation could look like this:

Customer Amount Owed Age of Invoice, in days
Current 0-30 31-60 60+
A 57,500 40,000 17,500 0
B 22,000 22,000 0
C 74,500 14,500 50,000 10,000 0
D 8,000 8,000
E 12,500 12,500 0
F 25,000 25,000 0
G 50,500 1,500 30,000 17,000 2,000
Single Line250,000Double Line Single Line103,000 Single Line97,500 Single Line39,500 Single Line10,000
1.0% 5.0% 15.0% 95.0%
Uncollectible Single Line21,330Double Line Single Line1,030Double Line Single Line4,875Double Line Single Line5,925Double Line Single Line9,500Double Line

One final note: the information in an aging schedule also is useful to manage other purposes. Analysis of collection patterns of accounts receivable may suggest the need for changes in credit policies or for added financing.

For example, if the age of many customer balances has increased to 61–90 days past due, collection efforts may have to be strengthened. Or, the company may have to find other sources of cash to pay its debts within the discount period. Preparation of an aging schedule may also help identify certain accounts that should be written off as uncollectible.


]]>
Estimating Bad Debt Expense https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/estimating-bad-debt-expense/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/estimating-bad-debt-expense/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute and journalize bad debt expense under the allowance method (percentage of sales)

 

GAAP requires companies to match expenses to revenue as closely as possible. Under the direct write-off method of accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable, you could have revenue in October, finish the year, and report that revenue to investors and creditors, and then in the next year, find that account has gone bad. As accountants, we don’t want to go back to the prior year, change it, restate it, and publish new financials. That would be time-consuming and the users of those financials would be frustrated if we were always going back and changing the financials. So, once a year is over, and the books are closed, it’s done and we don’t go back.

What are the other alternatives? The FASB asked this question and the answer that came back was this: if we (accountants) could reasonably estimate bad debts in some way we could post an expense in the same year or other time period as the revenue/receivable was booked.

The easiest, but least accurate way to do this is to simply take a percentage of sales, based on a historical average, and use it as an estimate, and then periodically make sure it is fairly accurate over time. We call this the percentage-of-sales method. Also, sometimes accountants refer to this method as the income statement method because the focus is on the expense account.

The formula to estimate bad debts expense is:

Bad debt expense = Net sales (total or credit) × Percentage estimated as uncollectible

Technically, we should base bad debt expense on credit sales only, but if cash sales are small or make up a fairly constant percentage of total sales, bad debt expense could be based on total net sales. Since at least one of these conditions is usually met, companies commonly use total net sales rather than credit sales.

Here’s an example. Larkin Co. is a start-up accounting firm that billed out $1 million in services during the year (a) and collected $750 thousand of that revenue (b):

A Checking T account. There is a debit entry for 750,000 dollars labeled (b).

An Accounts Receivable T account. It has a debit entry of 1,000,000 dollars labeled (a) and a credit entry of 750,000 dollars marked with a (b).

A Service Revenue T account. It has a credit entry labeled (a) for 1,000,000 dollars.

While preparing the year-end financial statements before the close of the year, Larkin Co. decides to use the percentage-of-sales method to estimate a reduction to sales that will closely approximate the revenue they have booked that they will never actually collect. They are using the same credit policies as other accounting firms and expect about the same amount of bad debt on a percentage basis. They use an industry standard (that one of the experienced partners in the firm has provided) of 1%.

Based on this percentage, the amount of revenues that will never be collected is 1,000,000 × .01 = $10,000.

So, they make this entry (c):

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Bad Debt Expense 10,000.00
Dec 31       Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 10,000.00
Dec 31 To record bad debts as a percentage of sales

We post this entry to the GL:

A T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. There is a credit entry of 10,000 dollars marked with a (c).

A T account for Bad Debt Expense. It has a debit entry of 10,000 dollars labeled with a (c).

Notice they did not post the credit side of the entry to Accounts Receivable because the subsidiary account always, always, always has to agree with the control account. They could create a fictitious customer in the subsidiary ledger and then post the credit to the fictitious customer’s account, but it’s not common practice to do that. Instead, we create a separate GL account called Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. It’s a companion account to Accounts Receivable, and since it has a credit balance, it is called a “contra account.” We’ll see more of these acoounts as we go on.

Here is what the GL looks like now:

A T Checking account. There is a debit entry of 750,000 dollars labeled with a (b).

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is Accounts Receivable, which has a debit entry labeled (a) of 1,000,000 dollars. On the credit side, there is an entry labeled (b) worth 750,000 dollars. On the right side is the Allowance for Dutiful Accounts. It has a credit entry of 10,000 dollars labeled (c).

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is the Service Revenue account, which has a credit entry of 1,000,000 dollars and is labeled with an (a). On the right is the Bad Debt Expense account, which has a credit entry of 10,000 dollars labeled with a (c).

Bad Debt Expense is not considered a contra account to Revenue. It’s a stand-alone account usually classified as a selling expense (which you will see in the module on Merchandising Operations). However, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is attached to Accounts Receivable. It holds the amount we have determined is uncollectible until we actually identify the accounts that go bad.

You can see from these few T accounts that although total gross revenues are $1 million, we have created a matching expense that records the estimated amount that will be uncollectible. The matching principle requires us to book expenses in the same period as the revenues to which they are related to the best of our ability.

Also, we now have a net number for accounts receivable. The net receivable, adjusted for the estimated uncollectible accounts is $750,000 (gross receivables) minus the allowance of $10,000. That means that we expect to collect in cash $740,000 once all the payments and non-payments are accounted for. Accountants call this collection the net realizable value. Remember, to recognize a revenue or an expense means to record it, and to realize it means it actually happens. In this case, to realize a revenue recorded “on account” means to collect the cash.

If you wanted to sell all your receivables to me (called “factoring”), I would not buy them from you based on the gross amount, which is both the control account and the detailed list of customers from whom I will collect (the subsidiary ledger). I would buy them from you based on the net realizable value—the cash I would expect to ultimately collect. We’ll cover factoring in slightly more detail a bit later.

Accounts Receivable and its companion account, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, are permanent accounts and are not closed at the end of the accounting cycle. Revenues and Bad Debt Expense are temporary accounts and are closed to capital at the end of the cycle. So, in year two, the beginning balances of Larkin Co. look like this:

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is a checking account with a debit balance of 750,000 dollars. On the right is a Capital account with a credit balance of 900,000 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is Accounts Receivable, with a debit balance of 250,000. On the right side is Allowance for Dutiful Accounts, with a credit balance of 10,000 dollars.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is Service Revenue and on the right is Bad Debt Expense.

Assume the subsidiary receivables ledger looks something like this (simplified):

Customer Amount Owed
A 57,500
B 22,000
C 74,500
D 8,000
E 12,500
F 25,000
G 50,500Single line
250,000Double line

Notice how the subsidiary ledger agrees to the GL control account and does not include our estimated $10,000 of bad debt.

Now, in year 2, client D refuses to pay and then disappears. All efforts to collect fail. In February, we decide to write off the account as a loss.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Feb 28 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 8,000.00
Feb 28       Accounts Receivable 8,000.00
Feb 28 To write off bad account from client D

We post this entry to both the GL and the subsidiary ledger:

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is the Checking Account, which has a debit balance of 750,000 dollars. On the right is Capital, which has a credit entry of 900,000 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is Accounts Receivable, with a debit balance of 250,000 and a credit entry of 8,000 dollars on February 28th. There is a total debit balance of 242,000 dollars. On the right side is Allowance for Dutiful Accounts, which has a credit entry of 10,000 dollars and a debit entry of 8,000 dollars. It has a total credit balance of 2,000 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is Service Revenue and on the right is Bad Debt Expense.

The subsidiary ledger agrees with the control account.

Customer Amount Owed
A 57,500
B 22,000
C 74,500
D
E 12,500
F 25,000
G 50,500Single line
242,000Double line

We haven’t posted any other transactions, but you can see we didn’t record the write off of the prior year’s sale as an expense in this year. We already “recognized” the expense in year one when we recognized the revenue from all that work we did. This year, we are simply recognizing the actual account that went bad. (Assume all those others are paying or have paid. Now there are new revenues and new accounts receivable, but right now we’re just trying to isolate this one issue).

Think of the allowance for doubtful accounts as a place to hold “accounts that will go bad in the future, we just don’t know which account that is yet.” When we actually identify the account(s) that go bad, we remove that account from the subsidiary ledger and the GL by moving from the “unidentified” bad accounts to the actual lists (control and subsidiary).

Notice three things:

  • Bad Debt Expense is recognized in the same period that the revenue is recognized.
  • The estimate ($10,000 in this case) may not be exact. We are balancing the matching principle and usefulness against perfection. We don’t need to be perfectly accurate. We need to provide a reasonable picture of the company’s financial position at the end of the year, and that includes an estimate of accounts that will never materialize into cash.

In applying the percentage-of-sales method, companies annually review the percentage of uncollectible accounts that resulted from the previous year’s sales. If the percentage rate is still valid, the company makes no change. However, if the situation has changed significantly, the company increases or decreases the percentage rate to reflect the changed condition. For example, in periods of recession and high unemployment, a firm may increase the percentage rate to reflect the customers’ decreased ability to pay. However, if the company adopts a more stringent credit policy, it may have to decrease the percentage rate because the company would expect fewer uncollectible accounts.

Again, this “income statement method” is the easiest to apply, but not the most accurate. In fact, it is not considered GAAP, so public companies who file audited financial statements with the SEC cannot use this method. We’ll cover a better method, the one used by most companies for year end financials, in the next section.

 

You can view the transcript for “Sales Method or Income Approach for Bad Debts Expense (Financial Accounting Tutorial #43)” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Estimating Uncollectible Accounts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/estimating-uncollectible-accounts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/estimating-uncollectible-accounts/ Read more »]]>
  • Compute and journalize bad debt expense as a percentage of receivables (balance sheet method)

 

The percentage-of-receivables method estimates uncollectible accounts by determining the estimated net realizable value of accounts receivable, so many accountants refer to this as the balance-sheet method.

There are two ways to do this method: a simple way that, of course, is not the best practice and a more complicated but more reliable way that uses an aging analysis that we’ll cover in the next section.

Here is Larkin Co.’s subsidiary ledger from year one before any adjustment for bad debt:

Customer Amount Owed
A 57,500
B 22,000
C 74,500
D 8,000
E 12,500
F 25,000
G 50,500Single line
250,000Double line

If Larkin estimates 3% of ending accounts receivable will be uncollectible, or conversely, estimates 97% of accounts receivable are collectible, then the allowance for doubtful accounts should be $7,500, calculated as follows:

Accounts Receivable, gross × estimated uncollectible = allowance

Or

Accounts Receivable, gross × estimated collectible = net realizable value

Accounts Receivable, gross $250,000
X % uncollectible 3.0%
Allowance $7,500
Accounts Receivable, gross $250,000
X % collectible 97.0%
Net realizable value $242,500
Accounts Receivable, gross $250,000
Allowance (7,500)
Net realizable value $242,500

Let’s look at Larkin Co. again. Remember they billed out $1 million in services during the year (a) and collected $750 thousand of that (b):

A T checking account. On the debit side, there is an entry for 750,000 dollars labeled (b).

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is the Accounts Receivable. There is a debit entry labeled (a) of 1,000,000 dollars. On the credit side, there is an entry for 750,000 dollars labeled (b). There is a total debit balance of 250,000 dollars. On the right side is the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, which has no entries.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is Service Revenue. There is a credit entry of 1,000,000 labeled (a). On the right is Bad Debt Expense, which has no entries.

Now we have to book the allowance for doubtful accounts. Note: we did not calculate bad debt expense. We calculated the uncollectible accounts based on the accounts receivable we had outstanding at the end of the year.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Bad Debt Expense 7,500.00
Dec 31       Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 7,500.00
Dec 31 To record bad debts as a percentage of accounts receivable

Notice, other than the amount and description, this is the same entry we made under the percentage of sales method.

However, there is a significant difference (other than the amount).

Let’s look at year two. Sales of $1,250,000 (d) and collections of $800,000 (e) and the write off of $8,000 (f).

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a checking account. At the top of it, there is a debit balance of 750,000 dollars. There is also a debit entry of 800,000 dollars labeled (e). There is a total debit balance of 1,550,000 dollars. On the right is another checking account. There is a credit balance of 892,500 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is the Accounts Receivable, with a balance at the top of 250,000 dollars. There is also a debit entry of 1,250,000 dollars labeled (d). There is a credit entry of 800,000 dollars labeled (e) and another credit entry for 8,000 dollars labeled (f). There is a total debit balance of 692,000 dollars. On the right side is Allowance for Doubtful Accounts, which has a credit balance at the top of 7,500 dollars. There is also a debit entry for 8,000 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 500 dollars.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is Service Revenue, which has a credit entry of 1,250,000 dollars that is labeled (d). On the right is Bad Debt Expenses, which has no entries.

Now it’s time to calculate the allowance for doubtful accounts:

Accounts Receivable, gross $692,000
% uncollectible 3.0%
Allowance $20,760
Accounts Receivable, gross $692,000
% collectible 97.0%
Net realizable value $671,240
Accounts Receivable, gross $692,000
Allowance (20,760)
Net realizable value $671,240

(Quick: Get out your calculator and check the math.)

The allowance for doubtful accounts, based on the percentage of sales, should be a credit balance of $20,760. Right now, it has a debit balance of $500 because last year we booked $7,500 but the actual write off was $8,000. Go back and look at the T account for the allowance.

What entry would you have to make to the allowance account to get the balance to be $20,760?

A T account for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. At the top is a credit balance of 7,500 dollars. There is a debit entry of 8,000 dollars, as well as a credit adjusting journal entry of 21,260 dollars. The total credit balance is 20,760 dollars.

A T accounts for Bad Debt Expense. On the debit side, it has an adjusting journal entry of 21,260 dollars.

Notice that bad debt expense in this case is simply the other half of the entry to get the balance sheet account adjusted. The focus in this case is on the net realizable value of the receivables, and the income statement (bad debt expense) is relegated to second place.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Bad Debt Expense 21,260.00
Dec 31       Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 21,260.00
Dec 31 To record bad debts as a percentage of receivables

This whole process is worth a review if you don’t have a clear understanding of it yet. Walk through it step-by-step:

  1. Calculate the balance you need to have in the account (allowance for doubtful accounts).
  2. Examine the current account balance.
  3. Determine what entry, debit or credit, and amount you need to have in order to get the balance where it needs to be.
  4. Test your hypothesis using T accounts.
  5. Write the entry, post it, and make sure it did what you wanted it to do.

This process works for all kinds of transaction analysis. For instance, let’s say you wrote off an account earlier in the year, but then the company paid unexpectedly. This doesn’t happen very often, but it’s possible.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 2,000.00
Dec 31       Accounts Receivable 2,000.00
Dec 31 To write off bad account

And then, surprise, the company pays you $1,500 a few months later. You know you have to debit cash, but to what account do you post the credit?

You could just post the credit to allowance for doubtful accounts, but the proper way to handle this is to re-establish the receivable by reversing the write-off (partially) and then recording the payment against the account.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Mar 17 Accounts Receivable 1,500.00
Mar 17       Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 1,500.00
Mar 17 To reverse prior write-off (partial)

 

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Mar 17 Checking Account 1,500.00
Mar 17       Accounts Receivable 1,500.00
Mar 17 To record payment on account

Hopefully, your accounting software has a process in place to accomplish this transaction, but it’s rare enough that you may have to figure out the result you want and then make it happen using the built-in systems.

Next, we’ll look at a more sophisticated way to calculate the net realizable value of accounts receivable and the allowance for doubtful accounts, but first check your understanding of the percentage of receivables method.

 

You can view the transcript for “Percentage of Receivables Method for Bad Debts Expense (Financial Accounting Tutorial #44)” here (opens in new window).

]]>
Direct Write-Off of Bad Accounts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/direct-write-off-of-bad-accounts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:06 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/direct-write-off-of-bad-accounts/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts

 

At the end of October, NeatNiks’s accounts receivable ledger page looked like this:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 5,650.00

And the subsidiary ledger total matched the control account:

Oct.30payment on account

600.001,900.00

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
ABE
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1016 1,000.00
Oct. 30 payment on account 1,000.00 0.00
MPAC
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1019 1,750.00 1,750.00
National City
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1017 2,500.00
Our Town Properties
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1018 2,000.00 2,000.00
Total 5,650.00

Both ledgers, the general (control) and the subsidiary (detail) are created from the same journal entries that are created from the same source data, so they always, always have to match perfectly. In this case, they show our customers owe us $5,650 for work we have done.

Let’s say in November we discover Our Town Properties went out of business and we decide there is no hope we will collect any of the $2,000 it owes us. In reality, we wouldn’t give up that fast—we’d be attempting to collect for months, Our Town Properties would file for bankruptcy, and there would be a waiting period, etc. But for illustration purposes, let’s just say our customer just packed up and disappeared.

We would “write off” the account. We don’t reduce revenue because we earned that $2,000. Instead, we create an expense account called Bad Debt Expense, and we make the following entry (most likely an adjusting journal entry at the end of November):

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Nov 30 Bad Debt Expense 550 2,000.00
Nov 30       Accounts Receivable 120 2,000.00
Nov 30 To write off Our Town Properties receivable

Once we post this entry, we see the following in the GL control account (we’re ignoring the fact there would be a host of other transactions in November):

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 5,650.00
Nov 30 GJ3 2,000.00 3,650.00

And we update the subsidiary ledger as well:

Oct.30payment on account

600.001,900.00
Nov30account written off

2,000.000.00

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
ABE
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1016 1,000.00
Oct. 30 payment on account 1,000.00 0.00
MPAC
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1019 1,750.00 1,750.00
National City
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1017 2,500.00
Our Town Properties
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1018 2,000.00
Total 3,650.00

We also have an expense account now called Bad Debt Expense with a debit balance of $2,000 that will act as an offset of November revenues when we calculate net income.

Note that you should be calling both MPAC and National City at this point to ask for payment or to make other arrangements. Normal business practice is to require payment within 30 days (called “net 30”), but it’s also possible NeatNiks is allowing 45 days or even 60 days to pay. In any case, by the end of November, the October revenues should be mostly collected.

Writing off a bad account when its uncollectibility is certain is called the direct write-off method.

This is the method required by the Internal Revenue Code (as of 2020—of course, this could change at some point). The drafters of the IRC wanted to make sure companies weren’t trying to manipulate taxable income by writing off accounts that weren’t really uncollectible. This practice makes sense, except that accrual basis income requires matching revenues and expenses, and the direct write-off method is a violation of that principle. In this case, we recognized revenue in October, but then recognized the expense in November. This difference isn’t critical if we are looking at net income on an annual basis, but if we are analyzing net income monthly, it can skew our results. For example, if large companies recognize revenue in 2020, and then recognize the bad debts in 2021 or even 2020 when they are identified, those companies are definitely violating the matching principle.

How can we match bad debt expense to revenue when we don’t yet know which revenues are going to be uncollectible?

The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) came up with GAAP to address this issue. But before we discuss that issue, it’s time to check your understanding of the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts.


]]>
Journalizing Revenue and Payments on Account https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-revenue-and-payments-on-account/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:05 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-revenue-and-payments-on-account/ Read more »]]> Demonstrate journal entries for sales and payments on account

 

Let’s look at three transactions from NeatNiks:

Oct 15: Received $1,500 cash for services performed.
Oct 20: Billed customers $7,250 for work done in October.
Oct 30: Collected $1,600 from customers on account.

And at one question:
How much do customers owe Nick?

Let’s say on October 10, Nick got a call from Water Works Business Park asking for a one-year commitment to clean the offices for $1,500 a month. On the 15th, Nick showed up and cleaned everything to the owner’s satisfaction. Simple enough.

Now apply the five-step process:

Two hands exchanging cash.

Step 1: Identify the Contract with a Customer

This step is trickier than it looks. Is the contract for one year or month-by-month? Legally, the contract may only be enforceable as it is executed because it is not in writing.

Step 2: Identify the Performance Obligations

Cleaning the office is the obligation in order to earn the pay. This isn’t a complicated transaction that needs to be analyzed in depth, but then again, its simplicity makes this analysis a good place to start.

Step 3: Determine the Transaction Price

It appears to be $1,500 per cleaning. Verbally, there is an agreement for $18,000, but each obligation under the contract is $1,500. Also, since this is a contract that would take more than one year to complete, and since it is in excess of $500, it has to be in writing to be legally enforceable (if there is a dispute). Each cleaning could be seen as a single contract that arises when Nick shows up to clean. There’s an entire field of law related to what makes a binding contract that is beyond the scope of this course. Regardless, as accountants, we have to know a little bit about everything.

Step 4: Allocate the Transaction Price to the Performance Obligations

If the contract was $18,000 for one year of service, and it was in writing, then it would make sense to allocate the entire price to each month of service (in this case).

Step 5: Recognize Revenue When or As Performance Obligations Are Satisfied

We then recognize (record) one month of revenue once the service is performed to the customer’s satisfaction.

Question: What if the customer refused to pay because the work was not acceptable?

Now might be a good time to suggest to Nick that he create some kind of written agreement for his customers to clarify expectations. In this kind of situation though, if the customer was not happy with the service but paid anyway, you might want to record the payment not as earned revenue, but as a customer deposit, also known as unearned revenue—a liability. If the customer is happy once the dispute is resolved, we would record a journal entry to move the unearned revenue to earned revenue, or if the company refused to accept the substandard performance on our part, we may have to refund the money. Let’s come back to this scenario later. For now, let’s assume the customer is happy and we’re done.

As we saw in a previous section, we would make the following entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 15 Checking 110 1,500.00
Oct 15       Service Revenue 410 1,500.00
Oct 15 To record cash received for services rendered

Now, let’s say Nick went to Abe’s Bowling Emporium on the 16th and cleaned up after a birthday party. ABE agreed to pay $1,000. On the 17th, Nick and his helpers cleaned up National City Park after a balloon festival for $2,500. On the 18th, Nick’s crew cleaned a series of vacation rentals for Our Town Properties for $2,000, and on the 19th the team cleaned the Multi-Purpose Athletic Club for $1,750. On the 20th, he sat down and sent bills (invoices) to all these customers.

As Nick’s accountant, you make sure all these revenues are “earned” according to GAAP’s five-step process and then you make the following entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 20 Accounts Receivable 120 7,250.00
Oct 20       Service Revenue 410 7,250.00
Oct 20 To record billings for services rendered

The Accounts Receivable ledger now looks like this:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Opening Bal. 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00

Unfortunately, this ledger is just a control account and doesn’t tell you who owes you what. That’s why you keep a subsidiary ledger that looks like this:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
ABE
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1016 1,000.00 1,000.00
MPAC
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1019 1,750.00 1,750.00
National City
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1017 2,500.00 2,500.00
Our Town Properties
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1018 2,000.00 2,000.00
Total 7,250.00

On October 30, Nick received one or more checks from clients and made this entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 30 Checking 110 1,600.00
Oct 30       Accounts Receivable 120 1,600.00
Oct 30 To record receipt of payments from customers on account

And the general ledger for Accounts Receivable showed this:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 5,650.00

Now you, as the accountant, in addition to updating (posting the journal entry) to the general ledger (the GL) account (control), post the same entry to the subsidiary ledger. Let’s assume the $1,600 was from several clients ($1,000 from ABE and $600 from National City) and was entered as one deposit on the 30th.

Oct.30payment on account

600.001,900.00

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
ABE
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1016 1,000.00
Oct. 30 payment on account 1,000.00 0.00
MPAC
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1019 1,750.00 1,750.00
National City
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1017 2,500.00
Our Town Properties
Oct. 20 cleaning inv. NN1018 2,000.00 2,000.00
Total 5,650.00

Now you can answer this question: How much do customers owe Nick?

In fact, you can answer that question in detail. If you were being audited, the independent reviewer would send “blind” confirmation letters to the customers asking what their records show they owe you. Hopefully, their records would match yours.

You can view the transcript for “6.7 Theory of Control and Subsidiary Accounts” here (opens in new window).

 

Let’s return for one moment to the idea of unearned revenue.

If Water Works Business Park paid in advance or did not accept the work Nick did as completing the contract (the agreement), instead of this entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 15 Checking 110 1,500.00
Oct 15       Service Revenue 410 1,500.00
Oct 15 To record cash received for services rendered

You would make this entry:

As we saw in a previous section, we would make the following entry:

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 15 Checking 110 1,500.00
Oct 15       Unearned Revenue 325 1,500.00
Oct 15 To record cash received for services rendered

Unearned revenue is a liability. Nick has collected the cash but it’s not his—he hasn’t earned it. We’re back to that seemingly simple cornerstone of accrual basis accounting: recognize revenue as it is earned.

Once the service obligation (in this case, the cleaning) is fulfilled, let’s say in November, you would make this adjusting journal entry, moving the revenue from unearned (a liability) to earned (revenue/equity):

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Nov 30 Unearned Revenue 325 1,500.00
Nov 30       Service Revenue 410 1,500.00
Nov 30 To record cash received for services rendered

Next, we’ll take a closer look at different kinds of receivables.

]]>
Introduction to Uncollectible Accounts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-uncollectible-accounts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:05 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-uncollectible-accounts/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Understand accounting for uncollectible accounts

Extending credit to other businesses improves the flow of commerce. Imagine if Home Depot had to wait for tiles to come from a supplier while the accounting department processed all the paperwork. Instead, the purchasing department orders the tiles, the supplier ships the order and sends an invoice, and then the accounting department can take its time processing the paperwork. Meanwhile, thousands of other orders are being sent and fulfilled. It’s efficient and effective. However, every once in a while, a credit customer will go out of business before paying or will declare bankruptcy, or maybe simply refuse to pay and the cost of trying to collect outweighs the benefit.

Architects at a construction site.In any case, with almost certainty, a business that extends credit to customers as an ordinary course of business (called trade receivables) will have to declare some account as uncollectible. At the point of officially giving up on collecting, we accountants will “write off” the account, clearing it from our books and records. It’s just a cost of doing business. If we get too many of those, we tighten up our credit standards. If we aren’t getting any, our credit standards may be too tight—we may be losing legitimate, profitable sales by refusing to serve perfectly fine customers who are just not up to our high standards. Making a profit involves calculated risk.

As accountants, we help management collect and analyze the information it needs to make these credit decisions, but we also have to account for the bad accounts we won’t collect. We booked the revenue and the receivable, and now the receivable is no good.

There are two fundamental methods for handling these uncollectible accounts: the direct write-off method and the allowance method.

The direct write-off method recognizes bad accounts as an expense at the point when judged to be uncollectible and is the required method for federal income tax purposes.

The allowance method comports better to the accrual basis of accounting by matching bad debt expense to revenue and is the accepted method to record uncollectible accounts for financial accounting purposes.

In addition, sometimes we sell some or all of our receivables to an outside party in order to turn them into immediate cash. We’ll cover that situation in this section as well.

]]>
Introduction to Revenue Recognition https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-revenue-recognition/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-revenue-recognition/ Read more »]]> What you will learn to do: Recognize revenue received on account

A woman holding a bar graph with bars steadily increasing.

Revenue is the inflow of assets from the sale of goods and services to customers and is measured by the expected receipt of cash from customers. It is one of the most important measures used by both managers and investors in assessing a company’s performance and prospects.

Accrual accounting is based on the principle that revenues are recognized when earned (a product is sold or a service has been performed), regardless of when cash is received. For instance, assume a company performs services for a customer on account. Although the company has received no cash, the revenue is recorded at the time the company performs the service. Later, when the company receives the cash, no revenue is recorded because the company has already recorded the revenue.

]]>
Recognizing Revenue under the Accrual Basis https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/recognizing-revenue-under-the-accrual-basis/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/recognizing-revenue-under-the-accrual-basis/ Read more »]]>
  • Summarize revenue recognition under GAAP

 

Under the cash basis of accounting, revenues are recognized when cash is received. Expenses are recognized when cash is paid out.

Cash Basis and Accrual Basis
Cash Basis Accrual Basis
Revenues are recognized as cash is received Revenues are recognized when earned (goods are delivered or services are performed).
Expenses are recognized as cash is paid Expenses are recognized when incurred to produce revenues

This concept sounds simple enough; however, for many years revenue recognition differed between GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). GAAP was rule based and had complex, detailed, and disparate revenue recognition requirements for specific transactions and industries, such as software development, real estate, and construction. As a result, different industries used different accounting for economically similar transactions.

As part of the overall movement toward a more principles-based system like the IFRS, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued Accounting Standards Update No. 2014-09, Revenue from Contracts with Customers (Topic 606). This update established the principles to report useful information to users of financial statements about the nature, timing, and uncertainty of revenue from contracts with customers.

Rather than trying to make strict rules for each different industry, the FASB created a five-step process:

  1. Identify the Contract with a Customer
  2. Identify the Performance Obligations
  3. Determine the Transaction Price
  4. Allocate the Transaction Price to the Performance Obligations
  5. Recognize Revenue When or As Performance Obligations Are Satisfied

Step 1: Identify the Contract with a Customer

A waiter serving a table of customers.The application of this step will be straightforward for the majority of time. The contract or agreement will follow this guidance if the following criteria are met:

  • Approved contract by both parties—Written or oral?
  • Each party’s rights can be determined—Who’s doing what?
  • Payment terms are identified—How much?
  • Commercial substance exists—The transaction is worth something.
  • Collection is probable—You will get paid for the sale.

Step 2: Identify the Performance Obligations

This step identifies what’s being delivered or provided to the customer. This step is one of the more significant rules because a contract can have more than one performance obligation, and each obligation will need to be specified. Another way to think about it is to consider if the customer can use or benefit from the good or service on its own. If they can, that is probably a separate performance obligation.

For example, a customer enters into an agreement to buy equipment with a year of free maintenance. There are two distinct performance obligations—the sale of the equipment and the year of maintenance.

Step 3: Determine the Transaction Price

When determining the price, there are a few things to consider and their effects:

  • Variable Consideration—Estimated amount received after rebates, discounts, refunds, etc.
  • Financing Component—Time value of money consideration if there is a financing component.
  • Non-Cash Considerations—Items provided should be measured at fair value of what is received.
  • Amounts Payable to Customer—In the contract, if anything is owed to the customer, the transaction price should be reduced by that amount.

Step 4: Allocate the Transaction Price to the Performance Obligations

A wad of cash.

If there are multiple performance obligations, the transaction price must be allocated to each performance obligation on a relative standalone basis.

The best way to do this is to compile each performance obligation’s stand-alone price if it were sold separately by the entity. If a stand-alone selling price is not directly observable, it must be estimated. Combine the stand-alone selling prices and allocate the transaction price proportionately to each performance obligation based on their respective standalone prices.

Step 5: Recognize Revenue When or As Performance Obligations Are Satisfied

Revenue will be recognized as the performance obligations are completed and control of the good or service is transferred to the customer. Control is considered to be transferred when the customer has the ability to direct the use of and receive benefit from the good or service.

In a retail environment, control is transferred upon the sale of the good, and revenue would be recognized at that time. If the performance obligation is transferred over time, like in a one-year maintenance contract, revenue will be recognized over the year as the performance obligations are completed.

Now that you have been introduced to the five-step process, we’ll now walk through journal entries for sales and payments on account using this process.

Sources

FASB. “Update No. 2014-09 Revenue from Contracts with Customers—Basis.”

]]>
Why It Matters: Receivables and Revenue https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-receivables-and-revenue/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:03 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-receivables-and-revenue/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Describe the accounting and reporting of receivables and revenue

NeatNiks is a small business, but Nick prides himself on his ability to accommodate his customers. He does a lot of his work at night and after regular business hours, so collecting cash or a check for the services he provides isn’t convenient. One way he accommodates his customers is by offering credit. He bills his customers after he has performed the service, and gives them 30 days to pay. Even though he hasn’t collected cash from those credit customers, he recognizes the revenue as earned when the service is provided, and then matches the associated expenses with the revenue in the proper period based on the matching principle and revenue recognition guidelines. As we’ve discussed previously, this gives him a more accurate picture of how his business is doing than just a cash-basis system.

A graphic of a graph with an arrow pointing up.By offering credit terms, NeatNiks operates in good faith that customers will pay their accounts in full. Sometimes this does not occur, and the bad debt from the receivable has to be written off. Because he follows GAAP (even though his company is publicly traded) Nick will use specific accounting principles that dictate the estimation and bad debt processes. In addition, he will have to carefully manage his receivables and bad debt in order to reach his financial goals. By extending credit, Nick can make more sales and grow his business, and someday maybe even turn it into a franchise or other mega-business organization.

But for now, we need to learn how exactly to recognize revenue, especially when it isn’t as clear as the examples we’ve been using, where Nick performs a service and then gets paid. What if Nick entered into a five-year $5,000 contract that included regular cleanings, semi-annual deep cleanings, a warranty provision, payments in advance, and an escalation clause? What if you are working for a company that manufactures luxury yachts to order, that take more than a year to complete, and include an annual service component?

In addition, when you are accounting for receivables, you will be managing a large amount of data that goes beyond just numbers. In this section, we’ll be discussing revenues, receivables, bad debts, and some of the disclosures that go with those. When you are done, you’ll have a working knowledge of the interplay between revenues and receivables.

]]>
Assignment: Accounting for Cash https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-accounting-for-cash/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:02 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-accounting-for-cash/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Accounting for Cash

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Discussion: Counter Culture Cafe https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-counter-culture-cafe/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:01 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-counter-culture-cafe/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Counter Culture Cafe link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Putting It Together: Accounting for Cash https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-accounting-for-cash/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:47:00 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-accounting-for-cash/ Read more »]]> When you started this section, you may have thought that accounting for cash would be simple, and maybe not even terribly important, but hopefully by now you see that both of those notions are not true.

Cash and cash equivalents, the most important of which is the checking account, are extremely important assets—in fact, you could argue that the entire business is built around them. The owner establishes the business by contributing cash and other assets, builds the business by generating more cash and reinvesting it, and eventually reaps the rewards of a successful business by withdrawing that hard-earned cash.

In fact, there is an entire field of management and accounting that deals with the cash-to-cash cycle:

The cash cycle. Inflow is cash paid by customers and outflow is cash paid to suppliers and employees. There are five stages within the cash cycle, all flowing into one another: 1) Stocks ordered from supplier, 2) Production turns stocks into products, 3) stocks held until customers are found, 4) products sold to customers, and 5) customers pay for their purchases.

In short, an owner contributes resources to the business, the business then buys assets, pays people and other expenses, produces a product or service, sells that product or service (hopefully for more than it cost to produce), and then collects the cash from those sales in order to start the process all over again.

Not all the cash is kept in the checking account because as you probably know by now, excess cash can work for you if it is wisely invested. Most companies keep a core cash balance in the checking, savings, money market, and other liquid accounts that is adequate to pay a few months’ expenses, but the rest is invested in stocks, bonds, and mutual funds in order to take advantage of growth and investment income. Accounting for those longer-term investments will be covered in a subsequent module.

The other thing you’ve learned about cash and the checking account is that it can be tempting for an employee with motive, method, and opportunity to dip into that asset. Without adequate internal controls, the company provides the opportunity. If an employee in the right position with the right access has a motive—say pressure from creditors, family, or an emergency—comes up with a method, and feels like it’s possible to get away with it, that combination of events can lead to disaster. Some other assets,  like inventory (like TVs in an electronics store) and equipment (like an iPad or other smaller, moveable items), are also subject to theft and misappropriation, but are still less risky than the cash in the bank, as you saw with the coffee shop. Employees may be tempted to steal a bag of coffee off the shelf (inventory) but that rarely does as much financial damage to the company as theft of cash.

That’s why internal controls, like the bank reconciliation and monitoring by management, are so important, not just for cash in the bank, but for credit cards, cash receipts, cash disbursements, and any other process that clocks cash in and out of the company.

In addition, the basic concepts of internal control you have explored with regard to cash apply to every other process in the company, from accounts receivable to inventory to physical plant and equipment to accounts payable and even expense and revenue accounts. It’s our job, as accountants, not only to account for financial transactions but to safeguard the assets and ensure the accounts and information related to them are as accurate as possible.

]]>
Introduction to Financial Statement Presentation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-statement-presentation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-statement-presentation/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Present cash and cash equivalents on the financial statements

In most textbooks and examples on the web, you’ll see a simple trial balance listed as follows:

Adjusted Trial Balance
Accounts Debits Credits
Cash $22,900
Prepaid Insurance 4,000
Fixed Assets 44,000
Notes Payable $ 40,000
Common Stock 25,000
Retained Earnings 48,350
Dividends 22,000
Sales Revenue 150,000
Automobile Expense 26,500
Insurance Expense 20,000
Salaries Expense 122,500
Supplied Expense 1,450
Totals Single line $263,350
Double line
Single line $263,350
Double line

“Cash” is at the top of the list, right where it should be, but this is not a very good representation of what a real trial balance looks like.

In accounting, what we call cash includes coins; currency; undeposited negotiable instruments such as checks, bank drafts, and money orders; amounts in checking and savings accounts; and demand certificates of deposit. A certificate of deposit (CD) is an interest-bearing deposit that can be withdrawn from a bank at will (demand CD) or at a fixed maturity date (time CD). Only demand CDs that may be withdrawn at any time without prior notice or penalty are included in cash. Cash does not include postage stamps, IOUs, time CDs, or notes receivable.

In addition, the correct terminology is “cash and cash equivalents” because actual currency and coin is usually a tiny, tiny portion of what we call cash.

For instance, in most businesses, every account that can be reconciled has its own GL account. For example, here is a portion of an adjusted trial balance for My Company that only shows the cash accounts:

My Company
Adjusted Trial Balance
For the month ended September 30, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Adjusted trial balance
Debits Credits
1010 Petty Cash 100.00
1011 First Bank Checking 26,745.00
1012 First Bank Payroll (Imprest)
1025 Western Credit Union Savings 16,489.55
1030 First Bank CDs 43,896.66
1045 TIAA Money Market 87,355.40
1050 Baker Bank U.S. Govt. Securities 198,200.00

Notice there’s really only $100 in what we think of normally as cash. Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) prescribes what we consider to be cash and cash equivalents on the financial statements. It also gives us guidance on how to report those amounts, including disclosures we are required to include. That’s what we’ll cover in this section as we finish up accounting for cash.

]]>
Cash and Cash Equivalents https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-and-cash-equivalents/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-and-cash-equivalents/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify cash and cash equivalents
  • Demonstrate proper financial statement presentation of cash and cash equivalents

 

The Facebook logo.When Facebook, Inc. went public back on May 18, 2012, selling its stock on the open market raised over $16 billion in cash for the company. Since then, much of that money has been invested and the company has made money (a LOT of money) and so it has a robust cash balance: over $19 billion. By cash, we mean cash and cash equivalents, and by that, we mean lots of things other than actual cash.

In the spirit of full disclosure, Facebook publishes their definition of cash and cash equivalents in the notes that accompany the financial statements: (Facebook, Inc. Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2019, Note 4, page 81):

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash on deposit with banks and highly liquid investments with maturities of 90 days or less from the date of purchase.

In another note, the company gives more detail. Below is a breakdown of cash and cash equivalents for Facebook for the year ended December 31, 2019, with a comparison to the year ended December 31, 2018 (Facebook, Inc. Form 10-K, Note 4, page 89).[1]

Cash and Cash Equivalents and Marketable Securities

The following table sets forth the cash and cash equivalents and marketable securities (in millions):

December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Subcategory, Cash and cash equivalents:
      Cash $ 4,735 $ 2,713
      Money market funds 12,787 6,792
      U.S. government securities 815 90
      U.S. government agency securities 444 54
      Certificate of deposits and time deposits 217 369
      Corporate debt securities 81 1
Total cash and cash equivalents Single Line19,079Double Line Single Line10,019Double Line

Even though the financial statements say, “Cash,” that number is really a summary of all the demand deposit accounts, such as business checking, payroll, and maybe some tiny petty cash accounts.

A money market fund is a mutual fund that invests solely in cash and cash equivalent securities, which are also called money market instruments. These vehicles are very liquid short-term investments with high credit quality, such as:

  • Certificates of deposit (CDs)
  • Commercial paper
  • U.S. Treasuries
  • Bankers’ Acceptances
  • Repurchase agreements

What all those cash and cash equivalent line items have in common in the above example from Facebook is that they are readily convertible to actual funds in the checking account that can be used to pay bills.

Cash and Cash Equivalents Presentation

Below is a partial balance sheet for Facebook for the year ended December 31, 2019, with a comparison to the year ended December 31, 2018 (Facebook, Inc. Form 10-K, page 73). Notice all numbers are rounded to the nearest million, so the cash and cash equivalents reported are actually just over $19 billion, not $19,000. Also, notice the number has been rounded to $19,079,000,000. That rounding implies a materiality threshold of $499,999.99. Hopefully, the accountants aren’t passing on any errors that large, but if they did, it might not have really affected the financial statements. Anyway, that’s an interesting mathematical exercise to play around with in your spare time.

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

FACEBOOK INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
(in millions, except for number of shares and par value)
Description December 31,
Description 2019 2018
Category, Assets
Subcategory, Current Assets:
     Cash and cash equivalents $     19,079 $     10,019
     Marketable securities 35,776 31,095
     Accounts receivable, net of allowances of $206 and $229 as of December 31, 2019 and December 31, 2018, respectively 9,518 7,587
          Total current assets Single line
66,225
Single line
50,480
Property and equipment, net 35,323 24,683
Operating lease right-of-use assets, net 9,460
Intangible assets, net 894 1,294
Goodwill 18,715 18,301
Other Assets 2,759 2,576
Total assets Single line
$     133,376
Double line
Single line
$     97,334
Double line

Also, notice two things about $19 billion in cash and cash equivalents:

  1. It’s a very, very big number.
    • Take two billion $10 bills and put them in a stack. After about 60 years of stacking, you’d have about 150 stacks, each a mile high.
  2. It’s likely not very much actual cash on hand.

Again, even though we say “cash,” we mean money that is available to spend right now or nearly right now. We call this term “liquidity.” Cash equivalents are highly liquid. Marketable securities are fairly liquid, but not as liquid as cash equivalents because selling stocks and other marketable securities in a hurry may adversely affect the price (imagine taking money out of savings to pay for an emergency expense like a broken tooth versus trying to sell your car). If you examine the above asset section of Facebook’s balance sheet, you may notice the assets are not listed alphabetically, or by descending amount, but by descending assessment of liquidity.


  1. https://investor.fb.com/financials/sec-filings-details/default.aspx?FilingId=13872030
]]>
Record Sales and Purchases by Credit Card https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/record-sales-and-purchases-by-credit-card/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:58 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/record-sales-and-purchases-by-credit-card/ Read more »]]>
  • Differentiate between three methods of recording sales by credit card
  • Demonstrate recording purchases by credit card

 

Record Sales by Credit Card

A company’s accounting procedures for recording credit card sales will depend on how the credit card or charge card transaction is being posted to the bank (which depends on how you set up your service) and how the company then decides to make the entry. There are three possibilities.

Net Method

Assume NeatNiks accepted a credit card on December 14 for a $1,000 cleaning job and the service charge is three percent of sales. The $970 deposit shows up in the bank the next day. The entry to record this deposit is:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 15 Checking account 970.00
Dec 15 Bank Fees 30.00
Dec 15       Service Revenue 1,000.00
Dec 15 To record credit card deposit

Gross Method

Assume NeatNiks accepted a charge card on December 14 for a $1,000 cleaning job and the service charge is three percent of sales. The $100 deposit shows up in the bank the next day, and in January, during the bank reconciliation process, Nick discovers a $30 charge from VISA for the service fee. The entry to record the deposit is:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 15 Checking account 1,000.00
Dec 15       Service Revenue 1,000.00
Dec 15 To record credit card deposit

In January, Nick will backdate the service charge to have it show up in December (following the matching principle):

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 31 Bank Fees 30.00
Dec 31       Checking Account 30.00
Dec 31 To record credit card fees for Dec.

You may find your credit card service provider charges both a per-transaction fee you could record using the net method and a monthly fee you would record using the gross method. In addition, in our example, we posted the card fee to our already existing Bank Fees account, but if we wanted to keep track of charge card fees separately in order to see how much we are spending monthly, quarterly, or annually on bank card fees, we could set up a separate account to track them.

Accounts Receivable Method

Again, this method depends on the arrangement you have with the bank and other credit card servicing vendors.

The entry would look like this at the time the sale was made:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 15 Accounts Receivable 1,000.00
Dec 15       Service Revenue 1,000.00
Dec 15 To record charge card sales

This method would be appropriate if you had to bill the credit card or charge card company periodically. When you receive the payment in January, you would make the following entry:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec 15 Checking account 970.00
Dec 15 Bank Fees 30.00
Dec 15       Accounts Receivable 1,000.00
Dec 15 To record receipt of charge card sales, net of fees

As an accountant, you have to figure out what entries make the most sense for each type of transaction using what you learn in this course.


Record Purchases by Credit Card

Many business-to-business (B2B) transactions are based on credit. For instance, if Home Depot needs 1,000 board feet of lumber from Boise Cascade, the purchasing agent creates a purchase order (PO) and sends it to the vendor (Boise Cascade, in this example). The vendor creates a sales order, sends it to the fulfillment department (probably the warehouse folks), and then someone in the warehouse fills the order, puts it on a truck, creates an invoice (bill), and a packing slip for the shipment, and ships it. Home Depot’s receiving department (loading dock folk) gets the shipment and matches it to the packing slip, puts the inventory on the floor, and sends the packing slip up to accounts payable (AP). The AP clerk makes sure the packing slip matches the invoice and then processes the whole thing (often called a voucher) for payment. The terms usually require Home Depot to pay within 30 days and there is often a discount for paying early, maybe up to two percent. We’ll talk more about this later when we discuss accounts payable.

For many purchases, such as supplies and travel, certain members of the company may have company credit cards. In that case, the purchases may not show up as transactions until the bookkeeper receives the credit card statement, which may be in the next accounting period. If the amounts are immaterial according to the company’s subjective assessment of that term, recording June expenses in July may be acceptable. However, the proper way to record the expenses would be to accrue them to the proper period.

Most computer applications allow you to create a credit card account and to enter transactions as they occur. Take these January transactions, for example:

First World Bank: NeatNiks
Statement 1/31/20XX
First World Bank VISA
Beginning balance $427.89
Date Description Amount
1/20/20XX Domino’s Pizza $18.66
1/22/20XX Target $452.32
1/22/20XX Walmart $88.99
1/26/20XX NAPA auto parts $54.54
1/31/20XX Finance charge $12.49
Statement balance $1,054.89
Available balance $3,866.46

Each charge should be accounted for as it occurs and properly documented:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Jan 20 Meals and Entertainment 576 18.66
Jan 20       First World Bank VISA Payable 210 18.66
Jan 20 To record staff meeting meal

When the credit card balance is paid, the entry would look like this:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Feb 10 First World Bank VISA Payable 210 427.89
Feb 10       Checking Account 110 427.89
Feb 10 To record payment of balance due on VISA

And then the GL will look like this:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
Bal fwd 427.89
Jan 20 GJ101 18.66 446.55
Jan 22 GJ101 452.32 898.87
Jan 22 GJ101 88.99 987.86
Jan 26 GJ101 54.54 1,042.40
Jan 31 GJ101 12.49 1,054.89
Feb 10 GJ101 427.89 627.00

The GL should be reconciled to the VISA statement at the end of the month. In this case, you can see how the GL balance on January 31 of $1,054.89 matches the statement balance, so the reconciliation would be easy.

Credit cards, like petty cash, can be abused. Unlike petty cash, which is usually a fairly small amount of money, credit card charges can add up quickly and get out of control if not carefully monitored. In the next section, we’ll talk about internal controls on credit cards.

]]>
Internal Controls for Credit Card Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/internal-controls-for-credit-card-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:58 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/internal-controls-for-credit-card-transactions/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the internal control processes related to credit card purchases and sales

 

A credit card.It is a common practice for business organizations to issue credit cards to employees in order to facilitate the purchase of goods and to document travel and entertainment expenses. Along with all other business transactions, there should be a thorough accounting and proper tracking of all credit card reimbursements and payments. This thorough accounting requires an adequate internal control system to facilitate payments that are properly authorized, valid, and appropriately business related.

Here are three key internal controls for credit card use that you may want to consider putting in place in your business:

  1. A formal credit card policy. A written credit card policy serves as the foundation of a good credit (or debit) card expense control system. This policy document should establish guidelines regarding the reimbursement of expenses for auto and air travel, lodging, meals, entertainment, and the procurement of goods. All cardholders should review these policies, sign off on them, and agree to abide by its rules. The policy should clearly state the types of allowable purchases and the procedures for documenting the business purpose for each respective expense. It is important to enforce this policy for all card users, regardless of their level in the company’s hierarchy. Allowing top-level employees to bypass these policies can create an atmosphere in which others may do the same. It is also important to spell out the consequences of inappropriate credit card usage.
  2. Substantiation. Original receipts must be submitted for all credit card charges, as these receipts substantiate the purchases made with the card. The business purpose should be documented on the receipt to ensure the charge was a legitimate business expense. The receipt also ensures proper GL coding of the expense. Expense reports and credit card receipts should be submitted for processing in a timely manner to allow proper review and reconciliation of expensed items.
  3. Regular statement reviews. A supervisor who is knowledgeable about the nuances of the business (ideally not a credit card holder) should open and review all credit card statements and supporting receipts to verify the propriety of the charges. The reviewer should be thorough and detailed and have a skeptical mindset. Reviewers should also be comfortable and willing to enforce the internal control policy regarding receipts and coding of expenditures. Employees should not be allowed to verify the authenticity of their own charges.

A few additional controls to consider:

  • Set monthly and overall credit limits for all employees who are issued credit cards.
  • Perform initial and annual credit checks on all employees who are issued a credit card.
  • Disallow cash advances.
  • Set up monitoring rights with the credit card issuer to allow online review and notification of any unusual activity.
  • Compare expense amounts to prior periods and to budgeted amounts.
  • Charging personal items to the business constitutes credit card abuse. With the proper internal controls, you can ensure credit card payments and reimbursements are made for legitimate business purposes and reduce the risk of fraudulent activity.

Accepting credit cards from customers presents a different set of internal control issues—the primary one being chargebacks from stolen or over-limit cards, but there are also ways to mitigate non-fraudulent chargebacks.

Fraudulent Chargebacks

A chargeback is a transaction reversal. The credit card processor withdraws the disputed transaction amount from the merchant’s bank account. The merchant may be given a chance to dispute the chargeback and may win. But if they lose, and they’ve already shipped or delivered what was purchased, they lose not only the sale but also their cost of goods for the item they shipped, their shipping costs, and any other costs associated with the transaction. To top it all off, merchant account providers also charge merchants a chargeback fee for each disputed transaction.

There’s no surefire way to prevent chargebacks. But there are things you can do to minimize them. If you are dealing with customers in person, you may be able to spot fake credit cards by looking over the card carefully. Among the parts of the card to check at are the appearance of the card, the numbers on the card, the magnetic stripe, and the hologram. A customer that seems evasive or fidgety could be a reason for concern as well.

For online sales, you don’t have those visual clues, but there are still steps you can take to reduce the occurrence of fraud.

  • Use address verification (AVS) and card code verification (CCV) for all card-not-present sales (e.g., online and mail-order sales).
  • Be on the lookout for “red flags, such as:
    • Unusually large orders placed through the Internet without any contact from the customer.
    • Rush orders for large quantities or high-priced goods.
    • Orders on U.S. cards shipped to foreign countries.
    • Billing addresses that don’t match the information on file with the credit card company.

Someone inputting credit card into a laptop.

Stolen and fake credit cards aren’t the only cause of chargebacks. Sometimes the cardholder who purchased the item is the perpetrator of the fraud. For instance, some customers may request a chargeback out of buyer’s remorse. Another common trigger is family fraud, which occurs when a friend or relative of the cardholder authorizes a purchase without the cardholder’s knowledge. Merchant errors can also be the cause of chargebacks, as can the simple mistake of having an unrecognizable name on the customer statement. For instance, if Nick Frank used frankenstein.org with his credit card processor, customers may not recognize that the charge is legitimate.

Non-Fraudulent Chargebacks

Below is a list of common non-fraudulent reasons for chargebacks and some suggestions on how to reduce the incidence of these costly and time-consuming issues.

Quality Issues

Customer complaint: The quality of the product or service was not what was promised.

Your company’s prevention plan could include the following:

  • Accurately describe in detail the goods or services offered in order to reduce any potential for confusion or misunderstanding.
  • Obtain your customer’s signature after goods and services are rendered or delivered, acknowledging that the services or goods have been rendered or delivered as described.
  • Be available for your customer should they have any questions or concerns regarding the goods or services.
  • Adequate documentation supporting the above.

Delivery Issues

Customer complaint: Products were not delivered and/or services were not rendered.

Your company’s prevention plan could include:

  • Clear expectations regarding the estimated schedule for services to be rendered or for product delivery.
  • Clear communication over the course of the transaction to inform your customer of any potential delays or updated delivery or service dates.
  • A reminder on your Thank You page telling the purchaser to save their receipt and use it to reconcile their credit card statement.
  • An email to the customer that includes a copy of the receipt, what was purchased, the expected shipping time, and the name of your company.
  • Use a reliable carrier and provide your customer with tracking information, including the carrier, expected delivery date, and tracking number for all goods requiring shipping and handling.
  • Required signature from your customer to acknowledge when a delivery is complete or services are rendered.
  • Adequate documentation (e.g., signed pickup form, delivery confirmation, work order, etc.) or photographic evidence (e.g., services being rendered, installment completions, etc.) illustrating that the cardholder received goods or services. (The same goes for e-commerce transactions: documentation or proof that the digital product or service was provided, such as the date and time goods/services were downloaded.)

Cancelled Orders

Customer complaint: Cancelled order of goods or services.

Your company’s prevention plan could include:

  • Clearly stated refund, return, and cancellation policy on all transaction documents near the cardholder signature area (e.g., signed contract, bill of sale, etc.) and prominently displayed on the company website as well.
  • Quick and courteous responses to customer inquiries and concerns.
  • A good quality monitoring and control system.

Chargebacks directly reduce profit and incur indirect costs, such as additional labor, shipping, and other costs. Minimizing both fraudulent and non-fraudulent chargebacks increases both the immediate financial bottom line and, in the long-term, establishes the reputation of the company as a high-quality, reliable, customer-centric firm, increasing the overall value of the company. Recommending and establishing these kinds of procedures is a valuable service the accounting staff and consultants can provide.

]]>
Introduction to Accounting for Credit Card Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-for-credit-card-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:57 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-for-credit-card-transactions/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Compare methods of recording credit card transactions

The days of paying cash and writing checks for purchases are long gone. Most consumer purchases are made now using one of the three common types of cards:

  • Debit. A debit card draws directly against a demand deposit (e.g., a checking account) balance, so there is little risk to the bank, but there are still fees associated with these transactions. The fee often depends on whether the transaction involves a PIN or not. Generally speaking, the higher the risk of fraud, the higher the fee. Your bank may have issued you a debit card when you opened your checking account. If you run your debit card without a signature or a PIN, that transaction is often facilitated by either VISA or MasterCard and treated, from the seller’s point of view, as a credit card transaction.
  • Credit. A credit card accumulates a balance the consumer/cardholder must eventually pay off with interest. These balances are usually unsecured and there is a significant risk to the bank or company that issued the card. Interest rates to the consumer are high, and the fees to the seller are higher than with a debit card transaction. VISA and MasterCard are common credit cards.
  • Charge. A charge card, as opposed to a credit card, has to be paid off monthly. American Express is a charge card.

A credit card being swiped in a card reader.

For some businesses, uncollectible account losses and other costs of extending credit are a burden. Businesses can pass these costs (and risks) on to banks and agencies issuing national debit or credit cards. The banks and credit card agencies then absorb the uncollectible accounts and costs of extending credit and maintaining records.

Because they are assuming the risk of non-payment, the credit card companies charge the company a fee in addition to the interest charged to the credit card user. The fee is typically between two and six percent of sales. These costs can get expensive and some companies decide it costs too much to honor specific credit cards. Every once in a while you come across a business that requires you to pay with cash or check only, but that is becoming less and less common as consumers demand the convenience of debit, credit, and charge cards.

In addition, a company may issue credit or charge cards to certain employees, but there are risks with that decision, such as the employee using the card for personal expenditures.

Credit, debit, and charge cards make commerce flow more smoothly and conveniently, but there is a cost. In this section, we will learn how to account for those fees, as well as how to protect the business from credit card fraud through the proper use of internal controls.

]]>
Reconciling Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reconciling-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reconciling-journal-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate journal entries related to bank reconciliations

 

Let’s start by reviewing the two-part bank reconciliation for My Company from the previous section:

My Company
September bank reconciliation
Prepared by JC 10/10/20XX
Description Amount Total
Ending Bank Balance $27,395.00
Add: 9/30 Deposit $6,700.00
Single Line $34,095.00
Subcategory, Subtract:
O/S Ck #2004 $1,000.00
# 2008 $650.00
# 2009 $200.00
# 2012 $5,500.00
Single Line $7,350.00
Adjusted Bank Balance Single Line$26,745.00 Double Line
Ending Book Balance $24,457.00
Add: Interest $3.00
Note Collected $3,000.00 $27,460.00
Subcategory, Subtract:
Bank Fee $5.00
Customer NSF $350.00
CK 2005 Error $360.00
Single Line $715.00
Adjusted Book Balance Single Line$26,745.00Double Line

The additions and subtractions to the bank balance to account for timing differences, usually deposits in transit and outstanding checks, are not “adjustments” in the sense of the accounting cycle—they only help us arrive at our target balance: what we believe the GL balance should be if the bank is right (and it usually is). Bank internal accounting controls are rigorous (but not foolproof), so the bank statement serves as our best external objective verification of the actual GL account balance once we take those timing differences into account.

Occasionally we discover a bank error, such as a deposit we have proof of making that did not get “credited” to our account. (Remember that our demand deposit with the bank is a liability to the bank, just as it is an asset to us, so the bank increases our account with a credit entry). If that kind of error happens, we have to do some research and contact the bank to make sure it gets corrected, but we do not have to change our books.

However, all the items in the second half of the reconciliation (or on the right side, if you are preparing the bank reconciliation in two side-by-side columns) need to be recorded in our GL. We do this recording with either (a) regular journal entries or (b) adjusting journal entries. As you may have realized by now, there really isn’t much difference between the two in an old-fashioned paper system. However, in an automated system, the normal daily transactions would be entered through various forms and processes, such as the cash receipts module or accounts payable and cash disbursements. If you come to the end of the period and you find you have to make adjustments, you also have to decide if you will record them as journal entries or go through the automated process you would have used if you’d known about the transaction when it happened. This decision is a combination of (a) the system you are using, (b) your internal accounting process, and (c) internal control constraints. Usually, a staff member is not allowed to make journal entries or process transactions outside of his or her normal sphere of duties in order to prevent theft or mistakes.

In any case, those items that reconcile the general ledger (book balance) to the adjusted bank balance (the target) have to be recorded. For purposes of this lesson, we’ll prepare journal entries.

If we added an item in the bank reconciliation, we will DEBIT the checking account (because a debit increases an asset account in a GL). If we subtracted something, we will CREDIT the checking account.

The first reconciling item was $3 in interest income.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Sept 30 Checking Account 1011 3.00
Sept 30       Interest Revenue 4310 3.00
Sept 30 To record interest revenue per Sept bank statement

The second item was a $3,000 credit (deposit) that the bank showed in our account that we had no idea was there. It turns out, after a call to the bank and examining some supporting documents, a customer owed us $3,500 and we had almost given up on it, but the bank’s collection department had gone after the customer and recovered the outstanding debt (because we had asked them to). They kept $500 as a fee for doing that work for us and put $3,000 in our account. The debt to us on our books was recorded as a note receivable (which we will study later). Probably what had happened was either the customer bought something big from us and promised to pay later, or owed us money in the regular course of business (called accounts receivable) but had trouble paying and so re-negotiated the debt from a regular accounts receivable (account payable on the customer’s books) to a note, which means they signed a promise to pay with interest. Not surprisingly then, they defaulted, and so we hired the bank to go after them.

Scratching all of this scenario out on T accounts, we’d see that we need to credit Notes Receivable for the full amount of the debt, debit cash for $3,000, and then debit an expense account for $500 to balance the entry:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Sept 30 Checking Account 1011 3,000.00
Sept 30 Bank Fee 5755 500.00
Sept 30       Notes Receivable 1600 3,500.00
Sept 30 To record collection of past due note and related collection fee

We didn’t create a new account for the collection fee; we just used our existing bank fees account. However, if this kind of thing happened a lot, we might want to have a tracking account for those collection fees specifically.

Also note that two accounts will be updated when we post the $3,500 credit to Notes Receivable: (1) the general ledger control account # 1600 and (2) a subsidiary ledger that agrees to the GL control account, which lists the amount owed to us by each debtor. The GL account will go down by $3,500, and we will “write off” the $3,500 debt in the subsidiary ledger, even though we only got $3,000 because the maker of the note paid $3,500. The other $500 was a fee we paid.

Recording the bank fee of $5 is relatively straightforward:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Sept 30 Bank Fee 5755 5.00
Sept 30       Checking Account 1011 5.00
Sept 30 To record Sept bank fee from stmt

The bank fee is an expense (cost of doing business) and an expense is shown by an entry on the left side of a ledger (because it decreases our equity), meaning the checking account was decreased as well.

This next one might be tricky. We deposited a check for $350 from a customer and it bounced. Suppose the original entry was a credit of $350 to Service Revenue and a debit of $350 to Checking Account to record services performed in exchange for cash. In reality, that particular check was probably part of a much larger deposit; however, when the check bounces, the bank adjusts our account by subtracting that dishonored check from our balance. Now we have to go out and try to get that money from the customer. In any case, we earned the revenue, so now the customer owes us the money. We’d record the entry like this:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Sept 30 Accounts Receivable 1200 350.00
Sept 30       Checking Account 1011 350.00
Sept 30 To record NSF check

Guess what else we do when we post this $350 to Accounts Receivable? Right. We update the subsidiary ledger to match the GL control account. The subsidiary ledger is a list of all customers, alphabetically (most likely) and the amount each one owes. The GL is organized not by customer, but by date (chronologically).

Lastly, someone in My Company made an error posting a check #2005. The check was written for $5,843, but recorded in our books at $5,483. That’s a transposition error—accidentally switching two numbers. Something to remember about a transposition error is that it is always divisible by 9.

Let’s scratch this out with T accounts:

Checking Account
Debit Credit
5,483.00
360.00
Double line Double line 5,843.00

 

Equipment
Debit Credit
5,483.00
360.00
Double line 5,843.00 Double line

The correct amount of the equipment purchase was $5,843. It’s understated by $360 (divisible by 9) right now because of the recording error, and cash is overstated because we didn’t record the check correctly. We need to decrease cash and increase the asset Equipment.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Sept 30 Equipment 1200 360.00
Sept 30       Checking Account 1011 360.00
Sept 30 To correct error on Ck # 2005

Once these entries are posted, the accountant will verify that the GL balance equals the adjusted bank balance:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
Bal fwd 16,850.00
Sept 1 1,500.00 18,350.00
Sept 1 750.00 17,600.00
Sept 5 980.00 16,620.00
Sept 5 275.00 16,345.00
Sept 8 1,000.00 15,345.00
Sept 10 5,483.00 9,862.00
Sept 14 2,514.00 12,376.00
Sept 15 350.00 12,726.00
Sept 15 333.00 12,393.00
Sept 20 500.00 12,893.00
Sept 20 480.00 12,413.00
Sept 20 650.00 11,763.00
Sept 22 200.00 11,563.00
Sept 24 10,000.00 21,563.00
Sept 28 2,571.00 18,992.00
Sept 28 235.00 18,757.00
Sept 28 4,500.00 23,257.00
Sept 30 6,700.00 29,957.00
Sept 30 5,500.00 24,457.00
Sept 30 3.00 24,460.00
Sept 30 3,000.00 27,460.00
Sept 30 5.00 27,455.00
Sept 30 350.00 27,105.00
Sept 30 360.00 26,745.00

The number highlighted in green is our ending GL balance before we did the bank reconciliation and before we then posted our reconciling entries.

The ending cash balance on the GL is now reconciled to the adjusted bank statement balance.

When a company maintains more than one checking account, it must reconcile each account separately with the balance on the bank statement for that account. The depositor should also check carefully to see that the bank did not combine the transactions of the two accounts.

Within the internal control structure, segregation of duties is an important way to prevent fraud. One place to segregate duties is between the cash disbursement cycle and bank reconciliations. To prevent collusion among employees, the person who reconciles the bank account should not be involved in the cash disbursement cycle. Also, the bank should mail the statement directly to the person who reconciles the bank account each month. Sending the statement directly limits the number of employees who would have an opportunity to tamper with the statement.

You can view the transcript for “Bank Reconciliations and Journalizing” here (opens in new window).

 


]]>
Practice: Preparing a Bank Reconciliation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-preparing-a-bank-reconciliation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-preparing-a-bank-reconciliation/
  • Prepare a bank reconciliation
  • Demonstrate journal entries related to bank reconciliations

 

 

]]>
Reconciling Items https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reconciling-items/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:55 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reconciling-items/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify common reconciling items

 

Let’s take a look at NeatNiks’s GL for the month of October:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00
Oct 4 GJ1 12,000.00 8,000.00
Oct 15 GJ1 1,500.00 9,500.00
Oct 25 GJ1 2,600.00 6,900.00
Oct 26 GJ1 1,000.00 5,900.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 7,500.00
Oct 31 GJ2 4,000.00 3,500.00

And now the bank statement:

First World Bank: NeatNiks
Statement 10/1/20XX – 10/31/20XX
Balance at 10/3/20XX $0.00
Deposits $21,500.00
Transfers in $0.00
Checks and debits ($15,600.00)
Balance at 10/31/20XX Single Line$5,900.00Double Line
Deposits and other Credits
10/1/20XX $20,000.00
10/15/20XX $1,500.00
Single Line$21,500Double Line
Checks and other debits
10/4/20XX Market Street Truck Rental #1000 $12,000.00
10/25/20XX Hugh’s Auto Insurance #1001 $1,500.00
10/25/20XX Carol Caine #1002 $1,100.00
10/26/20XX Cleaning Supplies, Inc. #1003 $1,000.00
Single Line$15,600Double Line

Theoretically, since they both show the same information, the bank statement and the GL should match, but notice that NeatNiks’s GL shows an ending balance of $3,500 but the bank shows $5,900.We need to reconcile the two. In accounting, we don’t think of reconciling as making the records agree. It’s more about explaining the differences. The process is fairly straightforward if we are systematic about it. First, cross off everything that agrees between the two. What’s left is the differences that need to be explained.

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00
Oct 4 GJ1 12,000.00 8,000.00
Oct 15 GJ1 1,500.00 9,500.00
Oct 25 GJ1 2,600.00 6,900.00
Oct 26 GJ1 1,000.00 5,900.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 7,500.00
Oct 31 GJ2 4,000.00 3,500.00

Going through the same process on the bank statement shows that everything on the bank statement is in the general ledger:

First World Bank: NeatNiks
Statement 10/1/20XX – 10/31/20XX
Balance at 10/3/20XX $0.00
Deposits $21,500.00
Transfers in $0.00
Checks and debits $15,600.00
Balance at 10/31/20XX Single Line$5,900.00Double Line
Deposits and other Credits
10/1/20XX $20,000.00
10/15/20XX $1,500.00
Single Line$21,500Double Line
Checks and other debits
10/4/20XX Market Street Truck Rental #1000 $12,000.00
10/25/20XX Hugh’s Auto Insurance #1001 $1,500.00
10/25/20XX Carol Caine #1002 $1,100.00
10/26/20XX Cleaning Supplies, Inc. #1003 $1,000.00
Single Line$15,600Double Line

We have narrowed down the difference between the general ledger GL and the bank statement to two items:

  • A deposit Nick made at the end of October in the amount of $1,600 and recorded in the GL is not showing on the bank statement.
  • A withdrawal Nick made at the end of October and recorded in the GL is not showing on the bank statement.

The next thing the accountant would do is check the bank balance and transactions at the beginning of November:

First World Bank: NeatNiks
Statement 11/1/20XX-
Balance at 11/1/20XX $5,900.00
Deposits $4,100.00
Transfers in $0.00
Checks and debits ($6,000.00)
Balance at — Single Line$4,000.00Double Line
Deposits and other Credits
11/1/20XX $1,600.00
11/5/20XX $2,500.00
Single Line$4,100Double Line
Checks and other debits
11/1/20XX Nick Frank #1004 $4,000.00
11/4/20XX Deborah Hill #1005 $500.00
11/5/20XX Office Supplies, Inc. #1006 $1,500.00
Single Line$6,000Double Line

The bank statement reconciles to the GL. The difference can be explained by the timing of the deposit and the timing of the check, both recorded in October in NeatNiks’s GL, but not on the bank statement for a few days while they were being processed and approved. These two reconciling items are common. They are called deposits in transit and outstanding checks.


]]>
Bank Reconciliation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/bank-reconciliation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:55 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/bank-reconciliation/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare a bank reconciliation

 

Let’s examine a more complicated (and therefore more realistic) example of reconciling the GL to the bank.

This bank statement is an example of the transactions that occurred during the month of September for My Company:

First Bank
Virginia Beach, VA
Customer: My Company Statement Date September 30
111 College Way
Virginia Beach, VA
September 1 Beginning Balance $16,850
+ Deposits and Other Credits $22,367
– Checks and other Debits ($11,822)
September 30 Ending Balance $27,395
Deposits and other Credits
1-Sep $1,500
15-Sep $2,514
16-Sep $350
20-Sep $500
25-Sep $10,000
29-Sep $4,500
Interest $3
CM $3,000
Total Deposits $22,367
Checks and Other Debits
2001 1-Sep $750
2002 5-Sep $980
2002 5-Sep $275
2005 10-Sep $5,843
2006 15-Sep $333
2007 21-Sep $480
2010 28-Sep $2,571
2011 28-Sep $235
SC 30-Sep $5
NSF 18-Sep $350
Total Checks $11,822
Notes
CM is for collection of a note. Note was for $3,500 but the bank charged a $500 collection fee.
SC is for bank service charges.
NSF is for customer payment that could not be funded due to Non Sufficient Funds

In the Deposit and Credits section, you see the deposits made into the account and a CM, which is a collection of a note (see note at bottom of statement) and interest the bank has paid to your account. In the Checks and Debits section, you see the individual checks that have been processed by the bank and you also see SC for a bank service charge on your account as well as a NSF (stands for Non-Sufficient Funds) and means we made a deposit from a customer but the customer did not have enough money to pay the check (bounced check).

Here is the company’s GL:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
Bal fwd 16,850.00
Sept 1 1,500.00 18,350.00
Sept 1 750.00 17,600.00
Sept 5 980.00 16,620.00
Sept 5 275.00 16,345.00
Sept 8 1,000.00 15,345.00
Sept 10 5,483.00 9,862.00
Sept 14 2,514.00 12,376.00
Sept 15 350.00 12,726.00
Sept 15 333.00 12,393.00
Sept 20 500.00 12,893.00
Sept 20 480.00 12,413.00
Sept 20 650.00 11,763.00
Sept 22 200.00 11,563.00
Sept 24 10,000.00 21,563.00
Sept 28 2,571.00 18,992.00
Sept 28 235.00 18,757.00
Sept 28 4,500.00 23,257.00
Sept 30 6,700.00 29,957.00
Sept 30 5,500.00 24,457.00

The bank balance on September 30 is $27,395, but according to My Company records, the ending cash balance is $24,457. We need to do a bank reconciliation (and some research) to explain the difference.

Stop here for a moment to cross off any items that appear on both the bank statement and the GL because they don’t have to be reconciled. Ignore any slight timing differences because, for instance, the check the company wrote on September 20 for $480 didn’t clear the bank until the next day, but that’s not a problem because it’s on the bank statement and in the GL.

After comparing the bank statement and records of My Company, you should have identified the following reconciling items:

  1. Deposit in transit dated 9/30 for $6,700.
  2. Outstanding checks #2004, 2008, 2009, 2012.
  3. Interest paid by the bank $3.
  4. Note collected by bank $3500 less $500 fee.
  5. Bank service charge $5.
  6. Customer NSF $350.
  7. Error in Check #2005 correctly processed by the bank as $5,843 but recorded in our records as $5,483.

The following table will give you some examples of how reconciling items apply in a bank reconciliation:

Bank Reconciliation
Ending Cash Balance per Bank Ending Cash Balance per Books
Add Deposits in Transit Note Collections and Interest
Subtract Outstanding Checks Customer NSF and Bank Service Fees
Add/Subtract Bank errors Book errors
= Adjusted Bank Balance Adjusted Book Balance

Deposits

Compare the deposits listed on the bank statement with the deposits on the company’s books. To make this comparison, place check marks in the bank statement and in the company’s books by the deposits that agree. Then determine the deposits in transit. A deposit in transit is typically a day’s cash receipts recorded in the depositor’s books in one period, but recorded as a deposit by the bank in the succeeding period. The most common deposit in transit is the cash receipts deposited on the last business day of the month. Normally, deposits in transit occur only near the end of the period covered by the bank statement. For example, a deposit made in a bank’s night depository on May 31 would be recorded by the company on May 31 and by the bank on June 1. Thus, the deposit does not appear on a bank statement for the month ended on May 31. Also, check the deposits in transit listed in last month’s bank reconciliation against the bank statement. Immediately investigate any deposit made during the month but missing from the bank statement (unless it involves a deposit made at the end of the period).

Paid Checks

If canceled checks (a company’s checks processed and paid by the bank) are returned with the bank statement, compare them to the statement to be sure both amounts agree. Then sort the checks in numerical order. Next, determine which checks are outstanding. Outstanding checks are those issued by a depositor but not paid by the bank from which they are drawn. The party receiving the check may not have deposited it immediately. Once deposited, checks may take several days to clear the banking system. Determine the outstanding checks by comparing the check numbers that have cleared the bank with the check numbers issued by the company. Use check marks in the company’s record of checks issued to identify those checks returned by the bank. Checks issued that have not yet been returned by the bank are the outstanding checks. If the bank does not return checks but only lists the cleared checks on the bank statement, determine the outstanding checks by comparing this list with the company’s record of checks issued. Sometimes checks written long ago are still outstanding. Checks outstanding as of the beginning of the month appear on the prior month’s bank reconciliation. Most of these have cleared during the current month; list those that have not cleared as still outstanding on the current month’s reconciliation.

Bank debit and credit memos

Verify all debit and credit memos on the bank statement. Debit memos reflect deductions for items such as service charges, non-sufficient funds (NSF) checks, safe-deposit box rent, and notes paid by the bank for the depositor. Credit memos reflect additions for items such as notes collected for the depositor by the bank and wire transfers of funds from another bank in which the company sends funds to the home office bank. Check the bank debit and credit memos with the depositor’s books to see if they have already been recorded. Make journal entries for any items not already recorded in the company’s books.

Bank Errors

Sometimes banks make errors by depositing or taking money out of an account in error. You will need to contact the bank to correct these errors, but will not record any errors in your records because the bank error is unrelated to your records.

Book Errors

Image of a bank.List any Book errors. A common error by depositors is recording a check in the accounting records at an amount that differs from the actual amount (often due to a typo). For example, a $47 check may be recorded as $74. Although the check clears the bank at the amount written on the check ($47), the depositor frequently does not catch the error until reviewing the bank statement or canceled checks.

Preparing a Bank Reconciliation

The first step in preparing the bank reconciliation is to adjust the bank balance for any timing differences and/or the rare bank error. Add deposits in transit and subtract outstanding checks so the bank balance is adjusted to reflect transactions My Company made in September that the bank didn’t record until October because of lag time:

Description Amount Total
Ending Bank Balance $27,395.00
Add: 9/30 Deposit $6,700.00
Single Line $34,095.00
Subcategory, Subtract:
O/S Ck #2004 $1,000.00
# 2008 $650.00
# 2009 $200.00
# 2012 $5,500.00
Single Line $7,350.00
Adjusted Bank Balance Single Line$26,745.00 Double Line

If the bank records are accurate, this should be the GL balance. However, My Company missed recording a couple of items and made a mistake. If we take those errors into account, the GL would look like this:

Description Amount Total
Ending Book Balance $24,457.00
Add: Interest $3.00
Note Collected $3,000.00 $27,460.00
Subcategory, Subtract:
Bank Fee $5.00
Customer NSF $350.00
CK 2005 Error $360.00
Single Line $715.00
Adjusted Book Balance Single Line$26,745.00Double Line

When the bank (top section of the reconciliation) and book (bottom section) are in agreement, you are almost finished. On the bank side of the reconciliation, you do not need to do anything else except contact the bank if you notice any bank errors. On the book side, you will need to record journal entries for each of the reconciling items, because those are transactions you forgot to record in September during your regular bookkeeping process.

(Note: Sometimes the adjusted bank balance is on the left side and the adjusted book balance is on the right side.)



 

]]>
Practice: Journalizing Petty Cash Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-journalizing-petty-cash-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-journalizing-petty-cash-transactions/
  • Demonstrate petty cash journal entries and reconciliation

Let’s practice a bit more.

 

 

]]>
Introduction to Preparing a Bank Reconciliation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-a-bank-reconciliation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-a-bank-reconciliation/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Recognize the significance of the bank reconciliation as an internal control

Most companies use checking accounts to handle their cash transactions. The company deposits its cash receipts in a bank checking account and writes checks to pay its bills. Keep in mind—a bank account is an asset to the company BUT to the bank, your account is a liability because the bank owes the money in your bank account to you. For this reason, in your bank account, deposits are credits (remember, liabilities increase with a credit) and checks and other reductions are debits (liabilities decrease with a debit).

For example, here’s the first transaction from NeatNiks’s from the company perspective:

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a checking account with a debit balance carried forward of 0 dollars. There is also a debit entry of 20,000 dollars. There is an ending balance of 20,000 dollars. On the right side is the Owner's Capital account. It has a balance carried forward of 0 dollars and a credit entry of 20,000 dollars. It has an ending credit total of 20,000 dollars.

Here’s the same transaction as recorded by the bank:

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is the Cash reserves account. It has a debit balance carried forward of 50,000,000 dollars. There's a debit entry of 20,000 dollars. There is an ending debit balance of 50,020,000 dollars. On the right side is the Due to NeatNiks account. Its balance carried forward is 0 dollars and there is also a credit entry of 20,000 dollars. The ending credit balance is 20,000 dollars.

NeatNiks’s demand deposit (checking account) is a liability to the bank. If Nick Frank spends $150 at Home Depot using the business debit card, the bank will make the following entry when it sends the payment to Home Depot on your behalf:

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is the Cash reserves account. It has a debit balance carried forward of 50,000,000 dollars. There's a debit entry of 20,000 dollars. There is also a credit entry of 150 dollars, leaving an ending debit balance of 50,019,850 dollars. On the right side is the Due to NeatNiks account. Its balance carried forward is 0 dollars and there is also a credit entry of 20,000 dollars. It has a debit entry of 150 dollars. The ending credit balance is 19,850 dollars.

That’s why it’s called a debit card. Because the bank debits your account when you use it.

The bank sends the company a statement each month that is really just a printout of the bank’s ledger for your account, which is really a subsidiary ledger because the bank doesn’t have a general ledger (GL) account for every depositor. The company checks this statement against its records to determine if it must make any corrections or adjustments in either the company’s balance or the bank’s balance. A bank reconciliation is a schedule the company (depositor) prepares to reconcile, or explain, the difference between the cash balance on the bank statement and the cash balance on the company’s books. The company prepares a bank reconciliation to determine its actual cash balance and prepare any entries to correct the cash balance in the ledger.

And that is the main internal control for our “cash” accounts. If the owner of the coffee shop had simply used a basic internal control, she would have noticed that the deposits being recorded by the bank were different (smaller than) the ones being recorded in the company’s records, unless the thief was somehow able to manipulate the cash register and other sales records.

]]>
Voucher System https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/voucher-system/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/voucher-system/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the voucher system

 

At times, every business finds it convenient to have small amounts of cash available for immediate payment of items such as delivery charges, postage stamps, taxi fares, dinner money for employees working overtime, and other small items. To permit these cash disbursements and still maintain adequate control over cash, companies frequently establish a petty cash fund of a round figure such as $100 or $500. The petty cash account is a current asset and will have a normal debit balance.

Usually, one individual, called the petty cash custodian or cashier, is responsible for the control of the petty cash fund and documenting the disbursements made from the fund. By assigning the responsibility for the fund to one individual (or position), the company establishes a baseline amount of internal control over the cash in the fund. Since petty cash isn’t normally a material amount of money, petty cash is accounted for in the most expedient way possible, just like supplies are. Some companies won’t have stringent internal controls over petty cash, but looking at the best theoretical control system will be a good exercise in applying internal controls to any asset account.

The petty cash fund should be large enough to make disbursements for a reasonable period, such as a month. The company treasurer or CFO establishes the petty cash fund by writing a check, usually payable to “cash”. After the check is cashed, the petty cash custodian places the money in a small box that can be locked. The fund is now ready to be disbursed as needed.

One of the conveniences of the petty cash fund is that payments from the fund require no journal entries at the time of payment. Thus, using a petty cash fund avoids the need for making many entries for small amounts. The bookkeeping staff makes one compound journal entry when the fund is replenished (usually at the end of each month).

When disbursing cash from the fund, the petty cash custodian updates a petty cash voucher, which should be signed by the person receiving the funds. A petty cash voucher is a document or form that shows the amount of and reason for a petty cash disbursement.

A sample petty cash voucher

The custodian staples any source documents (usually a receipt) to the petty cash voucher (some petty cash vouchers are printed on envelopes to hold the receipts). At all times, the employee responsible for petty cash is accountable for having the cash and the petty cash vouchers equal to the total amount of the fund. For instance, if the fund is maintained at $100, and the controller wanted to do a mini-audit during the middle of the month, looking in the box, she would find (theoretically) a few receipts that total, say, $92.60 along with $7.40 in cash and change.

The petty cash fund is replenished at the end of the accounting period, or sooner if it becomes low.

In the next section, we’ll run through a series of petty cash transactions, establishing petty cash, disbursing it, replenishing it, changing the amount of cash, and finally, closing a petty cash account.

]]>
Journalizing Petty Cash Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-petty-cash-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journalizing-petty-cash-transactions/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate petty cash journal entries and reconciliation

 

Back to our example in the previous section: Greta, the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) of a business, establishes a petty cash fund by writing a check for $100, cashing it at the bank in exchange for five $20s, and putting the cash in a secure box at the front desk. The CFO puts her assistant, Frank, in charge of the funds. The bookkeeper, Carlos, records this transaction in the journal as follows:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Jan. 1 Petty Cash 100.00
Jan. 1       Checking Account 100.00
Jan. 1 To record transfer of cash from checking to cash box

After posting to the ledger (we’ll use T accounts here), the checking account balance will go down by $100 and the petty cash balance will go up by $100. Both of these numbers reflect reality and you could verify them by (a) reconciling the bank statement to the checking account in the general ledger and (b) by looking in the cash box and counting the money in there.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a Checking account. There is a debit balance carried forward of 15,286.61 dollars and a credit entry of 100 dollars. There is an ending debit balance of 15,186.61 dollars. On the right is a Petty Cash account. There is a debit entry of 0 dollars and another of 100 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 100 dollars.

At the end of the month, assume the $100 petty cash fund has a balance of $6.25 in actual cash (a five-dollar bill, a one-dollar bill, and a quarter). Frank, who is the responsible person, has been filling out the voucher during the month, and all the receipts are stapled to the voucher.

Petty Cash Voucher
Custodian: Frank Wright Balance: 100.00
DATE Paid to/Rec’d from Purpose Amount Balance
1/10/20XX UPS shipping to customer 22.75 22.75
1/10/20XX USPS postage stamps 50.80 73.55
1/15/20XX Carmen S. Diego flowers for office 19.05 92.60
  1. An independent employee, say the controller (Fei Xu), examines and approves the petty cash voucher;
  2. Fei Xu sends it to the accounts payable clerk (Keisha) who cuts a check for $93.75 payable to Petty Cash;
  3. The company treasurer, or CFO in this case, Greta, signs the check (along with a bunch of other checks) and it goes back to Frank, the petty cash custodian; and
  4. Frank takes the check to the bank, cashes it, and then restores the cash in the fund to its $100 balance.

The journal entry created when the check is cut looks like this:

JournalPage 102
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Feb. 1 Shipping Expense 22.75
Feb. 1 Postage 50.80
Feb. 1 Office Supplies 19.05
Feb. 1 Cash Over/Short 1.15
Feb. 1       Checking Account 93.75
Feb. 1 To record check #1041 replenishing petty cash

 

Sometimes the petty cash custodian makes errors in making change from the fund or doesn’t receive correct amounts back from users. These errors cause the cash in the fund to be more or less than the amount of the fund less the total vouchers. We post the discrepancy to an account called Cash Over and Short. The Cash Over and Short account can be either an expense (short) or a revenue (over), depending on whether it has a debit or credit balance. It’s uncommon to have cash over, but it happens occasionally.

Right after this entry has been recorded, the check cashed, and the proceeds put in the box, there will be $100 in the box again, an amount which will match the general ledger account. In fact, there is always $100 in the box if you add up all the receipts and the cash (more or less, depending on the cash over/short situation). This system simply delays the recording of small expenses until the end of the accounting cycle or the fund is replenished. It’s not really an adjusting journal entry because there is an actual transaction being recorded. Having a petty cash account is  just more convenient than going to the accounts payable clerk every time someone needs a stamp or a liter of coffee for a meeting.

Using T Accounts to stand in for full ledgers would make posting the entry look like this:

Two T asset accounts side by side. On the left is the checking account, which has a debit balance carried forward of 15,186.61 dollars. There is a credit entry of 93.75 dollars from a check numbered 1041. On the right side is the petty cash account. There is a debit entry of 100 dollars and a total debit balance of 100 dollars.

Two Expense T accounts. On the left is the Office Supplies account. It has a debit entry of 86.86 dollars. It also has a check entry on the debit side for a check numbered 1041 at a value of 19.05 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 105.91 dollars. On the right is the Shipping account. It has a debit entry of 891.58 dollars. There is also a debit entry from a check numbered 1041 worth 22.75 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 914.33 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is the postage account. It has a debit entry for 100.96 dollars and another debit entry for 50.80 dollars from check number 1041. There is a total debit balance of 151.76 dollars. On the right side is the Cash Over/Short account. There's a debit entry of 14.80 dollars. There's also a debit entry for 1.15 dollars from a check numbered 1041. There is a debit total of 15.95 dollars.

Entries to the petty cash fund itself are fairly rare. With your knowledge of accounts, debits and credits, and T accounts, you should be able to figure out any entries that crop up. Other than the entry establishing the fund, there are only three other times you might make an entry to the petty cash account:

  1. If the fund needs more cash, the journal entry looks the same as the entry to establish the fund.
  2. If some cash is returned to the bank because the accounting staff (probably the controller or the CFO) think there is too much in the box, the entry is the reverse of the establishing entry.
  3. If petty cash is closed out because it’s no longer needed, the entry is the reverse of the establishing entry.

As you think back on this system, note that there are several internal controls in place, most notably segregation of duties, assignment of responsibility, and a reconciliation (monitoring) process. In the next section, we’ll look at one of the most important cash controls, the bank reconciliation process, in detail.

 

]]>
Cash Disbursements https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-disbursements/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-disbursements/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply internal control concepts to payments

 

Companies also need controls over cash disbursements. Since a company spends most of its cash by check or bank transfer (ACH, wire transfers, etc.), many of the internal controls for cash disbursements deal with the authorization process. The basic principle of segregation of duties applies in controlling cash disbursements. The following are some basic control procedures for cash disbursements:

A person signing a piece of paper on the signature line.

  • Make all disbursements by check or from petty cash. Obtain proper approval for all disbursements and create a permanent record of each disbursement. Many retail stores make refunds for returned merchandise from the cash register. When this practice is followed, clerks should have refund tickets approved by a supervisor before refunding cash.
  • Require all checks to be serially numbered and limit access to checks to employees authorized to write checks.
  • Require two signatures on each check over a material amount, ensuring that one person cannot withdraw funds from the bank account.
  • Arrange duties so the employee who authorizes payment of a bill does not sign checks. Otherwise, the checks could be written to friends in payment of fictitious invoices.
  • Require approved documents to support all checks issued.
  • Instruct the employee authorizing cash disbursements to make certain the payment is for a legitimate purpose and is made out for the exact amount and to the proper party.
  • Stamp the supporting documents as paid when liabilities are paid and indicate the date and number of the check issued. These procedures lessen the chance of paying the same debt more than once.
  • Arrange duties so those employees who sign checks neither have access to canceled checks nor prepare the bank reconciliation. This policy makes it more difficult for an employee to conceal a theft.
  • Have an employee who has no other cash duties prepare the bank reconciliation each month and discover errors and shortages quickly.
  • Void all checks incorrectly prepared. Mark these checks void and retain them to prevent unauthorized use.
]]>
Introduction to Accounting for Petty Cash https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-for-petty-cash/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-for-petty-cash/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Establish and maintain a petty cash system

Some small but necessary expenses require immediate funds. The amount for these expenses is generally small, meaning a check isn’t required.

For such instances, every business has a separate fund to deal with small frequent expenditures. This fund is called a petty cash fund.

A cash register drawer full of paper money and coins.Petty cash is a convenient store of funds kept aside for small everyday expenses. These expenses are too small to disburse a check, thus petty cash is included in the “cash” account under current assets. Under the petty cash system, a fixed amount should be reserved and replenished frequently. All the regular business needs can be quickly taken care of by petty cash funds.

Examples of petty cash expenses include office supplies, cards or flowers for customers, catered lunches, postage, or any other small item, even maybe a run to Starbucks to boost the productivity of an impromptu meeting.

Most larger companies have debit or credit cards for these kinds of purchases or even a preloaded purchase card tied to the monthly budget, but those cards may be reserved for management. The process of controlling, recording, and reconciling petty cash is still instructive, even if your company doesn’t actually have a cash box sitting under the front desk.

Also, learning the petty cash system is a natural first step to learning how to control, record, and reconcile the larger transactions that flow through the checking account.

]]>
Cash Receipts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-receipts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:51 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/cash-receipts/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply internal control concepts to receipts

 

Since cash is the most liquid of all assets, a business cannot survive and prosper if it does not have adequate control over its cash. Cash is the asset with the greatest chance of “going missing” and this risk is why we must ensure we have strong internal controls built around the cash process. Since many business transactions involve cash, it is a vital factor in the operation of a business. Of all company assets, cash is the most easily mishandled either through theft or carelessness. To control and manage its cash, a company should:

A paper receipt in a group of groceries.

  • Account for all cash transactions accurately to ensure correct information is available regarding cash flows and balances.
  • Make certain enough cash is available to pay bills as they come due.
  • Avoid holding too much idle cash because excess cash could be invested to generate income, such as interest.
  • Prevent the loss of cash due to theft or fraud.

When a merchandising company sells products to customers, it usually takes payment right there in the form of cash, check, or credit card.

In the case of cash, a clerk takes the money, records it, and places it in a cash register. The presence of a customer as the sale is rung up usually ensures a cashier enters the correct amount of the sale in the cash register. At the end of each day, stores reconcile the cash in each cash register with its cash register tape or computer printout for that specific register.

Did you know? The cheapest and easiest internal control test is by involving the public. If a company requires all transactions to be entered in the cash register, the company can do a “promotion” to verify employees are following this. The promotions would be like “If your receipt has a red star on the back, get a free cookie” or “If you do not get a receipt, receive a free drink.” Sound familiar? The public is now looking for a receipt for each transaction and will ask if they don’t receive it. The benefit of finding theft will outweigh the cost of giving away a little free food.

Businesses selling to other businesses often extend credit, allowing the purchasing company to pay later via check or bank transfers. Companies vary in how they implement internal controls, but they usually observe the following principles:

  • Prepare a record of all cash receipts as soon as cash is received. Most thefts of cash occur before a record is made of the receipt. Once a record is made, it is easier to trace a theft.
  • Deposit all cash receipts intact as soon as feasible, preferably on the day they are received or on the next business day. Undeposited cash is more susceptible to misappropriation.
  • Arrange duties to ensure that the employee who handles cash receipts does not record the receipts in the accounting records. This control feature follows the general principle of segregation of duties given earlier in the chapter, as does the next principle.
  • Arrange duties to make sure the employee who receives the cash does not disburse the cash. This control measure is possible in all but the smallest companies.

For example, a company may have the person opening the mail prepare a record of the checks received as soon as they are received. This “pre-list” goes to the company treasurer or controller, or some other third party who is not responsible for recording them. The checks go to the accounting department and the payments are recorded in the general ledger (GL), credited to the customer account, and then sent to the bank for deposit, but not before the deposit is compared to the pre-list to make sure everything is there. Then the deposit is eventually traced back from the bank statement to the GL (most likely during the reconciliation process).

]]>
Introduction to Establishing Internal Controls https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-establishing-internal-controls/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:50 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-establishing-internal-controls/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Explain the concept of internal control over cash

Most businesses use a checking account to pay bills and accept debit and credit cards for payment, but some establishments operate on an actual cash basis; marijuana dispensaries are perhaps the most common example.

An open cash register drawer, filled with bills and coins of varying values.Nearly two-thirds of America’s states have legalized marijuana sales for certain uses, but the federal government still classifies marijuana as a Schedule 1 drug. Banks that handle marijuana money can be charged with money laundering. Dispensaries then are stuck working with cash, which means that they pay their bills (including payroll) in cash, collect cash from customers, and in general have a ton of currency sitting in the till. For these businesses, watching over that money is especially important, and part of the control structure may include having cameras above the tills that monitor the cashiers and having two or more people who count the till at the end of each day and reconcile it with the sales receipts.

However, even a business with hardly any cash on hand has to watch over the bank account, and all assets for that matter, using internal controls that we accountants set up.

]]>
Internal Controls https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/internal-controls/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:50 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/internal-controls/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify principles of internal control
  • Identify common internal control activities

 

Internal Control Structure

According to the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, there are five components of an internal control structure. When these components are linked to the organization’s operations, they can quickly respond to shifting conditions. The components are:

  1. Control environment
  2. Risk assessment
  3. Control activities
  4. Information and communication
  5. Monitoring

Control Environment

The control environment is the basis for all other elements of the internal control structure. The control environment includes many factors such as ethical values, management’s philosophy, the integrity of the employees of the corporation, and the guidance provided by management or the board of directors.

For example, Neeraj is a business owner who didn’t monitor his accounting records, choosing instead to let a trusted friend, Janet, make deposits. Unfortunately it turned out Janet was stealing cash out of the deposits. It would have been easy to catch that theft by simply matching the deposits from the bank statements to the sales receipts (which is how forensic accountants determined that Janet had skimmed $42,828.96 over 18 months).

Risk Assessment

A man working on a tablet with papers and coffee on the table next to him.After the entity sets objectives, the risks (such as theft and waste of assets) from external and internal sources must be assessed. Examining the risks associated with each objective allows management to develop the means to control these risks.

In the old days before debit cards, when you drove up to a gas station to fuel up, there were attendants with wads of cash in their pockets to make change for customers who regularly paid in cash. Not remarkably, the company accountants would find at the end of the month that cash did not reconcile with sales. It was always short. However, it was considered a cost of doing business. The cost of putting in extensive control would outweigh the additional collection of cash, so the loss was considered acceptable—up to a point. With the advent of debit cards and self-serve gas, much of that risk went away.

Control Activities

To address the risks associated with each objective, management establishes control activities. These activities include procedures that employees must follow. Examples include procedures to protect the assets through segregation of employee duties and the other means we discussed earlier.

Some businesses are too small to be able to have extensive cross-checking. A sole proprietor probably doesn’t have to worry too much about controls because he or she owns everything anyway. Notice, however, that the coffee shop referenced above was too small to separate duties among even three or four people, which would have made the theft of cash a lot harder. Even so, if management isn’t even aware of the potential for a problem and isn’t watching for it, someone with a motive to steal and an idea about the method will have the opportunity. In addition to preventing fraud and theft, internal controls should be designed to catch and prevent mistakes.

Information and Communication

Information relevant to decision making must be collected and reported in a timely manner. The events that yield this data may come from internal or external sources. Communication throughout the entity is important to achieve management’s goals. Employees must understand what is expected of them and how their responsibilities relate to the work of others. Communication with external parties such as suppliers and shareholders is also important.

So often in business people operate in compartments, each one “just doing the job,” but good internal control relies on all the parts of a company, internal and external, working together. An unscrupulous employee could steal cash, creating a false sale to cover it, or pocketing a payment on a vendor account. Communication with the customers and vendors, along with other internal controls, could uncover those defalcations. More importantly, constant communication can increase profits, which is the goal of for-profit businesses, and can assist in coming up with new products, better processes, and business insights that people immersed in the day-to-day operations can’t see. For instance, communication with an accountant could have saved the coffee shop tens of thousands of dollars.

Monitoring

A white woman sitting in front of a computer on a desk.After the internal control structure is in place, the firm should monitor its effectiveness and make any needed changes before serious problems arise. In testing components of the internal control structure, companies base their thoroughness on the risk assigned to those components.

Again, simply monitoring the cash position of the coffee shop on a proactive basis could have prevented the loss. Even computerized systems have to be monitored by some outside entity. As you will learn in the section on inventory, employees periodically count the physical inventory (goods for sale to customers) in order to verify that the computer tracking system is accurate. The same goes for equipment. Your general ledger (GL) will have a control account, say with a total of $150,000, with a subsidiary ledger that lists all the individual items, the total of which has to match the GL. As an internal control, someone takes that list and walks around verifying that all the assets exist and that all the assets are included on the list. For cash, the ultimate verification and internal control is the bank.

 

As you study the basic procedures and actions of an effective internal control structure in the next section, remember that all companies benefit from using some internal control measures, even if they have to be modified for a small company.

Internal Control Activities

Companies protect their assets by:

  1. segregating employee duties.
  2. assigning specific duties to each employee.
  3. rotating employee job assignments.
  4. using mechanical devices.

Segregating Duties (Separation of Assignments)

Segregation of duties requires that someone other than the employee responsible for safeguarding an asset must maintain the accounting records for that asset. Also, employees share responsibility for related transactions so that one employee’s work serves as a check on the work of other employees.

When a company segregates the duties of employees, it minimizes the probability of an employee being able to steal assets and cover up the theft. For example, an employee could not steal cash from a company and have the theft go undetected unless someone changes the cash records to cover the shortage. To change the records, the employee stealing the cash must also maintain the cash records or be in collusion with the employee who maintains the cash records.

In the coffee caper, it’s likely that the friend who was making the deposits simply changed the deposit slip so that it matched the total amount of checks from the day’s sales, pocketing the cash. Just one simple check by an independent person, or even the owner, could have prevented the theft.

Assigning Specific Duties (Establishing Responsibility)

When the responsibility for a particular work function is assigned to one employee, that employee is accountable for specific tasks. Should a problem occur, the company can quickly identify the responsible employee.

When a company gives each employee specific duties, it can trace lost documents or determine how a particular transaction was recorded. Also, the employee responsible for a given task can provide information about that task. Being responsible for specific duties gives people a sense of pride and importance that usually makes them want to perform to the best of their ability.

Rotating Assignments

Some companies rotate job assignments to discourage employees from engaging in long-term schemes to steal from the company. Employees realize that if they steal from the company, the next employees assigned to their positions may discover the theft.

Frequently, companies have a policy that all employees must take an annual vacation. This especially includes employees with sensitive assignments. This policy discourages theft because many dishonest schemes collapse when the employee does not attend to the scheme on a daily basis.

Use of Mechanical Devices

Companies use several mechanical devices to help protect their assets. Check protectors (machines that perforate the check amount into the check), cash registers, and time clocks make it difficult for employees to alter certain company documents and records.

Record Keeping (Accounting)

A white person writing on sheets of loose paper. Only their hand is shown.Companies should maintain complete and accurate accounting records. One or more business documents support most accounting transactions. These source documents are an integral part of the internal control structure. For optimal control, source documents should be serially numbered.

The best method to ensure that such accounting records are kept accurate is to hire and train competent and honest individuals. Periodically, supervisors evaluate an employee’s performance to make sure the employee is following company policies. Inaccurate or inadequate accounting records serve as an invitation to theft by dishonest employees because theft can be concealed more easily.

Employees

Internal control policies are effective only when employees follow them. To ensure that they carry out its internal control policies, a company must hire competent and trustworthy employees. Thus, the execution of effective internal control begins with the time and effort a company expends during the hiring of employees. Once the company hires the employees, it must train those employees and clearly communicate to them company policies, such as obtaining proper authorization before making a cash disbursement. Frequently, written job descriptions establish the responsibilities and duties of employees. The initial training of employees should include a clear explanation of their duties and how to perform them.

Companies should carry adequate casualty insurance on assets. This insurance reimburses the company for loss of a nonmonetary asset such as specialized equipment. Companies should also have fidelity bonds on employees handling cash and other negotiable instruments. These bonds ensure that a company is reimbursed for losses due to theft of cash and other monetary assets. With both casualty insurance on assets and fidelity bonds on employees, a company can recover at least a portion of any loss that occurs

Legal Requirements

A brass statue of Lady Justice.In publicly held corporations, the company’s internal control structure must satisfy the requirements of federal law, including the following:

  • In December 1977, Congress enacted the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA). This law requires a publicly held corporation to devise and maintain an effective internal control structure and to keep accurate accounting records. This law came about partly because company accounting records covered up bribes and kickbacks made to foreign governments or government officials. The FCPA made this specific type of bribery illegal as part of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.
  • In 2002, Congress passed the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX), which established rules to protect the public from fraudulent or erroneous practices by corporations and other business entities.
    • SOX applies to all publicly traded companies in the United States as well as wholly owned subsidiaries and foreign companies that are publicly traded and do business in the United States.
    • SOX also regulates accounting firms that audit companies which must comply with SOX.
    • Even though private companies, charities, and non-profits are generally not required to comply with every provision of SOX, there are penalties for those organizations that knowingly destroy or falsify financial data.
  • Here are the most important SOX requirements:
    • CEOs and CFOs are directly responsible for the accuracy, documentation, and submission of all financial reports as well as the internal control structure to the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). Officers risk jail time and monetary penalties for compliance failures—intentional or not.
    • An Internal Control Report that states management is responsible for an adequate internal control structure for their financial records. Any shortcomings must be reported up the chain as quickly as possible.
    • Companies must have formal data security policies, communication of data security policies, and consistent enforcement of data security policies.
    • Companies maintain and provide documentation proving they are continuously in compliance.

The Internal Audit Function

Many companies use an internal auditing staff. Internal auditing consists of investigating and evaluating employees’ compliance with the company’s policies and procedures. Companies employ internal auditors to perform these audits. Trained in company policies and internal auditing duties, internal auditors periodically test the effectiveness of controls and procedures throughout the company.

Internal auditors encourage operating efficiency throughout the company and are alert for breakdowns in the company’s internal control structure. In addition, internal auditors make recommendations for the improvement of the company’s internal control structure. All companies and nonprofit organizations can benefit from internal auditing. However, internal auditing is especially necessary in large organizations because the owners (stockholders) cannot be involved personally with all aspects of the business.

Internal control is the general responsibility of all members of an organization. Unfortunately, even though a company implements all these features in its internal control structure, theft may still occur. If employees are dishonest, they can usually figure out a way to steal from a company, thus circumventing even the most effective internal control structure. It is important to remember the cost of an internal control should not outweigh the benefit to the company.

]]>
Why It Matters: Accounting for Cash https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-accounting-for-cash/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:49 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-accounting-for-cash/ Read more »]]> Why learn about cash and cash equivalents?

A scale with different amounts of coins on either side.As we start to talk about the specifics of accounting for each line item on the trial balance, starting with cash, we also need to explore how those items, especially assets, are safeguarded. Since cash, which includes checking accounts, savings accounts, and other assets that are used like cash (including debit and credit cards), is one of the easiest assets to get “misplaced” and is one of the most important assets for the business, this lesson is a good place to pause and start the discussion around internal controls—both the structure of internal controls and the activities.

In general terms, the purpose of internal control is to ensure the efficient operations of a business, thus enabling the business to effectively reach its goals. An effective internal control structure includes a company’s plan of organization and all the procedures and actions it takes to:

  • Protect its assets against theft and waste.
  • Ensure compliance with company policies and federal law.
  • Evaluate the performance of all personnel to promote efficient operations.
  • Ensure accurate and reliable operating data and accounting reports.

A white person's hand drawing a complex flow chart.The internal control structure includes things like management’s attitude toward safeguarding assets, the processes in place for monitoring (such as an internal review) and reporting, and the way the business is set up to allow for cross-checking and assigning responsibility. Part of your job as an accountant is to evaluate, establish, and monitor internal controls that do more than just maintain the accuracy and integrity of the accounting records.

In this section, we’ll take a look at internal controls in general, and then specifically at what financial statements call “cash and cash equivalents.” While you are learning to record cash receipts and disbursements, you’ll also learn to apply internal control concepts to those transactions and to the cash balance as well. Finally, you’ll identify cash and cash equivalents on the financial statements and you’ll see why they are usually listed first on a company’s trial balance, general ledger, and balance sheet.

]]>
Discussion: Closing the Books in QuickBooks https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-closing-the-books-in-quickbooks/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-closing-the-books-in-quickbooks/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Closing the Books in QuickBooks link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Completing the Accounting Cycle https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-completing-the-accounting-cycle/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-completing-the-accounting-cycle/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Completing the Accounting Cycle

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Reversing Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reversing-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/reversing-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate reversing entries

 

Step 10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed.After everything is closed and the old year is done, accountants sometimes perform one more step that could be called the beginning of the next accounting cycle as easily as it could be called the end of the old.

Let’s take a look at NeatNiks’s opening balances for just two accounts in November (Figure A):

A Contractor Payable T account. There is a credit entry for 1,200 dollars.A Contractor Expense T account. On the debit side, there is an entry for 2,300 dollars.

These were the ending balances on October 31, and they are the starting point for November.

NeatNiks’s works with independent contractors instead of employees, but just for this example, let’s pretend that it pays employee wages.

Now let’s say that on November 10, the payroll department (if it had one) wrote checks to employees (if there were employees) for October crediting the checking account and debiting wage expense (Figure B – Checking Account T account omitted):

A Wages Payable T account. On the credit side, there is an entry of 1,200 dollars.A Wages Expenses T account. On the debit side, there is an entry for 2,300 dollars. There is also a debit entry of 1,200 dollars.

Oops. The November debit for October wages paid in November went to expense. That debit should have offset Wages Payable, like this (Figure C):

A Wages Payable T account. On the credit side, there is an entry of 1,200 dollars. There is also a debit entry of 1,200 dollars.A Wages Expense T account with one debit entry for 2,300 dollars.

Offsetting the debit would make the balance in Wages Payable = zero. This balance is correct because we recognized the expense in October under the matching principle of accrual basis accounting. We don’t want to show it again in November, but we do want to show that we paid off the debt to the employees. However, if payroll is just an automatic system that posts to Wage Expense every time we pay, our books will be off like they are in Figure B.

In this case, the $2,300 in wages that is the beginning balance of Wage Expense are October wages and already include the $1,200 accrual.

If we know the wage amount when we make that Wages Payable/Wage Accrual adjustment at the end of October, we also prepare a reversing entry that looks like this (the wage accrual entry is also included as a reference):

Figure D

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
AJE3 31 Wage Expense 540 1,200.00
AJE3 31       Wages Payable 220 1,200.00
AJE3 31 To record October wages paid in November
Nov 1 Wages Payable 220 1,200.00
Nov 1       Wage Expense 540 1,200.00
Nov 1 To reverse AJE3

Now (after we have posted this entry to the ledgers) our ledger balances look like this on November 1 (Figure E):

A T account for Wages Payable. It has a credit entry of 1200 dollars and a debit entry also for 1200 dollars. There is a total of 0 dollars.A T account for Wage Expenses. There is a debit entry of 2,300 dollars and a credit entry of 1,200 dollars. There is a total debit amount of 1,100 dollars.

When payroll processes the checks, our ledgers look like this (again, the Checking Account is omitted from this Figure F):

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a Wages Payable account. It has a credit entry of 1,200 dollars. On the debit side, it has a reversing entry of 1,200 dollars. There is a total of 0 dollars. On the right side is a Wage Expense T account. It has a debit balance carried forward of 2,300 dollars. There is a credit reversing entry of 1,200 dollars, and a debit pay entry 1,200 dollars on November 10th. There is a debit total of 2,300 dollars.
Figure F

The reversing entry reflects the matching principle, which is based on the time period concept. We recognized the expense in October by making an adjusting journal entry. We reversed that entry in November, effectively moving the expense from November to October so when we run October financials, the expenses match up to the revenues and therefore we have a more accurate picture of the results of company operations.

As November progresses, payroll makes a disbursement to employees on the 25th to pay wages earned from the 1st to the 15th (let’s make that amount $1,600—Figure G):

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a Wages Payable account. It has a credit entry of 1,200 dollars and a debit reversing entry of 1,200 dollars. There is a total of 0 dollars. On the right is a Wage Expense account, which has a debit balance carried forward of 2,300 dollars. On the credit side, it has a reversing entry of 1,200 dollars. There is a debit pay entry on November 10th for 1,200 dollars and another on November 25th for 1,600 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 3,900 dollars.
Figure G

Then at the end of November, we run an unadjusted trial balance, see that we need to accrue wages of $2,200, make an adjusting journal entry, and post it (Figure H):

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is a Wages Payable account. It has a credit entry of 1,200 dollars. There is a debit reversing entry of 1,200 dollars. There is also a credit entry of 2,200 dollars. There is a total credit balance of 2,200 dollars. On the right is a Wage Expense account with a debit balance carried forward of 2,300 dollars. There is a credit reversing entry of 1,200 dollars. On November 10th, there is a debit entry of 1,200 dollars. There's another for 1,600 dollars on November 25th. On November 30th, there is an adjusting journal entry of 2,200 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 6,100 dollars.
Figure H

If we run a Profit and Loss (P&L, also known as an Income Statement) for November only, we should see a wage expense of $3,800. That expense is the total of the November 25 pay for the first half of the month, and the December 10 payroll that we accrued for the second half of the month. NeatNick’s balance sheet at the end of the month will show that the company owes the employees $2,200, which we will pay on December 10.

Here is one last look at how these accounts would look without the reversing entry (Figure I):

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a Wages Payable account. It has two credit entries, one for 1,200 dollars and another for 2,200. There is a total credit balance of 3,400 dollars. On the right is a Wage Expense account with a balance carried forward of 2,300 dollars. On November 10th, there is a debit pay entry of 1200 dollars. There is another on November 25th for 1,600 dollars. On November 30th, there is a debit adjusting journal entry of 2,200 dollars. There is a debit total of 7,300 dollars.
Figure I

See if you can figure out what is wrong with these accounts.

Once you do, you’ll be able to see why we make reversing entries for some accruals. However, we could also avoid all this work by simply having payroll post the check as run on the 10th to Wages Payable and the check run on the 25th to Wage Expense.

Now that you’ve been through the entire accounting cycle, when you are developing or improving systems and processes at a company, you can decide which is best.

]]>
Putting It Together: Completing the Accounting Cycle https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-completing-the-accounting-cycle/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-completing-the-accounting-cycle/ Read more »]]> A man sitting at a park working on his latptop.You’ve completed the entire accounting cycle, from the very first transactions through journalizing, posting, and creating financial statements that report the results of operations and financial position to external users. You are now probably beginning to understand the importance of accurate accounting records and the process accountants go through to keep a business’s financial books aligned and current.

Along with the accounting cycle process, you’ve also gathered data that internal users can rely upon for budget reports, forecasts, and other managerial purposes. These statements and reports are the means for owners and managers involved in a business to see where a company’s finances are at any given point in time and make better choices for a company’s future financial health.

The Accounting Cycle

  1. Analyze Transactions
  2. Prepare Journal Entries
  3. Post Journal Entries
  4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance
  5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries
  6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance
  7.  Prepare Financial Statements
  8. Prepare Closing Entries
  9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance
  10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed

Next, we’ll start taking a look at each balance sheet account in more detail, in order of a normal trial balance, starting with the main checking account and other “cash” issues.

]]>
Post-Closing Trial Balance https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/post-closing-trial-balance/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:46 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/post-closing-trial-balance/ Read more »]]>
  • Post closing entries and prepare the post-closing trial balance

 

Step 9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance

After we complete journal entries, we post them to the ledger and then run a post-closing trial balance:

Permanent Accounts                                                                           Temporary Accounts

Two side-by-side T accounts. On the left is the Checking account. There is a debit balance carried forward on January 1st of 14,800 dollars. On May 18th, there is a debit entry of 5,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on June 30th for 2,000 dollars. On September 20th, there's a credit entry for 4,700 dollars and on October 31st, there is a credit entry for 5,000 dollars. There's a debit entry for 6,100 dollars on November 11th. On December 31st, there is a credit entry for 7,400 dollars. There is a total debit balance on December 31st of 10,800 dollars. On the right side is the Service Revenue account. It has a credit balance carried forward of 0 dollars. On May 18th, there is a credit entry of 5,000 dollars. There's a credit entry for2,000 dollars on June 30th. On November 4th, there is a credit entry of 6,100 dollars. On December 31st, there is a total credit balance of 13,100. There is a closing entry adjustment of 13,100 dollars, leaving a total balance on December 31st of 0 dollars.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is the Due to Bank account, with a credit balance carried forward on January 1st of 5,000 dollars. On October 31st, there is a debit entry of 5,000 dollars. There is a total balance of 0 dollars on December 31st. On the right side is the Wage Expense Account. It has a balance carried forward on January 1st of 0 dollars. On September 20th, there is a debit entry for 4,700 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 4,700 dollars. On the credit side is closing entry B of 4,700 dollars. On December 31st, there is a total balance of 0 dollars.

Two T accounts side-by-side. On the left is the Owner's Capital account. On January 1st, it has a credit balance carried forward of 9,800 dollars. There is a total credit balance of 9,800 dollars on December 31st before closing entries. Closing entry C is on the credit side, with a value of 8,400 dollars. Closing entry D is on the debit side and has a value of 7,400 dollars. The total credit balance on December 31st after closing entries is 10,800 dollars. On the right side is the Owner Withdrawals account. It has a balance carried forward on January 1st of 0 dollars. On December 31st, there is a debit entry of 7,400 dollars. There is a debit total of 7,400 dollars before closing entries. Closing entry D is on the credit side and has a value of 7,400 dollars. There is a total balance on December 31st of 0 dollars.

A T account of an Income Summary. On the debit side is closing entry B, with a value of 4,700 dollars, as well as closing entry C, with a value of 8,400 dollars. On the credit side is closing entry A, with a value of 13,100 dollars.

Macro Auto Post Closing trial balance as of 12/31/2020. Permanent Accounts: Checking debit of 10,800, Due to Bank no value in debit or credit field, Owner's Capital credit 10,800. Temporary Accounts: Owner Withdrawals no value in debit or credit field, Service Revenue no value in debit or credit field, Wages Expense no value in debit or credit field. Final entry in debit column is 10,800 with a double underline underneath and final entry in credit column is 10,800 with a double underline underneath.

Once we are satisfied that everything is balanced, we carry the balances forward to the new blank pages of the next (now current) year’s ledger and are ready to start posting transactions.

Remember that closing entries are only used in systems using actual bound books made of paper. In any case, they are an important concept and they officially represent the end of the process.


Congratulations! You’ve—almost—completed the accounting cycle.

]]>
Introduction to Closing the Books https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-closing-the-books/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:45 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-closing-the-books/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Prepare and post closing entries

Let’s review our accounting cycle again. We have completed the first 7 steps, and now we come to the final steps that are all part of the closing process.

The Accounting Cycle

  1. Analyze Transactions
  2. Prepare Journal Entries
  3. Post Journal Entries
  4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance
  5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries
  6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance
  7.  Prepare Financial Statements
  8. Prepare Closing Entries
  9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance
  10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed

Steps 8 and 9 of the Accounting Cycle. 8. Prepare Closing Entries 9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial BalanceAt the end of the year in the old paper-based accounting system, the journal would be put in a safe and a new journal started (often businesses had so many transactions they had multiple huge journals). Obviously, with our computer data storage systems, we just keep adding journal entries to our digital files. By the same token, the ledgers by the end of the year were full of entries and cumbersome, to say the least, so we closed them, both literally and figuratively. We got a new ledger with all blank pages, and with some permanent accounts, such as our checking account, we brought the ending balance from the old book forward, and that balance became the beginning balance in our new book. But there are other accounts, like the revenue and expense accounts, that we want to track only for one year. We call those temporary accounts, and when we start our new book, we just start accumulating those amounts from zero.

Modern accounting information systems don’t post closing entries. However, there is still a closing process that prevents the accountants and bookkeepers from accidentally posting entries to the prior period. The closing process means any books and records that produced the official financial statements are “closed” to any further entries that would cause them to no longer match the published financials.

]]>
Closing Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/closing-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:45 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/closing-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify permanent and temporary accounts
  • Prepare closing entries

 

Types of Accounts

Remember the income statement is like a moving picture of a business, reporting revenues and expenses for a period of time (usually a year). We want income statements to start every year from zero, but for accounts like equipment, debt, and cash accounts—reported on the balance sheet—we want to keep a running balance from the beginning of the business. We call those permanent accounts.

  • Permanent accounts: balance sheet accounts including assets, liabilities, and equity accounts (except for withdrawals). These account balances roll over into the next period. The ending balance of this period will be the beginning balance for next period.
  • Temporary accounts: revenues, expenses, and withdrawals accounts. These account balances do not roll over into the next period after closing. The closing process reduces revenue, expense, and withdrawals account balances (temporary accounts) to zero so they are ready to accumulate data for the next accounting period.

Now you know a bit about permanent and temporary accounts. Let’s move on to learn about how to record closing those temporary accounts.

Preparing a Closing Entry

Step 8. Prepare Closing EntriesAs we previously discussed, some computerized accounting systems, such as QuickBooks™ don’t actually create or post closing entries, but within the system, when you run a report, the software treats the accounts as if they were closed at the end of all the prior periods. Other accounting software, such as Oracle’s PeopleSoft™, post closing entries to a special accounting period that keeps them separate from all of the other entries. So, even though the process today is slightly (or completely) different than it was in the days of manual paper systems, the basic process is still important to understand.

We won’t be using NeatNiks as an example of closing entries for two reasons:

  1. It’s not the end of the year for NeatNiks, just the end of a month, and
  2. NeatNiks is probably going to switch to a computerized system before the end of the year anyway, such as Quickbooks, and that particular system (which is representative of most of the others) doesn’t actually post closing entries.

We’ll use a company called MacroAuto that creates and installs specialized exhaust systems for race cars. Here are MacroAuto’s accounting records simplified, using positive numbers for increases and negative numbers for decreases instead of debits and credits in order to save room and to get a higher-level view. Also, there are only a handful of transactions each year.

Notice that in the beginning, everything is zero. Then our business owner makes a deposit and things get rolling. By the end of 2019, there is only one asset, which is the $14,800 in our checking account that includes $5,000 in debt to the bank, so equity is $9,800 ([latex]\text{A}-\text{L}=\text{E}[/latex]). Revenues for the year were $10,500 and expenses were $500, so net income was $10,000. The owner put in $1,000 at the beginning of the year and took out $1,200 on December 31, leaving equity of $9,800.

Checking account Liabilities Equity Owner Withdrawals Annual Revenue Annual Expense
1/1/19 =
2/5/19 1,000 = 1,000
3/25/19 2,000 = 2,000
5/18/19 (500) = (500)
6/19/19 5,000 = 5,000
9/2/19 8,500 8,500
12/31/19 (1,200) = (1,200)
End of year 14,800 = 5,000 1,000 (1,200) 10,500 (500)
Closing entries 8,800 1,200 (10,500) 500
1/1/20 14,800 = 5,000 9,800
5/18/20 5,000 = 5,000
6/30/20 2,000 = 2,000
9/20/20 (4,700) = (4,700)
10/31/20 (5,000) = (5,000)
11/4/20 6,100 6,100
12/31/20 (7,400) = (7,400)
End of year 10,800 = 9,800 (7,400) 13,100 (4,700)
Closing entries 1,000 7,400 (13,100) 4,700
1/1/21 10,800 = 10,800

In accounting, we often refer to the process of closing as closing the books. The four basic steps in the closing process are:

  1. Closing the revenue accounts: transferring the credit balances in the revenue accounts to a clearing account called Income Summary.
  2. Closing the expense accounts: transferring the debit balances in the expense accounts to a clearing account called Income Summary.
  3. Closing the Income Summary account: transferring the balance of the Income Summary account to the owner’s capital account.
  4. Closing the withdrawal account: transferring the debit balance of the owner withdrawal account to the capital account.

Let’s look at this process for MacroAuto’s 2020 information using T accounts that will stand in for the full ledgers. Notice that the 2019 ending balances carry forward to become 2020 beginning balances and that we start fresh in the revenue, expense, and withdrawal accounts (because we closed the books on 12/31/2019):

MacroAuto

General Ledger (represented by T accounts)

As of 12/31/2020

Permanent Accounts                                                                           Temporary Accounts

Two T accounts side by side. On the left is a checking account. On the debit side, there's a balance carried forward on January 1st of 14,800 dollars. On May 18th, there is a debit entry of 5,000 dollars. On June 30th, there is a debit entry of 2,000 dollars. On November 4th, there is a debit entry of 6,100 dollars. On the credit side, there is an entry of 4,700 dollars on September 20th. On October 31st, there is a credit entry of 5,000 dollars. On December 31st, there is a credit entry of 7,400 dollars. There is a total debit balance on December 31st of 10,800 dollars. On the right side is a Service Revenue chart. There is a balance carried forward of 0 dollars on January 1st. There's a credit entry of 5,000 dollars. On June 30th, there is a credit entry of 2,000 dollars. On November 4th, there is a credit entry of 6,100 dollars. On December 31st, there is a total credit balance of 13,100 dollars.

Two T accounts side by side. On the left side is a Due To Bank account. It has a credit balance carried forward on January 1st of 5,000 dollars. On October 31st, there is a debit entry of 5,000 dollars. On December 31st, the total balance is 0. On the right side is a Wage Expense account. It has a debit balance carried forward on January 1st of 0 dollars. On September 20th, there is a debit entry of 4,700 dollars. On December 31st, there is a total debit balance of 4,700 dollars.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is the Owner's Capital account. It has a credit balance carried forward on January 1st of 9,800 dollars. There is a total credit balance on December 31st of 9,800 dollars. On the right side is the Owner's Withdrawals account. On January 1st, it has a debit balance carried forward of 0 dollars. On December 31st, it has a debit entry of 7,400 dollars, which is also the total debit balance on December 31st.

Before we do closing entries, let’s run an adjusted trial balance:

Adjusted trial balance as of 12/31/2020. Permanent Accounts: Checking debit of 10,800, Due to Bank no value in debit or credit field, Owner's Capital credit 9,800. Temporary Accounts: Owner Withdrawals debit 7,400, Service Revenue credit 13,100, Wages Expense debit 4,700. Final entry in debit column is 22,900 with a double underline underneath and final entry in credit column is 22,900 with a double underline underneath.

From this trial balance, as we learned in the prior section, you make your financial statements. After the financial statements are finalized and you are 100 percent sure that all the adjustments are posted and everything is in balance, you create and post the closing entries. The closing entries are the last journal entries that get posted to the ledger.

Below are the T accounts with the journal entries already posted.

Permanent Accounts                                                                           Temporary Accounts

Two side-by-side T accounts. On the left is the Checking account. There is a debit balance carried forward on January 1st of 14,800 dollars. On May 18th, there is a debit entry of 5,000 dollars. There is a debit entry on June 30th for 2,000 dollars. On September 20th, there's a credit entry for 4,700 dollars and on October 31st, there is a credit entry for 5,000 dollars. There's a debit entry for 6,100 dollars on November 11th. On December 31st, there is a credit entry for 7,400 dollars. There is a total debit balance on December 31st of 10,800 dollars. On the right side is the Service Revenue account. It has a credit balance carried forward of 0 dollars. On May 18th, there is a credit entry of 5,000 dollars. There's a credit entry for 2,000 dollars on June 30th. On November 4th, there is a credit entry of 6,100 dollars. On December 31st, there is a total credit balance of 13,100. On the debit side is closing entry A, which is 13,100 dollars, leaving a total balance on December 31st of 0 dollars.

Two T accounts next to each other. On the left is the Due to Bank account, with a credit balance carried forward on January 1st of 5,000 dollars. On October 31st, there is a debit entry of 5,000 dollars. There is a total balance of 0 dollars on December 31st. On the right side is the Wage Expense Account. It has a balance carried forward on January 1st of 0 dollars. On September 20th, there is a debit entry for 4,700 dollars. There is a total debit balance of 4,700 dollars. On the credit side is closing entry B of 4,700 dollars. On December 31st, there is a total balance of 0 dollars.

Two T accounts side-by-side. On the left is the Owner's Capital account. On January 1st, it has a credit balance carried forward of 9,800 dollars. There is a total credit balance of 9,800 dollars on December 31st before closing entries. Closing entry C is on the credit side, with a value of 8,400 dollars. Closing entry D is on the debit side and has a value of 7,400 dollars. The total credit balance on December 31st after closing entries is 10,800 dollars. On the right side is the Owner Withdrawals account. It has a balance carried forward on January 1st of 0 dollars. On December 31st, there is a debit entry of 7,400 dollars. There is a debit total of 7,400 dollars before closing entries. Closing entry D is on the credit side and has a value of 7,400 dollars. There is a total balance on December 31st of 0 dollars.

A T account of an Income Summary. On the debit side is closing entry B, with a value of 4,700 dollars, as well as closing entry C, with a value of 8,400 dollars. On the credit side is closing entry A, with a value of 13,100 dollars.

Let’s go through these closing entries step by step.

Step 1: Close Revenue accounts

To close an account means to make the balance zero. We see from the adjusted trial balance that our revenue account has a credit balance. To make the balance zero, debit the revenue account and credit the Income Summary account. We’ll call this closing entry A, just to keep track of it.

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
2020
Dec 31 Service Revenue 13,100
Dec 31       Income Summary 13,100

Step 2: Close Expense accounts

The expense accounts have debit balances. To get rid of their balances, we will do the opposite or credit the accounts. Just as in step one, we will use Income Summary as the offset account, but this time we will debit income summary. The total debit to income summary should match total expenses from the income statement. In this case, we just have one expense account. We’ll label this “closing entry B.”

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
2020
Dec 31 Income Summary 4,700
Dec 31       Wage Expense 4,700

Step 3: Close Income Summary account

At this point, you have closed the revenue and expense accounts into income summary. The balance in the income summary account would now be an $8,400 credit ($13,100 debit minus $4,700 credit) and income summary should now match net income from the income statement. We want to remove this credit balance by debiting income summary. What did we do with net income on the statement of owner’s equity? We added it to the capital account. We’re now making a journal entry to do this in the books. We’ll call this “closing entry C.”

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
2020
Dec 31 Income Summary 8,400
Dec 31       Owner’s Capital   8,400

If expenses were greater than revenue, we would have net loss. A net loss would decrease owner’s capital, so we would do the opposite in this journal entry by debiting the capital account and crediting Income Summary.

Step 4: Close withdrawals account

After we move the balances in the revenue and expense accounts (net income or loss) to owner’s equity, we close the withdrawal account as well (closing entry D):

Journal
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
2020
Dec 31 Owner’s Capital 7,400
Dec 31       Owner Withdrawals 7,400

Now that the journal entries are prepared and posted, you are almost ready to start next year. Remember, modern computerized accounting systems go through this process in preparing financial statements, but the system does not actually create or post journal entries.

Here’s a summary of this section:You can view the transcript for “How to Prepare Closing Entries (Financial Accounting Tutorial #27)” here (opens in new window).

 

The next and final step in the accounting cycle is to prepare one last post-closing trial balance. But first, check your understanding of this process.


]]>
Statement of Cash Flows https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/statement-of-cash-flows/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/statement-of-cash-flows/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify the three main components of the statement of cash flows

 

Unlike the other three statements that fall right off the adjusted trial balance, the statement of cash flows takes some work, some research, and a lot of thinking. It would be a lot to cover right here, so consider this lesson a primer on cash flows rather than a full course.

a pile of US currency.There are three sections to the statement of cash flows:

  1. Cash from operations
  2. Cash from investing
  3. Cash from financing

There are two different ways to present the statement of cash flows: the direct method and the indirect method. However, they are only different in the way they present cash from operations. The direct method reports cash receipts and disbursements as if the income statement had been prepared on a cash basis, while the indirect method starts with accrual basis net income and reconciles it to cash basis.

Here is NeatNiks’s statement of cash flows based on the direct method:

NeatNiks
Statement of Cash Flows—Direct Method
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Description Amount Total
Subcategory, Operating Activities
Cash Receipts from Customers $3,100
Cash payments to vendors (14,500)
Cash payments to contractors (1,100)
Cash from Operating Activities Single Line (12,500)
Subcategory, Investing Activities
Subcategory, Financing Activities
Capital Contributions 20,000
Owner Withdrawals (4,000)
Cash from Financing Activities Single Line 16,000
Net increase in cash Single Line3,500
Cash at beginning of period
Cash at end of period Single Line
$3,500

Here is NeatNiks’s statement of cash flows using the indirect method:

NeatNiks
Statement of Cash Flows—Indirect Method
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Description Amount Total
Subcategory, Operating Activities
Net income $1,350
Increase in accounts receivable (5,650)
Increase in supplies (1,000)
Increase in prepaid expenses (10,000)
Increase in accounts payable 1,600
Increase in contractor payable 1,200
Cash from Operating Activities Single Line (12,500)
Subcategory, Investing Activities
Subcategory, Financing Activities
Capital Contributions 20,000
Owner Withdrawals (4,000)
Cash from Financing Activities Single Line 16,000
Net increase in cash Single Line3,500
Cash at beginning of period
Cash at end of period Single Line
$3,500

Notice that when using the indirect method, an increase in an asset reduces net income. For example, accrual basis revenues include sales on account. Cash basis doesn’t. An increase in accounts receivable means revenues under accrual basis are higher than they would be under cash basis. The adjustment from accrual to cash for an increase in accounts receivable would be negative. A decrease in an asset would be added to net income.

Alternatively, an increase in a liability indicates an expense that hasn’t actually been paid yet, so that is a deduction from net income on an accrual basis that wouldn’t exist using cash basis, so we add it back.

If that rule seems complicated (because it is) then just look it up when you need it, like all the rest of us accountants do.

Here is a bit more information:You can view the transcript for “Statement of Cash Flows Explained” here (opens in new window).

As we mentioned at the start of this page, this is just the beginning. We’ll dive in deeper and learn how to prepare a statement of cash flows later in the course. For now, you should be able to identify the three main components of the statement of cash flows.

]]>
Practice: Preparing Financial Statements https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-preparing-financial-statements/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/practice-preparing-financial-statements/
  • Prepare an income statement
  • Prepare a statement of owner’s equity
  • Prepare a balance sheet
  • Identify the three main components of the statement of cash flows

]]>
Balance Sheet https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/balance-sheet/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:43 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/balance-sheet/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare a balance sheet

 

The balance sheet shows the accounting equation: [latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{E}[/latex].

You’ve already calculated owner’s equity on the Statement of Owner’s Equity as $17,350, so now let’s account for the assets and liabilities.

First, list out the assets (in blue and numbered in the 100s) from the adjusted trial balance, the liabilities (in red and numbered in the 200s), and the equity total (in green and numbered in the 300s, 400s, and 500s).

NeatNiks
Adjusted Trial Balance
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Adjusted trial balance
Debits Credits
110 Checking 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00
125 Supplies 1,000.00
130 Prepaid Rent 10,000.00
210 Account Payable 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable 1,200.00
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense 2,000.00
530 Supplies Expense 1,600.00
540 Contractor Expense 2,300.00
Totals Single line 31,550.00
Double line
Single line 31,550.00
Double line

 

NeatNiks
Balance Sheet
As of October 31, 20XX
Description Amount
Subcategory, Assets
Cash $3,500
Accounts Receivable 5,650
Supplies 1,000
Prepaid Rent 10,000
Total Assets Single line
$20,150
Double line
Subcategory, Liabilities
Accounts Payable $1,600
Wages Payable 1,200
Total Liabilities Single line
$2,800
Subcategory, Owner’s Equity
17,350
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$20,150
Double line

Total assets, at historical cost, equal $20,150. Of that amount, Nick owes $2,800 to a creditor and his independent contractors, leaving him $17,350 in equity.

Now you can answer the remaining questions Nick had at the end of October:

  • What is Nick’s equity in his business at the end of October?
    • $17,350
  • Nick wants to buy a truck for $5,000 in order to keep up with demand—does he have enough cash in the bank to do that right now?
    • No. He only had $3,500 in the bank as of October 31. In addition, he has bills to pay that amount to $2,800 (accounts payable and contractor payable). However, once he collects his accounts receivable, he may have enough cash.
  • How much do customers owe Nick?
    • Accounts receivable are the invoices that Nick has sent out to customers that haven’t been paid yet, so they owe him in total $5,650.
  • How much does Nick owe to his suppliers?
    • Accounts payable represents the amount a business owes to suppliers. In this case, Nick has purchased items on credit and still owes $1,600 to the vendors. He also owes $1,200 to workers.

Account Format of Balance Sheets

The balance sheet above is reported in the common report format. There is another format, called the account format, that was more common when society was less complex. You might not ever see this format again, but here it is as an example:

NeatNiks
Balance Sheet
As of October 31, 20XX
Description Amount Description Amount
Subcategory, Assets Subcategory, Liabilities
   Cash $3,500    Accounts Payable $1,600
   Accounts Receivable 5,650    Contractor Payable 1,200
   Supplies 1,000    Total Liabilities Single line
$2,800
   Prepaid Rent 10,000
Owner’s Equity $17,350
Total Assets Single line
$20,150
Double line
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$20,150
Double line

Notice that assets are presented on the left, and liabilities and owner’s equity on the right.

The reason you don’t see this format much anymore is because it takes up so much real estate—we just don’t have the room to present our statements in multiple columns like that, especially because GAAP requires us to show multiple years side-by-side.

Huron Consulting Group

Here’s an actual income statement from Huron Consulting Group, Inc. (NASDAQ:HURN), a publicly traded consulting firm, condensed down from 26 lines to just 3, but you can see how trying to present each year with multiple columns would end up spreading it out way too far:

HURON CONSULTING GROUP, INC.
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATION – condensed
(in thousands of dollars)
Year Ended December 31,
Description 2019 2018 2017
Revenues $965,474 $877,999 $807,745
Expenses 923,731 864,353 923,731
Net income (loss) Single Line$41,743Double Line Single Line$13,646Double Line Single Line$(107,117)Double Line

And here are the balance sheets, once again condensed down from about twice this many line items. Notice how impossible it would be to present these in the account format, so that’s why the report format (assets first, then liabilities, and finally the equity, top to bottom) is so much more widely used.

Subcategory,Assets

HURON CONSULTING GROUP, INC.
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS – condensed
(in thousands of dollars)
Description December 31, 2019 December 31, 2018
Current assets:
Cash and cash equivalents $ 11,604 $ 33,107
Receivables from clients, net 116,571 109,677
Unbilled services, net 79,937 69,613
Income tax receivable 2,376 6,612
Prepaid expenses and other current assets 14,248 13,922
Total current assets Single Line$ 224,736 Single Line$ 232,931
Property and equipment, net 38,413 40,374
Other non-current assets 841,122 776,227
Total assets Single Line$ 1,104,271Double Line Single Line$ 1,049,532Double Line
Subcategory,Liabilities and stockholders’ equity
Current liabilities:
Accounts payable $ 7,944 $ 10,020
Accrued expenses and other current liabilities 54,995 298,460
Accrued payroll and related benefits 141,605 109,825
Total current liabilities Single Line$ 204,544 Single Line$ 418,305
Long-term debt, net of current portion 314,262 90,603
Total liabilities Single Line$ 518,806 Single Line$ 508,908
Total stockholders’ equity 585,465 540,624
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Single Line$ 1,104,271Double Line Single Line$ 1,049,532Double Line

We won’t look at the statement of stockholders’ equity (owners of a corporation are called stockholders)—not yet anyway. We will look at that statement more closely in a later module on corporations. You can also check out Huron Consulting Group’s full annual report.

As a publicly traded company, Huron Consulting Group is required to publish the financials and make them available to the public, and so they must follow GAAP and file their report with the SEC (Form 10-K) every year.

Also, notice that these numbers are rounded to the nearest thousand, so the actual amount of assets this company owns is in excess of $1 billion. Do assets equal liabilities plus owners’ equity?  (The answer had better be a resounding “yes”.)

The income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet give you a lot of information about a company. There are actually several more statements that deal with specific issues that we will cover later, but one more common statement is the statement of cash flows, introduced in the next section and covered in more detail later.

First, let’s review the three basic financials and then you can check your understanding of the balance sheet.You can view the transcript for “Preparing the Financial Statements (Financial Accounting Tutorial #25)” here (opens in new window).
]]>
Income Statement https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/income-statement/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/income-statement/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare an income statement

 

The first statement to prepare is the Income Statement.

Start with your adjusted trial balance and make sure that your trial balance actually is in balance!

NeatNiks
Adjusted Trial Balance
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Debits Credits
110 Checking 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00
125 Supplies 1,000.00
130 Prepaid Rent 10,000.00
210 Account Payable 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable 1,200.00
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense 2,000.00
530 Supplies Expense 1,600.00
540 Contractor Expense 2,300.00
Single line 31,550.00
Double line
Single line 31,550.00
Double line

The income statement, sometimes called a statement of earning, or a profit and loss (P&L) shows the results of operations by reporting net income. Net income is revenues less expenses (see the highlighted accounts on the adjusted trial balance above).

When we compile these reports, we don’t use debits and credits. Those are only used when we are recording transactions. For these reports, we just use regular numbers that ordinary people can easily grasp. Notice that the expenses are all listed and there is a single underline showing we are subtotaling them, with that subtotal listed directly underneath the revenue number. The bottom line, Net Income, is clearly shown as the combination of the two numbers above it. The external user knows that net income is revenue minus expenses, so we don’t have to reiterate that on the statement.

NeatNiks
Income Statement
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Description Amount Total
Subcategory, Revenues:
Service Revenue $8,750
Subcategory, Expenses:
Insurance 1,500
Rent 2,000
Supplies 1,600
Contractors 2,300
      Total Expenses Single Line 7,400
Net Income Single Line $1,350 Double line

Now, how much did NeatNiks earn during the month of October?

Nick Frank’s equity increased by this amount. If you think of a business as a machine that generates new wealth for the owner, this is the output. Nick has increased his ownership in the business by increasing the assets (wealth) of the business by $1,350. This isn’t the increase in cash, it’s the overall increase in all assets, less any increase in debt.

This concept will become clearer as you look at the next three statements, but first let’s just test our understanding of the Income Statement.

]]>
Statement of Owner’s Equity https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/statement-of-owners-equity/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/statement-of-owners-equity/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare a statement of owner’s equity

 

There is something you may notice about creating financial statements: at this point, all the brain work is done. Now you just take numbers off the adjusted trial balance and fill them into a form.

The statement of owner’s equity builds off the income statement, starting with revenues and expenses combined ($1,350 net income), adding capital, and subtracting any withdrawals.

NeatNiks
Adjusted Trial Balance
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Adjusted trial balance
Debits Credits
110 Checking 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00
125 Supplies 1,000.00
130 Prepaid Rent 10,000.00
210 Account Payable 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable 1,200.00
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense 2,000.00
530 Supplies Expense 1,600.00
540 Contractor Expense 2,300.00
Totals Single line 31,550.00
Double line
Single line 31,550.00
Double line

 

NeatNiks
Statement of Owner’s Equity
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Nick Frank, Capital, October 1, 20XX $0
Owner contributions 20,000
Net income/(loss) for the month 1,350
Single Line21,350
Owner withdrawals (4,000)
Nick Frank, Capital, October 31, 20XX Single Line$17,350Double Line

If there had been a loss instead of net income (if expenses had exceeded revenues), that loss would have been subtracted from the capital and would be noted with parentheses. Also, the ending balance on October 31 will be the beginning balance on November 1.

Now we’re ready to create the balance sheet.

]]>
Using the Worksheet https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/using-the-worksheet/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:41 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/using-the-worksheet/ Read more »]]>
  • Creating an adjusted trial balance using a worksheet

 

Step 6. Prepare adjusted trial balance.Before we create the adjusted trial balance from the ledgers, let’s take a look at one of the common ways that accountants prepare and track the adjustments they propose to make. It can be a bit inefficient to make each adjustment independently, the way we did in the prior section, because things can be interconnected and will most likely be way more complicated than our simple NeatNiks example. For that reason, experienced accountants use a worksheet.

The worksheet starts with the unadjusted trial balance:

NeatNiks
Trial Balance (unadjusted)
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Debits Credits
110 Checking 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00
125 Supplies 2,600.00
130 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
210 Account Payable 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense
530 Supplies Expense
540 Contractor Expense 1,100.00
Totals Single line 30,350.00
Double line
Single line 30,350.00
Double line

And then we expand it to accommodate our proposed adjustments:

NeatNiks
Trial Balance
For the Month ended October 31, 20XX
Unadjusted Trial Balance Adjustments Adjusted Trial Balance
Reference No. Accounts DR CR DR CR DR CR
110 Checking 3,500.00 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00 5,650.00
125 Supplies 2,600.00 2,600.00
130 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00 12,000.00
210 Accounts Payable 1,600.00 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense
530 Supplies Expense
540 Contractor Expense 1,100.00 1,100.00
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line

Instead of using T accounts as we analyze accounts, we track everything on the spreadsheet, making journal entries and labeling them as we go, so we can see the effect they will have on the accounts AND so we can see the whole picture as we build it.

NeatNiks
Trial Balance
For the Month ended October 31, 20XX
Unadjusted Trial Balance Reference Adjustments Adjusted Trial Balance
Reference Accounts DR CR DR Reference CR DR CR
110 Checking 3,500.00 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00 5,650.00
125 Supplies 2,600.00 AJE1 1,600.00 1,000.00
130 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00 12,000.00
210 Accounts Payable 1,600.00 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense
530 Supplies Expense AJE1 1,600.00 1,600.00
540 Contractor Expense 1,100.00 1,100.00
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 1,600
Double line
Single line 1,600
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line

When we are done with our analysis and all the journal entries are written, we post them and then we compare the trial balance from our adjusted general ledger accounts to the worksheet. If we did everything right, they should match.

NeatNiks
Trial Balance
For the Month ended October 31, 20XX
Unadjusted Trial Balance Reference Adjustments Adjusted Trial Balance
Reference No. Accounts DR CR DR Reference CR DR CR
110 Checking 3,500.00 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00 5,650.00
125 Supplies 2,600.00 AJE1 1,600.00 1,000.00
130 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00 AJE2 2,000.00 10,000.00
210 Accounts Payable 1,600.00 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable AJE3 1,200.00 1,200.00
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00 8,750.00
510 Insurance Expense 1,500.00 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense AJE2 2,000.00 2,000.00
530 Supplies Expense AJE1 1,600.00 1,600.00
540 Contractor Expense 1,100.00 AJE3 1,200.00 2,300.00
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 30,350
Double line
Single line 4,800.00
Double line
Single line 4,800.00
Double line
Single line 31,550.00
Double line
Single line 31,550.00
Double line

Once we have made all the adjustments to the ledger accounts and we have run the adjusted trial balance and feel confident that all the assets, liabilities, capital accounts, revenues, and expenses are recorded and are being reported according to GAAP (or, if we are a small business, as close to GAAP as we want to be), then we are ready for the final step: to create the financial statements.


]]>
Introduction to Preparing Financial Statements https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-financial-statements/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:41 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-financial-statements/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Use an adjusted trial balance to prepare financial statements

Step 7. Prepare Financial Statements.Let’s look back at the questions we asked when you first met Nick Frank and his business at the end of October:

  1. How much money did Nick make or lose during his first month in business?
  2. Nick wants to buy another truck for $5,000 in order to keep up with demand—does he have enough cash in the bank to do that right now?
  3. How much do customers owe Nick?
  4. How much does Nick owe to his suppliers?
  5. What is Nick’s equity in his business at the end of October?

Now we should be able to answer these questions by creating some basic financial statements from the adjusted trial balance.

 

The Accounting Cycle

  1. Analyze Transactions
  2. Prepare Journal Entries
  3. Post Journal Entries
  4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance
  5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries
  6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance
  7. Prepare Financial Statements
  8. Prepare Closing Entries
  9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance
  10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed
]]>
Posting Adjusted Journal Entries to the Ledger https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/posting-adjusted-journal-entries-to-the-ledger/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:40 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/posting-adjusted-journal-entries-to-the-ledger/ Read more »]]>
  • Posting adjusting entries to the ledgers and re-balancing the accounts

 

After preparing the journal entries, we have to post them to the ledgers.

Let’s start by reviewing NeatNiks’s trial balance for the month of October:

NeatNiks
Trial Balance (unadjusted)
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Debits Credits
110 Checking 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00
125 Supplies 2,600.00
130 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
210 Account Payable 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00
510 Insurance Revenue 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense
530 Supplies Expense
540 Contractor Expense 1,100.00
Totals Single line 30,350.00
Double line
Single line 30,350.00
Double line

Next, we analyze each account, going down the list in order and starting with the checking account, which we verify with the bank. We’ll go into this step in more detail in the next module on accounting for cash, so for now let’s just assume this account is verified and we can check it off.

Next is Accounts Receivable. We didn’t keep a subsidiary ledger for this account and because this is just a hypothetical project, we didn’t have the details for the subsidiary ledger, but let’s just say this is what the subsidiary ledger looks like:

NeatNiks
Accounts Receivable Subsidiary Ledger
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit
Max Von Snyder
   invoice dtd 10/20/20XX 5,000.00
   payment 10/30 (1,000.00)
      balance owing 4,000.00
Donnie Almond
   invoice dtd 10/20/20XX 1,000.00
   payment 10/30 (400.00)
      balance owing 600.00
Gracie Monocle
   invoice dtd 10/20/20XX 1,250.00
   payment 10/30 (200.00)
      balance owing 1,050.00
Total due from customers 5,650.00Double Line

The subsidiary ledger agrees with the general ledger control account as reported on the trial balance. What we don’t know is if this list is accurate. An auditor might send a letter to each of these accounts (or to a random sample of accounts) without mentioning the amount in our records, asking the customer to report what they owe (per their accounts payable records). What that report would not reveal, however, would be an account that is missing from the list. There are other tests and procedures for that audit, including tests of internal systems and statistical analysis, but those are covered in more advanced auditing courses. For now, since we’re not doing a full audit for a publicly traded company, it’s enough that we have matched the general ledger amount (control account) to the subsidiary ledger.

Check that one off.

Now we come to supplies. The trial balance shows a debit balance of $2,600, but we have a physical count as of October 31 that shows an ending balance of $1,000 (from the original list of information way back in Module 1).

That balance means that during the month of October, Nick used up (expended) $1,600 of supplies. We’ll need an adjusting journal entry.

Question: Is this a deferral or an accrual? (answer after the AJE)

If you need to, scratch this example out on a piece of paper using T accounts.

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 31 Supplies Expense 1,600.00
Oct 31       Supplies 1,600.00
Oct 31 To record supplies used during the month

This is a deferred expense because we spent the money before we expended the resource.

A debit to an expense account increases that account because expenses represent decreases to equity, and equity is on the right side of the accounting equation (A = L + E). A debit decreases equity because an increase is represented by an entry on the right side of the ledger/T account (a.k.a. credit).

After we post this expense to the ledger, our balance in the supplies account should be $1,000. We’ll check that amount soon.

Next on the list, as we walk our way down the trial balance, is Prepaid Rent. To analyze this account, we take a look at the ledger:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 4 GJ1 12,000.00 12,000.00

We trace the $12,000 entry back to the journal, and then from the journal to the supporting document in the file showing Nick rented a truck for $12,000 cash for October through March (6 months). It equates to $2,000 per month. One month is now used up, so we need to record the amount of the deferred expense that is now current. We’ll decrease the asset “Prepaid Rent” with a credit entry and increase “Rent Expense” with a debit entry.

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 31 Rent Expense 2,000.00
Oct 31       Prepaid Rent 2,000.00
Oct 31 To record rent expense for the month

Next on the trial balance is Accounts Payable. We’d have an Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger to compare the trial balance to, and we’d do some research to determine if there were any payables that hadn’t been recorded. For purposes of this simulation, let’s just say that Accounts Payable checks out.

Next is Contractor Payable (if Nick had employees this would be called Wages Payable), and since the month of October is actually over at this point and it’s probably the first week of November as we are making these adjusting journal entries, we have the following information from Nick:

Nick owes his independent contractor workers $1,200 for work done in October—he’ll pay it in November.

We looked at this exact journal entry in the prior section, so we’ll just use that entry as a template and record the following:

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct 31 Contractor Expense 1,200.00
Oct 31       Contractor Payable 1,200.00
Oct 31 To record October work paid in November

After this account, we would verify the Capital account and the Withdrawal account, and scan the Revenue and Expense accounts, do some statistical analysis and some testing (if this were a full audit), and we’d look for other things that need to be disclosed, such as any outstanding lawsuits, pension plan, etc. But this is just a small company, so we’ll stop here for now. We’ve done our due diligence and it doesn’t look like we missed anything significant.

We have just three adjusting journal entries now, and we’ve added them to the bottom of page 2 of our journal:

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 30 Checking 110 1,600.00
Oct. 30       Accounts Receivable 120 1,600.00
Oct. 30 To record receipt of payments from customers on account
Oct. 31 Owner Withdrawal 320 4,000.00
Oct. 31       Checking 110 4,000.00
Oct. 31 To record payment to owner
AJE1 31 Supplies Expense 1,600.00
AJE1 31       Supplies 1,600.00
AJE1 31 To record supplies used during the month
AJE2 31 Rent Expense 2,000.00
AJE2 31       Prepaid Rent 2,000.00
AJE2 31 To record rent expense for the month
AJE3 31 Contractor Expense 1,200.00
AJE3 31       Contractor Payable 1,200.00
AJE3 31 To record October work paid in November

Then we post them to the appropriate ledgers, updating the references as we go. Let’s just look at the last one to accrue wages for October. Assume you have already posted the other two.

Here is the journal entry you wrote:

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
AJE3 31 Contractor Expense 1,200.00
AJE3 31       Contractor Payable 1,200.00
AJE3 31 To record October work paid in November

First, post the debit to Contractor Expense, making sure you update the balance in the ledger and the posting reference:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 25 GJ1 1,100.00 1,100.00
Oct 31 AJE3 GJ2 1,200.00 2,300.00

Then post the credit to Wages Payable:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 31 AJE3 GJ2 1,200.00 1,200.00

As you update each ledger, you also update the journal by posting the ledger account number into the journal reference column:

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 30 Checking 110 1,600.00
Oct. 30       Accounts Receivable 120 1,600.00
Oct. 30 To record receipt of payments from customers on account
Oct. 31 Owner Withdrawal 320 4,000.00
Oct. 31       Checking 110 4,000.00
Oct. 31 To record payment to owner
AJE1 31 Supplies Expense 530 1,600.00
AJE1 31       Supplies 125 1,600.00
AJE1 31 To record supplies used during the month
AJE2 31 Rent Expense 520 2,000.00
AJE2 31       Prepaid Rent 130 2,000.00
AJE2 31 To record rent expense for the month
AJE3 31 Contractor Expense 540 1,200.00
AJE3 31       Contractor Payable 220 1,200.00
AJE3 31 To record October work paid in November

We numbered the AJEs, but that is optional.

Next, we’ll run an adjusted trial balance, but first let’s check our understanding of this process so far.



]]>
Adjusting for Errors https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-for-errors/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:39 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-for-errors/ Read more »]]>
  • Finding errors and creating adjustments

 

A pink and blue eraserSometimes things just don’t get recorded correctly. Remember, we have an external expectation of materiality as we saw in the introduction to this section, looking at Ernst & Young, LLP accounting firm’s opinion on the Alphabet, Inc. financial statements. For Alphabet, the numbers on the balance sheet are rounded to the nearest million. A $100,000 error may not be material if it won’t affect the reported numbers. However, there is also a practical aspect to materiality.

The cash account in your company may be off by $100, which may not concern you, except it is possible that someone stole $17,900 and someone else recorded a $13,000 deposit as $31,000 overstatement mistake on a deposit. When we get to the section on accounting for cash, we’ll learn ways to avoid this kind of thing, but for now, let’s just say that if we find an error, or a couple of errors, in our trial balance, we have to do some research, sketch out some T accounts, and make correcting journal entries.

Maybe an asset was recorded as an expense, or someone recorded a journal entry backward. Each of these situations will have to be addressed according to the specific situation. It is good practice to routinely run checks to catch errors and create the necessary journal adjusting entries. Start the process by asking yourself these three questions when dealing with errors: 

  1. What type of error is it?
  2. How should this error be fixed?
  3. How did this error affect the financial statements?

What type of error is it?

Once you have discovered there is an error evaluate what type of accounting error it is. Here are examples of common accounting errors to watch for:

  • Transposition Error. Reversing or transposing digits (e.g. 3874 instead of 3784)
  • Omission Error. A transaction isn’t recorded like a sale or expense is overlooked (example: a cash sale of a TV wasn’t written down in the rush of a black Friday sale).
  • Entry Reversal. An entry is debited instead of credited or vice versa.
  • Subsidiary Entries. A transaction is incorrectly entered, usually not caught until reconciling the bank statement.
  • Rounding Error. When a number is rounded up or down and can have a cascading effect on subsequently calculated figures.
  • Error of Commission. An amount is entered as the correct account and amount, but is actually incorrect. For example, an amount was added instead of subtracted or charged on one invoice when it should have been applied to a different invoice.

How should this error be fixed?

Now that you understand what type of error it is, it’s time to classify it as a deferral (also known as prepayment) or an accrual. Then ask, “Is it part of accrued revenue, accrued expense, deferred (unearned) revenue, or deferred (prepaid) expense?” Once those steps have been discovered, an adjusted journal entry is created to fix it.

In prior readings we’ve gone over the different types and posting adjusting entries, but here is a quick example of an adjusted entry made to the general ledger after a physical count of inventory corrected an inventory discrepancy.

Journal
Date Description Debit Credit
31-Dec Cost of goods sold 600
Inventory 600
Adjustment for inventory shrinkage.

Now, let’s move on to the final step.

How did this error affect the financial statements?

The last step is to understand how an error before it is adjusted, can overstate or understate the Income Statement and Balance Sheet. Errors in the accrued and deferred (unearned or prepaid) revenues and expenses affect the Balance Sheet and Income Statement in the following manner:

Before Adjusting
Adjusting Entry Not Recorded Balance Sheet Income Statement
Assets Liabilities Equity Revenue Expenses Net Income
Accrued Revenues Understated Understated Understated Understated
Accrued Expenses Understated Overstated Understated Overstated
Unearned Revenues Overstated Overstated Understated Understated
Prepaid Expenses Overstated Overstated Understated Overstated

To review the big picture about adjusting entries, watch this video:

You can view the transcript for “Prepayments and Accruals | Adjusting Entries” here (opens in new window).

 

 

In this practice section, you’ll have a chance to exercise your investigative and problem-solving skills.


 

]]>
Introduction to Preparing an Adjusted Trial Balance https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-an-adjusted-trial-balance/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:39 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-preparing-an-adjusted-trial-balance/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Creating the adjusted trial balance

Step 6. Prepare adjusted trial balance.In this section, we are going to revisit NeatNiks’ October unadjusted trial balance. We will take the following steps:

  • analyze,
  • look for any accounts that need to be adjusted in order to bring it into compliance with GAAP,
  • create and post adjusting journal entries; and
  • run the adjusted trial balance, which will be the final check before we create the financial statements.

 

 

The Accounting Cycle

  1. Analyze Transactions
  2. Prepare Journal Entries
  3. Post Journal Entries
  4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance
  5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries
  6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance
  7.  Prepare Financial Statements
  8. Prepare Closing Entries
  9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance
  10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed
]]>
Adjusting Deferred and Accrued Revenue https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-deferred-and-accrued-revenue/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:38 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-deferred-and-accrued-revenue/ Read more »]]>
  • Analyzing revenue accounts and creating necessary adjustments

 

Accrued Revenue

An asset/revenue adjustment may occur when a company performs a service for a customer but has not yet billed the customer. The accountant records this transaction as an asset in the form of a receivable and as revenue because the company has earned a revenue.

For instance, MacroAuto does work for a customer, Bill’s Big Trucks, in December for $5,000. When we are analyzing the trial balance accounts, we find that the customer has not been billed, so the earned revenue is not showing up in Service Revenue or in Accounts Receivable. We would make the following adjusting entry on December 31:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec. 31 Accounts Receivable 5,000.00
Dec. 31       Service Revenue 5,000.00
Dec. 31 To accrue revenue earned but not yet billed.

We recorded an increase in revenue and an increase in money owed to us so that our ledgers, thus our trial balance, and therefore our financial statements, will be in compliance with GAAP, which requires accrual basis accounting.

Important Things to note

  1. This is a prototypical accrued revenue entry. If this was rent due to the company, then the account names would change to Rent Receivable and Rent Revenue. If it was interest on a note receivable, we would post the entries to Interest Receivable and Interest Revenue. It’s that simple.
  2. We have to also post this entry to the customer’s account in the subsidiary ledger so it stays in balance with the general ledger. If this was our only entry to accounts receivable ever, then the general ledger would show $5,000 in receivables, and the subsidiary ledger would show $5,000 owing from Bill’s Big Trucks. In a real company, the list of customers would be long and each would owe some different amount, obviously; but if the total in the subsidiary ledger was $435,692.89, then the total in the general ledger had better be  $435,692.89. Your accounts always need to be in balance.

If your computerized system updates revenue and receivables when a bill is issued, you might have to actually issue a back-dated bill in order to accrue this revenue (which means you would not have an adjusting journal entry because the ledger would be updated in the normal process) or you would have to post the receivable portion of the entry to a separate receivable account. You would need to post the amount separately because your system will probably not let you post directly to the subsidiary ledger or to the general ledger so that you don’t accidentally get them out of balance with each other.

Even so, theoretically, this example is a good example of an accrued revenue.

 

And there you go, entries for both accrued and deferred revenues. Remember that accrued means to “add to,” so we have earned it but haven’t recorded it yet; deferred means we have collected the cash, but we haven’t earned it yet.

Now it’s your turn to try what you have learned.

]]> Adjusting Deferred and Accrued Expense Items https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-deferred-and-accrued-expense-items/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:38 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-deferred-and-accrued-expense-items/ Read more »]]>

  • Analyzing expense accounts and creating necessary adjustments

 

Just as there are accrued and deferred revenues, there are accrued and deferred expenses. A deferred expense is something paid for but not used up (expensed) yet. An accrued expense is one we have incurred but not yet recorded for some reason.

Deferred Expenses

Let’s take on deferred expenses first. One of the most common deferred expenses is supplies. Let’s say MacroAuto buys a bunch of paint on account from SuppliesRUs at the beginning of December.

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec. 1 Supplies 1,200.00
Dec. 1       Accounts Payable 1,200.00
Dec. 1 To record purchase of paint supplies

Actually, they’ve been buying supplies all year long because they keep running out, but here’s what the general ledger account looks like:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
Bal fwd 1,650.00
May 6 1,000.00 2,650.00
July 15 2,500.00 5,150.00
Oct 10 1,350.00 6,500.00
Dec 1 1,200.00 7,700.00

They don’t make a journal entry when they use a gallon or two of paint. They are only recording when they buy paint.

Someone has the job of counting the paint on hand at the end of each accounting period and putting a historical cost to it. In this case, it looks as if the company only produces financial statements at the end of the year because there are no adjustments to the supplies inventory during the year.

At the close of business on December 31, Sally, the supplies manager, counts the cans of paint and makes some kind of calculation about how much those cans cost. Let’s say her end of year count is 65 cans of paint, and the last purchase was that December 1 purchase of 120 cans at $10 each. So, ending paints supplies “inventory” is $650 in her professional opinion. She fills out a little worksheet that you designed and puts in on your desk on her way out to her New Year’s Eve party.

In January, as you are going through the unadjusted trial balance, line by line, one of the first asset accounts you come across after verifying that the checking account was accurate was supplies, which shows a balance of $7,700. You check Sally’s note to you and see the actual balance was $650.

This account needs to be adjusted, and a quick look at the ledger account reveals that none of the supplies used up during the year were recorded as expenses. That’s because this is a deferred expense. We pay for the supplies so we have them on hand when we need them, and then expense them as we use them. In this accounting system, however, we expense them when we get around to it, which is just before we create the financial statements.

You get out a scratch pad and do some math with some T accounts:

T account for Supplies. There is a debit balance before adjustment of 7,700 dollars. On the credit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 7,050 dollars. There is a debit total of 650 dollars.

T account for Supplies Expense. On the debit side, there is an adjusting journal entry of 7,050 dollars.

And from this analysis, you write the journal entry:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec. 31 Supplies Expense 7,050.00
Dec. 31       Supplies 7,050.00
Dec. 31 To record the cost of supplies used up

The credit to the asset account called supplies reduces the balance from $7,700 which is the total of everything we bought during the year to $650 which is what we had left at the end of the year. The difference of $7,050 is the cost of supplies we used up. We are inferring from the idea that if we bought it and it wasn’t on hand at the end of the year, then we used it up. Some of it could have been spilled, or even stolen. But in any case, the amount no longer in our possession is $7,050 and we are calling that an expense—a cost of doing business. The $650 that was left in the closet on December 31, was the historical cost of the asset on that date, and that’s what we will report on the balance sheet.

You can view the transcript for “Adjusting Entries for Prepaid Expenses (Financial Accounting Tutorial #20)” here (opens in new window).

 

Accrued Expenses

Let’s move on to accruing expenses that haven’t been recorded yet. A common example of an accrued expense is wages employees earned (in this case in December) but haven’t been paid.

An asian man sitting in front of a computerAn accountant records unpaid salaries as a liability and an expense because the company has incurred an expense. The recording of the payment of employee salaries usually involves a debit to an expense account and a credit to cash. Unless a company pays salaries on the last day of the accounting period for a pay period ending on that date, it must make an adjusting entry to record any salaries incurred but not yet paid.

Let’s say that MacroAuto pays its employees on the 10th and the 25th of each month. The December 10 paycheck was for November 16–30, and the December 25 check was for December 1–15. This system means that employee earnings for December 16–31 will be paid on January 10 of the next year. As we are analyzing accounts, we know what the paycheck system will be, and so we know we have to add (accrue) wages for the end of December.

Fortunately, by the time we are doing this analysis, it’s already January 10 and so we know how much to accrue. Let’s say the amount of the January 10 payroll was $15,000. Let’s make a simple version of the actual entry because (a) it can get complicated and (b) this entry will be covered in more detail in the section on current liabilities.

Here’s a simple version of the journal entry:

JournalPage 101
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Dec. 31 Wage Expense 15,000.00
Dec. 31       Wages Payable 15,000.00
Dec. 31 To record December wages paid in January

We debit Wage Expense to record the December wages in December, even though they haven’t been paid as of that date, because they were incurred in December and match December revenue. Wages Payable is a liability—it shows that as of December 31 we had incurred an expense and hadn’t parted with the cash yet. It is a debt we owe workers.

You can view the transcript for “Adjusting Entries for Accrued Expenses (Financial Accounting Tutorial #19)” here (opens in new window).

 

And there you have it. You’ve covered deferred and accrued revenues as well as deferred and accrued expenses, and now the only adjusting journal entries left are those occasional corrections that have to be made for various reasons. Before we address those corrections, assess your understanding of what we’ve covered so far.



]]>
Types of Adjusting Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/types-of-adjusting-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:37 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/types-of-adjusting-journal-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Differentiate between deferrals and accruals

 

In accounting, we classify adjustments in one of two ways: a deferral or an accrual. They are the opposite of each other. If you look up the word accrue, you’ll find it basically means to add to. The word defer actually means to put off to later.

In accounting, it’s easy to tell if an expense or revenue is deferred or accrued when the cash comes in.

  • If you earn revenue before you get the cash, you have to accrue the revenue (add it to your books). Accrued revenue is an asset (accounts receivable, most likely).
  • If you get the cash before you earn the revenue, you have to defer recognition of the revenue. In fact, getting the cash before you earn the revenue means you have a liability (deferred revenue = liability).

The same idea holds true for expenses.

  • If you pay an expense in advance, like insurance, where you may pay an annual premium that expires (is used up) monthly, you have a deferred expense. A deferred expense is an asset.
  • If you have expenses that you haven’t recorded yet, say a bill from your attorney, you have to accrue that expense (add it to your books). An accrued expense is a liability.

A stack of coins being measured with a clamp.Accrued revenues are common at the end of the year when we are doing work but have not recorded the revenue yet. This would also apply to interest earned on notes receivable even if the interest is not due until the next year.

A common example of an accrued expense is when employees worked during the last week of the year but won’t be paid until the next regular payday, which is in the next year. The expense needs to be matched with the revenue of the period. Interest expense is another example: since it accrues by the day, we need to adjust for the expense for the amount of time the note is outstanding during the accounting period.

There is one more type of journal entry that doesn’t fit a tidy classification. For instance, if you find an error or some other material misstatement, you may use an adjusting entry to correct it.

In the next section, we’ll cover adjusting for deferred and accrued revenues, and then deferred and accrued expenses, as well as other kinds of adjusting journal entries that we may need to get our basic bookkeeping records to comply with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) so we can produce our financial statements.

 



]]>
Introduction to Creating Adjusting Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-creating-adjusting-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:37 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-creating-adjusting-journal-entries/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Create adjusting journal entries

Here is an excerpt from the official accounting firm opinion of the Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) by Alphabet, Inc. for the year ending December 31, 2019 (you know Alphabet, Inc. by its major division—Google):[1]

REPORT OF ERNST & YOUNG LLP, INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Stockholders and the Board of Directors of Alphabet Inc.

Opinion on the Financial Statements

In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company at December 31, 2018 and 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2019, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

Step 5. Make Adjusting Journal EntriesFinancial statements are created from a trial balance, so that trial balance has to be materially accurate. It doesn’t have to be perfect down to the very last penny, but it has to “present fairly, in all material respects” in accordance with GAAP.

We need to make adjustments to any accounts that need it, and the trial balance is our starting point.


  1. https://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/1652044/000165204420000008/goog10-k2019.htm
]]>
Introduction to the Adjusting Process https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-the-adjusting-process/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:36 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-the-adjusting-process/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Describe the process of making adjusting journal entries

Step 5. Make Adjusting Journal EntriesLet’s review our accounting cycle again. The first three items represent our daily activities as a bookkeeper—keeping the books (journal and ledger) up to date:

  1. Analyze Transactions
  2. Prepare Journal Entries
  3. Post Journal Entries

Step four (Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance) is something we do monthly (or more often, if necessary) to ensure that everything is in order for step five: Make Adjusting Journal Entries. We may do this step monthly or quarterly, but almost always annually. The only reason we wouldn’t create financial statements is if we were out of business, but even then we have to file a final tax return and we’ll need financials to do that.

The Accounting Cycle

  1. Analyze Transactions
  2. Prepare Journal Entries
  3. Post Journal Entries
  4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance
  5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries
  6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance
  7.  Prepare Financial Statements
  8. Prepare Closing Entries
  9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance
  10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed

In the last section, we took NeatNiks right up to the unadjusted trial balance at the end of the month of October. The next step for that company will be to systematically analyze the accounts one by one to determine which ones, if any, need to be adjusted before we compile our final October accrual-basis financial statements.

]]>
Adjusting Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:36 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/adjusting-journal-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the need for adjusting journal entries
  • Describe the adjustment process

 

What Is an Adjusting Entry?

Adjusting entries reflect economic activity that has taken place but has not yet been recorded because it is either more convenient to wait until the end of the period to record the activity or because no source document concerning that activity has yet come to the accountant’s attention. Periodic reporting and the matching principle may also periodically require adjusting entries. Remember, the matching principle indicates that expenses have to be matched with revenues as long as it is reasonable to do so. To follow this principle, adjusting journal entries are made at the end of an accounting period or any time financial statements are prepared so that we have matching revenues and expenses.

A receptionist sitting at a desktop computer.Adjusting entries are made during the accounting cycle after the unadjusted trial balance and before the company prepares its financial statements, bringing the amounts in the general ledger accounts to their proper balances.

Each adjusting entry has a dual purpose:

  1. to make the income statement report the appropriate revenue or expense
  2. to make the balance sheet report the appropriate asset or liability

Thus, every adjusting entry affects at least one income statement account and one balance sheet account.

Adjusting entries fall into two broad classes: accrued (meaning to grow or accumulate) items and deferred (meaning to postpone or delay) items. The entries can be further divided into accrued revenue, accrued expenses, unearned revenue, and prepaid expenses, a division we will examine further in the next lessons.

The adjusting entries for a given accounting period are entered in the general journal and posted to the appropriate ledger accounts (note: these are the same ledger accounts used to post your other journal entries).

Three Adjusting Entry Rules

  1. Adjusting entries will almost never include cash. The purpose of adjusting entries is to make the accounting records accurately reflect the matching principle—match revenue and expense of the operating period. There are some rare cases where cash needs to be adjusted, but ideally, that adjusting should have all been done prior to running the unadjusted trial balance.
  2. Debits always equal credits (as usual).
  3. The adjusting entry will have one balance sheet account (asset, liability, or equity) and one income statement account (revenue or expense) in the journal entry. Remember, the goal of the adjusting entry is to match the revenue and expense of the accounting period. Adjusting entries between balance sheet accounts only, or between income statement accounts only, are usually called reclassifications.

Steps of the Adjusting Process

We can break down steps five and six of the accounting cycle into a bit more detail.

  1. Print out the unadjusted trial balance.
  2. Analyze each account.
  3. Look for anything that is missing.
  4. Make adjusting journal entries.
  5. Post the adjusting journal entries.

This is a systematic way to prepare and post adjusting journal entries that accountants have been using for about 500 years.

Let’s dig into each step.

Step 1: Print Out the Unadjusted Trial Balance

The unadjusted trial balance comes right out of your bookkeeping system. Debits will equal credits (unless something is terribly wrong with your system). However, you have no idea if everything is recorded correctly. This is actually where our accountant brains really get to work.

Step 2: Analyze Each Account

Start at the top with the checking account balance or whatever is the first account on the trial balance. If it’s petty cash, then you should have a petty cash count at the end of the period that matches what is shown on the trial balance (which is the ledger balance). If they match, fine. If they don’t, you have to do some research and find out which one is right, and then make a correction.

Step 3: Look for Anything That Is Missing

As you move down the unadjusted trial balance, look for documentation to back up each line item. For instance, if you get to accounts receivable, you should have a list of all customers that owe you money, and it should exactly agree to the trial balance, which comes from the ledger.

The list of customers, called a subsidiary ledger, should have been updated with the same information that updated the general ledger, so if a customer bought something on account, the general ledger (accounts receivable) was increased (by a debit in this case) and the subsidiary ledger was increased by the same amount.

The difference between a subsidiary ledger and a general ledger is that the subsidiary ledger is organized by customer and shows what each customer owes (charges less payments) and the general ledger is just a list by date of what everybody owes. It would be a lot of work to sort through the general ledger to find all the transactions for one particular customer, so we track that as we go. Conducting a search with the subsidiary ledger means we have two things:

  1. A way to instantly tell how much a customer owes us.
  2. A list agreeing with the general ledger account with the details we need to verify it.
The total of the subsidiary ledger must always agree with the general ledger account balance because both ledgers are just two ways of looking at the same thing. We call the general ledger account a “control” account because we can check our subsidiary ledger against it to make sure they both contain the same exact information.

Back to adjusting journal entries—if you find, by investigation (asking questions, doing research) that there is a customer out there who has not been billed yet, and so doesn’t show up in the control account (or the subsidiary ledger), you have to accrue (add) that revenue by creating and posting a journal entry.

Step 4: Make Adjusting Journal Entries

Every time you find an error, an asset, or a liability (or equity account) that needs to be adjusted, you make an adjusting journal entry and you carefully document why you made it. Those entries are usually dated as of the end of the period (e.g., 12/31/20XX) and if they are numbered, many accountants use the prefix AJE (e.g., AJE1, AJE2, AJE3, etc.).

Step 5: Post the Adjusting Journal Entries

This process is just the same process you use when recording transactions during the period: analyze, journalize, and post.

In the next section, we’ll discuss how to tell the difference between a deferral and an accrual, and why that matters.

]]>
Why It Matters: Completing the Accounting Cycle https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-completing-the-accounting-cycle/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:35 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-completing-the-accounting-cycle/ Read more »]]> Why learn how to the complete accounting cycle?

Each step in the accounting cycle plays an important role in creating accurate entries.

So far you’ve covered the first four steps that define basic, daily bookkeeping:

  1. Every transaction made, whether money spent or received, is analyzed so the accountant knows the exact amount, the purpose of the transaction, the date and time of the transaction, and everything is properly documented.
  2. Every transaction is logged into the journal.
  3. Every journal entry is posted to the general ledger.
  4. The general ledger is tested periodically by running a trial balance.

There are 10 steps in the complete accounting cycle:

A circle with the ten steps in the accounting cycle: 1. Analyze Transactions, 2. Prepare Journal Entries, 3. Post Journal Entries, 4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance, 5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries, 6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance, 7. Prepare Financial Statements, 8. Prepare Closing Entries, 9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance, and 10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed.
The Accounting Cycle. Click for a larger image.

Periodically, the accounting department must prepare a financial annual report for investors and shareholders. The accounting cycle ensures the data presented in the report is organized and accurate, as step seven of the report involves creating financial statements covering the company’s fiscal year. First, though, all the accounts have to be verified and adjusted if necessary (steps five and six). The financial statements must then be prepared in a certain order: the income statement must be prepared first, followed by the statement of owner’s equity, then the balance sheet, and finally the statement of cash flows.

At the end of this process, the books are closed to prevent any changes and to restart the income and expense accounts for the next period.

This module completes the accounting cycle, covering steps 5–10.

  1. Make Adjusting Journal Entries
  2. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance
  3. Prepare Financial Statements
  4. Prepare Closing Entries
  5. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance
  6. Create and Post Reversing Entries (if needed)
]]>
Assignment: Recording Business Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-recording-business-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:34 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-recording-business-transactions/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Recording Business Transactions

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Putting It Together: Recording Business Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-recording-business-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:33 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-recording-business-transactions/ Read more »]]> In this module, you’ve learned how to identify and use the basic accounting reporting structure and the books of record and how those things relate to each other, from journal entries to ledger to trial balance.

Steps 1 through 4 of the Accounting Cycle. 1. Analyze Transactions 2. Prepare Journal Entries 3. Post Journal Entries 4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance

The double-entry bookkeeping ensures the accuracy of financial reports by putting the emphasis on accuracy with the recording of every single transaction (i.e., for every transaction, the total of the debit amounts must equal the total of the credit amounts). This approach ensures that the accounting equation always remains in balance (i.e., Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity).

By using accounts to summarize the hundreds or thousands of transactions that occur each day, accountants turn data into information that can then be used to create the financial statements.

But the job isn’t done yet.

Bookkeeping is largely a mechanical process, but the next step in the accounting cycle is to take the unadjusted trial balance and to apply critical thinking to the numbers. Are they accurate? Do they fairly represent the results of operations and the financial position of the company? And, are they in accordance with GAAP (or IFRS if you’re an international accountant)?

In the next module, you’ll tackle the next six steps of the accounting cycle, from adjusting entries to the final closing of the books.

 

A circle with the ten steps in the accounting cycle: 1. Analyze Transactions, 2. Prepare Journal Entries, 3. Post Journal Entries, 4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance, 5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries, 6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance, 7. Prepare Financial Statements, 8. Prepare Closing Entries, 9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance, and 10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed.
The Accounting Cycle. Click for a larger image.
]]>
Discussion: Baker’s Breakfast Bars https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-bakers-breakfast-bars/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:33 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-bakers-breakfast-bars/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Baker’s Breakfast Bars link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Prepare a Trial Balance https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/prepare-a-trial-balance/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:32 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/prepare-a-trial-balance/ Read more »]]>
  • Prepare a trial balance

 

Here is the completed ledger for NeatNiks for the month of October:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00
Oct 4 GJ1 12,000.00 8,000.00
Oct 15 GJ1 1,500.00 9,500.00
Oct 25 GJ1 2,600.00 6,900.00
Oct 26 GJ1 1,000.00 5,900.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 7,500.00
Oct 31 GJ2 4,000.00 3,500.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 5,650.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 7 GJ1 2,600.00 2,600.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 4 GJ1 12,000.00 12,000.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 7 GJ1 2,600.00 2,600.00
Oct 26 GJ1 1,000.00 1,600.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 31 GJ2 4,000.00 4,000.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 15 GJ1 1,500.00 1,500.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 8,750.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 25 GJ1 1,500.00 1,500.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 0.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 0.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 25 GJ1 1,100.00 1,100.00

When we wrote our journal entries, if we made sure that debits were equal to credits, and if we posted those journal entries exactly as they were writing, then it would be mathematically impossible for the total debits to not equal total credits in the ledger. There’s an easy way to check this: run a trial balance.

First, list all the ledger accounts.

Put all the debit balances in one column, and all the credit balances in another, and compare the totals, like this:

 

NeatNiks
Trial Balance (unadjusted)
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Reference No. Accounts Debits Credits
110 Checking 3,500.00
120 Accounts Receivable 5,650.00
125 Supplies 2,600.00
130 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
210 Account Payable 1,600.00
220 Contractor Payable
310 Nick Frank, Capital Contributions 20,000.00
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals 4,000.00
410 Service Revenue 8,750.00
510 Insurance Revenue 1,500.00
520 Rent Expense
530 Supplies Expense
540 Contractor Expense 1,100.00
Totals Single line 30,350.00
Double line
Single line 30,350.00
Double line

Once you have determined that total debits equals total credits, you can start to look at the accuracy of individual accounts. Just because the trial balance is in balance, doesn’t mean everything is correct. For instance, you could have posted a journal entry completely backward or left one out. In addition, we may need to make some additional journal entries. We should have a rent expense for October, some supplies expense, and we owe our independent contractors some payments too. We’ll cover these adjusting journal entries in the next section, and then we’ll be ready to produce some financial statements.


]]>
Post to the Ledger https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/post-to-the-ledger/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:31 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/post-to-the-ledger/ Read more »]]>
  • Post journal entries to a general ledger

 

We now have two pages of journal entries for NeatNiks that we have prepared during the month of October. A business doing bookkeeping by hand like this might transfer (post) entries from the journal to the ledger daily, weekly, or monthly, depending on who is doing the posting and how busy that person is with other duties, and when the information is needed. Computerized accounting systems post immediately, which is one of the reasons most businesses rely on them, plus they never complain about the tediousness of their work.

You’ll probably never post from a journal to a ledger once you graduate with your accounting degree, but it’s important to know what is going on inside the invisible mind of your automated accounting system so you know two valuable things: (a) what data to put in and (b) how to tell if the reports you are getting from the computer make sense.

Remember the timeless adage about computers: garbage in, garbage out.

Here’s our completed journal through October 31:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account
Oct. 4 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
Oct. 4       Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 4 To record prepayment of rent on vehicle
Oct. 7 Supplies 2,600.00
Oct. 7       Accounts Payable 2,600.00
Oct. 7 To record purchase of supplies on account
Oct. 15 Checking 1,500.00
Oct. 15       Service Revenue 1,500.00
Oct. 15 To record cash received for services rendered
Oct. 20 Accounts Receivable 7,250.00
Oct. 20       Service Revenue 7,250.00
Oct. 20 To record cash billing for services rendered
Oct. 25 Insurance Expense 1,500.00
Oct. 25 Contractor Expense 1,100.00
Oct. 25       Checking 2,600.00
Oct. 25 To record payment of October insurance and contractors
Oct. 26 Accounts Payable 1,000.00
Oct. 26       Checking 1,000.00
Oct. 26 To record payment account

 

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 30 Checking 1,600.00
Oct. 30       Accounts Receivable 1,600.00
Oct. 30 To record receipt of payments from customers on account
Oct. 31 Owner Withdrawal 4,000.00
Oct. 31       Checking 4,000.00
Oct. 31 To record payment to owner

Making a Chart of Accounts

Now we need the chart of accounts:

  • Checking
  • Accounts Receivable
  • Supplies
  • Prepaid Rent
  • Accounts Payable
  • Contractor Payable
  • Nick Frank, Capital Contributions
  • Nick Frank, Withdrawals
  • Service Revenue
  • Insurance Expense
  • Rent Expense
  • Supplies Expense
  • Contractor Expense
Reference Number Account
110 Checking
120 Accounts Receivable
125 Supplies
130 Prepaid Rent
210 Accounts Payable
220 Contractor Payable
310 Nick Frank, Capital
330 Nick Frank, Withdrawals
410 Service Revenue
510 Insurance Expense
520 Rent Expense
530 Supplies Expense
540 Contractor Expense

Notice that we have left space between the accounts to be able to add more when we need to (and that we only used three digits instead of 4, because this is a pretty small company).

Now we need to create a ledger page for each account, but for now, let’s just make two pages: 110 Checking, and 310 Nick Frank, Capital.

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00

Note that the opening balance is zero for both accounts since this is a new business.

Posting is a simple process. We take each journal entry, line by line, and methodically, carefully transfer the information to the appropriate ledger pages.

Here is the first entry posted to the ledgers:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00

Note a couple of important items:

  • When we post from the journal to the ledger, we do exactly as the journal tells us. If we think it’s wrong, we go back to whoever analyzed the transaction and that person either makes a new journal entry or a correcting entry.
  • When we post, we note the page of the journal so that we can go back later and find our source if we need to. We used GJ1 here because the entry came from page 1 of our General Journal (some businesses use special journals for certain purposes, but NeatNiks only has a general, all-purpose journal.)

We update the running total (the balance)—more on that later.

And we do one last thing: we note the account number in the POST. REF. column of the journal, like this:

 

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 110 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 310 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account

Not only do these posting references provide cross-references for later, but they also let you track what you have posted so that if you get distracted for a moment, you’ll later know exactly where you left off.

 


Now let’s take a closer look at that account balance and revisit T accounts.

]]>
Calculate Account Balances https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/calculate-account-balances/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:31 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/calculate-account-balances/ Read more »]]>
  • Calculate the account balance

 

As we post, we continually update account balances. Here are the first two accounts in our general ledger. If this was an old-fashioned book ledger, each of these accounts would be a different page (or pages, when there are a lot of transactions posted):

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 1 GJ1 20,000.00 20,000.00
Oct 4 GJ1 12,000.00 8,000.00
Oct 15 GJ1 1,500.00 9,500.00
Oct 25 GJ1 2,600.00 6,900.00
Oct 26 GJ1 1,000.00 5,900.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 7,500.00
Oct 31 GJ2 4,000.00 3,500.00[1]
Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 5,650.00

One particular journal entry has been highlighted so you can see how it is posted and how the ledger entry can be traced back to the journal:

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 30 Checking 110 1,600.00
Oct. 30       Accounts Receivable 120 1,600.00
Oct. 30 To record receipt of payments from customers on account

In the journal, we have noted the account number we posted to.

In the ledger, we noted the journal (General Journal) and the page. We’re not using special journals, but they would be noted appropriately. Examples of special journals could include a Sales Journal (SJ), Purchasing Journal (PJ), Cash Receipts Journal (CRJ), Cash Disbursements Journal (CDJ), Payroll Journal (PRJ), and so on.

Also, note that the beginning balance, even though it is a zero, is in the debit column, because both of these accounts are asset accounts, which have a normal balance on the debit side. A credit balance in Accounts Receivable would mean that we owed all our customers’ money, which is a highly unlikely scenario, and a credit balance in the checking account would mean that withdrawals had exceeded deposits, meaning the account is overdrawn. Those scenarios would turn these accounts from assets to liabilities.

Now, look at the entries in Accounts Receivable:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 20 GJ1 7,250.00 7,250.00
Oct 30 GJ2 1,600.00 5,650.00

The balance on October 31 is a debit of $5,650.00, calculated as follows:

Beginning balance $-
debit entry 7,250.00
credit entry (1,600.00)
Ending balance Single Line$5,650.00Double Line

We subtracted the credit, not because credits are negative or reductions, but because this is an asset account that is increased by debits and decreased by credits. Also note that in accounting, we often use parentheses to show a negative, and we use a single underline to show we are summing up a column of numbers, and a double underline to show that we are done (the “bottom line”).

Here is the fully posted Accounts Payable ledger page:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct 1 Balance a 0.00
Oct 7 GJ1 2,600.00 2,600.00
Oct 26 GJ1 1,000.00 1,600.00

And how the balance is calculated:

Beginning balance $-
debit entry 2,600.00
credit entry (1,000.00)
Ending balance Single Line$1,600.00Double Line

This is a liability account (something we owe) with a normal credit balance, so we subtract debits from credits to get the balance.

 




  1. We should be able to verify this amount with the bank.
]]>
Create Journal Entries https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/create-journal-entries/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:30 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/create-journal-entries/ Read more »]]>
  • Analyze transactions and create journal entries

 

Steps one and two in the accounting cycle are to analyze transactions as they happen to determine what, if any, journal entry should be made, and to make the journal entry.

Let’s go back to NeatNiks to see how these steps are done.

Remember that Nick Frank started NeatNiks as a sole proprietorship in October. NeatNiks provides customized cleaning services to high-end homeowners in the Santa Fe area of New Mexico.

On October 1, Nick opened a bank account in the name of NeatNiks using $20,000 of his own money from his personal account

There will be documentation to back this amount up if the company is ever audited (checked by an external source such as the IRS or an accounting firm). For instance, there will be a deposit slip and an entry on the bank statement, and maybe a canceled check from Nick. In any case, for most transactions, there will be some kind of paper trail that provides objective, verifiable evidence (remember these principles from the section on accounting concepts?).

In a prior section, we looked at this transaction and made this entry:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account

The checking account is an asset that increased when the owner made a deposit, so we show the increase with a debit. The capital account tracks owner’s equity, which is on the right side of the accounting equation (A = L + E) so we show that increase with a credit.

The next transaction was on October 4. Nick rented a truck for $12,000 cash for October thru March (6 months).

This one is a bit tricky. Remember that the matching principle states that expenses are recognized (recorded) when they are incurred, not when they are paid (although sometimes they are incurred and paid at the same time.) An accountant analyzing this transaction would create the following journal entry:

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account
Oct. 4 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
Oct. 4       Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 4 To record prepayment of rent on vehicle

Prepaid Rent is an asset account because the rent will be incurred with the passing of time. In other words, if for some reason Nick turns around and cancels the rental agreement, or the car company doesn’t deliver the vehicle, Nick will get the rent back. The rent doesn’t belong to the car company until Nick actually uses the vehicle (remember that the word “expense” means “to use up.”). At some point, probably at the end of the month, we will have to adjust Prepaid Rent to account for the expiration of one month’s rent, but for now, we will simply record the cash paid to the car company as our asset: Prepaid Rent. Notice that we are going to post a credit to the checking account, noting that we are reducing that account by the amount of the check written.

This is a good time to point out that the journal we are creating here, the book of original entry, is like an instruction manual to whoever is going to post these transactions to the ledger.

On October 7, Nick purchased $2,600 of supplies on account from Cleaning Supplies, Inc.

Supplies are an asset until they are used up (expended). To buy “on account” means that we picked up the items but did not yet pay for them. Cleaning Supplies, Inc. will send us a bill. We bought these supplies on credit (which means we owe money for them).

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account
Oct. 4 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
Oct. 4       Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 4 To record prepayment of rent on vehicle
Oct. 7 Supplies 2,600.00
Oct. 7       Accounts Payable 2,600.00
Oct. 7 To record purchase of supplies on account

Notice that when we write the journal entries, we indent the title of the account with the credit side of the entry.

Also, notice that total debits always equal total credits. This is a hard and fast rule with no exceptions.

See if you can analyze this one yourself:

October 15 Received $1,500 cash for services performed.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account
Oct. 4 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
Oct. 4       Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 4 To record prepayment of rent on vehicle
Oct. 7 Supplies 2,600.00
Oct. 7       Accounts Payable 2,600.00
Oct. 7 To record purchase of supplies on account
Oct. 15 Checking 1,500.00
Oct. 15       Service Revenue 1,500.00
Oct. 15 To record cash received for services rendered

 

Let’s try this entry: October 20 Billed customers for work done in October $7,250.

If we were using the cash basis of accounting, we wouldn’t have anything to enter here because we haven’t received any cash yet. However, the cornerstone of the accrual basis of accounting is to recognize (record) revenue as it is earned, regardless of when the cash is received. We use an account called Accounts Receivable to show revenue billed but not yet collected.

Refer back to Nick’s purchase of supplies on October 7. Nick owes Cleaning Supplies, Inc. $2,600 for supplies he bought but hadn’t yet paid for, and we recorded that entry as Accounts Payable. For Cleaning Supplies, Inc., that same amount shows as Accounts Receivable. Nick’s payable is their receivable. Nick’s expense is their revenue. And the opposite holds true: Nick’s revenue is someone else’s expense, and Nick’s receivable is someone else’s payable.

JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account
Oct. 4 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
Oct. 4       Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 4 To record prepayment of rent on vehicle
Oct. 7 Supplies 2,600.00
Oct. 7       Accounts Payable 2,600.00
Oct. 7 To record purchase of supplies on account
Oct. 15 Checking 1,500.00
Oct. 15       Service Revenue 1,500.00
Oct. 15 To record cash received for services rendered
Oct. 20 Accounts Receivable 7,250.00
Oct. 20       Service Revenue 7,250.00
Oct. 20 To record cash billing for services rendered

Here are the rest of the transactions, and the completed journal. See if you can reverse analyze these entries and understand the logic behind the debits and credits.

  • 25 Paid cash: $1,500 for insurance and $1,100 for contractors’ salaries
  • 26 Paid $1,000 to Cleaning Supplies, Inc. on account
  • 30 Collected $1,600 from customers on account
  • 31 Withdrew $4,000 cash for personal use
JournalPage 1
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Checking 20,000.00
Oct. 1       Nick Frank, Capital 20,000.00
Oct. 1 To record initial investment by owner and deposit to bank account
Oct. 4 Prepaid Rent 12,000.00
Oct. 4       Checking 12,000.00
Oct. 4 To record prepayment of rent on vehicle
Oct. 7 Supplies 2,600.00
Oct. 7       Accounts Payable 2,600.00
Oct. 7 To record purchase of supplies on account
Oct. 15 Checking 1,500.00
Oct. 15       Service Revenue 1,500.00
Oct. 15 To record cash received for services rendered
Oct. 20 Accounts Receivable 7,250.00
Oct. 20       Service Revenue 7,250.00
Oct. 20 To record cash billing for services rendered
Oct. 25 Insurance Expense 1,500.00
Oct. 25 Contractor Expense 1,100.00
Oct. 25       Checking 2,600.00
Oct. 25 To record payment of October insurance and contractors
Oct. 26 Accounts Payable 1,000.00
Oct. 26       Checking 1,000.00
Oct. 26 To record payment account

 

JournalPage 2
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 30 Checking 1,600.00
Oct. 30       Accounts Receivable 1,600.00
Oct. 30 To record receipt of payments from customers on account
Oct. 31 Owner Withdrawal 4,000.00
Oct. 31       Checking 4,000.00
Oct. 31 To record payment to owner

These last two will be adjusting journal entries, so we’ll address these in a later section.

  • 31 Nick owes independent contractors $1,200 for work done in October—he’ll pay it in November
  • 31 Nick had $1,000 of supplies leftover at the end of the month

Just looking at a journal can be a bit confusing. Remember that a journal is a chronological listing of all transactions and is just raw data at this point. The process of turning raw data into information begins with posting these journal entries to the ledger pages. As you post entries, the reasoning behind the journal entries will become more clear.


]]>
Ledgers https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/ledgers/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:29 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/ledgers/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify a ledger
  • Describe how a ledger is related to a T account

 

A ledger is another book, similar to the journal, but organized by account. A general ledger is the complete collection of all the accounts and transactions of a company. The ledger may be in loose-leaf form, in a bound volume, or in computer memory.

Individual accounts are in order within the ledger. Each account typically has an identification number and a title to help locate accounts when recording data. For example, a small company with simple reporting needs might number asset accounts, 1000–1999; liability accounts, 2000–2999; equity accounts, 3000–3999; revenue accounts, 4000–4999; and expense accounts, 5000–5999. This is a fairly traditional and straight-forward system, where assets start with 1, liabilities with 2, and so on.

This is a German ledger from 1828.

An old paper ledger, filled with handwritten financial records.

This is a modern ledger page:

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Balance a 199,846.33
Oct 9 J41 12,315.64 187,530.69
Oct 20 J41 474.55 187,056.14
Oct 23 J41 12,376.89 174,679.25
Nov 4 J42 484.42 174,194.83
Nov 6 J42 32.00 174,162.83
Nov 6 J43 12,180.03 161,982.80
Nov 13 J43 1,494.06 160,488.74
Nov 16 J44 6,529.02 153,959.72
Nov 16 J44 1,212.21 152,747.51
Nov 16 J44 537.00 152,210.51
Nov 20 J44 9,425.15 142,785.36
Dec 3 J45 427.43 142,357.93
Dec 4 J45 10,970.92 131,387.01
Dec 9 J46 32.00 131,355.01
Dec 14 J46 2,194.72 129,160.29
Dec 15 J46 6,651.26 122,509.03
Dec 15 J46 1,219.11 121,289.92
Dec 18 J46 482.76 120,807.16
Dec 18 J46 14.70 120,792.46
Dec 18 J46 52,905.17 67,887.29

You’ll become more familiar with ledgers as you continue through this course. If they seem a little overwhelming, be patient with yourself. As you learn more through the next modules, you’ll be able to look back and know exactly what each item in this example means.

T Accounts

Let’s take a closer look at the modern ledger. Notice that ledgers include the date of each transaction, then a column we don’t use much called “Item,” and then a column called “posting reference” that we’ll discuss later. Next are debits and credits. Since the example above is the checking account, it is an asset, appropriately numbered 1100 (which is the way we order the accounts in the general ledger—not alphabetically, but by number). The far-right columns keep a running balance of the debits and credits.

Since the checking account is an asset account, a debit (entry on the left side) represents an increase, and a credit (entry on the right side) represents a decrease. The first entry is the balance from the end of September. A debit balance in the checking account is the “normal” balance because if we have money in the bank (in this case, $199,846.33) it would mean deposits had exceeded withdrawals, and deposits (increases) are recorded as debits, while withdrawals (decreases) are recorded as credits. To get the balance, we “net” the debits and credits. Look at the second line of the ledger. A credit of $12,315.64 from the journal page 41 (see the J41 in the post ref column?) reduces the balance from $199,846.33 to $187,530.69. We don’t know what created that credit. It could have been a check written or a transfer. We would need to go to the journal to find the original entry. More about that later.

At the end of December (assuming this ledger is complete and correct), how much money did this company have in its checking account?

Date Item Post. Ref. Debit Credit Balance
Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 1 Balance a 199,846.33
Oct 9 J41 12,315.64 187,530.69
Oct 20 J41 474.55 187,056.14
Oct 23 J41 12,376.89 174,679.25
Nov 4 J42 484.42 174,194.83
Nov 6 J42 32.00 174,162.83
Nov 6 J43 12,180.03 161,982.80
Nov 13 J43 1,494.06 160,488.74
Nov 16 J44 6,529.02 153,959.72
Nov 16 J44 1,212.21 152,747.51
Nov 16 J44 537.00 152,210.51
Nov 20 J44 9,425.15 142,785.36
Dec 3 J45 427.43 142,357.93
Dec 4 J45 10,970.92 131,387.01
Dec 9 J46 32.00 131,355.01
Dec 14 J46 2,194.72 129,160.29
Dec 15 J46 6,651.26 122,509.03
Dec 15 J46 1,219.11 121,289.92
Dec 18 J46 482.76 120,807.16
Dec 18 J46 14.70 120,792.46
Dec 18 J46 52,905.17 67,887.29

Right. It had $67,887.20.

This is only a tiny part of the picture though. Remember that there are more accounts. A whole lot more.

What Is a T Account?

We use T accounts to help us analyze transactions. A T account is just a ledger that has been stripped of everything but the debit and credit columns.

An empty general ledger. There are several columns and rows.

If we want to sketch out a transaction before we write the journal entry, we can use T accounts on a piece of paper or even a napkin.

An empty T Account, which just has two columns: debit and credit. The caption of this T Account is "Checking".

T Accounts at NeatNiks

Let’s revisit the first transaction we recorded for NeatNiks:

On October 1, Nick Frank opened a bank account in the name of NeatNiks using $20,000 of his own money from his personal account.

Using T accounts, we could visualize how the transaction would look in the ledger:

Checking
Debit Credit
20,000.00
Nick Frank, Capital
Debit Credit
20,000.00

From this analysis, we could write the journal entry, which will include the date, the account, and the amount (debit and credit), and a short description of the transaction, like this:

JournalPage 101
Date Account Debit Credit
1-Oct Checking $20,000
1-Oct Nick Frank, Capital $20,000
1-Oct To record initial owner investment and opening of bank account

As you are about to learn, the process of taking the list of journal entries and entering them into the ledgers is called posting. You have all the tools; now it’s time to put them into practice.

]]>
Introduction to the Recording Process https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-the-recording-process/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:29 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-the-recording-process/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Account for business transactions using double-entry bookkeeping

Let’s review what you have learned about bookkeeping so far:

  • An account is a part of the accounting system used to classify and summarize the increases, decreases, and balances of each asset, liability, stockholders’ equity item, dividend, revenue, and expense. Firms set up accounts for each different business element, such as cash, accounts receivable, and accounts payable.
  • A journal is a chronological (arranged in order of time) record of business transactions. A journal entry is the recording of a business transaction in the journal. A journal entry shows all the effects of a business transaction as expressed in debit(s) and credit(s) and may include an explanation of the transaction. A transaction is entered in a journal before it is entered into ledger accounts. Because each transaction is initially recorded in a journal rather than directly in the ledger, the journal is called a book of original entry.
  • A ledger (general ledger) is the complete collection of all financial transactions of a company organized by account.
  • The chart of accounts is a listing of the titles and numbers of all the accounts in the ledger.

These are the first three steps in the accounting cycle. Now, let’s add the fourth step: the unadjusted trial balance. We call it an “unadjusted” trial balance because later in the accounting cycle, we will be making adjustments to accounts in order to correct mistakes and to make sure everything is in compliance with Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP); but before we do that, we’ll complete the unadjusted trial balance.

 

You can view the transcript for “The Books – Journal, Ledger, and Trial Balance” here (opens in new window).

 

Compared to analyzing transactions, creating journal entries, and posting to the ledger, the trial balance is easy. At the end of an accounting period, often at the end of a month, but certainly at the end of the year, all the ledger accounts are listed in order with ending balances. On this list, the total of all the debit balances must equal the total of all the credit balances. If they don’t, something happened in the posting process; but if they do, you will be ready to move on to adjusting journal entries, which we will explore in the next module.

]]>
Introduction to Journals and Ledgers https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-journals-and-ledgers/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:28 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-journals-and-ledgers/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Identify the accounting books of record

As you’ve seen, after recognizing a business event as a business transaction, we analyze the event to determine its increase or decrease effects on the assets, liabilities, owner’s (stockholder’s) equity items, dividends, revenues, or expenses of the business. After the analysis, we translate these increase or decrease effects into debits and credits.

In each business transaction we record, the total dollar amount of debits must equal the total dollar amount of credits. When we debit one account (or accounts) for $100, we must credit another account (or accounts) for a total of $100. Double-entry accounting requires that each transaction is recorded by an entry that has equal debits and credits.

Now, the question we must answer is, where and how exactly do we record these transactions?

In step two of our 10-step process, we see that the first place to record a transaction is called a journal. Even if you are using a computer system (which is likely), you’ll be entering transactions as debits and credits into a journal. Let’s find out what a journal is, what it looks like, and how it is related to the ledger and the trial balance.

Steps 1 through 4 of the Accounting Cycle. 1. Analyze Transactions 2. Prepare Journal Entries 3. Post Journal Entries 4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance

]]>
Journals https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journals/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:28 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/journals/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify a journal

 

Bookkeepers most likely emerged while society was still using the barter-and-trade system (pre-2000 B.C.) rather than a case-and-commerce economy, and their main record-keeping system would have been a common journal. Journals from these times would have been giant leather-bound books with dates and descriptions of trades made or terms for services rendered, as you would expect in a ship’s log or a personal diary. In essence, a log or diary is what a journal is.

Below are two examples of what pre-Pacioli entries may have looked like:

  • 12 May 1395: In exchange for a small pig, which I provided today, William Hayworth promised a satchel of seed when the harvest is completed in the fall.
  • 14 May 1395: Garland Renquist agreed to make one goose-down bed in exchange for a year’s worth of chickens; one chicken to be delivered weekly once the bed is finished and delivered.

If a dispute arose, these journal entries provided proof in court. Although tiresome, this system of detailing every agreement was ideal because long periods of time could pass before transactions were completed.

Close up photograph of handwritten financial records.As currencies became available and tradesmen and merchants began to build material wealth, bookkeepers added monetary measurements to the journal entries, but still had to read the description of each entry to decide whether to deduct or add it when calculating something as simple as monthly profit or loss.

Then, philosophers like Cotrugli and Pacioli came up with the unique self-balancing, double-entry system of tracking that we still use today.

The idea was to list the business resources (assets) separately from any claims upon those resources by others (liabilities and equity), using debits and credits. And so, the journal evolved. Today, it is still a chronological list of economic events (transactions), but now it is strictly a shorthand version. It indicates the date, amounts, accounts involved, and whether each entry is debited or credited, and often includes a short description that would help an auditor or other accountant find the source documents.

The journal is not sufficient, by itself, to prepare financial statements. That objective is fulfilled by subsequent steps in the accounting cycle—from posting to the ledgers through the adjusted trial balance. But maintaining the journal is the beginning point toward that end objective, and so, let’s look at a more modern example of an accounting journal.

Modern Journal Example

Before the use of computers became widespread, these journal entries were written by hand in a book, and there were pages and pages of them.

Here’s an example of an entire page of journal entries for a small business that just issued payroll checks to employees:

JournalPage 421
Date Description Post. Ref. Debit Credit
20–
Oct. 23 Administrative Salaries 5100 2,307.69
Oct. 23 Office Salaries 5200 4,651.08
Oct. 23 Sales Salaries 5300 3,600.00
Oct. 23 Plant Wages 5400 5,219.60
Oct. 23 FICA Taxes Payable – OASDI 2010 978.26
Oct. 23 FICA Taxes Payable – HI 2020 228.80
Oct. 23 Employees FIT Payable 2400 891.00
Oct. 23 Employees SIT Payable 2500 484.42
Oct. 23 Employees SUTA Payable 2510 9.45
Oct. 23 Employees CIT Payable 2600 612.35
Oct. 23 Employees CIT Payable 2600 612.35
Oct. 23 Group Insurance Premiums Collected 2700 181.20
Oct. 23 Union Dues Payable 2800 16.00
Oct. 23 Payroll Account 1200 12,376.89
        23 Payroll Taxes 5600 1,387.46
Oct 23 FICA Taxes Payable – OASDI 2010 978.26
Oct 23 FICA Taxes Payable – HI 2020 228.79
Oct 23 FUTA Taxes Payable 2100 4.51
Oct 23 SUTA Taxes Payable 2200 176.26
Nov. 4 Employees SIT Payable 2500 484.42
Nov. 4 Checking 1100 484.42
         6 Union Dues Payable 2800 32.00
Nov. 6 Checking 1100 32.00

This may look impossibly complicated right now, but soon you’ll get the knack of debits and credits and how they all work together. First, however, we have to learn how to take all these journal entries, which represent the raw data from which financial statements are compiled, and re-sort them so they are sorted by account rather than by date.

That is the job of the ledger. When you get to the ledger in the next section, look for the highlighted entries to cash.

]]>
Accounts https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:27 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accounts/ Read more »]]>
  • Define accounts as they are used in bookkeeping
  • Explain the role of accounts

 

Illustration of several dollar bills.A large corporation like Home Depot or Amazon engages in hundreds of thousands of transactions during a year. Can you imagine preparing a transaction analysis, as we did for NeatNiks, for all those transactions? Even for just one day? It would take a lot of time, and even if you used a spreadsheet, it would be unmanageable. Fortunately, there is a better way to organize all that data: double-entry bookkeeping. Before we get into the details of the double-entry bookkeeping system though, we need to understand what we mean when we say the word account.

An account is a part of the accounting system used to classify and summarize the increases, decreases, and balances of each asset, liability, stockholders’ equity item, dividend, revenue, and expense. Firms set up accounts for each different business element, such as cash, accounts receivable, and accounts payable.

The list of all accounts for the business is called, simply enough, the chart of accounts.

 

NeatNiks’s Chart of Accounts

Here’s a sample chart of accounts for NeatNiks. Note that a chart of accounts for a real company would be far more complex than this sample:

  • Assets
    • Checking
    • Accounts Receivable
    • Supplies
    • Prepaid Rent
  • Liabilities
    • Accounts Payable
    • Wages Payable
  • Equity
    • Nick Frank, Capital Contributions
    • Nick Frank, Withdrawals
    • Service Revenue
    • Insurance Expense
    • Rent Expense
    • Supplies Expense
    • Wage Expense

Notice that accounts are categorized by type and listed not alphabetically, but in a particular order that goes like this:

  • Assets
  • Liabilities

Equity, which is broken down into:

  • Capital
  • Withdrawals
  • Revenue
  • Expenses

Accountants may differ on the account title (or name) they give the same item. For example, one accountant might name an account Notes Payable and another might call it Loans Payable. Both account titles refer to the amounts borrowed by the company. Most textbooks refer to the main bank account as Cash, but in reality, businesses don’t carry much cash. They will have several checking and savings accounts though, so a company accountant would name the accounts representatively, such as First World Bank Checking, First World Bank Payroll Account, and First World Bank Money Market. The account title should be logical to help the accountant group similar transactions into the same account. Once you give an account a title, you must use that same title throughout the accounting records.


The Role of Accounts

A business man working on a tablet.We use accounts to track things that are important to us (using the monetary principle) and we try not to have more accounts than we need. We may have one account for all our equipment purchases called “Equipment.” We might have a separate list of all the equipment and what it cost us, but the total cost of all the equipment on that list would be equal to the total of the Equipment account (that is just a running total of everything we have purchased so far). You would not want to start a new account for each piece of equipment. However, you may want separate accounts for equipment, vehicles, buildings, and land. That decision really depends on how you are going to report those things on the financial statements. Often, when deciding on which accounts to use, it is best to work backward from the end product—the financials. We’ll come back to this topic later, but for now, just know that an account is a category that we use for tracking and reporting.

Each account then will have a running total, called a “balance” that we, as bookkeepers, keep up to date and accurate.

 

NeatNiks’s Account Balances

For instance, in our completed table for NeatNiks, we were tracking the following categories (accounts):

Checking Account = Nick Frank, Capital Nick Frank, Withdrawals Service Revenue Insurance Expense Rent Expense Supplies Expense Contractor Expense
1-Oct +20,000 = +20,000
4-Oct (12,000) = (12,000)
15-Oct +1,500 = +1,500
25-Oct (2,600) = (1,500) (1,100)
26-Oct (1,000) = (1,000)
30-Oct +1,600 = +1,600
31-Oct (4,000) = (4,000)
Balance +3,500 = +20,000 (4,000) +3,100 (1,500) (12,000) (1,000) (1,100)

Each account shows a running total, and we know at the end of October, there was $3,500 in the bank (and that amount should be verifiable as well by checking the bank statement).

Accounts are the categories that we use to track the financial information that is important to us.

Next, we’ll tackle one of the most perplexing issues for non-accountants: debits and credits. But first, let’s check your understanding of the role of accounts in the accounting process.

]]>
Rules of Debits and Credits https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/rules-of-debits-and-credits/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:27 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/rules-of-debits-and-credits/ Read more »]]>
  • List the general rules for debits and credits

 

Double-entry bookkeeping is the foundation of accounting. In the double-entry system, every transaction affects at least two accounts, and sometimes more. This concept will seem strange at first, but it’s designed to be a self-checking system and to give twice as much information as a simple, single-entry system.

In addition, instead of using negative and positive numbers, we record our transactions in terms of left and right—that is, on the left or right side of a record—which in double-entry bookkeeping are called debit and credit.

Understanding debits and credits—and the fact that debits are on the left and credits are on the right—is crucial to your success in accounting.

The Rules of Debits and Credits

Some accounts are increased by a debit and some are increased by a credit. An increase to an account on the left side of the equation (assets) is shown by an entry on the left side of the account (debit). Therefore, those accounts are decreased by a credit. An increase to an account on the right side of the equation (liabilities and equity) is shown by an entry on the right side of the account (credit). Therefore, those accounts are decreased by a debit.

After a while, you will have the rules for debits and credits for each type of account committed to memory, but for now, you can always determine which accounts are increased by a debit (and therefore decreased by a credit) and which accounts are increased by a credit (and therefore decreased by a debit) by using this bit of logic: [latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{E}[/latex]

That is, if the account is an asset, it’s on the left side of the equation; thus it would be increased by a debit. If the account is a liability or equity, it’s on the right side of the equation; thus it would be increased by a credit.

Debits and Credits: Contributed Capital

Let’s take a look at an example from NeatNiks:

On October 1, Nick Frank opened a bank account in the name of NeatNiks using $20,000 of his own money from his personal account.

In our accounting records, we’ll record the transaction like this:

  • Debit checking (an asset) $20,000 to show that the checking account increased.
  • Credit the capital account (equity) to show that it also increased.

Checking Account

Debit Credit
$20,000.00

Nick Frank, Capital

Debit Credit
$20,000.00

Notice that each account has two sides—left and right. In accounting: debit and credit.

Here is a summary of the accounts in general:

  • On the left side of the accounting equation:
    • Assets are increased by a debit, decreased by a credit
  • On the right side of the accounting equation:
    • Liabilities are increased by a credit, decreased by a debit
    • Equity is increased by a credit, decreased by a debit

There are no exceptions to this rule, even though some accounts may seem to have strange rules at first. For instance, the account “owner withdrawals” shows up on the right side of the equation because it is an equity account, but it represents reductions in equity as the owner takes money out of the company. These withdrawals are recorded as debits, because they decrease equity. Similarly, expenses decrease equity. Every time the company records an expense, it is recorded as a debit even though expense accounts appear on the right side of the equation, and revenues are recorded as credits because they increase equity.

Debit

The most important point to remember is the DEBIT literally means LEFT and CREDIT literally means RIGHT.

Here is a summary of how different accounts are affected by debits (DR) and credits (CR):

Account type DR (Left side of the accounting equation) CR (Right side of the accounting equation)
Assets Increase Decrease
Liabilities Decrease Increase
Equity Decrease Increase
Capital Contributions increase equity, therefore N/A contributions shown as credits
Owner withdrawals decrease equity, therefore withdrawals are shown as debits N/A
Revenues increase equity, therefore N/A revenues are shown as credit
Expenses decrease equity, therefore expenses are shown as debits N/A

Let’s take a look at one more example, also from NeatNiks.

Debits and Credits: Revenue Received

On October 15, Nick received $1,500 cash for services performed.

In our accounting records, we’ll record the transaction like this:

  • Debit checking (an asset) $1,500 to show that the checking account increased.
  • Credit revenues (a sub-account of equity) to show that equity also increased.

Checking Account

Debit Credit
$1,500.00

Service Revenue

Debit Credit
$1,500.00

We’ll be exploring this concept in more depth in the sections on journaling and posting, and on learning by applying the rules of debits and credits to a variety of transactions; but for now, the following bears repeating: to debit an account means to post an entry to the left side of the account and to credit an account means to post an entry to the right side of the account. Debit does not mean increase or decrease unless you are using that term in conjunction with a specific account.

Here’s another way to look at it:

Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity
Left side DR CR Right side
Assets +
+ Liabilities
+ Capital Contributions
+ Owner Withdrawals
+ Revenues
+ Expenses

This concept will become clearer as you go on. You might notice there is no minus sign on the debit side of the Capital Contributions category. There is no minus sign because we never reduce that account. The opposite of a capital contribution is a withdrawal.

So why then are owner withdrawals increased by a debit?

 

Here’s a fun video to help you remember debit on the left and credits on the right:



]]>
Introduction to Double-Entry Bookkeeping https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-double-entry-bookkeeping/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:26 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-double-entry-bookkeeping/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Identify the basic reporting structure of accounting information

The goal of both bookkeeping and accounting is to turn massive amounts of raw data into useful information in the form of financial reports. In order to do that, we use accounts to summarize data. All the data that runs through the bank account is recorded in the company account as well. While a bank balance simply shows cash in and out, the business set of accounts also includes entries to show how that cash came to be in the bank and how it was spent.

icon of papers in a file folderFor instance, if you look at your own bank account, you might see the rent payment to your landlord; some payments to the grocery store, the barber or hair salon; and books purchased from the bookstore or online, but you are only looking at one account for one month. What if you wanted to know the total amount you spend getting your hair done during the year? You’d have to sort through each monthly statement looking for those charges and hope you recognize them when you see them and that you don’t miss one, or count one twice by accident.

In business, we set up accounts for similar transactions that we want to track and summarize. Every time we record an entry in the cash account for rent expense on our building, we also create an account called Rent Expense to record each rent transaction. If we want to know how much rent we paid last year, we can then simply pull up our Rent Expense account to see the total of that one category.

While this sounds simple enough, businesses are tracking thousands of transactions in a hundred different categories. We need a systematic way to keep things organized and to make sure we are accurately recording and reporting transactions. Double-entry accounting was invented to meet this need. That system is based on an underlying structure of accounts, and a strange and unique system of recording that uses left and right instead of plus and minus—a system we call debits and credits.

]]>
Why It Matters: Recording Business Transactions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-recording-business-transactions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:25 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-recording-business-transactions/ Read more »]]> Why learn about double-entry accounting?

Accounting is one of the few professional processing systems that is as relevant today as it was 500 years ago when first documented by Luca Pacioli in the 15th century. Some say that the growth in business size and complexity could never have happened without the double-entry bookkeeping system because the system provides external users with the information necessary to encourage investment.

Even though computers have automated the process, in the 500 years since it was first documented, the double-entry bookkeeping system has proven to be the best way to accurately collate, classify, and report on the vast number of financial transactions that take place in a venture.

In short, double-entry bookkeeping allows all stakeholders in a venture to get an accurate picture of the results of operations (profit & loss report) and financial position (balance sheet) of the venture at any time.

With financial statements as the end-game, accountants follow a strict, well-defined process to get there. This process, or “cycle,” is continuous and can be broken down into 10 discrete steps:

 

A circle with the ten steps in the accounting cycle: 1. Analyze Transactions, 2. Prepare Journal Entries, 3. Post Journal Entries, 4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance, 5. Make Adjusting Journal Entries, 6. Prepare Adjusted Trial Balance, 7. Prepare Financial Statements, 8. Prepare Closing Entries, 9. Prepare Post-Closing Trial Balance, and 10. Create and Post Reversing Entries, if needed.
The Accounting Cycle. Click for a larger image.

In this module, we’ll cover the first four steps in order:

Steps 1 through 4 of the Accounting Cycle. 1. Analyze Transactions 2. Prepare Journal Entries 3. Post Journal Entries 4. Prepare Unadjusted Trial Balance

You’ll learn how to identify and use the basic accounting reporting structure and the books of record (the journal and the ledger) and how those things relate to each other. Once you are familiar with the tools, you will learn how to build the foundation of the financial statements from journal entries to trial balance.

]]>
Discussion: SoftSheets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-soft-sheets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-soft-sheets/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: SoftSheets link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Accounting Principles https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-accounting-principles/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:24 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-accounting-principles/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Accounting Principles

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).

 

]]>
Convergence https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/convergence/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/convergence/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the convergence movement

 

The convergence of accounting standards refers to the goal of establishing a single set of accounting standards that will be used internationally, and in particular, the effort to reduce the differences between the GAAP, and the IFRS. Convergence in some form has been taking place for several decades, and efforts today include projects that aim to reduce the differences between accounting standards.

The goal of and various proposed steps to achieve convergence of accounting standards has been criticized by various individuals and organizations. For example, in 2006 senior partners at PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) called for convergence to be “shelved indefinitely” in a draft paper, calling for the IASB to focus instead on improving its own set of standards.

As of early 2020, 166 countries were using IFRS and only one was using GAAP. For an interactive list of IFRS by jurisdiction, visit: Use of IFRS Standards.

As time goes on, convergence will be an interesting movement to watch and see as details are worked through towards creating that single set of accounting standards.


]]>
Putting It Together: Accounting Principles https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-accounting-principles/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:23 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-accounting-principles/ Read more »]]> A woman sitting in an office.As you’ve seen in this module, the accounting profession is self-governing for the most part. The SEC has delegated rule-making authority to the FASB, which was created by the AICPA, and even though not all companies are subject to SEC oversight, GAAP provide guidance for even small, privately held companies.

Remember, the end goal of accounting is to provide useful information, and that information is intended for external users, like lenders and investors, usually in the form of financial statements. The financial statements are the scorecards: they illustrate what the business owns and what it owes (balance sheet) and how well it did during the last year (income statement). GAAP gives accountants the rules of keeping score, so that everyone who uses the financial statements is keeping score the same way. Because the FASB has a solid rule-making process, the practices it defines are well-thought-out, reasonable, and relevant.

You’ve learned now about the FASB, accrual basis accounting, and accounting standards, so now it’s time to put all this information to use.

]]>
International Accounting Standards https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/international-accounting-standards/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:22 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/international-accounting-standards/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the role of the IASB in establishing accounting standards
  • Compare and contrast IFRS and GAAP

 

IFRS are designed as a common global language for business affairs so that company accounts are understandable and comparable across international boundaries. They are a consequence of growing international shareholding and trade. The IFRS is particularly important for companies that have dealings in several countries. They are progressively replacing the many different national accounting standards.

Map of the world

The IFRS began as an attempt to harmonize accounting across the European Union, but the value of harmonization quickly made the concept attractive around the world. They are occasionally called by the original name of International Accounting Standards (IAS). The IAS were issued between 1973 and 2001 by the Board of the International Accounting Standards Committee (IASC). On April 1, 2001, the new International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) took over the responsibility for setting International Accounting Standards from the IASC. During its first meeting, the new Board adopted existing IAS and Standing Interpretations Committee standards (SICs). The IASB has continued to develop standards calling the new standards the IFRS.

IFRS vs GAAP

A major difference between GAAP and IFRS is that GAAP is rule based, whereas IFRS is principle based.

A principle-based framework has the potential for different interpretations of similar transactions, which could lead to extensive disclosures in the financial statements. The standards-setting board in a principle-based system like IFRS can issue supplemental pronouncements to clarify unclear areas, just as the FASB does in the rule-based GAAP system.

Another difference between IFRS and GAAP is the methodology used to assess accounting treatment. Under GAAP, the research is more focused on the literature whereas, under IFRS, the review of the facts pattern is more thorough.


Some Examples of Differences between IFRS and GAAP

  • Consolidation: IFRS favors a control model whereas GAAP prefers a risks-and-rewards model. Some entities consolidated in accordance with FIN 46(R) may have to be shown separately under IFRS.
  • Statement of Income: Under IFRS, extraordinary items are not segregated in the income statement. With GAAP, they are shown below the net income.
  • Inventory: Under IFRS, Last In, First Out (LIFO) cannot be used; whereas under GAAP, companies have the choice between LIFO and FIFO.
  • Earning-per-Share: Under IFRS, the earnings-per-share calculation does not average the individual interim period calculations; whereas under GAAP the computation averages the individual interim period incremental shares.
  • Development costs: These costs can be capitalized under IFRS if certain criteria are met, while it is considered as “expenses” under GAAP.

You may be asking yourself at this point, “What about having the world use the same standards?” There is a movement to do just that and we’ll cover it next.

]]>
Foundational Rules of Accrual Basis Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/foundational-rules-of-accrual-basis-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/foundational-rules-of-accrual-basis-accounting/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain revenue recognition
  • Explain the matching principle

 

There are two foundational principles of accrual basis accounting:

  • The principle of revenue recognition: to record revenue as it is earned.
  • The matching principle: to match expenses with revenues

Revenue Recognition

To recognize something in accounting means to record it.

Sometimes we use the word “realize” to differentiate between when we record something (recognize) and when we actually get it (realize).

Revenue Recognition at NeatNiks

Let’s return to our NeatNiks example. On October 15, Nick Frank received $1,500 for services performed, which means that he did the work (cleaning) and the client paid cash right then. The revenue was both realized and recognized at the same time (Nick had you set up an accounting system by now for him and recorded the revenue when he earned it.)

For simple transactions like this, the revenue is recorded as it is billed when using QuickBooks and most other accounting systems. Let’s assume as soon as Nick did the work and entered his time, the system calculated the billing to the customer and emailed the invoice (bill) to the customer who then paid it immediately, before Nick even got back to his home office.

Legally, Nick earned the revenue when the work was deemed acceptable to the client. The fact that the customer paid means the work was most likely acceptable. So, for practical purposes, revenue is recognized and realized at the same time. Assuming again that Nick is using QuickBooks, at the same time Nick pushes the button that sends the invoice to the customer, the system records the revenue.

That’s the simplest version of revenue recognition under accrual basis accounting.

The cash coming in is a separate transaction. In fact, if Nick is paid in advance and puts the money in the bank, that’s not revenue.

In terms of the accounting equation, revenue recognition looks like this:

Nick does the work and gets paid at the same time:

Cash (asset) + $1,500 = Revenue (equity) + $1,500

If Nick does the work and gets paid later, there are actually two transactions:

Accounts Receivable (asset) + $1,500 = Revenue (equity) + $1,500

And

Cash (asset) + $1,500  and Accounts Receivable (asset) − $1,500 = (no effect on liabilities or equity)

Notice a couple of things:

  1. A transaction can affect two accounts on the same side of the transaction, as long as the net effect is still that the equation is in balance
  2. The moment when the balance in accounts receivable before the payment showed that our client owed us $1,500, but the balance after the payment would be zero—showing that the customer didn’t owe us any money is when we “realized” the revenue.

This is the cornerstone of accrual basis accounting: to recognize revenue as it is earned.

Before we move on to a little bit more advanced and technical explanation of revenue recognition, let’s take a look at what happens if the client pays in advance of the work being done.

Nick would record receipt of the cash:

Cash $1,500 (asset)  = Deposit (liability) $1,500 + (no effect on equity)

A customer deposit is often called Unearned Revenue (because it was collected before it was earned) but let’s avoid that title because it’s not revenue until it is earned (until Nick does the work). You may have paid a deposit on a rental at some point. Even though you paid that money to the rental company, it’s still your money, and if the deal doesn’t happen, you get the money back (if it’s a refundable deposit).

In this case, if the customer pays Nick in advance, but Nick never shows up to do the work, Nick hasn’t earned the money, and it doesn’t belong to him. The money still belongs to the client. Nick is in possession of the money, but it is not his. In other words, he owes it to the customer (to do the work or refund the money) so it’s a debt. In accounting terms, it’s a liability.

Now, when Nick does the work, he can recognize the revenue (which has already been realized):

No effect on assets = Deposit (liability) − $1,500 and Revenue (equity) + $1,500

0 = −1500 + 1500

Assets (cash) is not affected because we already collected the cash a while back, and now we are just wiping out a debt (customer deposit) by doing the work (and recognizing the revenue).

Again, the rule to memorize is this: recognize (record) revenue as it is earned (regardless of when the cash is collected, or even IF it is collected.)

You may be wondering what happens if the customer never pays. Good question. We’ll tackle that later.

You can read the technical GAAP definition for revenue recognition at the FASB Accounting Standards Codification 605-10-25.

The Matching Principle

The matching principle (or the matching concept, or just matching) is related to the first foundational principle of accrual basis accounting, and it relates to expense recognition. As you may have guessed already, the matching principle states that we match expenses with revenues. There are a couple of ways to do this.

Match Revenues and Expenses

The first is to directly match revenues and expenses. For instance, if Azra owns a little shop and she buys a TV for $129 to resell, she doesn’t record the cost of the TV as an expense. It’s an asset while it is sitting on the shelf (something her business owns). When she sells the TV, say for $439, she records the revenue (because she earned it when she sold the TV) and then she records the cost of the TV as an expense, directly matching the expense to the revenue. Azra made $310 on the sale ($439 revenue − $129 cost).

Match by Time

Another way is to match by time. If a company’s employees earn $2,000 during the month of October, but can’t actually match those wages directly to the revenue of each item sold, it can still match those wages to October revenues.

Illustration of a business woman holding a notebook.Here’s a slightly deeper look at this: remember to recognize revenue earned during the month of October as October revenue, regardless of when a company gets the actual money. By the same token, recognize expenses during the month incurred, regardless of when they are paid. So, if the company’s employees earned $1,000 for the first 15 days in the month of October, and got paid on the 20th, record that $1,000 in October (no problem). Let’s say they earned another $1,000 for the 16th through the 31st, but the company paid them on the 5th of November. As the company’s accountant, on what date would you record the $1,000 for that second half of October?

You would record the $1,000 on the 31st of October because the matching principle requires us to record expenses as incurred, matching them as best we can to revenues. October expenses match October revenues.

Match by Consumption

Another common matching technique is similar to matching by time, and that is matching by use or consumption.

A common example of this is supplies. We buy a bunch of supplies during the month, but we don’t record those supplies as an expense until we use them (remember the definition of “expense” means used up). Also, if you purchase an annual insurance policy in the month of October for $12,000, instead of recording the expense as $12,000 in October, you would use the matching principle and record $1,000 of expense in October and the unexpired (unused) portion of the policy as an asset (something you own). In November, you would record (recognize) another $1,000 in insurance expense, and reduce the asset, called Prepaid Insurance, by $1,000, leaving a balance of $10,000 (ten more months), and so on.

This is accrual basis accounting in a nutshell: recognize revenue as earned and expenses as incurred.


]]>
Introduction to International Financial Reporting Standards https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-international-financial-reporting-standards/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:21 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-international-financial-reporting-standards/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Explain the relationship between the U.S. and international accounting standards

The United States portion of a world globe.In the United States, financial reporting practices are set forth by the FASB and organized within the framework of GAAP; however, the rest of the world follows a version of what is known as International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

Like GAAP, IFRS defines how particular types of transactions and other events should be reported in financial statements. IFRS was established in order to have a common accounting language, so business and accounts can be understood from company to company and country to country.

As of December 2019, more than 120 countries around the world had adopted IFRS, with the notable holdout being the United States. While the SEC has openly expressed a desire to switch from GAAP to IFRS, progress toward that goal has been slow, mostly due to resistance from the AICPA and U.S. businesses who claim it would be too disruptive and expensive to make such a radical change.

]]>
Introduction to Accrual Basis Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accrual-basis-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accrual-basis-accounting/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Identify fundamental principles of accrual based accounting

Icon of a stack of bills and coinsAs regular people, most of us keep track of the money in the our bank accounts, along with some of our bills (maybe sitting in a pile on our counter), and in our heads, we have an idea of the nature and amount of income we are expecting in the near future. In essence, we are using what accountants call the “cash basis” of accounting.

Business finances can be much more complex than our individual lives. We need a more sophisticated way to track how much we owe, who owes us, and what we own. To track this information, we use a more comprehensive system of accounting known as “accrual basis.” Think of accrual basis accounting as an economic picture of our business, rather than just tracking cash that comes in and out.

]]>
The Accrual Basis and Cash Basis of Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/the-accrual-basis-and-cash-basis-of-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:20 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/the-accrual-basis-and-cash-basis-of-accounting/ Read more »]]>
  • Differentiate between accrual basis and cash basis of accounting

 

Many small businesses use cash basis accounting. It’s simpler and it mimics the way people handle their personal finances. But as a business grows, it often becomes necessary to switch to accrual basis accounting. Investors, lenders, and government agencies often expect to see financial statements prepared with accrual accounting. GAAP require accrual accounting because it presents a more accurate picture of a company’s financial condition.

Cash Basis Accrual Basis
Description Revenue is recorded when payment is received and expenses are recorded when payment is made. Revenue is recorded when it is earned and expenses are recorded when they are incurred, regardless of when payment is received.
GAAP Not allowed Required by FASB Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 5: Recognition and Measurement in Financial Statements of Business Enterprises (December 1984)
Advantages Generally easier for smaller entities and for entities that conduct business primarily in cash as opposed to credit. Provides more information regarding revenue and expenses as well as amounts customers owe and amounts owed to vendors and other creditors.
Taxes Generally, cash basis reporting is permitted for sole proprietors and certain other small businesses. Generally, accrual basis of reporting for income tax purposes is required for bigger businesses and corporations.

Let’s take a look at an example of cash basis versus accrual basis in a small business.

Luis’s Landscaping

Let’s say Luis starts a landscaping business in Florida on December 1. He opens a business bank account with $100. He mows 40 yards during the month at $50 each, leaving an invoice (bill) on the door of each customer asking them to pay within 30 days. He earned $2,000, but no one has paid him by December 31 (everyone pays in January). In addition, he had two people working for him and he promised to pay them $300 each as soon as he gets paid (in January), so he incurred $600 in labor expenses, and he put $200 of gas and oil and supplies on his professional account at a local machine shop that he will also pay in January.

On December 31, at midnight, as the fireworks are going off, a friend asks Luis how his new business is going, and he says, “Great!”  She asks Luis if he is making any money, and he says, “Tons.”

She presses him for a more specific answer. “How much did you make in December?”

As his accountant, what do you think should be his honest answer?

If he looks at his bank account, it still shows a balance of $100. Cash basis, he made nothing.

But, if Luis thinks about what he earned, minus his expenses (costs of doing business), he could say that he made $2,000. That would be his “gross” earnings. The best answer is that Luis made $1,200. That’s the gross billings of $2,000 (40 yards at $50 each) minus labor costs of $600 minus supplies of $200. His net income is then $1,200.

In January, if he did no other work, just collected his revenue and paid his bills, Luis would have $1,300 in the bank—his original $100 and the $1,200 leftover after he collected his revenue and paid his bills.

Under the accrual basis we record:

December January
$2000 revenue $2,000 receipts
$800 expenses $800 disbursements

Under the cash basis we record:

December January
$2,000 receipts/revenue
$800 disbursements/expenses

So, if Luis is at a party on December 31, he is completely correct to say he made $1,200 in December, even if he doesn’t yet have the cash in hand, just as he would say if he worked for an employer who paid him on January 5 for the work he did in December (and presumably paid him on December 5 for work he did in November).

Cash and Accrual Review

If you’d like to go over this concept again, take a look at another lawn mowing business here:

You can view the transcript for “Cash and Accrual – Conceptual” here (opens in new window).

 

The real difference between accrual basis accounting and cash basis is the timing of revenues and expenses, meaning that the time period for which we are reporting becomes extremely relevant. Imagine if Ford Motor Company, which was found back on June 16, 1903, tried to create an income statement for the whole time it had been in business. Not only would the income statement be kind of a mess, but it also wouldn’t really be relevant for current decision making.

Time Period Constraints

Most businesses exist for long periods of time, and we report the results of business activities using selected time periods. For instance, for tax purposes, most companies and individuals report revenues and expenses for a one-year period. However, depending on the type of report, the time period may be a day, a month, a year, or even some other odd period. Using discrete time periods and accrual basis accounting raises questions about the timing of expenses. For instance, how should an accountant report the cost of equipment expected to produce revenue over the next 10 years? As an asset? As an expense in the year the equipment is purchased? Ratably over the life of the asset?

All those questions and more that you haven’t even thought of yet will be answered in subsequent modules.


]]>
Full Disclosure https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/full-disclosure/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/full-disclosure/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the full disclosure principle

 

As one of the principles in GAAP, the full disclosure principle definition requires that all situations, circumstances, and events that are relevant to financial statement users have to be disclosed. In other words, all of a company’s financial records and transactions have to be available for viewing.

Financial statements normally provide information about a company’s past performance. However, pending lawsuits, incomplete transactions, or other conditions may have imminent and significant effects on the company’s financial status. The full disclosure principle requires that financial statements include disclosure of such information. Accordingly, financial statements use footnotes to convey this information and to describe any policies the company uses to record and report business transactions.

 

General Electric’s 2019 Annual Report

For instance, the following footnotes are excerpts from the General Electric annual report (including the Form 10-K to the SEC) for the year ended December 31, 2019:

NOTE 13. POSTRETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS
PENSION BENEFITS AND RETIREE HEALTH AND LIFE BENEFITS.
We sponsor a number of pension and retiree health and life insurance benefit plans that we present in three categories, principal pension plans, other pension plans and principal retiree benefit plans. Smaller pension plans with pension assets or obligations less than $50 million and other retiree benefit plans are not presented. https://www.ge.com/investor-relations/sites/default/files/GE_AR19_AnnualReport.pdf, page 89

NOTE 23. COMMITMENTS, GUARANTEES, PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND OTHER LOSS CONTINGENCIES
SEC investigation. In late November 2017, staff of the Boston office of the U.S. Securities & Exchange Commission (SEC) notified us that they are conducting an investigation of GE’s revenue recognition practices. We are providing documents and other information requested by the SEC staff, and we are cooperating with the ongoing investigation. Staff from the DOJ are also investigating these matters, and we are providing them with requested documents and information as well.[1]

The SEC has the right to penalize violations of the full disclosure rule. For example, in June 2002, an audit of WorldCom revealed that it had overstated its assets by over $11 billion. The SEC fined WorldCom $750 million, the largest penalty assessed to that date. Even so, investors lost over $2 billion due to the stock devaluation that followed the financial fraud.


  1. https://www.ge.com/investor-relations/sites/default/files/GE_AR19_AnnualReport.pdf, page 108
]]>
Other Guiding Principles https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/other-guiding-principles/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:19 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/other-guiding-principles/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify other guiding principles of GAAP

 

In addition to historical cost principles and the monetary unit assumption, economic entity and going concern assumptions, and principle of full disclosure, there are several other guiding principles that the FASB takes into consideration when creating or modifying GAAP, that include:

  • Relevance: Is the change useful to existing and potential investors, creditors, and other users in making rational investment, credit, and similar decisions?
  • Reliability: The company financial statements provided by the accountants should be based on objective evidence (like historical cost instead of fair market value).
  • Consistency: The company uses the same accounting principles and methods from period to period.
  • Conservatism: When choosing between two solutions, the solution that has a less favorable outcome is the solution that should be chosen.
  • Materiality: The significance of an item should be considered when it is reported. An item is considered significant when it would affect the decision of a reasonable individual.

Relevance, Reliability, and Consistency

Icon of a checklist with three itemsTo be useful, financial information must be relevant, reliable, and prepared in a consistent manner. Relevant information helps a decision-maker understand a company’s past performance, present condition, and future outlook so that informed decisions can be made in a timely manner.

Reliable information is verifiable and objective. For instance, using the original purchase cost of a vehicle per the invoice and payment is objective (not based on opinion) and can be verified by simply looking up the original purchase documents. In other words, two reasonable people looking at the same information should come to the same conclusion.

Consistent information is prepared using the same methods each accounting period, which allows meaningful comparisons to be made between different accounting periods and between the financial statements of different companies that use the same methods. For instance, if a company chooses to report inventory at “lower of cost or market” in its first year in operation, it should continue that method in subsequent years.

Conservatism

The conservatism principle requires that losses be recognized as soon as they can be quantified and gains recorded only when they are realized. This principle protects the users of financial information from inflated revenue, profit, or asset numbers, and also makes potential costs, losses, or declines in value apparent as soon as possible.

Inventory bought for $1,000 can now be purchased for $600. Under the GAAP “lower of cost or market rule,” the company must immediately write down the value of the inventory to $600, showing a loss on the income statement. However, if that inventory item was bought for $1,000 and now would cost the company $1,400, it is still shown as $1,000 on the books. The gain is reflected only when the item sells.

Materiality

The materiality principle states that the requirements of any accounting principle may be ignored when there is no effect on the users of financial information. Certainly, tracking individual paper clips or pieces of paper is immaterial and excessively burdensome to any company’s accounting department, or if the bank balance is off by $0.01, it would cost more to track it down than the additional value of the information would be worth. Although there is no definitive measure of materiality, the accountant’s judgment on such matters must be sound. A hundred or even a thousand dollars may not be material to billion-dollar companies like Monsanto or Facebook, but that same figure may be quite material to a sole-proprietorship with less than $100,000 in annual revenues.

General Electric’s 2019 Financial Statements

For example, from the section on full disclosure, we saw this footnote from General Electric’s December 31, 2019, financial statements:

NOTE 13. POSTRETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS
PENSION BENEFITS AND RETIREE HEALTH AND LIFE BENEFITS.
We sponsor a number of pension and retiree health and life insurance benefit plans that we present in three categories, principal pension plans, other pension plans, and principal retiree benefit plans. Smaller pension plans with pension assets or obligations less than $50 million and other retiree benefit plans are not presented.[1]

GE’s total revenues were almost $100 billion and total assets were over $266 billion, so $50 million is a relatively small amount for GE. For comparison’s sake, assume you have assets (say, a home, a car, some cash, and other items) worth $266,000 and the bank asked you for a list of your assets. The relative amount of assets not presented would be $50, which might be the combined value of your dishes and other household goods.

In short, it’s material if it makes a difference in the decision-making process.



  1. https://www.ge.com/investor-relations/sites/default/files/GE_AR19_AnnualReport.pdf, page 89
]]>
Economic Assumptions https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/economic-assumptions/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:18 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/economic-assumptions/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the economic entity assumption
  • Explain the going concern assumption

 

Economic Entity Assumption

A business is an economic entity separate from the owner or owners, and so business records have to be kept separate from those of the owner(s) and of any other business. Although accounting information from many different entities may be combined for financial reporting purposes (called “consolidation”), each economic entity must maintain its own separate financial records. This rule sounds like a bright line and a simple concept, but as companies expand product lines and consolidate operations, the distinction between one business and another can get blurry. Despite that problem, the economic entity rule applies: each business must keep its own set of records.

Going Concern Assumption

A white person visible from the waist to shoulders writing on papers.Financial statements are normally prepared under the assumption that the company will remain in business indefinitely. If a company is going out of business, the financials have to disclose that fact. Ordinarily, the assumption is that a business is on-going and therefore assets do not need to be sold at fire‐sale values and debt does not need to be paid off immediately. This principle supports classifying assets and liabilities as short‐term (current) and long‐term. Long‐term assets are expected to be held for more than one year. Long‐term liabilities are not due for more than one year. Conversely, short-term assets are expected to be in service for less than a year, and short-term liabilities are debts that are due within the next 12 months.

Lenders and investors rely on the going concern assumption. If an accountant expresses some concern about this reliance, lenders may call loans due and investors may start selling off stock, driving the price down.

If conditions or events raise substantial doubt about an entity’s ability to continue as a going concern, then disclosures are required. The disclosure requirements vary depending on whether the substantial doubt is or is not alleviated as a result of considering management’s plans.

 

Sears’s 2017 Liquidity

An example is found in Sears Holdings Corporation’s disclosures in its 2017 Form 10-K (report to the SEC). Note 1 to the financial statements, under a section captioned “Uses and Sources of Liquidity,” discusses a series of actions taken to mitigate liquidity concerns, including new financing arrangements, restructuring programs intended to generate costs savings, and the sale of the Craftsman brand to Stanley Black & Decker. It then states:

Our historical operating results indicate substantial doubt exists related to the Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. We believe that the actions discussed above are probable of occurring and mitigating the substantial doubt raised by our historical operating results and satisfying our estimated liquidity needs 12 months from the issuance of the financial statements. However, we cannot predict, with certainty, the outcome of our actions to generate liquidity, including the availability of additional debt financing, or whether such actions would generate the expected liquidity as currently planned.[1]

Sears went through bankruptcy, re-emerged in 2019 under a restructuring deal, but as of early 2020 was still foundering. The price of a share of Sears stock at one time had touched the $150 mark, had now dropped to well below $1, and showed no signs of recovering.

These two economic assumptions are understood to indicate, in accounting, that each reporting unit is a separate entity and that the entity will stay in business for the foreseeable future.



  1. Sears Holding Corporation Form 10-K. United States Securities and Exchange Commission, March 21, 2017.
]]>
Introduction to Fundamental Concepts of US Accounting Standards https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-fundamental-concepts-of-u-s-accounting-standards/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:17 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-fundamental-concepts-of-u-s-accounting-standards/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Identify fundamental concepts of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles

The objectives of financial reporting, as discussed in the FASB Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 1, are to provide information that:

  1. Is useful to existing and potential investors and creditors and other users in making rational investment, credit, and similar decisions;
  2. Helps existing and potential investors and creditors and other users to assess the amounts, timing, and uncertainty of prospective net cash inflows to the enterprise; and
  3. Identifies the economic resources of an enterprise, the claims to those resources, and the effects that transactions, events, and circumstances have on those resources.

In order to provide the best information possible in light of those objectives, GAAP embodies the following high-level guidance:

  • Historical cost principles and the monetary unit assumption
  • Economic entity and going concern assumptions
  • Principle of full disclosure
  • And the following additional principles:
    • Relevance
    • Reliability
    • Consistency
    • Conservatism
    • Materiality
]]>
Monetary and Cost Considerations https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/monetary-and-cost-considerations/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:17 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/monetary-and-cost-considerations/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the monetary unit assumption
  • Describe the historical cost principle

 

There are two basic cost principles: the monetary unit assumption and the historical cost principle.

Monetary Unit Assumption

pile of US one dollar billsThe monetary unit assumption is fairly simple. It states that a business’s financial reports represent quantifiable transactions, like buying and selling things. There are economic events, like hiring a new chief executive officer or introducing a new product, that can’t be expressed in monetary terms. They aren’t recorded as transactions for bookkeeping purposes, but may end up in the disclosures to the financial statements. In general, if an event can be measured in money, it must be recorded in the accounting records. In the U.S., accounting transactions are recorded in U.S. dollars.

Historical Cost Principle

The historical cost principle requires companies to record assets and liabilities for the amount paid, rather than what they may be worth. This principle provides information that is reliable (removing the opportunity to provide subjective and potentially biased market values), but not very relevant because it’s not the current value.

So, as time passes, the FASB comes up with exceptions to the historical cost rule. One such exception is marketable securities (excess cash invested in the stock market). Since the value of those stocks is readily available (minute-by-minute stock market quotes), reporting them at fair market value is still reliable and more relevant than reporting them at historical cost. In addition, some inventory (goods held for sale) is reported at a value less than the amount originally paid for the goods if the market price has dropped below the historical cost (this is also due to the conservatism constraint—when choosing how to report something, use the most conservative alternative).

 

Recording Marketable Security

Here’s an example of how a marketable security would be recorded:

Invested $50,000 in Starbucks stock on July 6, 2018 (1,000 shares at $50 per share).

Record the investment as a decrease in cash/checking (asset) of $50,000 and an increase in Marketable Securities (asset) of $50,000 (just a shift from one asset account to another).

On December 31, 2019, the stock was listed at $88.13 on the New York Stock Exchange, so the objective fair market value (what you could sell it for) was $88,130. Therefore, you would recognize revenue of $38,130 and adjust the value of the stock on the balance sheet to $88,130.

In contrast, if you bought a building on a piece of land on July 6, 2018, for $50,000 and on December 31, 2019, you get an appraisal for the building and land, and the appraiser estimates the value to be $88,130, you do not adjust the value of the assets (building and land). They will show on the balance sheet at $50,000.

What is the difference between the Starbucks stock and the building and land?

Starbucks stock is all identical and is being sold every day, every hour, and every minute, so the price of the shares is objectively determined. The building and land, on the other hand, is unique, and the only way to determine its fair market value (what a willing buyer would pay a willing seller if all the facts and circumstances are known and neither party is under any undue influence to sell or buy) is to actually sell it. Then, the gain on the sale (sales proceeds − cost) could be recognized as revenue.


]]>
The Role of the FASB https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/the-role-of-the-fasb/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/the-role-of-the-fasb/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the role of the FASB in setting accounting standards

 

In 1973, the FASB established financial accounting and reporting standards for public and private companies and not-for-profit organizations.

The FASB is governed and funded by the Financial Accounting Foundation (FAF), which was established in 1972 as an independent, private-sector, not-for-profit organization. The FAF is responsible for the oversight, administration, financing, and appointing of members for both the FASB and the Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB).

The SEC has designated the FASB as the accounting standard setter for publicly traded companies. In addition, FASB standards are recognized as authoritative by many other organizations, including state Boards of Accountancy and the American Institute of CPAs (AICPA).

The advantage of the accounting industry creating the rules, instead of Congress, is that rule-making is less of a political give-and-take and more based on logic and professional opinion.

You can view the transcript for “FASB Has Standards That Work” here (opens in new window).

 

FASB Mission

The collective mission of the FASB, the Governmental Accounting Standards Board (GASB), and the FAF is to establish and improve financial accounting and reporting standards to provide useful information to investors and other users of financial reports and educate stakeholders on how to most effectively understand and implement those standards.[1]

The non-profit FASB is funded primarily through accounting support fees, which are paid by U.S. corporations that issue publicly traded securities. This funding method was written into the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, as amended (the Sarbanes-Oxley Act). The FASB also receives revenue from the sales of subscriptions and publications.


  1. https://www.fasb.org/facts/index.shtml
]]>
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/generally-accepted-accounting-principles/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:16 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/generally-accepted-accounting-principles/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the process of creating GAAP
  • Differentiate between big GAAP and little GAAP

 

You can view the transcript for “FAF FASB GASB How We Create Accounting Standards” here (opens in new window).

 

The FASB develops GAAP using a well-developed process:

  1. Identification. The FASB Emerging Issues Task Force identifies and prioritizes a relevant topic.
  2. Pre-agenda Research. FASB technical staff conducts research.
  3. Agenda decision. The Task Force adds the topic to the agenda or postpones it.
  4. Public meeting. Public meetings are held to debate the issue.
  5. Discussion Memorandum (DM). A detailed memorandum is issued, outlining solution alternatives
  6. Stakeholder input. FASB collects and analyzes all responses and suggestions from the SEC, the AICPA, the American Accounting Association (AAA), public accounting firms, and other involved parties.
  7. Re-deliberation. Re-deliberation based on public comment and input.
  8. Exposure draft (ED). A preliminary version of a proposed statement—an Exposure Draft—is issued, detailing the proposed solution.
  9. Public responses. FASB obtains responses to the exposure draft from the SEC, the AICPA, the AAA, public accounting firms, and other involved parties. The ED is revised as necessary.
  10. Final Statement of Principle. If four out of seven FASB members support the revisions to the ED, a Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) is issued.
  11. Education. The FASB issues education to accountants on how to apply the new standard.
  12. Implementation. FASB provides technical assistance in implementing the new standard.

As an example, many corporations guarantee to pay the health care and life insurance costs of their employees after retirement. Before 1990, companies accounted for these benefits as expenses in the period in which they made payments to or on behalf of retired employees. As you will see, this practice is not really in compliance with the underlying assumptions of accrual basis accounting that is required by GAAP. So, in 1989, the FASB proposed that these costs be accounted for by recognizing expenses over the period of employment rather than after retirement (you will see that this proposal is in line with the principle of matching expenses to revenues).

During 1989, companies expressed their concerns in open hearings. The main fear was that recording the past expenses that hadn’t yet been recognized would hurt current net income. The FASB reacted to these fears by modifying its originally proposed accounting treatment to ease possible adverse economic consequences. The resulting standard, SFAS 106, “Employers’ Accounting for Postretirement Benefits Other Than Pensions,” was issued in 1990, and that statement is now officially part of GAAP.

All GAAP is now officially compiled into one place, called The FASB Accounting Standards Codification®.

As you have discovered, the FASB creates GAAP that dictate how companies report the results of operations and financial position. The SEC requires publicly traded companies to follow GAAP. In addition, if a company is preparing financial statements in order to borrow money, the lender usually requests that the financials follow GAAP.

Despite the complexity, many non-publicly traded businesses decide to follow GAAP, or at least parts of it, because following the same principles as other companies make it easier to compare financial statements, especially if those statements are being shared with external users.

For that reason, the idea of a less burdensome version of GAAP has been floated around for decades. However, currently, there is no “little” GAAP.

The Argument for Little GAAP

A wooden gavel.The argument for a simpler version of GAAP is that current rules are too complex and burdensome for many private companies that are not required by law to follow them. For instance, GAAP requires complex calculations and disclosures for post-retirement health benefits and other retirement plans that can cost thousands of dollars to prepare. A small company may only want a balance sheet, income statement, and statement of owner’s equity to share with the bank. Following every aspect of GAAP could be almost impossible, and the benefits of the additional information would far outweigh the costs.

In 2012, the Financial Accounting Foundation (the governing body of the FASB) established the Private Company Council (PCC) to address standard-setting issues raised by private company stakeholders. The PCC is responsible for determining whether and when to develop modifications to GAAP for private companies. The PCC also serves as the primary advisory body to the FASB on the appropriate treatment for private companies for standards under active consideration on the FASB’s technical agenda.

The main argument against having a “Big GAAP” and a “Little GAAP” is that having two separate standards could lead to confusion and the possibility of financial statements being assembled to “lesser” standards.

In these lessons, we’ll be following GAAP. However, be aware that GAAP is constantly evolving. As you develop into a professional accountant, expect to have to stay up to date, and regularly look up the most current rules.

]]>
Introduction to Financial Accounting Standards in the United States https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-accounting-standards-in-the-united-states/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:15 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financial-accounting-standards-in-the-united-states/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: Describe organizations and rules that govern accounting

After the stock market crash of 1929, the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and Congress gave the accounting industry an ultimatum: figure out a way to govern yourselves, or we still step in and do it for you. Although early efforts to create generally accepted accounting principles were somewhat a failure (the Committee on Accounting Procedure, 1934–1959, and the Accounting Principles Board, 1959–1973), the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) finally turned rule-making over to a new, independent Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).

The FASB and its predecessors have created a body of work called Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) that govern accounting practices for publicly traded companies, and because those principles are used by major companies, many smaller, privately held companies use those same rules.

In this section, you’ll explore the history and role of the FASB in more detail, including how GAAP came to be, and how it is applied by big and small companies.

 

You can view the transcript for “The Importance of GAAP” here (opens in new window).

 

]]>
Why It Matters: Accounting Principles https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-accounting-principles/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:14 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-accounting-principles/ Read more »]]> Why learn about accounting standards and practices in the United States?

Imagine that you work for a large energy broker and you make a good sum of money as a trader. Your job is to monitor energy prices around the nation, buying energy shares when the price is low, and reselling them when the price goes up. It sounds more complicated than it is. The “shares” are really just little contracts that give you rights to the energy when you want it. Once you get the hang of it, you’re making a six-figure income, plus you receive a bonus every year in the form of stock (ownership) in the company, and all your retirement savings are also invested in stock in the company. The price of that stock keeps going up and up as the company makes more and more money, and so you hold on to your stock and acquire more each year. It looks like you may be able to retire early, until one day a reporter starts asking questions about the financial statements, like, “How do you calculate revenue?” and “Why are these assets worth so much?”

The CEO of the company is evasive, and that leads to more and more questions. The CEO resigns and Federal investigators show up. Less than a year later the company is bankrupt, you are out of a job, and your stock is worthless.

Enron's logoThat’s the story of one of the most notorious financial disasters in modern history: the Enron scandal. Enron was claiming revenues before they were even earned, and marking up mostly worthless assets to astronomical values. That was happening at the turn of the century—not the 20th century, but the 21st. Enron went bankrupt in 2001.

It’s not that there weren’t standards in place that would have alerted investors to the problems. Those standards, called Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), were well established. Enron executives just chose to ignore them, and the public bought the façade for years, buying stock and driving the price up and up until the bubble burst. When the stock became worthless, thousands of people lost their life’s savings in their retirement plans and investors suffered $74 billion in losses. In addition, the largest accounting firm in the world went down with Enron, after having attested to the validity of those financial accounting reports for years.

You can view the transcript for “The Enron Scandal Explained in One Minute: Corporate Recklessness, Lies and Bankruptcy” here (opens in new window).

So why do we learn about accounting standards? How do they come about, and what are the basic underlying assumptions? This is the foundation of understanding financial reporting, not only as an accountant, but also as an external user of those statements.

In this module, you will learn about the organizations that establish accounting standards, how they establish standards, and the basic ideas and concepts that guide them.

]]>
Discussion: The Crafty Coffee Crook https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-the-crafty-coffee-crook/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-the-crafty-coffee-crook/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: The Crafty Coffee Crook link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Lopez Consulting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-lopez-consulting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:13 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-lopez-consulting/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Lopez Consulting

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
]]>
Putting It Together: The Role of Accounting in Business https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-the-role-of-accounting-in-business/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:12 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-the-role-of-accounting-in-business/ Read more »]]> Accounting is more than just the “language of business.” It’s one of the vital information systems that feed the beating heart of a company.

For-profit businesses provide goods and services that are in demand, but the only way they stay in business is if they are making a profit, and in this competitive world, making a profit can be a challenge even on something that is in high demand. Accounting provides both internal and external stakeholders the information they need to make critical business decisions.

Financial Accounting Reports

Tax paperwork on a desk.By now, you should be able to recognize the basic financial statements and even have an idea about what goes into turning the massive amount of data collected by the accounting systems into financial statements:

  • Income statement
  • Statement of owner’s equity
  • Balance sheet
  • Statement of cash flows

If you try a quick search for the financial statements of a company you think is publicly traded—like General Electric, Ford Motor Company, or Walmart—you’ll likely be able to find these financial statements.

Go to the company’s website, and look for a section called “investor relations” or something similar. You’ll want to look for the annual report. Often, the annual report is 70–100 pages, but if you dig through a bit, you’ll find the actual financial statements along with a few dozen pages of disclosures (sometimes called Notes or Footnotes). It’s a lot of information, but it will give you a good idea of the complexity and extent of the financial accountant’s job. You can also look for the company’s 10-K, which typically contains the same information. The 10-K is the official form that a company uses to submit its official audited annual report to the SEC.

As you are looking through an annual report or Form 10-K, you may notice that the names of the reports are slightly different, but the content should be recognizable. The income statement may be called a Statement of Earnings, or a P&L (Profit and Loss), but it will still show revenues minus expenses and the resulting net income. The balance sheet may be called the Statement of Financial Position, but it will still show Assets being equal to Liabilities plus Equity. Also, since the company you research will most likely be a corporation, the statement of owner’s equity will probably be called a Statement of Stockholders’ Equity and there may also be a Statement of Retained Earnings and a Statement of Other Comprehensive Income.

Managerial Accounting Reports

A stack of binders.What you won’t see are the managerial accounting reports like cost-volume-profit calculations, capital investment recommendations, and budgets—although in the Management’s Discussion and Analysis, you might see some of the managerial accountants’ influence in the projections and analyses. Remember, what you are looking at is the very end result of the accumulation, summarization, and verification of an almost unimaginable amount of data that would be meaningless if it was not condensed into information and communicated to the end-user (in this case, you).

From the day the business opens its doors with the first investment of capital, through lean years and robust ones, through mergers and product line changes, until the last dollar is made and the doors close at some far point in the future, the financial information gathered and reported on by accountants is the thread that ties it all together.

You’ve only just begun to learn all there is to know about accounting. In fact, you’ll never stop learning. There’s always something new around the corner. As business and commerce continue to change and develop, so does accounting.

]]>
Ethics in Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/ethics-in-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/ethics-in-accounting/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the role of ethics in accounting

 

A greek statue holding a scale.

The distinction between morality and ethics is muddy at best. Some people argue that there is a difference and speak of morality as something personal but view ethics as having wider social implications. However, for our purposes, ethics and morality will be used as equivalent terms.

People often speak about the ethics or morality of individuals, and the discussion of the morality or ethics of businesses has become commonplace. There are clearly differences in the kind of moral responsibility that we can fairly ascribe to businesses and accountants; we tend to see individuals as having a soul, or at least a conscience, but there is no general agreement that businesses have either. Still, our ordinary use of language does point to something significant: if we say that some businesses are “evil” and others are “corrupt,” then we make moral judgments about the quality of actions undertaken by the business. For example, if we conclude that WorldCom or Enron acted “unethically” in certain respects, then we are making judgments that their collective actions are morally deficient.

Codes of Ethics

Several accounting organizations have codes of ethics governing the behavior of their members. For instance, both the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants (AICPA) and the Institute of Management Accountants have formulated such codes. It is important to maintain ethical behavior both personally and professionally in business; therefore, many business firms have also developed codes of ethics for their employees to follow.

AICPA’s Code of Professional Conduct

Let’s take a brief look at the principles in the AICPA’s code:[1]

  1. Responsibilities principle. In carrying out their responsibilities as professionals, members should exercise sensitive professional and moral judgments in all their activities.
  2. The public interest principle. Members should accept the obligation to act in a way that will serve the public interest, honor the public trust, and demonstrate a commitment to professionalism.
  3. Integrity principle. To maintain and broaden public confidence, members should perform all professional responsibilities with the highest sense of integrity.
  4. Objectivity and independence principle. A member should maintain objectivity and be free of conflicts of interest in discharging professional responsibilities. A member in public practice should be independent in fact and appearance when providing auditing and other attestation services.
  5. Due care principle. A member should observe the profession’s technical and ethical standards, strive continually to improve competence and the quality of services, and discharge professional responsibility to the best of the member’s ability.
  6. Scope and nature of services principle. A member in public practice should observe the Principles of the Code of Professional Conduct in determining the scope and nature of services to be provided.

To learn more about these principles, visit the AICPA’s Online Code of Professional Conduct.

While ethical behavior is much more than simply following a list of rules, these codes can act as a reference point for accountants who find themselves unsure of what to do.

Why Should a Business or Accountant Be Ethical?

The usual answer is that good ethics is good business. In the long run, businesses that pay attention to ethics do better; they are viewed more favorably by customers. Despite strong anecdotal evidence, this is a difficult claim to measure quantifiably, as “the long run” is an indistinct period of time, and there are as yet no generally accepted criteria by which ethical excellence can be measured. Yet get-rich-quick opportunities can tempt many businesses and employees alike. Almost any day you can find newspaper headlines that reveal public officials and business leaders who did not do the right thing and paid the price.

An accountant’s most valuable asset is an honest reputation, built by following industry standards and making ethical decisions. When accountants do take the low road, they suffer the consequences. They sometimes find their names mentioned in The Wall Street Journal and on news programs in an unfavorable light, and former friends and colleagues may no longer want to use or refer their services. Some of these individuals are even removed from the profession.


  1. AICPA. “AICPA Code of Professional Conduct.” AICPA. Accessed October 1, 2020.
]]>
Significant Events in Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/significant-events-in-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:11 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/significant-events-in-accounting/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify significant events in the history of accounting
  • Identify the organizations that govern accounting

Over the past five hundred plus years, accounting has seen its share of ups and downs. Here are some of the highlights of accounting in the Western world (with a focus on practices and events that impact accounting in the United States):

As you go through your career in accounting, you’ll find things to add to this list, but for now, you have a pretty good historical perspective of how we got from the first structured bookkeeping to the 21st Century.

Regulations in Accounting

Accounting in the United States is a multi-layered profession. There are some regulations all businesses must adhere to, like the tax code. Then there are strict SEC standards that only large, publicly-traded companies are subject to, and while some companies that aren’t subject to these rules may follow these same standards as best practices—especially when creating externally facing reports—they aren’t technically required to do so. Additionally, for internal (managerial) accounting purposes across all companies, there are some best-practices, but nothing is carved in stone.

Let’s take a look at a few of the accounting authorities in the United States.

SEC

Seal of the United States Securities and Exchange CommissionThe US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) has the legal authority to provide oversight and regulation of the accounting profession. However, SEC policy is to stay in the background and allow industry self-regulation. Private organizations provide governance and establish professional accounting standards.

Since its inception in 1934, the SEC has worked closely with the US Department of Justice to prosecute individuals and corporations for securities fraud at all levels. Some defendants have been high-profile investors, including the following:

  • Businesswoman Martha Stewart
  • Kenneth Lay (of failed Enron Corporation)
  • NFL quarterback Fran Tarkenton
  • Fraudulent stock trader Ivan Boesky
  • Investor Bernie Madoff

FASB

The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) is the organization officially recognized by the SEC as the governing body for the accounting profession. The FASB was created in 1973, replacing its predecessor organization, the Accounting Principles Board. However, the FASB continues to use some APB standards that have never been superseded. The FASB operates under the oversight of the Financial Accounting Foundation. The American Institute of Certified Professional Accountants (AICPA) also sets accounting profession standards and rules in cooperation with the FASB.

The body of financial accounting standards and rules published in FASB, APB, and AICPA pronouncements is collectively known as generally accepted accounting principles or GAAP, which we’ll discuss in further detail later. The GAAP guidelines cover all major accounting activities and topics including disclosure, assessing risk or uncertainty, and preparing financial statements. The United States is the only country that uses Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).

The FASB and AICPA also set professional standards for auditors, known as generally accepted accounting standards, or GAAS.

IRC

All accounting professionals must comply with the rules and regulations of the Internal Revenue Code. The IRC furnishes federal tax law guidelines in the United States through an administrative agency: the Internal Revenue Service (IRS). Some people confuse the IRS with the IRC. The IRS is a department of the US Treasury. The IRC is the actual law that establishes income and other taxes.

IASB

The International Accounting Standards Board is the standard-setting body for International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). IFRS are used in 166 jurisdictions as of October 2020, including the European Union (EU) and many countries in Asia and South America.

As you develop in your accounting career, or as a small business owner or consultant, you’ll know to refer to these different organizations’ standards as you navigate the complex world of the rules and regulations that govern accounting and business.

]]>
Financial Statements https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statements-2/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:10 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-statements-2/ Read more »]]>
  • Differentiate among common financial statements

 

General purpose financial statements provide much of the information needed by external users of financial accounting. These financial statements are formal reports providing information on a company’s financial position, cash inflows and outflows, and the results of operations.

Many companies publish these statements in annual reports, also known as a 10-K or a 10-Q (quarterly report). A company’s annual report contains an independent auditor’s opinion as to the fairness of the financial statements, as well as information about the company’s activities, products, and plans. Typically the best place to find these reports for a public company can be on their website under the Investor Relations section. Financial statements used by external entities are prepared using Generally Accepted Accounting Principles or GAAP. We will discuss the language of GAAP further in later sections.

There are four basic financial statements and they are prepared in the following order:

  • Income Statement
  • Statement of Owner’s Equity
  • Balance Sheet
  • Statement of Cash Flows

Income Statement

The income statement answers a business’s most important question: How much profit is it making? It is limited to a specific period of time (a month or a year) from beginning to end. The income statement relies on the matching principle in that it only reports revenue and expenses in a specified window of time. It does not include any revenue or expenses from before or after that block of time.

The income statement is a report that lists and summarizes revenue, expense, and net income information for a period of time, usually a month or a year. It is based on the following equation:

[latex]\text{Revenue}-\text{Expenses}=\text{Net income (or Net loss)}[/latex]

Revenue is shown first. A list of expenses follows, and their total is subtracted from revenue. If the difference is positive, there is a profit or net income. If the difference is negative, there is a net loss. This loss is typically presented in parentheses to represent a negative number.

NeatNiks

Let’s revisit Nick Frank and his cleaning business, NeatNiks.  Here again is the completed spreadsheet we created to track Nick’s cash-based transactions for the month of October:

Checking Account = Nick Frank, Capital Nick Frank, Withdrawals Service Revenue Insurance Expense Rent Expense Supplies Expense Contractor Expense
1-Oct +20,000 = +20,000
4-Oct (12,000) = (12,000)
15-Oct +1,500 = +1,500
25-Oct (2,600) = (1,500) (1,100)
26-Oct (1,000) = (1,000)
30-Oct +1,600 = +1,600
31-Oct (4,000) = (4,000)
Balance +3,500 = +20,000 (4,000) +3,100 (1,500) (12,000) (1,000) (1,100)

Using the information in the trial balance, we can create our income statement, which summarizes the company’s revenues and expenses.

The interactive activity below contains the last row of our spreadsheet (the “Balance” row with the totals for each category).  See if you can figure out where the various column totals go in the income statement.Drag the totals from the Balance row of the spreadsheet to the appropriate places in the Income Statement.

 

Here is the completed Income Statement for NeatNiks for October:

NeatNiks
Income Statement
For the month ending October 31, 20XX
Description Amount Total
Subcategory, Revenues:
Service Revenue $3,100
Subcategory, Expenses:
Insurance 1,500
Rent 12,000
Supplies 1,000
Contractors 1,100
      Total Expenses 15,600
Net Income (loss) Single Line $(12,500) Double line

The income statement is a report on operations for a period of time (often a full year, but in this case, we just reported for a month).

An income statement can also be called a statement of earnings or a profit and loss (P&L).

Statement of Owner’s Equity

The second statement, the statement of owner’s equity, summarizes the increases and decreases in the owner’s equity. According to our cash-basis income statement above, the business lost $12,500. We also know that the owner put in $20,000 at the beginning of the month and took out $4,000 at the end of the month.

Checking Account = Nick Frank, Capital Nick Frank, Withdrawals Service Revenue Insurance Expense Rent Expense Supplies Expense Contractor Expense
+3,500 = +20,000 (4,000) +3,100 (1,500) (12,000) (1,000) (1,100)

Let’s use this information to create a statement of owner’s equity:

NeatNiks
Statement of Owner’s Equity
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Description Amount
Nick Frank, Capital, October 1, 20XX $0
Owner contributions 20,000
Net income/(loss) for the month (12,500)
Single Line7,500
Owner withdrawals (4,000)
Nick Frank, Capital, October 31, 20XX Single Line$3,500Double Line

Like the income statement, the statement of owner’s equity also reports a period of time (in this case the month of October).

If there are multiple owners and investors, or if the company is publicly traded, this statement is likely to have a different name, such as the statement of stockholders’ equity.

Balance Sheet

The third statement is the balance sheet, which shows the total assets against total liabilities and owner’s equity. We haven’t recorded any liabilities (debt) yet, so our balance sheet is pretty simple:

NeatNiks
Balance Sheet
As of October 31, 20XX
Description Amount
Subcategory, Assets
Cash $3,500
Total Assets Single line
$3,500Double line
Subcategory, Liabilities
Total Liabilities Single line$-
Subcategory, Owner’s Equity
3,500
Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Single line
$3,500
Double line

Unlike the two previous statements, the balance sheet is a snapshot—a single moment in time—rather than the records of a period of time. It is the financial position of the business at the very end of the last day of the reporting period. In this case, it was at the end of October—so 11:59:59PM on October 31st.

Once business resumes on November 1st, all the numbers on the balance sheet will change as well, and we’ll start a new income statement and a new statement of owner’s equity to report November transactions.

The balance sheet can also be called the statement of financial position.

Statement of Cash Flows

Since this whole analysis was based on cash transactions, our statement of cash flows won’t be any different than our income statement above.

NeatNiks
Statement of Cash Flows
For the month ended October 31, 20XX
Description Amount Total
Subcategory, Revenues:
Service Revenue $ 3,100
Subcategory, Expenses
Insurance 1,500
Rent 12,000
Supplies 1,000
Contractors 1,100
Total Expenses Single Line Single Line15,600
Net Income (loss) Single Line$(12,500)Double Line

When we start working with the accrual basis of accounting, we’ll revisit this topic and dive in deeper.

Like the income statement and the statement of owner’s equity, the statement of cash flows reports a period of time (in this case the month of October).

]]>
Introduction to Challenges in Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-challenges-in-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:10 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-challenges-in-accounting/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: identify challenges in accounting

Several hands of different skintonesAccounting is not just math, it’s the language of business. As with any language, it can be interpreted in many ways. This means that it’s important to see it as more than just numbers on a page. But it also means that the information has to be created and used responsibly. For instance, if the bank asks you for financial statements before it loans you money, no matter what, you have to provide accurate, verifiable, and honest information. That’s the ethical thing to do even if you think the bank’s loan committee might not like what they see.

Ethics in accounting has evolved over the years along with the profession.

Let’s move ahead so that you can gain a more detailed understanding of ethics in accounting and the significant events that have shaped the modern accounting environment.

]]>
Types of Business Activities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/types-of-businesses-activities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:09 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/types-of-businesses-activities/ Read more »]]>
  • Differentiate among service, manufacturing, and merchandising businesses

 

The Business Entity

Accountants frequently refer to a business organization as an accounting entity or a business entity. A business entity is any business organization, such as a hardware store or grocery store, that exists as an economic unit. For accounting purposes, each business organization or entity has an existence separate from its owner(s), creditors, employees, customers, and other businesses. This separate existence of the business organization is known as the business entity concept. Thus, in the accounting records of the business entity, the activities of each business should be kept separate from the activities of other businesses and the personal financial activities of the owner(s).

Classifying Businesses

Racks of shirts in a storefront.Businesses are classified by the type of business activities they perform—service companies, merchandising companies, and manufacturing companies. Any of these activities can be performed by companies using any of the three forms of business organizations.

  • Service companies perform services for a fee. This group includes accounting firms, law firms, and dry cleaning establishments.
  • Merchandising companies purchase goods that are ready for sale and then sell them to customers. Merchandising companies include auto dealerships, clothing stores, and supermarkets.
  • Manufacturing companies buy materials, convert them into products, and then sell the products to other companies or the final consumers. Manufacturing companies include steel mills, auto manufacturers, and clothing manufacturers.

One thing that differentiates merchandising and manufacturing companies from service companies is that merchandising and manufacturing companies carry inventory. Inventory is the goods held for sale. For instance, Ford Motor Company has automobiles in inventory, as do the independent car dealers. In addition, manufacturing companies have raw materials inventory that they use to make their products. Raw materials for Ford Motor Company would include tires, metal for fabricating the bodies, and all kinds of component parts, from screws to fuel injectors.

 

Regardless of what type of business they are, all companies produce financial statements as the final end product of their accounting process. These financial statements provide relevant financial information both to those inside the company—management—and to those outside the company—creditors, stockholders, and other interested parties.

The next section introduces four common financial statements—the income statement, the statement of retained earnings, the balance sheet, and the statement of cash flows.

]]>
Introduction to Accounting in Business https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-in-business/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-in-business/ What you’ll learn to do: explain the effect of transactions on the accounting equation

In this section, you’ll explore the accounting equation in more detail by applying it to common business transactions. In addition, you’ll learn a bit about different kinds of business operations, and you’ll learn to identify the basic financial statements.

A black man straightening his tie

]]>
Transactions and the Accounting Equation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/transactions-and-the-accounting-equation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:08 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/transactions-and-the-accounting-equation/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the effect of various transactions on the accounting equation

 

Accounting is the process of analyzing, classifying, recording, summarizing, and interpreting business transactions. One of the key aspects of the process is keeping running totals of things. Examples of items a business might keep track of include the following:

  • The amount of cash the business currently has
  • What a company has paid for utilities for the month
  • The amount of money it owes
  • A company’s income for the entire year
  • The total cost of all the equipment it has purchased

It’s important that businesses keep these running totals up to date so they are readily available when the information is needed.

We will now refer to these running totals as balances and these items as accounts. Any item that a business needs to keep track of in terms of a running dollar balance is set up as an account. With these accounts, businesses can easily check in to determine “how much of X do we have right now?” or “how much of X have we sold so far?”

The first step in accounting is to do basic bookkeeping in order to capture the data that we will eventually turn into reports and statements. We do this by recording transactions. An accounting transaction is any business event that has a monetary impact on the financial statements of a business, and there is usually some kind of supporting paper or electronic documentation. For instance, a cash deposit into the bank is a transaction, and the bank statement or deposit slip is the evidence.

NeatNiks

Let’s revisit Nick Frank’s business that he started in October of this year. NeatNiks provides customized cleaning services to high-end homeowners in the Santa Fe area of New Mexico.

Photograph of a Black man wearing professional blazer, who is looking to the left

As a reminder, these are the transactions that Nick has recorded for the month of October:

  • Oct 1: The owner, Nick Frank, opened a bank account in the name of NeatNiks using $20,000 of his own money from his personal account.
  • Oct 4: Nick rented a truck for $12,000 cash for October through March (6 months).
  • Oct 7: Purchased $2,600 of supplies on account from Cleaning Supplies, Inc.
  • Oct 15: Received $1,500 cash for services performed.
  • Oct 20: Billed customers for $7,250 worth of work done in October.
  • Oct 25: Paid in cash: $1,500 for insurance & $1,100 for independent contractors’ work.
  • Oct 26: Paid $1,000 to Cleaning Supplies, Inc. on account.
  • Oct 30: Collected $1,600 from customers on account.
  • Oct 31: Withdrew $4,000 cash for personal use.
  • Oct 31: Nick owes independent contractors $1,200 for work done in October—he’ll pay it in November.
  • Oct 31: Nick had $1,000 of supplies leftover at the end of the month.

Nick has now hired you as the outsourced bookkeeper/accountant for his company, so let’s walk through some of these transactions and see what it would look like for Nick to try to keep track of them—for example, in a spreadsheet. For now, let’s just worry about the cash transactions, and we’ll look at the non-cash transactions later.

Click through the interactive activity below and we’ll help you figure this out:

What is NeatNiks’s Status?

Okay, we’ve finished our spreadsheet that lets us enter and categorize all of the cash-related October transactions. How many of these questions can we answer now?

At the end of October:

Question 1: How much money did Nick make or lose during his first month in business?

Question 2: Nick wants to buy another truck for $5,000 in order to keep up with demand—does he have enough cash in the bank to do that right now?

Question 3: How much do customers owe Nick?

Question 4: How much does Nick owe to his suppliers?

Question 5: What is Nick’s equity in his business at the end of October?

So it looks like our spreadsheet only allows us to answer one question so far!


]]>
Liabilities https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/liabilities/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/liabilities/ Read more »]]>
  • Define liabilities

[latex]\text{Liabilities}=\text{Debt}[/latex]

Liability is the accounting term for debt. Like assets, liabilities are categorized as current and noncurrent.

Liability Subcategories

There are a wide variety of items that can be liabilities, and many accounts are unique to a specific company, but the following categories give you the flavor of current and noncurrent liabilities.

Current Liabilities

Here are some common current liabilities:

  • Accounts Payable (owed to vendors, e.g. companies from which we buy inventory)
  • Trade Accounts Payable (another term for Accounts Payable)
  • Wages Payable (wages we owe to our employees for work they’ve done but for which they haven’t been paid yet)
  • Taxes Payable (taxes we owe that we haven’t paid yet)
  • Short-term loans (like lines of credit that are paid back monthly)
  • Current Portion of Long-Term Debt (the principal balance on long-term debt that is due within the next twelve months)

Noncurrent Liabilities

Here are some common noncurrent liabilities:

  • Notes Payable (long term debt, less the Current Portion that is due within the next year)
  • Bond Payable (another form of long-term debt)
  • Leases Payable (long-term portion only—the current portion is reported as a current liability)

In common (non-accounting) usage, a liability is something for which you are responsible. Sometimes that term is also used to indicate a burden, or even an embarrassment, as in, “He had become a political liability.” However, in accounting, it really just means a debt or something you owe, and it’s always expressed in money.

Check your understanding of liabilities, and then we’ll move on to define owner’s equity.

]]>
Owner’s Equity https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/owners-equity/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:07 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/owners-equity/ Read more »]]>
  • Define owners’ equity

 

The basic accounting equation is [latex]\text{Assets}=\text{Liabilities}+\text{Owner’s Equity}[/latex].

Owner’s equity can be further broken down into four components:

  • Capital contributed. This represents the dollar value of resources put into the company by the owner. Often, this is cash, but it could also be assets like machinery or accounts receivable. In any case, these are personal assets that are used to fund the business.
  • Withdrawals. This is the dollar value of resources (usually cash) taken out of the company by the owner for personal use.
  • Revenues. This is the income a business takes in. We’ll further define and discuss revenues on this page.
  • Expenses. This is what the business spends. We’ll further define and discuss expenses on this page.

An American one dollar bill.Think of a business as a machine that generates cash. Raw materials, like products and workers’ labor, go into the machine, and the machine works its magic adding value to the inputs. After that, out the other side come profits. Economically speaking, profits are additions to the wealth of the owner. Profits are also called income (or net income) in accounting.

There are two elements of profits: revenue and expenses.

Revenue

Revenue is income that results from a business engaging in the activities that it is set up to do. For example, a computer technician earns revenue for repairing a computer for a customer (performing the service for which the company exists). If the same computer technician sells a van that is no longer needed for the business, the proceeds are not considered revenue. However, if a used car dealer sells a van on the lot, the proceeds from that sale are considered to be sales revenue for the dealership. If the car dealership sells an old office computer, the proceeds from that sale aren’t really revenue for the dealership.

Products vs. Service

Sales revenue is an account name normally used when a retailer sells an item. Fees earned is an account name commonly used to record income generated from providing a service. In a service business, customers buy expertise, advice, action, or an experience but do not purchase a physical product. Consultants, dry cleaners, airlines, attorneys, and repair shops are service-oriented businesses. The fees earned account falls into the revenue category.

Expenses

Expenses are bills and other costs a business must pay in order for it to operate and earn revenue. As the adage goes, “It takes money to make money.” Think back to the wealth generative machine. In order to generate profits from the machine, the owner has to put something in. In our basic example, the inputs were raw materials and labor. The machine took those two things and combined them in a new and better way that made them more valuable to customers, but it cost some money to create the value. Another way to describe expenses is “costs of doing business.”

The word “expense” literally means “used up.” When you go to the gym, you “expend” energy. Expenses are resources that get used up as the company generates revenue. This is an important accounting concept to remember: expenses are costs that are directly related to generating revenue.

A tidy desk workspace.Imagine a business that creates cable wraps for your computer that tidy up the space under and behind your desk. In this business, the labor is people spending time doing what their customers don’t (or can’t) do—creating the wraps from plastic. The business owner buys plastic and pays people to convert that plastic into something of value to customers. If you buy it for more than the combined cost of the component bits, the company makes a profit, stays in business, and makes more wraps. If you don’t want or need the wrap, or if you can find it cheaper somewhere else, the company spends more than it earns, which we call a loss.

Some common business costs (expenses) include:

  • Cost of paying hourly employees (salaries and wages).
  • Cost for the use of property that belongs to someone else (rent).
  • Costs such as electricity, water, phone, gas, cable TV, etc. (utilities).
  • Cost of small items used to run a business (supplies).
  • Cost of protection from liability, damage, injury, theft, etc. (insurance).
  • Cost of promoting the business (advertising).
  • Costs related to the upkeep of machinery and buildings (repairs and maintenance).

Capital Contributed and Withdrawals

The final two components of owner’s equity are capital contributed and withdrawals.

  • Capital Contributed. This is money put into the company by the owner or investors.
  • Withdrawals. This is money the owner takes out of the company (i.e., the owner paying themself or other investors).

Owner’s Equity

The basic accounting equation is:

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{OE}[/latex]

 

Mathematically, an owner’s equity can be expressed like this:

[latex]\text{Owner’s Equity}=\text{Capital Contributed}-\text{Withdrawals}+\text{Revenues}-\text{Expenses}[/latex]

Or, in general terms, the owner’s equity is equal to what the owner puts in, minus what the owner takes out, plus what the business has generated in additional wealth for the owner, minus the costs associated with generating that wealth.

So, the expanded accounting equation is:

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\left(\text{CC}-\text{WD}+\text{Rev}-\text{Exp}\right)[/latex]

 

]]>
Assets https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assets/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:06 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assets/ Read more »]]>
  • Define assets

 

Asset Criteria

Two white people shoveling loose yard debris next to a truck.In financial accounting, an asset must meet two criteria:

  1. The company must own or control it.
  2. It must be expected to generate future benefit for that company.

For instance, if a landscaping company buys a delivery truck, they own the item. Even if they lease a truck, they still have legal control of the item, so it meets the first criteria (if it’s a long-term lease). The truck is also going to generate revenue, meeting the second criteria as well as the first. If the company just rents the truck for a day though, the cost is considered an expense.

Asset Subcategories

Assets fall into two general subcategories: current and noncurrent.

Current Assets

Current assets are expected to convert into cash within a relatively short period of time (usually one year). For instance, when Apple makes iPhones, they classify the phones as inventory, which are goods held for sale in the ordinary course of business. Those phones are going to be sold, and cash will be collected within a few months. The iPhones are considered assets (until they are sold) and categorized as current assets.

The following is a list of common current assets:

  • Cash
  • Checking accounts
  • Savings accounts
  • Short-term investments
  • Accounts Receivable (money customers owe the company)
  • Inventory
  • Prepaid expenses (such as insurance paid in advance)
  • Supplies

Noncurrent Assets

A room full of silver Conical-Bottom Fermenters.On the other hand, if a brewery buys a new building it is a noncurrent asset. It is going to produce revenue over a long period of time by being used to produce inventory, but it won’t be converted to cash any time soon.

The following is a list of common noncurrent assets:

  • Buildings
  • Land
  • Vehicles
  • Equipment
  • Furniture
  • Long-term investments (stocks and bonds)
  • Patents (rights to inventions)

Being able to correctly categorize assets is a fundamental skill for financial accounting. As you get further into the course, you’ll have more opportunities to practice and learn the correct way to record assets.

]]>
Introduction to the Basic Accounting Equation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-the-basic-accounting-equation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:05 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-the-basic-accounting-equation/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: state the accounting equation

The cornerstone of accounting, as it’s been practiced since Pacioli documented it back in 1494, is the accounting equation. It’s a relatively simple mathematical identity that looks like this:

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{OE}[/latex]

The A stands for assets, the L stands for liabilities, and the OE stands for owner’s equity.

While the accounting equation only includes three categories, there are actually five that financial accountants track over time:

  1. Assets (A): Anything of value that a business owns.
  2. Liabilities (L): Debts that a business owes; claims on assets by outsiders.
  3. Owner’s Equity (OE): Worth of the owners of a business; claims on assets by the owners.
  4. Revenues (Rev): Income that results when a business operates and generates sales.
  5. Expenses (Exp): Costs associated with earning revenue.

In this section, we’ll be exploring each of those items.

Let’s move ahead so that you can gain a more detailed understanding of the basic accounting equation and its components.

]]>
The Accounting Equation https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/the-accounting-equation/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:05 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/the-accounting-equation/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the basic accounting equation

 

One of the cornerstones of financial accounting is the accounting equation, which in its simplest form, looks like this:

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{OE}[/latex]

This equation has to always stay in balance.

Balancing a New Business

An owner registers their new company with the state department of business licensing. They take their business license down to the bank and transfer $20,000 of their own money into a new business account. They have now “capitalized” their business, which means they made a contribution to capital, which increases owner’s equity.

At the same time, they have increased the balance in their checking account. From a bookkeeping perspective, you have to make two entries for this one business transaction, and these two entries balance each other out.

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{OE}[/latex]

[latex]\$20,000=\$0+\$20,000[/latex]

balanced scales with $20,000 on each side

Now, suppose the owner also borrows $5,000 from the bank, which is then deposited into their account. A loan will not increase their equity. It is not a capital contribution. It is debt, which is a liability.

Now, the equation looks like this:

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{OE}[/latex]

[latex]\$25,000\left(\text{cash}\right)=\$5,000\left(\text{bank loan}\right)+\$20,000\left(\text{original capital contribution}\right)[/latex]

balanced scales with $25,000 on each side

Assets are what the business owns. Liabilities are what it owes, and equity is the amount of the company that belongs to the business owner.

Balance in a Home Loan

Think of the equation in terms of a house. Say the house costs $250,000 and you owe $200,000 to the bank. Your equity in the home is $50,000.

[latex]\text{A}=\text{L}+\text{OE}[/latex]

can also be stated as:

[latex]\text{A}-\text{L}=\text{OE}[/latex]

[latex]\text{Assets}-\text{Liabilities}=\text{Owner's Equity}[/latex]

In the case of the house cited above, the equation is [latex]\$250,000 - \$200,000 = \$50,000[/latex].

Accounting Equation

Commit this important accounting concept to memory: Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity

 

 

]]>
Financial vs Managerial Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-vs-managerial-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-vs-managerial-accounting/ Read more »]]>
  • Compare and contrast financial and managerial accounting

 

Financial Accounting

Illustration of a white person holding a report with charts and graphs.Financial accounting information appears in financial statements that are intended primarily for external users, like stockholders and creditors. These outside parties decide on matters pertaining to the entire company, such as whether to increase or decrease their investment in a company or to extend credit to a company. Consequently, financial accounting information relates to the company as a whole, while managerial accounting focuses on the parts or segments of the company.

Drawbacks of financial accounting, especially for internal users, include:

  • Lack of timeliness (financials are retrospective, not current or prospective)
  • Fixed format

Advantages of financial accounting, especially for external users, include:

  • Usually verified and/or verifiable
  • Consistent formatting from period to period and between firms (consistent and comparable)

Managerial Accounting

Managerial accounting is the accounting that provides managers and owners (internal users) with financial information that they need in order to make operational and strategic decisions. The information managers use may range from broad, long-range planning data to detailed explanations of why actual costs varied from cost estimates.

A man holding a briefcase and the business section of the newspaper.Some of the ways internal users employ managerial accounting information include the following:

  • Assessing how management has discharged its responsibility for protecting and managing the company’s resources.
  • Shaping decisions about when to borrow or invest company resources.
  • Shaping decisions about expansion or downsizing.

In addition, managerial accountants often help prepare financial statements. Therefore, managerial accountants must be knowledgeable concerning financial accounting and reporting.

Drawbacks to managerial accounting that make it less ideal for external users include:

  • Inconsistent from company to company
  • Not usually audited or verified by an outside firm

Advantages of managerial accounting for the internal users include:

  • Flexibility and adaptability
  • Real-time results and projections that don’t need to go through a lengthy audit process

Other Areas of Accounting

There are some other specific areas of specialty as well, including government and non-profit accounting, forensic accounting, and tax accounting.

Non-Profit Accounting

Non-profit entities, as the name implies, exist for purposes other than making a profit. Instead of business owners, a state incorporates a non-profit to benefit the public, so the major stakeholders are the public, or in the case of some clubs, the members.

Common non-profits include charities, social service organizations, churches, and advocacy groups. The accounting for these organizations is more focused on how money is used to advance the purpose of the organization. In addition, nonprofits can apply to the IRS for non-taxable status, commonly under either IRC Section 501(c)(3) or 501(c)(4). Because of the significant differences between accounting for business transactions and accounting for non-profit organizations, this is an area of potential specialty for accountants.

In addition to special rules for non-profit organizations, governmental accounting (that would include federal, state, and local governments as well as quasi-governmental organizations such as schools and water districts) is a specialized field that does not focus on profit but on accountability.

Forensic Accounting

Forensic accounting involves investigating and reporting on financial crimes, fraud, and harmful business practices. Forensic accountants may be called upon to testify in court, and the work product of a forensic accountant may be admitted as evidence.

Tax Accounting

Government agencies that track and use taxes are interested in the financial story of a business. They want to know whether the business is paying taxes according to current tax laws. The language in which tax-related financial statements are prepared is called IRC or Internal Revenue Code. Tax accountants prepare income tax returns and help clients understand and apply the tax code for both compliance and planning purposes.

Next, let’s look at how the government uses accounting information.

]]>
Government Reporting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/government-reporting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:04 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/government-reporting/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe the unique way the government uses accounting information

 

Back in the early twentieth century, Congress enacted a tax on businesses based on profits. At the time, it was just one percent of net income in excess of $5,000. A few years later, Congress passed the law to create an individual income tax, and over the years, many states followed suit, passing their own income tax acts.

Tax books and a calculator.Before that, most taxes were excise taxes, which means they were imposed on individual items, like alcohol and cigarettes, and accounting for those taxes was fairly straightforward. However, as the tax law has become more pervasive and more complicated, it has also become more and more dependent on accountants to provide the information needed to correctly assess the tax, as well as the expertise to minimize it. In fact, it’s one area of the law where accountants have more expertise than attorneys.

Today, taxes based on income, sales taxes, and payroll taxes make up the vast majority of federal and state revenues. For the most part, taxable income is calculated the same way as net income for other external users, like banks and investors, with some important differences. Since the Internal Revenue Code (IRC), if it were printed out, would be several thousand pages of complex legal jargon, what follows is only a sample of the ways tax accounting can differ from financial accounting:

  • Penalties: often considered a cost of doing business (expense) for business purposes, the IRC doesn’t allow civil penalties (like parking tickets) to be deducted from income
  • Meals: because of past abuses, the IRC limits meal expenses to 50% of what the business reports to other external users

The IRC also either requires or allows different ways of deciding when to record money coming in or going out. In fact, state income tax laws are often different from the federal laws, so the financial accountants for a business may have to keep several sets of records:

  • Managerial accounting for internal users
  • Financial accounting for external users
  • Tax accounting for governmental reporting

Deadlines are extremely important in accounting, and especially so in reporting to the government. Business returns have specific deadlines. For instance, payroll tax reports and deposits may be quarterly or monthly depending on the amount of payroll, and corporate tax returns are due on the 15th day of the third month following the end of the fiscal year. All of the complex rules of tax and other governmental reporting means that the accountant has to be well educated and must stay current with any changes in the law.

As you’ll see, accountants have a big job to do, and a lot of rules to follow.

]]>
Users of Accounting Information https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/users-of-accounting-information/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:03 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/users-of-accounting-information/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify users of accounting information

 

The accounting process provides financial data for a broad range of individuals whose objectives in studying the data vary widely. There are three primary users of accounting information: internal users, external users, and the government (which is a specific form of an external user). Each group uses accounting information differently and requires the information to be presented differently.

Internal Users

Two people sitting at a table in front of a laptop. One person is a white man, who is gesturing at the computer. The other is an asian woman looking at the computer.Internal users are owners and managers involved in the day-to-day operations of the business and in long-term strategic planning. They are the ones who are making decisions such as whether to lease or buy equipment or to keep the old equipment and simply keep repairing it. They also decide what products or services to produce and how much of each to supply. They decide on the price to charge to customers, and they want to know how much it costs to make a product.

External Users

The external users of accounting information fall into five groups; each has different interests in the company and wants answers to unique questions. The groups and some of their possible questions are:

  • Prospective and current board members or investors. Has the company earned satisfactory income on its total investment? Should an investment be made in this company? Should the present investment be increased, decreased, or retained at the same level? Can the company install costly pollution control equipment and still be profitable?
  • Creditors and lenders. Should a loan be granted to the company? Will the company be able to pay its debts as they become due?
  • Employees and their unions. Does the company have the ability to pay increased wages? Is the company financially able to provide long-term employment for its workforce?
  • Customers. Does the company offer useful products at fair prices? Will the company survive long enough to honor its product warranties?
  • General public. Is the company providing useful products and gainful employment for citizens without causing serious environmental problems?

Government

The government is a separate type of external user that is also interested in a company’s performance, mainly for purposes of collecting the proper amount of tax, but also for other regulatory purposes. In fact, a single company may be reporting to several state and local governments and even to foreign governments, depending on where they are doing business.

]]>
Why Accounting Matters https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-accounting-matters/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:02 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-accounting-matters/ Read more »]]>
  • Explain the importance of accounting

 

One of the key aspects of the accounting process is keeping “running totals” of “things.” Examples of things a business might keep track of include the following items:

  • The amount of cash the business currently has
  • What a company has paid for utilities for the month
  • The amount of money the business owes
  • The business’s income for the entire year
  • The total cost of all the equipment the business has purchased

It’s important that businesses keep these running totals up to date, so they can be readily available when the the information is needed. It’s a similar practice to checking your cash balance in the bank before deciding if you have enough money to make a purchase with your debit card.

Some of the questions you might ask include:

  • How is my business doing right now?
  • Is it making money?
  • How did we do last year?
  • How much money is in the bank right now?

NeatNiks

Photo of a black man wearing a white jacket with colorful splotchesNick Frank started NeatNiks as a sole proprietorship in October of this year. NeatNiks provides customized cleaning services to high-end homeowners in the Santa Fe area of New Mexico.

Here is a list of transactions for Nick’s business in the month of October:

  • Oct 1: The owner, Nick Frank, opened a bank account in the name of NeatNiks using $20,000 of his own money from his personal account.
  • Oct 4: Nick rented a truck for $12,000 cash for October through March (6 months).
  • Oct 7: Purchased $2,600 of supplies on account from Cleaning Supplies, Inc.
  • Oct 15: Received $1,500 cash for services performed.
  • Oct 20: Billed customers for $7,250 worth of work done in October.
  • Oct 25: Paid in cash: $1,500 for insurance and $1,100 for independent contractors’ work.
  • Oct 26: Paid $1,000 to Cleaning Supplies, Inc. on account.
  • Oct 30: Collected $1,600 from customers on account.
  • Oct 31: Withdrew $4,000 cash for personal use.
  • Oct 31: Nick owes independent contractors $1,200 for work done in October—he’ll pay it in November.
  • Oct 31: Nick had $1,000 of supplies left over at the end of the month.

At the end of October, Nick wants answers to the following questions:

  1. How much money did Nick make or lose during his first month in business?
  2. Nick wants to buy another truck for $5,000 in order to keep up with demand—does he have enough cash in the bank to do that right now?
  3. How much do customers owe Nick?
  4. How much does Nick owe to his suppliers?
  5. What is Nick’s equity in his business at the end of October?

Without an accounting system, he probably won’t be able to confidently answer any of these questions.

In the next few modules, you’ll follow Nick Frank’s business through the accounting process as you discover the tools accountants use to track and analyze financial transactions, and by the end of Module 4, you’ll be able to answer all of these questions confidently.

]]>
Introduction to Accounting Information https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-information/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:02 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-information/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: identify the ways we use accounting

Accounting information is a broad umbrella. There are as many different kinds of reports and information as there are people demanding it. However, over the years, the industry has developed some standard reports, and the many different users of accounting information can be roughly grouped into categories, the main ones being internal users and external users.

Let’s move ahead to gain a more detailed understanding of who uses accounting information and the different ways it is meaningful to those users.

]]>
What Is Accounting? https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/what-is-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:01 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/what-is-accounting/ Read more »]]>
  • Define accounting
  • Describe the evolution of accounting

 

Accounting is often called the language of business; however, anyone can benefit from learning about accounting, including individuals and not-for-profit organizations like churches, charities, fraternities, and hospitals. Any entity that wants to manage resources can and should be tracking those resources. In this course, we will focus on accounting for business entities.

The American Accounting Association defines accounting as:

the process of identifying, measuring, and communicating economic information to permit informed judgments and decisions by the users of the information.

First, notice that it is initially defined as a process: a systematic way of doing things. Second, accounting measures economic information. That means it’s not just measuring money in and out, but also wealth—although most of what we measure is stated in money. Finally, accounting is a form of communication; that’s why it is often called the language of business.

In addition, since accounting information is used by people—both inside and outside of the organization—to make decisions, it has to be reliable, consistent, timely, accurate, and verifiable. In other words, it can’t just be made up. That’s why accountants use systems that have developed over time. Understanding a historical perspective of how these systems developed is important.

Accounting vs. Bookkeeping

two full file boxes of various papersBookkeeping is a mechanical process that records the routine economic activities of a business. For instance, if you track your expenses against a budget, you are bookkeeping. Accounting includes bookkeeping but goes well beyond it in scope. Accountants analyze and interpret financial information, prepare financial statements, conduct audits, design accounting systems, prepare special business and financial studies, prepare forecasts and budgets, and provide tax services.

The accounting process provides financial data for a broad range of individuals whose objectives in studying the data vary widely. Bank officials, for example, may study a company’s financial statements to evaluate the company’s ability to repay a loan. Prospective investors may compare accounting data from several companies to decide which company represents the best investment. Accounting also supplies management with significant financial data useful for decision making, and tax accounting is essential to comply with governmental requirements. These are just a few of the ways accounting information is used to help businesses survive and thrive.

 

The Evolution of Accounting

Origins of Accounting

The earliest known accounting records were created over 7,000 years ago and found among the ruins of ancient Mesopotamia. Tablets now in museums have been translated to show things like lists of workers and wages, contracts for the sale of land, and accounts of other tablets.

Later, during the reign of the first emperor of the Roman Empire, “The Deeds of the Divine Augustus” listed distributions to the people, grants of land, building of temples, money to military veterans, religious offerings, and money spent on theatrical shows and gladiator events. Augustus used this information for planning and decision-making purposes.

Early Monetary Systems

market stalls of various spicesAs Europe evolved from a barter system to a monetary economy in the thirteenth century, merchants adapted the old forms of keeping books to keep track of their personal and business accounts. In 1494, a contemporary of Leonardo da Vinci named Luca Bartolomeo de Pacioli wrote, “Summa de Arithmetica, Geometria, Proportioni et Proportionalita,” which included a twenty-seven-page treatise on bookkeeping titled, “Particularis de Computis et Scripturis” (Details of Calculation and Recording), on the subjects of record-keeping and accounting. Pacioli’s book became the teaching text for bookkeeping and accounting for the next several hundred years.

By the time bookkeeping came to America, accountants were still clerks hired to do basic data entry and calculations (picture Bob Cratchit in Dickens’s A Christmas Carol), and businesses were small enough that typically the owners were personally involved in and aware of the health of their companies. They didn’t need accountants to create complex financial statements or cost-benefit analyses.

The Railroad’s Impact on Accounting

It was the expansion of the railroad that transformed the practice of accounting. To get goods and people to their destinations, railroads need distribution networks, shipping schedules, fare collection, competitive rates, and some way to evaluate whether all of this is being done in the most efficient way possible. In addition, business transactions could be settled in a matter of days rather than months, and information could be passed from city to city at a much greater speed. Even time didn’t run evenly across the country before the railroad. Previously, each township decided when the day began and ended by a general consensus. This was changed to a uniform system because it was necessary to have goods delivered and unloaded at certain stations at predictable times.

During that same time period, the corporate form of ownership allowed companies to seek large sums of money from a broad pool of investors, but investing was risky. People acquired issues of stock in companies with which they were familiar, either by knowing the industry or knowing the owners, or they blindly invested where their relatives and friends encouraged them. The risk of loss prevented or at least discouraged a lot of investors. Eager to attract capital to expand their operations, corporations began to publish financial information, but it was still largely unreliable and inconsistent.

Investing’s Impact on Accounting

A rising arrow tracing the increasing values on a bar chart.As the stock market grew, companies grew, and the number of shareholders in any one company also grew. In the modern corporation, management answers to the shareholders, but in the early days, those shareholders were unable to completely trust management.

The profession of accounting was recognized in 1896 with a law stating that the title of Certified Public Accountant (CPA) would only be given to people who passed state examinations and had three years of experience in the field. Less than 20 years later, the already increasing demand for CPAs skyrocketed as the US government started charging income tax.

After the stock market crash of 1929, the need for regulation of the stock market and independent financial reviews of a company’s operations became apparent. Accountants were already essential for attracting investors, and they quickly became essential for maintaining investor confidence.

Accounting Today

Today, accountants help clients and businesses file income taxes, manage their businesses, produce a myriad of financial reports, and create systems for tracking and monitoring both internal and external information with the ultimate goal of creating new wealth. The accounting profession continues to be at the forefront of innovation, from the use of artificial intelligence to “big data” to blockchain technology. As the business world gets more and more complicated, the demand for accountants continues to grow.

 

]]>
Introduction to Accounting Defined https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-defined/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:46:00 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-accounting-defined/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: define accounting and explain its history

You may have heard someone say in conversation, “How do you account for the fact that . . . ?” They are asking for an explanation. In business, accounting is an explanation of how the business is doing, and specifically, in financial accounting, the explanation is focused on money.

Worm's-eye view of four skyscrapers.

Imagine running a business, and your employees, customers, and even your family rely on that business for their livelihood. How important is it for you to have a clear financial picture of how your business is doing and where it is headed? What if you go to the bank for a loan to buy new equipment? What kind of information do you think the bank would want in order to grant (or deny) your application for a loan? What if you are quite successful and you want to take on a new partner or investors? What kind of information would your new business associates want to see, and how would they know it was accurate?

Accounting answers all of these questions. It is a process that has developed over a long period of time that has accepted practices and forms of reporting. Let’s move ahead so that you can gain a more detailed understanding of the importance of accounting in the business world and how it has evolved into the practice it is today.

]]>
Why It Matters: The Role of Accounting in Business https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-the-role-of-accounting-in-business/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:59 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-the-role-of-accounting-in-business/ Read more »]]> Why learn about the role of accounting in business?

Accounting plays a vital role in running a business because it allows management to track income and expenditures; ensures statutory compliance; and provides investors, management, and government with information they require.

A pen and calculator sitting by a stack of papers.Managers need accurate and timely financial data to make intelligent decisions, and accountants are the ones who record and present this information. While the accounting process collects the data and presents it in various types of reports, accountants help to interpret the meanings of financial reports and suggest ways to use these details to solve business problems.

Investors include active owners who are running the business and passive investors who just have money at stake. They both want to know whether the business is making money or losing money, along with information about why. And the government wants to know how much the company is making so it can collect the proper amount of taxes.

All of this involves accounting, which is basically collecting, summarizing, and reporting on the often massive amount of data that represents the mission of every for-profit business: to make money.

In this module, you’ll learn how accounting has evolved over the years into the critical information system it is today. You’ll also learn about the basic cornerstone of modern bookkeeping—the accounting equation, and finally, you’ll explore some of the most important challenges that face the accounting profession today.

]]>
Discussion: Winning the Lottery https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-winning-the-lottery/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:58 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/discussion-winning-the-lottery/ Read more »]]> This discussion can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Discussion: Winning the Lottery link

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
  • Instructions for faculty to paste the content into their LMS are located in the course resource pages.
]]>
Assignment: Creating a Budget https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-creating-a-budget/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:58 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignment-creating-a-budget/ Read more »]]> This assignment can be found in Google Docs: Financial Accounting Assignment: Creating a Budget

To make your own copy to edit:

  • If you want a Google Doc: in the file menu of the open document, click “Make a copy.” This will give you your own Google Doc to work from.
  • If you want a PDF or Word file: in the file menu of the open document, click “Download” and select the file type you would like to have (note: depending on the file type you select, the formatting could get jumbled).
]]>
Retirement Planning https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/retirement-planning/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:57 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/retirement-planning/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify various strategies to fund retirement

You most likely don’t plan to work for your whole life, so one day, maybe when you are 65 or 55 or 72, you plan to retire. When you do, you’ll want to make sure you have some other source of cash flow that will keep you happy until you don’t need money anymore. One common rule of thumb is to plan for your post-retirement spending to be at least 70% of your pre-retirement income. So, if you start working as an accountant making $55,000 a year, and over time you get raises and Cost of Living Adjustments (COLAs) you may be making $250,000 by the time you retire (or more). If you want to retire early, say 55, by using the 70% rule, you’ll want to have $175,000 in cash flow every year indefinitely. How do you manage that?

No matter where you are in your career, now is the time to start planning and saving for retirement.

Company-sponsored Plans

A meeting with business associates around a table.The most common way to set up your retirement funding is through an employer-sponsored plan. There are two basic types of plans: defined contribution and defined benefit plans.

Defined Contribution Plans

Most companies now offer defined contribution plans, such as a 401(k), that allows you to contribute a percentage of your wages (typically 3–10%) into an investment account that you can’t access until you retire (with a lot of rules and exceptions, of course). Often, the plan requires the employer to match all or a part of your contribution. Therefore, if your employer offers a 3% match and allows you to contribute up to 7% of your salary, you’d be smart to contribute at least 3% to take full advantage of the extra money from the employer. You’d be even smarter to contribute your full 7%. If you are making $55,000 a year, that’s $5,500 per year going into your retirement savings account. Also, your contributions are not taxed as income when you earn them—only when you take them out (again, there are some exceptions to this, like the ROTH rules). If you are young, you can invest a bit aggressively and take advantage of higher rates of return in equity stocks and mutual funds, but when you get closer to retirement, you’ll want to shift much of your investment portfolio from growth to fixed income.

If you put just $5,500 a year away for 20 years into an investment account that averages an 8% return on investment, you could have nearly a million dollars saved up at the end of 30 years. Even so, if you don’t manage your spending, that money could run out quickly. If you are used to spending $250,000 a year and you retire with a million dollars it will only last about four years, maybe five if you are lucky.

Defined Benefit Plans

Defined benefit plans that pay out for life based on a formula aren’t very common any more. A defined benefit plan, as the name implies, provides a certain benefit according to a formula. The formula usually takes into account number of years of service and salary history. For instance, the defined benefit (often called a pension) may be 60% of the employee’s highest salary paid out for life after retirement, but only it the employee works for the company for 20 years.

One of the most familiar defined benefit plans is the federal-government-sponsored Social Security. Because the employer bears all of the risk of funding a defined benefit plan, employer-sponsored defined benefit pension plans have fallen out of favor over the past few decades

Individual Retirement Accounts

In addition to company-sponsored plans, there are Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) for self-employed people and people who aren’t covered by a plan at work. Contributions to an IRA are limited, and IRAs fall into one of two categories:

  • IRAs are excluded from your taxable income for the year you make them, and the investments grow without being subject to tax until you withdraw the funds.
  • ROTH IRAs come out of taxed income, but grow tax-free and no tax is due when the funds are withdrawn.

Just as with employer-sponsored plans, there are a myriad of rules and regulations that have to be followed, and there are penalties for not following them. However, these plans are so common that any investment advisor can help you navigate the maze.

Most IRAs and company-sponsored plans offer an array of mutual funds with different investment objectives, from high-growth to fixed income. In addition, some companies offer defined benefit plans, annuities, and other vehicles that you’ll have to research carefully when the time comes.

Business Income

Another way to prepare for retirement is to start or buy businesses, especially businesses that other people operate or that are sources of “passive” income, like a car wash or laundromat or rental real estate. Owning a coffee shop or other small business can be more like a job that relies on your participation, but even then, if you build a successful business, you may be able to sell it when you are ready to retire, adding those funds to your retirement savings. Buying and selling real estate and investing in businesses is much more complicated than just contributing to your IRA or company-sponsored plan and can be riskier as well.

Home Ownership

Many people count on the equity in their homes to help them fund retirement. If you make extra payments, or amortize your home over 15 years instead of the traditional 30, you can save significantly on interest expense and pay off your home much more quickly.

Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid

A stack of social security cards.Most workers in the United States pay into both Social Security and Medicare. The contributions are deducted from wages and sent in to the Internal Revenue Service, which then deposits them into trust funds. In addition, employers match the employees’ contributions. When the employee retires, Social Security pays benefits based on a formula, and the retiree can also access Medicare.

As of 2020, the current contribution rates are 6.2% for Social Security (technically known as Old Age, Survivors, and Disability Insurance or OASDI) and 1.45% for Medicare, also known as Health Insurance or HI. Together, they are sometimes called FICA taxes because they are collected according to a federal law called the Federal Insurance Contributions Act that was designed to make sure every worker had at least some amount of retirement income and health coverage.

However, the amount of retirement income available from FICA is minimal, and most likely won’t be enough to maintain anything like your current or desired standard of living when you retire. You can get more information on Social Security online, including a report on your own account. Self-employed people have to pay both the employer and the employee contributions, so the effective combined rate for self-employment income is 15.3% of net earnings.

Medicaid is a federal program run by the states that provides health coverage to eligible low-income adults, children, pregnant women, elderly adults, and people with disabilities. There are some other public health care programs available for certain people, such as veterans.

Life Insurance

Finally, although not really a retirement strategy, you should consider life insurance for both you and your loved ones, especially as your life becomes more complicated with kids, dependent parents, a larger house, cars, a business with employees, and a myriad of other things people face in their lives.

There are two basic types of life insurance—term and whole life.

  • Term Insurance is the simplest form of life insurance. It pays only if death occurs during the term of the policy, which is usually from one to 30 years. If you stop making the monthly payments, the policy expires.
  • Whole life pays a death benefit whenever you die—even if you live to 100. There are several variations of whole life (sometimes called “permanent”). However, we’ll focus on traditional whole life. In these policies, both the death benefit and the premium are level throughout the life of the policy. The company keeps the premium the same by charging a premium that is higher than what’s needed in the early years to pay claims. They then invest that money and use it to supplement the future premiums to help pay the cost of life insurance for older people. By law, when these “overpayments” reach a certain amount, they must be available to the policyholder as a cash value if they decide not to continue with the original plan. The cash value is an alternative—not an additional—benefit under the policy.

As you can see, life doesn’t necessarily get simpler as you get older, but with some forethought and planning, you can provide for yourself and your family long past your working years.

 

]]>
Putting It Together: Personal Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-personal-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:57 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/putting-it-together-personal-accounting/ Read more »]]> A woman working at a laptop.In economically unstable times, it’s common for people to assess the future. The desire is to have enough so you can stop working when you reach a certain age, pay for your child’s college tuition, and have money for a vacation, a home, or a car. You’re planning ahead financially, and the ultimate goal is a healthy financial future.

The knowledge you gain by studying accounting will help you in all your life’s endeavors, from paying for school to buying a house to saving for retirement.

In the Varo poll mentioned at the beginning of this module, 66 percent of adults, including 71 percent of millennials, say they are stressed because they don’t have a three-month emergency fund, and 46 percent say it’s because they don’t have any savings set aside in one to cover an unexpected expense like a job loss or medical problem.[1]

Other studies have made similar points. Less than half of Americans have enough to cover a $1,000 emergency, according to a survey from financial website Bankrate,[2] and in a similar survey, financial site GOBankingRates found that 69% of adults have less than $1,000 in their savings accounts, period. Nearly half have nothing saved at all.[3] That could explain why only 61 percent of Americans reported that they could pay an unexpected expense of $400 without credit.[4]

A Northwestern Mutual survey indicated that in 2018, 78% of respondents weren’t confident that they’ll have enough put away for retirement, and 75 percent of adults say it’s “not at all likely” or only “somewhat likely” that they’ll have access to Social Security when they retire. Even worse, 46% say that they haven’t taken any action to address the issue.[5]

Given all of these statistics, it’s important to start planning your own spending and saving as early as possible. In this module, you’ve learned various accounting tools that can assist you with:

  • Applying for financial aid
  • Balancing work and school (present needs with future goals)
  • Finding and managing other sources of income while you are in school
  • Budgeting
  • Filing income tax returns
  • Understanding credit
  • Buying a home or car
  • Investing for your future (retirement planning)

Accounting as a Career

Accounting is the lifeblood of any organization or business, and it’s a crucial part of your everyday financial health. When you do the accounting, you realize not only can this increase your chances of finding a job after graduation, but there are also many other benefits to earning your accounting degree.

You can view the transcript for “Accountants Talk About Their Dreams” here (opens in new window).

Investing, analyzing budgets, and paying down debt are just a few key concepts in both business and personal financial planning. Every time you sit down and think about how you’ll have the money to do important things you are using accounting skills.


  1. Ruark, Hannah. “Varo Money Helps Americans Improve Financial Health With High‑Yield Savings Accounts and SMS Alerts.” Cision PRWeb, March 8, 2018.
  2. Garcia, Adrian D. “Survey: Most Americans Wouldn't Cover A $1K Emergency With Savings.” Bankrate, January 16, 2019.
  3. Huddleston, Cameron. “Survey: 69% of Americans Have Less Than $1,000 in Savings.” GOBankingRates, December 16, 2019.
  4. Federal Reserve System. “Report on the Economic Well-Being of U.S. Households in 2018 - May 2019.” Survey of Household Economics and Decisionmaking, 2019.
  5. 1 In 3 Americans Have Less Than $5,000 In Retirement Savings.” Northwestern Mutual, May 8, 2018.
]]>
Introduction to Financing the Future https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financing-the-future/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financing-the-future/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: use your knowledge of accounting to finance your retirement and leave a legacy for your loved ones

Ideally, you won’t have to work for your whole life. At some point, you’ll want to retire, to kick back, maybe travel a little. To do that, you’ll need to start planning and saving now. That means it’s time to develop a basic understanding of money, investing, and how you can kick your savings accounts into gear so that they grow faster than inflation.

Let’s move ahead so that you can gain a more detailed understanding of how to use your knowledge of accounting to fund a comfortable standard of living in your post-working years and to provide for your family even after you are gone.

]]>
Investing https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/investing/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:56 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/investing/ Read more »]]>
  • Describe common types of investments
  • Demonstrate an understanding of the time value of money

 

Generally speaking, to invest in stocks, bonds, and mutual funds, you need an investment account with a broker. You’ll want to evaluate brokers based on factors like costs (trading commissions, account fees), investment selection, and investor research and tools.

Before selecting an investment broker, it is best to understand what types of investments are traditionally offered. We’ll take a look at the most commonly used types of investments:

  • Stocks
  • Bonds
  • Mutual Funds
  • Rental Real Estate

Stocks

A white woman holding a cell phone with stock reports on the screen.A stock is a share of ownership in a single company. Stocks are also known as equities. Stocks are purchased for a share price, which can range from the single digits to a couple of thousand dollars, depending on the company. Starbucks stock was trading at $60 per share in 2016, 2017, and 2018, showing very little growth, but in 2019 it increased to almost $100 per share. If you’d put $6,000 into your brokerage account in 2018 and bought only Starbucks stock, you’d have 100 shares. By August of 2019, you could have sold those shares for $9,500, making a $3,500 profit in just one year.

In July of 2015, a single share of Amazon stock was trading at $500. By the end of 2018, the stock was up to almost $2,000 per share, but it dropped back down to about $1,500 in 2019. However, during the coronavirus pandemic of 2020, the stock was trading at close to $2,500. A $5,000 investment in 2015 would only buy you 10 shares of stock, but by 2020, just five years later, your stock would have been worth $25,000.

On the other hand, during that same time period, Ford Motor Company, a stock that had once traded at almost $40 per share in 1999, dropped from $15 per share to $5.

Picking winners in the stock market has been debated for as long as there have been publicly traded stocks, with as many different opinions and systems as there are stocks to pick from, which is literally thousands. Most astute investors diversify, which is to say they buy a wide range of stocks in different industries in order to balance their portfolios.

 

The Need for Diversifying

One of the worst examples of investing in a single stock is Enron. When Enron bought Portland General Electric, all the employees who had stock in PGE suddenly found themselves owning stock in Enron instead, and shortly after that, Enron went bankrupt and the stock went from $90 a share to $0 in the span of a few months. PGE employees lost their entire retirement savings.

Bonds

A bond is essentially a loan to a company or government entity that agrees to pay you back in a certain number of years. In the meantime, you get interest payments. Bonds are generally less risky than stocks. The trade-off is that the market value of bonds doesn’t fluctuate, so while they are safer, they offer less opportunity for growth.

Mutual Funds

An individual working at a desktop computer.Mutual funds are a mix of investments packaged together. Mutual funds are managed by professional investment firms, so they allow investors to skip the work of picking individual stocks and bonds and instead purchase a diverse collection in one transaction. The inherent diversification of mutual funds makes them generally less risky than individual stocks.

Rental Real Estate

Another type of investments is purchasing rental real estate such as single-family homes, apartment complexes, condominiums, or even raw land to rent out to tenants—or lease properties to businesses for use. Rental real estate is considered “passive” income, but buying and selling real estate can be complex, and a very specialized area of expertise is needed in order to minimize the investment risks. You may, however, find you have an affinity for it and gain the experience and expertise to invest wisely and get great returns over the years.

Other Investment Options

There are other options, as well—such as cryptocurrency, puts and calls, precious metals, and a host of other less common alternatives that require a deeper understanding of investing and of each specific type of investment. Although you may one day want to pursue some of these other investment options, it’s best to stick with a few solid stocks and mutual funds when you’re just getting started.

Your Investment Strategy

Your investment strategy depends on your saving goals, how much money you need to reach them, and your time horizon. If your savings goal is more than 20 years away (like retirement), almost all of your money can be in equities because higher-risk equities can recover from market drops over the longer period of time until your retirement. If, however, you’re saving for a short-term goal like emergency funds, you’re better off keeping your money in a savings account or another low-risk, easily accessible fund.

Later in this course, the accounting behind some of these investments will be covered more in detail. It is important for you to invest time to better understand your investment strategy and the vehicles that move you in the direction of your financial goals.

Present Value vs. Future Value

The present value of an amount of money depends on several factors, but in its simplest form, it represents what a future amount of money is worth today. For example, you promise to give your daughter $10,000 for college once she enrolls five years from now. If your investment account grows at about 8% every year, you would need to put $6,806 in your account today.

Let’s dive into how that growth works:

  • Year 1: You put the $6,806 in your account, and it earns 8% during that first year. You now have the original $6,806 plus $544.48 (6,806 × .08) in earnings. These earnings are often called interest, but they could also be growth, dividends, or rents. At the end of that first year, you have $7,350.48.
  • Year 2: Your investment earns another 8%, but this time it’s on the balance of $7,350.48. This is compounding—where you earn a return on your original investment plus the growth. During the second year, your $7,350.48 grows to $7,938.52, as you’ve earned $588.04 in interest.
    • Note: Compounding interest works for you when you are saving and investing, but conversely, it works against you when you are borrowing.
  • Year 3: Your account grows to $8,573.60, given the same conditions as the previous year.
  • Year 4: You have $9,259.49, given the same conditions as the previous year.
  • Year 5: You have $10,000.25 to give to your daughter for her college tuition.
Compound Interest Example
Year Account balance, beginning of the year Earnings/growth at 8% Account balance, end of year
Year 1 $6,806.00 $544.48 $7,350.48
Year 2 $7,350.48 $588.04 $7,938.52
Year 3 $7,938.52 $635.08 $8,573.60
Year 4 $8,573.60 $685.89 $9,259.49
Year 5 $9,259.49 $740.76 $10,000.25

In other words, if someone offered you $7,000 today, or $10,000 five years from now, you’d be smart to take the $7,000 if you think you can sustain a return on your investments of 8% because the future value of the $7,000 is more than $10,000 (it is, in fact, $10,285 and some change.)

In Summary

  • The present value of $10,000 five years from now, discounted at 8%, with interest compounded annually, is $6,806.
  • The future value of $6,806 at 8% compounded annually is $10,000.
You can calculate these amounts using a spreadsheet, a financial calculator, web-based calculators, commonly found tables, or even by hand if you are a math whiz. The trick to know is whether you are looking for the present value of a future amount (often called discounting) or the future value of a present amount. In addition, if the compounding period is more often than yearly, depending on what calculator you are using, you may have to do some quick math. For instance, if you are looking at tables for 8% compounded quarterly for 5 years, the number of periods (n) will be 20 (5 years times 4 quarters per year) and the interest rate (r) will be 2% (8% per year divided by 4 quarters). In calculations, remember that 8% is actually 0.08 as a number.

 

Compound Interest Calculator:  Try experimenting with compounded interest using Nerd Wallet’s calculator.

The mathematical formula for Future Value (FV) is:

[latex]{FV}={C}\times\left(1+{r}\right){n}[/latex]

Where,

  • [latex]C[/latex] = initial investment (present value)
  • [latex]r[/latex] = rate of return
  • [latex]n[/latex] = number of periods

Try it out: In our first example, the present value was [latex]6,806, n = 5, \text{ and } r = .08[/latex]

[latex]6806\times\left(1+.08\right)5 = 10000.25[/latex]

Future Value Tables

Because these calculations need to be done frequently, brokers and accountants create future value tables, which help people calculate future values without a financial calculator.

If you were using a future value table for this example, you would find the column for 8% and the row for n = 5, and you’d find a factor of 1.4693. That’s the future value of $1. So you would then multiply the factor by your initial investment of $6,806, and you get $10,000.06 (the factor is rounded to the nearest ten-thousandth, making it slightly less accurate than using the actual mathematical formula).

Annuities

An annuity is a steady stream of monthly or annual income. There are tables and calculations for the future and present values of annuities as well. The calculations are more complex than those for a single (lump) sum, but spreadsheets, calculators, and tables make the analysis possible. When it comes to periodic payments that are not all the same, or that have odd timing, a spreadsheet is going to be your best bet.

Suppose for college, your sponsor, Yoshi Nakamura, offers you $6,806 today, or $2,000 for each of the next five years (a total of $10,000). The present value of an ordinary annuity (payments at the end of each period) of $2,000 assuming an 8% investment rate for five years is $7,985.4 (2000 × 3.9927 factor from the present value of an annuity table). Based on this calculation, the $2,000 annuity is worth more than just $6,806, because you get some of the money each year, which you can then invest. In fact, using a future value analysis, by getting the $10,000 in installments and investing it at 8%, you’ll end up with $11,733.20.

Savings Goals Calculator:  Try experimenting with savings using Nerd Wallet’s calculator.

The important thing to know about the time value of money is that value is not fixed; it’s relative, which is another way of saying, “it depends.” It depends as well on factors other than just the rate of return you think you could get from investing. It depends on how badly you need the money right now, and inflation, and taxes, and a host of other factors. Still, in essence, the thing to remember is that a $1 bill right now is more valuable to you than that same $1 bill many years from now.

]]>
Taxes https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/taxes/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:55 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/taxes/ Read more »]]>
  • Apply accounting principles to properly minimize and file taxes

“Taxes are what we pay for civilized society.”

Oliver Wendall Holmes, Jr.,
inscribed on the archway leading to the offices of the Internal Revenue Service in Washington, D.C.

In general, anyone who works or makes money in any way is required to file a federal income tax return unless their income is less than the standard deduction. The standard deduction for single (unmarried) taxpayers in 2020 was $12,400, and is adjusted annually for inflation. The standard deduction is twice that for married couples filing jointly. In addition, you may want to file a return to claim a refund. Federal income tax refunds primarily come from two sources: withholding in excess of the actual taxes due and refundable tax credits.

Student-Specific Tax Rules

Tax rules are complicated, but if you are using a tax preparation service or a reputable online tool, and if your situation is fairly ordinary (such as a working person with no sideline business or significant investments), you can probably manage your tax filings. Below are a few rules that apply to students, specifically:

Scholarships are excluded from gross income to the extent that they are used to pay for direct costs of higher education, including tuition, fees, books, and other equipment or supplies required for enrollment. However, the amount of any scholarship that exceeds that direct cost of schooling is taxable, including scholarships that are used for room and board or other personal living expenses.[1]

Student-Specific Tax Credits

In 2020, there were two tax credits available for higher education expenses: The American opportunity tax credit and the lifetime learning tax credit.

  • The American Opportunity Tax Credit (AOTC) is available for the first four years of undergraduate education expenses (including tuition, fees, and textbooks) if the student is enrolled at least half time. The credit provides a 100 percent credit for the first $2,000 of qualifying educational expenses and a 25 percent credit for the next $2,000 of expenses, for a maximum credit of $2,500 (in 2020). Up to $1,000 of this credit is “refundable,” which means that even if you don’t owe any taxes, you can still get the refundable portion of the credit.
  • The lifetime learning credit (LLC) is available for undergraduate or graduate expenses (tuition and fees only, not textbooks). The credit lets you claim 20 percent of $10,000 of qualifying educational expenses (over a year), for a maximum credit of $2,000.

Paying Taxes

During the year, as you work, your employer withholds federal income taxes from your wages and periodically sends them to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) where they are stored in an account tied to your name and social security number. In addition, your employer will withhold Social Security taxes and some other items, like insurance costs, child support, retirement, and state income tax, if any of those apply.

On or before April 15th of the following year, you will file a form 1040 that calculates your actual taxes, and if your withholdings exceed your actual tax bill, you’ll get a refund. If your withholdings were less than your actual taxes according to your 1040, you’ll have to make a payment when you file the return.

A white person sitting at a computer with a calculator. The computer is showing a spreadsheet of tax values.Again, the tax law is complicated and extensive, so it pays to use either an expert system or an actual human expert to calculate and file your state and federal taxes each year.

Don’t get behind on your taxes because they are a legal obligation, but also don’t leave money with the federal government that belongs to you. You are not required to pay anything more than the legal minimum required of you by the Internal Revenue Code. The Supreme Court of the United States established this maxim early on, saying, “The legal right of a taxpayer to decrease the amount of what otherwise would be his taxes, or altogether avoid them, by means which the law permits, cannot be doubted.”[2]

 


  1. Gunasekara, Offain. “Taxes 101: A Primer For College Students.” Bankrate. Bankrate.com, June 1, 2012.
  2. Gregory v. Helvering, 293 U.S. 465 (1935).
]]>
Budgeting Personal Finances https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/budgeting-personal-finances/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/budgeting-personal-finances/ Read more »]]>
  • Create and follow a family budget
  • Identify proper ways to use and manage credit

 

Budgeting and Managing Your Spending

Saving money is just as important as not running out of money. Unless you have an almost unlimited supply of money, the only way to get a handle on your spending is to have a budget and stick to it.

You create a budget by looking at your income and your expenses and making sure that at the end of your pay period, you have enough to cover everything. If the numbers don’t line up—in other words, if you spend more than you make—that’s when you need to budget and work to manage your spending. You do this by cutting down expenses in some areas (such as dining out or entertainment) so you “make ends meet” each month, and hopefully have something left for savings.

You can view the transcript for “Consultant | My budget & planning for the future | Part 3 | Khan Academy” here (opens in new window).

One way to organize your budget is to allocate funds to fixed expenses like rent and car payment first, and then to have another section for discretionary spending, like eating out and entertainment.

Another budgeting technique is the 50/30/20 rule. It involves dividing your monthly income into three ”buckets”:

  • 50% (or less) goes to necessities such as housing, student loans, and utilities. These are expenses you have to pay every month.
  • 30% (or less) goes to nice-to-haves, such as entertainment, hobbies, and travel.
  • 20% (or more, if possible) goes toward savings and paying down debt.

Budgeting won’t do you any good if you don’t monitor your actual spending against your budget and then make adjustments to your spending habits as needed. There are some online budgeting resources and apps, but the simplest way to track your budget may be a spreadsheet.

Also, don’t forget to budget in saving for emergencies, such as temporary job loss. While it can be a hard goal to reach, it’s recommended to try saving up at least two full month’s worth of expenses in a savings account that is for that purpose only. Set up a separate savings account for things like luxury purchases, vacations, appliance replacement, and other large, non-recurring items.

Simple Example Budget

Here’s an example of a simple budget that tracks actual spending by month, helping to both create the ongoing budget and monitor spending against the budget and projected balances in savings and checking. On a spreadsheet, the budget could be extended out for a full year or more, giving you both history and projected balances, as well as how you actually spend your money (but you have to keep it updated).

Example Budget
Category January: Actual February: Actual March: Budgeted April: Budgeted
Gross Pay $ 3,500.00 $ 3,500.00 $ 3,500.00 $ 3,500.00
FICA (261.55) (260.00) (260.00) (260.00)
Health ins (293.00) (300.00) (300.00) (300.00)
Fed Income tax withheld (215.00) (250.00) (250.00) (250.00)
Retirement (105.00) (200.00) (200.00) (200.00)
Take home pay Single Line$ 2,625.45 Single Line$ 2,490.00 Single Line$ 2,490.00 Single Line$ 2,490.00
Single Line Single Line Single Line Single Line
Rent $ 850.00 $ 850.00 $ 850.00 $ 850.00
Medical 25.44 80.00 80.00
Groceries 398.50 698.55 350.00 350.00
Household 255.55 152.08 100.00 100.00
Dining and entertainment 149.00 422.22 100.00 100.00
Fuel 45.68 68.90 100.00 100.00
Insurance 121.48 121.48 120.00 120.00
Phone 99.00 99.00 90.00 90.00
Utilities 97.97 112.66 100.00 100.00
Pet/Vet 71.99 71.99 70.00 70.00
Total Expenses Single Line$ 2,114.61 Single Line$ 2,596.88 Single Line$ 1,960.00 Single Line$ 1,960.00
Cash left over for debt payments Single Line510.84 Single Line(106.88) Single Line530.00 Single Line530.00
Car payment (265.00) (265.00) (265.00) (265.00)
Student loans (210.00) (210.00) (210.00) (210.00)
Increase/(decrease) in cash Single Line$ 35.84 Single Line$ (581.88) Single Line$ 55.00 Single Line$ 55.00
Cash on hand, BOM 2,115.58 2,151.42 1,569.54 1,624.54
Cash on hand, end of month Single Line$ 2,151.42Double Line Single Line$ 1,569.54Double Line Single Line$ 1,624.54Double Line Single Line$ 1,679.54Double Line
Account balances, end of month Actual Actual Projected Projected
Checking 2,088.20 1,506.32 1,561.32 1,616.32
Savings 63.22 63.22 63.22 63.22
Combined Checking and Savings Single Line$ 2,151.42Double Line Single Line$ 1,569.54Double Line Single Line$ 1,624.54Double Line Single Line$ 1,679.54Double Line

Most people like to know how much money they currently have, which means they check it on a regular basis. While you are doing that, take a few extra minutes to verify charges and to update your budget. You can do that daily or weekly, but at the very least you should do it monthly.

It doesn’t matter what system you use, as long as it works for you. The test will be how much your savings account increases over time—and how much your debt decreases. If you are getting further in debt, or if your savings is dwindling, you’ll need to get more serious about your budgeting and find a better tool. If you are already deep in debt, you’ll have to take that into account when you build, update, and monitor your budget.

Credit

Establishing and building up good credit over time is an important element of sound financial health. If you travel, you’ll need a valid credit card to make a room reservation, and if you are on the road and a tire goes flat in the middle of the night, you might need a credit card to get a tow and pay for a new tire.

The most common ways to establish credit are to apply for a credit card and/or a car loan. But beware, you have to make all the payments on time, or you’ll be in worse shape than you would have been without those loans.

You can view the transcript for “The 5 Strategies That Raised My Credit Score From The 500s to The 800s” here (opens in new window).

Avoiding Credit Trouble

The only thing easier than building credit is mismanaging it and getting in trouble. According to a recent report by the Federal Reserve, Americans owe nearly $1 trillion in credit card debt, and the past-due amount is rising, especially among young people.

Certainly, having a bad credit rating is a bad thing, but the flipside is that having a good credit rating is a good thing. Someday you may want to buy a house, start a small business, or even buy some income-producing real estate, and you’ll want to have established credit to do that.

For credit cards, the best practice is to pay off the balance every month. Don’t use them to buy something you can’t afford. Especially for new borrowers, interest rates on new accounts can be upward of 25%, which means if you run up your balance to $1,000 and only make minimum payments, it could take you years to pay off the debt and the interest you end up paying could easily end up being even more than the original purchase.

If you are already in over your head, you’ll first have to make some hard budget decisions to free up money to pay down your loans. Most people who have successfully paid down debt use the “snowball” method, where you pay down the smallest outstanding balance first, and then use the money freed up from paying off that debt, plus the extra money you freed up in the first place, to pay down the next lowest balance, and so on, until you are out of debt. Another way is to attack the highest interest rates, paying those off first to save money in the long run. Either way, once your credit cards are paid off, be careful in your spending so you don’t run up the balances again for unneeded expenses.

Credit Scores

A credit score is a three-digit number, typically ranging from 300 to 850, that is the result of an analysis of your credit file. It gives lenders an indication of your potential credit risk and ability to repay loans. Credit scores consider various factors from your current and past credit accounts, such as payment history, length of credit history, and total credit available.

Credit scores are generally classified as:

  • Very poor: 300–579
  • Fair: 580–669
  • Good: 670–739
  • Very good: 740–799
  • Exceptional: 800–850

A higher credit score means you are more likely to qualify for a loan with a lower interest rate.

The simple act of checking your credit score is one way you can improve your credit. If you notice a dip in your score, it may alert you to potential fraud or errors on your report. Checking your score monthly may help you catch issues early and get a head start on resolving them. You can check your scores through the major credit reporting agencies and through some financial advisor sites.

Check out the Federal Trade Commission website for more resources.

Impact of Interest Rate

Here’s an example of how the interest rate can affect your overall purchase (rates are determined by lenders and the market—these are for illustrative purposes only):

  • $10,000 car loan, poor credit rating, 10% interest, 60 months: payment = $212
    • Total amount paid back, including interest = $12,748
  • $10,000 car loan, very good credit rating, 3% interest, 60 months: payment = $180
    • Total amount paid back, including interest = $10,781
    • Total savings just from having a good credit rating: $1,967

Also, just for comparison purposes, if you have a high interest (23.99%) credit card with a $10,000 balance and you make minimum payments of $210 per month, it would take you 13 years to pay it off and the total payments would be about $32,000. Double the payment to $420, and you will have it paid off in just under 3 years, and the total principal plus interest will be less than $14,000.

One last note on credit

Sometimes credit can get the best of you, and the total amount you owe becomes overwhelming, and you’ll never be able to pay it off. If this becomes the case, the government allows you to file for bankruptcy, which is a legal process that discharges all eligible debt. The kinds of debt that aren’t usually discharged during a bankruptcy include student loans, back taxes, and child support.

However, bankruptcy leaves a deep scar on your credit history for many years. It’s a last resort. It’s better not to ever get that deep in debt in the first place, which means planning, good money management, meticulous budgeting, and spending discipline.

 

]]>
Major Purchases https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/major-purchases/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:54 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/major-purchases/ Read more »]]>
  • Articulate how to buy a home and other major purchases

 

Buying a Car

Some people have the means to buy a car for cash, so don’t assume you have to borrow to buy a car. Some people make monthly payments into a savings or investment account so that when it comes time to buy the next car, there is cash for the purchase.

However, most people get loans for a good portion of a major purchase like an automobile. When you are ready to buy your next (or first) car, you should take a good look at the pros and cons of buying new vs. buying used.

A blue Fiat.A new car will likely be more reliable than a used one, even though pre-owned cars are much more dependable than they used to be. If a new car breaks down, you can have it fixed for free under the included factory warranty—typically manufactures offer a warranty for the first 36,000 miles or three years.

Automakers offer attractive car-buying incentives, and new car loans usually have better interest rates than used car loans. Dealers offer plenty of incentives to lure buyers, such as cash rebates. In addition, a new car will have the latest technology, comfort, performance, and safety innovations.

Depreciation

Despite all those reasons to buy a new car, there is one glaring reason to avoid new cars if possible. It’s an economic term we use in accounting (although we define it slightly differently there) called depreciation.

Economic depreciation is defined as loss of value. The cold, hard truth is that if you bought a brand new car at the sticker price (dealers usually don’t haggle over price as much with a new car), drove it off the lot and then tried to sell it again a few days later, you’d be lucky to get 70% of your purchase price.

It used to be that buying a used car was quite a gamble, but newer used cars (say, less than 5 years old) can deliver more than 100,000 miles before needing major repairs. All cars require regular maintenance such as oil changes, tire rotation, brake jobs (so be sure to build that into your monthly budget), but you can drive today’s cars much farther in between these scheduled maintenance visits. Even tires and brake pads last much longer than before. Besides, insurance rates may be lower on a used car, and you’ll be less worried about that first ding in the paint.

In short, your best bet may be to buy a car that is three to five years old with low mileage, balancing the advantages of a new car with the advantages of a used one.

Unlike a credit card, which is considered unsecured financing, a car loan is secured, which means that the vehicle is pledged, by you, as collateral for the loan. That means if you default (stop making payments), the lender will send someone to your house to repossess the car. The lender will then sell the car at an auction, usually for a really low price, and you’ll still be on the hook for whatever balance of the loan the auction proceeds don’t cover. A repossession will also significantly harm your credit rating.

Buying a House

aerial shot of a suburban neighborhood of mid-sized houses.The other major life purchase you might make that will require secured financing is your home. A traditional home mortgage is usually 80% of the value of the home, requiring you to come up with the other 20% as a down payment, although there are some low down payment programs backed by the Federal Housing Administration (FHA) or the Veterans Administration (VA) or other government agencies. It’s important to make sure you don’t get in over your head and become “house poor,” meaning too much of your monthly take-home pay is being spent on housing. It’s easy to do. The best thing you can do to avoid getting in too deep is to shop around and to make sure you remove as much emotion from the purchase as you can—don’t tour houses out of your price range; it’s all too easy to fall in love and make poor financial decisions. Buy well within your means, even if it means settling for a small house in a less-prestigious neighborhood. You’ll be happier in the long run.

The good news is that unlike cars, which tend to decline in value quite rapidly, real estate (both the house and the land) tend to go up in value. A lot of people choose to buy a “starter home”—a smaller house, most likely not in their dream neighborhood. Let’s say Erik and Alex bought a little starter home together for $200,000 with a down payment of around $40,000. In five or six years, their house’s value may have gone up to $230,000, adding $30,000 in equity. If they find it’s time to move, they can use that equity as a down-payment on their next house.

A House as a Liability

Some financial experts consider major purchases, like a car and a house, as liabilities, not assets. As you will learn in accounting, assets, in the business sense, are resources that we own that produce revenue. So, an automobile used in a business, such as Uber or Lyft, would be an income-producing asset. You may need your vehicle to get back and forth to work, but still, you have to pay insurance, fuel, repairs and maintenance, and the monthly payment, if you have one. It pays, in the long run, to buy smart—don’t overspend and become car-poor, or house-poor.

A House as an Asset

A home can be an asset. When you retire, the equity in your home may be a resource you can tap into to pay expenses. Equity is simply the difference between what the home is worth and what you owe the bank. Many retirees sell the home they bought many years earlier and use the proceeds to fund travel or assisted care, and they move into a smaller home. Still, during your life, remember that, like an automobile, you will have expenses in maintaining and paying for a home, such as insurance, property taxes, painting, a new roof, plumbing repairs, yard work, aesthetic improvements, replacing the carpet or other flooring, and so on. Don’t forget to take these expenses into account as you plan to purchase your home.

]]>
Other Sources of Income https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/other-sources-of-income/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/other-sources-of-income/ Read more »]]>
  • Identify other potential sources of income available while attending school full or part time

 

In addition to federal financial aid, you might be eligible for financial assistance from other organizations, such as your state, non-profits, and your school. A bit of research and digging can unearth a treasure trove of resources.

Government Listings

There are state and federal programs you can access for funding in addition to the ones that you normally think of when you fill out your FAFSA. A partial list includes:

  • Special aid programs or additional aid eligibility for serving in the military or for being the spouse or child of a veteran
  • Education awards for community service with AmeriCorps
  • Educational and training vouchers for current and former foster care youth
  • Scholarships and loan repayment programs through various institutions:
    • Department of Health and Human Services Indian Health Service
    • National Institutes of Health
    • National Health Service Corps

If your financial aid office doesn’t have a comprehensive list available, a simple web search is a good place to start.

Scholarship Opportunities

A group of students at graduation.Many nonprofit and private organizations offer scholarships to help students pay for college or career school. This type of aid doesn’t need to be paid back, which can make a real difference in helping you manage your education expenses. Keep in mind that scholarships can be based on your academic merit, your specific talents, or your particular area of study.

Your school’s financial aid office may be able to direct you to a scholarship or aid foundation, and many schools have a single scholarship application that will work for multiple opportunities, saving you a lot of time and increasing your chances of getting more financial help.

Your College’s Financial Aid Office

Many schools have a pool of money set aside that allows them to offer their own grants and scholarships, as well as emergency funds for things like housing, supplies, and even living expenses. Fill out any applications your school requires for its own aid programs, and make sure you meet your school’s deadlines.

More Places to Look

Ideas for finding scholarship opportunities:

Savings Account

Some students are lucky enough to have a parent, grandparent, or another third party who has either transferred resources into a trust or bank account or a 529 college savings plan. However, those assets have to be reported on the FAFSA and may adversely affect the amount of financial aid awarded.

In addition, you, your parents, your spouse, and even your grandparents can take an early withdrawal from an Individual Retirement Account (IRA) to pay for qualified education expenses.

Normally, IRA withdrawals before age 59.5 result in a 10 percent early distribution penalty in addition to any regular income tax due, but education expenses are an exception. Again, as this is a tax issue, it pays to do some research into the exact current rules, and this is one place it’s a good idea to hire a qualified expert for advice on college funding.

Don’t Forget To Take Advantage of Tax Benefits

The American Opportunity Tax Credit (AOTC) provides a partially refundable tax credit worth up to $2,500 for the first four years of school as you work toward a degree or similar credential. (The refund number is based on a tuition, fees, and textbook expenses cost of up to $4,000.)

The Lifetime Learning Credit allows you to claim up to $2,000 per year for any college or career school tuition and fees and other expenses. Part of the AOTC is considered a “refundable” credit, which means that even if you don’t have a tax liability, you can still get a refund from the IRS. Tax credits can be a bit complicated, and the laws are subject to change, so it pays to do some research and/or consult with a qualified tax advisor.

You can watch this video from CNBC for additional tricks to pay for college.

]]>
Introduction to Financing the Present https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financing-the-present/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:53 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financing-the-present/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: use your knowledge of accounting to create a healthy financial picture for you and your family

After you graduate and get a job, you’ll want to start saving up for future milestones—maybe buying a house, raising a family, traveling, or providing a comfortable living for you and your loved ones. One of the most basic tools of financial planning is a budget, whether it’s for a business or your personal life.

four increasingly tall stacks of coins sitting next to a jar of coins. The stacks and jar all have seedlings growing out of them.Managing your money responsibly includes the responsible use of credit and financing, especially when it comes to major purchases such as a car or a house. In addition, you’ll want to make sure you are responsibly fulfilling your duties as a member of the larger community by paying your taxes on time.

Let’s move ahead so that you can gain a more detailed understanding of how to use your knowledge of accounting to create a healthy financial picture.

]]>
Financial Aid https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-aid/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/financial-aid/ Read more »]]>
  • Demonstrate an understanding of financial aid options

 

Seal of the United States Department of EducationFederal student aid administered by the Department of Education covers college expenses like tuition and fees, room and board, books and supplies, and transportation. Aid can also help pay for other related expenses, like a computer and dependent care. Federal student aid may also be available for studying at a school outside the United States, whether you’re studying abroad or getting your degree from an international school.

Common federal financial aid can be broken into four categories:

  • Grants: A variety of federal grants are available, including Pell Grants. With some exceptions, grants don’t have to be repaid.
  • Scholarships: Scholarships are typically awarded using a variety of factors, including, but not limited to, academic achievement, departmental and community involvement, employment experience, areas of study, and financial need.
  • Work-Study Jobs: The Federal Work-Study Program allows you to earn money to pay for school by working part-time.
  • Student Loans: When you receive a student loan, you are borrowing money to attend a college or career school. You must repay the loan as well as interest that accrues. It is important to understand your repayment options so you can successfully repay your loan.

To access federal financial aid, you must first fill out a Free Application for Federal Student Aid, or FAFSA. The process for doing so can be complicated, so let’s dive in!

A black woman stands at a whiteboard where she has written Who? How? When? Where? What? and Why?

When to File

You should file your FAFSA every year as early as possible, even if you only received student loans for the previous school year. According to savingforcollege.com:[1]

  • Students who file the FAFSA during the first three months tend to get double the grants, on average, of students who file the FAFSA later in the year.
  • More than two million students who don’t file the FAFSA would have qualified for a Federal Pell Grant—more than a third of non-applicants—and 1.2 million would have qualified for the maximum Federal Pell Grant.

A yearly planner focusing on the month of OctoberYou can file your FAFSA on or after October 1 of the calendar year prior to the academic year of enrollment. For example, to apply for financial aid for the 2022–2023 school year, you could file the FAFSA starting on October 1, 2021.

The last chance to file is no later than June 30 of the academic year or the last day of enrollment, whichever comes first. So the last date to file the 2021–2022 FAFSA  is June 30, 2022. You can technically go through your entire year at college before accessing the FAFSA form, but that’s not typically recommended.

This means that there may be two FAFSAs that can be filed at any one time, the FAFSA for the current academic year, and the FAFSA for the upcoming academic year. Make sure you are filing the correct one. During the overlap period, about 90% of students are applying for financial aid for the academic year that begins in the fall, not the current academic year.

If you plan on taking classes year-round, check with your school to determine which FAFSA application they use for summer sessions. For example, you may have filled out the 2021–2022 school year application, but if you take classes in August 2022, that may fall into the 2022–2023 school year depending on your school’s schedule.

Several states have FAFSA deadlines in December, January, February, and March, while other states award state grants on a first-come, first-served basis or until the money runs out. Some colleges have early deadlines, sometimes called priority deadlines, during which more institutional financial aid is available. Check the FAFSA website (fafsa.ed.gov) and consult with the financial aid offices of the colleges where you are applying.

FAFSA Application Timing

To summarize:

  • October 1, 2021: First date you can file your FAFSA for the 2022–2023 school year
  • Late spring, 2021: the 2020–2021 school year ends, but the 2020–2021 FAFSA is still available until June 30
  • Fall 2021: school year begins; financial aid is awarded based on your 2021–2022 FAFSA, but it’s also time to file your 2022–2023 FAFSA
  • Late spring 2022: school year ends—the last possible chance to access FAFSA is June 30, 2022

Even some federal student aid, such as campus-based aid, can be depleted. Each college gets a fixed allocation of Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants (FSEOG) and Federal Work-Study (FWS) funding. When the money is fully awarded, there is no more money available.

How to File

File your FAFSA online (or on the mobile version app called myStudentAid). The first step is to apply for your username and password (FSA ID). The student and parents should each get their own FSA ID. Do not share your FSA ID with anyone.

A man with a brown skin tone sits in front of a laptop. He is writing in a notebook.Most families can complete the FAFSA in 30–60 minutes, including the time needed to gather documents, such as Social Security numbers (for parents and the student), your family’s most recent financial account statements, and the student’s driver’s license number, among others. You may be able to use an IRS Retrieval Tool to download your prior-year tax information to the FAFSA.

You will receive a Student Aid Report (SAR) after you file the FAFSA. Sometimes the report is generated and made accessible immediately, but it can take up to a few weeks. Your SAR depends on the accurate completion and filing of your FAFSA. You will get faster results if you file online, sign the FAFSA with an FSA ID, and provide your email address on the FAFSA. The SAR provides an opportunity to correct errors on the FAFSA. The SAR also includes the expected family contribution (EFC), a measure of the family’s financial ability to pay for college.

The EFC is calculated using a federal financial aid formula called the federal need analysis methodology, which is based on the student and parent income and assets and various demographic questions. The financial aid formula is heavily weighted toward income and cash flow.

Financial aid funds, including federal student aid, are distributed through the college financial aid office. There may be an automatic 30-day delay for disbursement of student loan funds for first-time, first-year federal student loan borrowers. Financial aid is first applied to tuition and fees and if the student is living in college housing, then to room and board. Credit balances will be “refunded” to the student within 14 days and can be used to cover other college costs, such as textbooks and transportation.

If your total award doesn’t cover all your costs, you will need to find some other way to pay for the deficiency. In the following sections, we’ll discuss some of these options, like part-time jobs, private loans, savings accounts, scholarships, tax credits, and support from family members.

Getting Assistance

As the name suggests, the FAFSA is a free form. There is no need to pay anybody for help filing the FAFSA. Here are some ways you can get free help filling out the form:

  1. Students and parents who need help with the FAFSA can call the Federal Student Aid Information Center (FSAIC) at 1-800-4-FED-AID (1-800-433-3243). The FSAIC is a free hotline sponsored by the U.S. Department of Education.
  2. In addition, The National College Access Network (NCAN) runs a website called Form Your Future that provides information about events where financial aid professionals provide free help completing the FAFSA.
  3. You can also send email to FederalStudentAidCustomerService@ed.gov, but don’t include private personal information in the email message.
  4. Help information is also available.

For problems involving the FSA ID, students and parents can call 1-800-557-7394.

Individuals who are hearing impaired can call the FSAIC by TTY at 1-800-730-8913.

After You File

The US Department of Education will select some FAFSA forms for audit. As part of this verification process, you may be asked to provide documentation for some of the items on your application. Any data elements that are transferred from the IRS are not subject to verification, so if you used the IRS Data Retrieval Tool to transfer information from your federal income tax returns into the FAFSA, you won’t have to provide copies of your W-2s and other tax information.

If your ability to pay for college is affected by special circumstances, such as a change in income or unusual family financial circumstances, you can appeal for more financial aid. Contact the college’s financial aid office for information about how to file an appeal.

Try using the FAFSA4caster to estimate your eligibility for federal student aid.Also, the Federal Student Aid Office of the Department of Education offers some resources to help you determine the costs of college.


  1. What is the FAFSA? Savingforcollege.com. (Accessed May 19, 2020)
]]>
Working While Studying https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/working-while-studying/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:52 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/working-while-studying/ Read more »]]>
  • Recognize the pros and cons of working while studying

 

A black person with a short haircut sits at a computer looking through their email inbox.

According to research conducted by the Georgetown University Center on Education and the Workforce in 2015, about 14 million college students are working. The study further reveals that over the past 25 years, more than 70% of college students have worked while attending college.[1]

Other studies have shown that some students have to work longer hours than others in order to pay living expenses as well as tuition and supplies, and those students have a harder time keeping grades up. Even so, there are some immediate tangible benefits to working while you are in school—as well as some longer-term intangible benefits.

Benefits of Working in College

Reducing Debt

The most obvious benefit of working your way through college is that it can drastically reduce the amount of money in student loans you have to take out. The federal government offers subsidized loans that qualify for deferred interest and payments, as well as unsubsidized loans. In addition, there are private loans available for students who don’t qualify for the federal loans but still need money to pay for college. The good news is that many of the loans are easy to get. The bad news is that they can take a long time to pay off and can become a burden after you graduate. By working, you can avoid becoming one of those college graduates with a lifetime of debt to repay.

Employer Benefits

In addition, employers may offer health and retirement benefits, and some employers offer tuition assistance, especially if the degree you are pursuing is related to your current job. There are some tax advantages: employers are allowed to provide up to $5,250 in educational expenses as a tax-free fringe benefit to their employees for both undergraduate and graduate-level courses. For instance, UPS offers part-time employees up to $5,250 in tuition assistance per year, up to a lifetime maximum of $25,000. [2]

Time Management

An apple watch on a person's arm.Time management is a crucial professional skill, especially for business majors. You may find yourself in a fast-paced and hectic work environment. There is some anecdotal evidence that some students perform better when they have a job because they are forced to  plan their time more carefully. Additionally, you may come across certain tasks that are difficult to perform or find yourself up against tight deadlines, giving you the opportunity to develop good time-management and problem-solving skills.

Financial Management

There’s no better way to learn to manage your finances than to start earning money yourself. Having a job will allow you to take responsibility for your personal expenses, such as rent and utilities, cell phone, transportation, entertainment, and other items. You can start by creating a spending plan for your earnings, tracking how much you bring in versus how much you spend, and saving money for an emergency.

Work Experience

Working while studying is much like on-the-job training where you get paid to learn. The job experience that you get will add value to your resume. Even if the job isn’t directly related to your specific field of study, having prior job experience will work in your favor. For example, you could work as a tutor in the math or writing lab, or as a barista in a campus coffee shop, or as an intern in a campus health or women’s center. All of these types of experience make you more employable.

Networking

Two business associates meeting at a cafe.One of the crucial benefits of working while in college is that you become a part of professional networks that can open up a world of opportunities for you. After you graduate, these networks can help you land a good job. You never know who among your acquaintances can be the key to your dream job. Networking isn’t just a job search strategy; it is a critical career development enrichment strategy. It broadens your horizons beyond your college campus and can help guide your post-degree career.

Part-Time Work

You may be lucky enough to find a part-time job that fits around your school schedule or allows flexibility and still provides you with the income you need to balance your budget. Another good way to offset your tuition and to reduce your reliance on student loans is to pick up some flexible work that you can do from home, such as:

  • Freelance writer
  • Web designer
  • Tutor
  • Dog walker

Keep in mind as well that in addition to work-study jobs that are funded as part of your financial aid award, there are often jobs available on campus that are paid from state, local, or college funds.

Internships

Internships can boost your resume, help you network, lead to a job, provide valuable experience, and give you some cash. Internships can be paid, unpaid, for credit only, or combinations of those. Some internships are sponsored by or supported by your college, and others are completely independent. Watch for announcements in your classes, and check out bulletin boards and your college’s placement office. Good internships get snatched up quickly, so be diligent and persistent.

 


Working while going to school takes discipline and dedication. Above all, remember to keep your eyes on the prize: completing your college education and preparing yourself for the future. In addition, make sure you take care of yourself—exercise, eat right, get plenty of rest, and be sure to pay attention to your work/life/school balance. In particular, don’t take on more than is humanly possible.


  1. Learning While Earning: The New Normal, Georgetown University Center on Education and the Workforce (Accessed May 19, 2020)
  2. https://www.estudentloan.com/blog/10-companies-will-help-pay-college
]]>
Why It Matters: Personal Accounting https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-personal-accounting/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:51 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/why-it-matters-personal-accounting/ Read more »]]> Why learn how to manage personal accounting?

Five pink piggy banks in a rowYou will probably find that of all the business knowledge you have acquired or will learn, the study of accounting will be the most useful. Your financial and economic decisions as a student and consumer already involve accounting information. While it’s true that accounting is most typically viewed as business activity, you’re probably performing some accounting tasks already, such as:

  • Applying for financial aid
  • Balancing work and school (present needs with future goals)
  • Finding and managing other sources of income while you are in school
  • Budgeting
  • Filing income tax returns
  • Understanding credit
  • Financing a place to live
  • Investing for your future (retirement planning)

According to a 2018 survey of more than 1,000 U.S. adults by mobile-banking company Varo Money, 85 percent say they “sometimes” feel stressed about money, and a full 30 percent say they’re “constantly” stressed about their finances.[1] Additionally, the COVID-19 pandemic has caused additional financial stress in almost 9 out of every 10 Americans.[2]

In this module, you’ll be learning about how accounting relates to financing your education, financing the present, and financing the future. If you pay attention to these lessons and apply them in your life, you’ll more likely than not live a financially secure life without the stress that comes from worrying about money all the time.


]]>
Introduction to Financing Your Education https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financing-your-education/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:51 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/introduction-to-financing-your-education/ Read more »]]> What you’ll learn to do: use your knowledge of accounting to garner resources to fund your education

One of the first steps everyone should take in financing their education is to fill out a “Free Application for Federal Student Aid” (FAFSA). The FAFSA allows you to access:

  • Grants
  • Scholarships
  • Work-Study/Student Employment
  • Student Loans

You can view the transcript for “Types of Federal Student Aid” here (opens in new window).

 

In addition, working during college can be highly advantageous for you—not only from a monetary perspective, but also to manage your time and finances, gain valuable experience, and develop useful networks. Furthermore, you will become aware of different management styles.

In addition to the kinds of financial aid that you can access through the FAFSA, with a bit of research and some creative thinking, you can find other sources of income that will help offset the cost of your education, such as scholarships or refundable tax credits. Being able to identify and access these options can reduce your need to work and to borrow, allowing you to concentrate more fully on your studies.

Let’s move ahead so that you can gain a more detailed understanding of how to use your knowledge of accounting to garner resources to fund your education.

References

Federal Student Aid. “Types of Financial Aid.” US Department of Education.

]]>
OHM Assessments https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/ohm-assessments/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:49 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/ohm-assessments/ Read more »]]> image

The assessments included in this course are organized by module and are aligned to specific learning outcomes. For each module, you will find readiness quizzes, practice problems, and summative assessments, all fully customizable by authorized faculty members. Students access these assessments through an OHM course. Depending on the instructor’s preference, students may access OHM courses through the institution’s learning management system (Canvas, Blackboard, etc.) or else through direct log-in to OHM.

Click here to access OHM assessments for this course: OHM Financial Accounting

]]>
Accessibility Guide https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accessibility-guide/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:49 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/accessibility-guide/ Read more »]]> Financial Accounting and Accessibility

At Lumen, our goal is to make all our materials accessible rather than creating a subset of course materials that meet accessibility requirements. Our Financial Accounting course was built with accessibility considered upfront as an integral part of the course design. While accessibility spans a broad range of abilities and needs, we chose to focus the design and content authoring decisions in this course on screen reader accessibility. This decision led to a focus on screen reader navigation elements, alternative text for images, and displaying accounting tables using consistent and predictable HTML.

Consistent Navigation

Consistent and simple navigation for students using screen reader technology is core to the authoring choices made in Financial Accounting. Course content has been authored using unique and descriptive header elements, unique and descriptive hyperlinks, images have appropriate alternative text, and all media is accurately captioned with a corresponding transcription available.

Finally, since Financial Accounting is delivered using both Waymaker and Lumen OHM, special considerations were taken to ensure consistency and predictability in the presentation of the many financial accounting tables throughout the course.

Screen Reader Compatible Accounting Tables

This course displays hundreds of accounting tables in the course content and in the course assessments. In order to provide a consistent and accessible experience in both the Waymaker and OHM platforms, shared accounting table templates were created using screen reader friendly markup.

Screen Reader Accessibility Table Features

HTML tables in Waymaker course content have accessibility features that aim at creating an equivalent experience for students using screen readers.

Use of Single and Double Line in Financial Accounting Tables

Statement of cash flows example showing the use of single and double lines in the financial accounting tables.
Figure 1. Statement of Cash Flows example

The discipline specific practice of using single and double lines in financial accounting tables to indicate subtotals and grand totals are displayed visually and for screen readers in Financial Accounting. The single and double lines are displayed visually using CSS and displayed for screen readers using ARIA. Sighted students will see a single or double line, and students using screen reader technology will hear the phrase “Single Line” or “Double Line” read aloud to them at the appropriate place in the accounting table.

Minimizing Additional Noise for Screen Reader

It’s standard practice to avoid leaving blank cells in HTML tables for screen reader accessibility. However, the financial accounting tables in this course have many blank cells. The team decided to opt for leaving cells blank with no additional ARIA mark-up for screen reader students, with the understanding that adding an ARIA label “no value” would likely result in a worse student experience than leaving those table cells blank.

Strike-through and Highlight Features

Strike-through and highlighting are used in some Waymaker tables throughout the course for pedagogical purposes. These visual cues are also indicated when a user accesses this content with a screen reader with the terms “start of stricken text” and “end of stricken text”, and “start of [color] highlight” and “end of [color] highlight”.

Use of Color

Color coding is used in some content in the course for pedagogical purposes. These colors were chosen specifically with color blindness accessibility in mind, to ensure that the widest range of color perception in students would be served by the course content. To illustrate this point, please refer to the images below for an approximation of how these colors are perceived by people with varying color blindness. These sample screenshots were gathered using Waymaker course content and Color Oracle, one of many web tools used to simulate the different types of color blindness that impacts color perception.

A LIFO table displaying the original three colors used in color highlighting.
Figure 2. Original colors

 

A LIFO table displaying the three colors used in color highlighting displayed with a simulation of Deuteranopia, a common color blindness
Figure 3. Deuteranopia (Common)

 

A LIFO table displaying the three colors used in color highlighting displayed with a simulation of Protanopia, a rare color blindness
Figure 4. Protanopia (Rare)

 

A LIFO table displaying the three colors used in color highlighting displayed with a simulation of Tritanopia, a very rare color blindness
Figure 5. Tritanopia

 

Accessibility Testing

Lumen tests using the following combinations of operating system, screen reader, and web browsers per WebAIM’s recommended pairings for screen readers and web browsers.

  • Windows OS with NVDA and Firefox
  • Windows OS with JAWS and Google Chrome
]]>
Case Studies https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/case-studies/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/case-studies/ Read more »]]> icon of a teacher talking to a student

A set of in-class activities is available for some of the modules in this course, to support face-to-face and hybrid classes. These are not already built into the assignment tool of your learning management system (Canvas, Blackboard, etc.), but they can be downloaded for use or previewed, below:

]]>
Interactives https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/interactives/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:48 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/interactives/ Read more »]]> icon of a finger pressing a button

This course includes many interactive opportunities where students can strengthen their knowledge and practice using the concepts taught in the course. Research has shown that this type of learn-by-doing approach has a significant positive impact on learning. Interactive opportunities come in multiple forms:

Embedded Questions

Practice questions appear on most pages in the course, embedded in the main text of the page. The purpose of these questions is different than questions on self-checks or quizzes, which are designed to see if the student has mastered the concept. Instead, practice questions allow students to learn by interacting with the concepts they are learning about. For example, a practice question might present a student with a scenario and ask them to apply the concept that they have just read about.

These practice questions do not count for a grade, and getting the answer “wrong” can be just as valuable to the learning process as answering correctly, as practice questions often address common student misconceptions and give students immediate feedback intended to correct those misconceptions.

Practice Pages

Additionally, there are dedicated practice pages provided for learning outcomes that are particularly challenging. The problems on these pages are algorithmically generated, and thus allow students to practice as many times as they need to.

]]>
PowerPoints https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/powerpoints/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/powerpoints/ Read more »]]> icon of a presentation screen

A full set of PowerPoint decks is provided for download below. All decks are tightly aligned to the modules in this course. Since they are openly licensed, you are welcome to retain, reuse, revise, remix, and redistribute as desired.

These PowerPoint files are accessible. If you do revise them, make sure to follow these guidelines for creating accessible PowerPoints.

Use the following link to download all PowerPoint decks in a single .zip file (30.5 MB), or download each individual deck below:

]]>
Assignments https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignments/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:47 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/assignments/ Read more »]]> icon of a pencil cup

The assignments in this course are openly licensed, and are available as-is, or can be modified to suit your students’ needs. Answer keys are available to faculty who adopt Lumen Learning courses with paid support. This approach helps us protect the academic integrity of these materials by ensuring they are shared only with authorized and institution-affiliated faculty and staff.

If you import this course into your learning management system (Blackboard, Canvas, etc.), the assignments will automatically be loaded into the assignment tool.

You can view them below or throughout the course.

Discussions

The following discussion assignments will also be preloaded (into the discussion-board tool) in your learning management system if you import the course. They can be used as is, modified, or removed. You can view them below or throughout the course.

Alternative Excel-Based Assignments

For Modules 3–15, additional excel-based assignments are available below.

Module 3: Recording Business Transactions

Module 4: The Accounting Cycle

Module 5: Accounting for Cash

Module 6: Receivables and Revenue

Module 7: Merchandising Operations

Module 8: Inventory Valuation Methods

Module 9: Property, Plant, and Equipment

Module 10: Other Assets

Module 11: Current Liabilities

Module 12: Non-Current Liabilities

Module 13: Accounting for Corporations

Module 14: Statement of Cash Flows

Module 15: Financial Statement Analysis

Review Problems

There are also three unit review assignments and a final review. These reviews include a document which sets up the problems and an excel worksheet.

Unit 1 Review Problem (After Module 6)

Unit 2 Review Problem (After Module 8)

Unit 3 Review Problem (After Module 9)

Final Review (After Module 15)

]]>
Course Resources Overview https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/course-resources-overview/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:46 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/course-resources-overview/ Read more »]]> icon of a row of books

We’ve seen overwhelming demand for high quality, openly-licensed course materials, including supplemental resources to enrich teaching and learning and to make life easier for instructors. To support this need, we’ve developed and curated faculty resources to use with this course.

Free and Open Supplemental Materials

On the following pages, you will find supplemental resources that are freely available to use with the interactive learning materials for this course. Since these resources are openly licensed, you may use them as is or adapt them to your needs.

Continuously Improving Learning Materials

Are you interested in collaborating with us to make these course materials better? We use learning data to identify where content improvements are needed, and then we invite faculty and subject matter experts to work with us developing continuous improvements aimed at increasing learning.

Learn more from this blog post, or sign up here to join our continuous improvement mailing list and stay up to date about upcoming OER hackathons and other continuous improvement activities.

]]>
Offline Content Access https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/offline-content-access/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:46 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/offline-content-access/ Read more »]]> icon of an e-reader

Lumen makes significant investments to ensure our digital courseware is more than just a textbook, allowing students to learn by doing using interactive content designed to give them frequent practice, coupled with feedback on their understanding of the learning outcomes.

The offline content version offers an inferior learning experience compared to our digital courseware. It does not include interactive content such as practice questions, simulations, videos, self-assessment exercises, or quizzes. For these reasons, we do not recommend using the textbook in the offline form. The offline version should be used as a backup for situations where a student does not have online access, rather than as the primary textbook.

How do I view an epub?

Depending on the device and operating system you’re using, you may already have an app that can view epubs, or you may need to download a free one.

Here are our recommendations:

Desktops/Laptops

Smartphones/Tablets

Why do we offer epub and not pdf?

While the epub and pdf formats both allow you to view content offline, the epub format offers a couple of key advantages over pdf:

  • Mobile Friendly: content in epub document is “reflowable.” That means that epub documents are able to adjust their presentation to the device that the student is using, and resize to fit the screen. This is especially important when students are consuming content on mobile devices.
  • Accessible: the reflowable content in epub documents makes them better for visually impaired students. In addition, the technology underlying epub documents enables much better compatibility with screen readers than is the case for pdf documents.
]]>
Faculty & Technical Support https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/faculty-and-technical-support/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:44 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/faculty-and-technical-support/ Read more »]]> icon of two dialog boxes; one asking a question the other showing an elipsis

Need more information about this course? Have questions about faculty resources? Can’t find what you’re looking for? Experiencing technical difficulties?

We’re here to help! Take advantage of the following Lumen customer-support resources:

]]>
Faculty Resources Overview https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/faculty-resources-overview/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:43 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/faculty-resources-overview/ Read more »]]> icon of a row of books

Faculty resources are materials visible only to course instructors. A majority of helpful faculty resources are already included under Course Resources, but there are some additional resources available to customers.

Additional Faculty Resources

Additional learning tools and support services are available to faculty who adopt Lumen Learning courses with paid support. For some courses, there are also some combination of summative assessments, answer keys, solutions manuals, or other materials shared only with authorized instructors in order to protect academic integrity.

Click here to learn more about additional instructor tools and resources available to faculty who adopt Lumen-supported courseware. Information about pricing and payment options is available on this page. Lumen’s low-cost support fees replace the cost of expensive textbooks and may be paid by students or by the institution directly.

]]>
Course Contents at a Glance https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/course-contents-at-a-glance/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/course-contents-at-a-glance/ Read more »]]> an icon of a pair of binoculars

The following list shows a summary of the topics covered in this course. To see all of the course pages, visit the Table of Contents.

Module 0: Personal Accounting

  • Financing Your Education
  • Financing the Present
  • Financing the Future

Module 1: The Role of Accounting in Business

  • Accounting Defined
  • Accounting Information
  • The Basic Accounting Equation
  • Accounting in Business
  • Challenges in Accounting

Module 2: Accounting Principles

  • Financial Accounting Standards in the United States
  • Fundamental Concepts of US Accounting Standards
  • Accrual Basis Accounting
  • International Financial Reporting Standards

Module 3: Recording Business Transactions

  • Double-Entry Bookkeeping
  • Journals and Ledgers
  • The Recording Process

Module 4: Completing the Accounting Cycle

  • The Adjusting Process
  • Creating Adjusting Journal Entries
  • Preparing an Adjusted Trial Balance
  • Preparing Financial Statements
  • Closing the Books

Module 5: Accounting for Cash

  • Establishing Internal Controls
  • Accounting for Petty Cash
  • Preparing a Bank Reconciliation
  • Accounting for Credit Card Transactions
  • Financial Statement Presentation

Module 6: Receivables and Revenue

  • Revenue Recognition
  • Uncollectible Accounts
  • Notes Receivable
  • Reporting Receivables on the Financial Statements

Module 7: Merchandising Operations

  • Merchandising Business
  • Periodic Inventory System
  • Perpetual Inventory System
  • Controls over Inventory

Module 8: Inventory Valuation Methods

  • Inventory Cost Flow Assumptions
  • Inventory Cost Methods
  • Financial Statement Presentation

Module 9: Property, Plant, and Equipment

  • Plant Assets
  • Depreciation Expense
  • Journalizing Asset Disposal
  • Reporting PP&E

Module 10: Other Assets

  • Natural Resources
  • Intangible Assets
  • Other Current and Noncurrent Assets
  • Reporting Other Assets

Module 11: Current Liabilities

  • Current Liabilities
  • Accounts Payable
  • Payroll
  • Other Current Liabilities
  • Reporting Current Liabilities

Module 12: Non-Current Liabilities

  • Long-term Financing
  • Bonds Payable
  • Leases
  • Reporting Long-Term Liabilities

Module 13: Accounting for Corporations

  • Corporations
  • Capital Stock Transactions
  • Distribution of Earnings
  • Financial Statement Presentation

Module 14: Statement of Cash Flows

  • Statement of Cash Flows
  • Indirect Method of Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows
  • Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows

Module 15: Financial Statement Analysis

  • Objectives of Financial Statement Analysis
  • Liquidity Measures
  • Operating Efficiency Measures
  • Measures of Profitability
  • Measures of Solvency
  • Comparative Analysis of Financial Statements
]]>
Learning Outcomes https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/learning-outcomes/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:42 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/learning-outcomes/ Read more »]]> icon of a magnifying glass over a list

The content, assignments, and assessments for Financial Accounting are aligned to the following learning outcomes. A full list of course learning outcomes can be viewed here: Financial Accounting Learning Outcomes.

Module 0: Discuss the importance of accounting principles in your personal life

  • 0.1 Use your knowledge of accounting to garner resources to fund your education
  • 0.2 Use your knowledge of accounting to create a healthy financial picture for you and your family
  • 0.3 Use your knowledge of accounting to finance your retirement and leave a legacy for your loved ones

Module 1: Explain the role of accounting in business

  • 1.1 Define accounting and explain its history
  • 1.2 Identify the ways we use accounting
  • 1.3 State the accounting equation
  • 1.4 Explain the effect of transactions on the accounting equation
  • 1.5 Identify challenges in accounting

Module 2: Explain the basic principles of accounting

  • 2.1 Describe organizations and rules that govern accounting
  • 2.2 Identify fundamental concepts of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
  • 2.3 Identify fundamental principles of accrual based accounting
  • 2.4 Explain the relationship between the U.S. and international accounting standards

Module 3: Understand double-entry accounting

  • 3.1 Identify the basic reporting structure of accounting information
  • 3.2 Identify the accounting books of record
  • 3.3 Account for business transactions using double-entry bookkeeping

Module 4: Describe the complete accounting cycle

  • 4.1 Describe the process of making adjusting journal entries
  • 4.2 Create adjusting journal entries
  • 4.3 Creating the adjusted trial balance
  • 4.4 Use an adjusted trial balance to prepare financial statements
  • 4.5 Prepare and post closing entries

Module 5: Describe the accounting and reporting of cash and cash equivalents

  • 5.1 Explain the concept of internal control over cash
  • 5.2 Establish and maintain a petty cash system
  • 5.3 Recognize the significance of the bank reconciliation as an internal control
  • 5.4 Compare methods of recording credit card transactions
  • 5.5 Present cash and cash equivalents on the financial statements

Module 6: Describe the accounting and reporting of receivables and revenues

  • 6.1 Recognize revenue received on account
  • 6.2 Understand accounting for uncollectible accounts 
  • 6.3 Account for notes receivable
  • 6.4 Describe the proper financial statement presentation of receivables

Module 7: Describe the accounting and reporting of purchases and sales of merchandise

  • 7.1 Identify issues unique to merchandising companies
  • 7.2 Accounting for inventory under the periodic method
  • 7.3 Accounting for inventory under the perpetual method

Module 8: Describe the accounting and reporting of inventory

  • 8.1 Establish the cost of items in inventory
  • 8.2 Apply the conservatism principle to inventory costing
  • 8.3 Demonstrate proper financial statement presentation of inventory and cost of goods sold

Module 9: Describe the accounting and reporting of property, plant, and equipment

  • 9.1 Identify property, plant, and equipment
  • 9.2 Compute depreciation expense on plant assets
  • 9.3 Journalize entries for disposal of assets
  • 9.4 Recognize proper financial presentation of property, plant, and equipment

Module 10: Describe the accounting and reporting of other current and noncurrent assets

  • 10.1 Accounting for natural resources
  • 10.2 Accounting for intangibles
  • 10.3 Accounting for other assets
  • 10.4 Present financial information for other assets

Module 11: Describe the accounting and reporting of current liabilities

  • 11.1 Define current liabilities
  • 11.2 Accounting for trade accounts payable
  • 11.3 Describe payroll accounting
  • 11.4 Identify other current liabilities
  • 11.5 Illustrate proper reporting of current liabilities

Module 12: Describe the accounting and reporting of non-current liabilities

  • 12.1 Recognize long-term debt financing options
  • 12.2 Demonstrate an understanding of bonds payable
  • 12.3 Understand accounting for leases
  • 12.4 Illustrate proper reporting of non-current liabilities

Module 13: Describe the accounting and reporting concepts unique to corporations

  • 13.1 Describe the corporate form of doing business
  • 13.2 Account for issuance of Stock
  • 13.3 Account for distributions to shareholders
  • 13.4 Illustrate financial statement presentation of stockholder’s equity

Module 14: Prepare a Statement of Cash Flows

  • 14.1 Define cash flows and the purpose of the Statement of Cash Flows
  • 14.2 Understand how a statement of Cash Flows is prepared using the indirect method
  • 14.3 Prepare a Statement of Cash Flow

Module 15: Compare financial statements and analyze performance

  • 15.1 Describe how financial statements are used to analyze a business
  • 15.2 Calculate ratios that indicate a company’s ability to pay short-term debt
  • 15.3 Calculate ratios that indicate a company’s operating efficiency
  • 15.4 Calculate ratios that analyze a company’s earnings performance
  • 15.5 Calculate ratios that analyze a company’s long-term debt-paying ability
  • 15.6 Compare financial statements: intercompany and intracompany
]]>
About This Course https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/coming-soon-about-these-course-materials/ Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:45:41 +0000 https://content.one.lumenlearning.com/financialaccounting/chapter/coming-soon-about-these-course-materials/ Read more »]]> In Financial Accounting, students learn the basic accounting principles, preparing them for a career in business or as the first course in their preparation to become an accountant.

This course starts out teaching with a focus on small, sole-proprietorships providing a service, and gradually layers accounting practices from the most basic to the more complex accounting practices recommended for large companies. This course also includes an optional module focusing on “personal accounting,” which helps students bridge the gap between accounting for their personal finances and accounting for business.

Course Improvements

We believe in making continuous improvements to our courses in order to enhance and facilitate student learning. This newest version of the course includes a vast number of data-driven improvements to assessment questions and text content in order to better illustrate, clarify, and evaluate concepts.

Contributors

This course was developed by Lumen Learning with significant contributions by:

Primary Content Authors
Joe Cooke, Santa Fe Community College
Mike Zerrahn, Clinton Community College (SUNY)
Cindy Moore, Ranger College
Robert Danielson, Saint Mary’s College of California
Debra Porter, Tidewater Community College
Pamela Pirog, Housatonic Community College

Tyler Alonso, student at The College of New Jersey

About Lumen

Lumen Learning courseware is based on open educational resources (OER). When we can find well designed, effective OER that are appropriately licensed, we use them in our courseware. When we can’t find pre-existing OER, we create original content and license it as OER (under a Creative Commons Attribution license).

Lumen’s authoring process doesn’t end when our courseware is released. Our choice to adopt open educational resources means that we have the copyright permissions necessary to engage in continuous improvement of our learning content. Consequently, our courses are continually being revised and updated. Errata reported for our courseware are fixed in a matter of days, as opposed to the traditional model in which errors persist until the next “edition” is printed (often a year or more). Students and faculty can suggest improvements to our courses directly from within the courseware as they use it. And we conduct regular analyses to determine where students are struggling the most in our courseware, and make improvements that specifically target these areas.

Given our unique approach, our list of authors and other contributors may look different than the lists you are used to seeing. We provide both a list of the primary content authors (the people involved in the initial creation of the course) and a list of everyone who has contributed suggestions and other improvements to the course since it was first released. We invite you to join us as we create courseware that supports student learning more effectively each semester.

If you’d like to connect with us to learn more about adopting this course, please Contact Us.

You can also make an appointment for OER Office Hours to connect virtually with a live Lumen expert about any question you may have.

]]>